Flight Simulation Training Device Initial and Continuing Qualification and Use, 26478-26786 [08-1183]
Download as PDF
26478
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
Federal Aviation Administration
14 CFR Part 60
[Docket No. FAA–2002–12461; Amendment
No. 60–3]
RIN 2120–AJ12
Flight Simulation Training Device
Initial and Continuing Qualification and
Use
Federal Aviation
Administration (FAA), DOT.
ACTION: Final rule.
AGENCY:
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
SUMMARY: This action amends the
Qualification Performance Standards
(QPS) for flight simulation training
devices (FSTD) to provide greater
harmonization with international
standards for simulation. In addition,
the rule adds a new level of simulation
for helicopter flight training devices
(FTD) and establishes FSTD Directive 1,
which requires all existing FSTD airport
models that are beyond the number of
airport models required for qualification
to meet specified requirements. The
intended effect of this rule is to ensure
that the flight training and testing
environment is accurate and realistic.
Except for the requirements of FSTD
Directive 1, these technical
requirements do not apply to simulators
qualified before May 30, 2008. This rule
results in minimal to no cost increases
for manufacturers and sponsors.
DATES: These amendments become
effective May 30, 2008.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: For
technical questions concerning this final
rule, contact Edward Cook, Air
Transportation Division (AFS–200),
Flight Standards Service, Federal
Aviation Administration, 100 Hartsfield
Centre Parkway, Suite 400, Atlanta, GA
30354; telephone: 404–832–4700; email: Edward.D.Cook@faa.gov. For legal
questions concerning this final rule,
contact Anne Bechdolt, Office of Chief
Counsel (AGC–200), Federal Aviation
Administration, 800 Independence
Avenue, SW., Washington, DC 20591;
telephone 202–267–7230; e-mail:
Anne.Bechdolt@faa.gov.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Authority for This Rulemaking
This rulemaking is promulgated
under the authority described in 49
U.S.C. 44701. Under that section, the
FAA is charged with regulating air
commerce in a way that best promotes
safety of civil aircraft.
Table of Contents
I. Background
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
A. Summary of the NPRM
B. Summary of the Final Rule
C. Summary of Comments
II. Discussion of the Final Rule and
Comments
A. Administrative
B. Simulator Qualification and Evaluation
C. FSTD Testing: Objective and Subjective
1. General
2. Visual Systems
3. Motion or Vibration Requirements
4. Sound Requirements
D. Helicopters
E. Quality Management System (QMS)
F. Miscellaneous
III. Regulatory Evaluation, Regulatory
Flexibility Determination, International
Trade Impact Assessment, and Unfunded
Mandates Assessment
IV. The Amendment
I. Background
On October 30, 2006, the FAA
published Title 14, Code of Federal
Regulations, Part 60, with an effective
date of October 30, 2007 (71 FR 63392).
The intent of the rule was to promote
standardization and accountability for
FSTD maintenance, qualification, and
evaluation. The regulation codified the
standards contained in advisory
circulars (ACs) and implemented the
Qualification Performance Standards
(QPS) appendices format. The QPS
appendices allow regulatory
requirements and corresponding
information to be presented in one
location. The QPS appendices format
promotes ease of use and greater insight
about the FAA’s intent behind the
regulation and the required and
approved methods of compliance. On
October 22, 2007 (72 FR 59598), the
FAA delayed the effective date of part
60 to coincide with the effective date of
this final rule, which revises the
appendices of part 60 that were
originally published on October 30,
2006.
A. Summary of the Notice of Proposed
Rulemaking (NPRM)
On October 22, 2007, the FAA
published an NPRM (72 FR 59600) to
revise the QPS appendices. The primary
purpose of the NPRM was to ensure that
the flight training and testing
environment is accurate and realistic
and to provide greater harmonization
with the international standards
documents for simulation issued by the
Joint Aviation Authority (JAA) (JAR–
STD 1A, Aeroplanes, and JAR–STD 1H,
Helicopters), and the International Civil
Aviation Organization (ICAO) (Doc
9625–AN/938, as amended, Manual of
Criteria for the Qualification of Flight
Simulators). The proposed requirements
were expected to reduce expenses and
workload for simulator sponsors by
eliminating conflicts between the U.S.
PO 00000
Frm 00002
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
standards and the standards of other
civil aviation authorities. The proposed
amendments incorporated technological
advances in simulation and
standardized the initial and continuing
qualification requirements for FSTDs to
harmonize with the international
standards documents. The comment
period for the NPRM closed December
21, 2007.
B. Summary of the Final Rule
This final rule:
• Provides a listing of the tasks for
which a simulator may be qualified.
• Requires, during aircraft
certification testing, the collection of
objective test data for specific FSTD
functions, including: Idle and
emergency descents and pitch trim rates
for use in airplane simulators; engine
inoperative rejected takeoffs for use in
helicopter simulators; and takeoffs,
hover, vertical climbs, and normal
landings for use in helicopter FTDs.
• Provides in the QPS appendices
additional information for sponsors on
the testing requirements for FSTDs,
including the use of alternative data
sources when complete flight test data
are not available or less technically
complex levels of simulation are being
developed.
• Clarifies and standardizes existing
requirements for motion, visual, and
sound systems, including subjective
buffeting motions, visual scene content,
and sound replication.
• Requires, by FSTD Directive 1, all
existing FSTD airport models used for
training, testing, or checking under this
chapter that are beyond the number of
airport models required for qualification
to meet the requirements described in
Table A3C (Appendix A, Attachment 3)
or Table C3C (Appendix C, Attachment
3), as appropriate.
Except for FSTD Directive 1,
manufacturers and sponsors are not
required to incorporate any of the
changes listed above for existing FSTDs.
The appendices and attachments to part
60 affected by this final rule only apply
to FSTDs that come into service after
part 60 is effective (May 30, 2008). This
final rule results in minimal to no cost
increases for manufacturers and
sponsors.
C. Summary of Comments
The FAA received 18 comments on
the proposed rule. Commenters include
airlines (Northwest, American, United,
and FedEx), industry organizations (Air
Transport Association (ATA) and
Helicopter Association International
(HAI)), training organizations (Alteon),
manufacturers (Boeing, Thales, CAE,
and Rockwell Collins), and individuals.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
All of the commenters generally
supported the proposal, but the majority
of commenters had specific suggestions
to revise the proposed rule. Most of
these suggested revisions were technical
edits. None of the comments resulted in
any substantive changes to the proposed
requirements, and we have incorporated
the suggestions where appropriate. We
have also made minor editorial
revisions where appropriate.
The FAA received comments on the
following general topics:
• Administrative.
• Simulator Qualification and
Evaluation.
• FSTD Testing: Objective and
Subjective.
• General.
• Visual Systems.
• Motion or Vibration Requirements.
• Sound Requirements.
• Helicopters.
• Quality Management System
(QMS).
• Miscellaneous.
II. Discussion of the Final Rule and
Comments
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
A. Administrative
The ATA recommended that the FAA
make the effective date of the final rule
at least 90 days following the
publication date.
Part 60 has been available to the
public for review for over 1 year. The
revisions to the appendices of Part 60
reflect international standards that have
been in existence for more than 4 years.
Further, when the FAA delayed the
effective date to Part 60, we also delayed
the compliance dates of certain sections
of the rule to provide adequate time for
transition. Because of the notice
provided and delayed compliance dates
of certain sections, the FAA has
determined that delaying the effective
date by 90 days is not necessary.
Several of the comments were beyond
the scope of the proposal. For example,
CAE and others suggested including
objective tests for Heads-Up Displays
(HUD) and Enhanced Visual Systems
(EVS). Further, several commenters
suggested adopting standards currently
being developed by the International
Working Group (IWG) of the Royal
Aeronautical Society (RAeS).
The FAA has not addressed in detail
the comments that are beyond the scope
of the NPRM. In addition, the FAA has
determined it would be premature for
the FAA to incorporate into this final
rule the standards currently under
review by the IWG. Once the RAeS has
adopted the IWG’s recommendations,
the FAA will review them for
incorporation in the QPS appendices.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
Several commenters noted differences
between the proposed standards and the
current international standards and
suggested adopting the international
standards. As stated, one of the
purposes of this rule is to harmonize
with the current international standards
documents for simulation issued by the
JAA and ICAO. These recommendations
are within the scope of the proposal and
have been incorporated into this final
rule as appropriate.
Some commenters to the proposed
rule noted typographical and formatting
errors in the proposal. The Office of the
Federal Register issued a correction
document addressing some of the these
errors on March 5, 2008 (73 FR 11995).
The FAA has addressed the remaining
errors in this document.
B. Simulator Qualification and
Evaluation
CAE and others noted that the listing
of tasks for which an FSTD may be
qualified do not correspond to the tasks
set forth in the FAA Air Carrier
Operations Inspector’s Handbook and
are not the same as those tasks in the
tables that outline the Functions and
Subjective tests for which each FSTD
may be evaluated. Commenters also
suggested that the objective and
subjective tests used to evaluate the
FSTD be aligned with the tasks for
which the FSTD may be qualified.
The FAA recognizes that the FSTD
qualification tasks do not mirror the
tasks set forth in the FAA Air Carrier
Operations Inspector’s Handbook, the
‘‘Functions and Subjective tests’’ tables
in Attachment 3 of Appendices A–D,
and the ‘‘Tasks vs. Simulator Level’’
tables in Attachment 1 of Appendices
A-D. However, there are differences
between the tasks used to evaluate the
handling, performance, and other
characteristics of the FSTD and those
tasks for which an FSTD may be
qualified for pilot training, testing, or
checking activities. Thus, the list of
tasks set forth in the ‘‘Functions and
Subjective tests’’ tables and ‘‘Tasks vs.
Simulator Level’’ tables are not
necessarily the same, nor should they be
the same.
CAE, ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others asked whether the Level B
simulator authorizations in Table A1B
should be listed as an ‘‘X’’ instead of an
‘‘R’’ for most of the landing tasks.
As the legend in Table A1B indicates,
the ‘‘R’’ denotes authorization for
Recurrent activities while the ‘‘X’’
denotes authorization for Initial,
Transition, Upgrade, and Recurrent
activities. The landing tasks for Level B
simulators are restricted to Recurrent
activities and the ‘‘R’’ in the table at
PO 00000
Frm 00003
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26479
those points is the correct reference.
However, the FAA acknowledges that
the authorizations for Taxiing and for
Normal and Crosswind Takeoffs for the
Level B simulator were inadvertently
left blank, and the FAA has placed an
‘‘R’’ in those positions in this table,
indicating an authorization for
Recurrent activities in this level of
simulation.
American, the ATA, and others stated
that the differences between ‘‘update’’
and ‘‘upgrade,’’ as used in Appendix A,
Paragraph 13, Previously Qualified FFS,
subparagraph ‘‘h,’’ were not clear. They
recommended clarifying the differences
and moving the subparagraph from the
information section to the QPS
Requirements section.
The information in subparagraph ‘‘h’’
allows for Full Flight Simulators (FFS)
to be updated without requiring an
evaluation under the new standards.
Because this language is permissive in
nature, we have moved it to the QPS
Requirements section as requested. To
clarify the meaning of these terms, we
have added a definition of ‘‘update’’ that
reflects current practice to Appendix F.
CAE and others suggested revising the
note in Table A1B, entry 3.f, Recovery
from Unusual Attitudes, by replacing
the statement ‘‘supported by applicable
simulation validation data’’ with
‘‘supported by the simulation models.’’
The suggested revised language would
allow an individual to go beyond the
flight-test-validated flight-envelope in a
flight simulator. This is not an
acceptable practice because of the lack
of information about aircraft
performance and handling beyond those
limits. Therefore, the FAA has not
adopted the recommendation.
The ATA, Northwest, and others
suggested clarifying that the 24-hour
‘‘look back’’ period for the functional
preflight check (Table E1, entry E1.20)
is from the beginning of the scheduled
training period. Additionally,
commenters questioned whether the
FSTD use-period, if started within 24
hours of a functional preflight check,
could continue beyond that 24-hour
‘‘look-back’’ period and whether the
functional preflight check is required for
Level 4 ‘‘touch screen’’ FTDs. Further,
commenters questioned whether Level 4
FTDs remain under the responsibility of
the Training Program Approval
Authority (TPAA).
The proposed requirement for
conducting a functional preflight check
within 24 hours prior to using the FSTD
is to ensure that technical personnel
with the requisite preflight training have
determined the readiness level of the
FSTD. An FSTD use-period does not
begin unless a functional preflight check
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26480
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
has been completed in the previous 24
hours. If a training session begins near
the end of the 24 hours after the
functional preflight check was
completed, the training session may
continue beyond that 24 hours.
However, any subsequent training
session may not begin until another
functional preflight check is conducted.
The National Simulator Program
Manager (NSPM) is the FAA manager
responsible for the evaluation and
qualification of all FSTDs qualified
under part 60, including Level 4 FTDs.
The NSPM will continue to exercise this
responsibility through inspectors and
engineers assigned to the National
Simulator Program (NSP) staff and
others to whom the NSPM may delegate
that responsibility and authority. This
responsibility and authority is not
intended to undermine or compromise
the duties and responsibilities of the
assigned TPAA with regard to the
approved use of the FSTD.
CAE and others questioned when it
would be necessary to complete an
additional initial qualification
evaluation after a modification to the
FSTD. They also asked what principles
would be used in determining whether
an evaluation for additional
authorization(s) is necessary and if an
evaluation is necessary, when it must
take place.
Whether a modification necessitates
an additional initial qualification
evaluation, necessitates part of an initial
qualification evaluation, or does not
necessitate an additional evaluation,
depends on (1) the extent of the
modification; (2) whether the
modification impacts, or is impacted by,
other systems or equipment in the
FSTD; and (3) whether, as a result of the
modification, the FSTD operation is
consistent with the airplane system it is
simulating. After review of these factors,
the FAA will determine on a case-bycase basis whether an evaluation for
additional authorizations is required
and when it will take place.
The ATA, Northwest, and others
suggested that the windshear provisions
in Table A1A for each Level C and Level
D FFS not be required for evaluation
and qualification purposes because not
all aircraft are required to have
windshear equipment and not all pilots
are required to train on recovery from
inadvertent windshear encounters.
Further, the commenters also suggested
clarifying the aircraft conditions under
which the windshear demonstrations
must be conducted.
Only operations conducted in
accordance with 14 CFR part 121 that
use aircraft listed in § 121.358 require
windshear training for crewmembers.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
Accordingly, the FAA has modified
Table A1A to address only these
operations. We have also clarified the
aircraft conditions under which the
windshear demonstrations must be
conducted.
C. FSTD Testing: Objective and
Subjective
1. General
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others recommended requiring Level A
and Level B simulators to meet the
standards in Table A2A, entry 1.b.7,
Dynamic Engine Failure After Takeoff.
The standards for testing of dynamic
engine failures after takeoff were first
established by ICAO and were limited to
advanced simulators, now referred to as
Level C and Level D. One purpose of
this final rule is to harmonize FAA
standards with current international
standards. Because current international
standards do not set forth standards for
testing dynamic engine failure after
takeoff for level A and B simulators, the
FAA has not adopted the
recommendation.
The ATA, Northwest, Boeing, CAE,
and others suggested the FAA review all
the references in Appendix A,
Attachment 2, Table A2A, Table of
Objective Tests, that include references
to Computer Controlled Aircraft (CCA)
to ensure that the control state testing
requirements (i.e., normal control state
or non-normal control state) are
correctly addressed.
The FAA recognizes that there were
errors made in the proposal regarding
CCA testing requirements. The FAA has
reviewed the CCA testing requirements
to address the correct control state and
made appropriate revisions.
CAE, Rockwell Collins, ATA, and
others submitted several comments on
Appendix A, Attachment 1, Table A1A,
General Simulator Requirements. CAE
suggested that (1) the manual and
automatic testing, described in entry 2.f,
and simulator control feel dynamics, as
described in entry 3.e, apply to Level A
and Level B simulators in addition to
Level C and Level D simulators; (2) the
NSPM should further clarify the number
of malfunctions that are required or
provide a list of the necessary
malfunctions that should be present;
and (3) the instructor controls, as
described in entry 4.c, either list all the
expected environmental conditions over
which the instructor should have
control or remove the reference to
‘‘wind speed and direction.’’ The ATA
and others requested that the statements
about additional field-of-view capability
for Level A and Level B simulators in
PO 00000
Frm 00004
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
entry 6.b of Table A1A be moved to the
Information/Notes column.
Automatic testing and control feel
dynamics was first required in 1980
with the publication of the FAA’s
Advanced Simulation Plan and was
limited to advanced simulators, now
referred to as Level C and Level D. The
FAA is not expanding the requirements
for automatic testing and control feel
dynamics testing to Level A and Level
B simulators because that would result
in differing technical requirements for
these simulator levels while authorizing
the same training, testing, and checking
tasks. The additional field-of-view
reference in entry 6.b was designed to
allow the option of including a larger
field-of-view than the provision
requires, with the understanding that
the minimum fields of view would have
to be retained. This reference is more
informative than regulatory and the
FAA has moved the statements to the
Information/Notes column.
The ATA and others suggested
defining the term ‘‘least augmented
state’’ as used in Appendix A,
Attachment 2, paragraph 2.j, and
requested confirmation that the ‘‘least
augmented state’’ is one that the pilot
may select using normal switches found
in the airplane flight deck.
The FAA has determined that a
general definition of the term ‘‘least
augmented state’’ is not appropriate
because these states are dependent on
the aircraft type involved. Additionally,
the least augmented state is not
necessarily achieved by the use of
switches found in the flight deck.
Therefore, the FAA will evaluate FSTDs
in accordance with the least augmented
state data supplied by the aircraft
manufacturer or other data supplier.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others suggested that the primary
controls of the simulated aircraft should
be tested objectively to verify correct
forces and responses whether simulated
aircraft parts or actual aircraft parts are
used. Further, they recommended that
the FAA require a Statement of
Compliance and Capability (SOC) that
describes how and where the control
forces are generated in the aircraft, and
lists all hardware required to generate
these control forces.
The FAA does not require testing of
flight controls in these circumstances
because these aircraft controls must be
maintained as if they were installed in
an aircraft to provide crewmembers the
same control feedback as felt in the
actual aircraft. The sponsor is required
to provide a statement that the aircraft
hardware meets the appropriate
manufacturer’s specifications for the
controls and the sponsor must have
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
information supporting that statement
available for NSPM review.
Accordingly, the FAA has not adopted
the recommendation.
Boeing suggested, with regard to
Table A2A, entry 1.c.2, that the test for
‘‘One Engine Inoperative’’ should be
named ‘‘One Engine Inoperative,
Second Segment Climb.’’
The test is required for airplanes
certificated under both parts 23 and 25.
The term ‘‘Second Segment Climb’’
applies only to airplanes certificated
under part 25. Therefore, the FAA has
not adopted the suggested change.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, CAE, and
others recommended that the tests in
entries 1.e.1 and 1.e.2, Stopping Time
and Distance, of Table A2A, not apply
to Level A and Level B simulators
because these simulator levels are not
authorized to perform this landing task.
The FAA did not adopt this change
because both Level A and Level B
simulators are authorized to perform
Rejected Takeoff Maneuvers. In
addition, Level B simulators are
authorized to perform landings in
recurrent training and checking.
Therefore, these tests are necessary to
determine the stopping capabilities of
the FSTD.
The ATA, Boeing, CAE, and others
expressed concern over how to read the
test requirements for Engine
Acceleration and Engine Deceleration
(Table A2A, entries 1.f.1 and 1.f.2). The
commenters recommended various
ways of publishing the established
tolerances. CAE also recommended
defining the terms ‘‘Ti’’ and ‘‘Tt.’’
The published tolerances for these
tests are consistent with international
standards documents. As proposed, Ti
and Tt were defined in the Tables as
well as in the Abbreviations list in
Appendix F. For clarification, we have
moved these terms to the definitions
section of Appendix F and added cross
references in the tables to Appendix F.
The ATA, Northwest, and others
noted that the Short Period Dynamics
test in Table A2A, entry 2.c.10
erroneously did not to apply to Level A
simulators. They also noted that entry
2.d.7, Dutch Roll (yaw damper off),
erroneously applied to all levels of
simulators when it should apply only to
Levels B, C, and D.
The FAA acknowledges that
applicability to Level A simulators for
the Short Period test was inadvertently
omitted and the Dutch Roll test was
inadvertently included, although the
correct standards appear in FAA
standards documents and international
standards documents. The FAA has
corrected these errors in this final rule.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
CAE suggested the FAA clarify Table
A2A, entry 2.d.8, Steady State Sideslip,
by stating that this test ‘‘may be a series
of snapshot test results using at least
two rudder positions, one of which
should be near maximum allowable
rudder.’’
The FAA agrees and has clarified the
requirement where appropriate. CAE
and others suggested that the definition
of the term ‘‘snapshot’’ be modified
from ‘‘a presentation of one or more
variables at a given instant of time’’ to
‘‘a presentation of one or more variables
at a given instant of time or from a timeaverage of a steady flight condition.’’
The FAA has determined that the
suggested modification would create
confusion because of the subjective
nature of the phrase ‘‘steady flight
condition’’ and has not adopted the
suggestion.
The ATA and others suggested a
change to Table A2A, entry 2.e.6, All
Engines Operating, Autopilot, GoAround, to require a manual test and, if
applicable, an autopilot test.
The FAA currently requires a manual
test when performing a one engine
inoperative go-around. The all engines
operating, autopilot, go-around test
applies only when the airplane is
authorized to use the autopilot function
during a go-around. Because both tests
are currently required, the FAA has not
adopted the suggested changes.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others suggested that the tests described
in entries 2.e.8 and 2.e.9 of Table A2A,
should be conducted differently (i.e.,
with the nosewheel steering
disconnected or castering), unless the
FAA’s intent was to evaluate overall
aircraft response, in which case no
change is necessary.
The intent of these tests is to evaluate
the aircraft response. Therefore, no
change is necessary.
CAE and Boeing recommended
substituting the term ‘‘mass properties’’
with the term ‘‘fuel slosh’’ in
Appendices A and C, paragraph
8.h(2)(c) because mass properties are
rarely, if ever, run in an integrated
manner as described.
The FAA does not agree that mass
properties are not run in an integrated
manner. The FAA has chosen the term
mass properties because it is consistent
with international standards. Therefore,
the FAA has not adopted the suggested
change.
CAE and Boeing recommended
deleting paragraph 9.b(3) in Appendices
A and C because a data provider should
not have to demonstrate that data
gathered from an engineering simulation
(in lieu of a flight test source) has
necessary qualities to qualify an FSTD.
PO 00000
Frm 00005
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26481
The FAA did not intend that an
engineering simulation be qualified, or
be capable of being qualified, as an
FSTD. The data obtained from the
engineering simulation would be
appropriate as a replacement for flight
test data when the data obtained from
the engineering simulation is
programmed into an FSTD. Therefore,
we have clarified the information in
paragraph 9.b(3) to state that in these
cases, the data provider should submit
validation data from an audited
engineering simulator/simulation to
supplement specific segments of the
flight test data.
CAE and Boeing requested that
paragraph 11.a(1) not apply to Table
A2A, entries 1.f.1 and 1.f.2, objective
tests for engine acceleration and
deceleration. Rather, they suggested
applying 100% of flight test tolerances
to these objective tests. CAE also
suggested when flight test data for an
alternate engine fit is unavailable, the
objective testing of engine acceleration
and engine deceleration (Table A2A,
tests 1.f.1 and 1.f.2) should be exempt
from the 20% tolerance for the
application of engineering simulator/
simulation because the actual tolerance
would be less than the simulation
iteration rate.
Applying 100% of flight test
tolerances to the objective tests results
in these entries is not an acceptable
routine procedure. Full flight test
tolerances are appropriate when
comparing FSTD results to airplane
data, and 20% of those airplane
tolerances are appropriate when
comparing FSTD results to flight
engineering simulation data because it
is easier to match ‘‘computer to
computer’’ data than to match
‘‘computer to airplane’’ data. Any
circumstance that does not fit within
these parameters would likely be
acceptable under the ‘‘best fit’’ data
selection set forth in Appendix A,
Attachment 2, paragraph 2.d. Therefore,
the FAA has not adopted these changes.
The ATA and others stated that the
Rudder Response test in Table B2A,
entry 2.b.6.b is confusing because it
would not test the rudder power in the
yaw axis. They suggested modifying the
tolerance column to read ‘‘± 2°/sec or ±
10% yaw rate, OR Roll rate ± 2°/sec,
bank angle ± 3°.’’
This test was originally required as a
rudder test using roll rate and bank
angle for the parameters. However, the
FAA agrees that this test may be
accomplished using either yaw rate or
roll rate and bank angle. Therefore, the
FAA has added a note in the
Information/Notes column that this test
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26482
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
may be accomplished as a yaw response
test.
The ATA, Northwest, CAE, and others
suggested eliminating the ±2 degree
tolerance on bank angle above stick
shaker or initial buffet speeds in Table
A2A, entry 2.c.8, Stall Characteristics, to
be consistent with international
standards.
The FAA acknowledges that the ± 2
degree tolerance on bank angle above
stick shaker or initial buffet speeds is
not included in the international
standards. However, requiring zero
tolerance in these instances would be
very stringent without appreciable
difference in FSTD performance or
handling characteristics. Accordingly,
the FAA has not eliminated the
tolerance.
Boeing, United, and others
recommended clarifying paragraph
11.b(5) Validation Test Tolerances, and
adding a new paragraph 11.b(6)
allowing errors greater than 20% if the
simulator sponsor provides an adequate
explanation.
The FAA generally agrees with the
suggestion and has modified paragraph
11.b(5) to reflect this information. The
FAA has determined that adding a new
paragraph 11.b(6) is not necessary.
One commenter, citing paragraph
17.a, ‘‘Alternative Data Sources,
Procedures, and Instrumentation: Level
A and Level B Simulators Only,’’
questioned whether the alternative data
collection sources, procedures, and
instrumentation listed in Table A2E
were the only sources for data collection
that the FAA would allow.
Appendix A, paragraph 11, Initial
(and Upgrade) Qualification
Requirements, requires objective data to
be acquired through traditional aircraft
flight testing. It also allows for the use
of ‘‘another approved’’ source. The FAA
has included Table A2E to provide
alternative sources, procedures, or
instrumentation acceptable to the FAA
that may be used to acquire the
necessary objective data for Level A or
Level B simulators. At this time, the
alternative data collection sources,
procedures, and instrumentation listed
in Table A2E are the only alternatives
acceptable without prior approval by
the NSPM.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others questioned the necessity of
having sounds of precipitation and rain
removal devices for Level C simulators
but not requiring the corresponding
visual effect.
The FAA recognizes the error in the
proposed language and has made the
necessary changes. Level C simulators
are required to be subjectively tested for
the sound, motion and visual effects of
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
light, medium and heavy precipitation
near a thunderstorm and the effect of
rain removal devices.
The ATA and others requested that
aircraft certified with auto-ice detection
coupled with auto-anti-ice or auto-deice capabilities be exempt from the
effects of airframe and engine icing tests
listed in Table A3F, Special Effects.
Because it is possible for flight crews
to experience the effects of airframe or
engine icing if the auto-ice detection
systems are inoperative, the flight crews
must be trained to recognize and
respond to icing situations. Therefore,
the FAA has not adopted the
recommendation.
2. Visual Systems
The ATA, Northwest, Rockwell
Collins, United, and several others
recognized that the definition of an
FSTD Directive is ‘‘a document issued
by the FAA to an FSTD sponsor
requiring a modification to the FSTD
due to a safety-of-flight issue and
amending the qualification basis for the
FSTD.’’ These commenters asserted that
the FAA has not provided any safety
analysis to support the issuance of
FSTD Directive 1. Further, these
commenters asked how the FAA
determines what constitutes a safety
issue that would warrant the issuance of
an FSTD Directive. Some commenters
asserted that updating airport modeling
is a complicated problem because of the
difficulty in removing airport models
from the instructor operating station
(IOS) in some FSTDs, particularly in
those FSTDs not owned or controlled by
the sponsor. In addition, some
commenters noted the cost of updating
an existing airport model and suggested
that the FAA continue to allow custom
airport models meeting individual
training requirements to be used
without modification. Further, the
commenters requested the FAA extend
the timeframe for updating airport
models to match any modification to the
actual airport.
As proposed, FSTD Directive 1
requires each certificate holder to
ensure that each airport model used for
training, testing or checking, except
those airport models used to qualify the
simulator at the designated level, meets
the requirements of a Class II or Class
III airport model. The FAA
acknowledges that FSTD Directives may
be issued only for safety-of-flight
purposes. These determinations will be
made on a case-by-case basis. The FAA
has determined that updating airport
modeling is a safety-of-flight concern
because pilots have landed airplanes on
wrong runways, landed on taxiways,
landed at the wrong airport,
PO 00000
Frm 00006
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
unknowingly taxied across active
runways, and taken off from the wrong
runway. Many FSTD users have
expressed concern regarding the
accuracy of these models with respect to
real world airports. Training, testing, or
checking in an FSTD with incomplete or
inaccurate airport models representing
real world airports can contribute to
incomplete planning or poor decision
making by pilots if they subsequently
operate into or out of that real world
airport. While these potentially
disastrous occurrences happen
infrequently, inaccurate airport
modeling is a safety-of-flight issue that
warrants the issuance of this FSTD
Directive.
The proposed FSTD Directive is
designed to address qualified FSTDs
that contain airport models that were
not evaluated. The FSTD Directive
ensures that each model used in an
FSTD for training, testing, or checking
activities meets the acceptable
minimum standards. Although the FAA
is responsible for ensuring that these
standards are met, the FSTD sponsor is
responsible for maintaining the FSTD,
and each certificate holder using the
FSTD is responsible for ensuring that all
of the FSTD components are in
compliance with these standards and
report any deficiencies.
Upon review of the comments,
however, we have clarified the language
of the FSTD Directive. The FSTD
Directive still requires each certificate
holder to ensure that, by May 30, 2009,
except for the airport model(s) used to
qualify the FSTD at the designated level,
each airport model used by the
certificate holder’s instructors or
evaluators for training, testing, or
checking under 14 CFR chapter I in an
FFS, meets the definition of a Class II,
or Class III airport model as defined in
part 60, Appendix F. We originally
proposed to require removal of all
airport models that did not meet the
standards of a Class II or Class III model.
In light of comments regarding the
expense of such removal and issues
regarding the sponsorship and leasing of
FSTDs, FSTD Directive 1 now requires
only the airport models used for
training, testing or checking to meet the
appropriate requirements; it does not
require removal of other airport models.
Additionally, we have revised the
definition of a generic airport model in
Appendix F to clearly describe a Class
III airport model that combines correct
navigation aids for a real world airport
with an airport model that does not
depict that real world airport. Use of
such an airport model may require some
limitations on that use. The clarified
language in the FSTD Directive and the
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
revised definitions may mitigate the
actual cost of updating airport models.
In addition, the FAA recognizes that it
takes time to design, construct, and
implement changes to computer
programming. The FAA has decided to
modify the time requirements in
paragraph 1(f) of Attachment 3,
Appendix A, and clarify the process for
requesting an extension for the update
in paragraph 1(g) of Attachment 3,
Appendix A.
Further, the ATA and others
suggested adding a statement in the
Information/Notes column of Table B1A
regarding visual systems that FSTD
Directive 1 does not apply to Level A
standards for an FTD visual system.
If a visual system installed in any
level of FTD is not being used to acquire
additional training credits, FSTD
Directive 1 does not apply. However, if
the visual system is being used to
acquire training credits, the visual
system must meet the requirements of at
least a Level A FFS visual system. In
these circumstances, FSTD Directive 1
could affect the airport models used in
that system. Therefore, the FAA has not
added the suggested statement.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others noted that the terms visual
scenes, visual models, and airport
models, appear to be used
interchangeably in the NPRM.
The FAA has adopted the term
‘‘airport model’’ instead of the terms
‘‘visual scene’’or ‘‘visual
model’’throughout this final rule. We
also have deleted the definition of
‘‘visual model’’ from Appendix F and
changed the definition of ‘‘visual
database’’ to ‘‘a display that may
include one or more airport models’’ for
consistency. Since there are three
classes of airport models, we clarified
the differences between Class I, Class II,
and Class III in the definition of airport
model.
ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others
questioned the need for 16 moving
models as well as the training tasks that
would be able to be met by having these
moving models. The commenters also
requested clarification regarding what
constitutes gate clutter.
The primary goal of the NPRM was to
harmonize with international standards.
The intent of the 16 moving objects
requirement, which is an international
standard, is to enhance the ‘‘realism’’of
the displayed visual scene. The FAA
has added a definition of gate clutter in
Appendix F, as described in entry 2.f in
Table A3B.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others stated that the Class II airport
model requirements are excessive,
especially for areas other than the ‘‘in-
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
use’’ runway itself and noted that there
are no model content requirements for
‘‘generic airport models.’’
The Class II airport model
requirements mirror the long-standing
guidance in AC 120–40B, Airplane
Simulator Qualification, Appendix 3,
and are consistent with international
standards. The FAA has determined that
providing specific model content
requirements for ‘‘generic airport
models’’ would restrict unnecessarily
the capability and flexibility that
currently exists. Accordingly, the FAA
has not made any changes to the Class
II airport model requirements or created
any specific requirements for ‘‘generic
airport models.’’
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, CAE, and
others questioned whether ‘‘ambient
lighting’’ in Daylight Visual Scenes is
required.
Ambient lighting is not required in
daylight visual scenes because of its
distorting effects on the visual scene
and inside the flight deck. The FAA has
removed the requirement for ambient
flight deck lighting where appropriate.
The ATA and others requested that
the FAA clarify the Surface Movement
Guidance and Control System (SMGCS)
as referenced in Table A3B, entry 2.j.
Entry 2.j requires that a low visibility
taxi route must be demonstrated for
qualification of a Level D simulator. A
low visibility taxi route could be
satisfied, according to the Table A3B, by
a depiction of one of the following
means: an SMGCS taxi route, a followme truck, or low visibility daylight taxi
lights. For further information on
SMGCS, see AC 120–57A (December 19,
1996).
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others questioned the language in the
preamble of the NPRM describing the
visual system proposal as requiring a
‘‘field of view and system capacity
requirements’’ * * * increased by 20
percent over the present requirement.’’
The commenters asserted that the
proposed surfaces and light point
requirements are ‘‘considerably in
excess of a 20% increase.’’
The 20% increase, as described in the
NPRM preamble, should have applied
only to the field-of-view requirements.
However, the actual requirements stated
in the proposed rule language for fieldof-view and system capacity for
generating surface and light points are
consistent with current international
standards. Further, the metrics
simulator manufacturers are currently
using to construct their equipment
correspond to the proposed system
capacity for generating surface and light
points. Therefore, no changes to the rule
language are necessary.
PO 00000
Frm 00007
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26483
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others objected to the larger field-ofview requirements for FSTDs previously
built but not evaluated by the FAA for
qualification, and for FSTDs previously
evaluated and qualified, but returning to
service after a 2-year inactive interval.
The concern is that these FSTDs would
be required to meet the new field-ofview requirements.
The first time an FSTD is evaluated by
the FAA for qualification, the FSTD is
evaluated in accordance with the set of
standards current at that time. An FSTD
placed into an inactive status for 2 or
more years will not necessarily be
evaluated under any new criteria in
effect at the time of re-entry into service.
The NSPM, however, considers a full
range of factors before deciding whether
to require an FSTD coming out of an
inactive period to be evaluated in
accordance with its original
qualification basis or in accordance with
the set of standards current at that time.
CAE and others recommended
modifying in Table A1A, entry 6.p, to
require the visual system be free from
apparent and distracting quantization,
instead of only apparent quantization.
Eliminating the slightest traces of
quantization cannot be technically
accomplished. However, because
distracting quantization can be
minimized to such a level that it does
not affect the performance of the visual
system, the FAA has made this change.
CAE, ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others questioned why realistic color
and directionality of all airport lighting
is not a requirement for Level A, Level
B, and Level C simulators in addition to
Level D simulators.
As proposed, the airport lighting
requirements for Level A and B
simulators are consistent with
international standards. Therefore, the
FAA has not made the requested
change.
The ATA, Northwest, and others
suggested including a test in Table A2A,
entry 4.b.3, for Level C simulators to
evaluate visual systems with 150°
horizontal and 30° vertical field-of-view
or a monitor-based system.
The primary goal of the NPRM was to
harmonize with international standards.
The current international standard, as
reflected in the NPRM, for Level C
simulators is 180° horizontal by 40°
vertical field-of-view. Therefore, the
FAA has not adopted the change.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others stated that the test in Table A2A,
entry 4.f, Surface Resolution, does not
reflect current practice for runway
markings. Commenters recommended
that this test mirror the current practice
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26484
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
and international standards that runway
stripes and spaces be 5.75 feet wide.
The FAA has modified this language
where appropriate to reflect current
practice and international standards.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, CAE, and
others questioned why the tolerances
allowed in entry 4.i, Visual Ground
Segment (VGS), of Table A2A are
different from the current international
standards. They also suggested that the
Qualification Test Guide (QTG) contain
calculations to compare the altitude
used against the altitude specified when
performing this test and questioned
whether the test must be performed
manually. They also requested deleting
or correcting the conversion of feet to
meters.
The international standards prescribe
the application of the VGS tolerance to
the far end of the VGS with no tolerance
provided at the near end of the VGS. To
ensure harmonization, the FAA has
made the appropriate changes to the
application of this VGS tolerance. The
requirements for the QTG contain
provisions regarding the calculation of
altitude references. The FAA has stated
that the altitude calculations are
computed with the aircraft at 100 ft (30
m) above the runway touchdown zone
and centered on the Instrument Landing
System (ILS) electronic glide slope. The
typical reference for modern turbojet
aircraft operations for height above
touchdown is the height of the main
landing gear above that touchdown zone
reference plane, with the aircraft at a
specified weight and landing
configuration. To clarify these
calculations, the FAA has modified the
Flight Conditions column for entry 4.i of
Table A2A to reflect this information.
The distances expressed in metric units
are not direct conversions to U.S.
customary units, nor were they intended
to be. Rather, these are the appropriate
standards depending on which system
is being used. Therefore, the FAA has
not removed the metric references.
The ATA and others requested
clarification regarding the term ‘‘in-use
runway’’ in Tables A3B and A3C. The
commenters stated that using the
general term ‘‘in-use runway’’ would
require modeling all taxiways rather
than the primary one used, which may
overload the visual system and
negatively impact training.
Each ‘‘in-use’’ runway is a single, onedirection runway, used for takeoffs and
landings, that has the required surface
lighting and markings. New visual
systems are capable of generating
substantially more detail than required
by this final rule. However, because of
the concern raised regarding associated
taxiways, the FAA has modified the
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
language in Appendices A, C, and D
regarding airport model content to
require the use of only the primary taxi
route from parking to the end of the
runway instead of requiring the
modeling of all potential taxi routes.
One commenter requested the FAA
provide a definition of the term
‘‘dynamic response programming,’’ to
clarify the requirements in Table A1A,
entry 6.h. CAE and others questioned
the use of the terms ‘‘correlate with
integrated airplane systems, where
fitted,’’ and ‘‘dynamic response
programming,’’ as they are used in
Tables A3B and A1A. Commenters also
noted that Table A3B, entry 6.d
erroneously applied the requirements
for ‘‘correlate with integrated airplane
systems’’ to all levels of simulators
rather than just Levels C and D.
The term ‘‘dynamic response’’ is used
in its typical engineering context. As
used in Tables A1A (entry 6.h) and C1A
(entry 6.i) ‘‘dynamic response
programming’’ requires the visual
system display to respond with the
continuous movement of the simulated
aircraft. We have clarified the language
in Tables A3b (entry 6.d), C3b (entry
6.d) and D3B (entry 5.d) by removing
the phrase ‘‘where fitted.’’ The
requirement that the visual scene
correlate with the integrated aircraft
systems is to ensure that all installed
integrated aircraft systems correctly
respond to what appears in the visual
scene. This visual correspondence
requirement applies to only Level C and
D simulators and the FAA has corrected
this error in Tables A3B and C3B.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others suggested there should be no
difference between entries 6.e and 8.g in
Table A3B.
These two entries are designed to test
separate conditions. Entry 6.e tests the
external lights to ensure correlation
with the airplane and associated
equipment while entry 8.g tests the
environmental effects of the external
lights in the visual system. Because of
the separate, distinct purposes of these
entries, they should not be the same,
and the FAA has not adopted the
recommendation.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others objected to the inclusion of
several visual, sound, or motion systems
features (e.g., the effect of rain removal
devices; sound of light, medium, and
heavy precipitation; and nosewheel
scuffing) in the airport model
presentations because they are not
airport model functions.
These features are a function of the
visual, sound, or motion systems. These
features must be available and operate
correctly in conjunction with the airport
PO 00000
Frm 00008
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
models presented during training,
testing, or checking activities. These
features are meaningful only when they
are presented as part of the airport
model. Therefore, the FAA has not
removed these features from the airport
model requirements.
The ATA, Northwest, Rockwell
Collins, and others expressed concern
that the discussion of entry 10 in Table
A3B regarding the combination of two
airport models to achieve two ‘‘in-use’’
runways at one airport, may impede
control of the radio aids and terrain
elevation and create distracting effects
in the visual scene display.
The discussion in entry 10 of Table
A3B is an authorization, not a
requirement. If an FSTD has limitations
such that this combination would
impede control or create distracting
effects, this particular authorization is
not applicable. The FAA has added
clarifying language in entry 10 to
address this concern.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others stated the requirement that
‘‘slopes in runways, taxiways, and ramp
areas must not cause distracting or
unrealistic effects’’ in entry 4.b in Table
A3C implies that Level A and Level B
simulators are required to have sloping
terrain modeling, making the Class II
airport models more stringent than Class
I airport models.
Level A and B simulators are not
required to have sloping terrain
modeling. This provision, however, sets
forth the requirements for such
modeling if a sponsor elects to
incorporate sloping terrain modeling in
the FSTD. The FAA has clarified this
requirement by adding the qualifier ‘‘if
depicted in the visual scene,’’ in the
appropriate tables in Appendices A, C,
and D.
CAE and others requested the FAA
establish a list of individuals or
corporations who work as visual
modelers and can provide detailed
information about airports without
creating national security concerns.
Anyone with a legitimate need for the
acquisition of detailed airport
information for accurate modeling of
any U.S. airport for simulation modeling
purposes should contact the NSPM for
assistance.
3. Motion or Vibration Requirements
Rockwell Collins, CAE, the ATA, and
others stated that Motion Cueing
Performance Signature tests can provide
an objective means of determining loss
in motion system performance. The
commenters were concerned that if
these tests were conducted only during
the Initial Qualification Evaluation,
sponsors would not have objective
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
information available to determine the
continuing status of the motion system.
The proposal required the results of
these tests to be included in the MQTG.
Because sponsors are required to run the
complete quarterly MQTG inspections,
these tests are not intended to be onetime-only tests. The sponsor and NSPM
regularly review these tests. The FAA
agrees that the statement ‘‘this test is not
required as part of continuing
qualification evaluations’’ is misleading
and has deleted this statement where
appropriate.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others questioned whether Level B
simulators must be subjectively tested
for nosewheel scuffing motion effects
when this level of simulator was not
authorized for the taxi task.
Level B simulators are authorized for
Rejected Takeoff Maneuvers. At higher
speeds, the movement of the nosewheel
steering mechanism can be more
sensitive and may cause the nosewheel
to be turned beyond smooth tracking
angles, resulting in nosewheel scuffing
during Rejected Takeoff Maneuvers.
Therefore, the FAA has determined that
subjective testing for nosewheel scuffing
motion effects is necessary and did not
make any change.
4. Sound Requirements
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others suggested that in Table A2A,
entry 5, Sound Requirements, the tests
listed should have a defined frequency
spectrum within which the tests should
be conducted similar to that set forth in
international standards.
Because the text in the proposal
describes these processes and similar
statements appear in international
standards, the FAA has added language
similar to the international standards to
the sound test requirements of entry 5,
Table A2A.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others suggested requiring all levels of
FTDs to be able to represent all the
flight deck aural warning sounds and
sounds from pilot actions instead of
limiting this standard to level 6 FTDs,
as it currently appears in entry 7.a of
Table B1A.
A Level 6 FTD is the only level of
FTD that is required to have all aircraft
systems installed and operational. This
requirement has been in effect for over
16 years and is consistent with current
international standards. The suggested
requirement is also outside the scope of
this rulemaking. Accordingly, the FAA
has not adopted the change.
CAE and others suggested entry 7.c,
Accurate Simulation of Sounds, in
Table A1A, address abnormal
operations in addition to the sound of
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
normal operations and the sound of a
crash.
The current international standards
contain a requirement for sounds
addressing abnormal operations, which
include the sound of a crash, and
normal operations. To harmonize with
international standards the FAA has
made the change.
D. Helicopters
CAE and others noted that an SOC is
not necessary for entries 1.a, 1.b, and 2.a
in Table C1A. Thales also suggested that
the language in entry 2.a be modified to
reflect helicopter operations.
The FAA has removed the SOC
requirement in entries 1.a and 1.b
because it is not necessary. The SOC for
entry 2.a is necessary because it
describes a flight dynamics model that
must account for combinations of drag
and thrust normally encountered in
flight. However, the FAA has modified
the language in entry 2.a to better reflect
helicopter operations.
Thales and others stated that the
motion onset requirements in Table
C1A, entry 2.e, are new requirements for
helicopter simulation.
The FAA included the requirements
in this entry in the October 30, 2006,
final rule (71 FR 63426), and again in
the NPRM for this rule. These
requirements codify existing practice
(e.g., AC 120–63, Helicopter Simulator
Qualification).
CAE and others suggested that the
Information/Notes column in Table
C1A, entry 2.f, include ‘‘roll’’ as well as
‘‘pitch,’’ ‘‘side loading,’’ and
‘‘directional control characteristics,’’
when simulating brake and tire failure
dynamics.
The FAA has clarified the
Information/Notes column by adding
the phrase ‘‘in the appropriate axes,’’
which includes roll, pitch, yaw, heave,
sway (side loading), and surge.
Thales, CAE, and others suggested
that the requirements in Table C1A,
entry 2.g.1, regarding ground effect
should apply to Level B simulators as it
appears in table C1A, entry 2.c.1.
The FAA has separated these two
requirements because helicopter
simulator Levels B, C, and D may be
required to perform running takeoffs
and running landings, as described in
entry 2.c.1. However, only Level C and
D simulators are required to perform
takeoffs or landings to or from a hover,
as noted in entry 2.g, thus requiring
separate table entries. Accordingly, the
FAA has not adopted the
recommendation.
CAE and others requested
clarification regarding the kinds of
aircraft system variables and
PO 00000
Frm 00009
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26485
environmental conditions as listed in
Table C1A, entry 4, that must be used
in simulation. Commenters suggested
removing the reference to ‘‘wind
speed,’’ including other environmental
controls, and including ‘‘water spray’’
when hovering over water.
There is no specific list of system
variables that must be available in a
helicopter simulator. The requirement is
that the instructor or evaluator be able
to control all the system variables and
insert all abnormal or emergency
conditions into the simulated helicopter
systems as described in the sponsor’s
FAA-approved training program, or as
described in the relevant FSTD
operating manual. The FAA has
reviewed the entries for environmental
controls and has included additional
examples of environmental conditions
that may be available in the FSTD. We
also have included ‘‘water vapor’’ as an
example of what may be expected to be
re-circulated when hovering above the
surface, as suggested by the
commenters.
CAE, Thales, and others suggested
including vortex ring and high-speed
rotor vibrations for motion effects
programming requirements in Table
C1A, entry 5.e. Commenters also
suggested requiring Level B and C
simulators to demonstrate air turbulence
models.
As proposed, entry 5.e included
requirements for buffet due to settling
with power and rotor vibrations. As the
commenters noted, these terms are
better expressed as buffet due to vortex
ring, and high-speed rotor vibrations.
The FAA has clarified the requirements
as requested. The FAA also has clarified
the statement in the Information/Notes
column regarding the use of air
turbulence models. Further changes
regarding air turbulence modeling are
beyond the scope of the NPRM.
Thales and others recommended
adjusting surface resolution from the
currently proposed three (3) arc-minutes
to two (2) arc-minutes in Table C1A,
entry 6.i.(4). Additionally, Thales
recommended the FAA add ‘‘helipad’’
or ‘‘heliport’’ lighting effects specific to
helicopter operations for subjective
testing.
As noted by the commenter, the two
(2) arc-minutes requirement is the
current international standard.
Therefore, the FAA has made the
recommended change. However, there
are specific requirements for both
airport and helicopter landing area
models for training, testing, and
checking purposes in attachment 3, and
the FAA has not included the ‘‘helipad’’
or ‘‘heliport’’ lighting effects in Table
C1A.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26486
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
CAE, Thales, and others suggested
that the tolerance of ±3 knots, in Table
C2A, entry 1.c, Takeoff, and entry 1.j,
Landing, be applied to either airspeed or
ground speed, because data collected at
airspeeds below 30–40 knots are often
unreliable. Thales suggested that for
entries 1.c.2 and 1.c.3, the specific type
of takeoff (Category A, Performance,
Confined area, etc,) be recorded so
proper comparisons can be made.
The FAA recognizes the difficulties in
applying tolerances to airspeeds when
the airspeed value itself may not be
accurate and has added a general
authorization for Takeoff tests and
Landing tests. Also, the FAA has added
a note in the Information/Notes column
to address the differing types of takeoff
profiles used for each of these tests.
CAE and others stated that in
helicopter simulation, flight test data
containing all the required parameters
for a complete power-off landing is not
always available. CAE recommended
modifying the language in Tables C2A
and D2A, entry 1.j.4, Autorotational
Landing, to state that in those cases
where data are not available, and other
qualified flight test personnel are not
available to acquire this data, the
sponsor must coordinate with the NSPM
to determine if it is appropriate to
accept alternative testing means.
The FAA agrees that, in certain
circumstances, the sponsor must
coordinate with the NSPM to determine
if it is appropriate to accept an
alternative testing means. The FAA has
made the appropriate changes.
CAE and others stated that Table C2A,
entry 1.h.2, Autorotation Performance,
requires data be recorded for speeds
from 50 knots, ±5 knots, through at least
maximum glide distance airspeed.
However, the maximum allowable
autorotation airspeed is often slower
than the maximum glide distance
airspeed, which would prevent accurate
data for autorotation entry.
The FAA has modified the test details
to include maximum allowable
autorotation airspeed.
CAE and others suggested reducing
the tolerance for control displacement to
±0.10 inches in Table C2A, entry 2.a.6,
Control System Freeplay. The
commenters also suggested harmonizing
the tolerance requirements for FTDs in
Table D2A, entry 2.a.6.
The FAA agrees and has made the
appropriate changes, which reflect
current international standards.
CAE and others suggested that the
proposed ±10% tolerances on pitch and
airspeed for non-periodic responses, in
Table C2A, entry 2.c.3.a, Dynamic
Stability, Long Term Response, be
relaxed because the proposal is too
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
restrictive. They noted non-periodic
Augmentation-On responses generally
exhibit less than 5 degrees peak pitch
attitude change from trim. Further,
commenters recommended adding a
statement to the Information/Notes
column to clarify the relationship
between non-periodic responses and
flight-test data. The rationale for these
recommendations is to avoid
requirements that are unduly restrictive
with divergent results, while ensuring
that the non-periodic responses are
accurately reproduced.
The FAA agrees with the commenter’s
suggestions and rationale and has made
the appropriate changes in Table C2A
for FFSs and in Table D2A for FTDs.
CAE and others suggested relating the
proposed tolerances in Table C2A, entry
2.d.3.a, Dynamic Lateral and Directional
Stability, Lateral-Directional
Oscillations test. The commenters stated
that the non-periodic responses may be
divergent, weakly convergent, or
deadbeat. The commenters stated that
the proposed tolerances may be too
restrictive for deadbeat responses.
Additionally, the commenters stated
that oscillatory responses that satisfy the
period and damping ratio tolerances
would not necessarily meet the
proposed time history tolerances
because of the non-periodic nature of
the response. The rationale for these
recommendations is to avoid
requirements that are unduly restrictive
with divergent results while ensuring
that the non-periodic responses are
reproduced with sufficient accuracy.
The FAA agrees with the commenters’
suggestions and rationale and has made
the appropriate changes in Table C2A
for FFSs and in Table D2A for FTDs.
Thales, CAE, and others were
concerned that there are no tolerances
specified for the tests listed in Table
C2A, entry 3.a, Frequency Response,
3.b, Leg Balance, and 3.c, Turn Around
Check.
Because of the way the tests are used,
the FAA has determined it is
appropriate that these specific tests do
not have a specified tolerance other than
the performance as established by the
FSTD manufacturer in coordination
with the sponsor. These tests are
conducted during the initial evaluation
and made part of the MQTG. While the
sponsor is not required to run these tests
again during continuing qualification
evaluations, the test results are available
if a question arises about the
performance of the motion system
hardware or the integrity of the motion
set-up at any time subsequent to the
initial qualification evaluation. The test
results recorded during the initial
qualification evaluation provide a
PO 00000
Frm 00010
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
benchmark against which subsequent
comparisons can be made.
CAE and others questioned whether a
motion signature (Table C2A, entry 3.e,
Motion Cueing Performance Signature)
is required for a test that only requires
a snapshot test result or a series of
snapshot test results, and if a sponsor
may submit a result of their choice if
multiple results are available for a
specific test.
The specific motion cueing
performance signature tests have
specifically associated tests that are
indicated in the Information/Notes
column. When these tests are
conducted, the sponsor records the
motion system as an additional
parameter, providing a cross-sectional
benchmark for the motion system
performance. When the test authorizes
the result to be provided as ‘‘a series of
snapshot tests,’’ the sponsor may choose
to record the motion cueing
performance signature tests as a time
history or as a series of snapshot tests.
Thales, HAI, and others requested that
sponsors be allowed to use alternative
data sources for Helicopter FTDs, as
authorized for Airplane FTDs.
At this time, alternative data source
information has not been developed for
Helicopter FTDs. The FAA developed
the alternative data source information
for airplanes in coordination with
industry prior to this rulemaking.
Anyone interested in researching and
developing alternatives for helicopter
FTDs for future rulemakings should
contact the NSPM.
The HAI and others suggested
expanding the vertical field-of-view
requirements for level 7 helicopter FTDs
to at least 70° in paragraph 24 of
Appendix D, Helicopter Flight Training
Devices. CAE further noted that the
field-of-view requirements for Level 7
FTDs appear to be more stringent than
the requirements for a Level B
simulator.
Peripheral vision is a critical cue in
helicopter operations. Therefore, the
FAA determined that the field-of-view
standards for Level C helicopter
simulators, which have been in effect
since 1994, provide the adequate
peripheral cues for the new level 7
helicopter FTD. Because peripheral
vision is the critical cue, the FAA has
not expanded the vertical field-of-view
requirement.
CAE and others suggested revising the
requirements for handling qualities for
the level 7 helicopter FTD listed in
Table D1A, given the list of tasks that
may be authorized for the FTD.
Although the tasks listed in the
referenced table may seem extensive for
a device that is not an FFS, the FAA
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
does not intend that a student would be
completely trained or trained to
proficiency in any of the tasks
authorized for that FTD. In each case,
the task requires additional training,
either in an aircraft or in a higher level
FSTD, and a proficiency test in an
aircraft or in a higher level FSTD upon
completion of such training. Therefore,
the FAA has not revised the handling
qualities for the level 7 helicopter FTD.
CAE and others suggested modifying
Table D1A, entries 1.a and 1.b, to clarify
the location of bulkheads and the
location and operation of circuit
breakers.
The FAA has included clarifying
language in entry 1.a of Table D1A.
CAE and others suggested removing
the statement ‘‘An SOC is required’’
from Table D1A, entries 1.a, 1.b, 2.a,
6.a.1, 6.a.2, 6.a.3, 6.a.4, 6.a.5, 6.a.6, and
6.b.
The FAA agrees with the commenters
with respect to entries 1.a and 1.b and
has removed the SOC statement because
a visual observation is sufficient.
However, for the remainder of the
entries, the SOC statements are still
necessary because a visual observation
will not reveal the data necessary to
demonstrate and explain compliance
with the specific requirements.
CAE and others suggested including a
requirement for an SOC to explain how
the computer will address the delay
timing requirements for relative
responses in Table D1A, entry 2.c.
The entry preceding 2.c sets forth the
requirement to have a computer (analog
or digital) with the capabilities
necessary to meet the qualification level
sought. At this point, an SOC is
required. The SOC will supply the
information about the delay timing tests.
Therefore, an additional SOC
requirement in entry 2.c is not
necessary.
CAE, HAI, and others suggested
requiring in Table D1A, entry 5, Motion
system, that all FTD levels have a
motion system instead of allowing an
open authorization with the limitation
that, if installed, it may not be
distracting.
The current training equipment for
helicopter FTDs is not designed to
include motion systems. The FAA
recognizes, however, that some sponsors
may wish to include these systems as
part of their training equipment. If a
sponsor elects to install a motion
system, the system must not be
distracting. Further, if the system will
be used for additional training, testing,
or checking credits, it must meet certain
other requirements outlined in
Appendix C. Accordingly, the FAA has
not required helicopter FTDs to have
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
motion systems. However, as proposed,
all level 7 FTDs are required, at the very
least, to have a vibration system.
HAI and others questioned why ‘‘mast
bumping’’ was not authorized for Level
6 FTDs, as it is for Level 7 FTDs.
As noted in entry 5.b of Table D1A,
only Level 7 FTDs are required to have
a vibration system. Because the primary
cue that would alert the pilot to the
onset of mast bumping would be an
increase in the vibration felt from the
rotor system, this task is only authorized
for Level 7 FTDs.
CAE stated that in Table D2A, entry
2.b.3.d, Vertical Control Response, the
augmentation condition under the flight
condition column is not specified,
which is different from the previous
three tests for control response in that
table.
The FAA agrees with the commenter
and has amended the referenced flight
condition column to indicate that the
augmentation condition for the test is
both on and off, as it is for the preceding
three control response tests in Table
D2A.
CAE and others questioned whether
the requirements of FSTD Directive 1
should be extended to helicopter FTDs.
The provisions of FSTD Directive 1
are applicable to those FSTD airport
models currently in existence.
Currently, there are no helicopter FTDs
that have required visual systems.
Therefore, there is no need to extend the
requirements set out in FSTD Directive
1 to helicopter FTDs. The requirements
for airport models are included in
attachment 3 of Appendix D and are
applicable to newly qualified Level 7
helicopter FTDs.
HAI and others questioned the
necessity and cost of requiring Table
D3B, entry 5.f, Effect of Rain Removal
Devices.
The visual system requirement for the
Level 7 helicopter FTD was designed to
mirror the Level C helicopter FFS visual
system requirement, which includes
rain removal devices. This requirement
is necessary to ensure that the FTD
adequately reflects the actual helicopter
being simulated. If the actual helicopter
does not have rain removal devices, the
FTD is not required to demonstrate the
effect of rain removal devices. The FAA
notes that these devices are not always
a ‘‘windshield wiper,’’ but may be highpressure air or an application of rainrepelling fluid.
E. Quality Management System (QMS)
Federal Express, ATA, and others
questioned which Quality Management
System (QMS) would apply when an
FSTD (including FSTDs owned by
foreign entities), is installed in a
PO 00000
Frm 00011
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26487
Training Center with a different QMS,
or if the FSTD is maintained by a
contractor with a different QMS.
The system and processes outlined in
the QMS should enable the sponsor to
monitor compliance with all applicable
regulations and ensure correct
maintenance and performance of the
FSTD in accordance with part 60. Thus,
the sponsor’s QMS must include
provisions to ensure that the FSTD will
only be used when it is in compliance
with the sponsor’s own QMS and the
regulatory requirements of part 60.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others requested that the voluntary
elements for the QMS, as published on
October 30, 2006 (71 FR 63426), be
included in Appendix E of the final
rule. One commenter suggested that the
concept of a ‘‘basic’’ and a ‘‘voluntary’’
QMS be removed and a single QMS be
required.
As noted in the NPRM (72 FR 59604),
the FAA removed the voluntary QMS
from Appendix E. As proposed,
Appendix E sets forth the basic
requirements for a QMS. Although
commenters requested that we include
in part 60 the voluntary program, the
voluntary program does not expand,
further explain, or correspond to
specific regulatory requirements.
Therefore, the FAA has not included the
voluntary program in the final rule.
The ATA, Northwest, and others
questioned the inspection
responsibilities of the NSPM in
evaluating the QMS as opposed to FAA
entities conducting ATOS audits.
The NSPM is responsible for
evaluating the FSTD, including the
QMS associated with the FSTD. The
ATOS inspections determine whether
the incorporation of the FSTD into an
FAA-approved flight training program
provides the necessary tool(s) to
complete the required training program
activities. The FAA has determined that
the ATOS inspections will not include
review of the actual FSTD or the QMS
associated with that FSTD.
Federal Express and others
questioned whether only the
Management Representative (MR)
should receive Quality System training
and brief other personnel on procedures
and suggested that the wording be
changed to allow others, besides the
MR, to brief other personnel. They were
also concerned that the MR, in most
cases, is the Director of Operations.
They also questioned what would be
considered ‘‘appropriate’’ quality
system training.
The FAA does not require that the MR
be the Director of Operations or hold
any other specific position for a
certificate holder. The MR, as
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26488
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
determined by the sponsor, may
delegate his or her responsibilities so
long as the delegation does not
compromise the QMS. If the MR
delegates his or her responsibilities, the
MR must ensure that the person to
whom the MR delegates his or her
responsibilities is capable of adequately
briefing other personnel on QMS
procedures. Further, anyone can receive
QMS training. The FAA, however, is
requiring only that the MR receive QMS
training. The FAA agrees that the word
‘‘appropriate’’ is not necessary in this
context and has removed it.
Federal Express and others
questioned the proposed requirement to
notify the NSPM within 10 working
days of the sponsor becoming aware of
an addition to, or revision of, flightrelated data or airplane systems-related
data used to program or operate a
qualified FSTD. The commenters are
concerned because systems data may
not be provided to the sponsor in a
timely manner. They requested the
notification time be changed to 10
working days of performing a
modification, an addition, or a revision
of FSTD software that affects the flight
or system operations of a qualified
FSTD.
The requirement that the sponsor
must submit notification within 10
calendar days is only a statement that
the sponsor is aware that an addition to,
amendment of, or a revision of data that
may relate to FFS performance or
handling characteristics is available.
This notification does not require any
information regarding how the change is
to be accomplished, nor does it commit
the sponsor to implementing the
particular change. Rather, information
regarding the sponsor’s proposed course
of action must be submitted within 45
calendar days of the sponsor becoming
aware of the data. Therefore, the FAA
did not change the notification time
requirement as requested by the
commenters.
The ATA and others suggested the
FAA set forth the minimum
requirements for a discrepancy
prioritization system or include a note
in Appendix E (QMS Systems) that a
prioritization system is a required
element in an acceptable QMS.
There is no requirement for the
development or the implementation of a
discrepancy prioritization system for the
correction of FSTD discrepancies. Such
a system is completely voluntary. If the
sponsor elects to develop such a system,
the NSPM must approve the system. As
stated in Note 1 to entry E1.31.b of
Appendix E, if a sponsor has an
approved prioritization system, the
QMS must describe how discrepancies
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
are prioritized, what actions are taken,
and how the sponsor will notify the
NSPM if a missing, malfunctioning, or
inoperative component (MMI) has not
been repaired or replaced within the
specified timeframe. Because this
prioritization system is voluntary, the
FAA has not adopted the changes.
F. Miscellaneous
United, the ATA, and others
suggested that the FAA clarify and
confirm that elements of the QPS
appendices that go beyond current
requirements not apply to FSTDs
qualified before May 30, 2008. Also, the
commenters recommended continuing
to allow currently qualified FSTDs to be
updated under the guidance effective
when the simulator was initially
qualified.
Except for FSTD Directive 1, the rule
as proposed does not require currently
qualified FSTDs to meet the
requirements of the QPS Appendices A–
D, attachments 1, 2, and 3, as long as the
FSTD continues to meet the test
requirements of its original qualification
(see paragraph 13, subparagraph b of
Appendices A–D). In response to
comments, the FAA has clarified that
FSTD updates will continue to be
allowed under the standards in the
current Master Qualification Test Guide
(MQTG) for that FSTD.
CAE and others noted that the
statement ‘‘a subjective test is required’’
in Table C1A is inconsistent with
international standards.
The references to ‘‘a subjective test is
required’’ and ‘‘an objective test is
required’’ in Tables A1A, B1A, C1A,
and D1A were redundant of the
requirements in Attachments 2 and 3 in
Appendices A–D. Therefore, we have
removed these references. The objective
and subjective test requirements in
Attachments 2 and 3 in Appendices A–
D are consistent with international
standards.
The ATA, Northwest, Boeing, CAE,
and others recommended adding
references to the Airplane Flight Manual
(AFM) in the regulatory requirements
sections of the QPS appendices.
The FAA is not referencing the AFM
as requested because the AFM provides
specific standards based on aircraft
type. Where the AFM provides helpful
data, it may be used as guidance and as
an additional data source, if
appropriate.
CAE and others expressed concern
that correcting known data calibration
errors may not be permitted because of
the language contained in Appendix A,
Attachment 2, paragraph 9, (FSTD)
Objective Data Requirements,
subparagraph b(5).
PO 00000
Frm 00012
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
The FAA acknowledges that the
correction of recognized data calibration
errors is often accomplished in data
collection and reduction exercises.
Therefore, the FAA has added language
where appropriate in Appendices A–D
to permit the correction of known data
calibration errors provided that an
explanation of the methods used to
correct the errors appears in the QTG.
CAE requested the FAA explain how
percentages are calculated when
tolerances are expressed as a percentage
in attachment 2, paragraph 2.b, of
Appendices A–D.
The FAA has included an explanation
of how these percentages are calculated
in Appendices A–D, attachment 2,
paragraph 2.b.
The ATA, Northwest, and others
expressed concern over the submission
of an FSTD modification notification to
the NSPM as described in Appendix A,
Paragraph 17, subparagraph a. The
commenters were concerned that the
results of the modification might not be
known until after the notice of the
modification is submitted to the NSPM.
The notification is not intended to be
a detailed summary of each specific
result. The notification must simply
include a plan of action and a general
description of the expected results.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and
others requested clarification of the use
of the term MMI component. Some
sought clarification as to whether an
MMI component was a hardware
component, a software component, or a
component that directly affected the
training mission of the FSTD. In
addition, some commenters requested
an inclusive list of components such as:
Flight deck hardware, a system line
replaceable unit (LRU) of hardware or
software, or a major FSTD system.
Further, commenters asked who is
responsible for determining whether an
MMI component is necessary for a
particular maneuver, procedure, or task.
The FAA has determined it is
unnecessary to further clarify the
meaning of missing, malfunctioning, or
inoperative component. These words
have their typical dictionary meanings.
In this rule, an FSTD component could
be a piece of hardware, a piece of
software that performs as a piece of
hardware (e.g., software functioning as
an autopilot), or a piece of software that
is used in the operation of the simulated
aircraft or of the FSTD itself. Each FSTD
component is present to serve a
purpose—whether that purpose is to
allow the simulation to work or to
simulate a component of the aircraft
being simulated. Since an FSTD is used
to train, test, or check flight
crewmembers, if one or more
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
component of the FSTD becomes
missing, is not working, or is not
working correctly, there would be some
impact on the function of the FSTD.
Developing an inclusive list of
components that are necessary for a
particular maneuver, procedure, or task
is impractical because of the unique
characteristics of each FSTD and
unnecessary because of the obvious
nature and effect of an MMI component
on the overall operation of the FSTD.
We have added language to the
information in paragraph 18, Operation
with Missing, Malfunctioning, or
Inoperative Components (§ 60.25) in
Appendices A–D to clarify that it is the
responsibility of the instructor, check
airman, or representative of the
administrator conducting training,
testing, or checking, to exercise
reasonable and prudent judgment to
determine whether an MMI component
is necessary for a particular maneuver,
procedure, or task.
Boeing and others commented on the
repetition of the definitions of the
weight ranges (near maximum, medium,
and light). In addition to appearing in
Appendix F, the definitions also appear
in Attachment 2 of Appendices A–D.
The commenters are concerned that the
repetition may cause confusion in the
application of these ranges. Further,
CAE stated that the terms may not apply
to light-class helicopters.
The FAA has removed the definitions
of these terms from the QPS
Requirement in Appendices A–D
because they are defined in Appendix F.
In some cases, these gross weight ranges
are not within the appropriate ranges for
light-class helicopters. Therefore, in
Appendices C and D, we have added a
statement that these terms may not be
appropriate for light-class helicopters.
Prior coordination with the NSPM is
required to determine the acceptable
gross weight ranges for light-class
helicopters.
The ATA, Northwest, and others
questioned how the FAA could use
Personally Identifiable Information (PII)
for investigation, compliance, or
enforcement purposes and then bring
enforcement action against a person, not
certificated by the FAA, who may have
worked on an FSTD.
The FAA must ensure that FSTDs
used by flight crewmembers for training,
testing, and checking purposes are
maintained and used properly and in
accordance with all regulatory
requirements. If the FAA finds grounds
for investigation or enforcement action,
the FAA may request, administratively
subpoena, or seek a court order for the
sponsor’s records, which may contain
PII. The FAA may use those records,
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
and any PII contained therein, in the
course of inspection, investigation, and
enforcement. Furthermore, if, for
example, the FAA discovered during the
course of such an investigation that an
individual made false or misleading
statements, the FAA could use its
statutory and regulatory authority to
issue a cease and desist order to prohibit
the individual from conducting any
future maintenance on any FSTD,
regardless of whether he or she holds an
FAA certificate.
Paperwork Reduction Act
Information collection requirements
associated with this final rule have been
approved previously by the Office of
Management and Budget (OMB) under
the provisions of the Paperwork
Reduction Act of 1995 (44 U.S.C.
3507(d)) and have been assigned OMB
Control Number 2120–0680.
International Compatibility
In keeping with U.S. obligations
under the Convention on International
Civil Aviation, it is FAA policy to
comply with ICAO Standards and
Recommended Practices to the
maximum extent practicable. The FAA
has reviewed the corresponding ICAO
Standards and Recommended Practices
and has identified no differences with
these regulations.
III. Regulatory Evaluation, Regulatory
Flexibility Determination, International
Trade Impact Assessment, and
Unfunded Mandates Assessment
Changes to Federal regulations must
undergo several economic analyses.
First, Executive Order 12866 directs that
each Federal agency shall propose or
adopt a regulation only upon a reasoned
determination that the benefits of the
intended regulation justify its costs.
Second, the Regulatory Flexibility Act
of 1980 (Pub. L. 96–354) requires
agencies to analyze the economic
impact of regulatory changes on small
entities. Third, the Trade Agreements
Act (Pub. L. 96–39) prohibits agencies
from setting standards that create
unnecessary obstacles to the foreign
commerce of the United States. In
developing U.S. standards, the Trade
Act requires agencies to consider
international standards and, where
appropriate, that they be the basis of
U.S. standards. Fourth, the Unfunded
Mandates Reform Act of 1995 (Pub. L.
104–4) requires agencies to prepare a
written assessment of the costs, benefits,
and other effects of proposed or final
rules that include a Federal mandate
likely to result in the expenditure by
State, local, or tribal governments, in the
aggregate, or by the private sector, of
PO 00000
Frm 00013
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26489
$100 million or more annually (adjusted
for inflation with base year of 1995).
This portion of the preamble
summarizes the FAA’s analysis of the
economic impacts of this rule.
Department of Transportation Order
DOT 2100.5 prescribes policies and
procedures for simplification, analysis,
and review of regulations. If the
expected cost impact is so minimal that
a proposed or final rule does not
warrant a full evaluation, this order
permits that a statement to that effect
and the basis for it to be included in the
preamble. Such a determination has
been made for this final rule. The
reasoning for this determination
follows:
This final rule codifies existing
practice by requiring all existing FSTD
visual scenes beyond the number
required for qualification to meet
specified requirements. The final rule
also reorganizes certain sections of the
QPS appendices and provides
additional information on validation
tests, established parameters for
tolerances, acceptable data formats, and
the use of alternative data sources. The
changes ensure that the training and
testing environment is accurate and
realistic, codify existing practice, and
provide greater harmonization with the
international standards document for
simulation. Except for the amendment
to codify existing practice regarding
certain visual scene requirements, these
technical requirements do not apply to
simulators qualified before May 30,
2008. The impact of this final rule
results in minimal to no cost increases
for manufacturers and sponsors.
The FAA has, therefore, determined
that this rule is not a ‘‘significant
regulatory action’’ as defined in section
3(f) of Executive Order 12866, and is not
‘‘significant’’ as defined in DOT’s
Regulatory Policies and Procedures.
Regulatory Flexibility Determination
The Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980
(Pub. L. 96–354) (RFA) establishes ‘‘as a
principle of regulatory issuance that
agencies shall endeavor, consistent with
the objectives of the rule and of
applicable statutes, to fit regulatory and
informational requirements to the scale
of the businesses, organizations, and
governmental jurisdictions subject to
regulation. To achieve this principle,
agencies are required to solicit and
consider flexible regulatory proposals
and to explain the rationale for their
actions to assure that such proposals are
given serious consideration.’’ The RFA
covers a wide range of small entities,
including small businesses, not-forprofit organizations, and small
governmental jurisdictions.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26490
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Agencies must perform a review to
determine whether a rule will have a
significant economic impact on a
substantial number of small entities. If
the agency determines that it will, the
agency must prepare a regulatory
flexibility analysis as described in the
RFA.
However, if an agency determines that
a rule is not expected to have a
significant economic impact on a
substantial number of small entities,
section 605(b) of the RFA provides that
the head of the agency may so certify
and a regulatory flexibility analysis is
not required. The certification must
include a statement providing the
factual basis for this determination, and
the reasoning should be clear.
This final rule codifies existing
practice by requiring all existing FSTD
visual scenes beyond the number
required for qualification to meet
specified requirements. The final rule
also reorganizes certain sections of the
QPS appendices and provides
additional information on validation
tests, established parameters for
tolerances, acceptable data formats, and
the use of alternative data sources. The
changes ensure that the training and
testing environment is accurate and
more realistic, codify existing practice,
and provide greater harmonization with
the international standards document
for simulation. Except for the
amendment to codify existing practice
regarding certain visual scene
requirements, these technical
requirements do not apply to simulators
qualified before May 30, 2008. The
impact of this rule results in minimal or
no cost for manufacturers and sponsors.
Therefore, as the individual delegated
with authority to sign this final rule on
behalf of the Acting Administrator of
the FAA, I certify that this rule does not
have a significant economic impact on
a substantial number of small entities.
International Trade Impact Assessment
The Trade Agreements Act of 1979
(Pub. L. 96–39) prohibits Federal
agencies from establishing any
standards or engaging in related
activities that create unnecessary
obstacles to the foreign commerce of the
United States. Legitimate domestic
objectives, such as safety, are not
considered unnecessary obstacles. The
statute also requires consideration of
international standards and, where
appropriate, that they be the basis for
U.S. standards. The FAA has assessed
the effect of this rule and has
determined that it imposes the same
costs on domestic and international
entities and thus has a neutral trade
impact.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
Unfunded Mandates Assessment
Title II of the Unfunded Mandates
Reform Act of 1995 (Pub. L. 104–4)
requires each Federal agency to prepare
a written statement assessing the effects
of any Federal mandate in a proposed or
final agency rule that may result in an
expenditure of $100 million or more
(adjusted annually for inflation with the
base year 1995) in any one year by State,
local, and tribal governments, in the
aggregate, or by the private sector; such
a mandate is deemed to be a ‘‘significant
regulatory action.’’ The FAA currently
uses an inflation-adjusted value of
$136.1 million in lieu of $100 million.
This rule does not contain such a
mandate.
Executive Order 13132, Federalism
The FAA has analyzed this final rule
under the principles and criteria of
Executive Order 13132, Federalism. We
determined that this action will not
have a substantial direct effect on the
States, or the relationship between the
national Government and the States, or
on the distribution of power and
responsibilities among the various
levels of government, and, therefore,
does not have federalism implications.
Environmental Analysis
FAA Order 1050.1E identifies FAA
actions that are categorically excluded
from preparation of an environmental
assessment or environmental impact
statement under the National
Environmental Policy Act in the
absence of extraordinary circumstances.
The FAA has determined this proposed
rule action qualifies for the categorical
exclusion identified in paragraph 312f
and involves no extraordinary
circumstances.
Regulations That Significantly Affect
Energy Supply, Distribution, or Use
The FAA has analyzed this proposed
rule under Executive Order 13211,
Actions Concerning Regulations that
Significantly Affect Energy Supply,
Distribution, or Use (May 18, 2001). We
have determined that it is not a
‘‘significant energy action’’ under the
executive order because it is not a
‘‘significant regulatory action’’ under
Executive Order 12866, and it is not
likely to have a significant adverse effect
on the supply, distribution, or use of
energy.
Availability of Rulemaking Documents
You can get an electronic copy of
rulemaking documents using the
Internet by—
1. Searching the Federal eRulemaking
Portal (https://www.regulations.gov);
PO 00000
Frm 00014
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
2. Visiting the FAA’s Regulations and
Policies Web page at https://
www.faa.gov/regulations_policies/; or
3. Accessing the Government Printing
Office’s Web page at https://
www.gpoaccess.gov/fr/.
You can also get a copy by sending a
request to the Federal Aviation
Administration, Office of Rulemaking,
ARM–1, 800 Independence Avenue,
SW., Washington, DC 20591, or by
calling (202) 267–9680. Make sure to
identify the amendment number or
docket number of this rulemaking.
Anyone is able to search the
electronic form of all comments
received into any of our dockets by the
name of the individual submitting the
comment (or signing the comment, if
submitted on behalf of an association,
business, labor union, etc.). You may
review DOT’s complete Privacy Act
statement in the Federal Register
published on April 11, 2000 (Volume
65, Number 70; Pages 19477–78) or you
may visit https://DocketsInfo.dot.gov.
Small Business Regulatory Enforcement
Fairness Act
The Small Business Regulatory
Enforcement Fairness Act (SBREFA) of
1996 requires FAA to comply with
small entity requests for information or
advice about compliance with statutes
and regulations within its jurisdiction. If
you are a small entity and you have a
question regarding this document, you
may contact your local FAA official, or
the person listed under the FOR FURTHER
INFORMATION CONTACT heading at the
beginning of the preamble. You can find
out more about SBREFA on the Internet
at https://www.faa.gov/
regulations_policies/rulemaking/
sbre_act/.
List of Subjects in 14 CFR Part 60
Airmen, Aviation safety, Reporting
and recordkeeping requirements.
IV. The Amendment
In consideration of the foregoing, the
Federal Aviation Administration
amends Chapter I of Title 14, Code of
Federal Regulations as follows:
I
PART 60—FLIGHT SIMULATION
TRAINING DEVICE INITIAL AND
CONTINUING QUALIFICATION AND
USE
1. The authority citation for part 60
continues to read as follows:
I
Authority: 49 U.S.C. 106(g), 40113, and
44701.
2. Part 60 is amended by revising
appendices A–F to read as follows:
I
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
Appendix A to Part 60—Qualification
Performance Standards for Airplane
Full Flight Simulators
Attachment 6 to Appendix A to Part 60—
FSTD Directives Applicable to Airplane
Flight Simulators.
lllllllllllllllllllll
End Information
Begin Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
This appendix establishes the standards for
Airplane FFS evaluation and qualification.
The NSPM is responsible for the
development, application, and
implementation of the standards contained
within this appendix. The procedures and
criteria specified in this appendix will be
used by the NSPM, or a person assigned by
the NSPM, when conducting airplane FFS
evaluations.
Table of Contents
1. Introduction.
2. Applicability (§§ 60.1 and 60.2).
3. Definitions (§ 60.3).
4. Qualification Performance Standards
(§ 60.4).
5. Quality Management System (§ 60.5).
6. Sponsor Qualification Requirements
(§ 60.7).
7. Additional Responsibilities of the Sponsor
(§ 60.9).
8. FFS Use (§ 60.11).
9. FFS Objective Data Requirements (§ 60.13).
10. Special Equipment and Personnel
Requirements for Qualification of the
FFS (§ 60.14).
11. Initial (and Upgrade) Qualification
Requirements (§ 60.15).
12. Additional Qualifications for a Currently
Qualified FFS (§ 60.16).
13. Previously Qualified FFSs (§ 60.17).
14. Inspection, Continuing Qualification
Evaluation, and Maintenance
Requirements (§ 60.19).
15. Logging FFS Discrepancies (§ 60.20).
16. Interim Qualification of FFSs for New
Airplane Types or Models (§ 60.21).
17. Modifications to FFSs (§ 60.23).
18. Operations With Missing,
Malfunctioning, or Inoperative
Components (§ 60.25).
19. Automatic Loss of Qualification and
Procedures for Restoration of
Qualification (§ 60.27).
20. Other Losses of Qualification and
Procedures for Restoration of
Qualification (§ 60.29).
21. Record Keeping and Reporting (§ 60.31).
22. Applications, Logbooks, Reports, and
Records: Fraud, Falsification, or
Incorrect Statements (§ 60.33).
23. Specific FFS Compliance Requirements
(§ 60.35).
24. [Reserved]
25. FFS Qualification on the Basis of a
Bilateral Aviation Safety Agreement
(BASA) (§ 60.37).
Attachment 1 to Appendix A to Part 60—
General Simulator Requirements.
Attachment 2 to Appendix A to Part 60—FFS
Objective Tests.
Attachment 3 to Appendix A to Part 60—
Simulator Subjective Evaluation.
Attachment 4 to Appendix A to Part 60—
Sample Documents.
Attachment 5 to Appendix A to Part 60—
Simulator Qualification Requirements
for Windshear Training Program Use.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
1. Introduction
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
a. This appendix contains background
information as well as regulatory and
informative material as described later in this
section. To assist the reader in determining
what areas are required and what areas are
permissive, the text in this appendix is
divided into two sections: ‘‘QPS
Requirements’’ and ‘‘Information.’’ The QPS
Requirements sections contain details
regarding compliance with the part 60 rule
language. These details are regulatory, but are
found only in this appendix. The Information
sections contain material that is advisory in
nature, and designed to give the user general
information about the regulation.
b. Questions regarding the contents of this
publication should be sent to the U.S.
Department of Transportation, Federal
Aviation Administration, Flight Standards
Service, National Simulator Program Staff,
AFS–205, 100 Hartsfield Centre Parkway,
Suite 400, Atlanta, Georgia 30354. Telephone
contact numbers for the NSP are: Phone,
404–832–4700; fax, 404–761–8906. The
general e-mail address for the NSP office is:
9-aso-avr-sim-team@faa.gov. The NSP
Internet Web site address is: https://
www.faa.gov/safety/programs_initiatives/
aircraft_aviation/nsp/. On this Web site you
will find an NSP personnel list with
telephone and e-mail contact information for
each NSP staff member, a list of qualified
flight simulation devices, advisory circulars
(ACs), a description of the qualification
process, NSP policy, and an NSP ‘‘In-Works’’
section. Also linked from this site are
additional information sources, handbook
bulletins, frequently asked questions, a
listing and text of the Federal Aviation
Regulations, Flight Standards Inspector’s
handbooks, and other FAA links.
c. The NSPM encourages the use of
electronic media for all communication,
including any record, report, request, test, or
statement required by this appendix. The
electronic media used must have adequate
security provisions and be acceptable to the
NSPM. The NSPM recommends inquiries on
system compatibility, and minimum system
requirements are also included on the NSP
Web site.
d. Related Reading References.
(1) 14 CFR part 60.
(2) 14 CFR part 61.
(3) 14 CFR part 63.
(4) 14 CFR part 119.
(5) 14 CFR part 121.
(6) 14 CFR part 125.
(7) 14 CFR part 135.
(8) 14 CFR part 141.
(9) 14 CFR part 142.
(10) AC 120–28, as amended, Criteria for
Approval of Category III Landing Weather
Minima.
PO 00000
Frm 00015
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26491
(11) AC 120–29, as amended, Criteria for
Approving Category I and Category II
Landing Minima for part 121 operators.
(12) AC 120–35, as amended, Line
Operational Simulations: Line-Oriented
Flight Training, Special Purpose Operational
Training, Line Operational Evaluation.
(13) AC 120–40, as amended, Airplane
Simulator Qualification.
(14) AC 120–41, as amended, Criteria for
Operational Approval of Airborne Wind
Shear Alerting and Flight Guidance Systems.
(15) AC 120–57, as amended, Surface
Movement Guidance and Control System
(SMGCS).
(16) AC 150/5300–13, as amended, Airport
Design.
(17) AC 150/5340–1, as amended,
Standards for Airport Markings.
(18) AC 150/5340–4, as amended,
Installation Details for Runway Centerline
Touchdown Zone Lighting Systems.
(19) AC 150/5340–19, as amended,
Taxiway Centerline Lighting System.
(20) AC 150/5340–24, as amended,
Runway and Taxiway Edge Lighting System.
(21) AC 150/5345–28, as amended,
Precision Approach Path Indicator (PAPI)
Systems.
(22) International Air Transport
Association document, ‘‘Flight Simulator
Design and Performance Data Requirements,’’
as amended.
(23) AC 25–7, as amended, Flight Test
Guide for Certification of Transport Category
Airplanes.
(24) AC 23–8, as amended, Flight Test
Guide for Certification of Part 23 Airplanes.
(25) International Civil Aviation
Organization (ICAO) Manual of Criteria for
the Qualification of Flight Simulators, as
amended.
(26) Airplane Flight Simulator Evaluation
Handbook, Volume I, as amended and
Volume II, as amended, The Royal
Aeronautical Society, London, UK.
(27) FAA Publication FAA–S–8081 series
(Practical Test Standards for Airline
Transport Pilot Certificate, Type Ratings,
Commercial Pilot, and Instrument Ratings).
(28) The FAA Aeronautical Information
Manual (AIM). An electronic version of the
AIM is on the Internet at https://www.faa.gov/
atpubs.
(29) Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (ARINC)
document number 436, titled Guidelines For
Electronic Qualification Test Guide (as
amended).
(30) Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (ARINC)
document 610, Guidance for Design and
Integration of Aircraft Avionics Equipment in
Simulators (as amended).
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
2. Applicability (§§ 60.1 and 60.2)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.1, Applicability, or to
§ 60.2, Applicability of sponsor rules to
persons who are not sponsors and who are
engaged in certain unauthorized activities.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26492
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
3. Definitions (§ 60.3)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
See Appendix F of this part for a list of
definitions and abbreviations from part 1 and
part 60, including the appropriate
appendices of part 60.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
4. Qualification Performance Standards
(§ 60.4)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.4, Qualification
Performance Standards.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
5. Quality Management System (§ 60.5)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
See Appendix E of this part for additional
regulatory and informational material
regarding Quality Management Systems.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
6. Sponsor Qualification Requirements
(§ 60.7)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
a. The intent of the language in § 60.7(b) is
to have a specific FFS, identified by the
sponsor, used at least once in an FAAapproved flight training program for the
airplane simulated during the 12-month
period described. The identification of the
specific FFS may change from one 12-month
period to the next 12-month period as long
as the sponsor sponsors and uses at least one
FFS at least once during the prescribed
period. No minimum number of hours or
minimum FFS periods are required.
b. The following examples describe
acceptable operational practices:
(1) Example One.
(a) A sponsor is sponsoring a single,
specific FFS for its own use, in its own
facility or elsewhere—this single FFS forms
the basis for the sponsorship. The sponsor
uses that FFS at least once in each 12-month
period in the sponsor’s FAA-approved flight
training program for the airplane simulated.
This 12-month period is established
according to the following schedule:
(i) If the FFS was qualified prior to May 30,
2008, the 12-month period begins on the date
of the first continuing qualification
evaluation conducted in accordance with
§ 60.19 after May 30, 2008, and continues for
each subsequent 12-month period;
(ii) A device qualified on or after May 30,
2008, will be required to undergo an initial
or upgrade evaluation in accordance with
§ 60.15. Once the initial or upgrade
VerDate Aug<31>2005
00:13 May 09, 2008
Jkt 214001
evaluation is complete, the first continuing
qualification evaluation will be conducted
within 6 months. The 12-month continuing
qualification evaluation cycle begins on that
date and continues for each subsequent 12month period.
(b) There is no minimum number of hours
of FFS use required.
(c) The identification of the specific FFS
may change from one 12-month period to the
next 12-month period as long as the sponsor
sponsors and uses at least one FFS at least
once during the prescribed period.
(2) Example Two.
(a) A sponsor sponsors an additional
number of FFSs, in its facility or elsewhere.
Each additionally sponsored FFS must be—
(i) Used by the sponsor in the sponsor’s
FAA-approved flight training program for the
airplane simulated (as described in
§ 60.7(d)(1));
OR
(ii) Used by another FAA certificate holder
in that other certificate holder’s FAAapproved flight training program for the
airplane simulated (as described in
§ 60.7(d)(1)). This 12-month period is
established in the same manner as in
example one;
OR
(iii) Provided a statement each year from a
qualified pilot (after having flown the
airplane, not the subject FFS or another FFS,
during the preceding 12-month period),
stating that the subject FFS’s performance
and handling qualities represent the airplane
(as described in § 60.7(d)(2)). This statement
is provided at least once in each 12-month
period established in the same manner as in
example one.
(b) No minimum number of hours of FFS
use is required.
(3) Example Three.
(a) A sponsor in New York (in this
example, a Part 142 certificate holder)
establishes ‘‘satellite’’ training centers in
Chicago and Moscow.
(b) The satellite function means that the
Chicago and Moscow centers must operate
under the New York center’s certificate (in
accordance with all of the New York center’s
practices, procedures, and policies; e.g.,
instructor and/or technician training/
checking requirements, record keeping, QMS
program).
(c) All of the FFSs in the Chicago and
Moscow centers could be dry-leased (i.e., the
certificate holder does not have and use
FAA-approved flight training programs for
the FFSs in the Chicago and Moscow centers)
because—
(i) Each FFS in the Chicago center and each
FFS in the Moscow center is used at least
once each 12-month period by another FAA
certificate holder in that other certificate
holder’s FAA-approved flight training
program for the airplane (as described in
§ 60.7(d)(1));
OR
(ii) A statement is obtained from a
qualified pilot (having flown the airplane,
not the subject FFS or another FFS, during
the preceding 12-month period) stating that
the performance and handling qualities of
each FFS in the Chicago and Moscow centers
represents the airplane (as described in
§ 60.7(d)(2)).
PO 00000
Frm 00016
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
7. Additional Responsibilities of the Sponsor
(§ 60.9)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
The phrase ‘‘as soon as practicable’’ in
§ 60.9(a) means without unnecessarily
disrupting or delaying beyond a reasonable
time the training, evaluation, or experience
being conducted in the FFS.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
8. FFS Use (§ 60.11)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.11, Simulator Use.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
9. FFS Objective Data Requirements (§ 60.13)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. Flight test data used to validate FFS
performance and handling qualities must
have been gathered in accordance with a
flight test program containing the following:
(1) A flight test plan consisting of:
(a) The maneuvers and procedures
required for aircraft certification and
simulation programming and validation.
(b) For each maneuver or procedure—
(i) The procedures and control input the
flight test pilot and/or engineer used.
(ii) The atmospheric and environmental
conditions.
(iii) The initial flight conditions.
(iv) The airplane configuration, including
weight and center of gravity.
(v) The data to be gathered.
(vi) All other information necessary to
recreate the flight test conditions in the FFS.
(2) Appropriately qualified flight test
personnel.
(3) An understanding of the accuracy of the
data to be gathered using appropriate
alternative data sources, procedures, and
instrumentation that is traceable to a
recognized standard as described in
Attachment 2, Table A2E of this appendix.
(4) Appropriate and sufficient data
acquisition equipment or system(s),
including appropriate data reduction and
analysis methods and techniques, as would
be acceptable to the FAA’s Aircraft
Certification Service.
b. The data, regardless of source, must be
presented as follows:
(1) In a format that supports the FFS
validation process.
(2) In a manner that is clearly readable and
annotated correctly and completely.
(3) With resolution sufficient to determine
compliance with the tolerances set forth in
Attachment 2, Table A2A of this appendix.
(4) With any necessary instructions or
other details provided, such as yaw damper
or throttle position.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
(5) Without alteration, adjustments, or bias.
Data may be corrected to address known data
calibration errors provided that an
explanation of the methods used to correct
the errors appears in the QTG. The corrected
data may be re-scaled, digitized, or otherwise
manipulated to fit the desired presentation.
c. After completion of any additional flight
test, a flight test report must be submitted in
support of the validation data. The report
must contain sufficient data and rationale to
support qualification of the FFS at the level
requested.
d. As required by § 60.13(f), the sponsor
must notify the NSPM when it becomes
aware that an addition to, an amendment to,
or a revision of data that may relate to FFS
performance or handling characteristics is
available. The data referred to in this
paragraph is data used to validate the
performance, handling qualities, or other
characteristics of the aircraft, including data
related to any relevant changes occurring
after the type certificate was issued. The
sponsor must—
(1) Within 10 calendar days, notify the
NSPM of the existence of this data; and
(2) Within 45 calendar days, notify the
NSPM of—
(a) The schedule to incorporate this data
into the FFS; or
(b) The reason for not incorporating this
data into the FFS.
e. In those cases where the objective test
results authorize a ‘‘snapshot test’’ or a
‘‘series of snapshot tests’’ results in lieu of a
time-history result, the sponsor or other data
provider must ensure that a steady state
condition exists at the instant of time
captured by the ‘‘snapshot.’’ The steady state
condition must exist from 4 seconds prior to,
through 1 second following, the instant of
time captured by the snapshot.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
f. The FFS sponsor is encouraged to
maintain a liaison with the manufacturer of
the aircraft being simulated (or with the
holder of the aircraft type certificate for the
aircraft being simulated if the manufacturer
is no longer in business), and, if appropriate,
with the person having supplied the aircraft
data package for the FFS in order to facilitate
the notification required by § 60.13(f).
g. It is the intent of the NSPM that for new
aircraft entering service, at a point well in
advance of preparation of the Qualification
Test Guide (QTG), the sponsor should submit
to the NSPM for approval, a descriptive
document (see Table A2C, Sample Validation
Data Roadmap for Airplanes) containing the
plan for acquiring the validation data,
including data sources. This document
should clearly identify sources of data for all
required tests, a description of the validity of
these data for a specific engine type and
thrust rating configuration, and the revision
levels of all avionics affecting the
performance or flying qualities of the aircraft.
Additionally, this document should provide
other information, such as the rationale or
explanation for cases where data or data
parameters are missing, instances where
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
engineering simulation data are used or
where flight test methods require further
explanations. It should also provide a brief
narrative describing the cause and effect of
any deviation from data requirements. The
aircraft manufacturer may provide this
document.
h. There is no requirement for any flight
test data supplier to submit a flight test plan
or program prior to gathering flight test data.
However, the NSPM notes that inexperienced
data gatherers often provide data that is
irrelevant, improperly marked, or lacking
adequate justification for selection. Other
problems include inadequate information
regarding initial conditions or test
maneuvers. The NSPM has been forced to
refuse these data submissions as validation
data for an FFS evaluation. It is for this
reason that the NSPM recommends that any
data supplier not previously experienced in
this area review the data necessary for
programming and for validating the
performance of the FFS, and discuss the
flight test plan anticipated for acquiring such
data with the NSPM well in advance of
commencing the flight tests.
i. The NSPM will consider, on a case-bycase basis, whether to approve supplemental
validation data derived from flight data
recording systems, such as a Quick Access
Recorder or Flight Data Recorder.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
10. Special Equipment and Personnel
Requirements for Qualification of the FFSs
(§ 60.14)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
a. In the event that the NSPM determines
that special equipment or specifically
qualified persons will be required to conduct
an evaluation, the NSPM will make every
attempt to notify the sponsor at least one (1)
week, but in no case less than 72 hours, in
advance of the evaluation. Examples of
special equipment include spot photometers,
flight control measurement devices, and
sound analyzers. Examples of specially
qualified personnel include individuals
specifically qualified to install or use any
special equipment when its use is required.
b. Examples of a special evaluation include
an evaluation conducted after an FFS is
moved, at the request of the TPAA, or as a
result of comments received from users of the
FFS that raise questions about the continued
qualification or use of the FFS.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
11. Initial (and Upgrade) Qualification
Requirements (§ 60.15)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. In order to be qualified at a particular
qualification level, the FFS must:
(1) Meet the general requirements listed in
Attachment 1 of this appendix;
(2) Meet the objective testing requirements
listed in Attachment 2 of this appendix; and
PO 00000
Frm 00017
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26493
(3) Satisfactorily accomplish the subjective
tests listed in Attachment 3 of this appendix.
b. The request described in § 60.15(a) must
include all of the following:
(1) A statement that the FFS meets all of
the applicable provisions of this part and all
applicable provisions of the QPS.
(2) A confirmation that the sponsor will
forward to the NSPM the statement described
in § 60.15(b) in such time as to be received
no later than 5 business days prior to the
scheduled evaluation and may be forwarded
to the NSPM via traditional or electronic
means.
(3) A QTG, acceptable to the NSPM, that
includes all of the following:
(a) Objective data obtained from traditional
aircraft testing or another approved source.
(b) Correlating objective test results
obtained from the performance of the FFS as
prescribed in the appropriate QPS.
(c) The result of FFS subjective tests
prescribed in the appropriate QPS.
(d) A description of the equipment
necessary to perform the evaluation for initial
qualification and the continuing qualification
evaluations.
c. The QTG described in paragraph (a)(3)
of this section, must provide the documented
proof of compliance with the simulator
objective tests in Attachment 2, Table A2A of
this appendix.
d. The QTG is prepared and submitted by
the sponsor, or the sponsor’s agent on behalf
of the sponsor, to the NSPM for review and
approval, and must include, for each
objective test:
(1) Parameters, tolerances, and flight
conditions;
(2) Pertinent and complete instructions for
the conduct of automatic and manual tests;
(3) A means of comparing the FFS test
results to the objective data;
(4) Any other information as necessary, to
assist in the evaluation of the test results;
(5) Other information appropriate to the
qualification level of the FFS.
e. The QTG described in paragraphs (a)(3)
and (b) of this section, must include the
following:
(1) A QTG cover page with sponsor and
FAA approval signature blocks (see
Attachment 4, Figure A4C, of this appendix
for a sample QTG cover page).
(2) A continuing qualification evaluation
requirements page. This page will be used by
the NSPM to establish and record the
frequency with which continuing
qualification evaluations must be conducted
and any subsequent changes that may be
determined by the NSPM in accordance with
§ 60.19. See Attachment 4, Figure A4G, of
this appendix for a sample Continuing
Qualification Evaluation Requirements page.
(3) An FFS information page that provides
the information listed in this paragraph (see
Attachment 4, Figure A4B, of this appendix
for a sample FFS information page). For
convertible FFSs, the sponsor must submit a
separate page for each configuration of the
FFS.
(a) The sponsor’s FFS identification
number or code.
(b) The airplane model and series being
simulated.
(c) The aerodynamic data revision number
or reference.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26494
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
(d) The source of the basic aerodynamic
model and the aerodynamic coefficient data
used to modify the basic model.
(e) The engine model(s) and its data
revision number or reference.
(f) The flight control data revision number
or reference.
(g) The flight management system
identification and revision level.
(h) The FFS model and manufacturer.
(i) The date of FFS manufacture.
(j) The FFS computer identification.
(k) The visual system model and
manufacturer, including display type.
(l) The motion system type and
manufacturer, including degrees of freedom.
(4) A Table of Contents.
(5) A log of revisions and a list of effective
pages.
(6) A list of all relevant data references.
(7) A glossary of terms and symbols used
(including sign conventions and units).
(8) Statements of Compliance and
Capability (SOCs) with certain requirements.
(9) Recording procedures or equipment
required to accomplish the objective tests.
(10) The following information for each
objective test designated in Attachment 2,
Table A2A, of this appendix as applicable to
the qualification level sought:
(a) Name of the test.
(b) Objective of the test.
(c) Initial conditions.
(d) Manual test procedures.
(e) Automatic test procedures (if
applicable).
(f) Method for evaluating FFS objective test
results.
(g) List of all relevant parameters driven or
constrained during the automatically
conducted test(s).
(h) List of all relevant parameters driven or
constrained during the manually conducted
test(s).
(i) Tolerances for relevant parameters.
(j) Source of Validation Data (document
and page number).
(k) Copy of the Validation Data (if located
in a separate binder, a cross reference for the
identification and page number for pertinent
data location must be provided).
(l) Simulator Objective Test Results as
obtained by the sponsor. Each test result
must reflect the date completed and must be
clearly labeled as a product of the device
being tested.
f. A convertible FFS is addressed as a
separate FFS for each model and series
airplane to which it will be converted and for
the FAA qualification level sought. If a
sponsor seeks qualification for two or more
models of an airplane type using a
convertible FFS, the sponsor must submit a
QTG for each airplane model, or a QTG for
the first airplane model and a supplement to
that QTG for each additional airplane model.
The NSPM will conduct evaluations for each
airplane model.
g. Form and manner of presentation of
objective test results in the QTG:
(1) The sponsor’s FFS test results must be
recorded in a manner acceptable to the
NSPM, that allows easy comparison of the
FFS test results to the validation data (e.g.,
use of a multi-channel recorder, line printer,
cross plotting, overlays, transparencies).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
(2) FFS results must be labeled using
terminology common to airplane parameters
as opposed to computer software
identifications.
(3) Validation data documents included in
a QTG may be photographically reduced only
if such reduction will not alter the graphic
scaling or cause difficulties in scale
interpretation or resolution.
(4) Scaling on graphical presentations must
provide the resolution necessary to evaluate
the parameters shown in Attachment 2, Table
A2A of this appendix.
(5) Tests involving time histories, data
sheets (or transparencies thereof) and FFS
test results must be clearly marked with
appropriate reference points to ensure an
accurate comparison between the FFS and
the airplane with respect to time. Time
histories recorded via a line printer are to be
clearly identified for cross plotting on the
airplane data. Over-plots must not obscure
the reference data.
h. The sponsor may elect to complete the
QTG objective and subjective tests at the
manufacturer’s facility or at the sponsor’s
training facility. If the tests are conducted at
the manufacturer’s facility, the sponsor must
repeat at least one-third of the tests at the
sponsor’s training facility in order to
substantiate FFS performance. The QTG must
be clearly annotated to indicate when and
where each test was accomplished. Tests
conducted at the manufacturer’s facility and
at the sponsor’s training facility must be
conducted after the FFS is assembled with
systems and sub-systems functional and
operating in an interactive manner. The test
results must be submitted to the NSPM.
i. The sponsor must maintain a copy of the
MQTG at the FFS location.
j. All FFSs for which the initial
qualification is conducted after May 30,
2014, must have an electronic MQTG
(eMQTG) including all objective data
obtained from airplane testing, or another
approved source (reformatted or digitized),
together with correlating objective test results
obtained from the performance of the FFS
(reformatted or digitized) as prescribed in
this appendix. The eMQTG must also contain
the general FFS performance or
demonstration results (reformatted or
digitized) prescribed in this appendix, and a
description of the equipment necessary to
perform the initial qualification evaluation
and the continuing qualification evaluations.
The eMQTG must include the original
validation data used to validate FFS
performance and handling qualities in either
the original digitized format from the data
supplier or an electronic scan of the original
time-history plots that were provided by the
data supplier. A copy of the eMQTG must be
provided to the NSPM.
k. All other FFSs not covered in
subparagraph ‘‘j’’ must have an electronic
copy of the MQTG by May 30, 2014. An
electronic copy of the MQTG must be
provided to the NSPM. This may be provided
by an electronic scan presented in a Portable
Document File (PDF), or similar format
acceptable to the NSPM.
l. During the initial (or upgrade)
qualification evaluation conducted by the
NSPM, the sponsor must also provide a
PO 00000
Frm 00018
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
person who is a user of the device (e.g., a
qualified pilot or instructor pilot with flight
time experience in that aircraft) and
knowledgeable about the operation of the
aircraft and the operation of the FFS.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
m. Only those FFSs that are sponsored by
a certificate holder as defined in Appendix
F of this part will be evaluated by the NSPM.
However, other FFS evaluations may be
conducted on a case-by-case basis as the
Administrator deems appropriate, but only in
accordance with applicable agreements.
n. The NSPM will conduct an evaluation
for each configuration, and each FFS must be
evaluated as completely as possible. To
ensure a thorough and uniform evaluation,
each FFS is subjected to the general
simulator requirements in Attachment 1 of
this appendix, the objective tests listed in
Attachment 2 of this appendix, and the
subjective tests listed in Attachment 3 of this
appendix. The evaluations described herein
will include, but not necessarily be limited
to the following:
(1) Airplane responses, including
longitudinal and lateral-directional control
responses (see Attachment 2 of this
appendix);
(2) Performance in authorized portions of
the simulated airplane’s operating envelope,
to include tasks evaluated by the NSPM in
the areas of surface operations, takeoff, climb,
cruise, descent, approach, and landing as
well as abnormal and emergency operations
(see Attachment 2 of this appendix);
(3) Control checks (see Attachment 1 and
Attachment 2 of this appendix);
(4) Flight deck configuration (see
Attachment 1 of this appendix);
(5) Pilot, flight engineer, and instructor
station functions checks (see Attachment 1
and Attachment 3 of this appendix);
(6) Airplane systems and sub-systems (as
appropriate) as compared to the airplane
simulated (see Attachment 1 and Attachment
3 of this appendix);
(7) FFS systems and sub-systems,
including force cueing (motion), visual, and
aural (sound) systems, as appropriate (see
Attachment 1 and Attachment 2 of this
appendix); and
(8) Certain additional requirements,
depending upon the qualification level
sought, including equipment or
circumstances that may become hazardous to
the occupants. The sponsor may be subject to
Occupational Safety and Health
Administration requirements.
o. The NSPM administers the objective and
subjective tests, which includes an
examination of functions. The tests include
a qualitative assessment of the FFS by an
NSP pilot. The NSP evaluation team leader
may assign other qualified personnel to assist
in accomplishing the functions examination
and/or the objective and subjective tests
performed during an evaluation when
required.
(1) Objective tests provide a basis for
measuring and evaluating FFS performance
and determining compliance with the
requirements of this part.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
(2) Subjective tests provide a basis for:
(a) Evaluating the capability of the FFS to
perform over a typical utilization period;
(b) Determining that the FFS satisfactorily
simulates each required task;
(c) Verifying correct operation of the FFS
controls, instruments, and systems; and
(d) Demonstrating compliance with the
requirements of this part.
p. The tolerances for the test parameters
listed in Attachment 2 of this appendix
reflect the range of tolerances acceptable to
the NSPM for FFS validation and are not to
be confused with design tolerances specified
for FFS manufacture. In making decisions
regarding tests and test results, the NSPM
relies on the use of operational and
engineering judgment in the application of
data (including consideration of the way in
which the flight test was flown and the way
the data was gathered and applied), data
presentations, and the applicable tolerances
for each test.
q. In addition to the scheduled continuing
qualification evaluation, each FFS is subject
to evaluations conducted by the NSPM at any
time without prior notification to the
sponsor. Such evaluations would be
accomplished in a normal manner (i.e.,
requiring exclusive use of the FFS for the
conduct of objective and subjective tests and
an examination of functions) if the FFS is not
being used for flight crewmember training,
testing, or checking. However, if the FFS
were being used, the evaluation would be
conducted in a non-exclusive manner. This
non-exclusive evaluation will be conducted
by the FFS evaluator accompanying the
check airman, instructor, Aircrew Program
Designee (APD), or FAA inspector aboard the
FFS along with the student(s) and observing
the operation of the FFS during the training,
testing, or checking activities.
r. Problems with objective test results are
handled as follows:
(1) If a problem with an objective test result
is detected by the NSP evaluation team
during an evaluation, the test may be
repeated or the QTG may be amended.
(2) If it is determined that the results of an
objective test do not support the level
requested but do support a lower level, the
NSPM may qualify the FFS at that lower
level. For example, if a Level D evaluation is
requested and the FFS fails to meet sound
test tolerances, it could be qualified at Level
C.
s. After an FFS is successfully evaluated,
the NSPM issues a Statement of Qualification
(SOQ) to the sponsor. The NSPM
recommends the FFS to the TPAA, who will
approve the FFS for use in a flight training
program. The SOQ will be issued at the
satisfactory conclusion of the initial or
continuing qualification evaluation and will
list the tasks for which the FFS is qualified,
referencing the tasks described in Table A1B
in Attachment 1 of this appendix. However,
it is the sponsor’s responsibility to obtain
TPAA approval prior to using the FFS in an
FAA-approved flight training program.
t. Under normal circumstances, the NSPM
establishes a date for the initial or upgrade
evaluation within ten (10) working days after
determining that a complete QTG is
acceptable. Unusual circumstances may
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
warrant establishing an evaluation date
before this determination is made. A sponsor
may schedule an evaluation date as early as
6 months in advance. However, there may be
a delay of 45 days or more in rescheduling
and completing the evaluation if the sponsor
is unable to meet the scheduled date. See
Attachment 4 of this appendix, Figure A4A,
Sample Request for Initial, Upgrade, or
Reinstatement Evaluation.
u. The numbering system used for
objective test results in the QTG should
closely follow the numbering system set out
in Attachment 2 of this appendix, FFS
Objective Tests, Table A2A.
v. Contact the NSPM or visit the NSPM
Web site for additional information regarding
the preferred qualifications of pilots used to
meet the requirements of § 60.15(d).
w. Examples of the exclusions for which
the FFS might not have been subjectively
tested by the sponsor or the NSPM and for
which qualification might not be sought or
granted, as described in § 60.15(g)(6), include
windshear training and circling approaches.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
12. Additional Qualifications for a Currently
Qualified FFS (§ 60.16)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.16, Additional
Qualifications for a Currently Qualified FFS.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
13. Previously Qualified FFSs (§ 60.17)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. In instances where a sponsor plans to
remove an FFS from active status for a period
of less than two years, the following
procedures apply:
(1) The NSPM must be notified in writing
and the notification must include an estimate
of the period that the FFS will be inactive;
(2) Continuing Qualification evaluations
will not be scheduled during the inactive
period;
(3) The NSPM will remove the FFS from
the list of qualified FSTDs on a mutually
established date not later than the date on
which the first missed continuing
qualification evaluation would have been
scheduled;
(4) Before the FFS is restored to qualified
status, it must be evaluated by the NSPM.
The evaluation content and the time required
to accomplish the evaluation is based on the
number of continuing qualification
evaluations and sponsor-conducted quarterly
inspections missed during the period of
inactivity.
(5) The sponsor must notify the NSPM of
any changes to the original scheduled time
out of service;
b. Simulators qualified prior to May 30,
2008, are not required to meet the general
simulation requirements, the objective test
requirements or the subjective test
requirements of attachments 1, 2, and 3 of
PO 00000
Frm 00019
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26495
this appendix as long as the simulator
continues to meet the test requirements
contained in the MQTG developed under the
original qualification basis.
c. After May 30, 2009, each visual scene or
airport model beyond the minimum required
for the FFS qualification level that is
installed in and available for use in a
qualified FFS must meet the requirements
described in attachment 3 of this appendix.
d. Simulators qualified prior to May 30,
2008, may be updated. If an evaluation is
deemed appropriate or necessary by the
NSPM after such an update, the evaluation
will not require an evaluation to standards
beyond those against which the simulator
was originally qualified.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
e. Other certificate holders or persons
desiring to use an FFS may contract with FFS
sponsors to use FFSs previously qualified at
a particular level for an airplane type and
approved for use within an FAA-approved
flight training program. Such FFSs are not
required to undergo an additional
qualification process, except as described in
§ 60.16.
f. Each FFS user must obtain approval from
the appropriate TPAA to use any FFS in an
FAA-approved flight training program.
g. The intent of the requirement listed in
§ 60.17(b), for each FFS to have a SOQ within
6 years, is to have the availability of that
statement (including the configuration list
and the limitations to authorizations) to
provide a complete picture of the FFS
inventory regulated by the FAA. The
issuance of the statement will not require any
additional evaluation or require any
adjustment to the evaluation basis for the
FFS.
h. Downgrading of an FFS is a permanent
change in qualification level and will
necessitate the issuance of a revised SOQ to
reflect the revised qualification level, as
appropriate. If a temporary restriction is
placed on an FFS because of a missing,
malfunctioning, or inoperative component or
on-going repairs, the restriction is not a
permanent change in qualification level.
Instead, the restriction is temporary and is
removed when the reason for the restriction
has been resolved.
i. The NSPM will determine the evaluation
criteria for an FFS that has been removed
from active status. The criteria will be based
on the number of continuing qualification
evaluations and quarterly inspections missed
during the period of inactivity. For example,
if the FFS were out of service for a 1 year
period, it would be necessary to complete the
entire QTG, since all of the quarterly
evaluations would have been missed. The
NSPM will also consider how the FFS was
stored, whether parts were removed from the
FFS and whether the FFS was disassembled.
j. The FFS will normally be requalified
using the FAA-approved MQTG and the
criteria that was in effect prior to its removal
from qualification. However, inactive periods
of 2 years or more will require requalification
under the standards in effect and current at
the time of requalification.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26496
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
14. Inspection, Continuing Qualification
Evaluation, and Maintenance Requirements
(§ 60.19)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. The sponsor must conduct a minimum
of four evenly spaced inspections throughout
the year. The objective test sequence and
content of each inspection must be
developed by the sponsor and must be
acceptable to the NSPM.
b. The description of the functional
preflight check must be contained in the
sponsor’s QMS.
c. Record ‘‘functional preflight’’ in the FFS
discrepancy log book or other acceptable
location, including any item found to be
missing, malfunctioning, or inoperative.
d. During the continuing qualification
evaluation conducted by the NSPM, the
sponsor must also provide a person
knowledgeable about the operation of the
aircraft and the operation of the FFS.
e. The NSPM will conduct continuing
qualification evaluations every 12 months
unless:
(1) The NSPM becomes aware of
discrepancies or performance problems with
the device that warrants more frequent
evaluations; or
(2) The sponsor implements a QMS that
justifies less frequent evaluations. However,
in no case shall the frequency of a continuing
qualification evaluation exceed 36 months.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
f. The sponsor’s test sequence and the
content of each quarterly inspection required
in § 60.19(a)(1) should include a balance and
a mix from the objective test requirement
areas listed as follows:
(1) Performance.
(2) Handling qualities.
(3) Motion system (where appropriate).
(4) Visual system (where appropriate).
(5) Sound system (where appropriate).
(6) Other FFS systems.
g. If the NSP evaluator plans to accomplish
specific tests during a normal continuing
qualification evaluation that requires the use
of special equipment or technicians, the
sponsor will be notified as far in advance of
the evaluation as practical; but not less than
72 hours. Examples of such tests include
latencies, control dynamics, sounds and
vibrations, motion, and/or some visual
system tests.
h. The continuing qualification
evaluations, described in § 60.19(b), will
normally require 4 hours of FFS time.
However, flexibility is necessary to address
abnormal situations or situations involving
aircraft with additional levels of complexity
(e.g., computer controlled aircraft). The
sponsor should anticipate that some tests
may require additional time. The continuing
qualification evaluations will consist of the
following:
(1) Review of the results of the quarterly
inspections conducted by the sponsor since
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
the last scheduled continuing qualification
evaluation.
(2) A selection of approximately 8 to 15
objective tests from the MQTG that provide
an adequate opportunity to evaluate the
performance of the FFS. The tests chosen
will be performed either automatically or
manually and should be able to be conducted
within approximately one-third (1⁄3) of the
allotted FFS time.
(3) A subjective evaluation of the FFS to
perform a representative sampling of the
tasks set out in attachment 3 of this
appendix. This portion of the evaluation
should take approximately two-thirds (2⁄3) of
the allotted FFS time.
(4) An examination of the functions of the
FFS may include the motion system, visual
system, sound system, instructor operating
station, and the normal functions and
simulated malfunctions of the airplane
systems. This examination is normally
accomplished simultaneously with the
subjective evaluation requirements.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
15. Logging FFS Discrepancies (§ 60.20)
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.20. Logging FFS
Discrepancies.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
16. Interim Qualification of FFSs for New
Airplane Types or Models (§ 60.21)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.21, Interim
Qualification of FFSs for New Airplane
Types or Models.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
17. Modifications to FFSs (§ 60.23)
Begin QPS Requirements
a. The notification described in
§ 60.23(c)(2) must include a complete
description of the planned modification, with
a description of the operational and
engineering effect the proposed modification
will have on the operation of the FFS and the
results that are expected with the
modification incorporated.
b. Prior to using the modified FFS:
(1) All the applicable objective tests
completed with the modification
incorporated, including any necessary
updates to the MQTG (e.g., accomplishment
of FSTD Directives) must be acceptable to the
NSPM; and
(2) The sponsor must provide the NSPM
with a statement signed by the MR that the
factors listed in § 60.15(b) are addressed by
the appropriate personnel as described in
that section.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
PO 00000
Frm 00020
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Begin Information
FSTD Directives are considered
modifications of an FFS. See Attachment 4 of
this appendix for a sample index of effective
FSTD Directives. See Attachment 6 of this
appendix for a list of all effective FSTD
Directives applicable to Airplane FFSs.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
18. Operation with Missing, Malfunctioning,
or Inoperative Components (§ 60.25)
Begin Information
a. The sponsor’s responsibility with respect
to § 60.25(a) is satisfied when the sponsor
fairly and accurately advises the user of the
current status of an FFS, including any
missing, malfunctioning, or inoperative
(MMI) component(s).
b. It is the responsibility of the instructor,
check airman, or representative of the
administrator conducting training, testing, or
checking to exercise reasonable and prudent
judgment to determine if any MMI
component is necessary for the satisfactory
completion of a specific maneuver,
procedure, or task.
c. If the 29th or 30th day of the 30-day
period described in § 60.25(b) is on a
Saturday, a Sunday, or a holiday, the FAA
will extend the deadline until the next
business day.
d. In accordance with the authorization
described in § 60.25(b), the sponsor may
develop a discrepancy prioritizing system to
accomplish repairs based on the level of
impact on the capability of the FFS. Repairs
having a larger impact on FFS capability to
provide the required training, evaluation, or
flight experience will have a higher priority
for repair or replacement.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
19. Automatic Loss of Qualification and
Procedures for Restoration of Qualification
(§ 60.27)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
If the sponsor provides a plan for how the
FFS will be maintained during its out-ofservice period (e.g., periodic exercise of
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical
systems; routine replacement of hydraulic
fluid; control of the environmental factors in
which the FFS is to be maintained) there is
a greater likelihood that the NSPM will be
able to determine the amount of testing
required for requalification.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
20. Other Losses of Qualification and
Procedures for Restoration of Qualification
(§ 60.29)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
If the sponsor provides a plan for how the
FFS will be maintained during its out-ofservice period (e.g., periodic exercise of
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
systems; routine replacement of hydraulic
fluid; control of the environmental factors in
which the FFS is to be maintained) there is
a greater likelihood that the NSPM will be
able to determine the amount of testing
required for requalification.
23. Specific FFS Compliance Requirements
(§ 60.35)
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
24. [Reserved]
21. Recordkeeping and Reporting (§ 60.31)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. FFS modifications can include hardware
or software changes. For FFS modifications
involving software programming changes, the
record required by § 60.31(a)(2) must consist
of the name of the aircraft system software,
aerodynamic model, or engine model change,
the date of the change, a summary of the
change, and the reason for the change.
b. If a coded form for record keeping is
used, it must provide for the preservation
and retrieval of information with appropriate
security or controls to prevent the
inappropriate alteration of such records after
the fact.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
22. Applications, Logbooks, Reports, and
Records: Fraud, Falsification, or Incorrect
Statements (§ 60.33)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.33, Applications,
Logbooks, Reports, and Records: Fraud,
Falsification, or Incorrect Statements.
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.35, Specific FFS
Compliance Requirements.
26497
Begin Information
2. Discussion
a. Certain requirements included in this
appendix must be supported with an SOC as
defined in Appendix F, which may include
objective and subjective tests. The
requirements for SOCs are indicated in the
‘‘General Simulator Requirements’’ column
in Table A1A of this appendix.
b. Table A1A describes the requirements
for the indicated level of FFS. Many devices
include operational systems or functions that
exceed the requirements outlined in this
section. However, all systems will be tested
and evaluated in accordance with this
appendix to ensure proper operation.
a. This attachment describes the general
simulator requirements for qualifying an
airplane FFS. The sponsor should also
consult the objective tests in Attachment 2 of
this appendix and the examination of
functions and subjective tests listed in
Attachment 3 of this appendix to determine
the complete requirements for a specific level
simulator.
b. The material contained in this
attachment is divided into the following
categories:
(1) General flight deck configuration.
(2) Simulator programming.
(3) Equipment operation.
(4) Equipment and facilities for instructor/
evaluator functions.
(5) Motion system.
(6) Visual system.
(7) Sound system.
c. Table A1A provides the standards for the
General Simulator Requirements.
d. Table A1B provides the tasks that the
sponsor will examine to determine whether
the FFS satisfactorily meets the requirements
for flight crew training, testing, and
experience, and provides the tasks for which
the simulator may be qualified.
e. Table A1C provides the functions that an
instructor/check airman must be able to
control in the simulator.
f. It is not required that all of the tasks that
appear on the List of Qualified Tasks (part of
the SOQ) be accomplished during the initial
or continuing qualification evaluation.
End QPS Requirements
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
lllllllllllllllllllll
25. FFS Qualification on the Basis of a
Bilateral Aviation Safety Agreement (BASA)
(§ 60.37)
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.37, FFS Qualification
on the Basis of a Bilateral Aviation Safety
Agreement (BASA).
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
Attachment 1 to Appendix A to Part 60—
General Simulator Requirements
Begin QPS Requirements
1. Requirements
TABLE A1A.—MINIMUM SIMULATOR REQUIREMENTS
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator levels
General simulator requirements
Information
A
B
C
D
Notes
X
X
X
X
For simulator purposes, the flight deck consists of all that space
forward of a cross section of the flight deck at the most extreme aft setting of the pilots’ seats, including additional required crewmember duty stations and those required bulkheads aft of the pilot seats. For clarification, bulkheads containing only items such as landing gear pin storage compartments, fire axes and extinguishers, spare light bulbs, and aircraft document pouches are not considered essential and
may be omitted.
1. General Flight deck Configuration.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1.a. ......
The simulator must have a flight deck that is a
replica of the airplane simulated with controls,
equipment, observable flight deck indicators,
circuit breakers, and bulkheads properly located, functionally accurate and replicating
the airplane. The direction of movement of
controls and switches must be identical to the
airplane. Pilot seats must allow the occupant
to achieve the design ‘‘eye position’’ established for the airplane being simulated. Equipment for the operation of the flight deck windows must be included, but the actual windows need not be operable. Additional equipment such as fire axes, extinguishers, and
spare light bulbs must be available in the
FFS but may be relocated to a suitable location as near as practical to the original position. Fire axes, landing gear pins, and any
similar purpose instruments need only be represented in silhouette.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00021
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26498
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A1A.—MINIMUM SIMULATOR REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Simulator levels
Entry
No.
General simulator requirements
A
B
C
D
1.b. ......
Those circuit breakers that affect procedures or
result in observable flight deck indications
must be properly located and functionally accurate.
X
X
X
Information
X
Notes
2. Programming.
A flight dynamics model that accounts for various combinations of drag and thrust normally
encountered in flight must correspond to actual flight conditions, including the effect of
change in airplane attitude, thrust, drag, altitude, temperature, gross weight, moments of
inertia, center of gravity location, and configuration.
An SOC is required
X
X
X
X
2.b. ......
The simulator must have the computer capacity,
accuracy, resolution, and dynamic response
needed to meet the qualification level sought.
An SOC is required.
X
X
X
X
2.c. ......
Surface operations must be represented to the
extent that allows turns within the confines of
the runway and adequate controls on the
landing and roll-out from a crosswind approach to a landing.
X
2.d. ......
Ground handling and aerodynamic programming must include the following:
2.d.1. ...
Ground effect ......................................................
X
X
X
Ground effect includes modeling that accounts for roundout,
flare, touchdown, lift, drag, pitching moment, trim, and power
while in ground effect.
2.d.2. ...
Ground reaction ..................................................
X
X
X
Ground reaction includes modeling that accounts for strut deflections, tire friction, and side forces. This is the reaction of
the airplane upon contact with the runway during landing, and
may differ with changes in factors such as gross weight, airspeed, or rate of descent on touchdown.
2.d.3. ...
Ground handling characteristics, including aerodynamic and ground reaction modeling including steering inputs, operations with crosswind, braking, thrust reversing, deceleration,
and turning radius.
X
X
X
2.e. ......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.a. ......
If the aircraft being simulated is one of the aircraft listed in § 121.358, Low-altitude
windshear system equipment requirements,
the simulator must employ windshear models
that provide training for recognition of
windshear phenomena and the execution of
recovery procedures. Models must be available to the instructor/evaluator for the following critical phases of flight:
(1) Prior to takeoff rotation.
(2) At liftoff.
(3) During initial climb.
(4) On final approach, below 500 ft AGL.
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00022
Fmt 4701
If desired, Level A and B simulators may qualify for windshear
training by meeting these standards; see Attachment 5 of this
appendix. Windshear models may consist of independent
variable winds in multiple simultaneous components. The
FAA Windshear Training Aid presents one acceptable means
of compliance with simulator wind model requirements.
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26499
TABLE A1A.—MINIMUM SIMULATOR REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator levels
General simulator requirements
A
B
Information
C
D
Notes
X
X
Automatic ‘‘flagging’’ of out-of-tolerance situations is encouraged.
The QTG must reference the FAA Windshear
Training Aid or present alternate airplane related data, including the implementation
method(s) used. If the alternate method is selected, wind models from the Royal Aerospace Establishment (RAE), the Joint Airport
Weather Studies (JAWS) Project and other
recognized sources may be implemented, but
must be supported and properly referenced in
the QTG. Only those simulators meeting
these requirements may be used to satisfy
the training requirements of part 121 pertaining to a certificate holder’s approved lowaltitude windshear flight training program as
described in § 121.409.
The simulator must provide for manual and
automatic testing of simulator hardware and
software programming to determine compliance with simulator objective tests as prescribed in Attachment 2 of this appendix.
An SOC is required.
2.g. ......
Relative responses of the motion system, visual
system, and flight deck instruments, measured by latency tests or transport delay tests.
Motion onset should occur before the start of
the visual scene change (the start of the scan
of the first video field containing different information) but must occur before the end of
the scan of that video field. Instrument response may not occur prior to motion onset.
Test results must be within the following limits:
2.g.1. ...
300 milliseconds of the airplane response .........
2.g.2. ...
150 milliseconds of the airplane response .........
X
X
2.h. ......
The simulator must accurately reproduce the
following runway conditions:
(1) Dry.
(2) Wet.
(3) Icy.
(4) Patchy Wet.
(5) Patchy Icy.
(6) Wet on Rubber Residue in Touchdown Zone.
An SOC is required.
X
X
2.i. .......
The simulator must simulate:
(1) brake and tire failure dynamics, including
antiskid failure.
(2) decreased brake efficiency due to high
brake temperatures, if applicable.
An SOC is required.
X
X
2.j. .......
The simulator must replicate the effects of airframe and engine icing.
X
X
2.k. ......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.f. .......
The aerodynamic modeling in the simulator
must include:
(1) Low-altitude level-flight ground effect;
(2) Mach effect at high altitude; ..........................
(3) Normal and reverse dynamic thrust effect on
control surfaces;
(4) Aeroelastic representations; and
(5) Nonlinearities due to sideslip.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
The intent is to verify that the simulator provides instrument,
motion, and visual cues that are, within the stated time
delays, like the airplane responses. For airplane response,
acceleration in the appropriate, corresponding rotational axis
is preferred.
X
Frm 00023
X
X
Fmt 4701
Simulator pitch, side loading, and directional control characteristics should be representative of the airplane.
See Attachment 2 of this appendix, paragraph 5, for further information on ground effect.
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26500
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A1A.—MINIMUM SIMULATOR REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator levels
General simulator requirements
A
B
C
D
X
X
Information
Notes
X
An SOC is required and must include references to computations of aeroelastic representations and of nonlinearities due to sideslip.
2.l. .......
The simulator must have aerodynamic and
ground reaction modeling for the effects of reverse thrust on directional control, if applicable.
An SOC is required.
3. Equipment Operation.
3.a. ......
All relevant instrument indications involved in
the simulation of the airplane must automatically respond to control movement or external
disturbances to the simulated airplane; e.g.,
turbulence or windshear. Numerical values
must be presented in the appropriate units.
X
X
X
X
3.b. ......
Communications, navigation, caution, and warning equipment must be installed and operate
within the tolerances applicable for the airplane.
X
X
X
X
3.c. ......
Simulated airplane systems must operate as
the airplane systems operate under normal,
abnormal, and emergency operating conditions on the ground and in flight.
X
X
X
X
3.d. ......
The simulator must provide pilot controls with
control forces and control travel that correspond to the simulated airplane. The simulator must also react in the same manner as
in the airplane under the same flight conditions.
X
X
X
X
3.e. ......
Simulator control feel dynamics must replicate
the airplane. This must be determined by
comparing a recording of the control feel dynamics of the simulator to airplane measurements. For initial and upgrade qualification
evaluations, the control dynamic characteristics must be measured and recorded directly
from the flight deck controls, and must be accomplished in takeoff, cruise, and landing
flight conditions and configurations.
X
X
See Attachment 3 of this appendix for further information regarding long-range navigation equipment.
4. Instructor or Evaluator Facilities.
4.a. ......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
4.b. ......
In addition to the flight crewmember stations,
the simulator must have at least two suitable
seats for the instructor/check airman and FAA
inspector. These seats must provide adequate vision to the pilot’s panel and forward
windows. All seats other than flight crew
seats need not represent those found in the
airplane, but must be adequately secured to
the floor and equipped with similar positive
restraint devices.
The simulator must have controls that enable
the instructor/evaluator to control all required
system variables and insert all abnormal or
emergency conditions into the simulated airplane systems as described in the sponsor’s
FAA-approved training program; or as described in the relevant operating manual as
appropriate.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Frm 00024
Fmt 4701
The NSPM will consider alternatives to this standard for additional seats based on unique flight deck configurations.
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26501
TABLE A1A.—MINIMUM SIMULATOR REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Simulator levels
Information
Entry
No.
General simulator requirements
A
B
C
D
4.c. ......
The simulator must have instructor controls for
all environmental effects expected to be available at the IOS; e.g., clouds, visibility, icing,
precipitation, temperature, storm cells, and
wind speed and direction.
X
X
X
X
4.d. ......
The simulator must provide the instructor or
evaluator the ability to present ground and air
hazards.
X
X
For example, another airplane crossing the active runway or
converging airborne traffic.
X
X
For example, touchdown cues should be a function of the rate
of descent (RoD) of the simulated airplane.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Notes
5. Motion System.
5.a. ......
The simulator must have motion (force) cues
perceptible to the pilot that are representative
of the motion in an airplane.
X
X
5.b. ......
The simulator must have a motion (force cueing) system with a minimum of three degrees
of freedom (at least pitch, roll, and heave).
An SOC is required.
X
X
5.c. ......
The simulator must have a motion (force cueing) system that produces cues at least
equivalent to those of a six-degrees-of-freedom, synergistic platform motion system (i.e.,
pitch, roll, yaw, heave, sway, and surge).
An SOC is required.
5.d. ......
The simulator must provide for the recording of
the motion system response time.
An SOC is required.
5.e. ......
The simulator must provide motion effects programming to include:
X
(1) Thrust effect with brakes set.
(2) Runway rumble, oleo deflections, effects of
ground speed, uneven runway, centerline
lights, and taxiway characteristics.
(3) Buffets on the ground due to spoiler/
speedbrake extension and thrust reversal.
(4) Bumps associated with the landing gear.
(5 O=’xl’) Buffet during extension and retraction
of landing gear..
(6) Buffet in the air due to flap and spoiler/
speedbrake extension.
(7) Approach-to-Stall buffet.
(8) Representative touchdown cues for main
and nose gear.
(9) Nosewheel scuffing, if applicable.
(10) Mach and maneuver buffet.
5.f. .......
The simulator must provide characteristic motion vibrations that result from operation of
the airplane if the vibration marks an event or
airplane state that can be sensed in the flight
deck.
X
The simulator should be programmed and instrumented in such
a manner that the characteristic buffet modes can be measured and compared to airplane data.
6. Visual System.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
6.a. ......
The simulator must have a visual system providing an out-of-the-flight deck view.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
X
Frm 00025
X
X
Fmt 4701
X
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26502
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A1A.—MINIMUM SIMULATOR REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Simulator levels
Entry
No.
General simulator requirements
A
B
6.b. ......
The simulator must provide a continuous collimated field-of-view of at least 45° horizontally and 30° vertically per pilot seat or the
number of degrees necessary to meet the
visual ground segment requirement, whichever is greater. Both pilot seat visual systems
must be operable simultaneously. The minimum horizontal field-of-view coverage must
be plus and minus one-half (1⁄2) of the minimum continuous field-of-view requirement,
centered on the zero degree azimuth line relative to the aircraft fuselage.
An SOC is required and must explain the system geometry measurements including system linearity and field-of-view.
X
X
6.c. ......
(Reserved).
6.d. ......
The simulator must provide a continuous collimated visual field-of-view of at least 176°
horizontally and 36° vertically or the number
of degrees necessary to meet the visual
ground segment requirement, whichever is
greater. The minimum horizontal field-of-view
coverage must be plus and minus one-half
(1⁄2) of the minimum continuous field-of-view
requirement, centered on the zero degree
azimuth line relative to the aircraft fuselage.
An SOC is required and must explain the system geometry measurements including system linearity and field-of-view.
6.e. ......
The visual system must be free from optical discontinuities and artifacts that create non-realistic cues.
X
6.f. .......
The simulator must have operational landing
lights for night scenes. Where used, dusk (or
twilight) scenes require operational landing
lights.
6.g. ......
Information
C
D
Notes
Additional field-of-view capability may be added at the sponsor’s discretion provided the minimum fields of view are retained.
X
The horizontal field-of-view is traditionally described as a 180°
field-of-view. However, the field-of-view is technically no less
than 176°. Additional field-of-view capability may be added at
the sponsor’s discretion provided the minimum fields-of-view
are retained.
X
X
X
Non-realistic cues might include image ‘‘swimming’’ and image
‘‘roll-off,’’ that may lead a pilot to make incorrect assessments
of speed, acceleration, or situational awareness.
X
X
X
X
The simulator must have instructor controls for
the following:
(1) Visibility in statute miles (km) and runway
visual range (RVR) in ft. (m).
(2) Airport selection.
(3) Airport lighting.
X
X
X
X
6.h. ......
The simulator must provide visual system compatibility with dynamic response programming.
X
X
X
X
6.i. .......
The simulator must show that the segment of
the ground visible from the simulator flight
deck is the same as from the airplane flight
deck (within established tolerances) when at
the correct airspeed, in the landing configuration, at the appropriate height above the
touchdown zone, and with appropriate visibility.
X
X
X
X
6.j. .......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
X
The simulator must provide visual cues necessary to assess sink rates (provide depth
perception) during takeoffs and landings, to
include:
(1) Surface on runways, taxiways, and ramps.
(2) Terrain features.
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00026
Fmt 4701
This will show the modeling accuracy of RVR, glideslope, and
localizer for a given weight, configuration, and speed within
the airplane’s operational envelope for a normal approach
and landing.
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26503
TABLE A1A.—MINIMUM SIMULATOR REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Simulator levels
Information
General simulator requirements
A
B
C
D
Notes
6.k. ......
The simulator must provide for accurate portrayal of the visual environment relating to the
simulator attitude.
X
X
X
X
Visual attitude vs. simulator attitude is a comparison of pitch
and roll of the horizon as displayed in the visual scene compared to the display on the attitude indicator.
6.l. .......
The simulator must provide for quick confirmation of visual system color, RVR, focus, and
intensity.
An SOC is required.
X
X
6.m. .....
The simulator must be capable of producing at
least 10 levels of occulting.
X
X
6.n. ......
Night Visual Scenes. When used in training,
testing, or checking activities, the simulator
must provide night visual scenes with sufficient scene content to recognize the airport,
the terrain, and major landmarks around the
airport. The scene content must allow a pilot
to successfully accomplish a visual landing.
Scenes must include a definable horizon and
typical terrain characteristics such as fields,
roads and bodies of water and surfaces illuminated by airplane landing lights.
X
X
6.o. ......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry
No.
Dusk (or Twilight) Visual Scenes. When used in
training, testing, or checking activities, the
simulator must provide dusk (or twilight) visual scenes with sufficient scene content to
recognize the airport, the terrain, and major
landmarks around the airport. The scene content must allow a pilot to successfully accomplish a visual landing. Dusk (or twilight)
scenes, as a minimum, must provide full color
presentations of reduced ambient intensity,
sufficient surfaces with appropriate textural
cues that include self-illuminated objects such
as road networks, ramp lighting and airport
signage, to conduct a visual approach, landing and airport movement (taxi). Scenes must
include a definable horizon and typical terrain
characteristics such as fields, roads and bodies of water and surfaces illuminated by airplane landing lights. If provided, directional
horizon lighting must have correct orientation
and be consistent with surface shading effects. Total night or dusk (twilight) scene content must be comparable in detail to that produced by 10,000 visible textured surfaces
and 15,000 visible lights with sufficient system capacity to display 16 simultaneously
moving objects.
An SOC is required.
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
X
Frm 00027
X
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26504
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A1A.—MINIMUM SIMULATOR REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Simulator levels
Entry
No.
General simulator requirements
6.p. ......
A
B
C
D
Daylight Visual Scenes. The simulator must
provide daylight visual scenes with sufficient
scene content to recognize the airport, the
terrain, and major landmarks around the airport. The scene content must allow a pilot to
successfully accomplish a visual landing. Any
ambient lighting must not ‘‘washout’’ the displayed visual scene. Total daylight scene
content must be comparable in detail to that
produced by 10,000 visible textured surfaces
and 6,000 visible lights with sufficient system
capacity to display 16 simultaneously moving
objects. The visual display must be free of
apparent and distracting quantization and
other distracting visual effects while the simulator is in motion.
An SOC is required.
X
X
6.q. ......
The simulator must provide operational visual
scenes that portray physical relationships
known to cause landing illusions to pilots.
X
X
6.r. .......
The simulator must provide special weather
representations of light, medium, and heavy
precipitation near a thunderstorm on takeoff
and during approach and landing. Representations need only be presented at and below
an altitude of 2,000 ft. (610 m) above the airport surface and within 10 miles (16 km) of
the airport.
X
X
6.s. ......
The simulator must present visual scenes of
wet and snow-covered runways, including
runway lighting reflections for wet conditions,
partially obscured lights for snow conditions,
or suitable alternative effects.
X
X
6.t. .......
The simulator must present realistic color and
directionality of all airport lighting.
X
Information
Notes
X
For example: short runways, landing approaches over water,
uphill or downhill runways, rising terrain on the approach
path, unique topographic features.
7. Sound System.
The simulator must provide flight deck sounds
that result from pilot actions that correspond
to those that occur in the airplane.
X
X
X
X
7.b. ......
The volume control must have an indication of
sound level setting which meets all qualification requirements..
X
X
X
X
7.c. ......
The simulator must accurately simulate the
sound of precipitation, windshield wipers, and
other significant airplane noises perceptible to
the pilot during normal and abnormal operations, and include the sound of a crash
(when the simulator is landed in an unusual
attitude or in excess of the structural gear
limitations); normal engine and thrust reversal
sounds; and the sounds of flap, gear, and
spoiler extension and retraction.
An SOC is required.
X
X
7.d. ......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
7.a. ......
The simulator must provide realistic amplitude
and frequency of flight deck noises and
sounds. Simulator performance must be recorded, compared to amplitude and frequency of the same sounds recorded in the
airplane, and be made a part of the QTG.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00028
X
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26505
TABLE A1B.—TABLE OF TASKS VS. SIMULATOR LEVEL
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Information
Subjective requirements
In order to be qualified at the simulator qualification level indicated, the
simulator must be able to perform at least the tasks associated with that
level of qualification.
Simulator levels
Notes
A
B
C
D
1. Preflight Procedures
1.a. ......
Preflight Inspection (flight deck only) ............................................................
X
X
X
X
1.b. ......
Engine Start ...................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
1.c. .......
Taxiing ...........................................................................................................
R
X
X
1.d. ......
Pre-takeoff Checks ........................................................................................
X
X
X
R
X
X
X
2. Takeoff and Departure Phase
2.a. ......
Normal and Crosswind Takeoff
2.b. ......
Instrument Takeoff .........................................................................................
X
X
X
X
2.c. .......
Engine Failure During Takeoff .......................................................................
A
X
X
X
2.d. ......
Rejected Takeoff ............................................................................................
X
X
X
X
2.e. ......
Departure Procedure .....................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3. Inflight Maneuvers
3.a. ......
Steep Turns ...................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.b. ......
Approaches to Stalls ......................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.c. .......
Engine Failure—Multiengine Airplane ...........................................................
X
X
X
X
3.d. ......
Engine Failure—Single-Engine Airplane .......................................................
X
X
X
X
3.e. ......
Specific Flight Characteristics incorporated into the user’s FAA approved
flight training program.
A
A
A
A
3.f. .......
Recovery From Unusual Attitudes .................................................................
X
X
X
X
Within the normal flight envelope
supported by applicable simulation
validation data.
4. Instrument Procedures
Standard Terminal Arrival/Flight Management System Arrivals Procedures
X
X
X
X
4.b. ......
Holding ...........................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
4.c. .......
Precision Instrument.
4.c.1. ....
All Engines Operating ....................................................................................
X
X
X
X
e.g., Autopilot, Manual (Flt. Dir. Assisted), Manual (Raw Data).
4.c.2. ....
One Engine Inoperative .................................................................................
X
X
X
X
e.g., Manual (Flt. Dir. Assisted),
Manual (Raw Data).
4.d. ......
Non-Precision Instrument Approach ..............................................................
X
X
X
X
e.g., NDB, VOR, VOR/DME, VOR/
TAC, RNAV, LOC, LOC/BC, ADF,
and SDF.
4.e. ......
Circling Approach ..........................................................................................
X
X
X
X
Specific authorization required.
4.f. .......
Missed Approach.
4.f.1. ....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
4.a. ......
Normal ...........................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
4.f.2. ....
One Engine Inoperative .................................................................................
X
X
X
X
R
X
X
5. Landings and Approaches to Landings
5.a. ......
Normal and Crosswind Approaches and Landings .......................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00029
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26506
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A1B.—TABLE OF TASKS VS. SIMULATOR LEVEL—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Information
Subjective requirements
In order to be qualified at the simulator qualification level indicated, the
simulator must be able to perform at least the tasks associated with that
level of qualification.
Simulator levels
Notes
A
5.b. ......
5.c. .......
Approach and Landing with (Simulated) Engine Failure—Multiengine Airplane.
5.d. ......
5.e. ......
Rejected Landing ...........................................................................................
5.f. .......
X
X
R
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
R
Landing From a No Flap or a Nonstandard Flap Configuration Approach ...
X
D
R
Landing From Circling Approach ...................................................................
....
C
R
Landing From a Precision/Non-Precision Approach .....................................
B
X
X
6. Normal and Abnormal Procedures
6.a. ......
Engine (including shutdown and restart) .......................................................
X
X
X
X
6.b. ......
Fuel System ...................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
6.c. .......
Electrical System ...........................................................................................
X
X
X
X
6.d. ......
Hydraulic System ...........................................................................................
X
X
X
X
6.e. ......
Environmental and Pressurization Systems ..................................................
X
X
X
X
6.f. .......
Fire Detection and Extinguisher Systems .....................................................
X
X
X
X
6.g. ......
Navigation and Avionics Systems .................................................................
X
X
X
X
6.h. ......
Automatic Flight Control System, Electronic Flight Instrument System, and
Related Subsystems.
X
X
X
X
6.i. ........
Flight Control Systems ..................................................................................
X
X
X
X
6.j. ........
Anti-ice and Deice Systems ..........................................................................
X
X
X
X
6.k. .......
Aircraft and Personal Emergency Equipment ...............................................
X
X
X
X
7. Emergency Procedures
7.a. ......
Emergency Descent (Max. Rate) ..................................................................
X
X
X
X
7.b. ......
Inflight Fire and Smoke Removal ..................................................................
X
X
X
X
7.c. .......
Rapid Decompression ...................................................................................
X
X
X
X
7.d. ......
Emergency Evacuation ..................................................................................
X
X
X
X
8. Postflight Procedures
8.a. ......
After-Landing Procedures ..............................................................................
X
X
X
X
8.b. ......
Parking and Securing ....................................................................................
X
X
X
X
‘‘A’’—indicates that the system, task, or procedure may be examined if the appropriate aircraft system or control is simulated in the FSTD and
is working properly.
‘‘R’’—indicates that the simulator may be qualified for this task for continuing qualification training.
‘‘X’’—indicates that the simulator must be able to perform this task for this level of qualification.
TABLE A1C.—TABLE OF SIMULATOR SYSTEM TASKS
QPS requirements
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry
No.
Information
Subjective requirements
In order to be qualified at the simulator qualification level indicated, the
simulator must be able to perform at least the tasks associated with that
level of qualification.
Simulator levels
Notes
A
B
C
D
X
X
X
X
1. Instructor Operating Station (IOS), as appropriate
1.a. ......
Power switch(es) ...........................................................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00030
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26507
TABLE A1C.—TABLE OF SIMULATOR SYSTEM TASKS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Subjective requirements
In order to be qualified at the simulator qualification level indicated, the
simulator must be able to perform at least the tasks associated with that
level of qualification.
A
B
C
D
1.b. ......
Airplane conditions ........................................................................................
X
X
X
X
e.g., GW, CG, Fuel loading and Systems.
1.c. .......
Airports/Runways ...........................................................................................
X
X
X
X
e.g., Selection, Surface,
Lighting controls.
1.d. ......
Environmental controls ..................................................................................
X
X
X
X
e.g., Clouds, Visibility, RVR, Temp,
Wind, Ice, Snow, Rain, and
Windshear.
1.e. ......
Airplane system malfunctions (Insertion/deletion) .........................................
X
X
X
X
1.f. .......
Locks, Freezes, and Repositioning ...............................................................
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Entry
No.
Simulator levels
Notes
Presets,
2. Sound Controls
2.a. ......
On/off/adjustment ...........................................................................................
3. Motion/Control Loading System
3.a. ......
On/off/emergency stop ..................................................................................
4. Observer Seats/Stations
4.a. ......
Position/Adjustment/Positive restraint system ...............................................
Attachment 2 to Appendix A to Part 60—FFS
Objective Tests
TABLE OF CONTENTS—Continued
Paragraph
No.
Alternative Data Sources, Procedures, and Instrumentation:
Level A and Level B Simulators Only.
Introduction.
2. ..............
Continuing Qualification Evaluations—Validation Test Data
Presentation.
17. ............
1. ..............
Transport Delay Testing.
16. ............
Title
Acceptance Guidelines for Alternative Avionics (Flight-Related
Computers and Controllers).
15. ............
Paragraph
No.
Title
14. ............
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Test Requirements.
Table A2A, Objective Tests.
General.
4. ..............
Control Dynamics.
5. ..............
Ground Effect.
6. ..............
Motion System.
lllllllllllllllllllll
7. ..............
Sound System.
Begin Information
8. ..............
Additional Information About
Flight Simulator Qualification
for New or Derivative Airplanes.
9. ..............
Engineering
tion Data.
10. ............
[Reserved].
11. ............
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
3. ..............
Validation Test Tolerances.
12. ............
Validation Data Roadmap.
13. ............
Acceptance Guidelines for Alternative Engines Data.
1. Introduction
a. For the purposes of this attachment, the
flight conditions specified in the Flight
Conditions Column of Table A2A of this
appendix, are defined as follows:
(1) Ground—on ground, independent of
airplane configuration;
(2) Take-off—gear down with flaps/slats in
any certified takeoff position;
(3) First segment climb—gear down with
flaps/slats in any certified takeoff position
(normally not above 50 ft AGL);
(4) Second segment climb—gear up with
flaps/slats in any certified takeoff position
(normally between 50 ft and 400 ft AGL);
(5) Clean—flaps/slats retracted and gear
up;
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Simulator—Valida-
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00031
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
(6) Cruise—clean configuration at cruise
altitude and airspeed;
(7) Approach—gear up or down with flaps/
slats at any normal approach position as
recommended by the airplane manufacturer;
and
(8) Landing—gear down with flaps/slats in
any certified landing position.
b. The format for numbering the objective
tests in Appendix A, Attachment 2, Table
A2A, and the objective tests in Appendix B,
Attachment 2, Table B2A, is identical.
However, each test required for FFSs is not
necessarily required for FTDs. Also, each test
required for FTDs is not necessarily required
for FFSs. Therefore, when a test number (or
series of numbers) is not required, the term
‘‘Reserved’’ is used in the table at that
location. Following this numbering format
provides a degree of commonality between
the two tables and substantially reduces the
potential for confusion when referring to
objective test numbers for either FFSs or
FTDs.
c. The reader is encouraged to review the
Airplane Flight Simulator Evaluation
Handbook, Volumes I and II, published by
the Royal Aeronautical Society, London, UK,
and AC 25–7, as amended, Flight Test Guide
for Certification of Transport Category
Airplanes, and AC 23–8, as amended, Flight
Test Guide for Certification of Part 23
Airplanes, for references and examples
regarding flight testing requirements and
techniques.
d. If relevant winds are present in the
objective data, the wind vector should be
clearly noted as part of the data presentation,
expressed in conventional terminology, and
related to the runway being used for the test.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26508
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Begin QPS Requirements
2. Test Requirements
a. The ground and flight tests required for
qualification are listed in Table A2A, FFS
Objective Tests. Computer generated
simulator test results must be provided for
each test except where an alternative test is
specifically authorized by the NSPM. If a
flight condition or operating condition is
required for the test but does not apply to the
airplane being simulated or to the
qualification level sought, it may be
disregarded (e.g., an engine out missed
approach for a single-engine airplane or a
maneuver using reverse thrust for an airplane
without reverse thrust capability). Each test
result is compared against the validation data
described in § 60.13 and in this appendix.
Although use of a driver program designed to
automatically accomplish the tests is
encouraged for all simulators and required
for Level C and Level D simulators, it must
be possible to conduct each test manually
while recording all appropriate parameters.
The results must be produced on an
appropriate recording device acceptable to
the NSPM and must include simulator
number, date, time, conditions, tolerances,
and appropriate dependent variables
portrayed in comparison to the validation
data. Time histories are required unless
otherwise indicated in Table A2A. All results
must be labeled using the tolerances and
units given.
b. Table A2A in this attachment sets out
the test results required, including the
parameters, tolerances, and flight conditions
for simulator validation. Tolerances are
provided for the listed tests because
mathematical modeling and acquisition and
development of reference data are often
inexact. All tolerances listed in the following
tables are applied to simulator performance.
When two tolerance values are given for a
parameter, the less restrictive may be used
unless otherwise indicated. In those cases
where a tolerance is expressed only as a
percentage, the tolerance percentage applies
to the maximum value of that parameter
within its normal operating range as
measured from the neutral or zero position
unless otherwise indicated.
c. Certain tests included in this attachment
must be supported with an SOC. In Table
A2A, requirements for SOCs are indicated in
the ‘‘Test Details’’ column.
d. When operational or engineering
judgment is used in making assessments for
flight test data applications for simulator
validity, such judgment must not be limited
to a single parameter. For example, data that
exhibit rapid variations of the measured
parameters may require interpolations or a
‘‘best fit’’ data selection. All relevant
parameters related to a given maneuver or
flight condition must be provided to allow
overall interpretation. When it is difficult or
impossible to match simulator to airplane
data throughout a time history, differences
must be justified by providing a comparison
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
of other related variables for the condition
being assessed.
e. It is not acceptable to program the FFS
so that the mathematical modeling is correct
only at the validation test points. Unless
otherwise noted, simulator tests must
represent airplane performance and handling
qualities at operating weights and centers of
gravity (CG) typical of normal operation. If a
test is supported by airplane data at one
extreme weight or CG, another test supported
by airplane data at mid-conditions or as close
as possible to the other extreme must be
included. Certain tests that are relevant only
at one extreme CG or weight condition need
not be repeated at the other extreme. Tests of
handling qualities must include validation of
augmentation devices.
f. When comparing the parameters listed to
those of the airplane, sufficient data must
also be provided to verify the correct flight
condition and airplane configuration
changes. For example, to show that control
force is within the parameters for a static
stability test, data to show the correct
airspeed, power, thrust or torque, airplane
configuration, altitude, and other appropriate
datum identification parameters must also be
given. If comparing short period dynamics,
normal acceleration may be used to establish
a match to the airplane, but airspeed,
altitude, control input, airplane
configuration, and other appropriate data
must also be given. If comparing landing gear
change dynamics, pitch, airspeed, and
altitude may be used to establish a match to
the airplane, but landing gear position must
also be provided. All airspeed values must be
properly annotated (e.g., indicated versus
calibrated). In addition, the same variables
must be used for comparison (e.g., compare
inches to inches rather than inches to
centimeters).
g. The QTG provided by the sponsor must
clearly describe how the simulator will be set
up and operated for each test. Each simulator
subsystem may be tested independently, but
overall integrated testing of the simulator
must be accomplished to assure that the total
simulator system meets the prescribed
standards. A manual test procedure with
explicit and detailed steps for completing
each test must also be provided.
h. For previously qualified simulators, the
tests and tolerances of this attachment may
be used in subsequent continuing
qualification evaluations for any given test if
the sponsor has submitted a proposed MQTG
revision to the NSPM and has received
NSPM approval.
i. Simulators are evaluated and qualified
with an engine model simulating the airplane
data supplier’s flight test engine. For
qualification of alternative engine models
(either variations of the flight test engines or
other manufacturer’s engines) additional tests
with the alternative engine models may be
required. This attachment contains
guidelines for alternative engines.
j. For testing Computer Controlled Aircraft
(CCA) simulators, or other highly augmented
airplane simulators, flight test data is
required for the Normal (N) and/or Nonnormal (NN) control states, as indicated in
PO 00000
Frm 00032
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
this attachment. Where test results are
independent of control state, Normal or Nonnormal control data may be used. All tests in
Table A2A require test results in the Normal
control state unless specifically noted
otherwise in the Test Details section
following the CCA designation. The NSPM
will determine what tests are appropriate for
airplane simulation data. When making this
determination, the NSPM may require other
levels of control state degradation for specific
airplane tests. Where Non-normal control
states are required, test data must be
provided for one or more Non-normal control
states, and must include the least augmented
state. Where applicable, flight test data must
record Normal and Non-normal states for:
(1) Pilot controller deflections or
electronically generated inputs, including
location of input; and
(2) Flight control surface positions unless
test results are not affected by, or are
independent of, surface positions.
k. Tests of handling qualities must include
validation of augmentation devices. FFSs for
highly augmented airplanes will be validated
both in the unaugmented configuration (or
failure state with the maximum permitted
degradation in handling qualities) and the
augmented configuration. Where various
levels of handling qualities result from
failure states, validation of the effect of the
failure is necessary. Requirements for testing
will be mutually agreed to between the
sponsor and the NSPM on a case-by-case
basis.
l. Some tests will not be required for
airplanes using airplane hardware in the
simulator flight deck (e.g., ‘‘side stick
controller’’). These exceptions are noted in
Section 2 ‘‘Handling Qualities’’ in Table A2A
of this attachment. However, in these cases,
the sponsor must provide a statement that the
airplane hardware meets the appropriate
manufacturer’s specifications and the
sponsor must have supporting information to
that fact available for NSPM review.
m. For objective test purposes, see
Appendix F of this part for the definitions of
‘‘Near maximum,’’ ‘‘Light,’’ and ‘‘Medium’’
gross weight.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
n. In those cases where the objective test
results authorize a ‘‘snapshot test’’ or a
‘‘series of snapshot tests’’ results in lieu of a
time-history result, the sponsor or other data
provider must ensure that a steady state
condition exists at the instant of time
captured by the ‘‘snapshot.’’ The steady state
condition should exist from 4 seconds prior
to, through 1 second following, the instant of
time captured by the snap shot.
o. For references on basic operating weight,
see AC 120–27, ‘‘Aircraft Weight and
Balance;’’ and FAA–H–8083–1, ‘‘Aircraft
Weight and Balance Handbook.’’
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26509
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
Notes
A
B
C
D
1. Performance.
Taxi.
1.a.1. ..................
Minimum Radius Turn
±3 ft (0.9m) or 20% of
airplane turn radius.
Ground ........................
Record both Main and
Nose gear turning
radius. This test is to
be accomplished
without the use of
brakes and only minimum thrust, except
for airplanes requiring asymmetric
thrust or braking to
turn.
X
X
X
1.a.2 ...................
Rate of Turn vs.
Nosewheel Steering
Angle (NWA).
±10% or ±2°/sec. turn
rate.
Ground ........................
Record a minimum of
two speeds, greater
than minimum turning radius speed,
with a spread of at
least 5 knots groundspeed, in normal taxi
speed conditions.
X
X
X
1.b. .....................
Takeoff.
1.b.1. ..................
Ground Acceleration
Time and Distance.
±5% time and distance
or ±5% time and
±200 ft (61 m) of distance.
Takeoff ........................
Record acceleration
time and distance for
a minimum of 80%
of the time from
brake release to VR.
Preliminary aircraft certification data may
be used.
X
X
X
X
May be combined with
normal takeoff
(1.b.4.) or rejected
takeoff (1.b.7.). Plotted data should be
shown using appropriate scales for
each portion of the
maneuver.
1.b.2. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1.a. .....................
Minimum Control
Speed¥ground
(Vmcg) using aerodynamic controls
only (per applicable
airworthiness standard) or alternative
low speed engine inoperative test to
demonstrate ground
control characteristics.
±25% of maximum airplane lateral deviation or ±5 ft (1.5
m). Additionally, for
those simulators of
airplanes with reversible flight control
systems: Rudder
pedal force; ±10% or
±5 lb (2.2 daN).
Takeoff ........................
Engine failure speed
must be within ±1
knot of airplane engine failure speed.
Engine thrust decay
must be that resulting from the mathematical model for the
engine variant applicable to the FFS
under test. If the
modeled engine is
not the same as the
airplane manufacturer’s flight test engine, a further test
may be run with the
same initial conditions using the thrust
from the flight test
data as the driving
parameter.
X
X
X
X
If a Vmcg test is not
available an acceptable alternative is a
flight test snap engine deceleration to
idle at a speed between V1 and V1
¥10 knots, followed
by control of heading
using aerodynamic
control only. Recovery should be
achieved with the
main gear on the
ground. To ensure
only aerodynamic
control is used,
nosewheel steering
should be disabled
(i.e., castored) or the
nosewheel held
slightly off the
ground.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
All commonly used
takeoff flap settings
are to be demonstrated at least
once in the tests for
minimum unstick
(1.b.3.), normal takeoff (1.b.4.), critical
engine failure on
takeoff (1.b.5.), or
crosswind takeoff
(1.b.6.).
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00033
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26510
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Flight conditions
Minimum Unstick
Speed (Vmu) or
equivalent test to
demonstrate early
rotation takeoff characteristics.
±3 kts airspeed ±1.5°
pitch angle.
Takeoff ........................
1.b.4. ..................
Normal Takeoff ...........
±3 kts airspeed ±1.5°
pitch angle ±1.5°
angle of attack ±20 ft
(6 m) height. Additionally, for those
simulators of airplanes with reversible flight control systems: Stick/Column
Force; ±10% or ±5 lb
(2.2 daN).
1.b.5. ..................
Critical Engine Failure
on Takeoff.
±3 kts airspeed ±1.5°
pitch angle, ±1.5°
angle of attack, ±20
ft (6 m) height, ±3°
heading angle, ±2°
bank angle, ±2°
sideslip angle. Additionally, for those
simulators of airplanes with reversible flight control systems: Stick/Column
Force; ±10% or ±5 lb
(2.2 daN)); Wheel
Force; ±10% or ±3 lb
(1.3 daN); and Rudder Pedal Force;
±10% or ±5 lb (2.2
daN).
Test details
Title
1.b.3. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Notes
A
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
B
C
D
Record main landing
gear strut compression or equivalent
air/ground signal.
Record from 10 kt
before start of rotation until at least 5
seconds after the occurrence of main
gear lift-off.
X
X
X
X
Vmu is defined as the
minimum speed at
which the last main
landing gear leaves
the ground. Main
landing gear strut
compression or
equivalent air/ground
signal should be recorded. If a Vmu test
is not available, alternative acceptable
flight tests are a constant high-attitude
take-off run through
main gear lift-off or
an early rotation
take-off.
Takeoff ........................
Record takeoff profile
from brake release
to at least 200 ft (61
m) above ground
level (AGL). If the
airplane has more
than one certificated
takeoff configurations, a different configuration must be
used for each
weight. Data are required for a takeoff
weight at near maximum takeoff weight
with a mid-center of
gravity and for a light
takeoff weight with
an aft center of gravity, as defined in Appendix F of this part.
X
X
X
X
This test may be used
for ground acceleration time and distance (1.b.1.). Plotted data should be
shown using appropriate scales for
each portion of the
maneuver.
Takeoff ........................
Record takeoff profile
at near maximum
takeoff weight from
prior to engine failure to at least 200 ft
(61 m) AGL. Engine
failure speed must
be within ±3 kts of
airplane data.
X
X
X
X
Frm 00034
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26511
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Flight conditions
Crosswind Takeoff ......
±3 kts airspeed, ±1.5°
pitch angle, ±1.5°
angle of attack, ±20
ft (6 m) height, ±2°
bank angle, ±2°
sideslip angle; ±3°
heading angle. Correct trend at
groundspeeds below
40 kts. for rudder/
pedal and heading.
Additionally, for
those simulators of
airplanes with reversible flight control
systems: ±10% or ±5
lb (2.2 daN) stick/
column force, ±10%
or ±3 lb (1.3 daN)
wheel force, ±10%
or ±5 lb (2.2 daN)
rudder pedal force.
Takeoff ........................
1.b.7. ..................
Rejected Takeoff .........
±5% time or ±1.5 sec
±7.5% distance or
±250 ft (±76 m).
1.b.8. ..................
Dynamic Engine Failure After Takeoff.
1.c. .....................
Normal Climb, all engines operating.
Notes
Climb.
1.c.1. ..................
Test details
Title
1.b.6. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
A
B
C
D
Record takeoff profile
from brake release
to at least 200 ft (61
m) AGL. Requires
test data, including
information on wind
profile for a crosswind (expressed as
direct head-wind and
direct cross-wind
components) of at
least 60% of the
maximum wind
measured at 33 ft
(10 m) above the
runway.
X
X
X
X
In those situations
where a maximum
crosswind or a maximum demonstrated
crosswind is not
known, contact the
NSPM.
Takeoff ........................
Record time and distance from brake release to full stop.
Speed for initiation
of the reject must be
at least 80% of V1
speed. The airplane
must be at or near
the maximum takeoff
gross weight. Use
maximum braking effort, auto or manual.
X
X
X
X
Autobrakes will be
used where applicable.
±20% or ±2°/sec body
angular rates.
Takeoff ........................
Engine failure speed
must be within ±3
Kts of airplane data.
Record Hands Off
from 5 secs. before
to at least 5 secs.
after engine failure
or 30° Bank, whichever occurs first. Engine failure may be a
snap deceleration to
idle. CCA: Test in
Normal and Non-normal control state.
X
X
For safety considerations, airplane flight
test may be performed out of ground
effect at a safe altitude, but with correct
airplane configuration and airspeed.
±3 kts airspeed, ±5%
or ±100 FPM (0.5 m/
Sec.) climb rate.
Clean ...........................
Flight test data is preferred, however, airplane performance
manual data is an
acceptable alternative. Record at
nominal climb speed
and mid-initial climb
altitude. Flight simulator performance
must be recorded
over an interval of at
least 1,000 ft. (300
m).
X
X
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00035
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
X
X
09MYR2
26512
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Flight conditions
Test details
Notes
Title
1.c.2. ..................
One engine Inoperative
±3 kts airspeed, ±5%
or ±100 FPM (0.5 m/
Sec.) climb rate, but
not less than the
climb gradient requirements of 14
CFR part 23 or part
25, as appropriate.
For part 23 airplanes,
in accordance with
part 23. For part 25
airplanes, Second
Segment Climb.
Flight test data is preferred, however, airplane performance
manual data is an
acceptable alternative. Test at
weight, altitude, or
temperature limiting
conditions. Record at
nominal climb speed.
Flight simulator performance must be
recorded over an interval of at least
1,000 ft. (300 m).
1.c.3. ..................
One Engine Inoperative En route Climb.
±10% time, ±10% distance, ±10% fuel
used.
Clean ...........................
Record results for at
least a 5000 ft (1550
m) climb segment.
Flight test data or
airplane performance
manual data may be
used.
1.c.4. ..................
One Engine Inoperative Approach
Climb (if operations
in icing conditions
are authorized).
±3 kts airspeed, ±5%
or ±100 FPM (0.5 m/
Sec.) climb rate, but
not less than the
climb gradient requirements of 14
CFR parts 23 or 25
climb gradient, as
appropriate.
Approach .....................
Record results at near
maximum gross
landing weight as
defined in Appendix
F of this part. Flight
test data or airplane
performance manual
data may be used.
Flight simulator performance must be
recorded over an interval of at least
1,000 ft. (300 m).
X
1.d. .....................
Cruise/Descent.
1.d.1. ..................
Level flight acceleration.
±5% Time ....................
Cruise ..........................
Record results for a
minimum of 50 kts
speed increase
using maximum continuous thrust rating
or equivalent.
1.d.2. ..................
Level flight deceleration.
±5% Time ....................
Cruise ..........................
Record results for a
minimum of 50 kts.
speed decrease
using idle power.
1.d.3. ..................
Cruise performance ....
±0.05 EPR or ±5% of
N1, or ±5% of
Torque, ±5% of fuel
flow.
Cruise ..........................
May be a single snapshot showing instantaneous fuel flow or
a minimum of 2 consecutive snapshots
with a spread of at
least 3 minutes in
steady flight.
1.d.4. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
Idle descent ................
±3 kt airspeed, ±5% or
±200 ft/min (1.0m/
sec) descent rate.
Clean ...........................
Record a stabilized,
idle power descent
at normal descent
speed at mid-altitude. Flight simulator
performance must
be recorded over an
interval of at least
1,000 ft. (300 m).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
A
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00036
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
B
C
D
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
09MYR2
The airplane should be
configured with all
anti-ice and de-ice
systems operating
normally, with the
gear up and goaround flaps set. All
icing accountability
considerations
should be applied in
accordance with the
aircraft certification
or authorization for
an approach in icing
conditions.
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26513
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Entry No.
1.d.5. ..................
Emergency descent ....
1.e. .....................
Test details
Notes
Stopping.
1.e.1. ..................
Flight conditions
Title
A
B
C
D
N/A ..............................
Performance must be
recorded over an interval of at least
3,000 ft (900 m).
X
X
X
X
Stopping time and distance, using manual
application of wheel
brakes and no reverse thrust on a dry
runway.
±5% of time. For distance up to 4000 ft
(1220 m): ±200 ft
(61 m) or ±10%,
whichever is smaller.
For distance greater
than 4000 ft (1220
m): ±5% of distance.
Landing .......................
Record time and distance for at least
80% of the total time
from touch down to
full stop. Data is required for weights at
medium and near
maximum landing
weights. Data for
brake system pressure and position of
ground spoilers (including method of
deployment, if used)
must be provided.
Engineering data
may be used for the
medium gross
weight condition.
X
X
X
X
1.e.2. ..................
Stopping time and distance, using reverse
thrust and no wheel
brakes on a dry runway.
±5% time and the
smaller of ±10% or
±200 ft (61 m) of distance.
Landing .......................
Record time and distance for at least
80% of the total time
from initiation of reverse thrust to the
minimum operating
speed with full reverse thrust. Data is
required for medium
and near maximum
landing gross
weights. Data on the
position of ground
spoilers, (including
method of deployment, if used) must
be provided. Engineering data may be
used for the medium
gross weight condition.
X
X
X
X
1.e.3. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
±5 kt airspeed, ±5% or
±300 ft/min (1.5m/s)
descent rate.
Stopping distance,
using wheel brakes
and no reverse
thrust on a wet runway.
±10% of distance or
±200 ft (61 m).
Landing .......................
Either flight test data or
manufacturer’s performance manual
data must be used
where available. Engineering data based
on dry runway flight
test stopping distance modified by
the effects of contaminated runway
braking coefficients
are an acceptable alternative.
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00037
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
The stabilized descent
should be conducted
with speed brakes
extended, if applicable, at mid-altitude
and near Vmo speed
or in accordance
with emergency descent procedures.
26514
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Entry No.
1.e.4. ..................
Stopping distance,
using wheel brakes
and no reverse
thrust on an icy runway.
1.f. ......................
1.f.2. ...................
Test details
Notes
Engines.
1.f.1. ...................
Flight conditions
Title
A
B
C
D
X
X
±10% of distance or
±200 ft (61 m).
Landing .......................
Either flight test or
manufacturer’s performance manual
data must be used,
where available. Engineering data based
on dry runway flight
test stopping distance modified by
the effects of contaminated runway
braking coefficients
are an acceptable alternative.
Acceleration ................
(±10% Tt) and (±10%
Ti, or ±0.25 sec.).
Approach or landing ...
Record engine power
(N1, N2, EPR,
Torque) from flight
idle to go-around
power for a rapid
(slam) throttle movement.
X
X
X
X
See Appendix F of this
part for definitions of
Ti and Tt.
Deceleration ................
(±10% Tt) and (±10%
Ti, or ±0.25 sec.).
Ground ........................
Record engine power
(N1, N2, EPR,
Torque) from Max T/
O power to 90%
decay of Max T/O
power for a rapid
(slam) throttle movement.
X
X
X
X
See Appendix F of this
part for definitions of
Ti and Tt.
2. Handling Qualities.
For simulators requiring Static or Dynamic tests at the controls (i.e., column, wheel, rudder pedal),
special test fixtures will not be required during initial or upgrade evaluations if the sponsor’s QTG/
MQTG shows both test fixture results and the results of an alternative approach, such as computer
plots produced concurrently, that provide satisfactory agreement. Repeat of the alternative method
during the initial or upgrade evaluation satisfies this test requirement. For initial and upgrade evaluations, the control dynamic characteristics must be measured at and recorded directly from the flight
deck controls, and must be accomplished in takeoff, cruise, and landing flight conditions and configurations. Testing of position versus force is not applicable if forces are generated solely by use of
airplane hardware in the FFS.
Static Control Tests.
2.a.1.a. ...............
Pitch Controller Position vs. Force and
Surface Position
Calibration.
2.a.1.b. ...............
(Reserved)
2.a.2.a. ...............
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.a. .....................
Roll Controller Position
vs. Force and Surface Position Calibration.
2.a.2.b. ...............
Contact the NSPM for
clarification of any
issue regarding airplanes with reversible controls.
(Reserved)
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
±2 lb (0.9 daN) breakout, ±10% or ±5 lb
(2.2 daN) force, ±2°
elevator.
Ground ........................
Record results for an
uninterrupted control
sweep to the stops.
X
X
X
X
Test results should be
validated (where
possible) with inflight data from tests
such as longitudinal
static stability or
stalls. Static and dynamic flight control
tests should be accomplished at the
same feel or impact
pressures.
±2 lb (0.9 daN) breakout, ±10% or ±3 lb
(1.3 daN) force, ±2°
aileron, ±3° spoiler
angle.
Ground ........................
Record results for an
uninterrupted control
sweep to the stops.
X
X
X
X
Test results should be
validated with inflight data from tests
such as engine out
trims, or steady state
sideslips. Static and
dynamic flight control
tests should be accomplished at the
same feel or impact
pressures.
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00038
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26515
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Entry No.
2.a.3.a. ...............
Rudder Pedal Position
vs. Force and Surface Position Calibration.
2.a.3.b. ...............
Test details
Notes
(Reserved)
2.a.4. ..................
Flight conditions
Title
A
B
C
D
±5 lb (2.2 daN) breakout, ±10% or ±5 lb
(2.2 daN) force, ±2°
rudder angle.
Ground ........................
Record results for an
uninterrupted control
sweep to the stops.
X
X
X
X
Nosewheel Steering
Controller Force and
Position Calibration.
±2 lb (0.9 daN) breakout, ±10% or ±3 lb
(1.3 daN) force, ±2°
nosewheel angle.
Ground ........................
Record results of an
uninterrupted control
sweep to the stops.
X
X
X
X
2.a.5. ..................
Rudder Pedal Steering
Calibration.
±2° nosewheel angle ..
Ground ........................
Record results of an
uninterrupted control
sweep to the stops.
X
X
X
X
2.a.6. ..................
Pitch Trim Indicator vs.
Surface Position
Calibration.
±0.5° of computed trim
surface angle.
Ground ........................
X
X
X
X
2.a.7. ..................
Pitch Trim Rate ...........
±10% trim rate (°/sec)
Ground and approach
The trim rate must be
checked using the
pilot primary trim
(ground) and using
the autopilot or pilot
primary trim in flight
at go-around flight
conditions.
X
X
X
X
2.a.8. ..................
Alignment of Flight
Deck Throttle Lever
vs. Selected Engine
Parameter.
±5° of throttle lever
angle, or ±3% N1, or
±.03 EPR, or ±3%
maximum rated
manifold pressure, or
±3% torque. For propeller-driven airplanes where the
propeller control levers do not have angular travel, a tolerance of ±0.8 inch
(±2 cm.) applies.
Ground ........................
Requires simultaneous
recording for all engines. The tolerances apply against
airplane data and
between engines. In
the case of propeller
powered airplanes, if
a propeller lever is
present, it must also
be checked. For airplanes with throttle
‘‘detents,’’ all detents
must be presented.
May be a series of
snapshot test results.
X
X
X
X
2.a.9. ..................
Brake Pedal Position
vs. Force and Brake
System Pressure
Calibration.
±5 lb (2.2 daN) or 10%
force, ±150 psi (1.0
MPa) or ±10% brake
system pressure.
Ground ........................
Hydraulic system pressure must be related
to pedal position
through a ground
static test.
X
X
X
X
2.b. .....................
Dynamic Control Tests.
....
....
....
....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Tests 2.b.1., 2.b.2., and 2.b.3. are not applicable if dynamic response is generated solely by use of
airplane hardware in the FFS. Power setting is that required for level flight unless otherwise specified.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00039
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Test results should be
validated with inflight data from tests
such as engine out
trims, or steady state
sideslips. Static and
dynamic flight control
tests should be accomplished at the
same feel or impact
pressures.
The purpose of the test
is to compare FFS
against design data
or equivalent.
FFS computer output
results may be used
to show compliance.
26516
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Flight conditions
Pitch Control ...............
For underdamped systems: ±10% of time
from 90% of initial
displacement (0.9
Ad) to first zero
crossing and ±10
(n+1)% of period
thereafter. ±10% amplitude of first overshoot applied to all
overshoots greater
than 5% of initial displacement (.05 Ad).
±1 overshoot (first
significant overshoot
must be matched).
For overdamped
systems: ±10% of
time from 90% of initial displacement
(0.9 Ad) to 10% of
initial displacement
(0.1 Ad). For the alternate method see
paragraph 4 of this
attachment. The
slow sweep is the
equivalent to the
static test 2.a.1. For
the moderate and
rapid sweeps: ±2 lb
(0.9 daN) or ±10%
dynamic increment
above the static
force.
Takeoff, Cruise, and
Landing.
2.b.2. ..................
Roll Control .................
For underdamped systems: ±10% of time
from 90% of initial
displacement (0.9
Ad) to first zero
crossing, and ±10
(n+1)% of period
thereafter. ±10% amplitude of first overshoot, applied to all
overshoots greater
than 5% of initial displacement (.05 Ad),
±1 overshoot (first
significant overshoot
must be matched).
For overdamped
systems: ±10% of
time from 90% of initial displacement
(0.9 Ad) to 10% of
initial displacement
(0.1Ad). For the alternate method see
paragraph 4 of this
attachment. The
slow sweep is the
equivalent to the
static test 2.a.2. For
the moderate and
rapid sweeps: ±2 lb
(0.9 daN) or ±10%
dynamic increment
above the static
force.
Takeoff, Cruise, and
Landing.
Test details
Title
2.b.1. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Notes
A
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00040
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
C
D
Data must show normal control displacement in both directions. Tolerances
apply against the absolute values of
each period (considered independently).
Normal control displacement for this
test is 25% to 50%
of full throw or 25%
to 50% of the maximum allowable pitch
controller deflection
for flight conditions
limited by the maneuvering load envelope.
X
X
‘‘n’’ is the sequential
period of a full cycle
of oscillation. Refer
to paragraph 4 of
this attachment for
more information.
Static and dynamic
flight control tests
should be accomplished at the same
feel or impact pressures.
Data must show normal control displacement in both directions. Tolerance applies against the absolute values of
each period (considered independently).
Normal control displacement for this
test is 25% to 50%
of the maximum allowable roll controller
deflection for flight
conditions limited by
the maneuvering
load envelope.
X
X
‘‘n’’ is the sequential
period of a full cycle
of oscillation. Refer
to paragraph 4 of
this attachment for
more information.
Static and dynamic
flight control tests
should be accomplished at the same
feel or impact pressures.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
B
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26517
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Flight conditions
Yaw Control ................
For underdamped systems: ±10% of time
from 90% of initial
displacement (0.9
Ad) to first zero
crossing, and ±10
(n+1)% of period
thereafter. ±10% amplitude of first overshoot applied to all
overshoots greater
than 5% of initial displacement (.05 Ad).
±1 overshoot (first
significant overshoot
must be matched).
For overdamped
systems: ±10% of
time from 90% of initial displacement
(0.9 Ad) to 10% of
initial displacement
(0.1 Ad). For the alternate method (see
paragraph 4 of this
attachment). The
slow sweep is the
equivalent to the
static test 2.a.3. For
the moderate and
rapid sweeps: ±2 lb
(0.9 daN) or ±10%
dynamic increment
above the static
force.
Takeoff, Cruise, and
Landing.
2.b.4. ..................
Small Control Inputs—
Pitch.
±0.15°/sec body pitch
rate or ±20% of peak
body pitch rate applied throughout the
time history.
Approach or landing ...
Test details
Title
2.b.3. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Notes
A
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00041
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
C
D
Data must show normal control displacement in both directions. Tolerance applies against the absolute values of
each period (considered independently).
Normal control displacement for this
test is 25% to 50%
of the maximum allowable yaw controller deflection for
flight conditions limited by the maneuvering load envelope.
X
X
Control inputs must be
typical of minor corrections made while
established on an
ILS approach
course, using from
0.5°/sec to 2°/sec
pitch rate. The test
must be in both directions, showing
time history data
from 5 seconds before until at least 5
seconds after initiation of control input.
CCA: Test in normal
and non-normal control states.
X
X
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
B
09MYR2
‘‘n’’ is the sequential
period of a full cycle
of oscillation. Refer
to paragraph 4 of
this attachment for
more information.
Static and dynamic
flight control tests
should be accomplished at the same
feel or impact pressures.
26518
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Flight conditions
Entry No.
2.b.5. ..................
Small Control Inputs—
Roll.
±0.15°/sec body roll
rate or ±20% of peak
body roll rate applied
throughout the time
history.
Approach or landing ...
2.b.6. ..................
Small Control Inputs—
Yaw.
±0.15°/sec body yaw
rate or ±20% of peak
body yaw rate applied throughout the
time history.
Approach or landing ...
2.c. .....................
Test details
Title
Notes
A
B
C
D
Control inputs must be
typical of minor corrections made while
established on an
ILS approach
course, using from
0.5°/sec to 2°/sec
roll rate. The test
may be run in only
one direction; however, for airplanes
that exhibit non-symmetrical behavior,
the test must include
both directions. Time
history data must be
recorded from 5 seconds before until at
least 5 seconds after
initiation of control
input.
CCA: Test in normal
and non-normal control states.
X
X
Control inputs must be
typical of minor corrections made while
established on an
ILS approach
course, using from
0.5°/sec to 2°/sec
yaw rate. The test
may be run in only
one direction; however, for airplanes
that exhibit non-symmetrical behavior,
the test must include
both directions. Time
history data must be
recorded from 5 seconds before until at
least 5 seconds after
initiation of control
input.
CCA: Test in normal
and non-normal control states.
X
X
Longitudinal Control Tests.
X
X
Power setting is that required for level flight unless otherwise specified.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.c.1. ..................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Power Change Dynamics.
23:54 May 08, 2008
±3 kt airspeed, ±100 ft
(30 m) altitude,
±20% or ±1.5° pitch
angle.
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Approach .....................
Frm 00042
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Power is changed from
the thrust setting required for approach
or level flight to maximum continuous
thrust or go-around
power setting.
Record the uncontrolled free response
from at least 5 seconds before the
power change is initiated to 15 seconds
after the power
change is completed.
CCA: Test in normal
and non-normal control states.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
X
X
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26519
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Flight conditions
Flap/Slat Change Dynamics.
±3 kt airspeed, ±100 ft
(30 m) altitude,
±20% or ±1.5° pitch
angle.
Takeoff through initial
flap retraction, and
approach to landing.
2.c.3. ..................
Spoiler/Speedbrake
Change Dynamics.
±3 kt airspeed, ±100 ft
(30 m) altitude,
±20% or ±1.5° pitch
angle.
2.c.4. ..................
Gear Change Dynamics.
2.c.5. ..................
Longitudinal Trim ........
Test details
Title
2.c.2. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Notes
A
B
C
D
Record the uncontrolled free response
from at least 5 seconds before the configuration change is
initiated to 15 seconds after the configuration change is
completed.
CCA: Test in normal
and non-normal control states.
X
X
X
X
Cruise ..........................
Record the uncontrolled free response
from at least 5 seconds before the configuration change is
initiated to 15 seconds after the configuration change is
completed. Record
results for both extension and retraction.
CCA: Test in normal
and non-normal control states.
X
X
X
X
±3 kt airspeed, ±100 ft
(30 m) altitude,
±20% or ±1.5° pitch
angle.
Takeoff (retraction),
and Approach (extension).
Record the time history
of uncontrolled free
response for a time
increment from at
least 5 seconds before the configuration
change is initiated to
15 seconds after the
configuration change
is completed.
CCA: Test in normal
and non-normal control states.
X
X
X
X
±0.5° trim surface
angle, ±1° elevator,
±1° pitch angle, ±5%
net thrust or equivalent.
Cruise, Approach, and
Landing.
Record steady-state
condition with wings
level and thrust set
for level flight. May
be a series of snapshot tests.
CCA: Test in normal or
non-normal control
states.
X
X
X
X
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00043
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26520
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Flight conditions
Longitudinal Maneuvering Stability (Stick
Force/g).
±5 lb (±2.2 daN) or
±10% pitch controller
force. Alternative
method: ±1° or
±10% change of elevator.
Cruise, Approach, and
Landing.
2.c.7. ..................
Longitudinal Static Stability.
±5 lb (±2.2 daN) or
±10% pitch controller
force. Alternative
method: ±1° or
±10% change of elevator.
2.c.8. ..................
Stall Characteristics ....
±3 kt airspeed for initial
buffet, stall warning,
and stall speeds. ±2°
bank for speeds
greater than stick
shaker or initial buffet. Additionally, for
those simulators with
reversible flight control systems: ±10%
or ±5 lb (2.2 daN)
Stick/Column force
(prior to ‘‘g break’’
only).
Test details
Title
2.c.6. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Notes
A
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
B
C
D
Continuous time history data or a series
of snapshot tests
may be used.
Record results up to
30° of bank for approach and landing
configurations.
Record results for up
to 45° of bank for
the cruise configuration. The force tolerance is not applicable if forces are generated solely by the
use of airplane hardware in the FFS.
The alternative
method applies to
airplanes that do not
exhibit ‘‘stick-forceper-g’’ characteristics.
CCA: Test in normal
and non-normal control states.
X
X
X
X
Approach .....................
Record results for at
least 2 speeds
above and 2 speeds
below trim speed.
May be a series of
snapshot test results. The force tolerance is not applicable if forces are
generated solely by
the use of airplane
hardware in the FFS.
The alternative
method applies to
airplanes that do not
exhibit speed stability characteristics.
CCA: Test in normal or
non-normal control
states.
X
X
X
X
Second Segment
Climb, and Approach
or Landing.
The stall maneuver
must be entered with
thrust at or near idle
power and wings
level (1g). Record
the stall warning signal and initial buffet,
if applicable. Time
history data must be
recorded for full stall
and initiation of recovery. The stall
warning signal must
occur in the proper
relation to buffet/
stall. FFSs of airplanes exhibiting a
sudden pitch attitude
change or ‘‘g break’’
must demonstrate
this characteristic.
CCA: Test in normal
and non-normal control states.
X
X
X
X
Frm 00044
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26521
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Flight conditions
Entry No.
2.c.9. ..................
Phugoid Dynamics ......
±10% period, ±10% of
time to 1⁄2 or double
amplitude or ±.02 of
damping ratio.
Cruise ..........................
2.c.10. ................
Short Period Dynamics..
±1.5° pitch angle or
±2°/sec pitch rate,
±0.10g acceleration.
Cruise ..........................
2.c.11. ................
Notes
(Reserved)
2.d. .....................
Test details
Title
A
B
C
D
The test must include
whichever is less of
the following: Three
full cycles (six overshoots after the input
is completed), or the
number of cycles
sufficient to determine time to 1⁄2 or
double amplitude.
CCA: Test in Non-normal control states
X
X
X
X
CCA: Test in Normal
and Non-normal control states.
X
X
X
X
Lateral Directional Tests.
Power setting is that required for level flight unless otherwise specified.
Minimum Control
Speed, Air (Vmca or
Vmcl), per Applicable
Airworthiness Standard or Low Speed
Engine Inoperative
Handling Characteristics in the Air.
±3 kt airspeed.
Takeoff or Landing
(whichever is most
critical in the airplane).
Takeoff thrust must be
used on the operating engine(s). A
time history or a series of snapshot
tests may be used.
CCA: Test in Normal
or Non-normal control state.
X
X
X
X
2.d.2. ..................
Roll Response (Rate).
±10% or ±2°/sec roll
rate. Additionally, for
those simulators of
airplanes with reversible flight control
systems: ±10% or ±3
lb (1.3 daN) wheel
force.
Cruise, and Approach
or Landing.
Record results for normal roll controller deflection (about onethird of maximum roll
controller travel).
May be combined
with step input of
flight deck roll controller test (2.d.3.).
X
X
X
X
2.d.3. ..................
Roll Response to Flight
Deck Roll Controller
Step Input.
±10% or ±2° bank
angle.
Approach or Landing ..
Record from initiation
of roll through 10
seconds after control
is returned to neutral
and released. May
be combined with
roll response (rate)
test (2.d.2).
CCA: Test in Normal
and Non-normal control states
X
X
X
X
2.d.4. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.d.1. ..................
Spiral Stability .............
Correct trend and ±2°
or ±10% bank angle
in 20 seconds. Alternate test requires
correct trend and ±2°
aileron.
Cruise, and Approach
or Landing.
Record results for both
directions. Airplane
data averaged from
multiple tests may
be used. As an alternate test, demonstrate the lateral
control required to
maintain a steady
turn with a bank
angle of 28° to 32°.
CCA: Test in Non-normal control state
X
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00045
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Low Speed Engine Inoperative Handling
may be governed by
a performance or
control limit that prevents demonstration
of Vmca or Vmcl in the
conventional manner.
With wings level, apply
a step roll control
input using approximately one-third of
the roll controller
travel. When reaching approximately
20° to 30° of bank,
abruptly return the
roll controller to neutral and allow approximately 10 seconds of airplane free
response.
26522
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
Notes
A
B
C
D
Engine Inoperative
Trim.
±1° rudder angle or
±1° tab angle or
equivalent pedal, ±2°
sideslip angle.
Second Segment
Climb, and Approach
or Landing.
May be a series of
snapshot tests.
X
X
X
X
2.d.6. ..................
Rudder Response .......
±2°/sec or ±10% yaw
rate.
Approach or Landing ..
Record results for stability augmentation
system ON and
OFF. A rudder step
input of 20%–30%
rudder pedal throw is
used.
CCA: Test in Normal
and Non-normal control states
X
X
X
X
2.d.7. ..................
Dutch Roll, (Yaw
Damper OFF).
±0.5 sec or ±10% of
period, ±10% of time
to 1⁄2 or double amplitude or ±.02 of
damping ratio. ±20%
or ±1 sec of time difference between
peaks of bank and
sideslip.
Cruise, and Approach
or Landing.
Record results for at
least 6 complete cycles with stability
augmentation OFF.
CCA: Test in Non-normal control state.
X
X
X
2.d.8. ..................
Steady State Sideslip
For given rudder position ±2° bank angle,
±1° sideslip angle,
±10% or ±2° aileron,
±10% or ±5° spoiler
or equivalent roll,
controller position or
force. Additionally,
for those simulators
of airplanes with reversible flight control
systems: ±10% or ±3
lb (1.3 daN) wheel
force ±10% or ±5 lb
(2.2 daN) rudder
pedal force.
Approach or Landing ..
Use at least two rudder
positions, one of
which must be near
maximum allowable
rudder. Propeller
driven airplanes
must test in each direction. May be a
series of snapshot
test results.
X
X
X
2.e. .....................
Landings.
2.e.1. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.d.5. ..................
Normal Landing ..........
±3 kt airspeed, ±1.5°
pitch angle, ±1.5°
angle of attack,
±10% or ±10 ft (3 m)
height. Additionally,
for those simulators
of airplanes with reversible flight control
systems: ±10% or ±5
lbs (±2.2 daN) stick/
column force.
Landing .......................
Record results from a
minimum of 200 ft
(61 m) AGL to
nosewheel touchdown.
CCA: Test in Normal
and Non-normal control states.
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00046
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
X
09MYR2
The test should be performed in a manner
similar to that for
which a pilot is
trained to trim an engine failure condition. Second segment climb test
should be at takeoff
thrust. Approach or
landing test should
be at thrust for level
flight.
Tests should be conducted with two normal landing flap settings (if applicable).
One should be at or
near maximum certificated landing
weight. The other
should be at light or
medium landing
weight.
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26523
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
2.e.2. ..................
Minimum Flap Landing
±3 kt airspeed, ±1.5°
pitch angle, ±1.5°
angle of attack,
±10% or ±10 ft (3 m)
height. Additionally,
for those simulators
of airplanes with reversible flight control
systems: ±10% or ±5
lbs (2.2 daN) stick/
column force.
Minimum Certified
Landing Flap Configuration.
Crosswind Landing .....
±3 kt airspeed, ±1.5°
pitch angle, ±1.5°
angle of attack,
±10% or ±10 ft (3 m)
height ±2° bank
angle, ±2° sideslip
angle ±3° heading
angle. Additionally,
for those simulators
of airplanes with reversible flight control
systems: ±10% or ±3
lb (1.3 daN) wheel
force ±10% or ±5 lb
(2.2 daN) rudder
pedal force.
Landing .......................
Record results from a
minimum of 200 ft
(61 m) AGL, through
nosewheel touchdown, to 50% decrease in main landing gear touchdown
speed. Test data
must include information on wind profile, for a crosswind
(expressed as direct
head-wind and direct
cross-wind components) of 60% of the
maximum wind
measured at 33 ft
(10 m) above the
runway.
2.e.4. ..................
One Engine Inoperative Landing.
±3 kt airspeed, ±1.5°
pitch angle, ±1.5°
angle of attack,
±10% height or ±10
ft (3 m); ±2° bank
angle, ±2° sideslip
angle, ±3° heading.
Landing .......................
2.e.5. ..................
Autopilot landing (if applicable).
±5 ft (1.5 m) flare
height, ±0.5 sec Tf,
or ±10%Tf, ±140 ft/
min (0.7 m/sec) rate
of descent at touchdown. ±10 ft (3 m)
lateral deviation during rollout.
Landing .......................
2.e.6. ..................
All engines operating,
autopilot, go around.
±3 kt airspeed, ±1.5°
pitch angle, ±1.5°
angle of attack.
Notes
Record results from a
minimum of 200 ft
(61 m) AGL to
nosewheel touchdown with airplane
at near Maximum
Landing Weight.
2.e.3. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
A
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00047
Sfmt 4700
C
D
X
X
X
X
X
Record results from a
minimum of 200 ft
(61 m) AGL, through
nosewheel touchdown, to 50% decrease in main landing gear touchdown
speed or less.
X
X
X
If autopilot provides
rollout guidance,
record lateral deviation from touchdown to a 50% decrease in main landing gear touchdown
speed or less. Time
of autopilot flare
mode engage and
main gear touchdown must be noted.
X
X
X
Normal, all-engines-operating, go around
with the autopilot engaged (if applicable)
at medium landing
weight.
CCA: Test in normal or
non-normal control
states.
Fmt 4701
X
X
X
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
B
09MYR2
In those situations
where a maximum
crosswind or a maximum demonstrated
crosswind is not
known, contact the
NSPM.
See Appendix F of this
part for definition of
Tf.
26524
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Entry No.
2.e.7. ..................
One engine inoperative
go around.
±3 kt airspeed, ±1.5°
pitch angle, ±1.5°
angle of attack, ±2°
bank angle, ±2°
slideslip angle.
2.e.8. ..................
Directional control (rudder effectiveness)
with symmetric reverse thrust.
±2°/sec yaw rate. ±5
kts airspeed.
2.e.9. ..................
Directional control (rudder effectiveness)
with asymmetric reverse thrust.
2.f. ......................
Test details
Notes
A
Ground Effect.
Test to demonstrate
Ground Effect.
2.g. .....................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Flight conditions
Title
C
D
The one engine inoperative go around is
required at near
maximum certificated
landing weight with
the critical engine inoperative using manual controls. If applicable, an additional
engine inoperative
go around test must
be accomplished
with the autopilot engaged.
CCA: Non-autopilot
test in Non-normal
control state.
X
X
X
Landing .......................
Record results starting
from a speed approximating touchdown speed to the
minimum thrust reverser operation
speed. With full reverse thrust, apply
yaw control in both
directions until
reaching minimum
thrust reverser operation speed.
X
X
X
±5 kt airspeed. ±3°
heading angle.
Landing .......................
Maintain heading with
yaw control with full
reverse thrust on the
operating engine(s).
Record results starting from a speed approximating touchdown speed to a
speed at which control of yaw cannot be
maintained or until
reaching minimum
thrust reverser operation speed, whichever is higher. The
tolerance applies to
the low speed end of
the data recording.
X
X
X
±1° elevator ±0.5° stabilizer angle, ±5%
net thrust or equivalent, ±1° angle of attack, ±10% height or
±5 ft (1.5 m), ±3 kt
airspeed, ±1° pitch
angle.
Landing .......................
The Ground Effect
model must be validated by the test selected and a rationale must be provided
for selecting the particular test.
X
X
X
See paragraph on
Ground Effect in this
attachment for additional information.
See Attachment 5 of
this appendix.
Takeoff and Landing ...
Requires windshear
models that provide
training in the specific skills needed to
recognize windshear
phenomena and to
execute recovery
procedures. See Attachment 5 of this
appendix for tests,
tolerances, and procedures.
X
X
See Attachment 5 of
this appendix for information related to
Level A and B simulators.
Windshear.
Four tests, two takeoff
and two landing, with
one of each conducted in still air and
the other with
windshear active to
demonstrate
windshear models.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
B
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00048
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26525
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
2.h. .....................
Notes
A
B
C
D
Flight Maneuver and Envelope Protection Functions.
The requirements of tests h(1) through (6) of this attachment are applicable to computer controlled
aircraft only. Time history results are required for simulator response to control inputs during entry
into envelope protection limits including both normal and degraded control states if the function is
different. Set thrust as required to reach the envelope protection function.
2.h.1. ..................
Overspeed ..................
±5 kt airspeed .............
Cruise ..........................
X
X
X
2.h.2. ..................
Minimum Speed ..........
±3 kt airspeed .............
Takeoff, Cruise, and
Approach or Landing.
X
X
X
2.h.3. ..................
Load Factor .................
±0.1 g normal load factor.
Takeoff, Cruise ...........
X
X
X
2.h.4. ..................
Pitch Angle ..................
±1.5° pitch angle .........
Cruise, Approach ........
X
X
X
2.h.5. ..................
Bank Angle .................
±2° or ±10% bank
angle.
Approach .....................
X
X
X
2.h.6. ..................
Angle of Attack ...........
±1.5° angle of attack ...
Second Segment
Climb, and Approach
or Landing.
X
X
X
Based on Simulator
Capability.
N/A ..............................
Required as part of the
MQTG. The test
must demonstrate
frequency response
of the motion system.
X
X
X
X
Based on Simulator
Capability.
N/A ..............................
Required as part of the
MQTG. The test
must demonstrate
motion system leg
balance as specified
by the applicant for
flight simulator qualification.
X
X
X
X
Based on Simulator
Capability.
N/A ..............................
Required as part of the
MQTG. The test
must demonstrate a
smooth turn-around
(shift to opposite direction of movement)
of the motion system
as specified by the
applicant for flight
simulator qualification.
X
X
X
X
Accomplished in both
the ‘‘ground’’ mode
and in the ‘‘flight’’
mode of the motion
system operation.
Required as part of the
MQTG. The assessment procedures
must be designed to
ensure that the motion system hardware and software
(in normal flight simulator operating
mode) continue to
perform as originally
qualified.
X
X
X
X
3. Motion System.
3.a. .....................
3.b. .....................
3.c. .....................
3.d. .....................
Frequency response.
Leg balance.
Turn-around check.
Motion system repeatability.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
With the same input
signal, the test results must be repeatable to within ±0.05
g actual platform linear acceleration.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00049
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
This test ensures that
motion system hardware and software
(in normal flight simulator operating
mode) continue to
perform as originally
qualified. Performance changes from
the original baseline
can be readily identified with this information.
26526
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
Notes
A
B
C
D
Motion cueing performance signature. Required as part of MQTG. For the following set of maneuvers record the relevant motion variables.
3.e.1. ..................
Takeoff rotation (VR to
V2).
As specified by the
sponsor for flight
simulator qualification.
Ground ........................
3.e.2. ..................
Engine failure between
V1 and VR.
As specified by the
sponsor for flight
simulator qualification.
Ground ........................
3.e.3. ..................
Pitch change during
go-around.
As specified by the
sponsor for flight
simulator qualification.
Flight ...........................
3.e.4. ..................
Configuration changes
As specified by the
sponsor for flight
simulator qualification.
Flight ...........................
3.e.5. ..................
Power change dynamics.
As specified by the
sponsor for flight
simulator qualification.
Flight ...........................
3.e.6. ..................
Landing flare ...............
As specified by the
sponsor for flight
simulator qualification.
Flight ...........................
3.e.7. ..................
Touchdown bump .......
As specified by the
sponsor for flight
simulator qualification.
Ground ........................
3.f. ......................
Characteristic motion vibrations. The recorded test results for characteristic buffets must allow the
comparison of relative amplitude versus frequency.
3.f.1. ...................
Thrust effect with
brakes set.
Simulator test results
must exhibit the
overall appearance
and trends of the airplane data, with at
least three (3) of the
predominant frequency ‘‘spikes’’
being present within
±2 Hz.
Ground ........................
The test must be conducted within 5% of
the maximum possible thrust with
brakes set.
X
3.f.2. ...................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
3.e. .....................
Buffet with landing
gear extended.
Simulator test results
must exhibit the
overall appearance
and trends of the airplane data, with at
least three (3) of the
predominant frequency ‘‘spikes’’
being present within
±2 Hz.
Flight ...........................
The test must be conducted at a nominal,
mid-range airspeed;
i.e., sufficiently
below landing gear
limiting airspeed to
avoid inadvertently
exceeding this limitation.
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00050
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Pitch attitude due to
initial climb must
dominate over cab
tilt due to longitudinal acceleration.
These tests should be
run with the motion
buffet mode disabled. See paragraph 6.d., of this attachment, Motion
cueing performance
signature.
X
X
X
Associated with test
1.b.4.
X
X
X
X
Associated with test
1.b.5.
X
X
X
Associated with test
2.e.6.
X
X
X
X
Associated with tests
2.c.2. and 2.c.4.
X
X
X
X
Associated with test
2.c.1.
X
X
X
Associated with test
2.e.1.
X
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
X
X
Associated with test
2.e.1.
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26527
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
Notes
A
B
C
D
3.f.3. ...................
Buffet with flaps extended.
Simulator test results
must exhibit the
overall appearance
and trends of the airplane data, with at
least three (3) of the
predominant frequency ‘‘spikes’’
being present within
±2 Hz.
Flight ...........................
3.f.4. ...................
Buffet with
speedbrakes deployed.
Simulator test results
must exhibit the
overall appearance
and trends of the airplane data, with at
least three (3) of the
predominant frequency ‘‘spikes’’
being present within
±2 Hz.
Flight ...........................
3.f.5. ...................
Buffet at approach-tostall.
Simulator test results
must exhibit the
overall appearance
and trends of the airplane data, with at
least three (3) of the
predominant frequency ‘‘spikes’’
being present within
±2 Hz.
Flight ...........................
3.f.6. ...................
Buffet at high airSimulator test results
speeds or high Mach.
must exhibit the
overall appearance
and trends of the airplane data, with at
least three (3) of the
predominant frequency ‘‘spikes’’
being present within
±2 Hz.
Flight ...........................
X
3.f.7. ...................
In-flight vibrations for
propeller driven airplanes.
Flight (clean configuration).
X
Simulator test results
must exhibit the
overall appearance
and trends of the airplane data, with at
least three (3) of the
predominant frequency ‘‘spikes’’
being present within
±2 Hz.
The test must be conducted at a nominal,
mid-range airspeed;
i.e., sufficiently
below flap extension
limiting airspeed to
avoid inadvertently
exceeding this limitation.
X
X
The test must be conducted for approach
to stall. Post stall
characteristics are
not required.
X
The test may be conducted during either
a high speed maneuver (e.g., ‘‘windup’’ turn) or at high
Mach.
4. Visual System.
4.a. .....................
Visual System Response Time: (Choose either test 4.a.1. or 4.a.2. to satisfy test 4.a., Visual System
Response Time Test. This test also suffices for motion system response timing and flight deck instrument response timing. Motion onset should occur before the start of the visual scene change
(the start of the scan of the first video field containing different information) but must occur before
the end of the scan of that video field. Instrument response may not occur prior to motion onset.
4.a.1. ..................
Latency..
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
300 ms (or less) after
airplane response.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Take-off, cruise, and
approach or landing.
Frm 00051
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
One test is required in
each axis (pitch, roll
and yaw) for each of
the three conditions
(take-off, cruise, and
approach or landing).
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
See additional information in this attachment; also see Table
A1A, entry 2.g.
X
X
09MYR2
The visual scene or
test pattern used
during the response
testing should be
representative of the
system capacities required to meet the
daylight, twilight
(dusk/dawn) and/or
night visual capability as appropriate.
26528
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
150 ms (or less) after
airplane response.
N/A ..............................
A separate test is required in each axis
(pitch, roll, and yaw).
N/A ..............................
N/A ..............................
Required as part of
MQTG but not required as part of
continuing evaluations.
Continuous field-ofview of at least 176°
horizontally and 36°
vertically.
N/A ..............................
An SOC is required
and must explain the
geometry of the installation. Horizontal
field-of-view must be
at least 176° (including not less than 88°
either side of the
center line of the design eye point). Additional horizontal
field-of-view capability may be added
at the sponsor’s discretion provided the
minimum field-ofview is retained.
Vertical field-of-view
must be at least 36°
from each pilot’s eye
point. Required as
part of MQTG but
not required as part
of continuing qualification evaluations.
C
D
X
A separate test is required in each axis
(pitch, roll, and yaw).
Continuous collimated
field-of-view providing at least 45°
horizontal and 30°
vertical field-of-view
for each pilot seat.
Both pilot seat visual
systems must be operable simultaneously.
B
One test is required in
each axis (pitch, roll
and yaw) for each of
the three conditions
(take-off, cruise, and
approach or landing)..
150 ms (or less) after
controller movement.
X
Transport Delay.
4.b. .....................
Continuous collimated
visual field-of-view.
4.b.2. ..................
Continuous, collimated,
field-of-view.
4.c. .....................
X
If Transport Delay is
the chosen method
to demonstrate relative responses, the
sponsor and the
NSPM will use the
latency values to ensure proper simulator response when
reviewing those existing tests where latency can be identified (e.g., short period, roll response,
rudder response)
X
System geometry.
X
(Reserved)
4.b.3. ..................
X
Field-of-view.
4.b.1. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Take-off, cruise, and
approach or landing.
300 ms (or less) after
controller movement.
4.a.2. ..................
Notes
A
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00052
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
X
X
A vertical field-of-view
of 30° may be insufficient to meet visual
ground segment requirements.
X
09MYR2
X
The horizontal field-ofview is traditionally
described as a 180°
field-of-view. However, the field-ofview is technically no
less than 176°.
Field-of-view should
be measured using a
visual test pattern
filling the entire visual scene (all channels) with a matrix of
black and white 5°
squares. The installed alignment
should be addressed
in the SOC.
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26529
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
Notes
A
B
C
D
X
X
X
X
The purpose of this
test is to evaluate
local linearity of the
displayed image at
either pilot eye point.
System geometry
should be measured
using a visual test
pattern filling the entire visual scene (all
channels) with a matrix of black and
white 5° squares
with light points at
the intersections.
5° even angular spacing within ±1° as
measured from either pilot eye point
and within 1.5° for
adjacent squares.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
4.f. ......................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
N/A ..............................
The ratio is calculated
by dividing the
brightness level of
the center, bright
square (providing at
least 2 foot-lamberts
or 7 cd/m2) by the
brightness level of
any adjacent dark
square. This requirement is applicable to
any level of simulator equipped with a
daylight visual system.
X
X
Measurements should
be made using a 1°
spot photometer and
a raster drawn test
pattern filling the entire visual scene (all
channels) with a test
pattern of black and
white squares, 5°
per square, with a
white square in the
center of each channel. During contrast
ratio testing, simulator aft-cab and
flight deck ambient
light levels should be
zero.
Not less than six (6)
foot-lamberts (20 cd/
m2).
4.e. .....................
The angular spacing of
any chosen 5°
square and the relative spacing of adjacent squares must
be within the stated
tolerances.
Not less than 5:1. .......
4.d. .....................
N/A ..............................
N/A ..............................
Measure the brightness of a white
square while superimposing a highlight
on that white square.
The use of calligraphic capabilities
to enhance the raster brightness is acceptable; however,
measuring lightpoints
is not acceptable.
This requirement is
applicable to any
level of simulator
equipped with a daylight visual system.
X
X
Measurements should
be made using a 1°
spot photometer and
a raster drawn test
pattern filling the entire visual scene (all
channels) with a test
pattern of black and
white squares, 5°
per square, with a
white square in the
center of each channel.
Surface contrast ratio.
Highlight brightness.
Surface resolution
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00053
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26530
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
Notes
A
B
C
D
Not greater than two
(2) arc minutes.
An SOC is required
and must include the
relevant calculations
and an explanation
of those calculations.
This requirement is
applicable to any
level of simulator
equipped with a daylight visual system.
X
X
When the eye is positioned on a 3° glide
slope at the slant
range distances indicated with white runway markings on a
black runway surface, the eye will
subtend two (2) arc
minutes: (1) A slant
range of 6,876 ft
with stripes 150 ft
long and 16 ft wide,
spaced 4 ft apart. (2)
For Configuration A;
a slant range of
5,157 feet with
stripes 150 ft long
and 12 ft wide,
spaced 3 ft apart. (3)
For Configuration B;
a slant range of
9,884 feet, with
stripes 150 ft long
and 5.75 ft wide,
spaced 5.75 ft apart.
Not greater than five
(5) arc-minutes.
4.g. .....................
N/A ..............................
N/A ..............................
An SOC is required
and must include the
relevant calculations
and an explanation
of those calculations.
This requirement is
applicable to any
level of simulator
equipped with a daylight visual system.
X
X
Light point size should
be measured using a
test pattern consisting of a centrally
located single row of
light points reduced
in length until modulation is just discernible in each visual
channel. A row of 48
lights will form a 4°
angle or less.
Light point size.
Light point contrast ratio.
4.h.1 ...................
For Level A and B simulators.
Not less than 10:1 ......
N/A ..............................
An SOC is required
and must include the
relevant calculations.
4.h.2. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
4.h. .....................
For Level C and D
simulators.
Not less than 25:1 ......
N/A ..............................
An SOC is required
and must include the
relevant calculations.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00054
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
X
X
A 1° spot photometer
is used to measure a
square of at least 1°
filled with light points
(where light point
modulation is just
discernible) and
compare the results
to the measured adjacent background.
During contrast ratio
testing, simulator aftcab and flight deck
ambient light levels
should be zero.
X
09MYR2
X
A 1° spot photometer
is used to measure a
square of at least 1°
filled with light points
(where light point
modulation is just
discernible) and
compare the results
to the measured adjacent background.
During contrast ratio
testing, simulator aftcab and flight deck
ambient light levels
should be zero.
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26531
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Entry No.
4.i. ......................
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
Notes
A
Visual ground segment
The visible segment in
the simulator must
be ±20% of the segment computed to
be visible from the
airplane flight deck.
This tolerance may
be applied at the far
end of the displayed
segment. However,
lights and ground
objects computed to
be visible from the
airplane flight deck
at the near end of
the visible segment
must be visible in
the simulator.
Landing configuration,
with the aircraft
trimmed for the appropriate airspeed,
where the MLG are
at 100 ft (30 m)
above the plane of
the touchdown zone,
while on the electronic glide slope
with an RVR value
set at 1,200 ft (350
m).
The QTG must contain
appropriate calculations and a drawing
showing the pertinent data used to
establish the airplane location and
the segment of the
ground that is visible
considering design
eyepoint, the airplane attitude, flight
deck cut-off angle,
and a visibility of
1200 ft (350 m)
RVR. Simulator performance must be
measured against
the QTG calculations. The data submitted must include
at least the following:.
(1) Static airplane dimensions as follows:
(i) Horizontal and
vertical distance
from main landing
gear (MLG) to
glideslope reception
antenna.
(ii) Horizontal and
vertical distance
from MLG to pilot’s
eyepoint.
(iii) Static flight deck
cutoff angle.
(2) Approach data as
follows:
(i) Identification of runway.
(ii) Horizontal distance
from runway threshold to glideslope
intercept with runway.
(iii) Glideslope angle.
(iv) Airplane pitch
angle on approach.
(3) Airplane data for
manual testing:
(i) Gross weight.
(ii) Airplane configuration.
(iii) Approach airspeed.
If non-homogenous
fog is used to obscure visibility, the
vertical variation in
horizontal visibility
must be described
and be included in
the slant range visibility calculation
used in the computations.
B
C
D
X
X
X
X
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
5. Sound System.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
00:13 May 09, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00055
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Pre-position for this
test is encouraged
but may be achieved
via manual or autopilot control to the
desired position.
26532
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
Notes
A
B
C
D
The sponsor will not be required to repeat the airplane tests (i.e., tests 5.a.1. through 5.a.8. (or 5.b.1. through 5.b.9.)
and 5.c., as appropriate) during continuing qualification evaluations if frequency response and background noise test
results are within tolerance when compared to the initial qualification evaluation results, and the sponsor shows that
no software changes have occurred that will affect the airplane test results. If the frequency response test method is
chosen and fails, the sponsor may elect to fix the frequency response problem and repeat the test or the sponsor may
elect to repeat the airplane tests. If the airplane tests are repeated during continuing qualification evaluations, the results may be compared against initial qualification evaluation results or airplane master data. All tests in this section
must be presented using an unweighted 1⁄3-octave band format from band 17 to 42 (50 Hz to 16 kHz). A minimum 20
second average must be taken at the location corresponding to the airplane data set. The airplane and flight simulator
results must be produced using comparable data analysis techniques..
Turbo-jet airplanes.
5.a.1. ..................
Ready for engine start
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Ground ........................
Normal conditions prior
to engine start with
the Auxiliary Power
Unit operating, if appropriate.
X
5.a.2. ..................
All engines at idle. ......
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Ground ........................
Normal condition prior
to takeoff.
X
5.a.3. ..................
All engines at maximum allowable
thrust with brakes
set.
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Ground ........................
Normal condition prior
to takeoff.
X
5.a.4. ..................
Climb ...........................
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
En-route climb .............
Medium altitude ..........
X
5.a.5. ..................
Cruise ..........................
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Cruise ..........................
Normal cruise configuration.
X
5.a.6. ..................
Speedbrake / spoilers
extended (as appropriate).
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Cruise ..........................
Normal and constant
speedbrake deflection for descent at a
constant airspeed
and power setting.
X
5.a.7. ..................
Initial approach ...........
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Approach .....................
Constant airspeed,
gear up, flaps and
slats, as appropriate.
X
5.a.8. ..................
Final approach ............
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Landing .......................
Constant airspeed,
gear down, full flaps.
X
5.b. .....................
Propeller airplanes.
5.b.1. ..................
Ready for engine start
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Ground ........................
Normal conditions prior
to engine start with
the Auxiliary Power
Unit operating, if appropriate.
X
5.b.2. ..................
All propellers feathered
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Ground ........................
Normal condition prior
to takeoff.
X
5.b.3. ..................
Ground idle or equivalent.
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Ground ........................
Normal condition prior
to takeoff.
X
5.b.4 ...................
Flight idle or equivalent
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Ground ........................
Normal condition prior
to takeoff.
X
5.b.5. ..................
All engines at maximum allowable
power with brakes
set.
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Ground ........................
Normal condition prior
to takeoff.
X
5.b.6. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
5.a. .....................
Climb ...........................
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
En-route climb .............
Medium altitude ..........
X
5.b.7. ..................
Cruise ..........................
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Cruise ..........................
Normal cruise configuration.
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00056
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26533
TABLE A2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Test
Simulator level
Tolerance
Flight conditions
Test details
Notes
Entry No.
Title
5.b.8. ..................
Initial approach ...........
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Approach .....................
Constant airspeed,
gear up, flaps extended as appropriate, RPM as per
operating manual.
X
5.b.9. ..................
Final Approach ............
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Landing .......................
Constant airspeed,
gear down, full flaps,
RPM as per operating manual.
X
5.c. .....................
Special cases.
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
As appropriate ............
5.d. .....................
A
B
C
D
X
These special cases
are identified as particularly significant
during critical phases
of flight and ground
operations for a specific airplane type or
model.
Background noise.
±3 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
X
The sound in the simulator will be evaluated to ensure that
the background
noise does not interfere with training,
testing, or checking.
±5 dB on three (3)
consecutive bands
when compared to
initial evaluation; and
±2 dB when comparing the average
of the absolute differences between
initial and continuing
qualification evaluation.
5.e. .....................
Results of the background noise at initial qualification must
be included in the
MQTG. Measurements must be made
with the simulation
running, the sound
muted and a ‘‘dead’’
flight deck.
Applicable only to Continuing Qualification
Evaluations. If frequency response
plots are provided
for each channel at
the initial qualification evaluation,
these plots may be
repeated at the continuing qualification
evaluation with the
following tolerances
applied: (a) The continuing qualification
1⁄3 octave band amplitudes must not exceed ±5 dB for three
consecutive bands
when compared to
initial results. (b) The
average of the sum
of the absolute differences between
initial and continuing
qualification results
must not exceed 2
dB (refer to Table
A2B in this attachment).
X
Measurements are
compared to those
taken during initial
qualification evaluation.
Frequency response.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
3. General
a. If relevant winds are present in the
objective data, the wind vector should be
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
clearly noted as part of the data presentation,
expressed in conventional terminology, and
related to the runway being used for test near
the ground.
b. The reader is encouraged to review the
Airplane Flight Simulator Evaluation
Handbook, Volumes I and II, published by
PO 00000
Frm 00057
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
the Royal Aeronautical Society, London, UK,
and AC 25–7, as amended, Flight Test Guide
for Certification of Transport Category
Airplanes, and AC 23–8, as amended, Flight
Test Guide for Certification of Part 23
Airplanes, for references and examples
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26534
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
regarding flight testing requirements and
techniques.
4. Control Dynamics
a. General. The characteristics of an
airplane flight control system have a major
effect on handling qualities. A significant
consideration in pilot acceptability of an
airplane is the ‘‘feel’’ provided through the
flight controls. Considerable effort is
expended on airplane feel system design so
that pilots will be comfortable and will
consider the airplane desirable to fly. In
order for an FFS to be representative, it
should ‘‘feel’’ like the airplane being
simulated. Compliance with this requirement
is determined by comparing a recording of
the control feel dynamics of the FFS to actual
airplane measurements in the takeoff, cruise
and landing configurations.
(1) Recordings such as free response to an
impulse or step function are classically used
to estimate the dynamic properties of
electromechanical systems. In any case, it is
only possible to estimate the dynamic
properties as a result of being able to estimate
true inputs and responses. Therefore, it is
imperative that the best possible data be
collected since close matching of the FFS
control loading system to the airplane system
is essential. The required dynamic control
tests are described in Table A2A of this
attachment.
(2) For initial and upgrade evaluations, the
QPS requires that control dynamics
characteristics be measured and recorded
directly from the flight controls (Handling
Qualities—Table A2A). This procedure is
usually accomplished by measuring the free
response of the controls using a step or
impulse input to excite the system. The
procedure should be accomplished in the
takeoff, cruise and landing flight conditions
and configurations.
(3) For airplanes with irreversible control
systems, measurements may be obtained on
the ground if proper pitot-static inputs are
provided to represent airspeeds typical of
those encountered in flight. Likewise, it may
be shown that for some airplanes, takeoff,
cruise, and landing configurations have like
effects. Thus, one may suffice for another. In
either case, engineering validation or
airplane manufacturer rationale should be
submitted as justification for ground tests or
for eliminating a configuration. For FFSs
requiring static and dynamic tests at the
controls, special test fixtures will not be
required during initial and upgrade
evaluations if the QTG shows both test
fixture results and the results of an alternate
approach (e.g., computer plots that were
produced concurrently and show satisfactory
agreement). Repeat of the alternate method
during the initial evaluation satisfies this test
requirement.
b. Control Dynamics Evaluation. The
dynamic properties of control systems are
often stated in terms of frequency, damping
and a number of other classical
measurements. In order to establish a
consistent means of validating test results for
FFS control loading, criteria are needed that
will clearly define the measurement
interpretation and the applied tolerances.
Criteria are needed for underdamped,
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
critically damped and overdamped systems.
In the case of an underdamped system with
very light damping, the system may be
quantified in terms of frequency and
damping. In critically damped or
overdamped systems, the frequency and
damping are not readily measured from a
response time history. Therefore, the
following suggested measurements may be
used:
(1) For Level C and D simulators. Tests to
verify that control feel dynamics represent
the airplane should show that the dynamic
damping cycles (free response of the
controls) match those of the airplane within
specified tolerances. The NSPM recognizes
that several different testing methods may be
used to verify the control feel dynamic
response. The NSPM will consider the merits
of testing methods based on reliability and
consistency. One acceptable method of
evaluating the response and the tolerance to
be applied is described below for the
underdamped and critically damped cases. A
sponsor using this method to comply with
the QPS requirements should perform the
tests as follows:
(a) Underdamped response. Two
measurements are required for the period, the
time to first zero crossing (in case a rate limit
is present) and the subsequent frequency of
oscillation. It is necessary to measure cycles
on an individual basis in case there are nonuniform periods in the response. Each period
will be independently compared to the
respective period of the airplane control
system and, consequently, will enjoy the full
tolerance specified for that period. The
damping tolerance will be applied to
overshoots on an individual basis. Care
should be taken when applying the tolerance
to small overshoots since the significance of
such overshoots becomes questionable. Only
those overshoots larger than 5 per cent of the
total initial displacement should be
considered. The residual band, labeled T(Ad)
on Figure A2A is ±5 percent of the initial
displacement amplitude Ad from the steady
state value of the oscillation. Only
oscillations outside the residual band are
considered significant. When comparing FFS
data to airplane data, the process should
begin by overlaying or aligning the FFS and
airplane steady state values and then
comparing amplitudes of oscillation peaks,
the time of the first zero crossing and
individual periods of oscillation. The FFS
should show the same number of significant
overshoots to within one when compared
against the airplane data. The procedure for
evaluating the response is illustrated in
Figure A2A.
(b) Critically damped and overdamped
response. Due to the nature of critically
damped and overdamped responses (no
overshoots), the time to reach 90 percent of
the steady state (neutral point) value should
be the same as the airplane within ±10
percent. Figure A2B illustrates the procedure.
(c) Special considerations. Control systems
that exhibit characteristics other than
classical overdamped or underdamped
responses should meet specified tolerances.
In addition, special consideration should be
given to ensure that significant trends are
maintained.
PO 00000
Frm 00058
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
(2) Tolerances.
(a) The following table summarizes the
tolerances, T, for underdamped systems, and
‘‘n’’ is the sequential period of a full cycle
of oscillation. See Figure A2A of this
attachment for an illustration of the
referenced measurements.
T(P0) ..............
T(P1) ..............
T(P2) ..............
T(Pn) ..............
T(An) .............
T(Ad) .............
±10% of P0.
±20% of P1.
±30% of P2.
±10(n+1)% of Pn.
±10% of A1.
±5% of Ad = residual band.
Significant overshoots, First overshoot and
±1 subsequent overshoots.
(b) The following tolerance applies to
critically damped and overdamped systems
only. See Figure A2B for an illustration of the
reference measurements:
T(P0) ..............
±10% of P0
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirement
c. Alternative method for control dynamics
evaluation.
(1) An alternative means for validating
control dynamics for aircraft with
hydraulically powered flight controls and
artificial feel systems is by the measurement
of control force and rate of movement. For
each axis of pitch, roll, and yaw, the control
must be forced to its maximum extreme
position for the following distinct rates.
These tests are conducted under normal
flight and ground conditions.
(a) Static test—Slowly move the control so
that a full sweep is achieved within 95 to 105
seconds. A full sweep is defined as
movement of the controller from neutral to
the stop, usually aft or right stop, then to the
opposite stop, then to the neutral position.
(b) Slow dynamic test—Achieve a full
sweep within 8–12 seconds.
(c) Fast dynamic test—Achieve a full
sweep within 3–5 seconds.
Note: Dynamic sweeps may be limited to
forces not exceeding 100 lbs. (44.5 daN).
(d) Tolerances
(i) Static test; see Table A2A, FFS Objective
Tests, Entries 2.a.1., 2.a.2., and 2.a.3.
(ii) Dynamic test—± 2 lbs (0.9 daN) or ±
10% on dynamic increment above static test.
End QPS Requirement
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
BILLING CODE 4910–13–P
d. The FAA is open to alternative means
such as the one described above. The
alternatives should be justified and
appropriate to the application. For example,
the method described here may not apply to
all manufacturers’ systems and certainly not
to aircraft with reversible control systems.
Each case is considered on its own merit on
an ad hoc basis. If the FAA finds that
alternative methods do not result in
satisfactory performance, more
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
conventionally accepted methods will have
to be used.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
BILLING CODE 4913–13–P
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00059
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26535
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00060
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.000
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26536
BILLING CODE 4913–13–C
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
5. Ground Effect
a. For an FFS to be used for take-off and
landing (not applicable to Level A simulators
in that the landing maneuver may not be
credited in a Level A simulator) it should
reproduce the aerodynamic changes that
occur in ground effect. The parameters
chosen for FFS validation should indicate
these changes.
(1) A dedicated test should be provided
that will validate the aerodynamic ground
effect characteristics.
(2) The organization performing the flight
tests may select appropriate test methods and
procedures to validate ground effect.
However, the flight tests should be performed
with enough duration near the ground to
sufficiently validate the ground-effect model.
b. The NSPM will consider the merits of
testing methods based on reliability and
consistency. Acceptable methods of
validating ground effect are described below.
If other methods are proposed, rationale
should be provided to conclude that the tests
performed validate the ground-effect model.
A sponsor using the methods described
below to comply with the QPS requirements
should perform the tests as follows:
(1) Level fly-bys. The level fly-bys should
be conducted at a minimum of three altitudes
within the ground effect, including one at no
more than 10% of the wingspan above the
ground, one each at approximately 30% and
50% of the wingspan where height refers to
main gear tire above the ground. In addition,
one level-flight trim condition should be
conducted out of ground effect (e.g., at 150%
of wingspan).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
(2) Shallow approach landing. The shallow
approach landing should be performed at a
glide slope of approximately one degree with
negligible pilot activity until flare.
c. The lateral-directional characteristics are
also altered by ground effect. For example,
because of changes in lift, roll damping is
affected. The change in roll damping will
affect other dynamic modes usually
evaluated for FFS validation. In fact, Dutch
roll dynamics, spiral stability, and roll-rate
for a given lateral control input are altered by
ground effect. Steady heading sideslips will
also be affected. These effects should be
accounted for in the FFS modeling. Several
tests such as crosswind landing, one engine
inoperative landing, and engine failure on
take-off serve to validate lateral-directional
ground effect since portions of these tests are
accomplished as the aircraft is descending
through heights above the runway at which
ground effect is an important factor.
6. Motion System
a. General.
(1) Pilots use continuous information
signals to regulate the state of the airplane.
In concert with the instruments and outsideworld visual information, whole-body
motion feedback is essential in assisting the
pilot to control the airplane dynamics,
particularly in the presence of external
disturbances. The motion system should
meet basic objective performance criteria,
and should be subjectively tuned at the
pilot’s seat position to represent the linear
and angular accelerations of the airplane
during a prescribed minimum set of
maneuvers and conditions. The response of
PO 00000
Frm 00061
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26537
the motion cueing system should also be
repeatable.
(2) The Motion System tests in Section 3
of Table A2A are intended to qualify the FFS
motion cueing system from a mechanical
performance standpoint. Additionally, the
list of motion effects provides a
representative sample of dynamic conditions
that should be present in the flight simulator.
An additional list of representative, trainingcritical maneuvers, selected from Section 1
(Performance tests), and Section 2 (Handling
Qualities tests), in Table A2A, that should be
recorded during initial qualification (but
without tolerance) to indicate the flight
simulator motion cueing performance
signature have been identified (reference
Section 3.e). These tests are intended to help
improve the overall standard of FFS motion
cueing.
b. Motion System Checks. The intent of test
3a, Frequency Response, test 3b, Leg Balance,
and test 3c, Turn-Around Check, as described
in the Table of Objective Tests, is to
demonstrate the performance of the motion
system hardware, and to check the integrity
of the motion set-up with regard to
calibration and wear. These tests are
independent of the motion cueing software
and should be considered robotic tests.
c. Motion System Repeatability. The intent
of this test is to ensure that the motion
system software and motion system hardware
have not degraded or changed over time. This
diagnostic test should be completed during
continuing qualification checks in lieu of the
robotic tests. This will allow an improved
ability to determine changes in the software
or determine degradation in the hardware.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.001
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26538
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
The following information delineates the
methodology that should be used for this test.
(1) Input: The inputs should be such that
rotational accelerations, rotational rates, and
linear accelerations are inserted before the
transfer from airplane center of gravity to
pilot reference point with a minimum
amplitude of 5 deg/sec/sec, 10 deg/sec and
0.3 g, respectively, to provide adequate
analysis of the output.
(2) Recommended output:
(a) Actual platform linear accelerations; the
output will comprise accelerations due to
both the linear and rotational motion
acceleration;
(b) Motion actuators position.
d. Motion Cueing Performance Signature.
(1) Background. The intent of this test is to
provide quantitative time history records of
motion system response to a selected set of
automated QTG maneuvers during initial
qualification. This is not intended to be a
comparison of the motion platform
accelerations against the flight test recorded
accelerations (i.e., not to be compared against
airplane cueing). If there is a modification to
the initially qualified motion software or
motion hardware (e.g., motion washout filter,
simulator payload change greater than 10%)
then a new baseline may need to be
established.
(2) Test Selection. The conditions
identified in Section 3.e. in Table A2A are
those maneuvers where motion cueing is the
most discernible. They are general tests
applicable to all types of airplanes and
should be completed for motion cueing
performance signature at any time acceptable
to the NSPM prior to or during the initial
qualification evaluation, and the results
included in the MQTG.
(3) Priority. Motion system should be
designed with the intent of placing greater
importance on those maneuvers that directly
influence pilot perception and control of the
airplane motions. For the maneuvers
identified in section 3.e. in Table A2A, the
flight simulator motion cueing system should
have a high tilt co-ordination gain, high
rotational gain, and high correlation with
respect to the airplane simulation model.
(4) Data Recording. The minimum list of
parameters provided should allow for the
determination of the flight simulator’s
motion cueing performance signature for the
initial qualification evaluation. The following
parameters are recommended as being
acceptable to perform such a function:
(a) Flight model acceleration and rotational
rate commands at the pilot reference point;
(b) Motion actuators position;
(c) Actual platform position;
(d) Actual platform acceleration at pilot
reference point.
e. Motion Vibrations.
(1) Presentation of results. The
characteristic motion vibrations may be used
to verify that the flight simulator can
reproduce the frequency content of the
airplane when flown in specific conditions.
The test results should be presented as a
Power Spectral Density (PSD) plot with
frequencies on the horizontal axis and
amplitude on the vertical axis. The airplane
data and flight simulator data should be
presented in the same format with the same
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
scaling. The algorithms used for generating
the flight simulator data should be the same
as those used for the airplane data. If they are
not the same then the algorithms used for the
flight simulator data should be proven to be
sufficiently comparable. As a minimum, the
results along the dominant axes should be
presented and a rationale for not presenting
the other axes should be provided.
(2) Interpretation of results. The overall
trend of the PSD plot should be considered
while focusing on the dominant frequencies.
Less emphasis should be placed on the
differences at the high frequency and low
amplitude portions of the PSD plot. During
the analysis, certain structural components of
the flight simulator have resonant
frequencies that are filtered and may not
appear in the PSD plot. If filtering is
required, the notch filter bandwidth should
be limited to 1 Hz to ensure that the buffet
feel is not adversely affected. In addition, a
rationale should be provided to explain that
the characteristic motion vibration is not
being adversely affected by the filtering. The
amplitude should match airplane data as
described below. However, if the PSD plot
was altered for subjective reasons, a rationale
should be provided to justify the change. If
the plot is on a logarithmic scale, it may be
difficult to interpret the amplitude of the
buffet in terms of acceleration. For example,
a 1×10¥3 g-rms2/Hz would describe a heavy
buffet and may be seen in the deep stall
regime. Alternatively, a 1×10¥6 g-rms2/Hz
buffet is almost not perceivable; but may
represent a flap buffet at low speed. The
previous two examples differ in magnitude
by 1000. On a PSD plot this represents three
decades (one decade is a change in order of
magnitude of 10; and two decades is a change
in order of magnitude of 100).
Note: In the example, ‘‘g-rms2 is the
mathematical expression for ‘‘g’s root mean
squared.’’
7. Sound System
a. General. The total sound environment in
the airplane is very complex, and changes
with atmospheric conditions, airplane
configuration, airspeed, altitude, and power
settings. Flight deck sounds are an important
component of the flight deck operational
environment and provide valuable
information to the flight crew. These aural
cues can either assist the crew (as an
indication of an abnormal situation), or
hinder the crew (as a distraction or
nuisance). For effective training, the flight
simulator should provide flight deck sounds
that are perceptible to the pilot during
normal and abnormal operations, and
comparable to those of the airplane. The
flight simulator operator should carefully
evaluate background noises in the location
where the device will be installed. To
demonstrate compliance with the sound
requirements, the objective or validation tests
in this attachment were selected to provide
a representative sample of normal static
conditions typically experienced by a pilot.
b. Alternate propulsion. For FFS with
multiple propulsion configurations, any
condition listed in Table A2A of this
attachment should be presented for
PO 00000
Frm 00062
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
evaluation as part of the QTG if identified by
the airplane manufacturer or other data
supplier as significantly different due to a
change in propulsion system (engine or
propeller).
c. Data and Data Collection System.
(1) Information provided to the flight
simulator manufacturer should be presented
in the format suggested by the International
Air Transport Association (IATA) ‘‘Flight
Simulator Design and Performance Data
Requirements,’’ as amended. This
information should contain calibration and
frequency response data.
(2) The system used to perform the tests
listed in Table A2A should comply with the
following standards:
(a) The specifications for octave, half
octave, and third octave band filter sets may
be found in American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) S1.11–1986;
(b) Measurement microphones should be
type WS2 or better, as described in
International Electrotechnical Commission
(IEC) 1094–4–1995.
(3) Headsets. If headsets are used during
normal operation of the airplane they should
also be used during the flight simulator
evaluation.
(4) Playback equipment. Playback
equipment and recordings of the QTG
conditions should be provided during initial
evaluations.
(5) Background noise.
(a) Background noise is the noise in the
flight simulator that is not associated with
the airplane, but is caused by the flight
simulator’s cooling and hydraulic systems
and extraneous noise from other locations in
the building. Background noise can seriously
impact the correct simulation of airplane
sounds and should be kept below the
airplane sounds. In some cases, the sound
level of the simulation can be increased to
compensate for the background noise.
However, this approach is limited by the
specified tolerances and by the subjective
acceptability of the sound environment to the
evaluation pilot.
(b) The acceptability of the background
noise levels is dependent upon the normal
sound levels in the airplane being
represented. Background noise levels that fall
below the lines defined by the following
points, may be acceptable:
(i) 70 dB @ 50 Hz;
(ii) 55 dB @ 1000 Hz;
(iii) 30 dB @ 16 kHz
(Note: These limits are for unweighted
1/3 octave band sound levels. Meeting these
limits for background noise does not ensure
an acceptable flight simulator. Airplane
sounds that fall below this limit require
careful review and may require lower limits
on background noise.)
(6) Validation testing. Deficiencies in
airplane recordings should be considered
when applying the specified tolerances to
ensure that the simulation is representative
of the airplane. Examples of typical
deficiencies are:
(a) Variation of data between tail numbers;
(b) Frequency response of microphones;
(c) Repeatability of the measurements.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26539
TABLE A2B.—EXAMPLE OF CONTINUING QUALIFICATION FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST TOLERANCE
Continuing
qualification
results
(dBSPL)
Initial results
(dBSPL)
Band center frequency
Absolute
difference
50 .................................................................................................................................................
63 .................................................................................................................................................
80 .................................................................................................................................................
100 ...............................................................................................................................................
125 ...............................................................................................................................................
160 ...............................................................................................................................................
200 ...............................................................................................................................................
250 ...............................................................................................................................................
315 ...............................................................................................................................................
400 ...............................................................................................................................................
500 ...............................................................................................................................................
630 ...............................................................................................................................................
800 ...............................................................................................................................................
1000 .............................................................................................................................................
1250 .............................................................................................................................................
1600 .............................................................................................................................................
2000 .............................................................................................................................................
2500 .............................................................................................................................................
3150 .............................................................................................................................................
4000 .............................................................................................................................................
5000 .............................................................................................................................................
6300 .............................................................................................................................................
8000 .............................................................................................................................................
10000 ...........................................................................................................................................
12500 ...........................................................................................................................................
16000 ...........................................................................................................................................
75.0
75.9
77.1
78.0
81.9
79.8
83.1
78.6
79.5
80.1
80.7
81.9
73.2
79.2
80.7
81.6
76.2
79.5
80.1
78.9
80.1
80.7
84.3
81.3
80.7
71.1
73.8
75.6
76.5
78.3
81.3
80.1
84.9
78.9
78.3
79.5
79.8
80.4
74.1
80.1
82.8
78.6
74.4
80.7
77.1
78.6
77.1
80.4
85.5
79.8
80.1
71.1
1.2
0.3
0.6
0.3
0.6
0.3
1.8
0.3
1.2
0.6
0.9
1.5
0.9
0.9
2.1
3.0
1.8
1.2
3.0
0.3
3.0
0.3
1.2
1.5
0.6
0.0
Average ................................................................................................................................
........................
........................
1.1
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
8. Additional Information About Flight
Simulator Qualification for New or
Derivative Airplanes
a. Typically, an airplane manufacturer’s
approved final data for performance,
handling qualities, systems or avionics is not
available until well after a new or derivative
airplane has entered service. However, flight
crew training and certification often begins
several months prior to the entry of the first
airplane into service. Consequently, it may be
necessary to use preliminary data provided
by the airplane manufacturer for interim
qualification of flight simulators.
b. In these cases, the NSPM may accept
certain partially validated preliminary
airplane and systems data, and early release
(‘‘red label’’) avionics data in order to permit
the necessary program schedule for training,
certification, and service introduction.
c. Simulator sponsors seeking qualification
based on preliminary data should consult the
NSPM to make special arrangements for
using preliminary data for flight simulator
qualification. The sponsor should also
consult the airplane and flight simulator
manufacturers to develop a data plan and
flight simulator qualification plan.
d. The procedure to be followed to gain
NSPM acceptance of preliminary data will
vary from case to case and between airplane
manufacturers. Each airplane manufacturer’s
new airplane development and test program
is designed to suit the needs of the particular
project and may not contain the same events
or sequence of events as another
manufacturer’s program, or even the same
manufacturer’s program for a different
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
airplane. Therefore, there cannot be a
prescribed invariable procedure for
acceptance of preliminary data, but instead
there should be a statement describing the
final sequence of events, data sources, and
validation procedures agreed by the
simulator sponsor, the airplane
manufacturer, the flight simulator
manufacturer, and the NSPM.
Note: A description of airplane
manufacturer-provided data needed for flight
simulator modeling and validation is to be
found in the IATA Document ‘‘Flight
Simulator Design and Performance Data
Requirements,’’ as amended.
e. The preliminary data should be the
manufacturer’s best representation of the
airplane, with assurance that the final data
will not significantly deviate from the
preliminary estimates. Data derived from
these predictive or preliminary techniques
should be validated against available sources
including, at least, the following:
(1) Manufacturer’s engineering report. The
report should explain the predictive method
used and illustrate past success of the
method on similar projects. For example, the
manufacturer could show the application of
the method to an earlier airplane model or
predict the characteristics of an earlier model
and compare the results to final data for that
model.
(2) Early flight test results. This data is
often derived from airplane certification
tests, and should be used to maximum
advantage for early flight simulator
validation. Certain critical tests that would
normally be done early in the airplane
PO 00000
Frm 00063
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
certification program should be included to
validate essential pilot training and
certification maneuvers. These include cases
where a pilot is expected to cope with an
airplane failure mode or an engine failure.
Flight test data that will be available early in
the flight test program will depend on the
airplane manufacturer’s flight test program
design and may not be the same in each case.
The flight test program of the airplane
manufacturer should include provisions for
generation of very early flight test results for
flight simulator validation.
f. The use of preliminary data is not
indefinite. The airplane manufacturer’s final
data should be available within 12 months
after the airplane’s first entry into service or
as agreed by the NSPM, the simulator
sponsor, and the airplane manufacturer.
When applying for interim qualification
using preliminary data, the simulator sponsor
and the NSPM should agree on the update
program. This includes specifying that the
final data update will be installed in the
flight simulator within a period of 12 months
following the final data release, unless
special conditions exist and a different
schedule is acceptable. The flight simulator
performance and handling validation would
then be based on data derived from flight
tests or from other approved sources. Initial
airplane systems data should be updated
after engineering tests. Final airplane systems
data should also be used for flight simulator
programming and validation.
g. Flight simulator avionics should stay
essentially in step with airplane avionics
(hardware and software) updates. The
permitted time lapse between airplane and
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26540
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
flight simulator updates should be minimal.
It may depend on the magnitude of the
update and whether the QTG and pilot
training and certification are affected.
Differences in airplane and flight simulator
avionics versions and the resulting effects on
flight simulator qualification should be
agreed between the simulator sponsor and
the NSPM. Consultation with the flight
simulator manufacturer is desirable
throughout the qualification process.
h. The following describes an example of
the design data and sources that might be
used in the development of an interim
qualification plan.
(1) The plan should consist of the
development of a QTG based upon a mix of
flight test and engineering simulation data.
For data collected from specific airplane
flight tests or other flights, the required
design model or data changes necessary to
support an acceptable Proof of Match (POM)
should be generated by the airplane
manufacturer.
(2) For proper validation of the two sets of
data, the airplane manufacturer should
compare their simulation model responses
against the flight test data, when driven by
the same control inputs and subjected to the
same atmospheric conditions as recorded in
the flight test. The model responses should
result from a simulation where the following
systems are run in an integrated fashion and
are consistent with the design data released
to the flight simulator manufacturer:
(a) Propulsion;
(b) Aerodynamics;
(c) Mass properties;
(d) Flight controls;
(e) Stability augmentation; and
(f) Brakes/landing gear.
i. A qualified test pilot should be used to
assess handling qualities and performance
evaluations for the qualification of flight
simulators of new airplane types.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Begin QPS Requirement
9. Engineering Simulator—Validation Data
a. When a fully validated simulation (i.e.,
validated with flight test results) is modified
due to changes to the simulated airplane
configuration, the airplane manufacturer or
other acceptable data supplier must
coordinate with the NSPM if they propose to
supply validation data from an ‘‘audited’’
engineering simulator/simulation to
selectively supplement flight test data. The
NSPM must be provided an opportunity to
audit the engineering simulation or the
engineering simulator used to generate the
validation data. Validation data from an
audited engineering simulation may be used
for changes that are incremental in nature.
Manufacturers or other data suppliers must
be able to demonstrate that the predicted
changes in aircraft performance are based on
acceptable aeronautical principles with
proven success history and valid outcomes.
This must include comparisons of predicted
and flight test validated data.
b. Airplane manufacturers or other
acceptable data suppliers seeking to use an
engineering simulator for simulation
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
validation data as an alternative to flight-test
derived validation data, must contact the
NSPM and provide the following:
(1) A description of the proposed aircraft
changes, a description of the proposed
simulation model changes, and the use of an
integral configuration management process,
including a description of the actual
simulation model modifications that includes
a step-by-step description leading from the
original model(s) to the current model(s).
(2) A schedule for review by the NSPM of
the proposed plan and the subsequent
validation data to establish acceptability of
the proposal.
(3) Validation data from an audited
engineering simulator/simulation to
supplement specific segments of the flight
test data.
c. To be qualified to supply engineering
simulator validation data, for aerodynamic,
engine, flight control, or ground handling
models, an airplane manufacturer or other
acceptable data supplier must:
(1) Be able to verify their ability able to:
(a) Develop and implement high fidelity
simulation models; and
(b) Predict the handling and performance
characteristics of an airplane with sufficient
accuracy to avoid additional flight test
activities for those handling and performance
characteristics.
(2) Have an engineering simulator that:
(a) Is a physical entity, complete with a
flight deck representative of the simulated
class of airplane;
(b) Has controls sufficient for manual
flight;
(c) Has models that run in an integrated
manner;
(d) Has fully flight-test validated
simulation models as the original or baseline
simulation models;
(e) Has an out-of-the-flight deck visual
system;
(f) Has actual avionics boxes
interchangeable with the equivalent software
simulations to support validation of released
software;
(g) Uses the same models as released to the
training community (which are also used to
produce stand-alone proof-of-match and
checkout documents);
(h) Is used to support airplane
development and certification; and
(i) Has been found to be a high fidelity
representation of the airplane by the
manufacturer’s pilots (or other acceptable
data supplier), certificate holders, and the
NSPM.
(3) Use the engineering simulator/
simulation to produce a representative set of
integrated proof-of-match cases.
(4) Use a configuration control system
covering hardware and software for the
operating components of the engineering
simulator/simulation.
(5) Demonstrate that the predicted effects
of the change(s) are within the provisions of
sub-paragraph ‘‘a’’ of this section, and
confirm that additional flight test data are not
required.
d. Additional Requirements for Validation
Data
(1) When used to provide validation data,
an engineering simulator must meet the
PO 00000
Frm 00064
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
simulator standards currently applicable to
training simulators except for the data
package.
(2) The data package used must be:
(a) Comprised of the engineering
predictions derived from the airplane design,
development, or certification process;
(b) Based on acceptable aeronautical
principles with proven success history and
valid outcomes for aerodynamics, engine
operations, avionics operations, flight control
applications, or ground handling;
(c) Verified with existing flight-test data;
and
(d) Applicable to the configuration of a
production airplane, as opposed to a flighttest airplane.
(3) Where engineering simulator data are
used as part of a QTG, an essential match
must exist between the training simulator
and the validation data.
(4) Training flight simulator(s) using these
baseline and modified simulation models
must be qualified to at least internationally
recognized standards, such as contained in
the ICAO Document 9625, the ‘‘Manual of
Criteria for the Qualification of Flight
Simulators.’’
End QPS Requirement
lllllllllllllllllllll
10. [Reserved]
11. Validation Test Tolerances
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
a. Non-Flight-Test Tolerances
(1) If engineering simulator data or other
non-flight-test data are used as an allowable
form of reference validation data for the
objective tests listed in Table A2A of this
attachment, the data provider must supply a
well-documented mathematical model and
testing procedure that enables a replication of
the engineering simulation results within
20% of the corresponding flight test
tolerances.
b. Background
(1) The tolerances listed in Table A2A of
this attachment are designed to measure the
quality of the match using flight-test data as
a reference.
(2) Good engineering judgment should be
applied to all tolerances in any test. A test
is failed when the results clearly fall outside
of the prescribed tolerance(s).
(3) Engineering simulator data are
acceptable because the same simulation
models used to produce the reference data
are also used to test the flight training
simulator (i.e., the two sets of results should
be ‘‘essentially’’ similar).
(4) The results from the two sources may
differ for the following reasons:
(a) Hardware (avionics units and flight
controls);
(b) Iteration rates;
(c) Execution order;
(d) Integration methods;
(e) Processor architecture;
(f) Digital drift, including:
(i) Interpolation methods;
(ii) Data handling differences; and
(iii) Auto-test trim tolerances.
(5) The tolerance limit between the
reference data and the flight simulator results
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
is generally 20% of the corresponding
‘‘flight-test’’ tolerances. However, there may
be cases where the simulator models used are
of higher fidelity, or the manner in which
they are cascaded in the integrated testing
loop have the effect of a higher fidelity, than
those supplied by the data provider. Under
these circumstances, it is possible that an
error greater than 20% may be generated. An
error greater than 20% may be acceptable if
simulator sponsor can provide an adequate
explanation.
(6) Guidelines are needed for the
application of tolerances to engineeringsimulator-generated validation data because:
(a) Flight-test data are often not available
due to technical reasons;
(b) Alternative technical solutions are
being advanced; and
(c) High costs.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
12. Validation Data Roadmap
a. Airplane manufacturers or other data
suppliers should supply a validation data
roadmap (VDR) document as part of the data
package. A VDR document contains guidance
material from the airplane validation data
supplier recommending the best possible
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
sources of data to be used as validation data
in the QTG. A VDR is of special value when
requesting interim qualification, qualification
of simulators for airplanes certificated prior
to 1992, and qualification of alternate engine
or avionics fits. A sponsor seeking to have a
device qualified in accordance with the
standards contained in this QPS appendix
should submit a VDR to the NSPM as early
as possible in the planning stages. The NSPM
is the final authority to approve the data to
be used as validation material for the QTG.
The NSPM and the Joint Aviation
Authorities’ Synthetic Training Devices
Advisory Board have committed to maintain
a list of agreed VDRs.
b. The VDR should identify (in matrix
format) sources of data for all required tests.
It should also provide guidance regarding the
validity of these data for a specific engine
type, thrust rating configuration, and the
revision levels of all avionics affecting
airplane handling qualities and performance.
The VDR should include rationale or
explanation in cases where data or
parameters are missing, engineering
simulation data are to be used, flight test
methods require explanation, or there is any
PO 00000
Frm 00065
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26541
deviation from data requirements.
Additionally, the document should refer to
other appropriate sources of validation data
(e.g., sound and vibration data documents).
c. The Sample Validation Data Roadmap
(VDR) for airplanes, shown in Table A2C,
depicts a generic roadmap matrix identifying
sources of validation data for an abbreviated
list of tests. This document is merely a
sample and does not provide actual data. A
complete matrix should address all test
conditions and provide actual data and data
sources.
d. Two examples of rationale pages are
presented in Appendix F of the IATA ‘‘Flight
Simulator Design and Performance Data
Requirements.’’ These illustrate the type of
airplane and avionics configuration
information and descriptive engineering
rationale used to describe data anomalies or
provide an acceptable basis for using
alternative data for QTG validation
requirements.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
BILLING CODE 4910–13–P
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
BILLING CODE 4910–13–C
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00066
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.002
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26542
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
Begin Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
13. Acceptance Guidelines for Alternative
Engines Data.
a. Background
(1) For a new airplane type, the majority
of flight validation data are collected on the
first airplane configuration with a ‘‘baseline’’
engine type. These data are then used to
validate all flight simulators representing that
airplane type.
(2) Additional flight test validation data
may be needed for flight simulators
representing an airplane with engines of a
different type than the baseline, or for
engines with thrust rating that is different
from previously validated configurations.
(3) When a flight simulator with alternate
engines is to be qualified, the QTG should
contain tests against flight test validation
data for selected cases where engine
differences are expected to be significant.
b. Approval Guidelines For Validating
Alternate Engine Applications
(1) The following guidelines apply to flight
simulators representing airplanes with
alternate engine applications or with more
than one engine type or thrust rating.
(2) Validation tests can be segmented into
two groups, those that are dependent on
engine type or thrust rating and those that are
not.
(3) For tests that are independent of engine
type or thrust rating, the QTG can be based
on validation data from any engine
application. Tests in this category should be
designated as independent of engine type or
thrust rating.
(4) For tests that are affected by engine
type, the QTG should contain selected
engine-specific flight test data sufficient to
validate that particular airplane-engine
configuration. These effects may be due to
engine dynamic characteristics, thrust levels
or engine-related airplane configuration
changes. This category is primarily
characterized by variations between different
engine manufacturers’ products, but also
includes differences due to significant engine
design changes from a previously flightvalidated configuration within a single
engine type. See Table A2D, Alternate Engine
Validation Flight Tests in this section for a
list of acceptable tests.
(5) Alternate engine validation data should
be based on flight test data, except as noted
in sub-paragraphs 13.c.(1) and (2), or where
other data are specifically allowed (e.g.,
engineering simulator/simulation data). If
certification of the flight characteristics of the
airplane with a new thrust rating (regardless
of percentage change) does require
certification flight testing with a
comprehensive stability and control flight
instrumentation package, then the conditions
described in Table A2D in this section
should be obtained from flight testing and
presented in the QTG. Flight test data, other
than throttle calibration data, are not
required if the new thrust rating is certified
on the airplane without need for a
comprehensive stability and control flight
instrumentation package.
(6) As a supplement to the engine-specific
flight tests listed in Table A2D and baseline
engine-independent tests, additional enginespecific engineering validation data should
be provided in the QTG, as appropriate, to
facilitate running the entire QTG with the
alternate engine configuration. The sponsor
and the NSPM should agree in advance on
the specific validation tests to be supported
by engineering simulation data.
(7) A matrix or VDR should be provided
with the QTG indicating the appropriate
validation data source for each test.
26543
(8) The flight test conditions in Table A2D
are appropriate and should be sufficient to
validate implementation of alternate engines
in a flight simulator.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirement
c. Test Requirements
(1) The QTG must contain selected enginespecific flight test data sufficient to validate
the alternative thrust level when:
(a) the engine type is the same, but the
thrust rating exceeds that of a previously
flight-test validated configuration by five
percent (5%) or more; or
(b) the engine type is the same, but the
thrust rating is less than the lowest
previously flight-test validated rating by
fifteen percent (15%) or more. See Table A2D
for a list of acceptable tests.
(2) Flight test data is not required if the
thrust increase is greater than 5%, but flight
tests have confirmed that the thrust increase
does not change the airplane’s flight
characteristics.
(3) Throttle calibration data (i.e.,
commanded power setting parameter versus
throttle position) must be provided to
validate all alternate engine types and engine
thrust ratings that are higher or lower than
a previously validated engine. Data from a
test airplane or engineering test bench with
the correct engine controller (both hardware
and software) are required.
End QPS Requirement
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirement
TABLE A2D.—ALTERNATIVE ENGINE VALIDATION FLIGHT TESTS
Entry No.
Alternative
engine type
Test description
Alternative
thrust rating 2
1.b.1., 1.b.4. ...........
Normal take-off/ground acceleration time and distance
X
X
1.b.2. ......................
Vmcg, if performed for airplane certification
X
X
1.b.5. ......................
1.b.8. ......................
Engine-out take-off
Dynamic engine failure after take-off.
Either test may
be performed.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1.b.7. ...................... Rejected take-off if performed for airplane certification
1.d.1. ...................... Cruise performance
1.f.1., 1.f.2. ............. Engine acceleration and deceleration
2.a.7. ...................... Throttle calibration 1
2.c.1. ...................... Power change dynamics (acceleration)
2.d.1. ...................... Vmca if performed for airplane certification
2.d.5. ...................... Engine inoperative trim
2.e.1. ...................... Normal landing
1 Must be provided for all changes in engine type or thrust rating; see paragraph 13.c.(3).
2 See paragraphs 13.c.(1) through 13.c.(3), for a definition of applicable thrust ratings.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00067
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
09MYR2
X
X
X
X
X
26544
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
End QPS Requirement
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Begin Information
14. Acceptance Guidelines for Alternative
Avionics (Flight-Related Computers and
Controllers)
a. Background
(1) For a new airplane type, the majority
of flight validation data are collected on the
first airplane configuration with a ‘‘baseline’’
flight-related avionics ship-set; (see
subparagraph b.(2) of this section). These
data are then used to validate all flight
simulators representing that airplane type.
(2) Additional validation data may be
required for flight simulators representing an
airplane with avionics of a different
hardware design than the baseline, or a
different software revision than previously
validated configurations.
(3) When a flight simulator with additional
or alternate avionics configurations is to be
qualified, the QTG should contain tests
against validation data for selected cases
where avionics differences are expected to be
significant.
b. Approval Guidelines for Validating
Alternate Avionics
(1) The following guidelines apply to flight
simulators representing airplanes with a
revised avionics configuration, or more than
one avionics configuration.
(2) The baseline validation data should be
based on flight test data, except where other
data are specifically allowed (e.g.,
engineering flight simulator data).
(3) The airplane avionics can be segmented
into two groups, systems or components
whose functional behavior contributes to the
aircraft response presented in the QTG
results, and systems that do not. The
following avionics are examples of
contributory systems for which hardware
design changes or software revisions may
lead to significant differences in the aircraft
response relative to the baseline avionics
configuration: Flight control computers and
controllers for engines, autopilot, braking
system, nosewheel steering system, and high
lift system. Related avionics such as stall
warning and augmentation systems should
also be considered.
(4) The acceptability of validation data
used in the QTG for an alternative avionics
fit should be determined as follows:
(a) For changes to an avionics system or
component that do not affect QTG validation
test response, the QTG test can be based on
validation data from the previously validated
avionics configuration.
(b) For an avionics change to a contributory
system, where a specific test is not affected
by the change (e.g., the avionics change is a
Built In Test Equipment (BITE) update or a
modification in a different flight phase), the
QTG test can be based on validation data
from the previously-validated avionics
configuration. The QTG should include
authoritative justification (e.g., from the
airplane manufacturer or system supplier)
that this avionics change does not affect the
test.
(c) For an avionics change to a contributory
system, the QTG may be based on validation
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
data from the previously-validated avionics
configuration if no new functionality is
added and the impact of the avionics change
on the airplane response is small and based
on acceptable aeronautical principles with
proven success history and valid outcomes.
This should be supplemented with avionicsspecific validation data from the airplane
manufacturer’s engineering simulation,
generated with the revised avionics
configuration. The QTG should also include
an explanation of the nature of the change
and its effect on the airplane response.
(d) For an avionics change to a
contributory system that significantly affects
some tests in the QTG or where new
functionality is added, the QTG should be
based on validation data from the previously
validated avionics configuration and
supplemental avionics-specific flight test
data sufficient to validate the alternate
avionics revision. Additional flight test
validation data may not be needed if the
avionics changes were certified without the
need for testing with a comprehensive flight
instrumentation package. The airplane
manufacturer should coordinate flight
simulator data requirements, in advance with
the NSPM.
(5) A matrix or ‘‘roadmap’’ should be
provided with the QTG indicating the
appropriate validation data source for each
test. The roadmap should include
identification of the revision state of those
contributory avionics systems that could
affect specific test responses if changed.
15. Transport Delay Testing
a. This paragraph explains how to
determine the introduced transport delay
through the flight simulator system so that it
does not exceed a specific time delay. The
transport delay should be measured from
control inputs through the interface, through
each of the host computer modules and back
through the interface to motion, flight
instrument, and visual systems. The
transport delay should not exceed the
maximum allowable interval.
b. Four specific examples of transport
delay are:
(1) Simulation of classic non-computer
controlled aircraft;
(2) Simulation of computer controlled
aircraft using real airplane black boxes;
(3) Simulation of computer controlled
aircraft using software emulation of airplane
boxes;
(4) Simulation using software avionics or
re-hosted instruments.
c. Figure A2C illustrates the total transport
delay for a non-computer-controlled airplane
or the classic transport delay test. Since there
are no airplane-induced delays for this case,
the total transport delay is equivalent to the
introduced delay.
d. Figure A2D illustrates the transport
delay testing method using the real airplane
controller system.
e. To obtain the induced transport delay for
the motion, instrument and visual signal, the
delay induced by the airplane controller
should be subtracted from the total transport
delay. This difference represents the
introduced delay and should not exceed the
standards prescribed in Table A1A.
PO 00000
Frm 00068
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
f. Introduced transport delay is measured
from the flight deck control input to the
reaction of the instruments and motion and
visual systems (See Figure A2C).
g. The control input may also be
introduced after the airplane controller
system and the introduced transport delay
measured directly from the control input to
the reaction of the instruments, and
simulator motion and visual systems (See
Figure A2D).
h. Figure A2E illustrates the transport
delay testing method used on a flight
simulator that uses a software emulated
airplane controller system.
i. It is not possible to measure the
introduced transport delay using the
simulated airplane controller system
architecture for the pitch, roll and yaw axes.
Therefore, the signal should be measured
directly from the pilot controller. The flight
simulator manufacturer should measure the
total transport delay and subtract the
inherent delay of the actual airplane
components because the real airplane
controller system has an inherent delay
provided by the airplane manufacturer. The
flight simulator manufacturer should ensure
that the introduced delay does not exceed the
standards prescribed in Table A1A.
j. Special measurements for instrument
signals for flight simulators using a real
airplane instrument display system instead of
a simulated or re-hosted display. For flight
instrument systems, the total transport delay
should be measured and the inherent delay
of the actual airplane components subtracted
to ensure that the introduced delay does not
exceed the standards prescribed in Table
A1A.
(1) Figure A2FA illustrates the transport
delay procedure without airplane display
simulation. The introduced delay consists of
the delay between the control movement and
the instrument change on the data bus.
(2) Figure A2FB illustrates the modified
testing method required to measure
introduced delay due to software avionics or
re-hosted instruments. The total simulated
instrument transport delay is measured and
the airplane delay should be subtracted from
this total. This difference represents the
introduced delay and should not exceed the
standards prescribed in Table A1A. The
inherent delay of the airplane between the
data bus and the displays is indicated in
figure A2FA. The display manufacturer
should provide this delay time.
k. Recorded signals. The signals recorded
to conduct the transport delay calculations
should be explained on a schematic block
diagram. The flight simulator manufacturer
should also provide an explanation of why
each signal was selected and how they relate
to the above descriptions.
l. Interpretation of results. Flight simulator
results vary over time from test to test due
to ‘‘sampling uncertainty.’’ All flight
simulators run at a specific rate where all
modules are executed sequentially in the
host computer. The flight controls input can
occur at any time in the iteration, but these
data will not be processed before the start of
the new iteration. For example, a flight
simulator running at 60 Hz may have a
difference of as much as 16.67 msec between
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
computer to the visual system will not
always be synchronized.
m. The transport delay test should account
for both daylight and night modes of
operation of the visual system. In both cases,
the tolerances prescribed in Table A1A must
PO 00000
Frm 00069
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
be met and the motion response should occur
before the end of the first video scan
containing new information.
BILLING CODE 4910–13–P
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.003
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
test results. This does not mean that the test
has failed. Instead, the difference is
attributed to variations in input processing.
In some conditions, the host simulator and
the visual system do not run at the same
iteration rate, so the output of the host
26545
26546
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Begin Information
16. Continuing Qualification Evaluations—
Validation Test Data Presentation
a. Background
(1) The MQTG is created during the initial
evaluation of a flight simulator. This is the
master document, as amended, to which
flight simulator continuing qualification
evaluation test results are compared.
(2) The currently accepted method of
presenting continuing qualification
evaluation test results is to provide flight
simulator results over-plotted with reference
data. Test results are carefully reviewed to
determine if the test is within the specified
tolerances. This can be a time consuming
process, particularly when reference data
exhibits rapid variations or an apparent
anomaly requiring engineering judgment in
the application of the tolerances. In these
cases, the solution is to compare the results
to the MQTG. The continuing qualification
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
results are compared to the results in the
MQTG for acceptance. The flight simulator
operator and the NSPM should look for any
change in the flight simulator performance
since initial qualification.
b. Continuing Qualification Evaluation Test
Results Presentation
(1) Flight simulator operators are
encouraged to over-plot continuing
qualification validation test results with
MQTG flight simulator results recorded
during the initial evaluation and as amended.
Any change in a validation test will be
readily apparent. In addition to plotting
continuing qualification validation test and
MQTG results, operators may elect to plot
reference data as well.
(2) There are no suggested tolerances
between flight simulator continuing
qualification and MQTG validation test
results. Investigation of any discrepancy
between the MQTG and continuing
qualification flight simulator performance is
left to the discretion of the flight simulator
operator and the NSPM.
PO 00000
Frm 00070
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
(3) Differences between the two sets of
results, other than variations attributable to
repeatability issues that cannot be explained,
should be investigated.
(4) The flight simulator should retain the
ability to over-plot both automatic and
manual validation test results with reference
data.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
17. Alternative Data Sources, Procedures,
and Instrumentation: Level A and Level B
Simulators Only
a. Sponsors are not required to use the
alternative data sources, procedures, and
instrumentation. However, a sponsor may
choose to use one or more of the alternative
sources, procedures, and instrumentation
described in Table A2E.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.004
BILLING CODE 4910–13–C.
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
Begin Information
b. It has become standard practice for
experienced simulator manufacturers to use
modeling techniques to establish data bases
for new simulator configurations while
awaiting the availability of actual flight test
data. The data generated from the
aerodynamic modeling techniques is then
compared to the flight test data when it
becomes available. The results of such
comparisons have become increasingly
consistent, indicating that these techniques,
applied with the appropriate experience, are
dependable and accurate for the development
of aerodynamic models for use in Level A
and Level B simulators.
c. Based on this history of successful
comparisons, the NSPM has concluded that
those who are experienced in the
development of aerodynamic models may
use modeling techniques to alter the method
for acquiring flight test data for Level A or
Level B simulators.
d. The information in Table A2E
(Alternative Data Sources, Procedures, and
Instrumentation) is presented to describe an
acceptable alternative to data sources for
simulator modeling and validation and an
acceptable alternative to the procedures and
instrumentation traditionally used to gather
such modeling and validation data.
(1) Alternative data sources that may be
used for part or all of a data requirement are
the Airplane Maintenance Manual, the
Airplane Flight Manual (AFM), Airplane
Design Data, the Type Inspection Report
(TIR), Certification Data or acceptable
supplemental flight test data.
(2) The sponsor should coordinate with the
NSPM prior to using alternative data sources
in a flight test or data gathering effort.
e. The NSPM position regarding the use of
these alternative data sources, procedures,
and instrumentation is based on the
following presumptions:
(1) Data gathered through the alternative
means does not require angle of attack (AOA)
measurements or control surface position
measurements for any flight test. However,
AOA can be sufficiently derived if the flight
test program ensures the collection of
acceptable level, unaccelerated, trimmed
flight data. All of the simulator time history
tests that begin in level, unaccelerated, and
trimmed flight, including the three basic trim
tests and ‘‘fly-by’’ trims, can be a successful
validation of angle of attack by comparison
with flight test pitch angle. (Note: Due to the
criticality of angle of attack in the
development of the ground effects model,
particularly critical for normal landings and
landings involving cross-control input
applicable to Level B simulators, stable ‘‘flyby’’ trim data will be the acceptable norm for
normal and cross-control input landing
objective data for these applications.)
(2) The use of a rigorously defined and
fully mature simulation controls system
model that includes accurate gearing and
cable stretch characteristics (where
applicable), determined from actual aircraft
measurements. Such a model does not
require control surface position
26547
measurements in the flight test objective data
in these limited applications.
f. The sponsor is urged to contact the
NSPM for clarification of any issue regarding
airplanes with reversible control systems.
Table A2E is not applicable to Computer
Controlled Aircraft FFSs.
g. Utilization of these alternate data
sources, procedures, and instrumentation
(Table A2E) does not relieve the sponsor
from compliance with the balance of the
information contained in this document
relative to Level A or Level B FFSs.
h. The term ‘‘inertial measurement system’’
is used in the following table to include the
use of a functional global positioning system
(GPS).
i. Synchronized video for the use of
alternative data sources, procedures, and
instrumentation should have:
(1) Sufficient resolution to allow
magnification of the display to make
appropriate measurement and comparisons;
and
(2) Sufficient size and incremental marking
to allow similar measurement and
comparison. The detail provided by the video
should provide sufficient clarity and
accuracy to measure the necessary
parameter(s) to at least 1⁄2 of the tolerance
authorized for the specific test being
conducted and allow an integration of the
parameter(s) in question to obtain a rate of
change.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
TABLE A2E.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCES, PROCEDURES, AND INSTRUMENTATION
QPS REQUIREMENTS
The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 9 of
Appendix A are not used.
Table of objective tests
Sim level
Test entry number and title
A
B
X
X
TIR, AFM, or Design data may be used ..............
X
Data may be acquired by using a constant tiller
position, measured with a protractor or full rudder pedal application for steady state turn, and
synchronized video of heading indicator. If less
than full rudder pedal is used, pedal position
must be recorded.
1.a.2. Performance. Taxi Rate of
Turn vs. Nosewheel Steering
Angle.
1.b.1. Performance. Takeoff. Ground
Acceleration Time and Distance.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Notes
Alternative data sources, procedures, and
instrumentation
1.a.1. Performance. Taxi. Minimum
Radius turn.
Information
X
X
Preliminary certification data may be used. Data
may be acquired by using a stop watch, calibrated airspeed, and runway markers during a
takeoff with power set before brake release.
Power settings may be hand recorded. If an
inertial measurement system is installed,
speed and distance may be derived from acceleration measurements.
1.b.2. Performance. Takeoff. Minimum
Control
Speed—ground
(Vmcg) using aerodynamic controls
only (per applicable airworthiness
standard) or low speed, engine inoperative ground control characteristics.
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
A single procedure may not be adequate for all airplane steering systems, therefore appropriate measurement procedures must be devised and proposed for NSPM
concurrence.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00071
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
Rapid throttle reductions at speeds
near Vmcg may be used while recording appropriate parameters.
The nosewheel must be free to
caster, or equivalently freed of
sideforce generation.
09MYR2
26548
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A2E.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCES, PROCEDURES, AND INSTRUMENTATION—Continued
QPS REQUIREMENTS
The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 9 of
Appendix A are not used.
Table of objective tests
Sim level
Information
Notes
Alternative data sources, procedures, and
instrumentation
A
B
1.b.3. Performance. Takeoff. Minimum Unstick Speed (Vmu) or
equivalent test to demonstrate
early rotation takeoff characteristics.
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and the force/
position measurements of flight deck controls.
1.b.4. Performance. Takeoff. Normal
Takeoff.
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
AOA can be calculated from pitch attitude and
flight path.
1.b.5. Performance. Takeoff. Critical
Engine Failure during Takeoff.
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
Record airplane dynamic response
to engine failure and control inputs
required to correct flight path.
1.b.6. Performance. Takeoff. Crosswind Takeoff.
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
The ‘‘1:7 law’’ to 100 feet (30 meters) is an acceptable wind profile.
1.b.7. Performance.
jected Takeoff.
Re-
X
X
Data may be acquired with a synchronized video
of calibrated airplane instruments, thrust lever
position, engine parameters, and distance
(e.g., runway markers). A stop watch is required..
1.c. 1. Performance. Climb. Normal
Climb all engines operating..
X
X
Data may be acquired with a synchronized video
of calibrated airplane instruments and engine
power throughout the climb range.
1.c.2. Performance. Climb. One engine Inoperative Climb.
X
X
Data may be acquired with a synchronized video
of calibrated airplane instruments and engine
power throughout the climb range.
1.c.4. Performance. Climb. One Engine Inoperative Approach Climb
(if operations in icing conditions
are authorized).
X
X
Data may be acquired with a synchronized video
of calibrated airplane instruments and engine
power throughout the climb range.
1.d.1. Cruise/Descent. Level flight
acceleration..
X
X
Data may be acquired with a synchronized video
of calibrated airplane instruments, thrust lever
position, engine parameters, and elapsed time.
1.d.2. Cruise/Descent. Level flight
deceleration..
X
X
1.d.4. Cruise/Descent. Idle descent ..
X
X
Data may be acquired with a synchronized video
of calibrated airplane instruments, thrust lever
position, engine parameters, and elapsed time.
Data may be acquired with a synchronized video
of calibrated airplane instruments, thrust lever
position, engine parameters, and elapsed time.
1.d.5. Cruise/Descent.
Descent.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Test entry number and title
Emergency
X
X
Data may be acquired with a synchronized video
of calibrated airplane instruments, thrust lever
position, engine parameters, and elapsed time.
1.e.1. Performance. Stopping. Deceleration time and distance, using
manual application of wheel
brakes and no reverse thrust on a
dry runway.
X
X
Data may be acquired during landing tests using
a stop watch, runway markers, and a synchronized video of calibrated airplane instruments, thrust lever position and the pertinent
parameters of engine power.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Takeoff.
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00072
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26549
TABLE A2E.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCES, PROCEDURES, AND INSTRUMENTATION—Continued
QPS REQUIREMENTS
The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 9 of
Appendix A are not used.
Table of objective tests
Sim level
Information
Notes
Alternative data sources, procedures, and
instrumentation
A
B
1.e.2. Performance. Ground. Deceleration Time and Distance, using
reverse thrust and no wheel
brakes.
X
X
Data may be acquired during landing tests using
a stop watch, runway markers, and a synchronized video of calibrated airplane instruments, thrust lever position and pertinent parameters of engine power.
1.f.1. Performance. Engines. Acceleration.
X
X
Data may be acquired with a synchronized video
recording of engine instruments and throttle
position.
1.f.2. Performance. Engines. Deceleration.
X
X
Data may be acquired with a synchronized video
recording of engine instruments and throttle
position.
2.a.1.a. Handling Qualities. Static
Control Checks. Pitch Controller
Position vs. Force and Surface Position Calibration.
X
X
Surface position data may be acquired from
flight data recorder (FDR) sensor or, if no FDR
sensor, at selected, significant column positions (encompassing significant column position data points), acceptable to the NSPM,
using a control surface protractor on the
ground. Force data may be acquired by using
a hand held force gauge at the same column
position data points.
For airplanes with reversible control
systems, surface position data acquisition should be accomplished
with winds less than 5 kts.
2.a.2.a. Handling Qualities. Static
Control Checks. Roll Controller
Position vs. Force and Surface Position Calibration.
X
X
Surface position data may be acquired from
flight data recorder (FDR) sensor or, if no FDR
sensor, at selected, significant wheel positions
(encompassing significant wheel position data
points), acceptable to the NSPM, using a control surface protractor on the ground. Force
data may be acquired by using a hand held
force gauge at the same wheel position data
points.
For airplanes with reversible control
systems, surface position data acquisition should be accomplished
with winds less than 5 kts.
2.a.3.a. Handling Qualities. Static
Control Checks. Rudder Pedal Position vs. Force and Surface Position Calibration.
X
X
Surface position data may be acquired from
flight data recorder (FDR) sensor or, if no FDR
sensor, at selected, significant rudder pedal
positions (encompassing significant rudder
pedal position data points), acceptable to the
NSPM, using a control surface protractor on
the ground. Force data may be acquired by
using a hand held force gauge at the same
rudder pedal position data points.
For airplanes with reversible control
systems, surface position data acquisition should be accomplished
with winds less than 5 kts.
2.a.4. Handling Qualities. Static Control Checks. Nosewheel Steering
Controller Force and Position.
X
X
Breakout data may be acquired with a hand held
force gauge. The remainder of the force to the
stops may be calculated if the force gauge
and a protractor are used to measure force
after breakout for at least 25% of the total displacement capability.
2.a.5. Handling Qualities. Static Control Checks. Rudder Pedal Steering Calibration.
X
X
Data may be acquired through the use of force
pads on the rudder pedals and a pedal position measurement device, together with design
data for nosewheel position.
2.a.6. Handling Qualities. Static Control Checks. Pitch Trim Indicator
vs. Surface Position Calibration.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Test entry number and title
X
X
Data may be acquired through calculations ........
2.a.7. Handling qualities. Static control tests. Pitch trim rate.
X
X
Data may be acquired by using a synchronized
video of pitch trim indication and elapsed time
through range of trim indication.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00073
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26550
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A2E.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCES, PROCEDURES, AND INSTRUMENTATION—Continued
QPS REQUIREMENTS
The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 9 of
Appendix A are not used.
Table of objective tests
Sim level
Notes
Alternative data sources, procedures, and
instrumentation
Test entry number and title
A
B
2.a.8. Handling Qualities. Static Control tests. Alignment of Flight deck
Throttle Lever Angle vs. Selected
engine parameter.
X
X
Data may be acquired through the use of a temporary throttle quadrant scale to document
throttle position. Use a synchronized video to
record steady state instrument readings or
hand-record steady state engine performance
readings.
2.a.9. Handling qualities. Static control tests. Brake pedal position vs.
force and brake system pressure
calibration.
X
X
Use of design or predicted data is acceptable.
Data may be acquired by measuring deflection
at ‘‘zero’’ and ‘‘maximum’’ and calculating deflections between the extremes using the airplane design data curve.
2.c.1. Handling qualities. Longitudinal
control tests. Power change dynamics.
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and throttle position.
2.c.2. Handling qualities. Longitudinal
control tests. Flap/slat change dynamics.
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and flap/slat
position.
2.c.3. Handling qualities. Longitudinal
control tests. Spoiler/speedbrake
change dynamics.
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and spoiler/
speedbrake position.
2.c.4. Handling qualities. Longitudinal
control tests. Gear change dynamics.
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and gear position.
2.c.5. Handling qualities. Longitudinal
control tests. Longitudinal trim.
X
X
Data may be acquired through use of an inertial
measurement system and a synchronized
video of flight deck controls position (previously calibrated to show related surface position) and the engine instrument readings.
2.c.6. Handling qualities. Longitudinal
control tests. Longitudinal maneuvering stability (stick force/g).
X
X
Data may be acquired through the use of an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of calibrated airplane instruments; a temporary, high resolution bank
angle scale affixed to the attitude indicator;
and a wheel and column force measurement
indication.
2.c.7. Handling qualities. Longitudinal
control tests. Longitudinal static
stability.
X
X
Data may be acquired through the use of a synchronized video of airplane flight instruments
and a hand held force gauge.
2.c.8. Handling qualities. Longitudinal
control tests. Stall characteristics.
X
X
Data may be acquired through a synchronized
video recording of a stop watch and calibrated
airplane airspeed indicator. Hand-record the
flight conditions and airplane configuration.
2.c.9. Handling qualities. Longitudinal
control tests. Phugoid dynamics.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Information
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
2.c.10. Handling qualities. Longitudinal control tests. Short period dynamics.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00074
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
Airspeeds may be cross checked
with those in the TIR and AFM.
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26551
TABLE A2E.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCES, PROCEDURES, AND INSTRUMENTATION—Continued
QPS REQUIREMENTS
The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 9 of
Appendix A are not used.
Table of objective tests
Sim level
Notes
Alternative data sources, procedures, and
instrumentation
Test entry number and title
A
B
2.d.1. Handling qualities. Lateral directional tests. Minimum control
speed, air (Vmca or Vmci), per applicable airworthiness standard or
Low speed engine inoperative
handling characteristics in the air.
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
2.d.2. Handling qualities. Lateral directional tests. Roll response (rate).
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck lateral controls.
2.d.3. Handling qualities. Lateral directional tests. Roll response to
flight deck roll controller step input.
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck lateral controls.
2.d.4. Handling qualities. Lateral directional tests. Spiral stability.
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments; force/position
measurements of flight deck controls; and a
stop watch.
2.d.5. Handling qualities. Lateral directional tests. Engine inoperative
trim.
X
X
Data may be hand recorded in-flight using high
resolution scales affixed to trim controls that
have been calibrated on the ground using protractors on the control/trim surfaces with winds
less than 5 kts.OR Data may be acquired during second segment climb (with proper pilot
control input for an engine-out condition) by
using a synchronized video of calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
2.d.6. Handling qualities. Lateral directional tests. Rudder response.
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of rudder pedals.
2.d.7. Handling qualities. Lateral directional tests. Dutch roll, (yaw
damper OFF).
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
2.d.8. Handling qualities. Lateral directional tests. Steady state sideslip.
X
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
Ground track and wind corrected heading may
be used for sideslip angle.
2.e.1. Handling qualities. Landings.
Normal landing.
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
2.e.3. Handling qualities. Landings.
Crosswind landing.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Information
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00075
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
May be combined with step input of
flight deck roll controller test,
2.d.3.
Trimming during second segment
climb is not a certification task and
should not be conducted until a
safe altitude is reached.
09MYR2
26552
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A2E.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCES, PROCEDURES, AND INSTRUMENTATION—Continued
QPS REQUIREMENTS
The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 9 of
Appendix A are not used.
Table of objective tests
Sim level
Test entry number and title
A
B
2.e.4. Handling qualities. Landings.
One engine inoperative landing.
Notes
Alternative data sources, procedures, and
instrumentation
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and the force/
position measurements of flight deck controls.
Normal and lateral accelerations may be recorded in lieu of AOA and sideslip.
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls.Normal and lateral accelerations may be
recorded in lieu of AOA and sideslip.
2.e.6. Handling qualities. Landings.
All engines operating, autopilot, go
around.
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls. Normal and lateral accelerations may be recorded
in lieu of AOA and sideslip.
2.e.7. Handling qualities. Landings.
One engine inoperative go around.
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls. Normal and lateral accelerations may be recorded
in lieu of AOA and sideslip.
2.e.8. Handling qualities. Landings.
Directional control (rudder effectiveness with symmetric thrust).
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls. Normal and lateral accelerations may be recorded
in lieu of AOA and sideslip.
2.e.9. Handling qualities. Landings.
Directional control (rudder effectiveness with asymmetric reverse
thrust).
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of
calibrated airplane instruments and force/position measurements of flight deck controls. Normal and lateral accelerations may be recorded
in lieu of AOA and sideslip.
2.f. Handling qualities. Ground effect.
Test to demonstrate ground effect.
X
Data may be acquired by using calibrated airplane instruments, an inertial measurement
system, and a synchronized video of calibrated airplane instruments and force/position
measurements of flight deck controls.
2.e.5. Handling qualities. Landings.
Autopilot landing (if applicable).
..........
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
Attachment 3 to Appendix A to Part 60—
Simulator Subjective Evaluation
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
1. Requirements
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Information
a. Except for special use airport models,
described as Class III, all airport models
required by this part must be representations
of real-world, operational airports or
representations of fictional airports and must
meet the requirements set out in Tables A3B
or A3C of this attachment, as appropriate.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
b. If fictional airports are used, the sponsor
must ensure that navigational aids and all
appropriate maps, charts, and other
navigational reference material for the
fictional airports (and surrounding areas as
necessary) are compatible, complete, and
accurate with respect to the visual
presentation of the airport model of this
fictional airport. An SOC must be submitted
that addresses navigation aid installation and
performance and other criteria (including
obstruction clearance protection) for all
instrument approaches to the fictional
airports that are available in the simulator.
The SOC must reference and account for
information in the terminal instrument
procedures manual and the construction and
PO 00000
Frm 00076
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
availability of the required maps, charts, and
other navigational material. This material
must be clearly marked ‘‘for training
purposes only.’’
c. When the simulator is being used by an
instructor or evaluator for purposes of
training, checking, or testing under this
chapter, only airport models classified as
Class I, Class II, or Class III may be used by
the instructor or evaluator. Detailed
descriptions/definitions of these
classifications are found in Appendix F of
this part.
d. When a person sponsors an FFS
maintained by a person other than a U.S.
certificate holder, the sponsor is accountable
for that FFS originally meeting, and
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
continuing to meet, the criteria under which
it was originally qualified and the
appropriate Part 60 criteria, including the
airport models that may be used by
instructors or evaluators for purposes of
training, checking, or testing under this
chapter.
e. Neither Class II nor Class III airport
visual models are required to appear on the
SOQ, and the method used for keeping
instructors and evaluators apprised of the
airport models that meet Class II or Class III
requirements on any given simulator is at the
option of the sponsor, but the method used
must be available for review by the TPAA.
f. When an airport model represents a real
world airport and a permanent change is
made to that real world airport (e.g., a new
runway, an extended taxiway, a new lighting
system, a runway closure) without a written
extension grant from the NSPM (described in
paragraph 1.g. of this section), an update to
that airport model must be made in
accordance with the following time limits:
(1) For a new airport runway, a runway
extension, a new airport taxiway, a taxiway
extension, or a runway/taxiway closure—
within 90 days of the opening for use of the
new airport runway, runway extension, new
airport taxiway, or taxiway extension; or
within 90 days of the closure of the runway
or taxiway.
(2) For a new or modified approach light
system—within 45 days of the activation of
the new or modified approach light system.
(3) For other facility or structural changes
on the airport (e.g., new terminal, relocation
of Air Traffic Control Tower)—within 180
days of the opening of the new or changed
facility or structure.
g. If a sponsor desires an extension to the
time limit for an update to a visual scene or
airport model or has an objection to what
must be updated in the specific airport model
requirement, the sponsor must provide a
written extension request to the NSPM
stating the reason for the update delay and
a proposed completion date, or explain why
the update is not necessary (i.e., why the
identified airport change will not have an
impact on flight training, testing, or
checking). A copy of this request or objection
must also be sent to the POI/TCPM. The
NSPM will send the official response to the
sponsor and a copy to the POI/TCPM. If there
is an objection, after consultation with the
appropriate POI/TCPM regarding the
training, testing, or checking impact, the
NSPM will send the official response to the
sponsor and a copy to the POI/TCPM.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Begin Information
2. Discussion
a. The subjective tests provide a basis for
evaluating the capability of the simulator to
perform over a typical utilization period;
determining that the simulator accurately
simulates each required maneuver,
procedure, or task; and verifying correct
operation of the simulator controls,
instruments, and systems. The items listed in
the following Tables are for simulator
evaluation purposes only. They may not be
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
used to limit or exceed the authorizations for
use of a given level of simulator, as described
on the SOQ, or as approved by the TPAA.
b. The tests in Table A3A, Operations
Tasks, in this attachment, address pilot
functions, including maneuvers and
procedures (called flight tasks), and are
divided by flight phases. The performance of
these tasks by the NSPM includes an
operational examination of the visual system
and special effects. There are flight tasks
included to address some features of
advanced technology airplanes and
innovative training programs. For example,
‘‘high angle-of-attack maneuvering’’ is
included to provide a required alternative to
‘‘approach to stalls’’ for airplanes employing
flight envelope protection functions.
c. The tests in Table A3A, Operations
Tasks, and Table A3G, Instructor Operating
Station of this attachment, address the
overall function and control of the simulator
including the various simulated
environmental conditions; simulated
airplane system operations (normal,
abnormal, and emergency); visual system
displays; and special effects necessary to
meet flight crew training, evaluation, or flight
experience requirements.
d. All simulated airplane systems functions
will be assessed for normal and, where
appropriate, alternate operations. Normal,
abnormal, and emergency operations
associated with a flight phase will be
assessed during the evaluation of flight tasks
or events within that flight phase. Simulated
airplane systems are listed separately under
‘‘Any Flight Phase’’ to ensure appropriate
attention to systems checks. Operational
navigation systems (including inertial
navigation systems, global positioning
systems, or other long-range systems) and the
associated electronic display systems will be
evaluated if installed. The NSP pilot will
include in his report to the TPAA, the effect
of the system operation and any system
limitation.
e. Simulators demonstrating a satisfactory
circling approach will be qualified for the
circling approach maneuver and may be
approved for such use by the TPAA in the
sponsor’s FAA-approved flight training
program. To be considered satisfactory, the
circling approach will be flown at maximum
gross weight for landing, with minimum
visibility for the airplane approach category,
and must allow proper alignment with a
landing runway at least 90° different from the
instrument approach course while allowing
the pilot to keep an identifiable portion of the
airport in sight throughout the maneuver
(reference—14 CFR 91.175(e)).
f. At the request of the TPAA, the NSPM
may assess a device to determine if it is
capable of simulating certain training
activities in a sponsor’s training program,
such as a portion of a Line Oriented Flight
Training (LOFT) scenario. Unless directly
related to a requirement for the qualification
level, the results of such an evaluation would
not affect the qualification level of the
simulator. However, if the NSPM determines
that the simulator does not accurately
simulate that training activity, the simulator
would not be approved for that training
activity.
PO 00000
Frm 00077
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26553
g. The FAA intends to allow the use of
Class III airport models when the sponsor
provides the TPAA (or other regulatory
authority) an appropriate analysis of the
skills, knowledge, and abilities (SKAs)
necessary for competent performance of the
tasks in which this particular media element
is used. The analysis should describe the
ability of the FFS/visual media to provide an
adequate environment in which the required
SKAs are satisfactorily performed and
learned. The analysis should also include the
specific media element, such as the airport
model. Additional sources of information on
the conduct of task and capability analysis
may be found on the FAA’s Advanced
Qualification Program (AQP) Web site at:
https://www.faa.gov/education_research/
training/aqp/.
h. The TPAA may accept Class III airport
models without individual observation
provided the sponsor provides the TPAA
with an acceptable description of the process
for determining the acceptability of a specific
airport model, outlines the conditions under
which such an airport model may be used,
and adequately describes what restrictions
will be applied to each resulting airport or
landing area model. Examples of situations
that may warrant Class_III model designation
by the TPAA include the following:
(a) Training, testing, or checking on very
low visibility operations, including SMGCS
operations.
(b) Instrument operations training
(including instrument takeoff, departure,
arrival, approach, and missed approach
training, testing, or checking) using—
(i) A specific model that has been
geographically ‘‘moved’’ to a different
location and aligned with an instrument
procedure for another airport.
(ii) A model that does not match changes
made at the real-world airport (or landing
area for helicopters) being modeled.
(iii) A model generated with an ‘‘off-board’’
or an ‘‘on-board’’ model development tool
(by providing proper latitude/longitude
reference; correct runway or landing area
orientation, length, width, marking, and
lighting information; and appropriate
adjacent taxiway location) to generate a
facsimile of a real world airport or landing
area.
i. Previously qualified simulators with
certain early generation Computer Generated
Image (CGI) visual systems, are limited by the
capability of the Image Generator or the
display system used. These systems are:
(1) Early CGI visual systems that are
excepted from the requirement of including
runway numbers as a part of the specific
runway marking requirements are:
(a) Link NVS and DNVS.
(b) Novoview 2500 and 6000.
(c) FlightSafety VITAL series up to, and
including, VITAL III, but not beyond.
(d) Redifusion SP1, SP1T, and SP2.
(2) Early CGI visual systems are excepted
from the requirement of including runway
numbers unless the runways are used for
LOFT training sessions. These LOFT airport
models require runway numbers but only for
the specific runway end (one direction) used
in the LOFT session. The systems required to
display runway numbers only for LOFT
scenes are:
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26554
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
(a) FlightSafety VITAL IV.
(b) Redifusion SP3 and SP3T.
(c) Link-Miles Image II.
(3) The following list of previously
qualified CGI and display systems are
incapable of generating blue lights. These
systems are not required to have accurate
taxi-way edge lighting:
(a) Redifusion SP1.
(b) FlightSafety Vital IV.
(c) Link-Miles Image II and Image IIT
(d) XKD displays (even though the XKD
image generator is capable of generating blue
colored lights, the display cannot
accommodate that color).
End Information
lllllllllllllllllll
TABLE A3A.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry No.
Operations tasks
A
B
C
D
Tasks in this table are subject to evaluation if appropriate for the airplane simulated as indicated in the SOQ Configuration List or the level
of simulator qualification involved. Items not installed or not functional on the simulator and, therefore, not appearing on the SOQ Configuration List, are not required to be listed as exceptions on the SOQ.
1. ..............................
Preparation For Flight ................................................................................................................................
Preflight. Accomplish a functions check of all switches, indicators, systems, and equipment at all
crewmembers’ and instructors’ stations and determine that the flight deck design and functions are
identical to that of the airplane simulated.
2. ..............................
Surface Operations (Pre-Take-Off)
2.a. ...................
X
X
X
X
Engine Start
2.a.1. .........
Normal start ...............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
2.a.2. .........
Alternate start procedures .........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
2.a.3. .........
Abnormal starts and shutdowns (e.g., hot/hung start, tail pipe fire) .........................................................
X
X
X
X
2.b. ...................
Pushback/Powerback ................................................................................................................................
....
X
X
X
2.c. ....................
Taxi
2.c.1. .........
Thrust response .........................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
2.c.2. .........
Power lever friction ....................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
2.c.3. .........
Ground handling ........................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
2.c.4. .........
Nosewheel scuffing ....................................................................................................................................
X
X
2.c.5. .........
Brake operation (normal and alternate/emergency) ..................................................................................
X
X
X
X
2.c.6. .........
Brake fade (if applicable) ...........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3. ..............................
3.a. ...................
Take-off.
Normal.
Airplane/engine parameter relationships ...................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.a.2. .........
Acceleration characteristics (motion) .........................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.a.3. .........
Nosewheel and rudder steering .................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.a.4. .........
Crosswind (maximum demonstrated) ........................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.a.5. .........
Special performance (e.g., reduced V1, max de-rate, short field operations) ...........................................
X
X
X
X
3.a.6. .........
Low visibility take-off ..................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.a.7. .........
Landing gear, wing flap leading edge device operation ............................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.a.8. .........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
3.a.1. .........
Contaminated runway operation ................................................................................................................
....
....
X
X
3.b. ...................
Abnormal/emergency
3.b.1. .........
Rejected Take-off ......................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.b.2. .........
Rejected special performance (e.g., reduced V1, max de-rate, short field operations) ............................
X
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00078
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26555
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A3A.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry No.
Operations tasks
A
B
C
D
3.b.3. .........
Takeoff with a propulsion system malfunction (allowing an analysis of causes, symptoms, recognition,
and the effects on aircraft performance and handling) at the following points: ..
(i) Prior to V1 decision speed .................................................................................................................
(ii) Between V1 and Vr (rotation speed) .................................................................................................
(iii) Between Vr and 500 feet above ground level .................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.b.4. .........
With wind shear .........................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.b.5. .........
Flight control system failures, reconfiguration modes, manual reversion and associated handling .........
X
X
X
X
3.b.6. .........
Rejected takeoff with brake fade ...............................................................................................................
....
....
X
X
3.b.7. .........
Rejected, contaminated runway ................................................................................................................
....
....
X
X
4. ..............................
Climb.
4.a. ...................
Normal .......................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
4.b. ...................
One or more engines inoperative ..............................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
5. ..............................
Cruise
5.a. ...................
Performance characteristics (speed vs. power) ........................................................................................
X
X
X
X
5.b. ...................
High altitude handling ................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
5.c. ....................
High Mach number handling (Mach tuck, Mach buffet) and recovery (trim change) ...............................
X
X
X
X
5.d. ...................
Overspeed warning (in excess of Vmo or Mmo) .........................................................................................
X
X
X
X
5.e. ...................
High IAS handling ......................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
6. ..............................
Maneuvers
6.a. ...................
High angle of attack, approach to stalls, stall warning, buffet, and g-break (take-off, cruise, approach,
and landing configuration).
X
X
X
X
6.b. ...................
Flight envelope protection (high angle of attack, bank limit, overspeed, etc.) ..........................................
X
X
X
X
6.c. ....................
Turns with/without speedbrake/spoilers deployed .....................................................................................
X
X
X
X
6.d. ...................
Normal and steep turns .............................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
6.e. ...................
In flight engine shutdown and restart (assisted and windmill) ..................................................................
X
X
X
X
6.f. ....................
Maneuvering with one or more engines inoperative, as appropriate ........................................................
X
X
X
X
6.g. ...................
Specific flight characteristics (e.g., direct lift control) ................................................................................
X
X
X
X
6.h. ...................
Flight control system failures, reconfiguration modes, manual reversion and associated handling .........
X
X
X
X
7. ..............................
Descent.
7.a. ...................
Normal .......................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
7.b. ...................
Maximum rate (clean and with speedbrake, etc.) .....................................................................................
X
X
X
X
7.c. ....................
With autopilot .............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
7.d. ...................
Flight control system failures, reconfiguration modes, manual reversion and associated handling .........
X
X
X
X
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
8. ..............................
8.a. ...................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Instrument Approaches and Landing. Those instrument approach and landing tests relevant to the simulated airplane
type are selected from the following list. Some tests are made with limiting wind velocities, under wind shear conditions,
and with relevant system failures, including the failure of the Flight Director. If Standard Operating Procedures allow use
autopilot for non-precision approaches, evaluation of the autopilot will be included. Level A simulators are not authorized
to credit the landing maneuver
Precision.
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00079
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26556
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A3A.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry No.
Operations tasks
A
B
C
D
8.a.1. .........
PAR ............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
8.a.2. .........
CAT I/GBAS (ILS/MLS) published approaches .........................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(i) Manual approach with/without flight director including landing .............................................................
(ii) Autopilot/autothrottle coupled approach and manual landing ..............................................................
(iii) Manual approach to DH and go-around all engines ...........................................................................
(iv) Manual one engine out approach to DH and go-around ....................................................................
(v) Manual approach controlled with and without flight director to 30 m (100 ft) below CAT I minima ...
A. With cross-wind (maximum demonstrated) .......................................................................................
B. With windshear ..................................................................................................................................
(vi) Autopilot/autothrottle coupled approach, one engine out to DH and go-around ................................
(vii) Approach and landing with minimum/standby electrical power .........................................................
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CAT II/GBAS (ILS/MLS) published approaches ........................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(i) Autopilot/autothrottle coupled approach to DH and landing .................................................................
(ii) Autopilot/autothrottle coupled approach to DH and go-around ............................................................
(iii) Autocoupled approach to DH and manual go-around .........................................................................
(iv) Category II published approach (autocoupled, autothrottle) ...............................................................
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CAT III/GBAS (ILS/MLS) published approaches .......................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(i) Autopilot/autothrottle coupled approach to land and rollout .................................................................
(ii) Autopilot/autothrottle coupled approach to DH/Alert Height and go-around ........................................
(iii) Autopilot/autothrottle coupled approach to land and rollout with one engine out ...............................
(iv) Autopilot/autothrottle coupled approach to DH/Alert Height and go-around with one engine out ......
(v) Autopilot/autothrottle coupled approach (to land or to go around) ......................................................
A. With generator failure ........................................................................................................................
B. With 10 knot tail wind ........................................................................................................................
C. With 10 knot crosswind .....................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8.a.3. .........
8.a.4. .........
8.b. ...................
Non-precision
8.b.1. .........
NDB ...........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
8.b.2. .........
VOR, VOR/DME, VOR/TAC ......................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
8.b.3. .........
RNAV (GNSS/GPS) ...................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
8.b.4. .........
ILS LLZ (LOC), LLZ (LOC)/BC ..................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
8.b.5. .........
ILS offset localizer .....................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
8.b.6. .........
Direction finding facility (ADF/SDF) ...........................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
8.b.7. .........
Airport surveillance radar (ASR) ................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
9. ..............................
Visual Approaches (Visual Segment) and Landings. Flight simulators with visual systems, which permit completing a special approach procedure in accordance with applicable regulations, may be approved for that particular approach procedure
Maneuvering, normal approach and landing, all engines operating with and without visual approach
aid guidance.
X
X
X
X
9.b. ...................
Approach and landing with one or more engines inoperative ...................................................................
X
X
X
X
9.c. ....................
Operation of landing gear, flap/slats and speedbrakes (normal and abnormal) .......................................
X
X
X
X
9.d. ...................
Approach and landing with crosswind (max. demonstrated) ....................................................................
X
X
X
X
9.e. ...................
Approach to land with wind shear on approach ........................................................................................
X
X
X
X
9.f. ....................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
9.a. ...................
Approach and landing with flight control system failures, reconfiguration modes, manual reversion and
associated handling (most significant degradation which is probable).
X
X
X
X
9.g. ...................
Approach and landing with trim malfunctions ............................................................................................
X
X
X
X
9.g.1. .........
Longitudinal trim malfunction .....................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00080
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26557
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A3A.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry No.
Operations tasks
A
B
C
D
9.g.2. .........
Lateral-directional trim malfunction ............................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
9.h. ...................
Approach and landing with standby (minimum) electrical/hydraulic power ..............................................
X
X
X
X
9.i. .....................
Approach and landing from circling conditions (circling approach) ...........................................................
X
X
X
X
9.j. .....................
Approach and landing from visual traffic pattern .......................................................................................
X
X
X
X
9.k. ....................
Approach and landing from non-precision approach ................................................................................
X
X
X
X
9.l. .....................
Approach and landing from precision approach ........................................................................................
X
X
X
X
9.m. ..................
Approach procedures with vertical guidance (APV), e.g., SBAS ..............................................................
X
X
X
X
10. ............................
Missed Approach
10.a. .................
All engines .................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
10.b. .................
One or more engine(s) out ........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
10.c. ..................
With flight control system failures, reconfiguration modes, manual reversion and associated handling
X
X
X
X
11. ............................
Surface Operations (Landing roll and taxi).
11.a. .................
Spoiler operation ........................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
11.b. .................
Reverse thrust operation ...........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
11.c. ..................
Directional control and ground handling, both with and without reverse thrust ........................................
....
X
X
X
11.d. .................
Reduction of rudder effectiveness with increased reverse thrust (rear pod-mounted engines) ...............
....
X
X
X
11.e. .................
Brake and anti-skid operation with dry, patchy wet, wet on rubber residue, and patchy icy conditions ..
....
....
X
X
11.f. ..................
Brake operation, to include auto-braking system where applicable ..........................................................
X
X
X
X
12. ............................
12.a. .................
Any Flight Phase.
Airplane and engine systems operation.
Air conditioning and pressurization (ECS) .................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.2. .......
De-icing/anti-icing .......................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.3. .......
Auxiliary power unit (APU) .........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.4. .......
Communications ........................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.5. .......
Electrical ....................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.6. .......
Fire and smoke detection and suppression ..............................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.7. .......
Flight controls (primary and secondary) ....................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.8. .......
Fuel and oil, hydraulic and pneumatic .......................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.9. .......
Landing gear ..............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.10. .....
Oxygen .......................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.11. .....
Engine ........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.12. .....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
12.a.1. .......
Airborne radar ............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.13. .....
Autopilot and Flight Director ......................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.14. .....
Collision avoidance systems. (e.g., (E)GPWS, TCAS) .............................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.15. .....
Flight control computers including stability and control augmentation ......................................................
X
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00081
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26558
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A3A.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry No.
Operations tasks
A
B
C
D
12.a.16. .....
Flight display systems ................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.17. .....
Flight management computers ..................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.18. .....
Head-up guidance, head-up displays ........................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.19. .....
Navigation systems ....................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.20. .....
Stall warning/avoidance .............................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.21. .....
Wind shear avoidance equipment .............................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.a.22. .....
Automatic landing aids. ..............................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.b. .................
Airborne procedures
12.b.1. .......
Holding .......................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.b.2. .......
Air hazard avoidance (traffic, weather) ......................................................................................................
....
....
X
X
12.b.3. .......
Wind shear .................................................................................................................................................
....
....
X
X
12.b.4. .......
Effects of airframe ice ................................................................................................................................
....
....
X
X
12.c. ..................
Engine shutdown and parking
12.c.1. .......
Engine and systems operation ..................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
12.c.2. .......
Parking brake operation ............................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
TABLE A3B.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry No.
For qualification at the stated level—Class I airport models
A
B
C
D
This table specifies the minimum airport model content and functionality to qualify a simulator at the indicated level. This table applies only to
the airport models required for simulator qualification; i.e., one airport model for Level A and Level B simulators; three airport models for Level
C and Level D simulators.
Begin QPS Requirements
1. ...................
Functional test content requirements for Level A and Level B simulators. The following is the minimum airport model content requirement to satisfy visual capability tests, and provides suitable visual cues to allow completion of all functions and subjective
tests described in this attachment for simulators at Levels A and B.
A minimum of one (1) representative airport model. This model identification must be acceptable to the
sponsor’s TPAA, selectable from the IOS, and listed on the SOQ.
X
X
1.b. .........
The fidelity of the airport model must be sufficient for the aircrew to visually identify the airport; determine
the position of the simulated airplane within a night visual scene; successfully accomplish take-offs, approaches, and landings; and maneuver around the airport on the ground as necessary.
X
X
1.c. .........
Runways: ..............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
1.c.1.
Visible runway number .........................................................................................................................................
X
X
1.c.2.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1.a. .........
Runway threshold elevations and locations must be modeled to provide sufficient correlation with airplane
systems (e.g., altimeter).
X
X
1.c.3.
Runway surface and markings .............................................................................................................................
X
X
1.c.4.
Lighting for the runway in use including runway edge and centerline .................................................................
X
X
1.c.5.
Lighting, visual approach aid and approach lighting of appropriate colors .........................................................
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00082
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26559
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A3B.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry No.
For qualification at the stated level—Class I airport models
A
1.c.6.
2. ...................
Representative taxiway lights ...............................................................................................................................
B
X
C
D
X
Functional test content requirements for Level C and Level D simulators. The following is the minimum airport model content requirement to satisfy visual capability tests, and provide suitable visual cues to allow completion of all functions and subjective
tests described in this attachment for simulators at Levels C and D. Not all of the elements described in this section must be
found in a single airport model. However, all of the elements described in this section must be found throughout a combination
of the three (3) airport models described in entry 2.a.
A minimum of three (3) representative airport models. The model identifications must be acceptable to the
sponsor’s TPAA, selectable from the IOS, and listed on the SOQ.
X
X
2.a.1.
Night and Twilight (Dusk) scenes required ..........................................................................................................
X
X
2.a.2.
Daylight scenes required ......................................................................................................................................
2.b.
Two parallel runways and one crossing runway, displayed simultaneously; at least two of the runways must
be able to be lighted fully and simultaneously.
Note: This requirement may be demonstrated at either a fictional airport or a real-world airport. However, if a
fictional airport is used, this airport must be listed on the SOQ.
X
X
2.c. .........
Runway threshold elevations and locations must be modeled to provide sufficient correlation with airplane
systems (e.g., HGS, GPS, altimeter); slopes in runways, taxiways, and ramp areas must not cause distracting or unrealistic effects, including pilot eye-point height variation.
X
X
2.d. .........
Representative airport buildings, structures and lighting .....................................................................................
X
X
2.e. .........
At least one useable gate, at the appropriate height (required only for those airplanes that typically operate
from terminal gates).
X
X
2.f. ..........
Representative moving and static gate clutter (e.g., other airplane, power carts, tugs, fuel trucks, and additional gates).
X
X
2.g. .........
Representative gate/apron markings (e.g., hazard markings, lead-in lines, gate numbering) and lighting ........
X
X
2.h. .........
Representative runway markings, lighting, and signage, including a windsock that gives appropriate wind
cues.
X
X
2.i. ..........
Representative taxiway markings, lighting, and signage necessary for position identification, and to taxi from
parking to a designated runway and return to parking.
X
X
2.j. ..........
A low visibility taxi route (e.g., Surface Movement Guidance Control System, follow-me truck, daylight taxi
lights) must also be demonstrated.
2.k. .........
Representative moving and static ground traffic (e.g., vehicular and airplane), including the capability to
present ground hazards (e.g., another airplane crossing the active runway).
X
X
2.l. ..........
Representative moving airborne traffic, including the capability to present air hazards (e.g., airborne traffic
on a possible collision course).
X
X
2.m. ........
Representative depiction of terrain and obstacles as well as significant and identifiable natural and cultural
features, within 25 NM of the reference airport.
X
X
2.n. .........
Appropriate approach lighting systems and airfield lighting for a VFR circuit and landing, non-precision approaches and landings, and Category I, II and III precision approaches and landings.
X
X
2.o. .........
Representative gate docking aids or a marshaller ...............................................................................................
X
X
2.p. .........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.a. .........
Portrayal of physical relationships known to cause landing illusions (e.g., short runways, landing approaches
over water, uphill or downhill runways, rising terrain on the approach path).
This requirement may be met by a SOC and a demonstration of two landing illusions. The illusions are not
required to be beyond the normal operational capabilities of the airplane being simulated. The demonstrated illusions must be available to the instructor or check airman at the IOS for training, testing,
checking, or experience activities.
X
2.q. .........
Portrayal of runway surface contaminants, including runway lighting reflections when wet and partially obscured lights when snow is present, or suitable alternative effects.
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00083
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
X
X
26560
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A3B.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry No.
For qualification at the stated level—Class I airport models
A
3. ...................
B
C
D
Airport model management. The following is the minimum airport model management requirements for simulators at Levels A,
B, C, and D.
3.a. .........
Runway and approach lighting must fade into view in accordance with the environmental conditions set in
the simulator, and the distance from the object.
X
X
X
X
3.b. .........
The direction of strobe lights, approach lights, runway edge lights, visual landing aids, runway centerline
lights, threshold lights, and touchdown zone lights must be replicated.
X
X
X
X
4. ...................
Visual feature recognition. The following is the minimum distances at which runway features must be visible for simulators at
Levels A, B, C, and D. Distances are measured from runway threshold to an airplane aligned with the runway on an extended
3° glide-slope in simulated meteorological conditions that recreate the minimum distances for visibility. For circling approaches,
all tests apply to the runway used for the initial approach and to the runway of intended landing.
4.a. .........
Runway definition, strobe lights, approach lights, and runway edge white lights from 5 sm (8 km) of the runway threshold.
4.b. .........
Visual Approach Aid lights (VASI or PAPI) from 5 sm (8 km) of the runway threshold ......................................
4.c. .........
Visual Approach Aid lights (VASI or PAPI) from 3 sm (5 km) of the runway threshold ......................................
X
X
4.d. .........
Runway centerline lights and taxiway definition from 3 sm (5 km) .....................................................................
X
4.e. .........
Threshold lights and touchdown zone lights from 2 sm (3 km) ...........................................................................
4.f. ..........
4.g. .........
5. ...................
5.a. .........
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Runway markings within range of landing lights for night scenes as required by the surface resolution test
on day scenes.
X
X
X
X
For circling approaches, the runway of intended landing and associated lighting must fade into view in a
non-distracting manner.
X
X
X
X
Airport model content. The following sets out the minimum requirements for what must be provided in an airport model and also
identifies the other aspects of the airport environment that must correspond with that model for simulators at Levels A, B, C, and
D. For circling approaches, all tests apply to the runway used for the initial approach and to the runway of intended landing. If
all runways in an airport model used to meet the requirements of this attachment are not designated as ‘‘in use,’’ then the ‘‘in
use’’ runways must be listed on the SOQ (e.g., KORD, Rwys 9R, 14L, 22R). Models of airports with more than one runway
must have all significant runways not ‘‘in-use’’ visually depicted for airport and runway recognition purposes. The use of white or
off white light strings that identify the runway threshold, edges, and ends for twilight and night scenes are acceptable for this requirement. Rectangular surface depictions are acceptable for daylight scenes. A visual system’s capabilities must be balanced
between providing airport models with an accurate representation of the airport and a realistic representation of the surrounding
environment. Airport model detail must be developed using airport pictures, construction drawings and maps, or other similar
data, or developed in accordance with published regulatory material; however, this does not require that such models contain
details that are beyond the design capability of the currently qualified visual system. Only one ‘‘primary’’ taxi route from parking
to the runway end will be required for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway.
The surface and markings for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway must include the following:
5.a.1.
Threshold markings ..............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
5.a.2.
Runway numbers ..................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
5.a.3.
Touchdown zone markings ..................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
5.a.4.
Fixed distance markings .......................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
5.a.5.
Edge markings ......................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
5.a.6.
Centerline stripes ..................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(i) Threshold lights ................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(ii) Edge lights .......................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(iii) End lights ........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
5.b. .........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
5.b.1.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Each runway designated as an ‘‘in-use’’ runway must include the following:
The lighting for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway must include the following:
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00084
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26561
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A3B.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry No.
For qualification at the stated level—Class I airport models
A
D
X
X
X
X
(v) Touchdown zone lights, if appropriate ............................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(vi) Leadoff lights, if appropriate ...........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(vii) Appropriate visual landing aid(s) for that runway ..........................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(viii) Appropriate approach lighting system for that runway .................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(i) Edge .................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(ii) Centerline ........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(iii) Runway hold lines ..........................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(iv) ILS critical area marking .................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(i) Edge .................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(ii) Centerline, if appropriate .................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(iii) Runway hold and ILS critical area lights ........................................................................................................
5.b.3.
C
(iv) Centerline lights, if appropriate ......................................................................................................................
5.b.2.
B
X
X
X
X
X
X
The taxiway surface and markings associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway must include the following:
The taxiway lighting associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway must include the following:
(iv) Edge lights of correct color ............................................................................................................................
5.b.4.
Airport signage associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway must include the following:
(i) Distance remaining signs, if appropriate ..........................................................................................................
X
X
X
(ii) Signs at intersecting runways and taxiways ...................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(iii) Signs described in entries 2.h. and 2.i. of this table ......................................................................................
5.b.5.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Required airport model correlation with other aspects of the airport environment simulation:
(i) The airport model must be properly aligned with the navigational aids that are associated with operations
at the runway ‘‘in-use’’.
(ii) The simulation of runway contaminants must be correlated with the displayed runway surface and lighting
where applicable.
6. ...................
X
Correlation with airplane and associated equipment. The following are the minimum correlation comparisons that must be made
for simulators at Levels A, B, C, and D.
Visual system compatibility with aerodynamic programming ...............................................................................
6.b. .........
Visual cues to assess sink rate and depth perception during landings ...............................................................
6.c. .........
Accurate portrayal of environment relating to flight simulator attitudes ...............................................................
6.d. .........
The airport model and the generated visual scene must correlate with integrated airplane systems (e.g., terrain, traffic and weather avoidance systems and Head-up Guidance System (HGS)).
6.e. .........
Representative visual effects for each visible, own-ship, airplane external light(s)—taxi and landing light
lobes (including independent operation, if appropriate).
6.f. ..........
The effect of rain removal devices .......................................................................................................................
7. ............
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
6.a. .........
Scene quality. The following are the minimum scene quality tests that must be conducted for simulators at Levels A, B, C, and
D.
7.a. .........
Surfaces and textural cues must be free from apparent and distracting quantization (aliasing) ........................
X
X
7.b. .........
System capable of portraying full color realistic textural cues .............................................................................
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00085
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
26562
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A3B.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry No.
For qualification at the stated level—Class I airport models
A
B
C
D
X
X
7.c. .........
The system light points must be free from distracting jitter, smearing or streaking ............................................
X
X
7.d. .........
Demonstration of occulting through each channel of the system in an operational scene .................................
X
X
7.e. .........
Demonstration of a minimum of ten levels of occulting through each channel of the system in an operational
scene.
X
X
7.f. ..........
System capable of providing focus effects that simulate rain ..............................................................................
X
X
7.g. .........
System capable of providing focus effects that simulate light point perspective growth ....................................
X
X
7.h. .........
System capable of six discrete light step controls (0–5) .....................................................................................
X
X
X
X
(i) The sound, motion and visual effects of light, medium and heavy precipitation near a thunderstorm on
take-off, approach, and landings at and below an altitude of 2,000 ft (600 m) above the airport surface
and within a radius of 10 sm (16 km) from the airport.
X
X
(ii) One airport with a snow scene to include terrain snow and snow-covered taxiways and runways ..............
X
X
8.b. .........
In-cloud effects such as variable cloud density, speed cues and ambient changes ...........................................
X
X
8.c. .........
The effect of multiple cloud layers representing few, scattered, broken and overcast conditions giving partial
or complete obstruction of the ground scene.
X
X
8.d. .........
Visibility and RVR measured in terms of distance. Visibility/RVR checked at 2,000 ft (600 m) above the airport and at two heights below 2000 ft with at least 500 ft of separation between the measurements. The
measurements must be taken within a radius of 10 sm (16 km) from the airport.
X
X
8.e. .........
Patchy fog giving the effect of variable RVR .......................................................................................................
X
X
8.f. ..........
Effects of fog on airport lighting such as halos and defocus ...............................................................................
X
X
8.g. .........
Effect of own-ship lighting in reduced visibility, such as reflected glare, including landing lights, strobes, and
beacons.
X
X
8.h. .........
Wind cues to provide the effect of blowing snow or sand across a dry runway or taxiway selectable from the
instructor station.
X
X
8. ...................
8.a. .........
8.a.1.
9. ...................
X
X
Environmental effects. The following are the minimum environmental effects that must be available as indicated.
The displayed scene corresponding to the appropriate surface contaminants and include runway lighting reflections for wet, partially obscured lights for snow, or alternative effects.
Special weather representations which include:
X
X
Instructor control of the following: The following are the minimum instructor controls that must be available in simulators at Levels A, B, C, and D.
Environmental effects, e.g., cloud base, cloud effects, cloud density, visibility in statute miles/kilometers and
RVR in feet/meters.
X
X
X
X
9.b. .........
Airport selection ....................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
9.c. .........
Airport lighting, including variable intensity ..........................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
9.d. .........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
9.a. .........
Dynamic effects including ground and flight traffic ..............................................................................................
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00086
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26563
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A3B.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry No.
For qualification at the stated level—Class I airport models
A
B
C
D
End QPS Requirement
Begin Information
10. .................
An example of being able to ‘‘combine two airport models to achieve two ‘‘in-use’’ runways:
One runway designated as the ‘‘in use’’ runway in the first model of the airport, and the second runway designated as the ‘‘in use’’ runway in the second model of the same airport. For example, the clearance is for
the ILS approach to Runway 27, Circle to Land on Runway 18 right. Two airport visual models might be
used: the first with Runway 27 designated as the ‘‘in use’’ runway for the approach to runway 27, and the
second with Runway 18 Right designated as the ‘‘in use’’ runway. When the pilot breaks off the ILS approach to runway 27, the instructor may change to the second airport visual model in which runway 18
Right is designated as the ‘‘in use’’ runway, and the pilot would make a visual approach and landing. This
process is acceptable to the FAA as long as the temporary interruption due to the visual model change is
not distracting to the pilot, does not cause changes in navigational radio frequencies, and does not cause
undue instructor/evaluator time.
11. .................
Sponsors are not required to provide every detail of a runway, but the detail that is provided should be correct within the capabilities of the system.
End Information
TABLE A3C.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS requirements
Simulator level
Entry
No.
Additional airport models beyond minimum required for qualification—Class II airport models
A
B
C
D
This table specifies the minimum airport model content and functionality necessary to add airport models to a simulator’s model library, beyond
those necessary for qualification at the stated level, without the necessity of further involvement of the NSPM or TPAA.
Begin QPS Requirements
1. .........
1.a.
2. .........
Airport model management. The following is the minimum airport model management requirements for simulators at Levels A, B, C,
and D.
The direction of strobe lights, approach lights, runway edge lights, visual landing aids, runway centerline lights,
threshold lights, and touchdown zone lights on the ‘‘in-use’’ runway must be replicated.
X
X
X
Visual feature recognition. The following are the minimum distances at which runway features must be visible for simulators at Levels
A, B, C, and D. Distances are measured from runway threshold to an airplane aligned with the runway on an extended 3° glide-slope
in simulated meteorological conditions that recreate the minimum distances for visibility. For circling approaches, all requirements of
this section apply to the runway used for the initial approach and to the runway of intended landing.
2.a.
Runway definition, strobe lights, approach lights, and runway edge white lights from 5 sm (8 km) from the runway
threshold.
2.b.
Visual Approach Aid lights (VASI or PAPI) from 5 sm (8 km) from the runway threshold ...........................................
2.c.
Visual Approach Aid lights (VASI or PAPI) from 3 sm (5 km) from the runway threshold ...........................................
X
X
2.d.
Runway centerline lights and taxiway definition from 3 sm (5 km) from the runway threshold ...................................
X
2.e.
Threshold lights and touchdown zone lights from 2 sm (3 km) from the runway threshold .........................................
2.f.
2.g.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Runway markings within range of landing lights for night scenes and as required by the surface resolution requirements on day scenes.
X
X
X
X
For circling approaches, the runway of intended landing and associated lighting must fade into view in a non-distracting manner.
X
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00087
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
X
X
26564
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A3C.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Simulator level
Entry
No.
3. .........
3.a.
Additional airport models beyond minimum required for qualification—Class II airport models
A
B
C
D
Airport model content The following prescribes the minimum requirements for what must be provided in an airport model and identifies
other aspects of the airport environment that must correspond with that model for simulators at Levels A, B, C, and D. The detail must
be developed using airport pictures, construction drawings and maps, or other similar data, or developed in accordance with published
regulatory material; however, this does not require that airport models contain details that are beyond the designed capability of the
currently qualified visual system. For circling approaches, all requirements of this section apply to the runway used for the initial approach and to the runway of intended landing. Only one ‘‘primary’’ taxi route from parking to the runway end will be required for each
‘‘in-use’’ runway.
The surface and markings for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway:
3.a.1. ...
Threshold markings ........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.a.2. ...
Runway numbers ...........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.a.3. ...
Touchdown zone markings ............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.a.4. ...
Fixed distance markings ................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.a.5. ...
Edge markings ...............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.a.6. ...
Centerline stripes ...........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.b.
The lighting for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway
3.b.1. ...
Threshold lights ..............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.b.2. ...
Edge lights .....................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.b.3. ...
End lights .......................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.b.4. ...
Centerline lights .............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.b.5. ...
Touchdown zone lights, if appropriate ...........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.b.6. ...
Leadoff lights, if appropriate ..........................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.b.7. ...
Appropriate visual landing aid(s) for that runway ..........................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.b.8. ...
Appropriate approach lighting system for that runway ..................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.c.
The taxiway surface and markings associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway:
3.c.1. ....
Edge ...............................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.c.2. ....
Centerline .......................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.c.3. ....
Runway hold lines ..........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.c.4. ....
ILS critical area markings ..............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
X
X
3.d.
The taxiway lighting associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway:
Edge ...............................................................................................................................................................................
3.d.2. ...
Centerline .......................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.d.3. ...
Runway hold and ILS critical area lights .......................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
4. .........
Required model correlation with other aspects of the airport environment simulation The following are the minimum model correlation tests that must be conducted for simulators at Levels A, B, C, and D.
4.a.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
3.d.1. ...
The airport model must be properly aligned with the navigational aids that are associated with operations at the
‘‘in-use’’ runway.
X
X
X
X
4.b.
Slopes in runways, taxiways, and ramp areas, if depicted in the visual scene, must not cause distracting or unrealistic effects.
X
X
X
X
5. .........
Correlation with airplane and associated equipment. The following are the minimum correlation comparisons that must be made for
simulators at Levels A, B, C, and D.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00088
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26565
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A3C.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Simulator level
Entry
No.
Additional airport models beyond minimum required for qualification—Class II airport models
A
B
C
D
5.a. ...
Visual system compatibility with aerodynamic programming ........................................................................................
X
X
X
X
5.b.
Accurate portrayal of environment relating to flight simulator attitudes ........................................................................
X
X
X
X
5.c.
Visual cues to assess sink rate and depth perception during landings ........................................................................
X
X
X
5.d.
Visual effects for each visible, own-ship, airplane external light(s) ...............................................................................
X
X
X
6. .........
Scene quality. The following are the minimum scene quality tests that must be conducted for simulators at Levels A, B, C, and D.
6.a.
Surfaces and textural cues must be free of apparent and distracting quantization (aliasing) ......................................
X
X
6.b. ......
Correct color and realistic textural cues ........................................................................................................................
X
X
6.c. .......
Light points free from distracting jitter, smearing or streaking ......................................................................................
X
X
7. .........
Instructor controls of the following:The following are the minimum instructor controls that must be available in simulators at Levels A,
B, C, and D.
X
X
7.a.
Environmental effects, e.g., cloud base (if used), cloud effects, cloud density, visibility in statute miles/kilometers
and RVR in feet/meters.
X
X
X
X
7.b.
Airport selection .............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
7.c.
Airport lighting including variable intensity .....................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
7.d.
Dynamic effects including ground and flight traffic ........................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
End QPS Requirements
Begin Information
8. .........
Sponsors are not required to provide every detail of a runway, but the detail that is provided must be correct within the capabilities of the system.
X
X
End Information
TABLE A3D.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS Requirements
Information
Simulator level
Entry
no.
Motion system effects
Notes
A
B
C
D
This table specifies motion effects that are required to indicate when a flight crewmember must be able to recognize an event or situation.
Where applicable, flight simulator pitch, side loading and directional control characteristics must be representative of the airplane.
Runway rumble, oleo deflection, ground speed, uneven
runway, runway and taxiway centerline light characteristics:
Procedure: After the airplane has been pre-set to the
takeoff position and then released, taxi at various
speeds with a smooth runway and note the general
characteristics of the simulated runway rumble effects
of oleo deflections. Repeat the maneuver with a runway roughness of 50%, then with maximum roughness. Note the associated motion vibrations affected
by ground speed and runway roughness.
X
X
X
X
2. .........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1. .........
Buffets on the ground due to spoiler/speedbrake extension and reverse thrust:
Procedure: Perform a normal landing and use ground
spoilers and reverse thrust—either individually or in
combination—to decelerate the simulated airplane.
Do not use wheel braking so that only the buffet due
to the ground spoilers and thrust reversers is felt.
X
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00089
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Different gross weights can also be selected, which
may also affect the associated vibrations depending
on airplane type. The associated motion effects for
the above tests should also include an assessment of
the effects of rolling over centerline lights, surface
discontinuities of uneven runways, and various taxiway characteristics.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26566
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A3D.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Simulator level
Entry
no.
Motion system effects
3. .........
Notes
B
C
D
Bumps associated with the landing gear:
Procedure: Perform a normal take-off paying special attention to the bumps that could be perceptible due to
maximum oleo extension after lift-off. When the landing gear is extended or retracted, motion bumps can
be felt when the gear locks into position.
X
X
X
X
4. .........
Buffet during extension and retraction of landing gear:
Procedure: Operate the landing gear. Check that the
motion cues of the buffet experienced represent the
actual airplane.
X
X
X
X
5. .........
Buffet in the air due to flap and spoiler/speedbrake extension and approach to stall buffet:
Procedure: Perform an approach and extend the flaps
and slats with airspeeds deliberately in excess of the
normal approach speeds. In cruise configuration,
verify the buffets associated with the spoiler/
speedbrake extension. The above effects can also be
verified with different combinations of spoiler/
speedbrake, flap, and landing gear settings to assess
the interaction effects.
X
X
X
X
6. .........
Approach to stall buffet:
Procedure: Conduct an approach-to-stall with engines
at idle and a deceleration of 1 knot/second. Check
that the motion cues of the buffet, including the level
of buffet increase with decreasing speed, are representative of the actual airplane.
X
X
X
X
7. .........
Touchdown cues for main and nose gear:
Procedure: Conduct several normal approaches with
various rates of descent. Check that the motion cues
for the touchdown bumps for each descent rate are
representative of the actual airplane.
X
X
X
X
8. .........
Nosewheel scuffing:
Procedure: Taxi at various ground speeds and manipulate the nosewheel steering to cause yaw rates to develop that cause the nosewheel to vibrate against the
ground (‘‘scuffing’’). Evaluate the speed/nosewheel
combination needed to produce scuffing and check
that the resultant vibrations are representative of the
actual airplane.
X
X
X
X
9. .........
Thrust effect with brakes set:
Procedure: Set the brakes on at the take-off point and
increase the engine power until buffet is experienced.
Evaluate its characteristics. Confirm that the buffet increases appropriately with increasing engine thrust.
X
X
X
X
10. .......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
A
Mach and maneuver buffet:
Procedure: With the simulated airplane trimmed in 1 g
flight while at high altitude, increase the engine power
so that the Mach number exceeds the documented
value at which Mach buffet is experienced. Check
that the buffet begins at the same Mach number as it
does in the airplane (for the same configuration) and
that buffet levels are representative of the actual airplane. For certain airplanes, maneuver buffet can
also be verified for the same effects. Maneuver buffet
can occur during turning flight at conditions greater
than 1 g, particularly at higher altitudes.
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00090
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
This effect is most discernible with wing-mounted engines.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26567
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A3D.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
Simulator level
Entry
no.
Motion system effects
11. .......
Tire failure dynamics:
Procedure: Simulate a single tire failure and a multiple
tire failure.
12. .......
Engine malfunction and engine damage:
Procedure: The characteristics of an engine malfunction
as stipulated in the malfunction definition document
for the particular flight simulator must describe the
special motion effects felt by the pilot. Note the associated engine instruments varying according to the
nature of the malfunction and note the replication of
the effects of the airframe vibration.
13. .......
Tail strikes and engine pod strikes:
Procedure: Tail-strikes can be checked by over-rotation
of the airplane at a speed below Vr while performing
a takeoff. The effects can also be verified during a
landing.
Excessive banking of the airplane during its take-off/
landing roll can cause a pod strike.
Notes
A
B
C
D
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
The pilot may notice some yawing with a multiple tire
failure selected on the same side. This should require
the use of the rudder to maintain control of the airplane.
Dependent on airplane type, a single tire failure may
not be noticed by the pilot and should not have any
special motion effect. Sound or vibration may be associated with the actual tire losing pressure.
The motion effect should be felt as a noticeable bump.
If the tail strike affects the airplane angular rates, the
cueing provided by the motion system should have
an associated effect.
TABLE A3E.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry
No.
Sound system
A
B
C
D
The following checks are performed during a normal flight profile with motion system ON.
1. .........
Precipitation ....................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
2. .........
Rain removal equipment. ...............................................................................................................................................
X
X
3. .........
Significant airplane noises perceptible to the pilot during normal operations ...............................................................
X
X
4. .........
Abnormal operations for which there are associated sound cues including, engine malfunctions, landing gear/tire
malfunctions, tail and engine pod strike and pressurization malfunction.
X
X
5. .........
Sound of a crash when the flight simulator is landed in excess of limitations .............................................................
X
X
....
....
TABLE A3F.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry
No.
Special effects
A
B
C
D
X
X
X
X
This table specifies the minimum special effects necessary for the specified simulator level.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1. .........
2. .........
Braking Dynamics:
Representations of the dynamics of brake failure (flight simulator pitch, side-loading, and directional control characteristics representative of the airplane), including antiskid and decreased brake efficiency due to high brake
temperatures (based on airplane related data), sufficient to enable pilot identification of the problem and implementation of appropriate procedures.
Effects of Airframe and Engine Icing:
Required only for those airplanes authorized for operations in known icing conditions.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00091
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26568
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A3F.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry
No.
Special effects
A
B
C
D
Procedure: With the simulator airborne, in a clean configuration, nominal altitude and cruise airspeed, autopilot on
and auto-throttles off, engine and airfoil anti-ice/de-ice systems deactivated; activate icing conditions at a rate
that allows monitoring of simulator and systems response. Icing recognition will include an increase in gross
weight, airspeed decay, change in simulator pitch attitude, change in engine performance indications (other than
due to airspeed changes), and change in data from pitot/static system. Activate heating, anti-ice, or de-ice systems independently. Recognition will include proper effects of these systems, eventually returning the simulated
airplane to normal flight.
TABLE A3G.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry
No.
Special effects
A
B
C
D
Functions in this table are subject to evaluation only if appropriate for the airplane and/or the system is installed on the specific simulator.
1. .........
Simulator Power Switch(es) ...........................................................................................................................................
2. .........
X
X
X
X
Airplane conditions
2.a.
Gross weight, center of gravity, fuel loading and allocation ..........................................................................................
X
X
X
X
2.b.
Airplane systems status .................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
2.c.
Ground crew functions (e.g., ext. power, push back) ....................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3. .........
Airports
3.a.
Number and selection ....................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.b.
Runway selection ...........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
3.c.
Runway surface condition (e.g., rough, smooth, icy, wet) ............................................................................................
....
....
X
X
3.d.
Preset positions (e.g., ramp, gate, #1 for takeoff, takeoff position, over FAF) .............................................................
X
X
X
X
3.e.
Lighting controls .............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
4. .........
Environmental controls
4.a
Visibility (statute miles (kilometers)) ..............................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
4.b.
Runway visual range (in feet (meters)) .........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
4.c.
Temperature ...................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
4.d.
Climate conditions (e.g., ice, snow, rain) .......................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
4.e.
Wind speed and direction ..............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
4.f.
Windshear ......................................................................................................................................................................
....
....
X
X
4.g.
Clouds (base and tops) ..................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
5. .........
Airplane system malfunctions (Inserting and deleting malfunctions into the simulator) ...............................................
X
X
X
X
6. .........
Locks, Freezes, and Repositioning
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
6.a.
Problem (all) freeze/release ...........................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
6.b.
Position (geographic) freeze/release .............................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
6.c.
Repositioning (locations, freezes, and releases) ...........................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
6.d.
Ground speed control ....................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00092
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26569
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE A3G.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry
No.
Special effects
7. .........
A
B
C
D
Remote IOS ...................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
8. .........
Sound Controls. On/off/adjustment ................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
9. .........
Motion/Control Loading System
9.a.
On/off/emergency stop ...................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
10. .......
Observer Seats/Stations. Position/Adjustment/Positive restraint system ......................................................................
X
X
X
X
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
1. Introduction
a. The following is an example test
schedule for an Initial/Upgrade evaluation
that covers the majority of the requirements
set out in the Functions and Subjective test
requirements. It is not intended that the
schedule be followed line by line, rather, the
example should be used as a guide for
preparing a schedule that is tailored to the
airplane, sponsor, and training task.
b. Functions and subjective tests should be
planned. This information has been
organized as a reference document with the
considerations, methods, and evaluation
notes for each individual aspect of the
simulator task presented as an individual
item. In this way the evaluator can design his
or her own test plan, using the appropriate
sections to provide guidance on method and
evaluation criteria. Two aspects should be
present in any test plan structure:
(1) An evaluation of the simulator to
determine that it replicates the aircraft and
performs reliably for an uninterrupted period
equivalent to the length of a typical training
session.
(2) The simulator should be capable of
operating reliably after the use of training
device functions such as repositions or
malfunctions.
c. A detailed understanding of the training
task will naturally lead to a list of objectives
that the simulator should meet. This list will
form the basis of the test plan. Additionally,
once the test plan has been formulated, the
initial conditions and the evaluation criteria
should be established. The evaluator should
consider all factors that may have an
influence on the characteristics observed
during particular training tasks in order to
make the test plan successful.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2. Events
a. Initial Conditions
(1) Airport.
(2) QNH.
(3) Temperature.
(4) Wind/Crosswind.
(5) Zero Fuel Weight /Fuel/Gross Weight
/Center of Gravity.
b. Initial Checks
(1) Documentation of Simulator.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
(a) Simulator Acceptance Test Manuals.
(b) Simulator Approval Test Guide.
(c) Technical Logbook Open Item List.
(d) Daily Functional Pre-flight Check.
(2) Documentation of User/Carrier Flight
Logs.
(a) Simulator Operating/Instructor Manual.
(b) Difference List (Aircraft/Simulator).
(c) Flight Crew Operating Manuals.
(d) Performance Data for Different Fields.
(e) Crew Training Manual.
(f) Normal/Abnormal/Emergency
Checklists.
(3) Simulator External Checks.
(a) Appearance and Cleanliness.
(b) Stairway/Access Bridge.
(c) Emergency Rope Ladders.
(d) ‘‘Motion On’’/‘‘Flight in Progress’’
Lights.
(4) Simulator Internal Checks.
(a) Cleaning/Disinfecting Towels (for
cleaning oxygen masks).
(b) Flight deck Layout (compare with
difference list).
(5) Equipment.
(a) Quick Donning Oxygen Masks.
(b) Head Sets.
(c) Smoke Goggles.
(d) Sun Visors.
(e) Escape Rope.
(f) Chart Holders.
(g) Flashlights.
(h) Fire Extinguisher (inspection date).
(i) Crash Axe.
(j) Gear Pins.
c. Power Supply and APU Start Checks
(1) Batteries and Static Inverter.
(2) APU Start with Battery.
(3) APU Shutdown using Fire Handle.
(4) External Power Connection.
(5) APU Start with External Power.
(6) Abnormal APU Start/Operation.
d. Flight deck Checks
(1) Flight deck Preparation Checks.
(2) FMC Programming.
(3) Communications and Navigational Aids
Checks.
e. Engine Start
(1) Before Start Checks.
(2) Battery start with Ground Air Supply
Unit.
(3) Engine Crossbleed Start.
(4) Normal Engine Start.
(5) Abnormal Engine Starts.
PO 00000
Frm 00093
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
(6) Engine Idle Readings.
(7) After Start Checks.
f. Taxi Checks
(1) Pushback/Powerback.
(2) Taxi Checks.
(3) Ground Handling Check:
(a) Power required to initiate ground roll.
(b) Thrust response.
(c) Nosewheel and Pedal Steering.
(d) Nosewheel Scuffing.
(e) Perform 180 degree turns.
(f) Brakes Response and Differential
Braking using Normal, Alternate and
Emergency.
(g) Brake Systems.
(h) Eye height and fore/aft position.
(4) Runway Roughness.
g. Visual Scene—Ground Assessment.
Select 3 different airport models and perform
the following checks with Day, Dusk and
Night selected, as appropriate:
(1) Visual Controls.
(a) Daylight, Dusk, Night Scene Controls.
(b) Flight deck ‘‘Daylight’’ ambient
lighting.
(c) Environment Light Controls.
(d) Runway Light Controls.
(e) Taxiway Light Controls.
(2) Airport Model Content.
(a) Ramp area for buildings, gates,
airbridges, maintenance ground equipment,
parked aircraft.
(b) Daylight shadows, night time light
pools.
(c) Taxiways for correct markings, taxiway/
runway, marker boards, CAT I and II/III hold
points, taxiway shape/grass areas, taxiway
light (positions and colors).
(d) Runways for correct markings, lead-off
lights, boards, runway slope, runway light
positions, and colors, directionality of
runway lights.
(e) Airport environment for correct terrain
and significant features.
(f) Visual scene quantization (aliasing),
color, and occulting levels.
(3) Ground Traffic Selection.
(4) Environment Effects.
(a) Low cloud scene.
(i) Rain:
(A) Runway surface scene.
(B) Windshield wiper—operation and
sound.
(ii) Hail:
(A) Runway surface scene.
(B) Windshield wiper—operation and
sound.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26570
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
(b) Lightning/thunder.
(c) Snow/ice runway surface scene.
(d) Fog.
h. Takeoff. Select one or several of the
following test cases:
(1) T/O Configuration Warnings.
(2) Engine Takeoff Readings.
(3) Rejected Takeoff (Dry/Wet/Icy Runway)
and check the following:
(a) Autobrake function.
(b) Anti-skid operation.
(c) Motion/visual effects during
deceleration.
(d) Record stopping distance (use runway
plot or runway lights remaining).
Continue taxiing along the runway while
applying brakes and check the following:
(e) Center line lights alternating red/white
for 2000 feet/600 meters.
(f) Center line lights all red for 1000 feet/
300 meters.
(g) Runway end, red stop bars.
(h) Braking fade effect.
(i) Brake temperature indications.
(4) Engine Failure between VI and V2.
(5) Normal Takeoff:
(a) During ground roll check the following:
(i) Runway rumble.
(ii) Acceleration cues.
(iii) Groundspeed effects.
(iv) Engine sounds.
(v) Nosewheel and rudder pedal steering.
(b) During and after rotation, check the
following:
(i) Rotation characteristics.
(ii) Column force during rotation.
(iii) Gear uplock sounds/bumps.
(iv) Effect of slat/flap retraction during
climbout.
(6) Crosswind Takeoff (check the
following):
(a) Tendency to turn into or out of the
wind.
(b) Tendency to lift upwind wing as
airspeed increases.
(7) Windshear during Takeoff (check the
following):
(a) Controllable during windshear
encounter.
(b) Performance adequate when using
correct techniques.
(c) Windshear Indications satisfactory.
(d) Motion cues satisfactory (particularly
turbulence).
(8) Normal Takeoff with Control
Malfunction.
(9) Low Visibility T/O (check the
following):
(a) Visual cues.
(b) Flying by reference to instruments.
(c) SID Guidance on LNAV.
i. Climb Performance. Select one or several
of the following test cases:
(1) Normal Climb—Climb while
maintaining recommended speed profile and
note fuel, distance and time.
(2) Single Engine Climb—Trim aircraft in
a zero wheel climb at V2.
Note: Up to 5° bank towards the operating
engine(s) is permissible. Climb for 3 minutes
and note fuel, distance, and time. Increase
speed toward en route climb speed and
retract flaps. Climb for 3 minutes and note
fuel, distance, and time.
j. Systems Operation During Climb.
Check normal operation and malfunctions
as appropriate for the following systems:
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
(1) Air conditioning/Pressurization/
Ventilation.
(2) Autoflight.
(3) Communications.
(4) Electrical.
(5) Fuel.
(6) Icing Systems.
(7) Indicating and Recording Systems.
(8) Navigation/FMS.
(9) Pneumatics.
k. Cruise Checks. Select one or several of
the following test cases:
(1) Cruise Performance.
(2) High Speed/High Altitude Handling
(check the following):
(a) Overspeed warning.
(b) High Speed buffet.
(c) Aircraft control satisfactory.
(d) Envelope limiting functions on
Computer Controlled Aircraft.
Reduce airspeed to below level flight buffet
onset speed, start a turn, and check the
following:
(e) High Speed buffet increases with G
loading.
Reduce throttles to idle and start descent,
deploy the speedbrake, and check the
following:
(f) Speedbrake indications.
(g) Symmetrical deployment.
(h) Airframe buffet.
(i) Aircraft response hands off.
(3) Yaw Damper Operation. Switch off yaw
dampers and autopilot. Initiate a Dutch roll
and check the following:
(a) Aircraft dynamics.
(b) Simulator motion effects.
Switch on yaw dampers, re-initiate a Dutch
roll and check the following:
(c) Damped aircraft dynamics.
(4) APU Operation.
(5) Engine Gravity Feed.
(6) Engine Shutdown and Driftdown
Check: FMC operation Aircraft performance.
(7) Engine Relight.
l. Descent. Select one of the following test
cases:
(1) Normal Descent. Descend while
maintaining recommended speed profile and
note fuel, distance and time.
(2) Cabin Depressurization/Emergency
Descent.
m. Medium Altitude Checks. Select one or
several of the following test cases:
(1) High Angle of Attack/Stall. Trim the
aircraft at 1.4 Vs, establish 1 kt/sec 2
deceleration rate, and check the following—
(a) System displays/operation satisfactory.
(b) Handling characteristics satisfactory.
(c) Stall and Stick shaker speed.
(d) Buffet characteristics and onset speed.
(e) Envelope limiting functions on
Computer Controlled Aircraft.
Recover to straight and level flight and
check the following:
(f) Handling characteristics satisfactory.
(2) Turning Flight. Roll aircraft to left,
establish a 30° to 45° bank angle, and check
the following:
(a) Stick force required, satisfactory.
(b) Wheel requirement to maintain bank
angle.
(c) Slip ball response, satisfactory.
(d) Time to turn 180°.
Roll aircraft from 45° bank one way to 45°
bank the opposite direction while
PO 00000
Frm 00094
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
maintaining altitude and airspeed—check the
following:
(e) Controllability during maneuver.
(3) Degraded flight controls.
(4) Holding Procedure (check the
following:)
(a) FMC operation.
(b) Autopilot auto thrust performance.
(5) Storm Selection (check the following:)
(a) Weather radar controls.
(b) Weather radar operation.
(c) Visual scene corresponds with WXR
pattern.
(Fly through storm center, and check the
following:)
(d) Aircraft enters cloud.
(e) Aircraft encounters representative
turbulence.
(f) Rain/hail sound effects evident.
As aircraft leaves storm area, check the
following:
(g) Storm effects disappear.
(6) TCAS (check the following:)
(a) Traffic appears on visual display.
(b) Traffic appears on TCAS display(s).
As conflicting traffic approaches, take
relevant avoiding action, and check the
following:
(c) Visual and TCAS system displays.
n. Approach and Landing. Select one or
several of the following test cases while
monitoring flight control and hydraulic
systems for normal operation and with
malfunctions selected:
(1) Flaps/Gear Normal Operation. Check
the following:
(a) Time for extension/retraction.
(b) Buffet characteristics.
(2) Normal Visual Approach and Landing.
Fly a normal visual approach and
landing—check the following:
(a) Aircraft handling.
(b) Spoiler operation.
(c) Reverse thrust operation.
(d) Directional control on the ground.
(e) Touchdown cues for main and
nosewheel.
(f) Visual cues.
(g) Motion cues.
(h) Sound cues.
(i) Brake and anti-skid operation.
(3) Flaps/Gear Abnormal Operation or with
hydraulic malfunctions.
(4) Abnormal Wing Flaps/Slats Landing.
(5) Manual Landing with Control
Malfunction.
(a) Aircraft handling.
(b) Radio aids and instruments.
(c) Airport model content and cues.
(d) Motion cues.
(e) Sound cues.
(6) Non-precision Approach—All Engines
Operating.
(a) Aircraft handling.
(b) Radio Aids and instruments.
(c) Airport model content and cues.
(d) Motion cues.
(e) Sound cues.
(7) Circling Approach.
(a) Aircraft handling.
(c) Radio Aids and instruments.
(d) Airport model content and cues.
(e) Motion cues.
(f) Sound cues.
(8) Non-precision Approach—One Engine
Inoperative.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
(a) Aircraft handling.
(b) Radio Aids and instruments.
(c) Airport model content and cues.
(d) Motion cues.
(e) Sound cues.
(9) One Engine Inoperative Go-around.
(a) Aircraft handling.
(b) Radio Aids and instruments.
(c) Airport model content and cues.
(d) Motion cues.
(e) Sound cues.
(10) CAT I Approach and Landing with
raw-data ILS.
(a) Aircraft handling.
(b) Radio Aids and instruments.
(c) Airport model content and cues.
(d) Motion cues.
(e) Sound cues.
(11) CAT I Approach and Landing with
Limiting Crosswind.
(a) Aircraft handling.
(b) Radio Aids and instruments.
(c) Airport model content and cues.
(d) Motion cues.
(e) Sound cues.
(12) CAT I Approach with Windshear.
Check the following:
(a) Controllable during windshear
encounter.
(b) Performance adequate when using
correct techniques.
(c) Windshear indications/warnings.
(d) Motion cues (particularly turbulence).
(13) CAT II Approach and Automatic GoAround.
(14) CAT III Approach and Landing—
System Malfunctions.
(15) CAT III Approach and Landing—1
Engine Inoperative.
(16) GPWS evaluation.
o. Visual Scene—In-Flight Assessment.
Select three (3) different visual models and
perform the following checks with ‘‘day,’’
‘‘dusk,’’ and ‘‘night’’ (as appropriate)
selected. Reposition the aircraft at or below
2000 feet within 10 nm of the airfield. Fly the
aircraft around the airport environment and
assess control of the visual system and
evaluate the Airport model content as
described below:
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
(1) Visual Controls.
(a) Daylight, Dusk, Night Scene Controls.
(b) Environment Light Controls.
(c) Runway Light Controls.
(d) Taxiway Light Controls.
(e) Approach Light Controls.
(2) Airport model Content.
(a) Airport environment for correct terrain
and significant features.
(b) Runways for correct markings, runway
slope, directionality of runway lights.
(c) Visual scene for quantization (aliasing),
color, and occulting.
Reposition the aircraft to a long, final
approach for an ‘‘ILS runway.’’ Select flight
freeze when the aircraft is 5-statute miles
(sm)/8-kilometers (km) out and on the glide
slope. Check the following:
(3) Airport model content.
(a) Airfield features.
(b) Approach lights.
(c) Runway definition.
(d) Runway definition.
(e) Runway edge lights and VASI lights.
(f) Strobe lights.
Release flight freeze. Continue flying the
approach with NP engaged. Select flight
freeze when aircraft is 3 sm/5 km out and on
the glide slope. Check the following:
(4) Airport model Content.
(a) Runway centerline light.
(b) Taxiway definition and lights.
Release flight freeze and continue flying
the approach with A/P engaged. Select flight
freeze when aircraft is 2 sm/3 km out and on
the glide slope. Check the following:
(5) Airport model content.
(a) Runway threshold lights.
(b) Touchdown zone lights.
At 200 ft radio altitude and still on glide
slope, select Flight Freeze. Check the
following:
(6) Airport model content.
(a) Runway markings.
Set the weather to Category I conditions
and check the following:
(7) Airport model content.
(a) Visual ground segment.
Set the weather to Category II conditions,
release Flight Freeze, re-select Flight Freeze
PO 00000
Frm 00095
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26571
at 100 feet radio altitude, and check the
following:
(8) Airport model content.
(a) Visual ground segment.
Select night/dusk (twilight) conditions and
check the following:
(9) Airport model content.
(a) Runway markings visible within
landing light lobes.
Set the weather to Category III conditions,
release Flight Freeze, re-select Flight Freeze
at 50 feet radio altitude and check the
following:
(10) Airport model content.
(a) Visual ground segment.
Set WX to a typical ‘‘missed approach?
weather condition, release Flight Freeze, reselect Flight Freeze at 15 feet radio altitude,
and check the following:
(11) Airport model content.
(a) Visual ground segment.
When on the ground, stop the aircraft. Set
0 feet RVR, ensure strobe/beacon tights are
switched on and check the following:
(12) Airport model content.
(a) Visual effect of strobe and beacon.
Reposition to final approach, set weather to
‘‘Clear,’’ continue approach for an automatic
landing, and check the following:
(13) Airport model content.
(a) Visual cues during flare to assess sink
rate.
(b) Visual cues during flare to assess Depth
perception.
(c) Flight deck height above ground.
After Landing Operations.
(1) After Landing Checks.
(2) Taxi back to gate. Check the following:
(a) Visual model satisfactory.
(b) Parking brake operation satisfactory.
(3) Shutdown Checks.
q. Crash Function.
(1) Gear-up Crash.
(2) Excessive rate of descent Crash.
(3) Excessive bank angle Crash.
BILLING CODE 4910–13–P
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00096
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.005
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26572
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00097
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26573
ER09MY08.006
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00098
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.008
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26574
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00099
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26575
ER09MY08.009
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00100
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.010
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26576
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00101
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26577
ER09MY08.011
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00102
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.012
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26578
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00103
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26579
ER09MY08.013
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00104
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.014
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26580
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00105
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26581
ER09MY08.015
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00106
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.016
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26582
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00107
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26583
ER09MY08.017
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00108
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.018
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26584
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
Attachment 5 to Appendix A to Part 60—
Simulator Qualification Requirements for
Windshear Training Program Use
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1. Applicability
This attachment applies to all simulators,
regardless of qualification level, that are used
to satisfy the training requirements of an
FAA-approved low-altitude windshear flight
training program, or any FAA-approved
training program that addresses windshear
encounters.
2. Statement of Compliance and Capability
(SOC)
a. The sponsor must submit an SOC
confirming that the aerodynamic model is
based on flight test data supplied by the
airplane manufacturer or other approved data
provider. The SOC must also confirm that
any change to environmental wind
parameters, including variances in those
parameters for windshear conditions, once
inserted for computation, result in the correct
simulated performance. This statement must
also include examples of environmental
wind parameters currently evaluated in the
simulator (such as crosswind takeoffs,
crosswind approaches, and crosswind
landings).
b. For simulators without windshear
warning, caution, or guidance hardware in
the original equipment, the SOC must also
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
state that the simulation of the added
hardware and/or software, including
associated flight deck displays and
annunciations, replicates the system(s)
installed in the airplane. The statement must
be accompanied by a block diagram depicting
the input and output signal flow, and
comparing the signal flow to the equipment
installed in the airplane.
3. Models
The windshear models installed in the
simulator software used for the qualification
evaluation must do the following:
a. Provide cues necessary for recognizing
windshear onset and potential performance
degradation requiring a pilot to initiate
recovery procedures. The cues must include
all of the following, as appropriate for the
portion of the flight envelope:
(1) Rapid airspeed change of at least ±15
knots (kts).
(2) Stagnation of airspeed during the
takeoff roll.
(3) Rapid vertical speed change of at least
±500 feet per minute (fpm).
(4) Rapid pitch change of at least ±5°.
b. Be adjustable in intensity (or other
parameter to achieve an intensity effect) to at
least two (2) levels so that upon encountering
the windshear the pilot may identify its
presence and apply the recommended
procedures for escape from such a
windshear.
(1) If the intensity is lesser, the
performance capability of the simulated
PO 00000
Frm 00109
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
airplane in the windshear permits the pilot
to maintain a satisfactory flightpath; and
(2) If the intensity is greater, the
performance capability of the simulated
airplane in the windshear does not permit
the pilot to maintain a satisfactory flightpath
(crash). Note: The means used to accomplish
the ‘‘nonsurvivable’’ scenario of paragraph
3.b.(2) of this attachment, that involve
operational elements of the simulated
airplane, must reflect the dispatch limitations
of the airplane.
c. Be available for use in the FAAapproved windshear flight training program.
4. Demonstrations
a. The sponsor must identify one
survivable takeoff windshear training model
and one survivable approach windshear
training model. The wind components of the
survivable models must be presented in
graphical format so that all components of
the windshear are shown, including
initiation point, variance in magnitude, and
time or distance correlations. The simulator
must be operated at the same gross weight,
airplane configuration, and initial airspeed
during the takeoff demonstration (through
calm air and through the first selected
survivable windshear), and at the same gross
weight, airplane configuration, and initial
airspeed during the approach demonstration
(through calm air and through the second
selected survivable windshear).
b. In each of these four situations, at an
‘‘initiation point’’ (i.e., where windshear
onset is or should be recognized), the
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.019
BILLING CODE 4910–13–C
26585
26586
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
recommended procedures for windshear
recovery are applied and the results are
recorded as specified in paragraph 5 of this
attachment.
c. These recordings are made without
inserting programmed random turbulence.
Turbulence that results from the windshear
model is to be expected, and no attempt may
be made to neutralize turbulence from this
source.
d. The definition of the models and the
results of the demonstrations of all four?(4)
cases described in paragraph 4.a of this
attachment, must be made a part of the
MQTG.
5. Recording Parameters
a. In each of the four MQTG cases, an
electronic recording (time history) must be
made of the following parameters:
(1) Indicated or calibrated airspeed.
(2) Indicated vertical speed.
(3) Pitch attitude.
(4) Indicated or radio altitude.
(5) Angle of attack.
(6) Elevator position.
(7) Engine data (thrust, N1, or throttle
position).
(8) Wind magnitudes (simple windshear
model assumed).
b. These recordings must be initiated at
least 10 seconds prior to the initiation point,
and continued until recovery is complete or
ground contact is made.
6. Equipment Installation and Operation
All windshear warning, caution, or
guidance hardware installed in the simulator
must operate as it operates in the airplane.
For example, if a rapidly changing wind
speed and/or direction would have caused a
windshear warning in the airplane, the
simulator must respond equivalently without
instructor/evaluator intervention.
7. Qualification Test Guide
a. All QTG material must be forwarded to
the NSPM.
b. A simulator windshear evaluation will
be scheduled in accordance with normal
procedures. Continuing qualification
evaluation schedules will be used to the
maximum extent possible.
c. During the on-site evaluation, the
evaluator will ask the operator to run the
performance tests and record the results. The
results of these on-site tests will be compared
to those results previously approved and
placed in the QTG or MQTG, as appropriate.
d. QTGs for new (or MQTGs for upgraded)
simulators must contain or reference the
information described in paragraphs 2, 3, 4,
and 5 of this attachment.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Begin Information
8. Subjective Evaluation
The NSPM will fly the simulator in at least
two of the available windshear scenarios to
subjectively evaluate simulator performance
as it encounters the programmed windshear
conditions.
a. One scenario will include parameters
that enable the pilot to maintain a
satisfactory flightpath.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
b. One scenario will include parameters
that will not enable the pilot to maintain a
satisfactory flightpath (crash).
c. Other scenarios may be examined at the
NSPM’s discretion.
9. Qualification Basis
The addition of windshear programming to
a simulator in order to comply with the
qualification for required windshear training
does not change the original qualification
basis of the simulator.
10. Demonstration Repeatability
For the purposes of demonstration
repeatability, it is recommended that the
simulator be flown by means of the
simulator’s autodrive function (for those
simulators that have autodrive capability)
during the demonstrations.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
Attachment 6 to Appendix A to Part 60—
FSTD Directives Applicable to Airplane
Flight Simulators
Flight Simulation Training Device (FSTD)
Directive
FSTD Directive 1. Applicable to all Full
Flight Simulators (FFS), regardless of the
original qualification basis and qualification
date (original or upgrade), having Class II or
Class III airport models available.
Agency: Federal Aviation Administration
(FAA), DOT.
Action: This is a retroactive requirement to
have all Class II or Class III airport models
meet current requirements.
lllllllllllllllllllll
Summary: Notwithstanding the
authorization listed in paragraph 13b in
Appendices A and C of this part, this FSTD
Directive requires each certificate holder to
ensure that by May 30, 2009, except for the
airport model(s) used to qualify the simulator
at the designated level, each airport model
used by the certificate holder’s instructors or
evaluators for training, checking, or testing
under this chapter in an FFS, meets the
definition of a Class II or Class III airport
model as defined in 14CFR part 60. The
completion of this requirement will not
require a report, and the method used for
keeping instructors and evaluators apprised
of the airport models that meet Class II or
Class III requirements on any given simulator
is at the option of the certificate holder
whose employees are using the FFS, but the
method used must be available for review by
the TPAA for that certificate holder.
Dates: FSTD Directive 1 becomes effective
on May 30, 2008.
For Further Information Contact: Ed Cook,
Senior Advisor to the Division Manager, Air
Transportation Division, AFS–200, 800
Independence Ave, SW., Washington, DC
20591; telephone: (404) 832–4701; fax: (404)
761–8906.
Specific Requirements:
1. Part 60 requires that each FSTD be:
a. Sponsored by a person holding or
applying for an FAA operating certificate
under Part 119, Part 141, or Part 142, or
holding or applying for an FAA-approved
PO 00000
Frm 00110
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
training program under Part 63, Appendix C,
for flight engineers, and
b. Evaluated and issued an SOQ for a
specific FSTD level.
2. FFSs also require the installation of a
visual system that is capable of providing an
out-of-the-flight-deck view of airport models.
However, historically these airport models
were not routinely evaluated or required to
meet any standardized criteria. This has led
to qualified simulators containing airport
models being used to meet FAA-approved
training, testing, or checking requirements
with potentially incorrect or inappropriate
visual references.
3. To prevent this from occurring in the
future, by May 30, 2009, except for the
airport model(s) used to qualify the simulator
at the designated level, each certificate
holder must assure that each airport model
used for training, testing, or checking under
this chapter in a qualified FFS meets the
definition of a Class II or Class III airport
model as defined in Appendix F of this part.
4. These references describe the
requirements for visual scene management
and the minimum distances from which
runway or landing area features must be
visible for all levels of simulator. The airport
model must provide, for each ‘‘in-use
runway’’ or ‘‘in-use landing area,’’ runway or
landing area surface and markings, runway or
landing area lighting, taxiway surface and
markings, and taxiway lighting. Additional
requirements include correlation of the v
airport models with other aspects of the
airport environment, correlation of the
aircraft and associated equipment, scene
quality assessment features, and the control
of these models the instructor must be able
to exercise.
5. For circling approaches, all requirements
of this section apply to the runway used for
the initial approach and to the runway of
intended landing.
6. The details in these models must be
developed using airport pictures,
construction drawings and maps, or other
similar data, or developed in accordance
with published regulatory material. However,
this FSTD DIRECTIVE 1 does not require that
airport models contain details that are
beyond the initially designed capability of
the visual system, as currently qualified. The
recognized limitations to visual systems are
as follows:
a. Visual systems not required to have
runway numbers as a part of the specific
runway marking requirements are:
(1) Link NVS and DNVS.
(2) Novoview 2500 and 6000.
(3) FlightSafety VITAL series up to, and
including, VITAL III, but not beyond.
(4) Redifusion SP1, SP1T, and SP2.
b. Visual systems required to display
runway numbers only for LOFT scenes are:
(1) FlightSafety VITAL IV.
(2) Redifusion SP3 and SP3T.
(3) Link-Miles Image II.
c. Visual systems not required to have
accurate taxiway edge lighting are:
(1) Redifusion SP1.
(2) FlightSafety Vital IV.
(3) Link-Miles Image II and Image IIT
(4) XKD displays (even though the XKD
image generator is capable of generating blue
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
colored lights, the display cannot
accommodate that color).
7. A copy of this Directive must be filed
in the MQTG in the designated FSTD
Directive Section, and its inclusion must be
annotated on the Index of Effective FSTD
Directives chart. See Attachment 4,
Appendices A through D for a sample MQTG
Index of Effective FSTD Directives chart.
Attachment 2 to Appendix B to Part 60—
Flight Training Device (FTD) Objective
Tests.
Attachment 3 to Appendix B to Part 60—
Flight Training Device (FTD) Subjective
Evaluation.
Attachment 4 to Appendix B to Part 60—
Sample Documents.
Appendix B to Part 60—Qualification
Performance Standards for Airplane Flight
Training Devices
lllllllllllllllllllll
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Begin Information
This appendix establishes the standards for
Airplane FTD evaluation and qualification at
Level 4, Level 5, or Level 6. The Flight
Standards Service, NSPM, is responsible for
the development, application, and
implementation of the standards contained
within this appendix. The procedures and
criteria specified in this appendix will be
used by the NSPM, or a person or persons
assigned by the NSPM when conducting
airplane FTD evaluations.
Table of Contents
1. Introduction
2. Applicability (§§ 60.1 and 60.2).
3. Definitions (§ 60.3).
4. Qualification Performance Standards
(§ 60.4).
5. Quality Management System (§ 60.5).
6. Sponsor Qualification Requirements
(§ 60.7).
7. Additional Responsibilities of the Sponsor
(§ 60.9).
8. FTD Use (§ 60.11).
9. FTD Objective Data Requirements
(§ 60.13).
10. Special Equipment and Personnel
Requirements for Qualification of the
FTD (§ 60.14).
11. Initial (and Upgrade) Qualification
Requirements (§ 60.15).
12. Additional Qualifications for Currently
Qualified FTDs (§ 60.16).
13. Previously Qualified FTDs (§ 60.17).
14. Inspection, Continuing Qualification
Evaluation, and Maintenance
Requirements (§ 60.19).
15. Logging FTD Discrepancies (§ 60.20).
16. Interim Qualification of FTDs for New
Airplane Types or Models (§ 60.21).
17. Modifications to FTDs (§ 60.23).
18. Operations with Missing, Malfunctioning,
or Inoperative Components (§ 60.25).
19. Automatic Loss of Qualification and
Procedures for Restoration of
Qualification (§ 60.27).
20. Other Losses of Qualification and
Procedures for Restoration of
Qualification (§ 60.29).
21. Record Keeping and Reporting (§ 60.31).
22. Applications, Logbooks, Reports, and
Records: Fraud, Falsification, or
Incorrect Statements (§ 60.33).
23. [Reserved]
24. Levels of FTD.
25. FTD Qualification on the Basis of a
Bilateral Aviation Safety Agreement
(BASA) (§ 60.37).
Attachment 1 to Appendix B to Part 60—
General FTD Requirements.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
End Information
1. Introduction
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
a. This appendix contains background
information as well as regulatory and
informative material as described later in this
section. To assist the reader in determining
what areas are required and what areas are
permissive, the text in this appendix is
divided into two sections: ‘‘QPS
Requirements’’ and ‘‘Information.’’ The QPS
Requirements sections contain details
regarding compliance with the part 60 rule
language. These details are regulatory, but are
found only in this appendix. The Information
sections contain material that is advisory in
nature, and designed to give the user general
information about the regulation.
b. Questions regarding the contents of this
publication should be sent to the U.S.
Department of Transportation, Federal
Aviation Administration, Flight Standards
Service, National Simulator Program Staff,
AFS–205, 100 Hartsfield Centre Parkway,
Suite 400, Atlanta, Georgia, 30354.
Telephone contact numbers for the NSP are:
phone, 404–832–4700; fax, 404–761–8906.
The general e-mail address for the NSP office
is: 9-aso-avr-sim-team@faa.gov. The NSP
Internet Web Site address is: https://
www.faa.gov/safety/programs_initiatives/
aircraft_aviation/nsp/. On this Web Site you
will find an NSP personnel list with
telephone and e-mail contact information for
each NSP staff member, a list of qualified
flight simulation devices, ACs, a description
of the qualification process, NSP policy, and
an NSP ‘‘In-Works’’ section. Also linked from
this site are additional information sources,
handbook bulletins, frequently asked
questions, a listing and text of the Federal
Aviation Regulations, Flight Standards
Inspector’s handbooks, and other FAA links.
c. The NSPM encourages the use of
electronic media for all communication,
including any record, report, request, test, or
statement required by this appendix. The
electronic media used must have adequate
security provisions and be acceptable to the
NSPM. The NSPM recommends inquiries on
system compatibility, and minimum system
requirements are also included on the NSP
Web site.
d. Related Reading References.
(1) 14 CFR part 60.
(2) 14 CFR part 61.
(3) 14 CFR part 63.
(4) 14 CFR part 119.
(5) 14 CFR part 121.
(6) 14 CFR part 125.
(7) 14 CFR part 135.
(8) 14 CFR part 141.
(9) 14 CFR part 142.
PO 00000
Frm 00111
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26587
(10) AC 120–28, as amended, Criteria for
Approval of Category III Landing Weather
Minima.
(11) AC 120–29, as amended, Criteria for
Approving Category I and Category II
Landing Minima for part 121 operators.
(12) AC 120–35, as amended, Line
Operational Simulations: Line-Oriented
Flight Training, Special Purpose Operational
Training, Line Operational Evaluation.
(13) AC 120–41, as amended, Criteria for
Operational Approval of Airborne Wind
Shear Alerting and Flight Guidance Systems.
(14) AC 120–45, as amended, Airplane
Flight Training Device Qualification.
(14) AC 120–57, as amended, Surface
Movement Guidance and Control System
(SMGCS).
(15) AC 150/5300–13, as amended, Airport
Design.
(16) AC 150/5340–1, as amended,
Standards for Airport Markings.
(17) AC 150/5340–4, as amended,
Installation Details for Runway Centerline
Touchdown Zone Lighting Systems.
(18) AC 150/5340–19, as amended,
Taxiway Centerline Lighting System.
(19) AC 150/5340–24, as amended,
Runway and Taxiway Edge Lighting System.
(20) AC 150/5345–28, as amended,
Precision Approach Path Indicator (PAPI)
Systems.
(21) International Air Transport
Association document, ‘‘Flight Simulator
Design and Performance Data Requirements,’’
as amended.
(22) AC 25–7, as amended, Flight Test
Guide for Certification of Transport Category
Airplanes.
(23) AC 23–8A, as amended, Flight Test
Guide for Certification of Part 23 Airplanes.
(24) International Civil Aviation
Organization (ICAO) Manual of Criteria for
the Qualification of Flight Simulators, as
amended.
(25) Airplane Flight Simulator Evaluation
Handbook, Volume I, as amended and
Volume II, as amended, The Royal
Aeronautical Society, London, UK.
(26) FAA Publication FAA–S–8081 series
(Practical Test Standards for Airline
Transport Pilot Certificate, Type Ratings,
Commercial Pilot, and Instrument Ratings).
(27) The FAA Aeronautical Information
Manual (AIM). An electronic version of the
AIM is on the Internet at https://www.faa.gov/
atpubs.
(28) Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (ARINC)
document number 436, titled Guidelines For
Electronic Qualification Test Guide (as
amended).
(29) Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (ARINC)
document 610, Guidance for Design and
Integration of Aircraft Avionics Equipment in
Simulators (as amended).
lllllllllllllllllllll
End Information
2. Applicability (§§ 60.1 and 60.2)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.1, Applicability, or to
§ 60.2, Applicability of sponsor rules to
person who are not sponsors and who are
engaged in certain unauthorized activities.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26588
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
3. Definitions (§ 60.3)
See Appendix F of this part for a list of
definitions and abbreviations from part 1,
part 60, and the QPS appendices of part 60.
4. Qualification Performance Standards
(§ 60.4)
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.4, Qualification
Performance Standards.
5. Quality Management System (§ 60.5)
Additional regulatory material and
informational material regarding Quality
Management Systems for FTDs may be found
in Appendix E of this part.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
6. Sponsor Qualification Requirements.
(§ 60.7).
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
a. The intent of the language in § 60.7(b) is
to have a specific FTD, identified by the
sponsor, used at least once in an FAAapproved flight training program for the
airplane simulated during the 12-month
period described. The identification of the
specific FTD may change from one 12-month
period to the next 12-month period as long
as that sponsor sponsors and uses at least one
FTD at least once during the prescribed
period. There is no minimum number of
hours or minimum FTD periods required.
b. The following examples describe
acceptable operational practices:
(1) Example One.
(a) A sponsor is sponsoring a single,
specific FTD for its own use, in its own
facility or elsewhere— this single FTD forms
the basis for the sponsorship. The sponsor
uses that FTD at least once in each 12-month
period in that sponsor’s FAA-approved flight
training program for the airplane simulated.
This 12-month period is established
according to the following schedule:
(i) If the FTD was qualified prior to May
30, 2008, the 12-month period begins on the
date of the first continuing qualification
evaluation conducted in accordance with
§ 60.19 after May 30, 2008, and continues for
each subsequent 12-month period;
(ii) A device qualified on or after May 30,
2008, will be required to undergo an initial
or upgrade evaluation in accordance with
§ 60.15. Once the initial or upgrade
evaluation is complete, the first continuing
qualification evaluation will be conducted
within 6 months. The 12 month continuing
qualification evaluation cycle begins on that
date and continues for each subsequent 12month period.
(b) There is no minimum number of hours
of FTD use required.
(c) The identification of the specific FTD
may change from one 12-month period to the
next 12-month period as long as that sponsor
sponsors and uses at least one FTD at least
once during the prescribed period.
(2) Example Two.
(a) A sponsor sponsors an additional
number of FTDs, in its facility or elsewhere.
Each additionally sponsored FTD must be—
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
(i) Used by the sponsor in the sponsor’s
FAA-approved flight training program for the
airplane simulated (as described in
§ 60.7(d)(1)); or
(ii) Used by another FAA certificate holder
in that other certificate holder’s FAAapproved flight training program for the
airplane simulated (as described in
§ 60.7(d)(1)). This 12-month period is
established in the same manner as in
example one; or
(iii) Provided a statement each year from a
qualified pilot, (after having flown the
airplane, not the subject FTD or another FTD,
during the preceding 12-month period)
stating that the subject FTD’s performance
and handling qualities represent the airplane
(as described in § 60.7(d)(2)). This statement
is provided at least once in each 12-month
period established in the same manner as in
example one.
(b) There is no minimum number of hours
of FTD use required.
(3) Example Three.
(a) A sponsor in New York (in this
example, a Part 142 certificate holder)
establishes ‘‘satellite’’ training centers in
Chicago and Moscow.
(b) The satellite function means that the
Chicago and Moscow centers must operate
under the New York center’s certificate (in
accordance with all of the New York center’s
practices, procedures, and policies; e.g.,
instructor and/or technician training/
checking requirements, record keeping, QMS
program).
(c) All of the FTDs in the Chicago and
Moscow centers could be dry-leased (i.e., the
certificate holder does not have and use
FAA-approved flight training programs for
the FTDs in the Chicago and Moscow
centers) because—
(i) Each FTD in the Chicago center and
each FTD in the Moscow center is used at
least once each 12-month period by another
FAA certificate holder in that other
certificate holder’s FAA-approved flight
training program for the airplane (as
described in § 60.7(d)(1)); or
(ii) A statement is obtained from a
qualified pilot (having flown the airplane,
not the subject FTD or another FTD during
the preceding 12-month period) stating that
the performance and handling qualities of
each FTD in the Chicago and Moscow centers
represents the airplane (as described in
§ 60.7(d)(2)).
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
7. Additional Responsibilities of the Sponsor
(§ 60.9)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
The phrase ‘‘as soon as practicable’’ in
§ 60.9(a) means without unnecessarily
disrupting or delaying beyond a reasonable
time the training, evaluation, or experience
being conducted in the FTD.
8. FTD Use (§ 60.11)
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.11, FTD use.
PO 00000
Frm 00112
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
9. FTD Objective Data Requirements
(§ 60.13)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. Flight test data used to validate FTD
performance and handling qualities must
have been gathered in accordance with a
flight test program containing the following:
(1) A flight test plan consisting of:
(a) The maneuvers and procedures
required for aircraft certification and
simulation programming and validation.
(b) For each maneuver or procedure—
(i) The procedures and control input the
flight test pilot and/or engineer used.
(ii) The atmospheric and environmental
conditions.
(iii) The initial flight conditions.
(iv) The airplane configuration, including
weight and center of gravity.
(v) The data to be gathered.
(vi) All other information necessary to
recreate the flight test conditions in the FTD.
(2) Appropriately qualified flight test
personnel.
(3) An understanding of the accuracy of the
data to be gathered using appropriate
alternative data sources, procedures, and
instrumentation that is traceable to a
recognized standard as described in
Attachment 2, Table B2F of this appendix.
(4) Appropriate and sufficient data
acquisition equipment or system(s),
including appropriate data reduction and
analysis methods and techniques, acceptable
to the FAA’s Aircraft Certification Service.
b. The data, regardless of source, must be
presented:
(1) In a format that supports the FTD
validation process;
(2) In a manner that is clearly readable and
annotated correctly and completely;
(3) With resolution sufficient to determine
compliance with the tolerances set forth in
Attachment 2, Table B2A, Appendix B;
(4) With any necessary guidance
information provided; and
(5) Without alteration, adjustments, or bias.
Data may be corrected to address known data
calibration errors provided that an
explanation of the methods used to correct
the errors appears in the QTG. The corrected
data may be re-scaled, digitized, or otherwise
manipulated to fit the desired presentation.
c. After completion of any additional flight
test, a flight test report must be submitted in
support of the validation data. The report
must contain sufficient data and rationale to
support qualification of the FTD at the level
requested.
d. As required by § 60.13(f), the sponsor
must notify the NSPM when it becomes
aware that an addition to or a revision of the
flight related data or airplane systems related
data is available if this data is used to
program and operate a qualified FTD. The
data referred to in this sub-section are those
data that are used to validate the
performance, handling qualities, or other
characteristics of the aircraft, including data
related to any relevant changes occurring
after the type certification is issued. The
sponsor must—
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
(1) Within 10 calendar days, notify the
NSPM of the existence of this data; and
(2) Within 45 calendar days, notify the
NSPM of—
(i) The schedule to incorporate this data
into the FTD; or
(ii) The reason for not incorporating this
data into the FTD.
e. In those cases where the objective test
results authorize a ‘‘snapshot test’’ or a
‘‘series of snapshot test results’’ in lieu of a
time-history result, the sponsor or other data
provider must ensure that a steady state
condition exists at the instant of time
captured by the ‘‘snapshot.’’ The steady state
condition must exist from 4 seconds prior to,
through 1 second following, the instant of
time captured by the snap shot.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
f. The FTD sponsor is encouraged to
maintain a liaison with the manufacturer of
the aircraft being simulated (or with the
holder of the aircraft type certificate for the
aircraft being simulated if the manufacturer
is no longer in business), and if appropriate,
with the person having supplied the aircraft
data package for the FTD in order to facilitate
the notification described in this paragraph.
g. It is the intent of the NSPM that for new
aircraft entering service, at a point well in
advance of preparation of the QTG, the
sponsor should submit to the NSPM for
approval, a descriptive document (see
Appendix A, Table A2C, Sample Validation
Data Roadmap for Airplanes) containing the
plan for acquiring the validation data,
including data sources. This document
should clearly identify sources of data for all
required tests, a description of the validity of
these data for a specific engine type and
thrust rating configuration, and the revision
levels of all avionics affecting the
performance or flying qualities of the aircraft.
Additionally, this document should provide
other information such as the rationale or
explanation for cases where data or data
parameters are missing, instances where
engineering simulation data are used, or
where flight test methods require further
explanations. It should also provide a brief
narrative describing the cause and effect of
any deviation from data requirements. The
aircraft manufacturer may provide this
document.
h. There is no requirement for any flight
test data supplier to submit a flight test plan
or program prior to gathering flight test data.
However, the NSPM notes that inexperienced
data gatherers often provide data that is
irrelevant, improperly marked, or lacking
adequate justification for selection. Other
problems include inadequate information
regarding initial conditions or test
maneuvers. The NSPM has been forced to
refuse these data submissions as validation
data for an FTD evaluation. It is for this
reason that the NSPM recommends that any
data supplier not previously experienced in
this area review the data necessary for
programming and for validating the
performance of the FTD and discuss the
flight test plan anticipated for acquiring such
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
data with the NSPM well in advance of
commencing the flight tests.
i. The NSPM will consider, on a case-bycase basis, whether to approve supplemental
validation data derived from flight data
recording systems such as a Quick Access
Recorder or Flight Data Recorder.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
10. Special Equipment and Personnel
Requirements for Qualification of the FTD
(§& 60.14).
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
a. In the event that the NSPM determines
that special equipment or specifically
qualified persons will be required to conduct
an evaluation, the NSPM will make every
attempt to notify the sponsor at least one (1)
week, but in no case less than 72 hours, in
advance of the evaluation. Examples of
special equipment include flight control
measurement devices, accelerometers, or
oscilloscopes. Examples of specially
qualified personnel include individuals
specifically qualified to install or use any
special equipment when its use is required.
b. Examples of a special evaluation include
an evaluation conducted after: An FTD is
moved; at the request of the TPAA; or as a
result of comments received from users of the
FTD that raise questions about the continued
qualification or use of the FTD.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
11. Initial (and Upgrade) Qualification
Requirements (§ 60.15).
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirement
a. In order to be qualified at a particular
qualification level, the FTD must:
(1) Meet the general requirements listed in
Attachment 1 of this appendix;
(2) Meet the objective testing requirements
listed in Attachment 2 of this appendix
(Level 4 FTDs do not require objective tests);
and
(3) Satisfactorily accomplish the subjective
tests listed in Attachment 3 of this appendix.
b. The request described in § 60.15(a) must
include all of the following:
(1) A statement that the FTD meets all of
the applicable provisions of this part and all
applicable provisions of the QPS.
(2) A confirmation that the sponsor will
forward to the NSPM the statement described
in § 60.15(b) in such time as to be received
no later than 5 business days prior to the
scheduled evaluation and may be forwarded
to the NSPM via traditional or electronic
means.
(3) Except for a Level 4 FTD, a QTG,
acceptable to the NSPM, that includes all of
the following:
(a) Objective data obtained from aircraft
testing or another approved source.
(b) Correlating objective test results
obtained from the performance of the FTD as
prescribed in the appropriate QPS.
(c) The result of FTD subjective tests
prescribed in the appropriate QPS.
PO 00000
Frm 00113
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26589
(d) A description of the equipment
necessary to perform the evaluation for initial
qualification and the continuing qualification
evaluations.
c. The QTG described in paragraph a(3) of
this section, must provide the documented
proof of compliance with the FTD objective
tests in Attachment 2, Table B2A of this
appendix.
d. The QTG is prepared and submitted by
the sponsor, or the sponsor?s agent on behalf
of the sponsor, to the NSPM for review and
approval, and must include, for each
objective test:
(1) Parameters, tolerances, and flight
conditions;
(2) Pertinent and complete instructions for
conducting automatic and manual tests;
(3) A means of comparing the FTD test
results to the objective data;
(4) Any other information as necessary to
assist in the evaluation of the test results;
(5) Other information appropriate to the
qualification level of the FTD.
e. The QTG described in paragraphs (a)(3)
and (b) of this section, must include the
following:
(1) A QTG cover page with sponsor and
FAA approval signature blocks (see
Attachment 4, Figure B4C, of this appendix,
for a sample QTG cover page).
(2) A continuing qualification evaluation
requirements page. This page will be used by
the NSPM to establish and record the
frequency with which continuing
qualification evaluations must be conducted
and any subsequent changes that may be
determined by the NSPM in accordance with
§ 60.19. See Attachment 4, Figure B4G, of
this appendix, for a sample Continuing
Qualification Evaluation Requirements page.
(3) An FTD information page that provides
the information listed in this paragraph, if
applicable (see Attachment 4, Figure B4B, of
this appendix, for a sample FTD information
page). For convertible FTDs, the sponsor
must submit a separate page for each
configuration of the FTD.
(a) The sponsor’s FTD identification
number or code.
(b) The airplane model and series being
simulated.
(c) The aerodynamic data revision number
or reference.
(d) The source of the basic aerodynamic
model and the aerodynamic coefficient data
used to modify the basic model.
(e) The engine model(s) and its data
revision number or reference.
(f) The flight control data revision number
or reference.
(g) The flight management system
identification and revision level.
(h) The FTD model and manufacturer.
(i) The date of FTD manufacture.
(j) The FTD computer identification.
(k) The visual system model and
manufacturer, including display type.
(l) The motion system type and
manufacturer, including degrees of freedom.
(4) A Table of Contents.
(5) A log of revisions and a list of effective
pages.
(6) List of all relevant data references.
(7) A glossary of terms and symbols used
(including sign conventions and units).
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26590
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
(8) Statements of compliance and
capability (SOCs) with certain requirements.
(9) Recording procedures or equipment
required to accomplish the objective tests.
(10) The following information for each
objective test designated in Attachment 2 of
this appendix, as applicable to the
qualification level sought:
(a) Name of the test.
(b) Objective of the test.
(c) Initial conditions.
(d) Manual test procedures.
(e) Automatic test procedures (if
applicable).
(f) Method for evaluating FTD objective test
results.
(g) List of all relevant parameters driven or
constrained during the automatic test(s).
(h) List of all relevant parameters driven or
constrained during the manual test(s).
(i) Tolerances for relevant parameters.
(j) Source of Validation Data (document
and page number).
(k) Copy of the Validation Data (if located
in a separate binder, a cross reference for the
identification and page number for pertinent
data location must be provided).
(l) FTD Objective Test Results as obtained
by the sponsor. Each test result must reflect
the date completed and must be clearly
labeled as a product of the device being
tested.
f. A convertible FTD is addressed as a
separate FTD for each model and series
airplane to which it will be converted and for
the FAA qualification level sought. The
NSPM will conduct an evaluation for each
configuration. If a sponsor seeks qualification
for two or more models of an airplane type
using a convertible FTD, the sponsor must
provide a QTG for each airplane model, or a
QTG for the first airplane model and a
supplement to that QTG for each additional
airplane model. The NSPM will conduct
evaluations for each airplane model.
g. The form and manner of presentation of
objective test results in the QTG must
include the following:
(1) The sponsor’s FTD test results must be
recorded in a manner acceptable to the
NSPM, that allows easy comparison of the
FTD test results to the validation data (e.g.,
use of a multi-channel recorder, line printer,
cross plotting, overlays, transparencies).
(2) FTD results must be labeled using
terminology common to airplane parameters
as opposed to computer software
identifications.
(3) Validation data documents included in
a QTG may be photographically reduced only
if such reduction will not alter the graphic
scaling or cause difficulties in scale
interpretation or resolution.
(4) Scaling on graphical presentations must
provide the resolution necessary to evaluate
the parameters shown in Attachment 2, Table
B2A of this appendix.
(5) Tests involving time histories, data
sheets (or transparencies thereof) and FTD
test results must be clearly marked with
appropriate reference points to ensure an
accurate comparison between FTD and
airplane with respect to time. Time histories
recorded via a line printer are to be clearly
identified for cross-plotting on the airplane
data. Over-plots may not obscure the
reference data.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
h. The sponsor may elect to complete the
QTG objective and subjective tests at the
manufacturer’s facility or at the sponsor’s
training facility. If the tests are conducted at
the manufacturer’s facility, the sponsor must
repeat at least one-third of the tests at the
sponsor’s training facility in order to
substantiate FTD performance. The QTG
must be clearly annotated to indicate when
and where each test was accomplished. Tests
conducted at the manufacturer’s facility and
at the sponsor’s training facility must be
conducted after the FTD is assembled with
systems and sub-systems functional and
operating in an interactive manner. The test
results must be submitted to the NSPM.
i. The sponsor must maintain a copy of the
MQTG at the FTD location.
j. All FTDs for which the initial
qualification is conducted after May 30,
2014, must have an electronic MQTG
(eMQTG) including all objective data
obtained from airplane testing, or another
approved source (reformatted or digitized),
together with correlating objective test results
obtained from the performance of the FTD
(reformatted or digitized) as prescribed in
this appendix. The eMQTG must also contain
the general FTD performance or
demonstration results (reformatted or
digitized) prescribed in this appendix, and a
description of the equipment necessary to
perform the initial qualification evaluation
and the continuing qualification evaluations.
The eMQTG must include the original
validation data used to validate FTD
performance and handling qualities in either
the original digitized format from the data
supplier or an electronic scan of the original
time-history plots that were provided by the
data supplier. A copy of the eMQTG must be
provided to the NSPM.
k. All other FTDs (not covered in
subparagraph ‘‘j’’) must have an electronic
copy of the MQTG by and after May 30, 2014.
An electronic copy of the copy of the MQTG
must be provided to the NSPM. This may be
provided by an electronic scan presented in
a Portable Document File (PDF), or similar
format acceptable to the NSPM.
l. During the initial (or upgrade)
qualification evaluation conducted by the
NSPM, the sponsor must also provide a
person knowledgeable about the operation of
the aircraft and the operation of the FTD.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
m. Only those FTDs that are sponsored by
a certificate holder as defined in Appendix
F will be evaluated by the NSPM. However,
other FTD evaluations may be conducted on
a case-by-case basis as the Administrator
deems appropriate, but only in accordance
with applicable agreements.
n. The NSPM will conduct an evaluation
for each configuration, and each FTD must be
evaluated as completely as possible. To
ensure a thorough and uniform evaluation,
each FTD is subjected to the general FTD
requirements in Attachment 1 of this
appendix, the objective tests listed in
Attachment 2 of this appendix, and the
subjective tests listed in Attachment 3 of this
PO 00000
Frm 00114
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
appendix. The evaluations described herein
will include, but not necessarily be limited
to the following:
(1) Airplane responses, including
longitudinal and lateral-directional control
responses (see Attachment 2 of this
appendix);
(2) Performance in authorized portions of
the simulated airplane’s operating envelope,
to include tasks evaluated by the NSPM in
the areas of surface operations, takeoff, climb,
cruise, descent, approach and landing, as
well as abnormal and emergency operations
(see Attachment 2 of this appendix);
(3) Control checks (see Attachment 1 and
Attachment 2 of this appendix);
(4) Flight deck configuration (see
Attachment 1 of this appendix);
(5) Pilot, flight engineer, and instructor
station functions checks (see Attachment 1
and Attachment 3 of this appendix);
(6) Airplane systems and sub-systems (as
appropriate) as compared to the airplane
simulated (see Attachment 1 and Attachment
3 of this appendix);
(7) FTD systems and sub-systems,
including force cueing (motion), visual, and
aural (sound) systems, as appropriate (see
Attachment 1 and Attachment 2 of this
appendix); and
(8) Certain additional requirements,
depending upon the qualification level
sought, including equipment or
circumstances that may become hazardous to
the occupants. The sponsor may be subject to
Occupational Safety and Health
Administration requirements.
o. The NSPM administers the objective and
subjective tests, which includes an
examination of functions. The tests include
a qualitative assessment of the FTD by an
NSP pilot. The NSP evaluation team leader
may assign other qualified personnel to assist
in accomplishing the functions examination
and/or the objective and subjective tests
performed during an evaluation when
required.
(1) Objective tests provide a basis for
measuring and evaluating FTD performance
and determining compliance with the
requirements of this part.
(2) Subjective tests provide a basis for:
(a) Evaluating the capability of the FTD to
perform over a typical utilization period;
(b) Determining that the FTD satisfactorily
simulates each required task;
(c) Verifying correct operation of the FTD
controls, instruments, and systems; and
(d) Demonstrating compliance with the
requirements of this part.
p. The tolerances for the test parameters
listed in Attachment 2 of this appendix
reflect the range of tolerances acceptable to
the NSPM for FTD validation and are not to
be confused with design tolerances specified
for FTD manufacture. In making decisions
regarding tests and test results, the NSPM
relies on the use of operational and
engineering judgment in the application of
data (including consideration of the way in
which the flight test was flown and way the
data was gathered and applied), data
presentations, and the applicable tolerances
for each test.
q. In addition to the scheduled continuing
qualification evaluation, each FTD is subject
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
to evaluations conducted by the NSPM at any
time without prior notification to the
sponsor. Such evaluations would be
accomplished in a normal manner (i.e.,
requiring exclusive use of the FTD for the
conduct of objective and subjective tests and
an examination of functions) if the FTD is not
being used for flight crewmember training,
testing, or checking. However, if the FTD
were being used, the evaluation would be
conducted in a non-exclusive manner. This
non-exclusive evaluation will be conducted
by the FTD evaluator accompanying the
check airman, instructor, Aircrew Program
Designee (APD), or FAA inspector aboard the
FTD along with the student(s) and observing
the operation of the FTD during the training,
testing, or checking activities.
r. Problems with objective test results are
handled as follows:
(1) If a problem with an objective test result
is detected by the NSP evaluation team
during an evaluation, the test may be
repeated or the QTG may be amended.
(2) If it is determined that the results of an
objective test do not support the qualification
level requested but do support a lower level,
the NSPM may qualify the FTD at a lower
level. For example, if a Level 6 evaluation is
requested, but the FTD fails to meet the spiral
stability test tolerances, it could be qualified
at Level 5.
s. After an FTD is successfully evaluated,
the NSPM issues an SOQ to the sponsor, the
NSPM recommends the FTD to the TPAA,
who will approve the FTD for use in a flight
training program. The SOQ will be issued at
the satisfactory conclusion of the initial or
continuing qualification evaluation and will
list the tasks for which the FTD is qualified,
referencing the tasks described in Table B1B
in Attachment 1 of this appendix. However,
it is the sponsor’s responsibility to obtain
TPAA approval prior to using the FTD in an
FAA-approved flight training program.
t. Under normal circumstances, the NSPM
establishes a date for the initial or upgrade
evaluation within ten (10) working days after
determining that a complete QTG is
acceptable. Unusual circumstances may
warrant establishing an evaluation date
before this determination is made. A sponsor
may schedule an evaluation date as early as
6 months in advance. However, there may be
a delay of 45 days or more in rescheduling
and completing the evaluation if the sponsor
is unable to meet the scheduled date. See
Attachment 4, Figure B4A, Sample Request
for Initial, Upgrade, or Reinstatement
Evaluation, of this appendix.
u. The numbering system used for
objective test results in the QTG should
closely follow the numbering system set out
in Attachment 2, FTD Objective Tests, Table
B2A, of this appendix.
v. Contact the NSPM or visit the NSPM
Web site for additional information regarding
the preferred qualifications of pilots used to
meet the requirements of § 60.15(d).
w. Examples of the exclusions for which
the FTD might not have been subjectively
tested by the sponsor or the NSPM and for
which qualification might not be sought or
granted, as described in § 60.15(g)(6), include
engine out maneuvers or circling approaches.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
12. Additional Qualifications for Currently
Qualified FTDs (§ 60.16).
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.16, Additional
Qualifications for a Currently Qualified FTD.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
13. Previously Qualified FTDs (§ 60.17).
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. In instances where a sponsor plans to
remove an FTD from active status for a
period of less than two years, the following
procedures apply:
(1) The NSPM must be notified in writing
and the notification must include an estimate
of the period that the FTD will be inactive;
(2) Continuing Qualification evaluations
will not be scheduled during the inactive
period;
(3) The NSPM will remove the FTD from
the list of qualified FTDs on a mutually
established date not later than the date on
which the first missed continuing
qualification evaluation would have been
scheduled;
(4) Before the FTD is restored to qualified
status, it must be evaluated by the NSPM.
The evaluation content and the time required
to accomplish the evaluation is based on the
number of continuing qualification
evaluations and sponsor-conducted quarterly
inspections missed during the period of
inactivity.
(5) The sponsor must notify the NSPM of
any changes to the original scheduled time
out of service;
b. FTDs qualified prior to May 30, 2008,
and replacement FTD systems, are not
required to meet the general FTD
requirements, the objective test requirements,
and the subjective test requirements of
Attachments 1, 2, and 3 of this appendix as
long as the FTD continues to meet the test
requirements contained in the MQTG
developed under the original qualification
basis.
c. [Reserved]
d. FTDs qualified prior to May 30, 2008,
may be updated. If an evaluation is deemed
appropriate or necessary by the NSPM after
such an update, the evaluation will not
require an evaluation to standards beyond
those against which the FTD was originally
qualified.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
e. Other certificate holders or persons
desiring to use an FTD may contract with
FTD sponsors to use FTDs previously
qualified at a particular level for an airplane
type and approved for use within an FAAapproved flight training program. Such FTDs
are not required to undergo an additional
qualification process, except as described in
§ 60.16.
f. Each FTD user must obtain approval
from the appropriate TPAA to use any FTD
in an FAA-approved flight training program.
g. The intent of the requirement listed in
§ 60.17(b), for each FTD to have an SOQ
PO 00000
Frm 00115
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26591
within 6 years, is to have the availability of
that statement (including the configuration
list and the limitations to authorizations) to
provide a complete picture of the FTD
inventory regulated by the FAA. The
issuance of the statement will not require any
additional evaluation or require any
adjustment to the evaluation basis for the
FTD.
h. Downgrading of an FTD is a permanent
change in qualification level and will
necessitate the issuance of a revised SOQ to
reflect the revised qualification level, as
appropriate. If a temporary restriction is
placed on an FTD because of a missing,
malfunctioning, or inoperative component or
on-going repairs, the restriction is not a
permanent change in qualification level.
Instead, the restriction is temporary and is
removed when the reason for the restriction
has been resolved.
i. The NSPM will determine the evaluation
criteria for an FTD that has been removed
from active status for a prolonged period. The
criteria will be based on the number of
continuing qualification evaluations and
quarterly inspections missed during the
period of inactivity. For example, if the FTD
were out of service for a 1 year period, it
would be necessary to complete the entire
QTG, since all of the quarterly evaluations
would have been missed. The NSPM will
also consider how the FTD was stored,
whether parts were removed from the FTD
and whether the FTD was disassembled.
j. The FTD will normally be requalified
using the FAA-approved MQTG and the
criteria that was in effect prior to its removal
from qualification. However, inactive periods
of 2 years or more will require requalification under the standards in effect
and current at the time of requalification.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
14. Inspection, Continuing Qualification,
Evaluation, and Maintenance Requirements
(§ 60.19).
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirement
a. The sponsor must conduct a minimum
of four evenly spaced inspections throughout
the year. The objective test sequence and
content of each inspection in this sequence
must be developed by the sponsor and must
be acceptable to the NSPM.
b. The description of the functional
preflight check must be contained in the
sponsor’s QMS.
c. Record ‘‘functional preflight’’ in the FTD
discrepancy log book or other acceptable
location, including any item found to be
missing, malfunctioning, or inoperative.
d. During the continuing qualification
evaluation conducted by the NSPM, the
sponsor must also provide a person
knowledgeable about the operation of the
aircraft and the operation of the FTD.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
e. The sponsor’s test sequence and the
content of each quarterly inspection required
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26592
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
in § 60.19(a)(1) should include a balance and
a mix from the objective test requirement
areas listed as follows:
(1) Performance.
(2) Handling qualities.
(3) Motion system (where appropriate).
(4) Visual system (where appropriate).
(5) Sound system (where appropriate).
(6) Other FTD systems.
f. If the NSP evaluator plans to accomplish
specific tests during a normal continuing
qualification evaluation that requires the use
of special equipment or technicians, the
sponsor will be notified as far in advance of
the evaluation as practical; but not less than
72 hours. Examples of such tests include
latencies, control sweeps, or motion or visual
system tests.
g. The continuing qualification evaluations
described in § 60.19(b) will normally require
4 hours of FTD time. However, flexibility is
necessary to address abnormal situations or
situations involving aircraft with additional
levels of complexity (e.g., computer
controlled aircraft). The sponsor should
anticipate that some tests may require
additional time. The continuing qualification
evaluations will consist of the following:
(1) Review of the results of the quarterly
inspections conducted by the sponsor since
the last scheduled continuing qualification
evaluation.
(2) A selection of approximately 8 to 15
objective tests from the MQTG that provide
an adequate opportunity to evaluate the
performance of the FTD. The tests chosen
will be performed either automatically or
manually and should be able to be conducted
within approximately one-third (1/3) of the
allotted FTD time.
(3) A subjective evaluation of the FTD to
perform a representative sampling of the
tasks set out in attachment 3 of this
appendix. This portion of the evaluation
should take approximately two-thirds (2/3) of
the allotted FTD time.
(4) An examination of the functions of the
FTD may include the motion system, visual
system, sound system as applicable,
instructor operating station, and the normal
functions and simulated malfunctions of the
airplane systems. This examination is
normally accomplished simultaneously with
the subjective evaluation requirements.
h. The requirement established in
§ 60.19(b)(4) regarding the frequency of
NSPM-conducted continuing qualification
evaluations for each FTD is typically 12
months. However, the establishment and
satisfactory implementation of an approved
QMS for a sponsor will provide a basis for
adjusting the frequency of evaluations to
exceed 12-month intervals.
15. Logging FTD Discrepancies (§ 60.20)
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.20. Logging FTD
Discrepancies.
16. Interim Qualification of FTDs for New
Airplane Types or Models (§ 60.21)
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.21, Interim
Qualification of FTDs for New Airplane
Types or Models.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
17. Modifications to FTDs (§ 60.23)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. The notification described in
§60.23(c)(2) must include a complete
description of the planned modification, with
a description of the operational and
engineering effect the proposed modification
will have on the operation of the FTD and
the results that are expected with the
modification incorporated.
b. Prior to using the modified FTD:
(1) All the applicable objective tests
completed with the modification
incorporated, including any necessary
updates to the MQTG (e.g., accomplishment
of FSTD Directives) must be acceptable to the
NSPM; and
(2) The sponsor must provide the NSPM
with a statement signed by the MR that the
factors listed in § 60.15(b) are addressed by
the appropriate personnel as described in
that section.
19. Automatic Loss of Qualification and
Procedures for Restoration of Qualification
(§ 60.27)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
If the sponsor provides a plan for how the
FTD will be maintained during its out-ofservice period (e.g., periodic exercise of
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical
systems; routine replacement of hydraulic
fluid; control of the environmental factors in
which the FTD is to be maintained) there is
a greater likelihood that the NSPM will be
able to determine the amount of testing that
required for requalification.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
20. Other Losses of Qualification and
Procedures for Restoration of Qualification
(§ 60.29)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
c. FSTD Directives are considered
modification of an FTD. See Attachment 4 of
this appendix for a sample index of effective
FSTD Directives.
If the sponsor provides a plan for how the
FTD will be maintained during its out-ofservice period (e.g., periodic exercise of
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical
systems; routine replacement of hydraulic
fluid; control of the environmental factors in
which the FTD is to be maintained) there is
a greater likelihood that the NSPM will be
able to determine the amount of testing that
required for requalification.
End Information
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
lllllllllllllllllllll
18. Operation with Missing, Malfunctioning,
or Inoperative Components (§ 60.25)
21. Recordkeeping and Reporting (§ 60.31)
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
Begin Information
a. The sponsor’s responsibility with respect
to § 60.25(a) is satisfied when the sponsor
fairly and accurately advises the user of the
current status of an FTD, including any
missing, malfunctioning, or inoperative
(MMI) component(s).
b. It is the responsibility of the instructor,
check airman, or representative of the
administrator conducting training, testing, or
checking to exercise reasonable and prudent
judgment to determine if any MMI
component is necessary for the satisfactory
completion of a specific maneuver,
procedure, or task.
c. If the 29th or 30th day of the 30-day
period described in 60.25(b) is on a Saturday,
a Sunday, or a holiday, the FAA will extend
the deadline until the next business day.
d. In accordance with the authorization
described in § 60.25(b), the sponsor may
develop a discrepancy prioritizing system to
accomplish repairs based on the level of
impact on the capability of the FTD. Repairs
having a larger impact on the FTD’s ability
to provide the required training, evaluation,
or flight experience will have a higher
priority for repair or replacement.
a. FTD modifications can include hardware
or software changes. For FTD modifications
involving software programming changes, the
record required by § 60.31(a)(2) must consist
of the name of the aircraft system software,
aerodynamic model, or engine model change,
the date of the change, a summary of the
change, and the reason for the change.
b. If a coded form for record keeping is
used, it must provide for the preservation
and retrieval of information with appropriate
security or controls to prevent the
inappropriate alteration of such records after
the fact.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
22. Applications, Logbooks, Reports, and
Records: Fraud, Falsification, or Incorrect
Statements (§ 60.33)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.33, Applications,
Logbooks, Reports, and Records: Fraud,
Falsification, or Incorrect Statements.
End Information
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
lllllllllllllllllllll
PO 00000
Frm 00116
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23. [Reserved]
24. Levels of FTD.
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
a. The following is a general description of
each level of FTD. Detailed standards and
tests for the various levels of FTDs are fully
defined in Attachments 1 through 3 of this
appendix.
(1) Level 4. A device that may have an
open airplane-specific flight deck area, or an
enclosed airplane-specific flight deck and at
least one operating system. Air/ground logic
is required (no aerodynamic programming
required). All displays may be flat/LCD panel
representations or actual representations of
displays in the aircraft. All controls,
switches, and knobs may be touch sensitive
activation (not capable of manual
manipulation of the flight controls) or may
physically replicate the aircraft in control
operation.
(2) Level 5. A device that may have an
open airplane-specific flight deck area, or an
enclosed airplane-specific flight deck;
generic aerodynamic programming; at least
one operating system; and control loading
that is representative of the simulated
airplane only at an approach speed and
configuration. All displays may be flat/LCD
panel representations or actual
representations of displays in the aircraft.
Primary and secondary flight controls (e.g.,
rudder, aileron, elevator, flaps, spoilers/
speed brakes, engine controls, landing gear,
nosewheel steering, trim, brakes) must be
physical controls. All other controls,
switches, and knobs may be touch sensitive
activation.
(3) Level 6. A device that has an enclosed
airplane-specific flight deck; airplanespecific aerodynamic programming; all
applicable airplane systems operating;
control loading that is representative of the
simulated airplane throughout its ground and
flight envelope; and significant sound
representation. All displays may be flat/LCD
panel representations or actual
representations of displays in the aircraft, but
all controls, switches, and knobs must
physically replicate the aircraft in control
operation.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
25. FTD Qualification on the Basis of a
Bilateral Aviation Safety Agreement (BASA)
(§ 60.37)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.37, FTD Qualification
on the Basis of a Bilateral Aviation Safety
Agreement (BASA).
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
Attachment 1 to Appendix B to Part 60—
General FTD REQUIREMENTS
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
1. Requirements
a. Certain requirements included in this
appendix must be supported with an SOC as
defined in Appendix F, which may include
objective and subjective tests. The
requirements for SOCs are indicated in the
‘‘General FTD Requirements’’ column in
Table B1A of this appendix.
b. Table B1A describes the requirements
for the indicated level of FTD. Many devices
include operational systems or functions that
exceed the requirements outlined in this
section. In any event, all systems will be
tested and evaluated in accordance with this
appendix to ensure proper operation.
26593
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
2. Discussion
a. This attachment describes the general
requirements for qualifying Level 4 through
Level 6 FTDs. The sponsor should also
consult the objectives tests in Attachment 2
of this appendix and the examination of
functions and subjective tests listed in
Attachment 3 of this appendix to determine
the complete requirements for a specific level
FTD.
b. The material contained in this
attachment is divided into the following
categories:
(1) General Flight deck Configuration.
(2) Programming.
(3) Equipment Operation.
(4) Equipment and facilities for instructor/
evaluator functions.
(5) Motion System.
(6) Visual System.
(7) Sound System.
c. Table B1A provides the standards for the
General FTD Requirements.
d. Table B1B provides the tasks that the
sponsor will examine to determine whether
the FTD satisfactorily meets the requirements
for flight crew training, testing, and
experience, and provides the tasks for which
the simulator may be qualified.
e. Table B1C provides the functions that an
instructor/check airman must be able to
control in the simulator.
f. It is not required that all of the tasks that
appear on the List of Qualified Tasks (part of
the SOQ) be accomplished during the initial
or continuing qualification evaluation.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
TABLE B1A.—MINIMUM FTD REQUIREMENTS
QPS Requirements
Information
FTD level
Entry
No.
General FTD requirements
Notes
4
5
6
1. General Flight Deck Configuration
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1.a. ......
The FTD must have a flight deck that is a replica of the
airplane simulated with controls, equipment, observable
flight deck indicators, circuit breakers, and bulkheads
properly located, functionally accurate and replicating
the airplane. The direction of movement of controls and
switches must be identical to that in the airplane. Pilot
seat(s) must afford the capability for the occupant to be
able to achieve the design ‘‘eye position.’’ Equipment
for the operation of the flight deck windows must be included, but the actual windows need not be operable.
Fire axes, extinguishers, and spare light bulbs must be
available in the flight simulator, but may be relocated to
a suitable location as near as practical to the original
position. Fire axes, landing gear pins, and any similar
purpose instruments need only be represented in silhouette.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00117
Fmt 4701
X
Sfmt 4700
For FTD purposes, the flight deck consists of all that
space forward of a cross section of the fuselage at the
most extreme aft setting of the pilots’ seats including
additional, required flight crewmember duty stations and
those required bulkheads aft of the pilot seats. For clarification, bulkheads containing only items such as landing gear pin storage compartments, fire axes and extinguishers, spare light bulbs, aircraft documents pouches
are not considered essential and may be omitted.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26594
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE B1A.—MINIMUM FTD REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
FTD level
Entry
No.
General FTD requirements
1.b. ......
The FTD must have equipment (e.g., instruments, panels,
systems, circuit breakers, and controls) simulated sufficiently for the authorized training/checking events to be
accomplished. The installed equipment must be located
in a spatially correct location and may be in a flight
deck or an open flight deck area. Additional equipment
required for the authorized training/checking events
must be available in the FTD, but may be located in a
suitable location as near as practical to the spatially correct position. Actuation of equipment must replicate the
appropriate function in the airplane. Fire axes, landing
gear pins, and any similar purpose instruments need
only be represented in silhouette.
Notes
4
5
X
6
X
2. Programming
2.a. ......
The FTD must provide the proper effect of aerodynamic
changes for the combinations of drag and thrust normally encountered in flight. This must include the effect
of change in airplane attitude, thrust, drag, altitude, temperature, and configuration.
Level 6 additionally requires the effects of changes in
gross weight and center of gravity.
Level 5 requires only generic aerodynamic programming.
An SOC is required.
2.b. ......
The FTD must have the computer (analog or digital) capability (i.e., capacity, accuracy, resolution, and dynamic
response) needed to meet the qualification level sought.
An SOC is required.
2.c. ......
X
Relative responses of the flight deck instruments must be
measured by latency tests, or transport delay tests, and
may not exceed 300 milliseconds. The instruments must
respond to abrupt input at the pilot’s position within the
allotted time, but not before the time when the airplane
responds under the same conditions.
X
X
X
X
X
X
The intent is to verify that the FTD provides instrument
cues that are, within the stated time delays, like the airplane responses. For airplane response, acceleration in
the appropriate, corresponding rotational axis is preferred. Additional information regarding Latency and
Transport Delay testing may be found in Appendix A,
Attachment 2, paragraph 15.
• Latency: The FTD instrument and, if applicable, the motion system and the visual system response must not
be prior to that time when the airplane responds and
may respond up to 300 milliseconds after that time
under the same conditions.
• Transport Delay: As an alternative to the Latency requirement, a transport delay objective test may be used
to demonstrate that the FTD system does not exceed
the specified limit. The sponsor must measure all the
delay encountered by a step signal migrating from the
pilot’s control through all the simulation software modules in the correct order, using a handshaking protocol,
finally through the normal output interfaces to the instrument display and, if applicable, the motion system, and
the visual system.
3. Equipment Operation
All relevant instrument indications involved in the simulation of the airplane must automatically respond to control movement or external disturbances to the simulated
airplane; e.g., turbulence or winds.
X
X
3.b. ......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
3.a. ......
Navigation equipment must be installed and operate within
the tolerances applicable for the airplane.
X
X
Level 6 must also include communication equipment
(inter-phone and air/ground) like that in the airplane
and, if appropriate to the operation being conducted, an
oxygen mask microphone system.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00118
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26595
TABLE B1A.—MINIMUM FTD REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
FTD level
Entry
No.
General FTD requirements
Notes
4
5
6
Level 5 need have only that navigation equipment necessary to fly an instrument approach.
3.c. ......
Installed systems must simulate the applicable airplane
system operation, both on the ground and in flight. Installed systems must be operative to the extent that applicable normal, abnormal, and emergency operating
procedures included in the sponsor’s training programs
can be accomplished.
Level 6 must simulate all applicable airplane flight, navigation, and systems operation.
Level 5 must have at least functional flight and navigational controls, displays, and instrumentation.
Level 4 must have at least one airplane system installed
and functional.
X
X
X
3.d. ......
The lighting environment for panels and instruments must
be sufficient for the operation being conducted.
X
X
X
3.e. ......
The FTD must provide control forces and control travel
that correspond to the airplane being simulated. Control
forces must react in the same manner as in the airplane
under the same flight conditions.
3.f. .......
The FTD must provide control forces and control travel of
sufficient precision to manually fly an instrument approach.
Back-lighted panels and instruments may be installed but
are not required.
X
X
4. Instructor or Evaluator Facilities
4.a. ......
In addition to the flight crewmember stations, suitable
seating arrangements for an instructor/check airman
and FAA Inspector must be available. These seats must
provide adequate view of crewmember’s panel(s).
X
X
X
These seats need not be a replica of an aircraft seat and
may be as simple as an office chair placed in an appropriate position.
4.b. ......
The FTD must have instructor controls that permit activation of normal, abnormal, and emergency conditions as
appropriate. Once activated, proper system operation
must result from system management by the crew and
not require input from the instructor controls.
X
X
X
X
X
The motion system standards set out in part 60, Appendix
A for at least Level A simulators is acceptable.
X
The motion system standards set out in part 60, Appendix
A for at least Level A simulators is acceptable.
5. Motion System (not required)
5.a. ......
The FTD may have a motion system, if desired, although
it is not required. If a motion system is installed and additional training, testing, or checking credits are being
sought on the basis of having a motion system, the motion system operation may not be distracting and must
be coupled closely to provide integrated sensory cues.
The motion system must also respond to abrupt input at
the pilot’s position within the allotted time, but not before the time when the airplane responds under the
same conditions.
5.b. ......
If a motion system is installed, it must be measured by latency tests or transport delay tests and may not exceed
300 milliseconds. Instrument response may not occur
prior to motion onset.
6. Visual System
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
6.a. ......
The FTD may have a visual system, if desired, although it
is not required. If a visual system is installed, it must
meet the following criteria:
X
X
X
6.a.1. ...
The visual system must respond to abrupt input at the pilot’s position.
An SOC is required.
....
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00119
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26596
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE B1A.—MINIMUM FTD REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Information
FTD level
Entry
No.
General FTD requirements
6.a.2. ...
Notes
4
5
6
The visual system must be at least a single channel, noncollimated display.
An SOC is required.
X
X
X
6.a.3. ...
The visual system must provide at least a field-of-view of
18° vertical / 24° horizontal for the pilot flying.
An SOC is required.
X
X
X
6.a.4. ...
The visual system must provide for a maximum parallax of
10° per pilot.
An SOC is required.
X
X
X
6.a.5. ...
The visual scene content may not be distracting ................
An SOC is required.
X
X
X
6.a.6. ...
The minimum distance from the pilot’s eye position to the
surface of a direct view display may not be less than
the distance to any front panel instrument.
An SOC is required.
X
X
X
6.a.7. ...
The visual system must provide for a minimum resolution
of 5 arc-minutes for both computed and displayed pixel
size.
An SOC is required.
X
X
X
6.b. ......
If a visual system is installed and additional training, testing, or checking credits are being sought on the basis of
having a visual system, a visual system meeting the
standards set out for at least a Level A FFS (see Appendix A of this part) will be required. A ‘‘direct-view,’’
non-collimated visual system (with the other requirements for a Level A visual system met) may be considered satisfactory for those installations where the visual
system design ‘‘eye point’’ is appropriately adjusted for
each pilot’s position such that the parallax error is at or
less than 10° simultaneously for each pilot.
An SOC is required.
X
Directly projected, non-collimated visual displays may
prove to be unacceptable for dual pilot applications.
7. Sound System
7.a. ......
The FTD must simulate significant flight deck sounds resulting from pilot actions that correspond to those heard
in the airplane.
X
TABLE B1B.—TABLE OF TASKS VS. FTD LEVEL
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Information
Subjective Requirements—In order to be qualified at the
FTD qualification level indicated, the FTD must be able to
perform at least the tasks associated with that level of
qualification. See Notes 1 and 2 at the end of the Table
FTD level
Notes
4
5
6
1. Preflight Procedures.
1.a. ......
Preflight Inspection (flight deck only) ..................................
A
A
X
1.b. ......
Engine Start .........................................................................
A
A
X
1.c. ......
Pre-takeoff Checks ..............................................................
A
A
X
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2. Takeoff and Departure Phase.
2.a. ......
Rejected Takeoff (requires visual system) ..........................
....
....
A
2.b. ......
Departure Procedure ...........................................................
....
X
X
3. In-flight Maneuvers.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00120
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26597
TABLE B1B.—TABLE OF TASKS VS. FTD LEVEL—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Subjective Requirements—In order to be qualified at the
FTD qualification level indicated, the FTD must be able to
perform at least the tasks associated with that level of
qualification. See Notes 1 and 2 at the end of the Table
4
5
6
3.a. ......
a. Steep Turns .....................................................................
....
X
X
3.b. ......
b. Approaches to Stalls .......................................................
....
A
X
3.c. ......
c. Engine Failure (procedures only)—Multiengine Airplane
....
A
X
3.d. ......
d. Engine Failure (procedures only)—Single-Engine Airplane.
....
A
X
3.e. ......
e. Specific Flight Characteristics incorporated into the
user’s FAA approved flight training program.
A
A
A
Entry
No.
FTD level
Notes
4. Instrument Procedures.
4.a. ......
Standard Terminal Arrival/Flight Management System Arrival.
....
A
X
4.b. ......
Holding .................................................................................
....
A
X
4.c. ......
Precision Instrument, all engines operating ........................
....
A
X
e.g., Autopilot, Manual (Flt. Dir. Assisted), Manual (Raw
Data).
4.d. ......
Non-precision Instrument, all engines operating .................
....
A
X
e.g., NDB, VOR, VOR/DME, VOR/TAC, RNAV, LOC,
LOC/BC, ADF, and SDF.
4.e. ......
Circling Approach (requires visual system) .........................
....
....
A
4.f. .......
Missed Approach .................................................................
....
A
X
5. Normal and Abnormal Procedures.
5.a. ......
Engine (including shutdown and restart—procedures only)
A
A
X
5.b. ......
Fuel System .........................................................................
A
A
X
5.c. ......
Electrical System .................................................................
A
A
X
5.d. ......
Hydraulic System .................................................................
A
A
X
5.e. ......
Environmental and Pressurization Systems ........................
A
A
X
5.f. .......
Fire Detection and Extinguisher Systems ...........................
A
A
X
5.g. ......
Navigation and Avionics Systems .......................................
A
A
X
5.h. ......
Automatic Flight Control System, Electronic Flight Instrument System, and Related Subsystems.
A
A
X
5.i. .......
Flight Control Systems ........................................................
A
A
X
5.j. .......
Anti-ice and Deice Systems ................................................
A
A
X
5.k. ......
Aircraft and Personal Emergency Equipment .....................
A
A
X
6. Emergency Procedures.
Emergency Descent (maximum rate) ..................................
....
A
X
6.b. ......
Inflight Fire and Smoke Removal ........................................
....
A
X
6.c. ......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
6.a. ......
Rapid Decompression .........................................................
....
A
X
6.d. ......
Emergency Evacuation ........................................................
A
A
X
A
A
X
7. Postflight Procedures.
7.a. ......
After-Landing Procedures ....................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00121
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26598
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE B1B.—TABLE OF TASKS VS. FTD LEVEL—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
7.b. ......
Information
Subjective Requirements—In order to be qualified at the
FTD qualification level indicated, the FTD must be able to
perform at least the tasks associated with that level of
qualification. See Notes 1 and 2 at the end of the Table
4
5
6
Parking and Securing ..........................................................
A
A
X
FTD level
Notes
Note 1: An ‘‘A’’ in the table indicates that the system, task, or procedure, although not required to be present, may be examined if the appropriate airplane system is simulated in the FTD and is working properly.
Note 2: Items not installed or not functional on the FTD and not appearing on the SOQ Configuration List, are not required to be listed as exceptions on the SOQ.
TABLE B1C.—TABLE OF FTD SYSTEM TASKS QPS REQUIREMENTS
QPS Requirements
Entry
No.
Information
Subjective Requirements
In order to be qualified at the FTD qualification level indicated, the FTD must be able to perform at least the tasks
associated with that level of qualification.
FTD level
Notes
4
5
6
1. Instructor Operating Station (IOS).
1.a. ......
Power switch(es) .................................................................
X
X
X
1.b. ......
Airplane conditions ..............................................................
A
X
X
e.g., GW, CG, Fuel loading, Systems, Ground Crew.
1.c. ......
Airports/Runways .................................................................
X
X
X
e.g., Selection and Presets; Surface and Lighting controls
if equipped with a visual system.
1.d. ......
Environmental controls ........................................................
X
X
X
e.g., Temp, Wind.
1.e. ......
Airplane system malfunctions (Insertion/deletion) ...............
A
X
X
1.f. .......
Locks, Freezes, and Repositioning .....................................
X
X
X
1.g. ......
Sound Controls. (On/off/adjustment) ...................................
X
X
X
1.h. ......
Motion/Control Loading System, as appropriate. On/off/
emergency stop.
A
A
A
X
X
X
2. Observer Seats/Stations.
2.a. ......
Position/Adjustment/Positive restraint system .....................
Note 1: An ‘‘A’’ in the table indicates that the system, task, or procedure, although not required to be present, may be examined if the appropriate system is in the FTD and is working properly.
Attachment 2 to Appendix B to Part 60—
Flight Training Device (FTD) Objective Tests
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1. Discussion
a. For the purposes of this attachment, the
flight conditions specified in the Flight
Conditions Column of Table B2A, are defined
as follows:
(1) Ground—on ground, independent of
airplane configuration;
(2) Take-off—gear down with flaps/slats in
any certified takeoff position;
(3) First segment climb—gear down with
flaps/slats in any certified takeoff position
(normally not above 50 ft AGL);
(4) Second segment climb—gear up with
flaps/slats in any certified takeoff position
(normally between 50 ft and 400 ft AGL);
(5) Clean—flaps/slats retracted and gear
up;
(6) Cruise—clean configuration at cruise
altitude and airspeed;
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
(7) Approach—gear up or down with flaps/
slats at any normal approach position as
recommended by the airplane manufacturer;
and
(8) Landing—gear down with flaps/slats in
any certified landing position.
b. The format for numbering the objective
tests in Appendix A, Attachment 2, Table
A2A, and the objective tests in Appendix B,
Attachment 2, Table B2A, is identical.
However, each test required for FFSs is not
necessarily required for FTDs. Also, each test
required for FTDs is not necessarily required
for FFSs. Therefore, when a test number (or
series of numbers) is not required, the term
‘‘Reserved’’ is used in the table at that
location. Following this numbering format
provides a degree of commonality between
the two tables and substantially reduces the
potential for confusion when referring to
objective test numbers for either FFSs or
FTDs.
c. The reader is encouraged to review the
Airplane Flight Simulator Evaluation
Handbook, Volumes I and II, published by
PO 00000
Frm 00122
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
the Royal Aeronautical Society, London, UK,
and FAA AC 25–7, as amended, Flight Test
Guide for Certification of Transport Category
Airplanes, and AC 23–8, as amended, Flight
Test Guide for Certification of Part 23
Airplanes, for references and examples
regarding flight testing requirements and
techniques.
d. If relevant winds are present in the
objective data, the wind vector should be
clearly noted as part of the data presentation,
expressed in conventional terminology, and
related to the runway being used for the test.
e. A Level 4 FTD does not require objective
tests and therefore, Level 4 is not addressed
in the following table.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
2. Test Requirements
a. The ground and flight tests required for
qualification are listed in Table B2A
Objective Tests. Computer generated FTD test
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
results must be provided for each test except
where an alternate test is specifically
authorized by the NSPM. If a flight condition
or operating condition is required for the test
but does not apply to the airplane being
simulated or to the qualification level sought,
it may be disregarded (e.g., an engine out
missed approach for a single-engine airplane;
a maneuver using reverse thrust for an
airplane without reverse thrust capability).
Each test result is compared against the
validation data described in § 60.13, and in
Appendix B. The results must be produced
on an appropriate recording device
acceptable to the NSPM and must include
FTD number, date, time, conditions,
tolerances, and appropriate dependent
variables portrayed in comparison to the
validation data. Time histories are required
unless otherwise indicated in Table B2A. All
results must be labeled using the tolerances
and units given.
b. Table B2A in this attachment sets out
the test results required, including the
parameters, tolerances, and flight conditions
for FTD validation. Tolerances are provided
for the listed tests because mathematical
modeling and acquisition and development
of reference data are often inexact. All
tolerances listed in the following tables are
applied to FTD performance. When two
tolerance values are given for a parameter,
the less restrictive may be used unless
otherwise indicated. In those cases where a
tolerance is expressed only as a percentage,
the tolerance percentage applies to the
maximum value of that parameter within its
normal operating range as measured from the
neutral or zero position unless otherwise
indicated.
c. Certain tests included in this attachment
must be supported with a SOC. In Table B2A,
requirements for SOCs are indicated in the
‘‘Test Details’’ column.
d. When operational or engineering
judgment is used in making assessments for
flight test data applications for FTD validity,
such judgment may not be limited to a single
parameter. For example, data that exhibit
rapid variations of the measured parameters
may require interpolations or a ‘‘best fit’’ data
section. All relevant parameters related to a
given maneuver or flight condition must be
provided to allow overall interpretation.
When it is difficult or impossible to match
FTD to airplane data throughout a time
history, differences must be justified by
providing a comparison of other related
variables for the condition being assessed.
e. It is not acceptable to program the FTD
so that the mathematical modeling is correct
only at the validation test points. Unless
noted otherwise, tests must represent
airplane performance and handling qualities
at operating weights and centers of gravity
(CG) typical of normal operation. If a test is
supported by aircraft data at one extreme
weight or CG, another test supported by
aircraft data at mid-conditions or as close as
possible to the other extreme is necessary.
Certain tests that are relevant only at one
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
extreme CG or weight condition need not be
repeated at the other extreme. The results of
the tests for Level 6 are expected to be
indicative of the device’s performance and
handling qualities throughout all of the
following:
(1) The airplane weight and CG envelope;
(2) The operational envelope; and
(3) Varying atmospheric ambient and
environmental conditions—including the
extremes authorized for the respective
airplane or set of airplanes.
f. When comparing the parameters listed to
those of the airplane, sufficient data must
also be provided to verify the correct flight
condition and airplane configuration
changes. For example, to show that control
force is within the parameters for a static
stability test, data to show the correct
airspeed, power, thrust or torque, airplane
configuration, altitude, and other appropriate
datum identification parameters must also be
given. If comparing short period dynamics,
normal acceleration may be used to establish
a match to the airplane, but airspeed,
altitude, control input, airplane
configuration, and other appropriate data
must also be given. If comparing landing gear
change dynamics, pitch, airspeed, and
altitude may be used to establish a match to
the airplane, but landing gear position must
also be provided. All airspeed values must be
properly annotated (e.g., indicated versus
calibrated). In addition, the same variables
must be used for comparison (e.g., compare
inches to inches rather than inches to
centimeters).
g. The QTG provided by the sponsor must
clearly describe how the FTD will be set up
and operated for each test. Each FTD
subsystem may be tested independently, but
overall integrated testing of the FTD must be
accomplished to assure that the total FTD
system meets the prescribed standards. A
manual test procedure with explicit and
detailed steps for completing each test must
also be provided.
h. For previously qualified FTDs, the tests
and tolerances of this attachment may be
used in subsequent continuing qualification
evaluations for any given test if the sponsor
has submitted a proposed MQTG revision to
the NSPM and has received NSPM approval.
i. FTDs are evaluated and qualified with an
engine model simulating the airplane data
supplier’s flight test engine. For qualification
of alternative engine models (either
variations of the flight test engines or other
manufacturer’s engines) additional tests with
the alternative engine models may be
required. This attachment contains
guidelines for alternative engines.
j. Testing Computer Controlled Aircraft
(CCA) simulators, or other highly augmented
airplane simulators, flight test data is
required for the Normal (N) and/or Nonnormal (NN) control states, as indicated in
this attachment. Where test results are
independent of control state, Normal or Nonnormal control data may be used. All tests in
Table B2A require test results in the Normal
PO 00000
Frm 00123
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26599
control state unless specifically noted
otherwise in the Test Details section
following the CCA designation. The NSPM
will determine what tests are appropriate for
airplane simulation data. When making this
determination, the NSPM may require other
levels of control state degradation for specific
airplane tests. Where Non-normal control
states are required, test data must be
provided for one or more Non-normal control
states, and must include the least augmented
state. Where applicable, flight test data must
record Normal and Non-normal states for:
(1) Pilot controller deflections or
electronically generated inputs, including
location of input; and
(2) Flight control surface positions unless
test results are not affected by, or are
independent of, surface positions.
k. Tests of handling qualities must include
validation of augmentation devices. FTDs for
highly augmented airplanes will be validated
both in the unaugmented configuration (or
failure state with the maximum permitted
degradation in handling qualities) and the
augmented configuration. Where various
levels of handling qualities result from
failure states, validation of the effect of the
failure is necessary. Requirements for testing
will be mutually agreed to between the
sponsor and the NSPM on a case-by-case
basis.
l. Some tests will not be required for
airplanes using airplane hardware in the FTD
flight deck (e.g., ‘‘side stick controller’’).
These exceptions are noted in Section 2
‘‘Handling Qualities’’ in Table B2A of this
attachment. However, in these cases, the
sponsor must provide a statement that the
airplane hardware meets the appropriate
manufacturer’s specifications and the
sponsor must have supporting information to
that fact available for NSPM review.
m. For objective test purposes, see
Appendix F of this part for the definitions of
‘‘Near maximum,’’ ‘‘Light,’’ and ‘‘Medium’’
gross weight.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
n. In those cases where the objective test
results authorize a ‘‘snapshot test’’ or a
‘‘series of snapshot test results’’ in lieu of a
time-history result, the sponsor or other data
provider must ensure that a steady state
condition exists at the instant of time
captured by the ‘‘snapshot.’’ The steady state
condition must exist from 4 seconds prior to,
through 1 second following, the instant of
time captured by the snap shot.
o. Refer to AC 120–27, ‘‘Aircraft Weight
and Balance’’; and FAA–H–8083–1, ‘‘Aircraft
Weight and Balance Handbook’’ for more
information.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26600
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE B2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS requirements
FTD
level
Test
Tolerances
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
5
Information
6
Notes
1. Performance
1.a. ........
(Reserved)
1.b. ........
Takeoff
1.b.1. .....
Ground Acceleration
Time.
1.b.2.
through
1.b.6.
(Reserved)
1.b.7. .....
Rejected Takeoff ....
1.b.8. .....
(Reserved)
1.c. ........
Climb
1.c.1. .....
Normal Climb all engines operating.
1.c.2.
through
1.c.4.
(Reserved)
1.d. ........
(Reserved)
1.e. ........
(Reserved)
1.f. .........
Engines
1.f.1. ......
1.f.2. ......
±5% time or ±1 sec
Takeoff ....................
Record acceleration time for a
minimum of 80% of the segment from brake release to
VR.
Preliminary aircraft certification
data may be used.
X
This test is required
only if RTO training credit is
sought.
±5% time or ±1.5
sec.
Dry Runway ............
Record time for at least 80%
of the segment from initiation of the Rejected Takeoff to full stop.
X
This test is required
only if RTO training credit is
sought.
±3 kt airspeed, ±5%
or ±100 ft/min (0.5
m/sec) climb rate.
Clean ......................
Flight test data or airplane performance manual data may
be used. Record at nominal
climb speed and at nominal
altitude. May be a snapshot
test result. FTD performance
must be recorded over an
interval of at least 1,000 ft
(300 m).
X
X
Acceleration ............
Level 6: ±10% Tt, or
±0.25 sec.
Level 5: ±1 sec .......
Approach or Landing.
Record engine power (N1, N2,
EPR, Torque, Manifold
Pressure) from idle to maximum takeoff power for a
rapid (slam) throttle movement.
X
X
See Appendix F of
this part for definitions of Ti and Tt.
Deceleration ............
Level 6: ±10% Tt, or
±0.25 sec.
Level 5: ±1 sec .......
Ground ....................
Record engine power (N1, N2,
EPR, Torque, Manifold
Pressure) from maximum
takeoff power to idle for a
rapid (slam) throttle movement.
X
X
See Appendix F of
this part for definitions of Ti and Tt.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2. Handling Qualities
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00124
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26601
TABLE B2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
FTD
level
Test
Tolerances
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
5
6
For FTDs requiring Static tests at the controls (i.e., column, wheel, rudder pedal), special test fixtures will not be required during initial or upgrade evaluations if the sponsor’s QTG/MQTG shows
both test fixture results and the results of an alternative approach, such as computer plots produced
concurrently, that show satisfactory agreement. Repeat of the alternative method during the initial or
upgrade evaluation would then satisfy this test requirement.
Pitch Controller Position vs. Force
and Surface Position Calibration.
±2 lb (0.9 daN)
Ground ....................
breakout, ±10% or
±5 lb (2.2 daN)
force, ±2° elevator.
Pitch Controller Position vs. Force.
±2 lb (0.9 daN)
breakout, ±10% or
±5 lb (2.2 daN)
force.
As determined by
sponsor.
Record results during initial
qualification evaluation for
an uninterrupted control
sweep to the stops. The recorded tolerances apply to
subsequent comparisons on
continuing qualification evaluations.
2.a.2.a. ..
Roll Controller Position vs. Force and
Surface Position
Calibration.
±2 lb (0.9 daN)
breakout, ±10% or
±3 lb (1.3 daN)
force, ±2° aileron,
±3° spoiler angle.
Ground ....................
Record results for an uninterrupted control sweep to the
stops.
2.a.2.b. ..
Roll Controller Position vs. Force.
±2 lb (0.9 daN)
breakout, ±10% or
±3 lb (1.3 daN)
force.
As determined by
sponsor.
Record results during initial
qualification evaluation for
an uninterrupted control
sweep to the stops. The recorded tolerances apply to
subsequent comparisons on
continuing qualification evaluations.
2.a.3.a. ..
Rudder Pedal Position vs. Force and
Surface Position
Calibration.
±5 lb (2.2 daN)
breakout, ±10% or
±5 lb (2.2 daN)
force, ±2° rudder
angle.
Ground ....................
Record results for an uninterrupted control sweep to the
stops.
Testing of position
versus force is not
applicable if
forces are generated solely by
use of airplane
hardware in the
FTD.
Record results for an uninterrupted control sweep to the
stops.
2.a.1.b. ..
Notes
Static Control Tests
2.a.1.a. ..
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.a. ........
Information
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00125
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
X
X
Applicable only on
continuing qualification evaluations. The intent is
to design the control feel for Level
5 to be able to
manually fly an instrument approach; and not to
compare results
to flight test or
other such data.
X
X
Applicable only on
continuing qualification evaluations. The intent is
to design the control feel for Level
5 to be able to
manually fly an instrument approach; and not to
compare results
to flight test or
other such data.
X
26602
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE B2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
FTD
level
Test
Tolerances
Flight conditions
Test details
Entry No.
Title
5
6
2.a.3.b. ..
Rudder Pedal Position vs. Force.
±5 lb (2.2 daN)
breakout, ±10% or
±5 lb (2.2 daN)
force.
As determined by
sponsor.
Record results during initial
qualification evaluation for
an uninterrupted control
sweep to the stops. The recorded tolerances apply to
subsequent comparisons on
continuing qualification evaluations.
2.a.4. .....
Nosewheel Steering
Controller Force.
±2 lb (0.9 daN)
breakout, ±10% or
±3 lb (1.3 daN)
force.
Ground ....................
Record results of an uninterrupted control sweep to the
stops.
X
2.a.5. .....
Rudder Pedal Steering Calibration.
±2° nosewheel
angle.
Ground ....................
Record results of an uninterrupted control sweep to the
stops.
X
2.a.6. .....
Pitch Trim Indicator
vs. Surface Position Calibration.
±0.5° of computed
trim surface angle.
Ground ....................
2.a.7. .....
(Reserved)
2.a.8. .....
Alignment of Flight
deck Throttle
Lever vs. Selected Engine Parameter.
±5° of throttle lever
angle or ±0.8 in (2
cm) for power
control without angular travel, or
±3% N1, or ±0.03
EPR, or ±3%
maximum rated
manifold pressure,
or ±3% torque.
Ground ....................
Requires simultaneous recording for all engines. The tolerances apply against airplane data and between engines. In the case of propeller powered airplanes, if
a propeller lever is present,
it must also be checked. For
airplanes with throttle
‘‘detents,’’ all detents must
be presented. May be a series of snapshot test results.
X
2.a.9. .....
Brake Pedal Position vs. Force.
±5 lb (2.2 daN) or
10% force.
Ground ....................
Two data points are required:
Zero and maximum deflection. Computer output results may be used to show
compliance.
X
2.b. ........
(Reserved)
2.c. ........
Longitudinal Control Tests
X
2.c.1. .....
Power Change
Force.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
±5 lb (2.2 daN) or,
±20% pitch conrol
force.
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Approach ................
X
Frm 00126
Fmt 4701
May be a series of snapshot
test results. Power change
dynamics test as described
in test 2.c.1 of Table A2A of
this part will be accepted.
CCA: Test in Normal and
Non-normal control states.
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
X
Notes
Applicable only on
continuing qualification evaluations. The intent is
to design the control feel for Level
5 to be able to
manually fly an instrument approach; and not to
compare results
to flight test or
other such data.
Power setting is that required for level flight unless otherwise specified.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Information
X
The purpose of the
test is to compare
the FTD against
design data or
equivalent.
Test not required
unless RTO credit
is sought.
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26603
TABLE B2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
FTD
level
Test
Tolerances
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
5
6
±5 lb (2.2 daN) or,
±20% pitch conrol
force.
Takeoff through initial flap retraction,
and approach to
landing.
May be a series of snapshot
test results. Flap/Slat
change dynamics test as
described in test 2.c.2 of
Table A2A of this part will
be accepted. CCA: Test in
Normal and Non-normal
control states.
X
X
Gear Change Force
±5 lb (2.2 daN) or,
±20% pitch conrol
force.
Takeoff (retraction)
and Approach
(extension).
May be a series of snapshot
test results. Gear change
dynamics test as described
in test 2.c.4 of Table A2A of
this part will be accepted.
CCA: Test in Normal and
Non-normal control states.
X
X
2.c.5. .....
Longitudinal Trim ....
±0.5° trim surface
angle ±1° elevator
±1° pitch angle
±5% net thrust or
equivalent.
Cruise, Approach,
and Landing.
Record steady-state condition
with wings level and thrust
set for level flight. May be a
series of snapshot tests
Level 5 may use equivalent
stick and trim controllers in
lieu of elevator and trim surface. CCA: Test in Normal
and Non-normal control
states.
X
X
2.c.6. .....
Longitudinal Maneuvering Stability
(Stick Force/g).
±5 lb (±2.2 daN) or
±10% pitch controller force Alternative method:
±1° or ±10%
change of elevator.
Cruise, Approach,
and Landing.
Continuous time history data
or a series of snapshot tests
may be used. Record results up to 30° of bank for
approach and landing configurations. Record results
for up to 45° of bank for the
cruise configuration. The
force tolerance is not applicable if forces are generated
solely by the use of airplane
hardware in the FTD. The
alternative method applies
to airplanes that do not exhibit ‘‘stick-force-per-g’’ characteristics. CCA: Test in
Normal and Non-normal
control states.
Flap/Slat Change
Force.
2.c.3. .....
(Reserved)
2.c.4. .....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.c.2. .....
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00127
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
X
Information
Notes
26604
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE B2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
FTD
level
Test
Tolerances
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
5
6
2.c.7. .....
Longitudinal Static
Stability.
±5 lb (±2.2 daN) or
±10% pitch controller force.
Alternative method:
±1° or ±10%
change of elevator.
Approach ................
May be a series of snapshot
test results. Record results
for at least 2 speeds above
and 2 speeds below trim
speed. The force tolerance
is not applicable if forces
are generated solely by the
use of airplane hardware in
the FTD. The alternative
method applies to airplanes
that do not exhibit speed
stability characteristics.
Level 5 must exhibit positive
static stability, but need not
comply with the numerical
tolerance. CCA: Test in Normal and Non-normal control
states.
X
X
2.c.8. .....
Stall Warning (actuation of stall warning device.).
±3 kts. airspeed, ±2°
bank for speeds
greater than actuation of stall warning device or initial buffet.
Second Segment
The stall maneuver must be
Climb, and Apentered with thrust at or
proach or Landing.
near idle power and wings
level (1g). Record the stall
warning signal and initial
buffet if applicable. CCA:
Test in Normal and Non-normal control states.
X
X
2.c.9.a. ..
Phugoid Dynamics ..
±10% period, ±10%
of time to 1⁄2 or
double amplitude
or ±.02 of damping ratio.
Cruise .....................
The test must include whichever is less of the following:
Three full cycles (six overshoots after the input is
completed), or the number
of cycles sufficient to determine time to 1⁄2 or double
amplitude. CCA: Test in
Non-normal control state.
X
2.c.9.b. ..
Phugoid Dynamics ..
±10% period, Representative damping.
Cruise .....................
The test must include whichever is less of the following:
Three full cycles (six overshoots after the input is
completed), or the number
of cycles sufficient to determine representative damping. CCA: Test in Non-normal control state.
X
2.c.10. ...
Short Period Dynamics.
±1.5° pitch angle or
±2°/sec pitch rate,
±0.10g acceleration..
Cruise .....................
CCA: Test in Non-normal control state.
2.d. ........
Lateral Directional Tests
X
Power setting is that required for level flight unless otherwise specified.
(Reserved)
2.d.2. .....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.d.1. .....
Roll Response
(Rate).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
±10% or ±2°/sec roll
rate.
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Cruise, and ApRecord results for normal roll
proach or Landing.
controller deflection (onethird of maximum roll controller travel). May be combined with step input of flight
deck roll controller test (see
2.d.3.).
Frm 00128
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
X
X
Information
Notes
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26605
TABLE B2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
FTD
level
Test
Tolerances
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
5
6
Roll Response to
Flight deck Roll
Controller Step
Input.
±10% or ±2° bank
angle.
Approach or Landing.
Record from initiation of roll
through 10 seconds after
control is returned to neutral
and released. May be combined with roll response
(rate) test (see 2.d.2.). CCA:
Test in Non-normal control
state.
Spiral Stability .........
Correct trend and
±3° or ±10% bank
angle in 30 seconds.
Cruise .....................
Record results for both directions. As an alternate test,
demonstrate the lateral control required to maintain a
steady turn with a bank
angle of 30°. CCA: Test in
Non-normal control state.
X
2.d.4.b. ..
Spiral Stability .........
Correct trend ...........
Cruise .....................
CCA: Test in Non-normal control state.
2.d.5. .....
(Reserved)
2.d.6.a. ..
Rudder Response ...
±2°/sec or ±10%
yaw rate.
Approach or Landing.
A rudder step input of 20%–
30% rudder pedal throw
must be used. Not required
if rudder input and response
is shown in Dutch Roll test
(test 2.d.7.). CCA: Test in
Normal and Non-normal
control states.
2.d.6.b. ..
Rudder Response ...
Roll rate ±2°/sec,
bank angle ±3°.
Approach or Landing.
May be roll response to a
given rudder deflection.
CCA: Test in Normal and
Non-normal control states.
2.d.7. .....
Dutch Roll (Yaw
Damper OFF).
±0.5 sec. or ±10%
of period, ±10% of
time to 1⁄2 or double amplitude or
±.02 of damping
ratio.
Cruise, and ApRecord results for at least 6
proach or Landing.
complete cycles with stability augmentation OFF, or
the number of cycles sufficient to determine time to 1⁄2
or double amplitude. CCA:
Test in Non-normal control
state.
2.d.8. .....
Steady State Sideslip.
For given rudder position ±2° bank
angle, ±1° sideslip
angle, ±10% or
±2° aileron, ±10%
or ±5° spoiler or
equivalent roll,
controller position
or force.
Approach or Landing.
Notes
X
2.d.4.a. ..
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.d.3. .....
Information
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00129
Fmt 4701
Use at least two rudder positions, one of which must be
near maximum allowable
rudder. Propeller driven airplanes must test in each direction. May be a series of
snapshot test results. Sideslip angle is matched only
for repeatability and only on
continuing qualification evaluations.
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
X
Airplane data averaged from multiple tests in same
direction may be
used.
Airplane data averaged from multiple tests in same
direction may be
used.
X
X
X
May be accomplished as a yaw
response test, in
which case the
procedures and
requirements of
test 2.d.6.a. will
apply.
X
26606
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE B2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
FTD
level
Test
Tolerances
Entry No.
2.e.
through
2.h.
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
5
6
Information
Notes
(Reserved)
3. (Reserved)
4. (Reserved)
5. (Reserved)
6. FTD System Response Time
6.a. ........
Latency.
300 ms (or less)
after airplane response.
Take-off, cruise, and
approach or landing.
One test is required in each
axis (pitch, roll and yaw) for
each of the three conditions
(take-off, cruise, and approach or landing).
X
X
300 ms (or less)
after controller
movement.
N/A ..........................
A separate test is required in
each axis (pitch, roll, and
yaw).
X
X
Transport Delay
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Begin Information
3. For additional information on the
following topics, please refer to Appendix A,
Attachment 2, and the indicated paragraph
within that attachment
• Control Dynamics, paragraph 4.
• Motion System, paragraph 6.
• Sound System, paragraph 7.
• Engineering Simulator Validation Data,
paragraph 9.
• Validation Test Tolerances, paragraph
11.
• Validation Data Road Map, paragraph 12.
• Acceptance Guidelines for Alternative
Engines Data, paragraph 13.
• Acceptance Guidelines for Alternative
Avionics, paragraph 14.
• Transport Delay Testing, paragraph 15.
• Continuing Qualification Evaluation
Validation Data Presentation, paragraph 16.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
4. Alternative Objective Data for FTD Level
5
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. This paragraph (including the following
tables) is relevant only to FTD Level 5. It is
provided because this level is required to
simulate the performance and handling
characteristics of a set of airplanes with
similar characteristics, such as normal
airspeed/altitude operating envelope and the
same number and type of propulsion systems
(engines).
b. Tables B2B through B2E reflect FTD
performance standards that are acceptable to
the FAA. A sponsor must demonstrate that a
device performs within these parameters, as
applicable. If a device does not meet the
established performance parameters for some
or for all of the applicable tests listed in
Tables B2B through B2E, the sponsor may
use NSP accepted flight test data for
comparison purposes for those tests.
PO 00000
Frm 00130
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
If Transport Delay is
the chosen method to demonstrate
relative responses, the
sponsor and the
NSPM will use the
latency values to
ensure proper
simulator response when reviewing those existing tests where
latency can be
identified (e.g.,
short period, roll
response, rudder
response).
c. Sponsors using the data from Tables B2B
through B2E must comply with the
following:
(1) Submit a complete QTG, including
results from all of the objective tests
appropriate for the level of qualification
sought as set out in Table B2A. The QTG
must highlight those results that demonstrate
the performance of the FTD is within the
allowable performance ranges indicated in
Tables B2B through B2E, as appropriate.
(2) The QTG test results must include all
relevant information concerning the
conditions under which the test was
conducted; e.g., gross weight, center of
gravity, airspeed, power setting, altitude
(climbing, descending, or level), temperature,
configuration, and any other parameter that
impacts the conduct of the test.
(3) The test results become the validation
data against which the initial and all
subsequent continuing qualification
evaluations are compared. These subsequent
evaluations will use the tolerances listed in
Table B2A.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
(4) Subjective testing of the device must be
performed to determine that the device
performs and handles like an airplane within
the appropriate set of airplanes.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
d. The reader is encouraged to consult the
Airplane Flight Simulator Evaluation
Handbook, Volumes I and II, published by
the Royal Aeronautical Society, London, UK,
and AC 25–7, Flight Test Guide for
Certification of Transport Category Airplanes,
26607
and AC 23–8A, Flight Test Guide for
Certification of Part 23 Airplanes, as
amended, for references and examples
regarding flight testing requirements and
techniques.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
TABLE B2B.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCE FOR FTD LEVEL 5 SMALL, SINGLE ENGINE (RECIPROCATING) AIRPLANE
QPS requirement
The performance parameters in this table must be used to program the FTD if flight test data is not used to program the FTD.
Applicable test
Authorized performance range
Entry
No.
Title and procedure
1. ..........
Performance.
1.c ........
Climb
1.c.1. ....
Normal climb with nominal gross weight, at best rate-of-climb airspeed.
1.f. ........
Engines.
1.f.1. .....
Acceleration; idle to takeoff power ..................................................
2–4 Seconds.
1.f.2. .....
Deceleration; takeoff power to idle .................................................
2–4 Seconds.
2. ..........
Handling Qualities
2.c. .......
Longitudinal Tests
2.c.1. ....
Power change force
(a) Trim for straight and level flight at 80% of normal cruise airspeed with necessary power. Reduce power to flight idle. Do
not change trim or configuration. After stabilized, record column
force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
Climb rate = 500–1200 fpm (2.5–6 m/sec).
5–15 lbs (2.2–6.6 daN) of force (Pull).
OR
(b) Trim for straight and level flight at 80% of normal cruise airspeed with necessary power. Add power to maximum setting.
Do not change trim or configuration. After stabilized, record column force necessary to maintain original airspeed..
2.c.2. ....
5–15 lbs (2.2–6.6 daN) of force (Push).
Flap/slat change force
(a) Trim for straight and level flight with flaps fully retracted at a
constant airspeed within the flaps-extended airspeed range. Do
not adjust trim or power. Extend the flaps to 50% of full flap
travel. After stabilized, record stick force necessary to maintain
original airspeed.
5–15 lbs (2.2–6.6 daN) of force (Pull).
OR
(b) Trim for straight and level flight with flaps extended to 50% of
full flap travel, at a constant airspeed within the flaps-extended
airspeed range. Do not adjust trim or power. Retract the flaps
to zero. After stabilized, record stick force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.c.4. ....
5–15 lbs (2.2–6.6 daN) of force (Push).
Gear change force
(a) Trim for straight and level flight with landing gear retracted at
a constant airspeed within the landing gear-extended airspeed
range. Do not adjust trim or power. Extend the landing gear.
After stabilized, record stick force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
2–12 lbs (0.88–5.3 daN) of force (Pull).
OR
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00131
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26608
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE B2B.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCE FOR FTD LEVEL 5 SMALL, SINGLE ENGINE (RECIPROCATING) AIRPLANE—
Continued
QPS requirement
The performance parameters in this table must be used to program the FTD if flight test data is not used to program the FTD.
Applicable test
Authorized performance range
Entry
No.
Title and procedure
(b) Trim for straight and level flight with landing gear extended, at
a constant airspeed within the landing gear-extended airspeed
range. Do not adjust trim or power. Retract the landing gear.
After stabilized, record stick force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
2–12 lbs (0.88–5.3 daN) of force (Push).
2.c.5. ....
Longitudinal trim ..............................................................................
Must be able to trim longitudinal stick force to ‘‘zero’’ in each of
the following configurations: cruise; approach; and landing.
2.c.7. ....
Longitudinal static stability ..............................................................
Must exhibit positive static stability.
2.c.8. ....
Stall warning (actuation of stall warning device) with nominal
gross weight; wings level; and a deceleration rate of not more
than three (3) knots per second.
(a) Landing configuration ................................................................
40–60 knots; ± 5° of bank.
(b) Clean configuration ....................................................................
Landing configuration speed + 10–20%.
2.c.9.b.
Phugoid dynamics ...........................................................................
Must have a phugoid with a period of 30–60 seconds. May not
reach 1⁄2 or double amplitude in less than 2 cycles.
2.d. .......
Lateral Directional Tests.
2.d.2. ....
Roll response (rate). Roll rate must be measured through at least
30° of roll. Aileron control must be deflected 1⁄3 (33.3 percent)
of maximum travel.
Must have a roll rate of 40°–25°/second.
2.d.4.b.
Spiral stability. Cruise configuration and normal cruise airspeed.
Establish a 20°–30° bank. When stabilized, neutralize the aileron control and release. Must be completed in both directions
of turn.
Initial bank angle (± 5°) after 20 seconds.
2.d.6.b.
Rudder response. Use 25 percent of maximum rudder deflection.
(Applicable to approach or landing configuration.).
2°–6°/second yaw rate.
2.d.7. ....
Dutch roll, yaw damper off. (Applicable to cruise and approach
configurations.).
A period of 2–5 seconds; and 1⁄2–2 cycles.
2.d.8. ....
Steady state sideslip. Use 50 percent rudder deflection. (Applicable to approach and landing configurations.).
2°–10° of bank; 4°–10° of sideslip; and 2°–10° of aileron.
6. ..........
FTD System Response Time
6.a. .......
Latency. Flight deck instrument systems response to an abrupt
pilot controller input. One test is required in each axis (pitch,
roll, yaw).
300 milliseconds or less.
TABLE B2C.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCE FOR FTD LEVEL 5 SMALL, MULTI-ENGINE (RECIPROCATING) AIRPLANE
QPS requirement
The performance parameters in this table must be used to program the FTD if flight test data is not used to program the FTD.
Applicable test
Authorized performance range
Entry
No.
Title and procedure
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1. Performance
1.c ........
Climb
1.c.1. ....
Normal climb with nominal gross weight, at best rate-of-climb airspeed.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00132
Fmt 4701
Climb airspeed = 95–115 knots.
Climb rate = 500–1500 fpm (2.5–7.5 m/sec)
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26609
TABLE B2C.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCE FOR FTD LEVEL 5 SMALL, MULTI-ENGINE (RECIPROCATING) AIRPLANE—
Continued
QPS requirement
The performance parameters in this table must be used to program the FTD if flight test data is not used to program the FTD.
Applicable test
Authorized performance range
Entry
No.
Title and procedure
1.f. ........
Engines
1.f.1. .....
Acceleration; idle to takeoff power ..................................................
2–5 Seconds.
1.f.2. .....
Deceleration; takeoff power to idle .................................................
2–5 Seconds.
2. Handling Qualities
2.c. .......
Longitudinal Tests.
2.c.1. ....
Power change force.
(a) Trim for straight and level flight at 80% of normal cruise airspeed with necessary power. Reduce power to flight idle. Do
not change trim or configuration. After stabilized, record column
force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
10–25 lbs (2.2–6.6 daN) of force (Pull).
OR
(b) Trim for straight and level flight at 80% of normal cruise airspeed with necessary power. Add power to maximum setting.
Do not change trim or configuration. After stabilized, record column force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
2.c.2. ....
5–15 lbs (2.2–6.6 daN) of force (Push).
Flap/slat change force.
(a) Trim for straight and level flight with flaps fully retracted at a
constant airspeed within the flaps-extended airspeed range. Do
not adjust trim or power. Extend the flaps to 50% of full flap
travel. After stabilized, record stick force necessary to maintain
original airspeed.
5–15 lbs (2.2–6.6 daN) of force (Pull).
OR
(b) Trim for straight and level flight with flaps extended to 50% of
full flap travel, at a constant airspeed within the flaps-extended
airspeed range. Do not adjust trim or power. Retract the flaps
to zero. After stabilized, record stick force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
2.c.4. ....
5–15 lbs (2.2–6.6 daN) of force (Push).
Gear change force.
(a) Trim for straight and level flight with landing gear retracted at
a constant airspeed within the landing gear-extended airspeed
range. Do not adjust trim or power. Extend the landing gear.
After stabilized, record stick force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
2–12 lbs (0.88–5.3 daN) of force (Pull).
OR
2–12 lbs (0.88–5.3 daN) of force (Push).
2.c.4. ....
Longitudinal trim ..............................................................................
Must be able to trim longitudinal stick force to ‘‘zero’’ in each of
the following configurations: cruise; approach; and landing.
2.c.7. ....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
(b) Trim for straight and level flight with landing gear extended, at
a constant airspeed within the landing gear-extended airspeed
range. Do not adjust trim or power. Retract the landing gear.
After stabilized, record stick force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
Longitudinal static stability ..............................................................
Must exhibit positive static stability.
2.c.8. ....
Stall warning (actuation of stall warning device) with nominal
gross weight; wings level; and a deceleration rate of not more
than three (3) knots per second.
(a) Landing configuration ................................................................
60–90 knots; ± 5° of bank.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00133
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26610
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE B2C.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCE FOR FTD LEVEL 5 SMALL, MULTI-ENGINE (RECIPROCATING) AIRPLANE—
Continued
QPS requirement
The performance parameters in this table must be used to program the FTD if flight test data is not used to program the FTD.
Applicable test
Authorized performance range
Entry
No.
Title and procedure
(b) Clean configuration ....................................................................
Landing configuration speed + 10–20%.
2.c.9.b.
Phugoid dynamics ...........................................................................
Must have a phugoid with a period of 30–60 seconds.
May not reach 1⁄2 or double amplitude in less than 2 cycles.
2.d. .......
Lateral Directional Tests
2.d.2. ....
Roll response ..................................................................................
Roll rate must be measured through at least 30° of roll. Aileron
control must be deflected 1⁄3 (33.3 percent) of maximum travel.
Must have a roll rate of 41⁄2–251⁄2/second.
2.d.4.b.
Spiral stability ..................................................................................
Cruise configuration and normal cruise airspeed. Establish a 20°–
30° bank. When stabilized, neutralize the aileron control and
release. Must be completed in both directions of turn.
Initial bank angle (± 5°) after 20 seconds.
2.d.6.b.
Rudder response .............................................................................
Use 25 percent of maximum rudder deflection. (Applicable to approach landing configuration.)
3°–6°/second yaw rate.
2.d.7. ....
Dutch roll, yaw damper off. (Applicable to cruise and approach
configurations.).
A period of 2–5 seconds; and 1⁄2–2 cycles.
2.d.8. ....
Steady state sideslip .......................................................................
Use 50 percent rudder deflection. (Applicable to approach and
landing configurations.)
2°–10° of bank; 4–10 degrees of sideslip; and 2°–10° of aileron.
6. FTD System Response Time
6.a. .......
Flight deck instrument systems response to an abrupt pilot controller input. One test is required in each axis (pitch, roll, yaw).
300 milliseconds or less.
TABLE B2D.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCE FOR FTD LEVEL 5 SMALL, SINGLE ENGINE (TURBO-PROPELLER) AIRPLANE
QPS requirement
The performance parameters in this table must be used to program the FTD if flight test data is not used to program the FTD.
Applicable Test
Authorized performance range
Entry
No.
Title and procedure
1. Performance
1.c ........
Climb.
1.c.1. ....
Normal climb with nominal gross weight, at best rate-of-climb airspeed.
1.f. ........
Engines
1.f.1. .....
Acceleration; idle to takeoff power ..................................................
4–8 Seconds.
1.f.2. .....
Deceleration; takeoff power to idle .................................................
3–7 Seconds.
Climb airspeed = 95–115 knots.
Climb rate = 800–1800 fpm (4–9 m/sec).
2. Handling Qualities
Longitudinal Tests
2.c.1. ....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.c. .......
Power change force
(a) Trim for straight and level flight at 80% of normal cruise airspeed with necessary power. Reduce power to flight idle. Do
not change trim or configuration. After stabilized, record column
force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00134
Fmt 4701
8 lbs (3.5 daN) of Push force—8 lbs (3.5 daN) of Pull force.
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26611
TABLE B2D.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCE FOR FTD LEVEL 5 SMALL, SINGLE ENGINE (TURBO-PROPELLER) AIRPLANE—
Continued
QPS requirement
The performance parameters in this table must be used to program the FTD if flight test data is not used to program the FTD.
Applicable Test
Authorized performance range
Entry
No.
Title and procedure
OR
(b) Trim for straight and level flight at 80% of normal cruise airspeed with necessary power. Add power to maximum setting.
Do not change trim or configuration. After stabilized, record column force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
2.c.2. ....
12–22 lbs (5.3–9.7 daN) of force (Push).
Flap/slat change force
(a) Trim for straight and level flight with flaps fully retracted at a
constant airspeed within the flaps-extended airspeed range. Do
not adjust trim or power. Extend the flaps to 50% of full flap
travel. After stabilized, record stick force necessary to maintain
original airspeed.
5–15 lbs (2.2–6.6 daN) of force (Pull).
OR
(b) Trim for straight and level flight with flaps extended to 50% of
full flap travel, at a constant airspeed within the flaps-extended
airspeed range. Do not adjust trim or power. Retract the flaps
to zero. After stabilized, record stick force necessary to maintain original airspeed..
2.c.4. ....
5–15 lbs (2.2–6.6 daN) of force (Push).
Gear change force.
(a) Trim for straight and level flight with landing gear retracted at
a constant airspeed within the landing gear-extended airspeed
range. Do not adjust trim or power. Extend the landing gear.
After stabilized, record stick force necessary to maintain original airspeed..
2–12 lbs (0.88–5.3 daN) of force (Pull).
OR
(b) Trim for straight and level flight with landing gear extended, at
a constant airspeed within the landing gear-extended airspeed
range. Do not adjust trim or power. Retract the landing gear.
After stabilized, record stick force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
2–12 lbs (0.88–5.3 daN) of force (Push).
2.b.5. ....
Longitudinal trim ..............................................................................
Must be able to trim longitudinal stick force to ‘‘zero’’ in each of
the following configurations: cruise; approach; and landing.
2.c.7. ....
Longitudinal static stability ..............................................................
Must exhibit positive static stability.
2.c.8. ....
Stall warning (actuation of stall warning device) with nominal
gross weight; wings level; and a deceleration rate of not more
than three (3) knots per second.
60–90 knots; ± 5° of bank.
(b) Clean configuration. ...................................................................
Landing configuration speed + 10–20%.
2.c.8.b.
Phugoid dynamics ...........................................................................
Must have a phugoid with a period of 30–60 seconds. May not
reach 1⁄2 or double amplitude in less than 2 cycles.
2.d. .......
Lateral Directional Tests
2.d.2. ....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
(a) Landing configuration ................................................................
Roll response ..................................................................................
Roll rate must be measured through at least 30° of roll. Aileron
control must be deflected 1⁄3 (33.3 percent) of maximum travel.
Must have a roll rate of 4°–25°/second.
2.d.4.b.
Spiral stability ..................................................................................
Cruise configuration and normal cruise airspeed. Establish a 20°–
30° bank. When stabilized, neutralize the aileron control and
release. Must be completed in both directions of turn.
Initial bank angle (±5°) after 20 seconds.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00135
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26612
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE B2D.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCE FOR FTD LEVEL 5 SMALL, SINGLE ENGINE (TURBO-PROPELLER) AIRPLANE—
Continued
QPS requirement
The performance parameters in this table must be used to program the FTD if flight test data is not used to program the FTD.
Applicable Test
Authorized performance range
Entry
No.
Title and procedure
2.d.6.b.
Rudder response .............................................................................
Use 25 percent of maximum rudder deflection.(Applicable to approach or landing configuration.).
3°–6°/second yaw rate.
2.d.7. ....
Dutch roll, yaw damper off ..............................................................
(Applicable to cruise and approach configurations.)
A period of 2–5 seconds; and 1⁄2–3 cycles.
2.d.8. ....
Steady state sideslip .......................................................................
Use 50 percent rudder deflection.
(Applicable to approach and landing configurations.)
2°–10° of bank; 4°–10° of sideslip; and 2°–10° of aileron.
6. FTD System Response Time
6.a. .......
Flight deck instrument systems response to an abrupt pilot controller input. One test is required in each axis (pitch, roll, yaw).
300 milliseconds or less.
TABLE B2E.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCE FOR FTD LEVEL 5 MULTI-ENGINE (TURBO-PROPELLER) AIRPLANE
QPS REQUIREMENT
The performance parameters in this table must be used to program the FTD if flight test data is not used to program the FTD.
Applicable test
Authorized performance range
Entry
No.
Title and procedure
1. Performance
1.c ........
Climb.
1.b.1. ....
Normal climb with nominal gross weight, at best rate-of-climb airspeed.
1.f. ........
Engines
1.f.1. .....
Acceleration; idle to takeoff power ..................................................
2–6 Seconds.
1.f.2. .....
Deceleration; takeoff power to idle .................................................
1–5 Seconds.
Climb airspeed = 120–140 knots.
Climb rate = 1000–3000 fpm (5–15 m/sec).
2. Handling Qualities
2.c. .......
Longitudinal Tests
2.c.1. ....
Power change force
(a) Trim for straight and level flight at 80% of normal cruise airspeed with necessary power. Reduce power to flight idle. Do
not change trim or configuration. After stabilized, record column
force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
8 lbs (3.5 daN) of Push force to 8 lbs (3.5 daN) of Pull force.
OR
(b) Trim for straight and level flight at 80% of normal cruise airspeed with necessary power. Add power to maximum setting.
Do not change trim or configuration. After stabilized, record column force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.c.2. ....
12–22 lbs (5.3–9.7 daN) of force (Push).
Flap/slat change force
(a) Trim for straight and level flight with flaps fully retracted at a
constant airspeed within the flaps-extended airspeed range. Do
not adjust trim or power. Extend the flaps to 50% of full flap
travel. After stabilized, record stick force necessary to maintain
original airspeed.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00136
Fmt 4701
5–15 lbs (2.2–6.6 daN) of force (Pull).
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26613
TABLE B2E.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCE FOR FTD LEVEL 5 MULTI-ENGINE (TURBO-PROPELLER) AIRPLANE—Continued
QPS REQUIREMENT
The performance parameters in this table must be used to program the FTD if flight test data is not used to program the FTD.
Applicable test
Authorized performance range
Entry
No.
Title and procedure
OR
(b) Trim for straight and level flight with flaps extended to 50% of
full flap travel, at a constant airspeed within the flaps-extended
airspeed range. Do not adjust trim or power. Retract the flaps
to zero. After stabilized, record stick force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
2.c.4. ....
5–15 lbs (2.2–6.6 daN) of force (Push).
Gear change force
(a) Trim for straight and level flight with landing gear retracted at
a constant airspeed within the landing gear-extended airspeed
range. Do not adjust trim or power. Extend the landing gear.
After stabilized, record stick force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
2–12 lbs (0.88–5.3 daN) of force (Pull).
OR
(b) Trim for straight and level flight with landing gear extended, at
a constant airspeed within the landing gear-extended airspeed
range. Do not adjust trim or power. Retract the landing gear.
After stabilized, record stick force necessary to maintain original airspeed.
2–12 lbs (0.88–5.3 daN) of force (Push).
2.b.5. ....
Longitudinal trim ..............................................................................
Must be able to trim longitudinal stick force to ‘‘zero’’ in each of
the following configurations: cruise; approach; and landing.
2.c.7. ....
Longitudinal static stability ..............................................................
Must exhibit positive static stability.
2.c.8. ....
Stall warning (actuation of stall warning device) with nominal
gross weight; wings level; and a deceleration rate of not more
than three (3) knots per second.
80–100 knots; # 5° of bank.
(b) Clean configuration ....................................................................
Landing configuration speed + 10–20%.
2.c.8.b.
Phugoid dynamics ...........................................................................
Must have a phugoid with a period of 30–60 seconds. May not
reach 1⁄2 or double amplitude in less than 2 cycles.
2.d. .......
Lateral Directional Tests
2.d.2. ....
Roll response ..................................................................................
Roll rate must be measured through at least 30° of roll. Aileron
control must be deflected 1/3 (33.3 percent) of maximum travel.
Must have a roll rate of 4–25 degrees/second.
2.d.4.b.
Spiral stability ..................................................................................
Cruise configuration and normal cruise airspeed. Establish a 20°–
30° bank. When stabilized, neutralize the aileron control and
release. Must be completed in both directions of turn.
Initial bank angle (± 5°) after 20 seconds.
2.d.6.b.
Rudder response .............................................................................
Use 25 percent of maximum rudder deflection. (Applicable to approach or landing configuration.)
3°–6° /second yaw rate.
2.d.7. ....
Dutch roll, yaw damper off ..............................................................
(Applicable to cruise and approach configurations.)
A period of 2–5 seconds; and 1⁄2–2 cycles.
2.d.8. ....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
(a) Landing configuration ................................................................
Steady state sideslip .......................................................................
Use 50 percent rudder deflection. (Applicable to approach and
landing configurations.)
2°–10° of bank;
4°–10° of sideslip; and
2°–10° of aileron.
6. FTD System Response Time
6.a. .......
Flight deck instrument systems response to an abrupt pilot controller input. One test is required in each axis (pitch, roll, yaw).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00137
Fmt 4701
300 milliseconds or less.
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26614
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
5. Alternative Data Sources, Procedures, and
Instrumentation: Level 6 FTD Only
a. Sponsors are not required to use the
alternative data sources, procedures, and
instrumentation. However, a sponsor may
choose to use one or more of the alternative
sources, procedures, and instrumentation
described in Table B2F.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
b. It has become standard practice for
experienced FTD manufacturers to use such
techniques as a means of establishing data
bases for new FTD configurations while
awaiting the availability of actual flight test
data; and then comparing this new data with
the newly available flight test data. The
results of such comparisons have, as reported
by some recognized and experienced
simulation experts, become increasingly
consistent and indicate that these techniques,
applied with appropriate experience, are
becoming dependably accurate for the
development of aerodynamic models for use
in Level 6 FTDs.
c. In reviewing this history, the NSPM has
concluded that, with proper care, those who
are experienced in the development of
aerodynamic models for FTD application can
successfully use these modeling techniques
to acceptably alter the method by which
flight test data may be acquired and, when
applied to Level 6 FTDs, does not
compromise the quality of that simulation.
d. The information in the table that follows
(Table of Alternative Data Sources,
Procedures, and Information: Level 6 FTD
Only) is presented to describe an acceptable
alternative to data sources for Level 6 FTD
modeling and validation, and an acceptable
alternative to the procedures and
instrumentation found in the flight test
methods traditionally accepted for gathering
modeling and validation data.
(1) Alternative data sources that may be
used for part or all of a data requirement are
the Airplane Maintenance Manual, the
Airplane Flight Manual (AFM), Airplane
Design Data, the Type Inspection Report
(TIR), Certification Data or acceptable
supplemental flight test data.
(2) The NSPM recommends that use of the
alternative instrumentation noted in Table
B2F be coordinated with the NSPM prior to
employment in a flight test or data gathering
effort.
e. The NSPM position regarding the use of
these alternative data sources, procedures,
and instrumentation is based on three
primary preconditions and presumptions
regarding the objective data and FTD
aerodynamic program modeling.
(1) Data gathered through the alternative
means does not require angle of attack (AOA)
measurements or control surface position
measurements for any flight test. AOA can be
sufficiently derived if the flight test program
insures the collection of acceptable level,
unaccelerated, trimmed flight data. Angle of
attack may be validated by conducting the
three basic ‘‘fly-by’’ trim tests. The FTD time
history tests should begin in level,
unaccelerated, and trimmed flight, and the
results should be compared with the flight
test pitch angle.
(2) A simulation controls system model
should be rigorously defined and fully
mature. It should also include accurate
gearing and cable stretch characteristics
(where applicable) that are determined from
actual aircraft measurements. Such a model
does not require control surface position
measurements in the flight test objective data
for Level 6 FTD applications.
f. Table B2F is not applicable to Computer
Controlled Aircraft FTDs.
g. Utilization of these alternate data
sources, procedures, and instrumentation
does not relieve the sponsor from compliance
with the balance of the information
contained in this document relative to Level
6 FTDs.
h. The term ‘‘inertial measurement system’’
allows the use of a functional global
positioning system (GPS).
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
TABLE B2F.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCES, PROCEDURES, AND INSTRUMENTATION LEVEL 6 FTD
QPS REQUIREMENTS
The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 9 of Appendix B are not used.
Information
Alternative data sources, procedures, and instrumentation
Notes
1.b.1. ........................................................
Performance.
Takeoff.
Ground acceleration time.
Data may be acquired through a synchronized video recording of a stop watch
and the calibrated airplane airspeed indicator. Hand-record the flight conditions and airplane configuration.
This test is required only if
RTO is sought.
1.b.7. ........................................................
Performance.
Takeoff.
Rejected takeoff.
Data may be acquired through a synchronized video recording of a stop watch
and the calibrated airplane airspeed indicator. Hand-record the flight conditions and airplane configuration.
This test is required only if
RTO is sought.
1.c.1. ........................................................
Performance.
Climb.
Normal climb all engines operating.
Data may be acquired with a synchronized video of calibrated airplane instruments and engine power throughout the climb range.
1.f.1. .........................................................
Performance.
Engines.
Acceleration
Data may be acquired with a synchronized video recording of engine instruments and throttle position.
1.f.2. .........................................................
Performance.
Engines.
Deceleration
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Objective test reference number and title
Data may be acquired with a synchronized video recording of engine instruments and throttle position.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00138
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26615
TABLE B2F.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCES, PROCEDURES, AND INSTRUMENTATION LEVEL 6 FTD—Continued
QPS REQUIREMENTS
The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 9 of Appendix B are not used.
Information
Alternative data sources, procedures, and instrumentation
Notes
2.a.1.a. .....................................................
Handling qualities.
Static control tests.
Pitch controller position vs. force and
surface position calibration.
Surface position data may be acquired from flight data recorder (FDR) sensor
or, if no FDR sensor, at selected, significant column positions (encompassing
significant column position data points), acceptable to the NSPM, using a
control surface protractor on the ground. Force data may be acquired by
using a hand held force gauge at the same column position data points.
For airplanes with
reversible control systems,
surface position
data acquisition
should be accomplished with
winds less than
5 kts.
2.a.2.a. .....................................................
Handling qualities.
Static control tests.
Wheel position vs. force and surface position calibration.
Surface position data may be acquired from flight data recorder (FDR) sensor
or, if no FDR sensor, at selected, significant wheel positions (encompassing
significant wheel position data points), acceptable to the NSPM, using a control surface protractor on the ground. Force data may be acquired by using a
hand held force gauge at the same wheel position data points.
For airplanes with
reversible control systems,
surface position
data acquisition
should be accomplished with
winds less than
5 kts.
2.a.3.a. .....................................................
Handling qualities.
Static control tests.
Rudder pedal position vs. force and surface position calibration.
Surface position data may be acquired from flight data recorder (FDR) sensor
or, if no FDR sensor, at selected, significant rudder pedal positions (encompassing significant rudder pedal position data points), acceptable to the
NSPM, using a control surface protractor on the ground. Force data may be
acquired by using a hand held force gauge at the same rudder pedal position
data points.
For airplanes with
reversible control systems,
surface position
data acquisition
should be accomplished with
winds less than
5 kts.
2.a.4. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Static control tests.
Nosewheel steering force.
Breakout data may be acquired with a hand held force gauge. The remainder of
the force to the stops may be calculated if the force gauge and a protractor
are used to measure force after breakout for at least 25% of the total displacement capability.
2.a.5. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Static control tests.
Rudder pedal steering calibration.
Data may be acquired through the use of force pads on the rudder pedals and
a pedal position measurement device, together with design data for
nosewheel position.
2.a.6. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Static control tests.
Pitch trim indicator vs. surface position
calibration.
Data may be acquired through calculations.
2.a.8. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Static control tests.
Alignment of power lever angle vs. selected engine parameter (e.g., EPR,
N1, Torque, Manifold pressure).
Data may be acquired through the use of a temporary throttle quadrant scale to
document throttle position. Use a synchronized video to record steady state
instrument readings or hand-record steady state engine performance readings.
2.a.9. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Static control tests.
Brake pedal position vs. force.
Use of design or predicted data is acceptable. Data may be acquired by measuring deflection at ‘‘zero’’ and at ‘‘maximum.’’
2.c.1. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Longitudinal control tests.
Power change force.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Objective test reference number and title
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of the calibrated airplane instruments, throttle position, and
the force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00139
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Power change dynamics test is
acceptable
using the same
data acquisition
methodology.
26616
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE B2F.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCES, PROCEDURES, AND INSTRUMENTATION LEVEL 6 FTD—Continued
QPS REQUIREMENTS
The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 9 of Appendix B are not used.
Information
Alternative data sources, procedures, and instrumentation
Notes
2.c.2. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Longitudinal control tests.
Flap/slat change force.
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of calibrated airplane instruments, flap/slat position, and the
force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
Flap/slat change
dynamics test is
acceptable
using the same
data acquisition
methodology.
2.c.4. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Longitudinal control tests.
Gear change force.
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of the calibrated airplane instruments, gear position, and the
force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
Gear change dynamics test is
acceptable
using the same
data acquisition
methodology.
2.c.5. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Longitudinal control tests.
Longitudinal trim.
Data may be acquired through use of an inertial measurement system and a
synchronized video of flight deck controls position (previously calibrated to
show related surface position) and engine instrument readings.
2.c.6. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Longitudinal control tests.
Longitudinal maneuvering stability (stick
force/g).
Data may be acquired through the use of an inertial measurement system and a
synchronized video of the calibrated airplane instruments; a temporary, high
resolution bank angle scale affixed to the attitude indicator; and a wheel and
column force measurement indication.
2.c.7. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Longitudinal control tests.
Longitudinal static stability
Data may be acquired through the use of a synchronized video of the airplane
flight instruments and a hand held force gauge.
2.c.8. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Longitudinal control tests.
Stall Warning (activation of stall warning
device).
Data may be acquired through a synchronized video recording of a stop watch
and the calibrated airplane airspeed indicator. Hand-record the flight conditions and airplane configuration.
2.c.9.a. .....................................................
Handling qualities.
Longitudinal control tests.
Phugoid dynamics.
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of the calibrated airplane instruments and the force/position
measurements of flight deck controls.
2.c.10. ......................................................
Handling qualities.
Longitudinal control tests.
Short period dynamics.
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of the calibrated airplane instruments and the force/position
measurements of flight deck controls.
2.c.11. ......................................................
Handling qualities.
Longitudinal control tests.
Gear and flap/slat operating times.
May use design data, production flight test schedule, or maintenance specification, together with an SOC.
2.d.2. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Lateral directional tests.
Roll response (rate).
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of the calibrated airplane instruments and the force/position
measurements of flight deck lateral controls.
2.d.3. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Lateral directional tests.
(a) Roll overshoot.
OR
(b) Roll response to flight deck roll controller step input.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Objective test reference number and title
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of the calibrated airplane instruments and the force/position
measurements of flight deck lateral controls.
2.d.4. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Lateral directional tests.
Spiral stability.
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of the calibrated airplane instruments; the force/position
measurements of flight deck controls; and a stop watch.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00140
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Airspeeds may be
cross checked
with those in the
TIR and AFM.
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26617
TABLE B2F.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCES, PROCEDURES, AND INSTRUMENTATION LEVEL 6 FTD—Continued
QPS REQUIREMENTS
The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 9 of Appendix B are not used.
Objective test reference number and title
Alternative data sources, procedures, and instrumentation
2.d.6.a. .....................................................
Handling qualities.
Lateral directional tests.
Rudder response.
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of the calibrated airplane instruments; the force/position
measurements of rudder pedals.
2.d.7. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Lateral directional tests.
Dutch roll, (yaw damper OFF).
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of the calibrated airplane instruments and the force/position
measurements of flight deck controls.
2.d.8. ........................................................
Handling qualities.
Lateral directional tests.
Steady state sideslip.
Information
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of the calibrated airplane instruments and the force/position
measurements of flight deck controls.
Attachment 3 to Appendix B to Part 60—
Flight Training Device (FTD) Subjective
Evaluation
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
1. Discussion
a. The subjective tests provide a basis for
evaluating the capability of the FTD to
perform over a typical utilization period. The
items listed in the Table of Functions and
Subjective Tests are used to determine
whether the FTD competently simulates each
required maneuver, procedure, or task; and
verifying correct operation of the FTD
controls, instruments, and systems. The tasks
do not limit or exceed the authorizations for
use of a given level of FTD as described on
the SOQ or as approved by the TPAA. All
items in the following paragraphs are subject
to examination.
b. All simulated airplane systems functions
will be assessed for normal and, where
appropriate, alternate operations. Simulated
airplane systems are listed separately under
‘‘Any Flight Phase’’ to ensure appropriate
attention to systems checks. Operational
navigation systems (including inertial
navigation systems, global positioning
systems, or other long-range systems) and the
associated electronic display systems will be
evaluated if installed. The NSP pilot will
include in his report to the TPAA, the effect
Notes
of the system operation and any system
limitation.
c. At the request of the TPAA, the NSP
Pilot may assess the FTD for a special aspect
of a sponsor’s training program during the
functions and subjective portion of an
evaluation. Such an assessment may include
a portion of a specific operation (e.g., a Line
Oriented Flight Training (LOFT) scenario) or
special emphasis items in the sponsor’s
training program. Unless directly related to a
requirement for the qualification level, the
results of such an evaluation would not affect
the qualification of the FTD.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
TABLE B3A.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 6 FTD
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Operations tasks
Tasks in this table are subject to evaluation if appropriate for the airplane system or systems simulated as indicated in the SOQ Configuration
List as defined in Appendix B, Attachment 2 of this part.
1. Preflight
Accomplish a functions check of all installed switches, indicators, systems, and equipment at all crewmembers’ and instructors’ stations, and determine that the flight deck (or flight deck area) design and functions replicate the appropriate airplane.
2. Surface Operations (pre-takeoff)
2.a. .......
Engine start:
2.a.1. ....
Normal start.
2.a.2. ....
Alternative procedures start.
2.a.3. ....
Abnormal procedures start/shut down.
2.b. .......
Pushback/Powerback (powerback requires visual system).
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
3. Takeoff (requires appropriate visual system as set out in Table B1A, item 6; Appendix B, Attachment 1.)
3.a. .......
Instrument takeoff:
3.a.1. ....
Engine checks (e.g., engine parameter relationships, propeller/mixture controls).
3.a.2. ....
Acceleration characteristics.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00141
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26618
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE B3A.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 6 FTD—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Operations tasks
3.a.3. ....
Nosewheel/rudder steering.
3.a.4. ....
Landing gear, wing flap, leading edge device operation.
3.b. .......
Rejected takeoff:
3.b.1. ....
Deceleration characteristics.
3.b.2. ....
Brakes/engine reverser/ground spoiler operation.
3.b.3. ....
Nosewheel/rudder steering.
4. In-Flight Operations
Normal climb.
4.b. .......
Cruise:
4.b.1. ....
Demonstration of performance characteristics (speed vs. power).
4.b.2. ....
Normal turns.
4.b.3. ....
Demonstration of high altitude handling.
4.b.4. ....
Demonstration of high airspeed handling/overspeed warning.
4.b.5. ....
Demonstration of Mach effects on control and trim.
4.b.6. ....
Steep turns.
4.b.7. ....
In-Flight engine shutdown (procedures only).
4.b.8. ....
In-Flight engine restart (procedures only).
4.b.9. ....
Specific flight characteristics.
4.b.10. ..
Response to loss of flight control power.
4.b.11. ..
Response to other flight control system failure modes.
4.b.12. ..
Operations during icing conditions.
4.b.13. ..
Effects of airframe/engine icing.
4.c. .......
Other flight phase:
4.c.1. ....
Approach to stalls in the following configurations:
4.c.1.a.
Cruise.
4.c.1.b.
Takeoff or approach.
4.c.1.c.
Landing.
4.c.2. ....
High angle of attack maneuvers in the following configurations:
4.c.2.a.
Cruise.
4.c.2.b.
Takeoff or approach.
4.c.2.c.
Landing.
4.c.3. ....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
4.a. .......
Slow flight.
4.c.4. ....
Holding.
5. Approaches
5.a.
Non-precision Instrument Approaches:
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00142
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26619
TABLE B3A.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 6 FTD—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Operations tasks
5.a.1. ....
With use of autopilot and autothrottle, as applicable.
5.a.2. ....
Without use of autopilot and autothrottle, as applicable.
5.a.3. ....
With 10 knot tail wind.
5.a.4. ....
With 10 knot crosswind.
5.b. .......
Precision Instrument Approaches:
5.b.1. ....
With use of autopilot, autothrottle, and autoland, as applicable.
5.b.2. ....
Without use of autopilot, autothrottle, and autoland, as applicable.
5.b.3. ....
With 10 knot tail wind.
5.b.4. ....
With 10 knot crosswind.
6. Missed Approach
6.a. .......
Manually controlled.
6.b. .......
Automatically controlled (if applicable).
7. Any Flight Phase, as appropriate
7.a. .......
Normal system operation (installed systems).
7.b. .......
Abnormal/Emergency system operation (installed systems).
7.c. .......
Flap operation.
7.d. .......
Landing gear operation.
7.e. .......
Engine Shutdown and Parking.
7.e.1. ....
Systems operation.
7.e.2. ....
Parking brake operation.
8. Instructor Operating Station (IOS), as appropriate. Functions in this section are subject to evaluation only if appropriate for the airplane
and/or installed on the specific FTD involved
Power Switch(es).
8.b. .......
Airplane conditions.
8.b.1. ....
Gross weight, center of gravity, and fuel loading and allocation.
8.b.2. ....
Airplane systems status.
8.b.3. ....
Ground crew functions (e.g., external power, push back).
8.c. .......
Airports.
8.c.1. ....
Selection.
8.c.2. ....
Runway selection.
8.c.3. ....
Preset positions (e.g., ramp, over FAF).
8.d. .......
Environmental controls.
8.d.1. ....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
8.a. .......
Temperature.
8.d.2. ....
Climate conditions (e.g., ice, rain).
8.d.3. ....
Wind speed and direction.
8.e. .......
Airplane system malfunctions.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00143
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26620
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE B3A.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 6 FTD—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Operations tasks
8.e.1. ....
Insertion/deletion.
8.e.2. ....
Problem clear.
8.f. ........
Locks, Freezes, and Repositioning.
8.f.1. .....
Problem (all) freeze/release.
8.f.2. .....
Position (geographic) freeze/release.
8.f.3. .....
Repositioning (locations, freezes, and releases).
8.f.4. .....
Ground speed control.
8.f.5. .....
Remote IOS, if installed.
9. Sound Controls. On/off/adjustment
10. Control Loading System (as applicable) On/off/emergency stop.
11. Observer Stations.
11.a. .....
Position.
11.b. .....
Adjustments.
End QPS Requirements
TABLE B3B.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 5 FTD
QPS requirements
Operations tasks
Tasks in this table are subject to evaluation if appropriate for the airplane system or systems simulated as indicated in the SOQ Configuration List as defined in Appendix B, Attachment 2 of this part.
Entry
No.
1. Preflight
Accomplish a functions check of all installed switches, indicators, systems, and equipment at all crewmembers’ and instructors’ stations, and determine that the flight deck (or flight deck area) design and functions replicate the appropriate airplane.
2. Surface Operations (pre-takeoff)
2.a. .......
Engine start (if installed):
2.a.1. ....
Normal start.
2.a.2. ....
Alternative procedures start.
2.a.3. ....
Abnormal/Emergency procedures start/shut down.
3. In-Flight Operations
3.a. .......
Normal climb.
3.b. .......
Cruise:
3.b.1. ....
Performance characteristics (speed vs. power).
3.b.2. ....
Normal turns.
3.c. .......
Normal descent.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
4. Approaches
4.a. .......
Coupled instrument approach maneuvers (as applicable for the systems installed).
5. Any Flight Phase
5.a. .......
Normal system operation (Installed systems).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00144
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26621
TABLE B3B.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 5 FTD—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Operations tasks
Tasks in this table are subject to evaluation if appropriate for the airplane system or systems simulated as indicated in the SOQ Configuration List as defined in Appendix B, Attachment 2 of this part.
5.b. .......
Abnormal/Emergency system operation (Installed systems).
5.c. .......
Flap operation.
5.d. .......
Landing gear operation
5.e. .......
Engine Shutdown and Parking (if installed).
5.e.1. ....
Systems operation.
5.e.2. ....
Parking brake operation.
6. Instructor Operating Station (IOS)
6.a. .......
Power Switch(es).
6.b. .......
Preset positions—ground, air.
6.c. .......
Airplane system malfunctions (Installed systems).
6.c.1. ....
Insertion/deletion.
6.c.2. ....
Problem clear.
TABLE B3C.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 4 FTD
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Operations tasks
Tasks in this table are subject to evaluation if appropriate for the airplane system or systems simulated as indicated in the SOQ Configuration List as defined in Appendix B, Attachment 2 of this part.
1. ..........
Level 4 FTDs are required to have at least one operational system. The NSPM will accomplish a functions check of all installed systems, switches, indicators, and equipment at all crewmembers’ and instructors’ stations, and determine that the flight deck (or flight
deck area) design and functions replicate the appropriate airplane.
Attachment 4 to Appendix B to Part 60—
Sample Documents
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Table of Contents
Title of Sample
Figure B4A Sample Letter, Request for
Initial, Upgrade, or Reinstatement
Evaluation
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
Figure B4B Attachment: FTD Information
Form
Figure B4C Sample Letter of Compliance
Figure B4D Sample Qualification Test
Guide Cover Page
Figure B4E Sample Statement of
Qualification—Certificate
Figure B4F Sample Statement of
Qualification—Configuration List
Figure B4G Sample Statement of
Qualification—List of Qualified Tasks
PO 00000
Frm 00145
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Figure B4H Sample Continuing
Qualification Evaluation Requirements
Page
Figure B4I Sample MQTG Index of Effective
FTD Directives
BILLING CODE 4910–13–P
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00146
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.020
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26622
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00147
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26623
ER09MY08.021
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00148
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.022
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26624
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00149
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26625
ER09MY08.023
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00150
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.024
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26626
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00151
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26627
ER09MY08.025
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00152
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.026
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26628
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00153
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26629
ER09MY08.028
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00154
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.029
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26630
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00155
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26631
ER09MY08.030
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00156
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.031
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26632
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00157
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26633
ER09MY08.032
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26634
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
llllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
This appendix establishes the standards for
Helicopter FFS evaluation and qualification.
The NSPM is responsible for the
development, application, and
implementation of the standards contained
within this appendix. The procedures and
criteria specified in this appendix will be
used by the NSPM, or a person assigned by
the NSPM, when conducting helicopter FFS
evaluations.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Table of Contents
1. Introduction.
2. Applicability (§ 60.1) and (§ 60.2).
3. Definitions (§ 60.3).
4. Qualification Performance Standards
(§ 60.4).
5. Quality Management System (§ 60.5).
6. Sponsor Qualification Requirements
(§ 60.7).
7. Additional Responsibilities of the Sponsor
(§ 60.9).
8. FFS Use (§ 60.11).
9. FFS Objective Data Requirements (§ 60.13).
10. Special Equipment and Personnel
Requirements for Qualification of the
FFS (§ 60.14).
11. Initial (and Upgrade) Qualification
Requirements (§ 60.15).
12. Additional Qualifications for a Currently
Qualified FFS (§ 60.16).
13. Previously Qualified FFSs (§ 60.17).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
00:25 May 09, 2008
Jkt 214001
14. Inspection, Continuing Qualification
Evaluation, and Maintenance
Requirements (§ 60.19).
15. Logging FFS Discrepancies (§ 60.20).
16. Interim Qualification of FFSs for New
Helicopter Types or Models (§ 60.21).
17. Modifications to FFSs (§ 60.23).
18. Operations with Missing, Malfunctioning,
or Inoperative Components (§ 60.25).
19. Automatic Loss of Qualification and
Procedures for Restoration of
Qualification (§ 60.27).
20. Other Losses of Qualification and
Procedures for Restoration of
Qualification (§ 60.29).
21. Record Keeping and Reporting (§ 60.31).
22. Applications, Logbooks, Reports, and
Records: Fraud, Falsification, or
Incorrect Statements (§ 60.33).
23. [Reserved].
24. [Reserved]
25. FFS Qualification on the Basis of a
Bilateral Aviation Safety Agreement
(BASA) (§ 60.37).
Attachment 1 to Appendix C to Part 60—
General Simulator Requirements.
Attachment 2 to Appendix C to Part 60—FFS
Objective Tests.
Attachment 3 to Appendix C to Part 60—
Simulator Subjective Evaluation.
Attachment 4 to Appendix C to Part 60—
Sample Documents.
Attachment 5 to Appendix C to Part 60—
FSTD Directives Applicable to
Helicopter FFSs
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
PO 00000
Frm 00158
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
1. Introduction
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
a. This appendix contains background
information as well as regulatory and
informative material as described later in this
section. To assist the reader in determining
what areas are required and what areas are
permissive, the text in this appendix is
divided into two sections: ‘‘QPS
Requirements’’ and ‘‘Information.’’ The QPS
Requirements sections contain details
regarding compliance with the part 60 rule
language. These details are regulatory, but are
found only in this appendix. The Information
sections contain material that is advisory in
nature, and designed to give the user general
information about the regulation.
b. Questions regarding the contents of this
publication should be sent to the U.S.
Department of Transportation, Federal
Aviation Administration, Flight Standards
Service, National Simulator Program Staff,
AFS–205, 100 Hartsfield Centre Parkway,
Suite 400, Atlanta, Georgia, 30354.
Telephone contact numbers for the NSP are:
phone, 404–832–4700; fax, 404–761–8906.
The general e-mail address for the NSP office
is: 9-aso-avr-sim-team@faa.gov. The NSP
Internet Web site address is: https://
www.faa.gov/safety/programs_initiatives/
aircraft_aviation/nsp/. On this Web Site you
will find an NSP personnel list with
telephone and e-mail contact information for
each NSP staff member, a list of qualified
flight simulation devices, ACs, a description
of the qualification process, NSP policy, and
an NSP ‘‘In-Works’’ section. Also linked from
this site are additional information sources,
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.033
Appendix C to Part 60lQualification
Performance Standards for Helicopter Full
Flight Simulators
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
handbook bulletins, frequently asked
questions, a listing and text of the Federal
Aviation Regulations, Flight Standards
Inspector’s handbooks, and other FAA links.
c. The NSPM encourages the use of
electronic media for all communication,
including any record, report, request, test, or
statement required by this appendix. The
electronic media used must have adequate
security provisions and be acceptable to the
NSPM. The NSPM recommends inquiries on
system compatibility, and minimum system
requirements are also included on the NSP
Web site.
d. Related Reading References.
(1) 14 CFR part 60.
(2) 14 CFR part 61.
(3) 14 CFR part 63.
(4) 14 CFR part 119.
(5) 14 CFR part 121.
(6) 14 CFR part 125.
(7) 14 CFR part 135.
(8) 14 CFR part 141.
(9) 14 CFR part 142.
(10) AC 120–35, as amended, Line
Operational Simulations: Line-Oriented
Flight Training, Special Purpose Operational
Training, Line Operational Evaluation.
(11) AC 120–57, as amended, Surface
Movement Guidance and Control System
(SMGCS).
(12) AC 120–63, as amended, Helicopter
Simulator Qualification.
(13) AC 150/5300–13, as amended, Airport
Design.
(14) AC 150/5340–1, as amended,
Standards for Airport Markings.
(15) AC 150/5340–4, as amended,
Installation Details for Runway Centerline
Touchdown Zone Lighting Systems.
(16) AC 150/5340–19, as amended,
Taxiway Centerline Lighting System.
(17) AC 150/5340–24, as amended,
Runway and Taxiway Edge Lighting System.
(18) AC 150/5345–28, as amended,
Precision Approach Path Indicator (PAPI)
Systems
(19) AC 150/5390–2, as amended, Heliport
Design
(20) International Air Transport
Association document, ‘‘Flight Simulator
Design and Performance Data Requirements,’’
as amended.
(21) AC 29–2, as amended, Flight Test
Guide for Certification of Transport Category
Rotorcraft.
(22) AC 27–1, as amended, Flight Test
Guide for Certification of Normal Category
Rotorcraft.
(23) International Civil Aviation
Organization (ICAO) Manual of Criteria for
the Qualification of Flight Simulators, as
amended.
(24) Airplane Flight Simulator Evaluation
Handbook, Volume I, as amended and
Volume II, as amended, The Royal
Aeronautical Society, London, UK.
(25) FAA Publication FAA–S–8081 series
(Practical Test Standards for Airline
Transport Pilot Certificate, Type Ratings,
Commercial Pilot, and Instrument Ratings).
(26) The FAA Aeronautical Information
Manual (AIM). An electronic version of the
AIM is on the Internet at https://www.faa.gov/
atpubs.
(27) Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (ARINC)
document number 436, titled Guidelines For
VerDate Aug<31>2005
00:22 May 09, 2008
Jkt 214001
Electronic Qualification Test Guide (as
amended).
(28) Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (ARINC)
document 610, Guidance for Design and
Integration of Aircraft Avionics Equipment in
Simulators (as amended).
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
2. Applicability (§§ 60.1 and 60.2)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.1, Applicability, or to
§ 60.2, Applicability of sponsor rules to
person who are not sponsors and who are
engaged in certain unauthorized activities.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
3. Definitions (§ 60.3)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
See Appendix F of this part for a list of
definitions and abbreviations from part 1 and
part 60, including the appropriate
appendices of part 60.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
4. Qualification Performance Standards
(§ 60.4)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.4, Qualification
Performance Standards.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
5. Quality Management System (§ 60.5)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
See Appendix E of this part for additional
regulatory and informational material
regarding Quality Management Systems.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
6. Sponsor Qualification Requirements
(§ 60.7)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
a. The intent of the language in § 60.7(b) is
to have a specific FFS, identified by the
sponsor, used at least once in an FAAapproved flight training program for the
helicopter simulated during the 12-month
period described. The identification of the
specific FFS may change from one 12-month
period to the next 12-month period as long
as that sponsor sponsors and uses at least one
FFS at least once during the prescribed
period. There is no minimum number of
hours or minimum FFS periods required.
b. The following examples describe
acceptable operational practices:
(1) Example One.
PO 00000
Frm 00159
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26635
(a) A sponsor is sponsoring a single,
specific FFS for its own use, in its own
facility or elsewhere—this single FFS forms
the basis for the sponsorship. The sponsor
uses that FFS at least once in each 12-month
period in that sponsor’s FAA-approved flight
training program for the helicopter
simulated. This 12-month period is
established according to the following
schedule:
(i) If the FFS was qualified prior to May 30,
2008, the 12-month period begins on the date
of the first continuing qualification
evaluation conducted in accordance with
§ 60.19 after May 30, 2008, and continues for
each subsequent 12-month period;
(ii) A device qualified on or after May 30,
2008, will be required to undergo an initial
or upgrade evaluation in accordance with
§ 60.15. Once the initial or upgrade
evaluation is complete, the first continuing
qualification evaluation will be conducted
within 6 months. The 12 month continuing
qualification evaluation cycle begins on that
date and continues for each subsequent 12month period.
(b) There is no minimum number of hours
of FFS use required.
(c) The identification of the specific FFS
may change from one 12-month period to the
next 12-month period as long as that sponsor
sponsors and uses at least one FFS at least
once during the prescribed period.
(2) Example Two.
(a) A sponsor sponsors an additional
number of FFSs, in its facility or elsewhere.
Each additionally sponsored FFS must be—
(i) Used by the sponsor in the sponsor’s
FAA-approved flight training program for the
helicopter simulated (as described in
§ 60.7(d)(1)); or
(ii) Used by another FAA certificate holder
in that other certificate holder’s FAAapproved flight training program for the
helicopter simulated (as described in
§ 60.7(d)(1)). This 12-month period is
established in the same manner as in
example one; or
(iii) Provided a statement each year from a
qualified pilot, (after having flown the
helicopter, not the subject FFS or another
FFS, during the preceding 12-month period)
stating that the subject FFS’s performance
and handling qualities represent the
helicopter (as described in § 60.7(d)(2)). This
statement is provided at least once in each
12-month period established in the same
manner as in example one.
(b) There is no minimum number of hours
of FFS use required.
(3) Example Three.
(a) A sponsor in New York (in this
example, a Part 142 certificate holder)
establishes ‘‘satellite’’ training centers in
Chicago and Moscow.
(b) The satellite function means that the
Chicago and Moscow centers must operate
under the New York center’s certificate (in
accordance with all of the New York center’s
practices, procedures, and policies; e.g.,
instructor and/or technician training/
checking requirements, record keeping, QMS
program).
(c) All of the FFSs in the Chicago and
Moscow centers could be dry-leased (i.e., the
certificate holder does not have and use
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26636
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
FAA-approved flight training programs for
the FFSs in the Chicago and Moscow centers)
because—
(i) Each FFS in the Chicago center and each
FFS in the Moscow center is used at least
once each 12-month period by another FAA
certificate holder in that other certificate
holder’s FAA-approved flight training
program for the helicopter (as described in
§ 60.7(d)(1)); OR
(ii) A statement is obtained from a
qualified pilot (having flown the helicopter,
not the subject FFS or another FFS during the
preceding 12-month period) stating that the
performance and handling qualities of each
FFS in the Chicago and Moscow centers
represents the helicopter (as described in
§ 60.7(d)(2)).
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
7. Additional Responsibilities of the
Sponsor (§ 60.9).
Begin Information
The phrase ‘‘as soon as practicable’’ in
§ 60.9(a) means without unnecessarily
disrupting or delaying beyond a reasonable
time the training, evaluation, or experience
being conducted in the FFS.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
8. FFS Use (§ 60.11)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.11, FFS Use.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
9. FFS Objective Data Requirements (§ 60.13)
llllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. Flight test data used to validate FFS
performance and handling qualities must
have been gathered in accordance with a
flight test program containing the following:
(1) A flight test plan consisting of:
(a) The maneuvers and procedures
required for aircraft certification and
simulation programming and validation
(b) For each maneuver or procedure—
(i) The procedures and control input the
flight test pilot and/or engineer used.
(ii) The atmospheric and environmental
conditions.
(iii) The initial flight conditions.
(iv) The helicopter configuration, including
weight and center of gravity.
(v) The data to be gathered.
(vi) All other information necessary to
recreate the flight test conditions in the FFS.
(2) Appropriately qualified flight test
personnel.
(3) An understanding of the accuracy of the
data to be gathered using appropriate
alternative data sources, procedures, and
instrumentation that is traceable to a
recognized standard as described in
Attachment 2, Table C2D of this appendix.
(4) Appropriate and sufficient data
acquisition equipment or system(s),
including appropriate data reduction and
VerDate Aug<31>2005
00:28 May 09, 2008
Jkt 214001
analysis methods and techniques, acceptable
to the FAA’s Aircraft Certification Service.
b. The data, regardless of source, must be
presented:
(1) In a format that supports the FFS
validation process;
(2) In a manner that is clearly readable and
annotated correctly and completely;
(3) With resolution sufficient to determine
compliance with the tolerances set forth in
Attachment 2, Table C2A of this appendix.
(4) With any necessary instructions or
other details provided, such as Stability
Augmentation System (SAS) or throttle
position; and
(5) Without alteration, adjustments, or bias.
Data may be corrected to address known data
calibration errors provided that an
explanation of the methods used to correct
the errors appears in the QTG. The corrected
data may be re-scaled, digitized, or otherwise
manipulated to fit the desired presentation.
c. After completion of any additional flight
test, a flight test report must be submitted in
support of the validation data. The report
must contain sufficient data and rationale to
support qualification of the FFS at the level
requested.
d. As required by § 60.13(f), the sponsor
must notify the NSPM when it becomes
aware that an addition to, an amendment to,
or a revision of data that may relate to FFS
performance or handling characteristics is
available. The data referred to in this
paragraph is data used to validate the
performance, handling qualities, or other
characteristics of the aircraft, including data
related to any relevant changes occurring
after the type certificate was issued. The
sponsor must—
(1) Within 10 calendar days, notify the
NSPM of the existence of this data; and
(2) Within 45 calendar days, notify the
NSPM of—
(a) The schedule to incorporate this data
into the FFS; or
(b) The reason for not incorporating this
data into the FFS.
e. In those cases where the objective test
results authorize a ‘‘snapshot test’’ or a
‘‘series of snapshot test results’’ in lieu of a
time-history result, the sponsor or other data
provider must ensure that a steady state
condition exists at the instant of time
captured by the ‘‘snapshot.’’ The steady state
condition must exist from 4 seconds prior to,
through 1 second following, the instant of
time captured by the snap shot.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
f. The FFS sponsor is encouraged to
maintain a liaison with the manufacturer of
the aircraft being simulated (or with the
holder of the aircraft type certificate for the
aircraft being simulated if the manufacturer
is no longer in business), and, if appropriate,
with the person who supplied the aircraft
data package for the FFS in order to facilitate
the notification required by § 60.13(f).
g. It is the intent of the NSPM that for new
aircraft entering service, at a point well in
advance of preparation of the QTG, the
sponsor should submit to the NSPM for
approval, a descriptive document (see Table
C2D, Sample Validation Data Roadmap for
PO 00000
Frm 00160
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Helicopters) containing the plan for acquiring
the validation data, including data sources.
This document should clearly identify
sources of data for all required tests, a
description of the validity of these data for
a specific engine type and thrust rating
configuration, and the revision levels of all
avionics affecting the performance or flying
qualities of the aircraft. Additionally, this
document should provide other information,
such as the rationale or explanation for cases
where data or data parameters are missing,
instances where engineering simulation data
are used or where flight test methods require
further explanations. It should also provide
a brief narrative describing the cause and
effect of any deviation from data
requirements. The aircraft manufacturer may
provide this document.
h. There is no requirement for any flight
test data supplier to submit a flight test plan
or program prior to gathering flight test data.
However, the NSPM notes that inexperienced
data gatherers often provide data that is
irrelevant, improperly marked, or lacking
adequate justification for selection. Other
problems include inadequate information
regarding initial conditions or test
maneuvers. The NSPM has been forced to
refuse these data submissions as validation
data for an FFS evaluation. It is for this
reason that the NSPM recommends that any
data supplier not previously experienced in
this area review the data necessary for
programming and for validating the
performance of the FFS, and discuss the
flight test plan anticipated for acquiring such
data with the NSPM well in advance of
commencing the flight tests.
i. The NSPM will consider, on a case-bycase basis, whether to approve supplemental
validation data derived from flight data
recording systems such as a Quick Access
Recorder or Flight Data Recorder.
End Information
10. Special Equipment and Personnel
Requirements for Qualification of the FFS
(§ 60.14)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
a. In the event that the NSPM determines
that special equipment or specifically
qualified persons will be required to conduct
an evaluation, the NSPM will make every
attempt to notify the sponsor at least one (1)
week, but in no case less than 72 hours, in
advance of the evaluation. Examples of
special equipment include spot photometers,
flight control measurement devices, and
sound analyzers. Examples of specially
qualified personnel include individuals
specifically qualified to install or use any
special equipment when its use is required.
b. Examples of a special evaluation include
an evaluation conducted after an FFS is
moved, at the request of the TPAA, or as a
result of comments received from users of the
FFS that raise questions about the continued
qualification or use of the FFS.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
11. Initial (and Upgrade) Qualification
Requirements (§ 60.15)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. In order to be qualified at a particular
qualification level, the FFS must:
(1) Meet the general requirements listed in
Attachment 1 of this appendix;
(2) Meet the objective testing requirements
listed in Attachment 2 of this appendix; and
(3) Satisfactorily accomplish the subjective
tests listed in Attachment 3 of this appendix.
b. The request described in § 60.15(a) must
include all of the following:
(1) A statement that the FFS meets all of
the applicable provisions of this part and all
applicable provisions of the QPS.
(2) A confirmation that the sponsor will
forward to the NSPM the statement described
in § 60.15(b) in such time as to be received
no later than 5 business days prior to the
scheduled evaluation and may be forwarded
to the NSPM via traditional or electronic
means.
(3) A QTG, acceptable to the NSPM, that
includes all of the following:
(a) Objective data obtained from aircraft
testing or another approved source.
(b) Correlating objective test results
obtained from the performance of the FFS as
prescribed in the appropriate QPS.
(c) The result of FFS subjective tests
prescribed in the appropriate QPS.
(d) A description of the equipment
necessary to perform the evaluation for initial
qualification and the continuing qualification
evaluations.
c. The QTG described in paragraph (a)(3)
of this section, must provide the documented
proof of compliance with the simulator
objective tests in Attachment 2, Table C2A of
this appendix.
d. The QTG is prepared and submitted by
the sponsor, or the sponsor’s agent on behalf
of the sponsor, to the NSPM for review and
approval, and must include, for each
objective test:
(1) Parameters, tolerances, and flight
conditions.
(2) Pertinent and complete instructions for
the conduct of automatic and manual tests.
(3) A means of comparing the FFS test
results to the objective data.
(4) Any other information as necessary, to
assist in the evaluation of the test results.
(5) Other information appropriate to the
qualification level of the FFS.
e. The QTG described in paragraphs (a)(3)
and (b) of this section, must include the
following:
(1) A QTG cover page with sponsor and
FAA approval signature blocks (see
Attachment 4, Figure C4C, of this appendix,
for a sample QTG cover page).
(2) A continuing qualification evaluation
schedule requirements page. This page will
be used by the NSPM to establish and record
the frequency with which continuing
qualification evaluations must be conducted
and any subsequent changes that may be
determined by the NSPM in accordance with
§ 60.19. See Attachment 4 of this appendix,
Figure C4G, for a sample Continuing
Qualification Evaluation Requirements page.
(3) An FFS information page that provides
the information listed in this paragraph (see
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
Attachment 4, Figure C4B, of this appendix
for a sample FFS information page). For
convertible FFSs, the sponsor must submit a
separate page for each configuration of the
FFS.
(a) The sponsor’s FFS identification
number or code.
(b) The helicopter model and series being
simulated.
(c) The aerodynamic data revision number
or reference.
(d) The source of the basic aerodynamic
model and the aerodynamic coefficient data
used to modify the basic model.
(e) The engine model(s) and its data
revision number or reference.
(f) The flight control data revision number
or reference.
(g) The flight management system
identification and revision level.
(h) The FFS model and manufacturer.
(i) The date of FFS manufacture.
(j) The FFS computer identification.
(k) The visual system model and
manufacturer, including display type.
(l) The motion system type and
manufacturer, including degrees of freedom.
(4) A Table of Contents.
(5) A log of revisions and a list of effective
pages.
(6) List of all relevant data references.
(7) A glossary of terms and symbols used
(including sign conventions and units).
(8) Statements of compliance and
capability (SOCs) with certain requirements.
(9) Recording procedures or equipment
required to accomplish the objective tests.
(10) The following information for each
objective test designated in Attachment 2 of
this appendix, Table C2A, as applicable to
the qualification level sought:
(a) Name of the test.
(b) Objective of the test.
(c) Initial conditions.
(d) Manual test procedures.
(e) Automatic test procedures (if
applicable).
(f) Method for evaluating FFS objective test
results.
(g) List of all relevant parameters driven or
constrained during the automatically
conducted test(s).
(h) List of all relevant parameters driven or
constrained during the manually conducted
test(s).
(i) Tolerances for relevant parameters.
(j) Source of Validation Data (document
and page number).
(k) Copy of the Validation Data (if located
in a separate binder, a cross reference for the
identification and page number for pertinent
data location must be provided).
(l) Simulator Objective Test Results as
obtained by the sponsor. Each test result
must reflect the date completed and must be
clearly labeled as a product of the device
being tested.
f. A convertible FFS is addressed as a
separate FFS for each model and series
helicopter to which it will be converted and
for the FAA qualification level sought. If a
sponsor seeks qualification for two or more
models of a helicopter type using a
convertible FFS, the sponsor must submit a
QTG for each helicopter model, or a QTG for
the first helicopter model and a supplement
PO 00000
Frm 00161
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26637
to that QTG for each additional helicopter
model. The NSPM will conduct evaluations
for each helicopter model.
g. Form and manner of presentation of
objective test results in the QTG:
(1) The sponsor’s FFS test results must be
recorded in a manner acceptable to the
NSPM, that allows easy comparison of the
FFS test results to the validation data (e.g.,
use of a multi-channel recorder, line printer,
cross plotting, overlays, transparencies).
(2) FFS results must be labeled using
terminology common to helicopter
parameters as opposed to computer software
identifications.
(3) Validation data documents included in
a QTG may be photographically reduced only
if such reduction will not alter the graphic
scaling or cause difficulties in scale
interpretation or resolution.
(4) Scaling on graphical presentations must
provide the resolution necessary to evaluate
the parameters shown in Attachment 2, Table
C2A of this appendix.
(5) Tests involving time histories, data
sheets (or transparencies thereof) and FFS
test results must be clearly marked with
appropriate reference points to ensure an
accurate comparison between the FFS and
the helicopter with respect to time. Time
histories recorded via a line printer are to be
clearly identified for cross plotting on the
helicopter data. Over-plots must not obscure
the reference data.
h. The sponsor may elect to complete the
QTG objective and subjective tests at the
manufacturer’s facility or at the sponsor’s
training facility. If the tests are conducted at
the manufacturer’s facility, the sponsor must
repeat at least one-third of the tests at the
sponsor’s training facility in order to
substantiate FFS performance. The QTG must
be clearly annotated to indicate when and
where each test was accomplished. Tests
conducted at the manufacturer’s facility and
at the sponsor’s training facility must be
conducted after the FFS is assembled with
systems and sub-systems functional and
operating in an interactive manner. The test
results must be submitted to the NSPM.
i. The sponsor must maintain a copy of the
MQTG at the FFS location.
j. All FFSs for which the initial
qualification is conducted after May 30,
2014, must have an electronic MQTG
(eMQTG) including all objective data
obtained from helicopter testing, or another
approved source (reformatted or digitized),
together with correlating objective test results
obtained from the performance of the FFS
(reformatted or digitized) as prescribed in
this appendix. The eMQTG must also contain
the general FFS performance or
demonstration results (reformatted or
digitized) prescribed in this appendix, and a
description of the equipment necessary to
perform the initial qualification evaluation
and the continuing qualification evaluations.
The eMQTG must include the original
validation data used to validate FFS
performance and handling qualities in either
the original digitized format from the data
supplier or an electronic scan of the original
time-history plots that were provided by the
data supplier. A copy of the eMQTG must be
provided to the NSPM.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26638
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
k. All other FFSs not covered in
subparagraph ‘‘j’’ must have an electronic
copy of the MQTG by May 30, 2014. An
electronic copy of the MQTG must be
provided to the NSPM. This may be provided
by an electronic scan presented in a Portable
Document File (PDF), or similar format
acceptable to the NSPM.
l. During the initial (or upgrade)
qualification evaluation conducted by the
NSPM, the sponsor must also provide a
person who is a user of the device (e.g., a
qualified pilot or instructor pilot with flight
time experience in that aircraft) and
knowledgeable about the operation of the
aircraft and the operation of the FFS.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
m. Only those FFSs that are sponsored by
a certificate holder as defined in Appendix
F of this part will be evaluated by the NSPM.
However, other FFS evaluations may be
conducted on a case-by-case basis as the
Administrator deems appropriate, but only in
accordance with applicable agreements.
n. The NSPM will conduct an evaluation
for each configuration, and each FFS must be
evaluated as completely as possible. To
ensure a thorough and uniform evaluation,
each FFS is subjected to the general
simulator requirements in Attachment 1 of
this appendix, the objective tests listed in
Attachment 2 of this appendix, and the
subjective tests listed in Attachment 3 of this
appendix. The evaluations described herein
will include, but not necessarily be limited
to the following:
(1) Helicopter responses, including
longitudinal and lateral-directional control
responses (see Attachment 2 of this
appendix).
(2) Performance in authorized portions of
the simulated helicopter’s operating
envelope, to include tasks evaluated by the
NSPM in the areas of surface operations,
takeoff, climb, cruise, descent, approach, and
landing as well as abnormal and emergency
operations (see Attachment 2 of this
appendix).
(3) Control checks (see Attachment 1 and
Attachment 2 of this appendix).
(4) Flight deck configuration (see
Attachment 1 of this appendix).
(5) Pilot, flight engineer, and instructor
station functions checks (see Attachment 1
and Attachment 3 of this appendix).
(6) Helicopter systems and sub-systems (as
appropriate) as compared to the helicopter
simulated (see Attachment 1 and Attachment
3 of this appendix).
(7) FFS systems and sub-systems,
including force cueing (motion), visual, and
aural (sound) systems, as appropriate (see
Attachment 1 and Attachment 2 of this
appendix).
(8) Certain additional requirements,
depending upon the qualification level
sought, including equipment or
circumstances that may become hazardous to
the occupants. The sponsor may be subject to
Occupational Safety and Health
Administration requirements.
o. The NSPM administers the objective and
subjective tests, which includes an
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
examination of functions. The tests include
a qualitative assessment of the FFS by an
NSP pilot. The NSP evaluation team leader
may assign other qualified personnel to assist
in accomplishing the functions examination
and/or the objective and subjective tests
performed during an evaluation when
required.
(1) Objective tests provide a basis for
measuring and evaluating FFS performance
and determining compliance with the
requirements of this part.
(2) Subjective tests provide a basis for:
(a) Evaluating the capability of the FFS to
perform over a typical utilization period;
(b) Determining that the FFS satisfactorily
simulates each required task;
(c) Verifying correct operation of the FFS
controls, instruments, and systems; and
(d) Demonstrating compliance with the
requirements of this part.
p. The tolerances for the test parameters
listed in Attachment 2 of this appendix
reflect the range of tolerances acceptable to
the NSPM for FFS validation and are not to
be confused with design tolerances specified
for FFS manufacture. In making decisions
regarding tests and test results, the NSPM
relies on the use of operational and
engineering judgment in the application of
data (including consideration of the way in
which the flight test was flown and way the
data was gathered and applied), data
presentations, and the applicable tolerances
for each test.
q. In addition to the scheduled continuing
qualification evaluation, each FFS is subject
to evaluations conducted by the NSPM at any
time without prior notification to the
sponsor. Such evaluations would be
accomplished in a normal manner (i.e.,
requiring exclusive use of the FFS for the
conduct of objective and subjective tests and
an examination of functions) if the FFS is not
being used for flight crewmember training,
testing, or checking. However, if the FFS
were being used, the evaluation would be
conducted in a non-exclusive manner. This
non-exclusive evaluation will be conducted
by the FFS evaluator accompanying the
check airman, instructor, Aircrew Program
Designee (APD), or FAA inspector aboard the
FFS along with the student(s) and observing
the operation of the FFS during the training,
testing, or checking activities.
r. Problems with objective test results are
handled as follows:
(1) If a problem with an objective test result
is detected by the NSP evaluation team
during an evaluation, the test may be
repeated or the QTG may be amended.
(2) If it is determined that the results of an
objective test do not support the level
requested but do support a lower level, the
NSPM may qualify the FFS at that lower
level. For example, if a Level D evaluation is
requested and the FFS fails to meet sound
test tolerances, it could be qualified at Level
C.
s. After an FFS is successfully evaluated,
the NSPM issues a certificate of qualification
(COQ) to the sponsor. The NSPM
recommends the FFS to the TPAA, who will
approve the FFS for use in a flight training
program. The COQ will be issued at the
satisfactory conclusion of the initial or
PO 00000
Frm 00162
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
continuing qualification evaluation and will
list the tasks for which the FFS is qualified,
referencing the tasks described in Table C1B
in Attachment 1 of this appendix. However,
it is the sponsor’s responsibility to obtain
TPAA approval prior to using the FFS in an
FAA-approved flight training program.
t. Under normal circumstances, the NSPM
establishes a date for the initial or upgrade
evaluation within ten (10) working days after
determining that a complete QTG is
acceptable. Unusual circumstances may
warrant establishing an evaluation date
before this determination is made. A sponsor
may schedule an evaluation date as early as
6 months in advance. However, there may be
a delay of 45 days or more in rescheduling
and completing the evaluation if the sponsor
is unable to meet the scheduled date. See
Attachment 4, of this appendix, Figure C4A,
Sample Request for Initial, Upgrade, or
Reinstatement Evaluation.
u. The numbering system used for
objective test results in the QTG should
closely follow the numbering system set out
in Attachment 2, FFS Objective Tests, Table
C2A of this appendix.
v. Contact the NSPM or visit the NSPM
Web site for additional information regarding
the preferred qualifications of pilots used to
meet the requirements of § 60.15(d).
w. Examples of the exclusions for which
the FFS might not have been subjectively
tested by the sponsor or the NSPM and for
which qualification might not be sought or
granted, as described in § 60.15(g)(6), include
takeoffs and landing from slopes and
pinnacles.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
12. Additional Qualifications for a Currently
Qualified FFS (§ 60.16)
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.16, Additional
Qualifications for a Currently Qualified FFS.
13. Previously Qualified FFSs (§ 60.17)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. In instances where a sponsor plans to
remove an FFS from active status for a period
of less than two years, the following
procedures apply:
(1) The NSPM must be notified in writing
and the notification must include an estimate
of the period that the FFS will be inactive.
(2) Continuing Qualification evaluations
will not be scheduled during the inactive
period.
(3) The NSPM will remove the FFS from
the list of qualified FSTDs on a mutually
established date not later than the date on
which the first missed continuing
qualification evaluation would have been
scheduled.
(4) Before the FFS is restored to qualified
status, it must be evaluated by the NSPM.
The evaluation content and the time required
to accomplish the evaluation is based on the
number of continuing qualification
evaluations and sponsor-conducted quarterly
inspections missed during the period of
inactivity.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
(5) The sponsor must notify the NSPM of
any changes to the original scheduled time
out of service.
b. Simulators qualified prior to May 30,
2008, are not required to meet the general
simulation requirements, the objective test
requirements, and the subjective test
requirements of attachments 1, 2, and 3, of
this appendix as long as the simulator
continues to meet the test requirements
contained in the MQTG developed under the
original qualification basis.
c. After May 30, 2009, each visual scene or
airport model beyond the minimum required
for the FFS qualification level that is
installed in and available for use in a
qualified FFS must meet the requirements
described in Attachment 3 of this appendix.
d. Simulators qualified prior to May 30,
2008, may be updated. If an evaluation is
deemed appropriate or necessary by the
NSPM after such an update, the evaluation
will not require an evaluation to standards
beyond those against which the simulator
was originally qualified.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
e. Other certificate holders or persons
desiring to use an FFS may contract with FFS
sponsors to use FFSs previously qualified at
a particular level for a helicopter type and
approved for use within an FAA-approved
flight training program. Such FFSs are not
required to undergo an additional
qualification process, except as described in
§ 60.16.
f. Each FFS user must obtain approval from
the appropriate TPAA to use any FFS in an
FAA-approved flight training program.
g. The intent of the requirement listed in
§ 60.17(b), for each FFS to have an SOQ
within 6 years, is to have the availability of
that statement (including the configuration
list and the limitations to authorizations) to
provide a complete picture of the FFS
inventory regulated by the FAA. The
issuance of the statement will not require any
additional evaluation or require any
adjustment to the evaluation basis for the
FFS.
h. Downgrading of an FFS is a permanent
change in qualification level and will
necessitate the issuance of a revised SOQ to
reflect the revised qualification level, as
appropriate. If a temporary restriction is
placed on an FFS because of a missing,
malfunctioning, or inoperative component or
on-going repairs, the restriction is not a
permanent change in qualification level.
Instead, the restriction is temporary and is
removed when the reason for the restriction
has been resolved.
i. The NSPM will determine the evaluation
criteria for an FFS that has been removed
from active status. The criteria will be based
on the number of continuing qualification
evaluations and quarterly inspections missed
during the period of inactivity. For example,
if the FFS were out of service for a 1 year
period, it would be necessary to complete the
entire QTG, since all of the quarterly
evaluations would have been missed. The
NSPM will also consider how the FFS was
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
stored, whether parts were removed from the
FFS and whether the FFS was disassembled.
j. The FFS will normally be requalified
using the FAA-approved MQTG and the
criteria that was in effect prior to its removal
from qualification. However, inactive periods
of 2 years or more will require requalification
under the standards in effect and current at
the time of requalification.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
14. Inspection, Continuing Qualification
Evaluation, and Maintenance Requirements
(§ 60.19)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. The sponsor must conduct a minimum
of four evenly spaced inspections throughout
the year. The objective test sequence and
content of each inspection must be
developed by the sponsor and must be
acceptable to the NSPM.
b. The description of the functional
preflight check must be contained in the
sponsor’s QMS.
c. Record ‘‘functional preflight’’ in the FFS
discrepancy log book or other acceptable
location, including any item found to be
missing, malfunctioning, or inoperative.
d. During the continuing qualification
evaluation conducted by the NSPM, the
sponsor must also provide a person
knowledgeable about the operation of the
aircraft and the operation of the FFS.
e. The NSPM will conduct continuing
qualification evaluations every 12 months
unless:
(1) The NSPM becomes aware of
discrepancies or performance problems with
the device that warrants more frequent
evaluations; or
(2) The sponsor implements a QMS that
justifies less frequent evaluations. However,
in no case shall the frequency of a continuing
qualification evaluation exceed 36 months.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
f. The sponsor’s test sequence and the
content of each quarterly inspection required
in § 60.19(a)(1) should include a balance and
a mix from the objective test requirement
areas listed as follows:
(1) Performance.
(2) Handling qualities.
(3) Motion system (where appropriate).
(4) Visual system (where appropriate).
(5) Sound system (where appropriate).
(6) Other FFS systems.
g. If the NSP evaluator plans to accomplish
specific tests during a normal continuing
qualification evaluation that requires the use
of special equipment or technicians, the
sponsor will be notified as far in advance of
the evaluation as practical; but not less than
72 hours. Examples of such tests include
latencies, control dynamics, sounds and
vibrations, motion, and/or some visual
system tests.
h. The continuing qualification
evaluations, described in § 60.19(b), will
normally require 4 hours of FFS time.
PO 00000
Frm 00163
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26639
However, flexibility is necessary to address
abnormal situations or situations involving
aircraft with additional levels of complexity
(e.g., computer controlled aircraft). The
sponsor should anticipate that some tests
may require additional time. The continuing
qualification evaluations will consist of the
following:
(1) Review of the results of the quarterly
inspections conducted by the sponsor since
the last scheduled continuing qualification
evaluation.
(2) A selection of approximately 8 to 15
objective tests from the MQTG that provide
an adequate opportunity to evaluate the
performance of the FFS. The tests chosen
will be performed either automatically or
manually and should be able to be conducted
within approximately one-third (1/3) of the
allotted FFS time.
(3) A subjective evaluation of the FFS to
perform a representative sampling of the
tasks set out in attachment 3 of this
appendix. This portion of the evaluation
should take approximately two-thirds (2/3) of
the allotted FFS time.
(4) An examination of the functions of the
FFS may include the motion system, visual
system, sound system, instructor operating
station, and the normal functions and
simulated malfunctions of the simulated
helicopter systems. This examination is
normally accomplished simultaneously with
the subjective evaluation requirements.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
15. Logging FFS Discrepancies (§ 60.20)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.20. Logging FFS
Discrepancies.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
16. Interim Qualification of FFSs for New
Helicopter Types or Models (§ 60.21)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.21, Interim
Qualification of FFSs for New Helicopter
Types or Models.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
17. Modifications to FFSs (§ 60.23)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. The notification described in
§ 60.23(c)(2) must include a complete
description of the planned modification, with
a description of the operational and
engineering effect the proposed modification
will have on the operation of the FFS and the
results that are expected with the
modification incorporated.
b. Prior to using the modified FFS:
(1) All the applicable objective tests
completed with the modification
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26640
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
incorporated, including any necessary
updates to the MQTG (e.g., accomplishment
of FSTD Directives) must be acceptable to the
NSPM; and
(2) The sponsor must provide the NSPM
with a statement signed by the MR that the
factors listed in § 60.15(b) are addressed by
the appropriate personnel as described in
that section.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
(3) FSTD Directives are considered
modifications of an FFS. See Attachment 4 of
this appendix for a sample index of effective
FSTD Directives. See Attachment 6 of this
appendix for a list of all effective FSTD
Directives applicable to Helicopter FFSs.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
18. Operation with Missing, Malfunctioning,
or Inoperative Components (§ 60.25)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
a. The sponsor’s responsibility with respect
to § 60.25(a) is satisfied when the sponsor
fairly and accurately advises the user of the
current status of an FFS, including any
missing, malfunctioning, or inoperative
(MMI) component(s).
b. It is the responsibility of the instructor,
check airman, or representative of the
administrator conducting training, testing, or
checking to exercise reasonable and prudent
judgment to determine if any MMI
component is necessary for the satisfactory
completion of a specific maneuver,
procedure, or task.
c. If the 29th or 30th day of the 30-day
period described in § 60.25(b) is on a
Saturday, a Sunday, or a holiday, the FAA
will extend the deadline until the next
business day.
d. In accordance with the authorization
described in § 60.25(b), the sponsor may
develop a discrepancy prioritizing system to
accomplish repairs based on the level of
impact on the capability of the FFS. Repairs
having a larger impact on FFS capability to
provide the required training, evaluation, or
flight experience will have a higher priority
for repair or replacement.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
19. Automatic Loss of Qualification and
Procedures for Restoration of Qualification
(§ 60.27)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
If the sponsor provides a plan for how the
FFS will be maintained during its out-ofservice period (e.g., periodic exercise of
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical
systems; routine replacement of hydraulic
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
fluid; control of the environmental factors in
which the FFS is to be maintained) there is
a greater likelihood that the NSPM will be
able to determine the amount of testing
required for requalification.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
20. Other Losses of Qualification and
Procedures for Restoration of Qualification
(§ 60.29)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
If the sponsor provides a plan for how the
FFS will be maintained during its out-ofservice period (e.g., periodic exercise of
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical
systems; routine replacement of hydraulic
fluid; control of the environmental factors in
which the FFS is to be maintained) there is
a greater likelihood that the NSPM will be
able to determine the amount of testing
required for requalification.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
21. Record Keeping and Reporting (§ 60.31)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. FFS modifications can include hardware
or software changes. For FFS modifications
involving software programming changes, the
record required by § 60.31(a)(2) must consist
of the name of the aircraft system software,
aerodynamic model, or engine model change,
the date of the change, a summary of the
change, and the reason for the change.
b. If a coded form for record keeping is
used, it must provide for the preservation
and retrieval of information with appropriate
security or controls to prevent the
inappropriate alteration of such records after
the fact.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
22. Applications, Logbooks, Reports, and
Records: Fraud, Falsification, or Incorrect
Statements (§ 60.33)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.33, Applications,
Logbooks, Reports, and Records: Fraud,
Falsification, or Incorrect Statements.
23. [Reserved]
24. [Reserved]
25. FFS Qualification on the Basis of a
Bilateral Aviation Safety Agreement (BASA)
(§ 60.37)
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.37, FFS Qualification
on the Basis of a Bilateral Aviation Safety
Agreement (BASA).
PO 00000
Frm 00164
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
Attachment 1 to Appendix C to Part 60—
GENERAL SIMULATOR REQUIREMENTS
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
1. Requirements
a. Certain requirements included in this
appendix must be supported with an SOC as
defined in Appendix F of this part, which
may include objective and subjective tests.
The requirements for SOCs are indicated in
the ‘‘General Simulator Requirements’’
column in Table C1A of this appendix.
b. Table C1A describes the requirements
for the indicated level of FFS. Many devices
include operational systems or functions that
exceed the requirements outlined in this
section. However, all systems will be tested
and evaluated in accordance with this
appendix to ensure proper operation.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
2. Discussion
a. This attachment describes the general
simulator requirements for qualifying a
helicopter FFS. The sponsor should also
consult the objective tests in Attachment 2 of
this appendix and the examination of
functions and subjective tests listed in
Attachment 3 of this appendix to determine
the complete requirements for a specific level
simulator.
b. The material contained in this
attachment is divided into the following
categories:
(1) General flight deck configuration.
(2) Simulator programming.
(3) Equipment operation.
(4) Equipment and facilities for instructor/
evaluator functions.
(5) Motion system.
(6) Visual system.
(7) Sound system.
c. Table C1A provides the standards for the
General Simulator Requirements.
d. Table C1B provides the tasks that the
sponsor will examine to determine whether
the FFS satisfactorily meets the requirements
for flight crew training, testing, and
experience, and provides the tasks for which
the simulator may be qualified.
e. Table C1C provides the functions that an
instructor/check airman must be able to
control in the simulator.
f. It is not required that all of the tasks that
appear on the List of Qualified Tasks (part of
the SOQ) be accomplished during the initial
or continuing qualification evaluation.
g. Table C1A addresses only Levels B, C,
and D helicopter simulators because there are
no Level A Helicopter simulators.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26641
TABLE C1A.—MINIMUM SIMULATOR REQUIREMENTS
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator levels
General simulator requirements
Information
B
C
D
Notes
For simulator purposes, the flight deck consists of all
that space forward of a cross section of the fuselage
at the most extreme aft setting of the pilots’ seats including additional, required flight crewmember duty
stations and those required bulkheads aft of the pilot
seats. For clarification, bulkheads containing only
items such as landing gear pin storage compartments, fire axes and extinguishers, spare light bulbs,
and aircraft documents pouches are not considered
essential and may be omitted.
General Flight Deck Configuration
1.a. .......
The simulator must have a flight deck that is a replica of
the helicopter being simulated.
The simulator must have controls, equipment, observable flight deck indicators, circuit breakers, and bulkheads properly located, functionally accurate and replicating the helicopter. The direction of movement of
controls and switches must be identical to that in the
helicopter. Pilot seats must afford the capability for
the occupant to be able to achieve the design ‘‘eye
position’’ established for the helicopter being simulated. Equipment for the operation of the flight deck
windows must be included, but the actual windows
need not be operable. Fire axes, extinguishers, and
spare light bulbs must be available in the FFS but
may be relocated to a suitable location as near as
practical to the original position. Fire axes, landing
gear pins, and any similar purpose instruments need
only be represented in silhouette.
X
X
X
1.b. .......
Those circuit breakers that affect procedures or result in
observable flight deck indications must be properly located and functionally accurate.
X
X
X
2. ..........
Programming
2.a. .......
A flight dynamics model that accounts for various combinations of air speed and power normally encountered in flight must correspond to actual flight conditions, including the effect of change in helicopter attitude, aerodynamic and propulsive forces and moments, altitude, temperature, mass, center of gravity
location, and configuration.
An SOC is required
X
X
X
2.b. .......
The simulator must have the computer capacity, accuracy, resolution, and dynamic response needed to
meet the qualification level sought.
An SOC is required
X
X
X
2.c. .......
Ground handling (where appropriate) and aerodynamic
programming must include the following:.
2.c.1. ....
Ground effect ....................................................................
Level B does not require hover programming
An SOC is required
X
X
X
Applicable areas include flare and touch down from a
running landing as well as for in-ground-effect (IGE)
hover. A reasonable simulation of ground effect includes modeling of lift, drag, pitching moment, trim,
and power while in ground effect.
2.c.2. ....
Ground reaction ................................................................
Level B does not require hover programming
An SOC is required
X
X
X
Reaction of the helicopter upon contact with the landing
surface during landing (e.g., strut deflection, tire or
skid friction, side forces) may differ with changes in
gross weight, airspeed, rate of descent on touchdown,
and slide slip.
2.d. .......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1. ..........
The simulator must provide for manual and automatic
testing of simulator hardware and software programming to determine compliance with simulator objective
tests as prescribed in Attachment 2 of this appendix.
An SOC is required
X
X
This may include an automated system, which could be
used for conducting at least a portion of the QTG
tests. Automatic ‘‘flagging’’ of out-of-tolerance situations is encouraged.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00165
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26642
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C1A.—MINIMUM SIMULATOR REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator levels
General simulator requirements
B
2.e. .......
Response must be within 150 milliseconds of the helicopter response.
Response must be within 100 milliseconds of the helicopter response.
D
The relative responses of the motion system, visual system, and flight deck instruments must be measured
by latency tests or transport delay tests. Motion onset
must occur before the end of the scan of that video
field. Instrument response may not occur prior to motion onset. Test results must be within the following
limits:
2.e.1. ....
C
2.e.2. ....
Information
Notes
The intent is to verify that the simulator provides instrument, motion, and visual cues that are like the helicopter responses within the stated time delays. It is
preferable motion onset occur before the start of the
visual scene change (the start of the scan of the first
video field containing different information). For helicopter response, acceleration in the appropriate corresponding rotational axis is preferred.
X
X
X
The simulator must simulate brake and tire failure dynamics (including antiskid failure, if appropriate).
An SOC is required. .........................................................
X
X
The simulator should represent the motion (in the appropriate axes) and the directional control characteristics of the helicopter when experiencing simulated
brake or tire failures.
2.g. .......
The aerodynamic modeling in the simulator must include:.
(1) Ground effect,
(2) Effects of airframe and rotor icing (if applicable),
(3) Aerodynamic interference effects between the rotor
wake and fuselage,
(4) Influence of the rotor on control and stabilization
systems,
(5) Representations of settling with power, and
(6) Retreating blade stall.
An SOC is required.
X
X
See Attachment 2 of this appendix for further information on ground effect.
2.h. .......
The simulator must provide for realistic mass properties,
including gross weight, center of gravity, and moments of inertia as a function of payload and fuel
loading.
An SOC is required.
X
X
X
3. ..........
Equipment Operation
3.a. .......
All relevant instrument indications involved in the simulation of the helicopter must automatically respond to
control movement or external disturbances to the simulated helicopter; e.g., turbulence or windshear. Numerical values must be presented in the appropriate
units.
X
X
X
3.b. .......
Communications, navigation, caution, and warning
equipment must be installed and operate within the
tolerances applicable for the helicopter being simulated.
X
X
X
3.c. .......
Simulated helicopter systems must operate as the helicopter systems operate under normal, abnormal, and
emergency operating conditions on the ground and in
flight.
X
X
X
3.d. .......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.f. ........
The simulator must provide pilot controls with control
forces and control travel that correspond to the simulated helicopter. The simulator must also react in the
same manner as the helicopter under the same flight
conditions.
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00166
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
See Attachment 3 of this appendix for further information regarding long-range navigation equipment.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26643
TABLE C1A.—MINIMUM SIMULATOR REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator levels
General simulator requirements
B
C
D
X
Information
Notes
X
Simulator control feel dynamics must replicate the helicopter simulated. This must be determined by comparing a recording of the control feel dynamics of the
simulator to helicopter measurements. For initial and
upgrade evaluations, the control dynamic characteristics must be measured and recorded directly from the
flight deck controls, and must be accomplished in
takeoff, cruise, and landing conditions and configurations.
4. ..........
Instructor/Evaluator Facilities
4.a. .......
In addition to the flight crewmember stations, the simulator must have at least two suitable seats for the instructor/check airman and FAA inspector. These
seats must provide adequate vision to the pilot’s
panel and forward windows. All seats other than flight
crew seats need not represent those found in the helicopter but must be adequately secured to the floor
and equipped with similar positive restraint devices.
X
X
X
4.b. .......
The simulator must have controls that enable the instructor/evaluator to control all required system variables and insert all abnormal or emergency conditions
into the simulated helicopter systems as described in
the sponsor’s FAA-approved training program, or as
described in the relevant operating manual as appropriate.
X
X
X
4.c. .......
The simulator must have instructor controls for all environmental effects expected to be available at the IOS;
e.g., clouds, visibility, icing, precipitation, temperature,
storm cells, and wind speed and direction.
X
X
X
4.d. .......
The simulator must provide the instructor or evaluator
the ability to present ground and air hazards.
X
X
For example, another aircraft crossing the active runway
and converging airborne traffic.
4.e. .......
The simulator must provide the instructor or evaluator
the ability to present the effect of re-circulating dust,
water vapor, or snow conditions that develop as a result of rotor downwash.
X
X
This is a selectable condition that is not required for all
operations on or near the surface.
5. ..........
Motion System
5.a. .......
The simulator must have motion (force) cues perceptible
to the pilot that are representative of the motion in a
helicopter.
X
X
X
For example, touchdown cues should be a function of
the rate of descent (RoD) of the simulated helicopter.
5.b. .......
The simulator must have a motion (force cueing) system
with a minimum of three degrees of freedom (at least
pitch, roll, and heave).
An SOC is required.
X
5.c. .......
The simulator must have a motion (force cueing) system
that produces cues at least equivalent to those of a
six-degrees-of-freedom, synergistic platform motion
system (i.e., pitch, roll, yaw, heave, sway, and surge).
An SOC is required.
X
X
5.d. .......
The simulator must provide for the recording of the motion system response time.
An SOC is required.
X
X
X
5.e. .......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
3.e. .......
The simulator must provide motion effects programming
to include the following:.
(1) Runway rumble, oleo deflections, effects of ground
speed, uneven runway, characteristics.
(2) Buffets due to transverse flow effects.
(3) Buffet during extension and retraction of landing
gear.
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00167
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
The NSPM will consider alternatives to this standard for
additional seats based on unique flight deck configurations.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26644
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C1A.—MINIMUM SIMULATOR REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator levels
General simulator requirements
B
Notes
X
X
The simulator must provide characteristic motion vibrations that result from operation of the helicopter (for
example, retreating blade stall, extended landing
gear, settling with power) in so far as vibration marks
an event or helicopter state, which can be sensed in
the flight deck.
6. ..........
The simulator must have a visual system providing an
out-of-the-flight deck view.
X
6.b. .......
The simulator must provide a continuous field-of-view of
at least 75° horizontally and 30° vertically per pilot
seat. Both pilot seat visual systems must be operable
simultaneously. The minimum horizontal field-of-view
coverage must be plus and minus one-half (1⁄2) of the
minimum continuous field-of-view requirement, centered on the zero degree azimuth line relative to the
aircraft fuselage. An SOC must explain the geometry
of the installation.
An SOC is required.
X
6.c. .......
The simulator must provide a continuous visual field-ofview of at least 146° horizontally and 36° vertically
per pilot seat. Both pilot seat visual systems must be
operable simultaneously. Horizontal field-of-view is
centered on the zero degree azimuth line relative to
the aircraft fuselage. The minimum horizontal field-ofview coverage must be plus and minus one-half (1⁄2)
of the minimum continuous field-of-view requirement,
centered on the zero degree azimuth line relative to
the aircraft fuselage.
An SOC must explain the geometry of the installation.
Capability for a field-of-view in excess of the minimum
is not required for qualification at Level C. However,
where specific tasks require extended fields of view
beyond the 146° by 36° (e.g., to accommodate the
use of ‘‘chin windows’’ where the accommodation is
either integral with or separate from the primary visual
system display), then the extended fields of view must
be provided. When considering the installation and
use of augmented fields of view, the sponsor must
meet with the NSPM to determine the training, testing, checking, and experience tasks for which the
augmented field-of-view capability may be required.
An SOC is required.
The simulator should be programmed and instrumented
in such a manner that the characteristic buffet modes
can be measured and compared to helicopter data.
Visual System ................................................................
6.a. .......
For air turbulence, general purpose disturbance models
are acceptable if, when used, they produce test results that approximate demonstrable flight test data.
X
5.f. ........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
D
X
(4) Buffet due to retreating blade stall.
(5) Buffet due to vortex ring (settling with power).
(6) Representative cues resulting from touchdown.
(7) High speed rotor vibrations.
(8) Tire failure dynamics ..................................................
(9) Engine malfunction and engine damage
(10) Airframe ground strike
(11) Motion vibrations that result from atmospheric disturbances.
C
Information
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00168
Additional horizontal field-of-view capability may be
added at the sponsor’s discretion provided the minimum field-of-view is retained.
Fmt 4701
X
X
Sfmt 4700
X
Optimization of the vertical field-of-view may be considered with respect to the specific helicopter flight deck
cut-off angle. The sponsor may request the NSPM to
evaluate the FFS for specific authorization(s) for the
following:
(1) Specific areas within the database needing higher
resolution to support landings, take-offs and ground
cushion exercises and training away from a heliport,
including elevated heliport, helidecks and confined
areas.
(2) For cross-country flights, sufficient scene details to
allow for ground to map navigation over a sector
length equal to 30 minutes at an average cruise
speed.
(3) For offshore airborne radar approaches (ARA), harmonized visual/radar representations of installations.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26645
TABLE C1A.—MINIMUM SIMULATOR REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator levels
General simulator requirements
B
C
D
Notes
X
Optimization of the vertical field-of-view may be considered with respect to the specific helicopter flight deck
cut-off angle.The sponsor may request the NSPM to
evaluate the FFS for specific authorization(s) for the
following:
(1) Specific areas within the database needing higher
resolution to support landings, take-offs and ground
cushion exercises and training away from a heliport,
including elevated heliport, helidecks and confined
areas.
(2) For cross-country flights, sufficient scene details to
allow for ground to map navigation over a sector
length equal to 30 minutes at an average cruise
speed.
(3) For offshore airborne radar approaches (ARA), harmonized visual/radar representations of installations.
Nonrealistic cues might include image ‘‘swimming’’ and
image ‘‘roll-off,’’ that may lead a pilot to make incorrect assessments of speed, acceleration and/or situational awareness.
6.d. .......
The simulator must provide a continuous visual field-ofview of at least 176° horizontally and 56° vertically
per pilot seat. Both pilot seat visual systems must be
operable simultaneously. Horizontal field-of-view is
centered on the zero degree azimuth line relative to
the aircraft fuselage. The minimum horizontal field-ofview coverage must be plus and minus one-half (1⁄2)
of the minimum continuous field-of-view requirement,
centered on the zero degree azimuth line relative to
the aircraft fuselage. An SOC must explain the geometry of the installation. Capability for a field-of-view in
excess of the minimum is not required for qualification
at Level D. However, where specific tasks require extended fields of view beyond the 176° by 56° (e.g., to
accommodate the use of ‘‘chin windows’’ where the
accommodation is either integral with or separate
from the primary visual system display), then the extended fields of view must be provided. When considering the installation and use of augmented fields of
view, the sponsor must meet with the NSPM to determine the training, testing, checking, and experience
tasks for which the augmented field-of-view capability
may be required.
An SOC is required.
6.e. .......
The visual system must be free from optical discontinuities and artifacts that create non-realistic cues.
X
X
X
6.f. ........
The simulator must have operational landing lights for
night scenes.Where used, dusk (or twilight) scenes
require operational landing lights..
X
X
X
6.g. .......
The simulator must have instructor controls for the following:
(1) Visibility in statute miles (kilometers) and runway visual range (RVR) in ft. (meters).
(2) Airport or landing area selection
(3) Airport or landing area lighting
X
X
X
6.h. .......
Each airport scene displayed must include the following:
(1) Airport runways and taxiways
(2) Runway definition
(a) Runway surface and markings
(b) Lighting for the runway in use, including runway
threshold, edge, centerline, touchdown zone, VASI (or
PAPI), and approach lighting of appropriate colors, as
appropriate
(c) Taxiway lights
X
X
X
6.i. ........
The simulator must provide visual system compatibility
with dynamic response programming.
X
X
X
6.j. ........
The simulator must show that the segment of the
ground visible from the simulator flight deck is the
same as from the helicopter flight deck (within established tolerances) when at the correct airspeed and
altitude above the touchdown zone.
X
X
X
6.k. .......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Information
The simulator must provide visual cues necessary to assess rate of change of height, height AGL, and
translational displacement and rates during takeoffs
and landings.
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00169
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
This will show the modeling accuracy of the scene with
respect to a predetermined position from the end of
the runway ‘‘in use.’’
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26646
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C1A.—MINIMUM SIMULATOR REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator levels
General simulator requirements
B
C
D
X
X
X
X
6.l. ........
The simulator must provide visual cues necessary to assess rate of change of height, height AGL, as well as
translational displacement and rates during takeoff,
low altitude/low airspeed maneuvering, hover, and
landing.
6.m. ......
The simulator must provide for accurate portrayal of the
visual environment relating to the simulator attitude.
6.n ........
The simulator must provide for quick confirmation of visual system color, RVR, focus, and intensity.
An SOC is required.
X
The simulator must be capable of producing at least 10
levels of occulting.
X
X
6.p. .......
Night Visual Scenes. The simulator must provide night
visual scenes with sufficient scene content to recognize the airport, the terrain, and major landmarks
around the airport. The scene content must allow a
pilot to successfully accomplish a visual landing. Night
scenes, as a minimum, must provide presentations of
sufficient surfaces with appropriate textural cues that
include self-illuminated objects such as road networks, ramp lighting, and airport signage, to conduct
a visual approach, a landing, and airport movement
(taxi). Scenes must include a definable horizon and
typical terrain characteristics such as fields, roads and
bodies of water and surfaces illuminated by helicopter
landing lights.
X
X
6.q. .......
Dusk (Twilight) Visual Scenes. The simulator must provide dusk (or twilight) visual scenes with sufficient
scene content to recognize the airport, the terrain,
and major landmarks around the airport. The scene
content must allow a pilot to successfully accomplish
a visual landing. Dusk (or twilight) scenes, as a minimum, must provide full color presentations of reduced ambient intensity, sufficient surfaces with appropriate textural cues that include self-illuminated objects such as road networks, ramp lighting and airport
signage, to conduct a visual approach, landing and
airport movement (taxi). Scenes must include a definable horizon and typical terrain characteristics such
as fields, roads and bodies of water and surfaces illuminated by representative aircraft lighting (e.g., landing lights). If provided, directional horizon lighting
must have correct orientation and be consistent with
surface shading effects. Total scene content must be
comparable in detail to that produced by 10,000 visible textured surfaces and 15,000 visible lights with
sufficient system capacity to display 16 simultaneously moving objects.
An SOC is required.
X
Notes
X
6.o. .......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Information
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00170
X
X
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Visual attitude vs. simulator attitude is a comparison of
pitch and roll of the horizon as displayed in the visual
scene compared to the display on the attitude indicator.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26647
TABLE C1A.—MINIMUM SIMULATOR REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator levels
General simulator requirements
B
C
D
6.r. ........
Daylight Visual Scenes. The simulator must have daylight visual scenes with sufficient scene content to
recognize the airport, the terrain, and major landmarks around the airport. The scene content must
allow a pilot to successfully accomplish a visual landing. No ambient lighting may ‘‘washout’’ the displayed
visual scene. Total scene content must be comparable in detail to that produced by 10,000 visible
textured surfaces and 6,000 visible lights with sufficient system capacity to display 16 simultaneously
moving objects. The visual display must be free of apparent and distracting quantization and other distracting visual effects while the simulator is in motion.
An SOC is required.
X
The simulator must provide operational visual scenes
that portray physical relationships known to cause
landing illusions to pilots.
X
X
6.t. ........
The simulator must provide special weather representations of light, medium, and heavy precipitation near a
thunderstorm on takeoff and during approach and
landing. Representations need only be presented at
and below an altitude of 2,000 ft. (610 m) above the
airport surface and within 10 miles (16 km) of the airport.
X
X
6.u. .......
The simulator must present visual scenes of wet and
snow-covered runways, including runway lighting reflections for wet conditions, and partially obscured
lights for snow conditions.
X
X
6.v. .......
The simulator must present realistic
directionality of all airport lighting.
X
X
7. ..........
Sound System
7.a. .......
The simulator must provide flight deck sounds that result from pilot actions that correspond to those that
occur in the helicopter.
X
X
X
7.b. .......
Volume control, if installed, must have an indication of
the sound level setting.
X
X
X
7.c. .......
The simulator must accurately simulate the sound of
precipitation, windshield wipers, and other significant
helicopter noises perceptible to the pilot during normal
and abnormal operations, and include the sound of a
crash (when the simulator is landed in an unusual attitude or in excess of the structural gear limitations);
normal engine sounds; and the sounds of gear extension and retraction.
An SOC is required.
X
X
7.d. .......
The simulator must provide realistic amplitude and frequency of flight deck noises and sounds. Simulator
performance must be recorded, compared to amplitude and frequency of the same sounds recorded in
the helicopter, and made a part of the QTG.
Notes
X
6.s ........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Information
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
color
Frm 00171
and
Fmt 4701
For example: short runways, landing approaches over
water, uphill or downhill runways, rising terrain on the
approach path, unique topographic features.
The NSPM will consider suitable alternative effects.
X
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26648
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C1B.—TABLE OF TASKS VS. SIMULATOR LEVEL
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Information
Subjective requirements
The simulator must be able to perform the tasks associated with that level of
qualification.
Simulator
levels
B
C
X
X
Notes
D
X
1. Preflight Procedures
1.a. ......
Preflight Inspection (Flight deck Only) switches, indicators, systems, and
equipment.
1.b. ......
APU/Engine start and run-up.
1.b.1. ...
Normal start procedures .....................................................................................
X
X
X
1.b.2. ...
Alternate start procedures ...................................................................................
X
X
X
1.b.3. ...
Abnormal starts and shutdowns (hot start, hung start) ......................................
X
X
X
1.c. ......
Taxiing—Ground .................................................................................................
X
X
X
1.d. ......
Taxiing—Hover ....................................................................................................
X
X
X
1.e. ......
Pre-takeoff Checks ..............................................................................................
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2. Takeoff and Departure Phase
2.a. ......
Normal takeoff.
2.a.1. ...
From ground ........................................................................................................
2.a.2. ...
From hover ..........................................................................................................
2.a.3. ...
Running ...............................................................................................................
X
X
X
2.b. ......
Instrument ...........................................................................................................
X
X
X
2.c. ......
Powerplant Failure During Takeoff .....................................................................
X
X
X
2.d. ......
Rejected Takeoff .................................................................................................
X
X
X
2.e. ......
Instrument Departure ..........................................................................................
X
X
X
3.a. ......
Normal .................................................................................................................
X
X
X
3.b. ......
Obstacle clearance .............................................................................................
X
X
X
3.c. ......
Vertical ................................................................................................................
X
X
X
3.d. ......
One engine inoperative .......................................................................................
X
X
X
3. Climb
4. In-flight Maneuvers
4.a. ......
Turns (timed, normal, steep) ...............................................................................
X
X
X
4.b. ......
Powerplant Failure—Multiengine Helicopters .....................................................
X
X
X
4.c. ......
Powerplant Failure—Single-Engine Helicopters .................................................
X
X
X
4.d. ......
Recovery From Unusual Attitudes ......................................................................
X
X
X
4.e. ......
Settling with Power .............................................................................................
X
X
X
4.f. .......
Specific Flight Characteristics incorporated into the user’s FAA approved flight
training program.
A
A
A
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
5. Instrument Procedures
5.a. ......
Instrument Arrival ................................................................................................
X
X
X
5.b. ......
Holding ................................................................................................................
X
X
X
5.c. ......
Precision Instrument Approach.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00172
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C1B.—TABLE OF TASKS VS. SIMULATOR LEVEL—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
levels
Subjective requirements
The simulator must be able to perform the tasks associated with that level of
qualification.
B
C
D
5.c.1. ...
Normal—All engines operating ...........................................................................
X
X
X
5.c.2. ...
Manually controlled—One or more engines inoperative ....................................
X
X
X
5.d. ......
Non-precision Instrument Approach ...................................................................
X
X
X
5.e. ......
Missed Approach.
5.e.1. ...
All engines operating ..........................................................................................
X
X
X
5.e.2. ...
One or more engines inoperative .......................................................................
X
X
X
5.e.3. ...
Stability augmentation system failure .................................................................
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Entry
No.
Notes
6. Landings and Approaches to Landings
6.a. ......
Visual Approaches (normal, steep, shallow) ......................................................
6.b. ......
Landings.
6.b.1. ...
Normal/crosswind.
6.b.1.a.
Running ...............................................................................................................
6.b.1.b.
From Hover .........................................................................................................
6.b.2. ...
One or more engines inoperative .......................................................................
X
X
X
6.b.3. ...
Rejected Landing ................................................................................................
X
X
X
7. Normal and Abnormal Procedures
7.a. ......
Powerplant ..........................................................................................................
X
X
X
7.b. ......
Fuel System ........................................................................................................
X
X
X
7.c. ......
Electrical System .................................................................................................
X
X
X
7.d. ......
Hydraulic System ................................................................................................
X
X
X
7.e. ......
Environmental System(s) ....................................................................................
X
X
X
7.f. .......
Fire Detection and Extinguisher Systems ...........................................................
X
X
X
7.g. ......
Navigation and Aviation Systems .......................................................................
X
X
X
7.h. ......
Automatic Flight Control System, Electronic Flight Instrument System, and
Related Subsystems.
X
X
X
7.i. .......
Flight Control Systems ........................................................................................
X
X
X
7.j. .......
Anti-ice and Deice Systems ................................................................................
X
X
X
7.k. ......
Aircraft and Personal Emergency Equipment .....................................................
X
X
X
7.l. .......
Special Missions tasks (e.g., Night Vision goggles, Forward Looking Infrared
System, External Loads and as listed on the SOQ).
A
A
X
8. Emergency procedures (as applicable)
Emergency Descent ............................................................................................
X
X
X
8.b. ......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
8.a. ......
Inflight Fire and Smoke Removal .......................................................................
X
X
X
8.c. ......
Emergency Evacuation .......................................................................................
X
X
X
8.d. ......
Ditching ...............................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.e. ......
Autorotative Landing ...........................................................................................
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00173
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26649
26650
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C1B.—TABLE OF TASKS VS. SIMULATOR LEVEL—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
levels
Subjective requirements
The simulator must be able to perform the tasks associated with that level of
qualification.
B
C
D
8.f. .......
Retreating blade stall recovery ...........................................................................
X
X
X
8.g. ......
Mast bumping ......................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.h. ......
Loss of tail rotor effectiveness ............................................................................
X
X
X
8.i. .......
Vortex recovery ...................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
X
X
Entry
No.
Notes
9. Postflight Procedures
9.a .......
After-Landing Procedures ...................................................................................
9.b. ......
Parking and Securing.
9.b.1. ...
Rotor brake operation .........................................................................................
X
X
X
9.b.2. ...
Abnormal/emergency procedures .......................................................................
X
X
X
Note: An ‘‘A’’ in the table indicates that the system, task, or procedure may be examined if the appropriate aircraft system or control is simulated in the FFS and is working properly
TABLE C1C.—TABLE OF TASKS VS. SIMULATOR LEVEL
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Information
Subjective requirements
The simulator must be able to perform the tasks associated with that level of
qualification.
Simulator
levels
B
C
Notes
D
Instructor Operating Station (IOS), as appropriate
1.a. ......
Power switch(es) .................................................................................................
X
X
X
1.b. ......
Helicopter conditions ...........................................................................................
X
X
X
e.g., GW, CG, Fuel loading, Systems,
Ground Crew.
1.c. ......
Airports/Heliports/Helicopter Landing Areas .......................................................
X
X
X
e.g., Selection, Surface, Presets, Lighting controls
1.d. ......
Environmental controls. .......................................................................................
X
X
X
e.g., Clouds, Visibility, RVR, Temp,
Wind, Ice, Snow, Rain, and
Windshear.
1.e. ......
Helicopter system malfunctions (Insertion/deletion) ...........................................
X
X
X
1.f. .......
Locks, Freezes, and Repositioning .....................................................................
X
X
X
2. .........
Sound Controls.
2.a. ......
On/off/adjustment ................................................................................................
X
X
X
3. .........
Motion/Control Loading System
3.a. ......
On/off/emergency stop ........................................................................................
X
X
X
4. .........
Observer Seats/Stations
4.a. ......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1. .........
Position/Adjustment/Positive restraint system ....................................................
X
X
X
Attachment 2 to Appendix C to Part 60—FFS
Objective Tests
lllllllllllllllllllll
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
Begin Information
PO 00000
Frm 00174
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26651
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph
No.
Title
1. .................
Introduction.
2. .................
Test Requirements.
Table C2A, Objective Tests.
3. .................
General.
4. .................
Control Dynamics.
5. .................
[Reserved].
6. .................
Motion System.
7. .................
Sound System.
8. .................
Additional Information About Flight Simulator Qualification for New or Derivative Helicopters.
9. .................
Engineering Simulator—Validation Data.
10. ...............
[Reserved].
11. ...............
Validation Test Tolerances.
12. ...............
Validation Data Roadmap.
13. ...............
Acceptance Guidelines for Alternative Engines Data.
14. ...............
Acceptance Guidelines for Alternative Avionics (Flight-Related Computers and Controllers).
15. ...............
Transport Delay Testing.
16. ...............
Continuing Qualification Evaluations—Validation Test Data Presentation.
17. ...............
Alternative Data Sources, Procedures, and Instrumentation: Level A and Level B Simulators Only.
1. Introduction
a. If relevant winds are present in the
objective data, the wind vector (magnitude
and direction) should be clearly noted as part
of the data presentation, expressed in
conventional terminology, and related to the
runway being used for the test.
b. The NSPM will not evaluate any
simulator unless the required SOC indicates
that the motion system is designed and
manufactured to safely operate within the
simulator’s maximum excursion,
acceleration, and velocity capabilities (see
Motion System in the following table).
c. Table C2A addresses helicopter
simulators at Levels B, C, and D because
there are no Level A Helicopter simulators.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Begin QPS Requirements
2. Test Requirements
a. The ground and flight tests required for
qualification are listed in Table of C2A, FFS
Objective Tests. Computer-generated
simulator test results must be provided for
each test except where an alternative test is
specifically authorized by the NSPM. If a
flight condition or operating condition is
required for the test but does not apply to the
helicopter being simulated or to the
qualification level sought, it may be
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
disregarded (e.g., an engine out missed
approach for a single-engine helicopter, or a
hover test for a Level B simulator). Each test
result is compared against the validation data
described in § 60.13 and in this appendix.
Although use of a driver program designed to
automatically accomplish the tests is
encouraged for all simulators and required
for Level C and Level D simulators, each test
must be able to be accomplished manually
while recording all appropriate parameters.
The results must be produced on an
appropriate recording device acceptable to
the NSPM and must include simulator
number, date, time, conditions, tolerances,
and appropriate dependent variables
portrayed in comparison to the validation
data. Time histories are required unless
otherwise indicated in Table C2A. All results
must be labeled using the tolerances and
units given.
b. Table C2A sets out the test results
required, including the parameters,
tolerances, and flight conditions for
simulator validation. Tolerances are provided
for the listed tests because mathematical
modeling and acquisition/development of
reference data are often inexact. All
tolerances listed in the following tables are
applied to simulator performance. When two
tolerance values are given for a parameter,
the less restrictive value may be used unless
otherwise indicated. In those cases where a
tolerance is expressed only as a percentage,
PO 00000
Frm 00175
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
the tolerance percentage applies to the
maximum value of that parameter within its
normal operating range as measured from the
neutral or zero position unless otherwise
indicated.
c. Certain tests included in this attachment
must be supported with an SOC. In Table
C2A, requirements for SOCs are indicated in
the ‘‘Test Details’’ column.
d. When operational or engineering
judgment is used in making assessments for
flight test data applications for simulator
validity, such judgment may not be limited
to a single parameter. For example, data that
exhibit rapid variations of the measured
parameters may require interpolations or a
‘‘best fit’’ data selection. All relevant
parameters related to a given maneuver or
flight condition must be provided to allow
overall interpretation. When it is difficult or
impossible to match simulator to helicopter
data throughout a time history, differences
must be justified by providing a comparison
of other related variables for the condition
being assessed.
e. The FFS may not be programmed so that
the mathematical modeling is correct only at
the validation test points. Unless noted
otherwise, simulator tests must represent
helicopter performance and handling
qualities at operating weights and centers of
gravity (CG) typical of normal operation. If a
test is supported by helicopter data at one
extreme weight or CG, another test supported
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26652
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
by helicopter data at mid-conditions or as
close as possible to the other extreme must
be included. Certain tests that are relevant
only at one extreme CG or weight condition
need not be repeated at the other extreme.
Tests of handling qualities must include
validation of augmentation devices.
f. When comparing the parameters listed to
those of the helicopter, sufficient data must
also be provided to verify the correct flight
condition and helicopter configuration
changes. For example, to show that control
force is within ±0.5 pound (0.22 daN) in a
static stability test, data to show the correct
airspeed, power, thrust or torque, helicopter
configuration, altitude, and other appropriate
datum identification parameters must also be
given. If comparing short period dynamics,
normal acceleration may be used to establish
a match to the helicopter, but airspeed,
altitude, control input, helicopter
configuration, and other appropriate data
must also be given. All airspeed values must
be properly annotated (e.g., indicated versus
calibrated). In addition, the same variables
must be used for comparison (e.g., compare
inches to inches rather than inches to
centimeters).
g. The QTG provided by the sponsor must
clearly describe how the simulator will be set
up and operated for each test. Each simulator
subsystem may be tested independently, but
overall integrated testing of the simulator
must be accomplished to assure that the total
simulator system meets the prescribed
standards. A manual test procedure with
explicit and detailed steps for completing
each test must also be provided.
h. For previously qualified simulators, the
tests and tolerances of this attachment may
be used in subsequent continuing
qualification evaluations for any given test if
the sponsor has submitted a proposed MQTG
revision to the NSPM and has received
NSPM approval.
i. Motion System Tests:
(a) The minimum excursions,
accelerations, and velocities for pitch, roll,
and yaw must be measurable about a single,
common reference point and must be
achieved by driving one degree of freedom at
a time.
(b) The minimum excursions,
accelerations, and velocities for heave, sway,
and surge may be measured about different,
identifiable reference points and must be
achieved by driving one degree of freedom at
a time.
j. Tests of handling qualities must include
validation of augmentation devices. FFSs for
highly augmented helicopters will be
validated both in the unaugmented
configuration (or failure state with the
maximum permitted degradation in handling
qualities) and the augmented configuration.
Where various levels of handling qualities
result from failure states, validation of the
effect of the failure is necessary. For those
performance and static handling qualities
tests where the primary concern is control
position in the unaugmented configuration,
unaugmented data are not required if the
design of the system precludes any affect on
control position. In those instances where the
unaugmented helicopter response is
divergent and non-repeatable, it may not be
feasible to meet the specified tolerances.
Alternative requirements for testing will be
mutually agreed upon by the sponsor and the
NSPM on a case-by-case basis.
k. Some tests will not be required for
helicopters using helicopter hardware in the
simulator flight deck (e.g., ‘‘helicopter
modular controller’’). These exceptions are
noted in Table C2A of this attachment.
However, in these cases, the sponsor must
provide a statement that the helicopter
hardware meets the appropriate
manufacturer’s specifications and the
sponsor must have supporting information to
that fact available for NSPM review.
l. In cases where light-class helicopters are
being simulated, prior coordination with the
NSPM on acceptable weight ranges is
required. The terms ‘‘light’’, ‘‘medium’’, and
‘‘near maximum’’, as defined in Appendix F
of this part, may not be appropriate for the
simulation of light-class helicopters.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
m. In those cases where the objective test
results authorize a ‘‘snapshot test’’ or a
‘‘series of snapshot test results’’ in lieu of a
time-history result, the sponsor or other data
provider must ensure that a steady state
condition exists at the instant of time
captured by the ‘‘snapshot’’. The steady state
condition must exist from 4 seconds prior to,
through 1 second following, the instant of
time captured by the snap shot.
n. For references on basic operating weight,
see AC 120–27, Aircraft Weight and Balance;
and FAA–H–8083–1, Aircraft Weight and
Balance Handbook.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
TABLE C2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
level
Test
Tolerance(s)
Entry No.
Flight condition
Test details
Title
B
C
D
1. Performance
Engine Assessment
1.a.1. .....
Start Operations
1.a.1.a ...
Engine start and acceleration (transient).
Light Off Time—±10% or
±1 sec., Torque—±5%,
Rotor Speed—±3%,
Fuel Flow—±10%, Gas
Generator Speed—
±5%, Power Turbine
Speed—±5%, Gas Turbine Temp.—±30°C.
Ground with the Rotor
Brake Used and Not
Used, if applicable.
Record each engine start
from the initiation of the
start sequence to
steady state idle and
from steady state idle
to operating RPM.
X
X
X
1.a.1.b. ..
Steady State Idle and
Operating RPM conditions.
Torque—±3%, Rotor
Speed—±1.5%, Fuel
Flow—±5%, Gas Generator Speed—±2%,
Power Turbine
Speed—±2%, Turbine
Gas Temp.—±20°C.
Ground ............................
Record both steady state
idle and operating RPM
conditions. May be a
series of snapshot
tests.
X
X
X
1.a.2. .....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1.a. ........
Power Turbine Speed
Trim.
±10% of total change of
power turbine speed,
or ±0.5% change of
rotor speed.
Ground ............................
Record engine response
to trim system actuation in both directions.
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00176
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Notes
26653
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
level
Test
Tolerance(s)
Entry No.
1.a.3. .....
Engine and Rotor Speed
Governing.
1.b. ........
Test details
B
C
Notes
Surface Operations
1.b.1. .....
Flight condition
Title
D
Climb and descent ..........
Record results using a
step input to the collective. May be conducted
concurrently with climb
and descent performance tests.
X
X
X
Minimum Radius Turn .....
±3 ft. (0.9m) or 20% of
helicopter turn radius.
Ground ............................
If brakes are used, brake
pedal position and
brake system pressure
must be matched to
the helicopter flight test
value.
X
X
X
1.b.2. .....
Rate of Turn vs. Pedal
Deflection, Brake Application, or Nosewheel
Angle, as applicable.
±10% or ±2°/sec. Turn
Rate.
Ground Takeoff ...............
If brakes are used, brake
pedal position and
brake system pressure
must be matched to
the helicopter flight test
value.
X
X
X
1.b.3. .....
Taxi .................................
Pitch Angle—±1.5°,
Torque—±3%, Longitudinal Control Position—
±5%, Lateral Control
Position—±5%, Directional Control Position—±5%, Collective
Control Position—±5%.
Ground ............................
Record results for control
position and pitch attitude during ground taxi
for a specific ground
speed, wind speed and
direction, and density
altitude.
X
X
X
1.b.4. .....
Brake Effectiveness ........
±10% of time and distance.
Ground ............................
X
X
X
1.c. ........
Takeoff
When the speed range for the following tests is less than 40 knots, the applicable airspeed tolerance may be applied to either airspeed or ground speed,
as appropriate.
1.c.1. .....
All Engines ......................
Airspeed—±3 kt, Altitude—±20 ft (6.1m),
Torque—±3%, Rotor
Speed—±1.5%,
Vertical Velocity—±100
fpm (0.50m/sec) or
10%, Pitch Attitude—
±1.5°, Bank Attitude—
±2°, Heading—±2°,
Longitudinal Control
Position—±10%, Lateral Control Position—
±10%, Directional Control Position—±10%,
Collective Control Position—±10%.
Ground/Takeoff and Initial
Segment of Climb.
Record results of takeoff
flight path as appropriate to helicopter
model simulated (running takeoff for Level
B, takeoff from a hover
for Level C and D). For
Level B, the criteria
apply only to those
segments at airspeeds
above effective
translational lift. Results must be recorded
from the initiation of the
takeoff to at least 200
ft (61m) AGL.
X
X
X
1.c.2. .....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Torque—±5%, Rotor
Speed—1.5%.
One Engine Inoperative
continued takeoff.
Airspeed—±3 kt, Altitude—±20 ft (6.1m),
Torque—±3%, Rotor
Speed—±1.5%,
Vertical Velocity—±100
fpm (0.50m/sec) or
10%, Pitch Attitude—
±1.5°, Bank Attitude—
±2°, Heading—±2°,
Longitudinal Control
Position—±10% Lateral
Control Position—
±10%, Directional Control Position—±10%,
Collective Control Position—±10%.
Ground/Takeoff; and Initial Segment of Climb.
Record takeoff flight path
as appropriate to helicopter model simulated. Results must be
recorded from the initiation of the takeoff to
at least 200 ft (61m)
AGL.
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00177
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Because several kinds of
takeoff procedures can
be performed, the specific type of takeoff profile should be recorded
to ensure the proper
takeoff profile comparison test is used.
26654
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
level
Test
Tolerance(s)
Entry No.
1.c.3. .....
One Engine inoperative,
rejected take off.
1.d. ........
Test details
B
Notes
Hover
1.e. ........
Time history from the
take off point to touch
down. Test conditions
near limiting performance.
X
X
Torque—±3%, Pitch Attitude—±1.5°, Bank Attitude—±1.5°, Longitudinal Control Position—
±5%, Lateral Control
Position—±5%, Directional Control Position—±5%, Collective
Control Position—±5%.
In Ground Effect (IGE);
and Out of Ground Effect (OGE).
Record results for light
and heavy gross
weights. May be a series of snapshot tests.
X
X
Vertical Velocity—±100
fpm (0.50 m/sec) or
±10%, Directional Control Position—±5%,
Collective Control Position—±5%.
From OGE Hover ............
Record results for light
and heavy gross
weights. May be a series of snapshot tests.
X
X
Torque—±3%, Pitch Attitude—±1.5°, Sideslip
Angle—±2°, Longitudinal Control Position—
±5%, Lateral Control
Position—±5%, Directional Control Position—±5%, Collective
Control Position—±5%.
Cruise (Augmentation On
and Off).
Record results for two
gross weight and CG
combinations with varying trim speeds
throughout the airspeed envelope. May
be a series of snapshot
tests.
X
X
X
Vertical Velocity—±100
fpm (6.1m/sec) or
±10%, Pitch Attitude—
±1.5°, Sideslip Angle—
±2°, Longitudinal Control Position—±5%, Lateral Control Position—
±5%, Directional Control Position—±5%,
Collective Control Position—±5%.
All engines operating;
One engine inoperative; Augmentation
System(s) On and Off.
Record results for two
gross weight and CG
combinations. The data
presented must be for
normal climb power
conditions. May be a
series of snapshot
tests.
X
X
X
Climb
Performance and
Trimmed Flight Control
Positions.
1.h. ........
Ground, Takeoff ..............
Level Flight
Performance and
Trimmed Flight Control
Positions.
1.g. ........
D
Vertical Climb
Performance ....................
1.f. .........
C
Airspeed—±3 kt, Altitude—±20 ft (6.1m),
Torque—±3%, Rotor
Speed—±1.5%, Pitch
Attitude—±1.5°, Roll
angle—± 1.5°, Heading—±2°, Longitudinal
Control Position—
±10%, Lateral Control
Position—±10%, Directional Control Position—±10%, Collective
Control Position—
±10%, Distance:—
±7.5% or ±30m (100ft).
Performance ....................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Flight condition
Title
Descent
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00178
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
This test validates performance at speeds
above maximum endurance airspeed.
26655
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
level
Test
Tolerance(s)
Entry No.
Flight condition
Test details
Title
B
C
Notes
D
1.h.1. .....
Descent Performance
and Trimmed Flight
Control Positions.
Torque—±3%, Pitch Attitude—±1.5°, Sideslip
Angle—±2°, Longitudinal Control Position—
±5%, Lateral Control
Position—±5%, Directional Control Position—±5%, Collective
Control Position—±5%.
At or near 1,000 fpm (5
m/sec) rate of descent
(RoD) at normal approach speed. Augmentation System(s)
On and Off.
Results must be recorded
for two gross weight
and CG combinations.
May be a series of
snapshot tests.
X
X
X
1.h.2. .....
Autorotation Performance
and Trimmed Flight
Control Positions.
Pitch Attitude—±1.5°,
Sideslip Angle—±2°,
Longitudinal Control
Position—±5%, Lateral
Control Position—±5%,
Directional Control Position—±5%, Collective
Control Position—±5%,
Vertical Velocity—±100
fpm or 10%, Rotor
Speed—±1.5%.
Steady descents. Augmentation System(s)
On and Off.
Record results for two
gross weight conditions. Data must be recorded for normal operating RPM. (Rotor
speed tolerance applies only if collective
control position is full
down.) Data must be
recorded for speeds
from 50 kts, ±5 kts,
through at least maximum glide distance
airspeed, or maximum
allowable autorotation
airspeed, whichever is
slower. May be a series of snapshot tests.
X
X
X
1.i. .........
Autorotation
Rotor Speed—±3%, Pitch
Attitude—±2°, Roll Attitude—±3°, Yaw Attitude—±5°, Airspeed—
±5 kts., Vertical Velocity—±200 fpm (1.00 m/
sec) or 10%.
Cruise or Climb ...............
Record results of a rapid
throttle reduction to
idle. If the cruise condition is selected, comparison must be made
for the maximum range
airspeed. If the climb
condition is selected,
comparison must be
made for the maximum
rate of climb airspeed
at or near maximum
continuous power.
X
X
Entry ................................
Landing
When the speed range for tests 1.j.1., 1.j.2., or 1.j.3. is less than 40 knots, the applicable airspeed tolerance may be applied to either airspeed or ground
speed, as appropriate.
1.j.1. ......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1.j. .........
All Engines ......................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Airspeed—±3 kts., Altitude—±20 ft. (6.1m),
Torque—±3%, Rotor
Speed—±1.5%, Pitch
Attitude—±1.5°, Bank
Attitude—±1.5°, Heading—±2°, Longitudinal
Control Position—
±10%, Lateral Control
Position—±10%, Directional Control Position—±10%, Collective
Control Position—
±10%.
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Approach .........................
Frm 00179
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Record results of the approach and landing
profile as appropriate
to the helicopter model
simulated (running
landing for Level B, or
approach to a hover for
Level C and D). For
Level B, the criteria
apply only to those
segments at airspeeds
above effective
translational lift.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
X
09MYR2
X
X
26656
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
level
Test
Tolerance(s)
Flight condition
Entry No.
1.j.2. ......
One Engine Inoperative.
Airspeed—±3 kts., Altitude—±20 ft. (6.1m),
Torque—±3%, Rotor
Speed—±1.5%, Pitch
Attitude—±1.5°, Bank
Attitude—±1.5°, Heading—±2°, Longitudinal
Control Position—
±10%, Lateral Control
Position—±10%, Directional Control Position—±10%, Collective
Control Position—
±10%.
Approach .........................
1.j.3. ......
Balked Landing ...............
Airspeed—±3 kts, Altitude—±20 ft. (6.1m),
Torque—±3%, Rotor
Speed—±1.5%, Pitch
Attitude—±1.5°, Bank
Attitude—±1.5°, Heading—±2°, Longitudinal
Control Position—
±10%, Lateral Control
Position—±10%, Directional Control Position—±10%, Collective
Control Position—
±10%.
1.j.4. ......
Autorotational Landing.
Torque—±3%, Rotor
Speed—±3%, Vertical
Velocity—±100 fpm
(0.50m/sec) or 10%,
Pitch Attitude—±2°,
Bank Attitude—±2°,
Heading—±5°, Longitudinal Control Position—
±10%, Lateral Control
Position—±10%, Directional Control Position—±10%, Collective
Control Position—
±10%.
Test details
Title
B
C
Record results for both
Category A and Category B approaches
and landing as appropriate to helicopter
model simulated. For
Level B, the criteria
apply only to those
segments at airspeeds
above effective
translational lift.
X
X
X
Approach .........................
Record the results for the
maneuver initiated from
a stabilized approach
at the landing decision
point (LDP).
X
X
X
Landing ...........................
Record the results of an
autorotational deceleration and landing from a
stabilized autorotational
descent, to touch
down. If flight test data
containing all required
parameters for a complete power-off landing
is not available from
the aircraft manufacturer for this test and
other qualified flight
test personnel are not
available to acquire this
data, the sponsor may
coordinate with the
NSPM to determine if it
is appropriate to accept
alternative testing
means.
X
X
Notes
D
Alternative approaches
for acquiring this data
may be acceptable, depending on the aircraft
as well as the personnel and the data recording, reduction, and
interpretation facilities
to be used, are: (1) a
simulated
autorotational flare and
reduction of rate of descent (ROD) at altitude;
or (2) a power-on termination following an
autorotational approach
and flare.
2. Handling Qualities
2.a. ........
Control System Mechanical Characteristics
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
For simulators requiring Static or Dynamic tests at the controls (i.e., cyclic, collective, and pedal), special test
fixtures will not be required during initial or upgrade evaluations if the sponsor’s QTG/MQTG shows both test
fixture results and the results of an alternative approach, such as computer plots produced concurrently showing satisfactory agreement. Repeat of the alternative method during the initial or upgrade evaluation satisfies
this test requirement. For initial and upgrade evaluations, the control dynamic characteristics must be measured at and recorded directly from the flight deck controls, and must be accomplished in hover, climb, cruise,
and autorotation.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00180
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Contact the NSPM for
clarification of any
issue regarding helicopters with reversible
controls or where the
required validation data
is not attainable.
26657
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
level
Test
Tolerance(s)
Flight condition
Test details
Title
2.a.1. .....
Cyclic ...............................
Breakout—±0.25 lbs.
(0.112 daN) or 25%;
Force—±1.0 lb. (0.224
daN) or 10%.
Ground; Static conditions
with the hydraulic system (if applicable) pressurized; supplemental
hydraulic pressurization
system may be used.
Trim On and Off. Friction Off Augmentation
(if applicable) On and
Off.
2.a.2. .....
Collective/Pedals .............
Breakout—±0.5 lb. (0.224
daN) or 25%; Force—
±1.0 lb. (0.224 daN) or
10%.
Ground; Static conditions
with the hydraulic system (if applicable) pressurized; supplemental
hydraulic pressurization
system may be used.
Trim On and Off. Friction Off. Augmentation
(if applicable) On and
Off.
2.a.3. .....
Brake Pedal Force vs.
Position.
±5 lbs. (2.224 daN) or
10%.
Ground; Static conditions.
2.a.4. .....
Trim System Rate (all applicable systems).
Rate—±10%.
Ground; Static conditions.
Trim On, Friction Off.
The tolerance applies to
the recorded value of
the trim rate.
2.a.5. .....
Control Dynamics (all
axes).
±10% of time for first zero
crossing and ±10
(N+1)% of period thereafter, ±10% of amplitude of first overshoot,
20% of amplitude of
2nd and subsequent
overshoots greater
than 5% of initial displacement, ±1 overshoot.
Hover/Cruise, Trim On,
Friction Off.
Results must be recorded
for a normal control
displacement in both
directions in each axis.
2.a.6. .....
Control System Freeplay
±0.10 inches (±2.5 mm).
Ground; Static conditions;
with the hydraulic system (if applicable) pressurized; supplemental
hydraulic pressurization
system may be used.
Record and compare results for all controls.
2.b. ........
Low Airspeed Handling Qualities
2.b.1. .....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
Trimmed Flight Control
Positions.
Translational Flight IGE—
Sideward, rearward,
and forward flight. Augmentation On and Off.
Record results for several
airspeed increments to
the translational airspeed limits and for 45
kts. forward airspeed.
May be a series of
snapshot tests.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Notes
B
Torque—±3%, Pitch Attitude—±1.5°, Bank Attitude—±2°, Longitudinal
Control Position—±5%.
Lateral Control Position—±5%, Directional
Control Position—±5%,
Collective Control Position—±5%.
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00181
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
C
D
Record results for an uninterrupted control
sweep to the stops.
(This test does not
apply if aircraft hardware modular controllers are used.)
X
X
X
Flight Test Data for this
test does not require
the rotor to be engaged/turning. The
phrase ‘‘if applicable’’
regarding stability augmentation systems
means if an augmentation system is available
and if this system may
be operational on the
ground under static
conditions as described
here.
Record results for an uninterrupted control
sweep to the stops.
X
X
X
Flight Test Data for this
test does not require
the rotor to be engaged/turning. The
phrase ‘‘if applicable’’
regarding stability augmentation system
means if a stability
augmentation system is
available and if this
system may be operational on the ground
under static conditions
as described here.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Typically, control displacement of 25% to
50% is necessary for
proper excitation. Control Dynamics for irreversible control systems may be evaluated
in a ground/static condition. Additional information on control dynamics is found later in
this attachment. ‘‘N’’ is
the sequential period of
a full cycle of oscillation.
X
X
Flight Test Data for this
test does not require
the rotor to be engaged/turning.
X
X
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
X
09MYR2
26658
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
level
Test
Tolerance(s)
Entry No.
2.b.2. .....
Critical Azimuth ...............
2.b.3. .....
Test details
B
C
Notes
Control Response
2.b.3.a. ..
Flight condition
Title
D
Stationary Hover. Augmentation On and Off.
Record results for three
relative wind directions
(including the most critical case) in the critical
quadrant. May be a series of snapshot tests.
X
X
Longitudinal .....................
Pitch Rate—±10% or ±2°/
sec., Pitch Attitude
Change—±10% or
1.5°.
Hover Augmentation On
and Off.
Record results for a step
control input. The Offaxis response must
show correct trend for
unaugmented cases.
X
X
This is a ‘‘short time’’ test
conducted in a hover,
in ground effect, without entering
translational flight, to
provide better visual
reference.
2.b.3.b. ..
Lateral .............................
Roll Rate—±10% or ±3°/
sec., Roll Attitude
Change—±10% or ±3°.
Hover Augmentation On
and Off.
Record results for a step
control input. The Offaxis response must
show correct trend for
unaugmented cases.
X
X
This is a ‘‘short time’’ test
conducted in a hover,
in ground effect, without entering
translational flight, to
provide better visual
reference.
2.b.3.c. ..
Directional .......................
Yaw Rate—±10% or ±2°/
sec., Heading
Change—±10% or ±2°.
Hover Augmentation On
and Off.
Record results for a step
control input. The Offaxis response must
show correct trend for
unaugmented cases.
X
X
This is a ‘‘short time’’ test
conducted in a hover,
in ground effect, without entering
translational flight, to
provide better visual
reference.
2.b.3.d. ..
Vertical ............................
Normal Acceleration—
±0.1 g.
Hover Augmentation On
and Off.
Record results for a step
control input. The Offaxis response must
show correct trend for
unaugmented cases.
X
X
2.c. ........
Longitudinal Handling Qualities
2.c.1. .....
Control Response ...........
Pitch Rate—±10% or ±2°/
sec., Pitch Attitude
Change—±10% or
±1.5°.
Cruise Augmentation On
and Off.
Results must be recorded
for two cruise airspeeds to include minimum power required
speed. Record data for
a step control input.
The Off-axis response
must show correct
trend for unaugmented
cases.
X
X
X
2.c.2. .....
Static Stability .................
Longitudinal Control Position: ±10% of change
from trim or ±0.25 in.
(6.3 mm) or Longitudinal Control Force :
±0.5 lb. (0.223 daN) or
±10%.
Cruise or Climb. Autorotation. Augmentation
On and Off.
Record results for a minimum of two speeds on
each side of the trim
speed. May be a series
of snapshot tests.
X
X
X
2.c.3. .....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Torque—±3%, Pitch Attitude—±1.5°, Bank Attitude—±2°, Longitudinal
Control Position—±5%,
Lateral Control Position—±5%, Directional
Control Position—±5%,
Collective Control Position—±5%.
Dynamic Stability
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00182
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26659
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
level
Test
Tolerance(s)
Entry No.
Flight condition
Test details
Title
B
C
Notes
D
Long-Term Response.
±10% of calculated period, ±10% of time to
1⁄2 or double amplitude,
or ±0.02 of damping
ratio.For non-periodic
responses, the time
history must be
matched within ±3°
pitch; and ±5 kts airspeed over a 20 sec
period following release
of the controls.
Cruise Augmentation On
and Off.
For periodic responses,
record results for three
full cycles (6 overshoots after input completed) or that sufficient
to determine time to 1⁄2
or double amplitude,
whichever is less.
The test may be terminated prior to 20 sec. if
the test pilot determines that the results
are becoming uncontrollably divergent.
X
X
X
The response may be
unrepeatable throughout the stated time for
certain helicopters. In
these cases, the test
should show at least
that a divergence is
identifiable. For example: Displacing the cyclic for a given time
normally excites this
test or until a given
pitch attitude is
achieved and then return the cyclic to the
original position. For
non-periodic responses, results should
show the same convergent or divergent character as the flight test
data.
2.c.3.b. ..
Short-Term Response.
±1.5° Pitch or ±2°/sec.
Pitch Rate. ±0.1 g Normal Acceleration.
Cruise or Climb. Augmentation On and Off.
Record results for at least
two airspeeds.
X
X
X
A control doublet inserted
at the natural frequency of the aircraft
normally excites this
test. However, while
input doublets are preferred over pulse inputs
for Augmentation-Off
tests, for Augmentation-On tests, when the
short-term response
exhibits 1st-order or
deadbeat characteristics, longitudinal pulse
inputs may produce a
more coherent response.
2.c.4. .....
Maneuvering Stability.
Longitudinal Control Position—±10% of change
from trim or ±0.25 in.
(6.3 mm) or Longitudinal Control Forces—
±0.5 lb. (0.223 daN) or
±10%.
Cruise or Climb. Augmentation On and Off.
Record results for at least
two airspeeds at 30°–
45° roll angle. The
force may be shown as
a cross plot for irreversible systems. May
be a series of snapshot
tests.
X
X
X
2.d. ........
Lateral and Directional Handling Qualities
2.d.1. .....
Control Response
2.d.1.a ...
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.c.3.a. ..
Lateral .............................
Cruise Augmentation On
and Off.
Record results for at least
two airspeeds, including the speed at or
near the minimum
power required airspeed.
Record results for a step
control input. The Offaxis response must
show correct trend for
unaugmented cases.
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Roll Rate—±10% or ±3°/
sec., Roll Attitude
Change—±10% or ±3°.
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00183
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26660
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
level
Test
Tolerance(s)
Flight condition
Directional .......................
Yaw Rate—±10% or ±2°/
sec., Yaw Attitude
Change—±10% or ±2°.
Cruise Augmentation On
and Off.
2.d.2. .....
Directional Static Stability.
Lateral Control Position—
±10% of change from
trim or ±0.25 in. (6.3
mm) or Lateral Control
Force—±0.5 lb. (0.223
daN) or 10%, Roll Attitude—±1.5, Directional
Control Position—
±10% of change from
trim or ±0.25 in. (6.3
mm) or Directional
Control Force—±1 lb.
(0.448 daN) or 10%,
Longitudinal Control
Position—±10% of
change from trim or
±0.25 in. (6.3 mm),
Vertical Velocity—±100
fpm (0.50m/sec) or
10%.
2.d.3. .....
Dynamic Lateral and Directional Stability
2.d.3.a. ..
Lateral-Directional Oscillations.
2.d.3.b. ..
2.d.3.c. ..
Test details
Title
2.d.1.b. ..
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
B
C
Record data for at least
two airspeeds, including the speed at or
near the minimum
power required airspeed.
Record results for a step
control input. The Offaxis response must
show correct trend for
unaugmented cases.
X
X
X
Cruise; or Climb (may
use Descent instead of
Climb if desired), Augmentation On and Off.
Record results for at least
two sideslip angles on
either side of the trim
point. The force may
be shown as a cross
plot for irreversible systems. May be a series
of snapshot tests.
X
X
X
±0.5 sec. or ±10% of period, ±10% of time to
1⁄2 or double amplitude
or ±0.02 of damping
ratio, ±20% or ±1 sec
of time difference between peaks of bank
and sideslip. For nonperiodic responses, the
time history must be
matched within ±10
knots Airspeed; ±5°/s
Roll Rate or ±5° Roll
Attitude; ±4°/s Yaw
Rate or ±4° Yaw Angle
over a 20 sec period
roll angle following release of the controls.
Cruise or Climb. Augmentation On and Off.
Record results for at least
two airspeeds. The test
must be initiated with a
cyclic or a pedal doublet input. Record results for six full cycles
(12 overshoots after
input completed) or
that sufficient to determine time to 1⁄2 or double amplitude, whichever is less. The test
may be terminated
prior to 20 sec if the
test pilot determines
that the results are becoming uncontrollably
divergent.
X
X
X
Spiral Stability.
±2° or ±10% roll angle.
Cruise or Climb. Augmentation On and Off.
Record the results of a
release from pedal only
or cyclic only turns for
20 sec. Results must
be recorded from turns
in both directions. Terminate check at zero
roll angle or when the
test pilot determines
that the attitude is becoming uncontrollably
divergent.
X
X
X
Adverse/Proverse Yaw.
Correct Trend, ±2° transient sideslip angle.
Cruise or Climb. Augmentation On and Off.
Record the time history of
initial entry into cyclic
only turns, using only a
moderate rate for cyclic
input. Results must be
recorded for turns in
both directions.
X
X
X
Notes
D
3. Motion System
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00184
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
This is a steady heading
sideslip test at a fixed
collective position.
26661
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
level
Test
Tolerance(s)
Entry No.
3.a. ........
Flight condition
Test details
Title
B
C
Frequency response
Based on Simulator Capability.
3.e. ........
X
X
X
Based on Simulator Capability.
N/A ..................................
Required as part of the
MQTG. The test must
demonstrate motion
system leg balance as
specified by the applicant for flight simulator
qualification.
X
X
X
Based on Simulator Capability.
N/A ..................................
Required as part of the
MQTG. The test must
demonstrate a smooth
turn-around (shift to opposite direction of
movement) of the motion system as specified by the applicant for
flight simulator qualification.
X
X
X
Accomplished in both the
‘‘ground’’ mode and in
the ‘‘flight’’ mode of the
motion system operation.
Required as part of the
the MQTG. The test is
accomplished by injecting a motion signal to
generate movement of
the platform. The input
must be such that the
rotational accelerations,
rotational rates, and linear accelerations are
inserted before the
transfer from helicopter
center of gravity to the
pilot reference point
with a minimum amplitude of 5°/sec/sec, 10°/
sec and 0.3g, respectively.
X
X
X
Turn Around
Turn Around ....................
3.d. ........
Required as part of the
MQTG. The test must
demonstrate frequency
response of the motion
system as specified by
the applicant for flight
simulator qualification.
Leg Balance
Leg Balance ....................
3.c. ........
N/A ..................................
With the same input signal, the test results
must be repeatable to
within ±0.05g actual
platform linear acceleration in each axis.
3.b. ........
Motion system repeatability
See Paragraph 6.c. in
this attachment for additional information.
Note: if there is no difference in the model
for ‘‘ground’’ and
‘‘flight’’ operation of the
motion system, this
should be described in
an SOC and will not require tests in both
modes.
Motion cueing performance signature
Required as part of
MQTG. These tests
must be run with the
motion buffet mode disabled.
3.e.1. .....
Takeoff (all engines).
As specified by the sponsor for flight simulator
qualification.
Ground ............................
3.e.2. .....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Notes
D
Hover performance (IGE
and OGE).
As specified by the sponsor for flight simulator
qualification.
3.e.3. .....
Autorotation (entry).
As specified by the sponsor for flight simulator
qualification.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Pitch attitude due to initial
climb must dominate
over cab tilt due to longitudinal acceleration.
See paragraph 6.d., of
this attachment, Motion
cueing performance
signature.
X
X
Associated to test number 1.c.1.
Ground ............................
X
X
Associated to test number 1.d.
Flight ...............................
X
X
Associated to test number 1.i.
Frm 00185
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
X
09MYR2
26662
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
level
Test
Tolerance(s)
Entry No.
Flight condition
Test details
Title
Notes
B
C
D
X
X
X
Associated to test number 1.j.1.
X
X
Associated to test number 1.j.4.
3.e.4. .....
Landing (all engines).
As specified by the sponsor for flight simulator
qualification.
Flight ...............................
3.e.5. .....
Autorotation (landing).
As specified by the sponsor for flight simulator
qualification.
Flight ...............................
3.e.6. .....
Control Response
3.e.6.a. ..
Longitudinal .....................
As specified by the sponsor for flight simulator
qualification.
Flight ...............................
X
X
X
Associated to test number 2.c.1.
3.e.6.b. ..
Lateral. ............................
As specified by the sponsor for flight simulator
qualification.
Ground ............................
X
X
X
Associated to test number 2.d.1.a.
3.e.6.c. ..
Directional .......................
As specified by the sponsor for flight simulator
qualification.
X
X
X
Associated to test number 2.d.1.c.
3.f. .........
Characteristic Motion (Vibration) Cues—For all of the following tests, the simulator test results must exhibit the
overall appearance and trends of the helicopter data, with at least three (3) of the predominant frequency
‘‘spikes’’ being present within ±2 Hz.
....
....
....
Characteristic motion
cues may be separate
from the ‘‘main’’ motion
system.
3.f.1. ......
Vibrations—to include 1/
Rev and n/Rev vibrations (where ‘‘n’’ is the
number of main rotor
blades).
+3db to ¥6db or ±10%
of nominal vibration
level in flight cruise and
correct trend (see comment).
(a) On ground (idle);
(b) In flight
Characteristic vibrations
include those that result from operation of
the helicopter (for example, high airspeed,
retreating blade stall,
extended landing gear,
vortex ring or settling
with power) in so far as
vibration marks an
event or helicopter
state, which can be
sensed in the flight
deck.
[See Table C1A, table
entries 5.e. and 5.f.]
X
Correct trend refers to a
comparison of vibration
amplitudes between
different maneuvers;
e.g., if the 1/rev vibration amplitude in the
helicopter is higher during steady state turns
than in level flight this
increasing trend should
be demonstrated in the
simulator. Additional
examples of vibrations
may include:
(a) Low & High speed
transition to and from
hover;
(b) Level flight;
(c) Climb and descent
(including vertical
climb;
(d) Auto-rotation;
(e) Steady Turns.
3.f.2. ......
Buffet—Test against recorded results for characteristic buffet motion
that can be sensed in
the flight deck.
+3db to ¥6db or ±10%
of nominal vibration
level in flight cruise and
correct trend (see comment).
On ground and in flight.
Characteristic buffets include those that result
from operation of the
helicopter (for example,
high airspeed, retreating blade stall, extended landing gear,
vortex ring or settling
with power) in so far as
a buffet marks an
event or helicopter
state, which can be
sensed in the flight
deck.
[See Table C1A, table
entries 5.e. and 5.f.]
X
The recorded test results
for characteristic buffets should allow the
checking of relative
amplitude for different
frequencies.
For atmospheric disturbance, general purpose
models are acceptable
which approximate demonstrable flight test
data.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
4. Visual System
4.a. ........
Visual System Response Time: (Choose either test 4.a.1. or 4.a.2. to satisfy test 4.a., Visual System Response Time Test. This test is also sufficient for
motion system response timing and flight deck instrument response timing.)
4.a.1. .....
Latency
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00186
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26663
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
level
Test
Tolerance(s)
Entry No.
Flight condition
Test details
Title
B
150 ms (or less) after
helicopter response.
Climb, cruise, descent,
and hover.
One test is required in
each axis (pitch, roll
and yaw) for each of
the three conditions
(take-off, cruise, and
approach or landing).
Notes
D
X
One test is required in
each axis (pitch, roll
and yaw) for each of
the three conditions
(take-off, cruise, and
approach or landing).
100 ms (or less) after
helicopter response.
4.a.2. .....
Takeoff, climb, and descent.
C
X
X
Transport Delay
If Transport Delay is the
chosen method to
demonstrate relative
responses, the sponsor
and the NSPM will use
the latency values to
ensure proper simulator response when
reviewing those existing tests where latency
can be identified (e.g.,
short period, roll response, rudder response).
150 ms (or less) after
controller movement.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Continuous field-of-view.
N/A ..................................
A separate test is required in each axis
(pitch, roll, and yaw)..
The simulator must provide a continuous fieldof-view of at least 75°
horizontally and 30°
vertically per pilot seat
or the number of degrees necessary to
meet the visual ground
segment requirement,
whichever is greater.
Both pilot seat visual
systems must be operable simultaneously.
Wide-angle systems
providing cross-flight
deck viewing (for both
pilots simultaneously)
must provide a minimum field-of-view of at
least 146° horizontally
and 36° vertically. Any
geometric error between the Image Generator eye point and
the pilot eye point must
be 8° or less.
N/A ..................................
An SOC is required and
must explain the geometry of the installation.
Additional horizontal fieldof-view capability may
be added at the sponsor’s discretion provided the minimum
field-of-view is retained.
X
X
X
Field-of-view
4.b.1. .....
A separate test is required in each axis
(pitch, roll, and yaw).
100 ms (or less) after
controller movement.
4.b. ........
N/A ..................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00187
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
X
09MYR2
Horizontal field-of-view is
centered on the zero
degree azimuth line relative to the aircraft fuselage. Field-of-view
may be measured
using a visual test pattern filling the entire
visual scene (all channels) with a matrix of
black and white 5°
squares.
26664
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
level
Test
Tolerance(s)
Flight condition
Test details
4.b.2. .....
Continuous field-of-view.
The simulator must provide a continuous fieldof-view of at least 146°
horizontally and 36°
vertically or the number
of degrees necessary
to meet the visual
ground segment requirement, whichever is
greater. The minimum
horizontal field-of-view
coverage must be plus
and minus one-half (1⁄2)
of the minimum continuous field-of-view requirement, centered on
the zero degree azimuth line relative to the
aircraft fuselage. Any
geometric error between the Image Generator eye point and
the pilot eye point must
be 8° or less.
N/A ..................................
An SOC is required and
must explain the geometry of the installation.
Horizontal field-of-view of
at least 146° (including
not less than 73°
measured either side of
the center of the design eye point). Additional horizontal fieldof-view capability may
be added at the sponsor’s discretion provided the minimum
field-of-view is retained.
Vertical field-of-view of at
least 36° measured
from the pilot’s and copilot’s eye point.
4.b.3. .....
Continuous field-of-view.
Continuous field-of-view
of at least 176° horizontal and 56° vertical
field-of-view for each
pilot simultaneously.
Any geometric error
between the Image
Generator eye point
and the pilot eye point
must be 8° or less.
N/A ..................................
An SOC is required and
must explain the geometry of the installation.
Horizontal field-of-view is
centered on the zero
degree azimuth line relative to the aircraft fuselage. Horizontal fieldof-view must be at
least 176° (including
not less than 88° either
side of the center of
the design eye point).
Additional horizontal
field-of-view capability
may be added at the
sponsor’s discretion
provided the minimum
field-of-view is retained.
Vertical field-of-view must
not be less than a total
of 56° measured from
the pilot’s and co-pilot’s
eye point.
X
The horizontal field-ofview is traditionally described as a 180° fieldof-view. However, the
field-of-view is technically no less than
176°. Field-of-view may
be measured using a
visual test pattern filling
the entire visual scene
(all channels) with a
matrix of black and
white 5° squares.
4.c. ........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Title
Surface contrast ratio.
Not less than 5:1.
N/A ..................................
The ratio is calculated by
dividing the brightness
level of the center,
bright square (providing
at least 2 foot-lamberts
or 7 cd/m2) by the
brightness level of any
adjacent dark square.
X
Measurements may be
made using a 1° spot
photometer and a raster drawn test pattern
filling the entire visual
scene (all channels)
with a test pattern of
black and white
squares, 5 per square,
with a white square in
the center of each
channel. During contrast ratio testing, simulator aft-cab and flight
deck ambient light levels should be zero.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
B
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00188
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
C
Notes
Entry No.
D
X
Horizontal field-of-view is
centered on the zero
degree azimuth line relative to the aircraft fuselage. Field-of-view
may be measured
using a visual test pattern filling the entire
visual scene (all channels) with a matrix of
black and white 5°
squares.
26665
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
level
Test
Tolerance(s)
Entry No.
Flight condition
Test details
Title
B
4.d. ........
Highlight brightness.
Not less than six (6) footlamberts (20 cd/m2).
N/A ..................................
Measure the brightness
of the center, white
square while superimposing a highlight on
that white square. The
use of calligraphic capabilities to enhance
the raster brightness is
acceptable; however,
measuring light points
is not acceptable.
4.e. ........
Surface resolution.
Not greater than two (2)
arc minutes.
N/A ..................................
An SOC is required and
must include the appropriate calculations and
an explanation of those
calculations. Level B
requires surface resolution not greater than
three (3) arc minutes.
4.f. .........
Light point size ................
Not greater than five (5)
arc minutes.
N/A ..................................
An SOC is required and
must include the relevant calculations and
an explanation of those
calculations.
4.g. ........
X
N/A ..................................
An SOC is required and
must include the relevant calculations.
4.g.2. .....
Not less than 25:1 ...........
N/A ..................................
X
When the eye is positioned on a 3° glide
slope at the slant range
distances indicated
with white runway
markings on a black
runway surface, the
eye will subtend two
(2) arc minutes: (1) A
slant range of 6,876 ft
with stripes 150 ft long
and 16 ft wide, spaced
4 ft apart. (2) For Configuration A, a slant
range of 5,157 feet
with stripes 150 ft long
and 12 ft wide, spaced
3 ft apart. (3) For Configuration B, a slant
range of 9,884 feet,
with stripes 150 ft long
and 5.75 ft wide,
spaced 5.75 ft apart.
X
Light point size may be
measured using a test
pattern consisting of a
centrally located single
row of light points reduced in length until
modulation is just discernible in each visual
channel. A row of 48
lights will form a 4°
angle or less.
X
X
Visual ground segment
23:54 May 08, 2008
X
X
An SOC is required and
must include the relevant calculations.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Measurements may be
made using a 1° spot
photometer and a raster drawn test pattern
filling the entire visual
scene (all channels)
with a test pattern of
black and white
squares, 5 per square,
with a white square in
the center of each
channel.
A 1° spot photometer
may be used to measure a square of at least
1° filled with light points
(where light point modulation is just discernible) and compare the
results to the measured
adjacent background.
During contrast ratio
testing, simulator aftcab and flight deck ambient light levels should
be zero.
Not less than 10:1 ...........
4.h. ........
Notes
D
Light point contrast ratio.
4.g.1. .....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
C
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00189
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
X
26666
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
level
Test
Tolerance(s)
Entry No.
Flight condition
B
The visible segment in
the simulator must be
±20% of the segment
computed to be visible
from the helicopter
flight deck. This tolerance may be applied at
the far end of the displayed segment. However, lights and ground
objects computed to be
visible from the helicopter flight deck at the
near end of the visible
segment must be visible in the simulator.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
5. ...........
Test details
Title
Landing configuration,
with the aircraft
trimmed for the appropriate airspeed, where
the MLG are at 100 ft
(30 m) above the plane
of the touchdown zone,
on the electronic glide
slope with an RVR
value set at 1,200 ft
(350 m).
The QTG must contain
appropriate calculations
and a drawing showing
the data used to establish the helicopter location and the segment
of the ground that is
visible considering design eye point, the helicopter attitude, flight
deck cut-off angle, and
a visibility of 1200 ft
(350 m) RVR. Simulator performance must
be measured against
the QTG calculations.
The data submitted
must include at least
the following:
(1) Static helicopter dimensions as follows:
(i) Horizontal and vertical
distance from main
landing gear (MLG) to
glideslope reception
antenna.
(ii) Horizontal and vertical
distance from MLG to
pilot’s eyepoint.
(iii) Static flight deck cutoff angle.
(2) Approach data as follows:
(i) Identification of runway.
(ii) Horizontal distance
from runway threshold
to glideslope intercept
with runway.
(iii) Glideslope angle.
(iv) Helicopter pitch angle
on approach.
(3) Helicopter data for
manual testing:
(i) Gross weight.
(ii) Helicopter configuration.
(iii) Approach airspeed.
If non-homogenous fog is
used to obscure visibility, the vertical variation in horizontal visibility must be described
and be included in the
slant range visibility
calculation used in the
computations.
C
X
X
X
Sound system
The sponsor will not be required to repeat the helicopter tests (i.e., tests 5.a.1. through 5.a.8. (or 5.b.1.
through 5.b.9.) and 5.c., as appropriate) during continuing qualification evaluations if frequency response
and background noise test results are within tolerance when compared to the initial qualification evaluation
results, and the sponsor shows that no software changes have occurred that will affect the helicopter test
results. If the frequency response test method is chosen and fails, the sponsor may elect to fix the frequency response problem and repeat the test or the sponsor may elect to repeat the helicopter tests. If the
helicopter tests are repeated during continuing qualification evaluations, the results may be compared
against initial qualification evaluation results or helicopter master data. All tests in this section must be presented using an unweighted 1⁄3-octave band format from band 17 to 42 (50 Hz to 16 kHz). A minimum 20
second average must be taken at the location corresponding to the helicopter data set. The helicopter and
flight simulator results must be produced using comparable data analysis techniques.
5.a. ........
Basic requirements
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00190
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
Notes
D
09MYR2
Pre-positioning for this
test is encouraged, and
may be achieved via
manual or autopilot
control to the desired
position.
26667
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2A.—FULL FLIGHT SIMULATOR (FFS) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Simulator
level
Test
Tolerance(s)
Entry No.
Flight condition
Test details
Title
B
C
5.a.1. .....
Ready for engine start.
± 5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Ground ............................
Normal condition prior to
engine start. The APU
must be on if appropriate.
X
5.a.2. .....
All engines at idle; rotor
not turning (if applicable) and rotor turning.
± 5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Ground ............................
Normal condition prior to
lift-off.
X
5.a.3. .....
Hover ...............................
± 5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Hover ...............................
5.a.4. .....
Climb ...............................
± 5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
En-route climb .................
Medium altitude ...............
X
5.a.5. .....
Cruise ..............................
± 5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Cruise ..............................
Normal cruise configuration.
X
5.a.6. .....
Final approach ................
± 5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
Landing ...........................
Constant airspeed, gear
down.
X
5.b. ........
Special cases
±5 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
As appropriate .................
±3 dB per 1⁄3 octave
band.
As appropriate .................
5.c. ........
5.d. ........
X
X
These special cases are
identified as particularly
significant during critical phases of flight
and ground operations
for a specific helicopter
type or model.
Results of the background noise at initial
qualification must be
included in the MQTG.
Measurements must be
made with the simulation running, the sound
muted, and a ‘‘dead’’
flight deck.
X
The simulated sound will
be evaluated to ensure
that the background
noise does not interfere
with training, testing, or
checking.
Applicable only to Continuing Qualification
Evaluations. If frequency response plots
are provided for each
channel at the initial
evaluation, these plots
may be repeated at the
continuing qualification
evaluation with the following tolerances applied:
(a) The continuing qualification 1⁄3 octave band
amplitudes must not
exceed ± 5 dB for
three consecutive
bands when compared
to initial results.
(b) The average of the
sum of the absolute differences between initial
and continuing qualification results must
not exceed 2 dB (refer
to table C2C in Appendix C).
X
Measurements are compared to those taken
during initial qualification evaluation.
Background noise
Frequency response
±5 dB on three (3) consecutive bands when
compared to initial
evaluation; and ±2 dB
when comparing the
average of the absolute
differences between
initial and continuing
qualification evaluation.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Notes
D
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00191
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26668
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
3. General
a. If relevant winds are present in the
objective data, the wind vector should be
clearly noted as part of the data presentation,
expressed in conventional terminology, and
related to the runway being used for test near
the ground.
b. The reader is encouraged to review the
Airplane Flight Simulator Evaluation
Handbook, Volumes I and II, published by
the Royal Aeronautical Society, London, UK,
and FAA AC 25–7, as amended, Flight Test
Guide for Certification of Transport Category
Airplanes, and AC 23–8, as amended, Flight
Test Guide for Certification of Part 23
Airplanes, for references and examples
regarding flight testing requirements and
techniques.
4. Control Dynamics
a. General. The characteristics of a
helicopter flight control system have a major
effect on the handling qualities. A significant
consideration in pilot acceptability of a
helicopter is the ‘‘feel’’ provided through the
flight controls. Considerable effort is
expended on helicopter feel system design so
that pilots will be comfortable and will
consider the helicopter desirable to fly. In
order for an FFS to be representative, it
should ‘‘feel’’ like the helicopter being
simulated. Compliance with this requirement
is determined by comparing a recording of
the control feel dynamics of the FFS to actual
helicopter measurements in the hover and
cruise configurations.
(1) Recordings such as free response to an
impulse or step function are classically used
to estimate the dynamic properties of
electromechanical systems. In any case, it is
only possible to estimate the dynamic
properties as a result of only being able to
estimate true inputs and responses.
Therefore, it is imperative that the best
possible data be collected since close
matching of the FFS control loading system
to the helicopter system is essential. The
required dynamic control tests are described
in Table C2A of this attachment.
(2) For initial and upgrade evaluations, the
QPS requires that control dynamics
characteristics be measured and recorded
directly from the flight controls (Handling
Qualities—Table C2A). This procedure is
usually accomplished by measuring the free
response of the controls using a step or
impulse input to excite the system. The
procedure should be accomplished in the
hover and cruise flight conditions and
configurations.
(3) For helicopters with irreversible control
systems, measurements may be obtained on
the ground if proper pitot-static inputs are
provided to represent airspeeds typical of
those encountered in flight. Likewise, it may
be shown that for some helicopters, hover,
climb, cruise, and autorotation have like
effects. Thus, one may suffice for another. If
either or both considerations apply,
engineering validation or helicopter
manufacturer rationale should be submitted
as justification for ground tests or for
eliminating a configuration. For FFSs
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
requiring static and dynamic tests at the
controls, special test fixtures will not be
required during initial and upgrade
evaluations if the QTG shows both test
fixture results and the results of an alternate
approach (e.g., computer plots that were
produced concurrently and show satisfactory
agreement). Repeat of the alternate method
during the initial evaluation satisfies this test
requirement.
b. Control Dynamics Evaluations. The
dynamic properties of control systems are
often stated in terms of frequency, damping,
and a number of other classical
measurements. In order to establish a
consistent means of validating test results for
FFS control loading, criteria are needed that
will clearly define the measurement
interpretation and the applied tolerances.
Criteria are needed for underdamped,
critically damped and overdamped systems.
In the case of an underdamped system with
very light damping, the system may be
quantified in terms of frequency and
damping. In critically damped or
overdamped systems, the frequency and
damping are not readily measured from a
response time history. Therefore, the
following suggested measurements may be
used:
(1) For Levels C and D simulators. Tests to
verify that control feel dynamics represent
the helicopter should show that the dynamic
damping cycles (free response of the
controls) match those of the helicopter
within specified tolerances. The NSPM
recognizes that several different testing
methods may be used to verify the control
feel dynamic response. The NSPM will
consider the merits of testing methods based
on reliability and consistency. One
acceptable method of evaluating the response
and the tolerance to be applied is described
below for the underdamped and critically
damped cases. A sponsor using this method
to comply with the QPS requirements should
perform the tests as follows:
(a) Underdamped Response. Two
measurements are required for the period, the
time to first zero crossing (in case a rate limit
is present) and the subsequent frequency of
oscillation. It is necessary to measure cycles
on an individual basis in case there are nonuniform periods in the response. Each period
will be independently compared to the
respective period of the helicopter control
system and, consequently, will enjoy the full
tolerance specified for that period. The
damping tolerance will be applied to
overshoots on an individual basis. Care
should be taken when applying the tolerance
to small overshoots since the significance of
such overshoots becomes questionable. Only
those overshoots larger than 5 percent of the
total initial displacement should be
considered significant. The residual band,
labeled T(Ad) on Figure C2A is ±5 percent of
the initial displacement amplitude Ad from
the steady state value of the oscillation. Only
oscillations outside the residual band are
considered significant. When comparing FFS
data to helicopter data, the process should
begin by overlaying or aligning the FFS and
helicopter steady state values and then
comparing amplitudes of oscillation peaks,
the time of the first zero crossing, and
PO 00000
Frm 00192
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
individual periods of oscillation. The FFS
should show the same number of significant
overshoots to within one when compared
against the helicopter data. The procedure for
evaluating the response is illustrated in
Figure C2A.
(b) Critically damped and Overdamped
Response. Due to the nature of critically
damped and overdamped responses (no
overshoots), the time to reach 90 percent of
the steady state (neutral point) value should
be the same as the helicopter within ±10
percent. The simulator response must be
critically damped also. Figure C2B illustrates
the procedure.
(c) Special considerations. Control systems
that exhibit characteristics other than
classical overdamped or underdamped
responses should meet specified tolerances.
In addition, special consideration should be
given to ensure that significant trends are
maintained.
(2) Tolerances.
(a) The following summarizes the
tolerances, ‘‘T’’ for underdamped systems,
and ‘‘n’’ is the sequential period of a full
cycle of oscillation. See Figure C2A of this
attachment for an illustration of the
referenced measurements.
T(P0) ..........................
T(P1) ..........................
T(P2) ..........................
T(Pn) ..........................
T(An) .........................
T(Ad) .........................
±10% of P0
±20% of P1
±30% of P2
±10(n+1)% of Pn
±10% of A1, ±20% of
Subsequent Peaks
±5% of Ad = residual
band
Significant overshoots. First overshoot and
±1 subsequent overshoots
(b) The following tolerance applies to
critically damped and overdamped systems
only. See Figure C2B for an illustration of the
reference measurements:
T(P0) ..........................
±10% of P0
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirement
c. Alternative method for control dynamics
evaluation.
(1) An alternative means for validating
control dynamics for aircraft with
hydraulically powered flight controls and
artificial feel systems is by the measurement
of control force and rate of movement. For
each axis of pitch, roll, and yaw, the control
must be forced to its maximum extreme
position for the following distinct rates.
These tests are conducted under normal
flight and ground conditions.
(a) Static test—Slowly move the control so
that a full sweep is achieved within 95–105
seconds. A full sweep is defined as
movement of the controller from neutral to
the stop, usually aft or right stop, then to the
opposite stop, then to the neutral position.
(b) Slow dynamic test—Achieve a full
sweep within 8–12 seconds.
(c) Fast dynamic test—Achieve a full
sweep in within 3–5 seconds.
Note: Dynamic sweeps may be limited to
forces not exceeding 100 lbs. (44.5 daN).
(d) Tolerances
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
(i) Static test—see Table C2A, FFS
Objective Tests, Entries 2.a.1., 2.a.2., and
2.a.3.
(ii) Dynamic test—±2 lbs (0.9 daN) or ±10%
on dynamic increment above static test.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
End QPS Requirement
lllllllllllllllllllll
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
Begin Information
d. The FAA is open to alternative means
that are justified and appropriate to the
application. For example, the method
described here may not apply to all
manufacturers systems and certainly not to
aircraft with reversible control systems. Each
PO 00000
Frm 00193
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26669
case is considered on its own merit on an ad
hoc basis. If the FAA finds that alternative
methods do not result in satisfactory
performance, more conventionally accepted
methods will have to be used.
BILLING CODE 4910–13–P
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26670
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
BILLING CODE 49–13–C
Begin Information
End Information
6. Motion System.
lllllllllllllllllllll
a. General.
(1) Pilots use continuous information
signals to regulate the state of the helicopter.
In concert with the instruments and outside-
5. [Reserved]
lllllllllllllllllllll
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00194
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
world visual information, whole-body
motion feedback is essential in assisting the
pilot to control the helicopter dynamics,
particularly in the presence of external
disturbances. The motion system should
meet basic objective performance criteria,
and be subjectively tuned at the pilot’s seat
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.034
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
position to represent the linear and angular
accelerations of the helicopter during a
prescribed minimum set of maneuvers and
conditions. The response of the motion
cueing system should be repeatable.
(2) The Motion System tests in Section 3
of Table C2A are intended to qualify the FFS
motion cueing system from a mechanical
performance standpoint. Additionally, the
list of motion effects provides a
representative sample of dynamic conditions
that should be present in the flight simulator.
An additional list of representative, trainingcritical maneuvers, selected from Section 1,
(Performance tests) and Section 2, (Handling
Qualities tests) in Table C2A, that should be
recorded during initial qualification (but
without tolerance) to indicate the flight
simulator motion cueing performance
signature have been identified (reference
Section 3.e). These tests are intended to help
improve the overall standard of FFS motion
cueing.
b. Motion System Checks. The intent of test
3a, Frequency Response, test 3b, Leg Balance,
and test 3c, Turn-Around Check, as described
in the Table of Objective Tests, is to
demonstrate the performance of the motion
system hardware, and to check the integrity
of the motion set-up with regard to
calibration and wear. These tests are
independent of the motion cueing software
and should be considered robotic tests.
c. Motion System Repeatability. The intent
of this test is to ensure that the motion
system software and motion system hardware
have not degraded or changed over time. This
diagnostic test should be completed during
continuing qualification checks in lieu of the
robotic tests. This will allow an improved
ability to determine changes in the software
or determine degradation in the hardware.
The following information delineates the
methodology that should be used for this test.
(1) Input: The inputs should be such that
rotational accelerations, rotational rates, and
linear accelerations are inserted before the
transfer from helicopter center of gravity to
pilot reference point with a minimum
amplitude of 5 deg/sec/sec, 10 deg/sec and
0.3 g, respectively, to provide adequate
analysis of the output.
(2) Recommended output:
(a) Actual platform linear accelerations; the
output will comprise accelerations due to
both the linear and rotational motion
acceleration;
(b) Motion actuators position.
d. Motion Cueing Performance Signature.
(1) Background. The intent of this test is to
provide quantitative time history records of
motion system response to a selected set of
automated QTG maneuvers during initial
qualification. It is not intended to be a
comparison of the motion platform
accelerations against the flight test recorded
accelerations (i.e., not to be compared against
helicopter cueing). If there is a modification
to the initially qualified motion software or
motion hardware (e.g., motion washout filter,
simulator payload change greater than 10%)
then a new baseline may need to be
established.
(2) Test Selection. The conditions
identified in Section 3.e. in Table C2A are
those maneuvers where motion cueing is the
most discernible. They are general tests
applicable to all types of helicopters and
should be completed for motion cueing
performance signature at any time acceptable
to the NSPM prior to or during the initial
qualification evaluation, and the results
included in the MQTG.
(3) Priority. Motion system should be
designed with the intent of placing greater
importance on those maneuvers that directly
influence pilot perception and control of the
helicopter motions. For the maneuvers
identified in section 3.e. in Table C2A, the
flight simulator motion cueing system should
have a high tilt co-ordination gain, high
rotational gain, and high correlation with
respect to the helicopter simulation model.
(4) Data Recording. The minimum list of
parameters provided should allow for the
determination of the flight simulator’s
motion cueing performance signature for the
initial qualification evaluation. The following
parameters are recommended as being
acceptable to perform such a function:
(a) Flight model acceleration and rotational
rate commands at the pilot reference point;
(b) Motion actuators position;
(c) Actual platform position;
(d) Actual platform acceleration at pilot
reference point.
e. Motion Vibrations.
(1) Presentation of results. The
characteristic motion vibrations may be used
to verify that the flight simulator can
reproduce the frequency content of the
helicopter when flown in specific conditions.
The test results should be presented as a
Power Spectral Density (PSD) plot with
frequencies on the horizontal axis and
amplitude on the vertical axis. The helicopter
data and flight simulator data should be
presented in the same format with the same
scaling. The algorithms used for generating
the flight simulator data should be the same
as those used for the helicopter data. If they
are not the same then the algorithms used for
the flight simulator data should be proven to
be sufficiently comparable. As a minimum
the results along the dominant axes should
be presented and a rationale for not
presenting the other axes should be provided.
(2) Interpretation of results. The overall
trend of the PSD plot should be considered
while focusing on the dominant frequencies.
Less emphasis should be placed on the
differences at the high frequency and low
amplitude portions of the PSD plot. During
the analysis, certain structural components of
the flight simulator have resonant
frequencies that are filtered and may not
appear in the PSD plot. If filtering is
required, the notch filter bandwidth should
be limited to 1 Hz to ensure that the buffet
feel is not adversely affected. In addition, a
rationale should be provided to explain that
the characteristic motion vibration is not
being adversely affected by the filtering. The
amplitude should match helicopter data as
described below. However, if the PSD plot
was altered for subjective reasons, a rationale
should be provided to justify the change. If
the plot is on a logarithmic scale it may be
difficult to interpret the amplitude of the
buffet in terms of acceleration. For example,
a 1×10¥3 g-rms2/Hz would describe a heavy
buffet and may be seen in the deep stall
regime. Alternatively, a 1×10¥6 g-rms2/Hz
buffet is almost imperceptable, but may
represent a flap buffet at low speed. The
previous two examples differ in magnitude
by 1000. On a PSD plot this represents three
decades (one decade is a change in order of
magnitude of 10, and two decades is a change
in order of magnitude of 100).
Note: In the example, ‘‘g-rms2’’ is the
mathematical expression for ‘‘g’s root mean
squared.’’
f. Table C2B, Motion System
Recommendations for Level C and Level D
Helicopter Simulators, contains a description
of the parameters that should be present in
simulator motion systems to provide
adequate onset motion cues to helicopter
pilots. The information provided covers the
six axes of motion (pitch, roll, yaw, vertical,
lateral, and longitudinal) and addresses
displacement, velocity, and acceleration.
Also included is information about the
parameters for initial rotational and linear
acceleration. The parameters listed in this
table apply only to Level C and Level D
simulators, and are presented here as
recommended targets for motion system
capability. They are not requirements.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
TABLE C2B.—MOTION SYSTEM RECOMMENDATIONS FOR LEVEL C AND LEVEL D HELICOPTER SIMULATORS
a. .........
a.1. ......
a.1.a. ...
a.1.b. ...
a.1.c. ...
a.2. ......
a.2.a. ...
a.2.b. ...
a.2.c. ...
a.3. ......
a.3.a. ...
a.3.b. ...
Motion System Envelope
Pitch
Displacement ........................................................................................................................................
Velocity .................................................................................................................................................
Acceleration ..........................................................................................................................................
Roll
Displacement ........................................................................................................................................
Velocity .................................................................................................................................................
Acceleration ..........................................................................................................................................
Yaw
Displacement ........................................................................................................................................
Velocity— .............................................................................................................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00195
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26671
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
±25°
±20°/sec
±100°/sec2
±25°
±20°/sec
±100°/sec2
±25°
±20°/sec
09MYR2
26672
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2B.—MOTION SYSTEM RECOMMENDATIONS FOR LEVEL C AND LEVEL D HELICOPTER SIMULATORS—Continued
a.3.c. ...
a.4. ......
a.4.a. ...
a.4.b. ...
a.4.c. ...
a.5. ......
a.5.a. ...
a.5.b. ...
a.5.c. ...
a.6. ......
a.6.a. ...
a.6.b. ...
a.6.c. ...
a.7. ......
Acceleration ..........................................................................................................................................
Vertical
Displacement ........................................................................................................................................
Velocity .................................................................................................................................................
Acceleration ..........................................................................................................................................
Lateral
Displacement ........................................................................................................................................
Velocity .................................................................................................................................................
Acceleration ..........................................................................................................................................
Longitudinal
Displacement ........................................................................................................................................
Velocity .................................................................................................................................................
Acceleration ..........................................................................................................................................
Initial Rotational Acceleration Ratio.
a.8. ......
a.8.a. ...
a.8.b. ...
a.8.c. ...
Initial Linear Acceleration Ratio.
Vertical ..................................................................................................................................................
Lateral ...................................................................................................................................................
Longitudinal ..........................................................................................................................................
±100°/sec2
±34 in.
±24 in.
±0.8 g.
±45 in.
±28 in/sec.
±0.6 g.
±34 in.
±28 in/sec.
±0.6 g.
All axes 300°/ sec2/sec
±6g/sec
±3g/sec
±3g/sec
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
BILLING CODE 4910–13–P
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00196
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
BILLING CODE 4910–13–C
7. Sound System
a. General. The total sound environment in
the helicopter is very complex, and changes
with atmospheric conditions, helicopter
configuration, airspeed, altitude, and power
settings. Flight deck sounds are an important
component of the flight deck operational
environment and provide valuable
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
information to the flight crew. These aural
cues can either assist the crew (as an
indication of an abnormal situation), or
hinder the crew (as a distraction or
nuisance). For effective training, the flight
simulator should provide flight deck sounds
that are perceptible to the pilot during
normal and abnormal operations, and that are
comparable to those of the helicopter. The
PO 00000
Frm 00197
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26673
flight simulator operator should carefully
evaluate background noises in the location
where the device will be installed. To
demonstrate compliance with the sound
requirements, the objective or validation tests
in this attachment were selected to provide
a representative sample of normal static
conditions typically experienced by a pilot.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.035
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26674
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
b. Alternate propulsion. For FFS with
multiple propulsion configurations, any
condition listed in Table C2A in this
attachment should be presented for
evaluation as part of the QTG if identified by
the helicopter manufacturer or other data
supplier as significantly different due to a
change in propulsion system (engine or
propeller).
c. Data and Data Collection System.
(1) Information provided to the flight
simulator manufacturer should comply be
presented in the format suggested by the
‘‘International Air Transport Association
(IATA) Flight Simulator Design and
Performance Data Requirements,’’ as
amended. This information should contain
calibration and frequency response data.
(2) The system used to perform the tests
listed in Table C2A should comply with the
following standards:
(a) The specifications for octave, half
octave, and third octave band filter sets may
be found in American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) S1.11–1986.
(b) Measurement microphones should be
type WS2 or better, as described in
International Electrotechnical Commission
(IEC) 1094–4–1995.
(3) Headsets. If headsets are used during
normal operation of the helicopter they
should also be used during the flight
simulator evaluation.
(4) Playback equipment. Playback
equipment and recordings of the QTG
conditions should be provided during initial
evaluations.
(5) Background noise.
(a) Background noise is the noise in the
flight simulator that is not associated with
the helicopter, but is caused by the flight
simulator’s cooling and hydraulic systems
and extraneous noise from other locations in
the building. Background noise can seriously
impact the correct simulation of helicopter
sounds, and should be kept below the
helicopter sounds. In some cases, the sound
level of the simulation can be increased to
compensate for the background noise.
However, this approach is limited by the
specified tolerances and by the subjective
acceptability of the sound environment to the
evaluation pilot.
(b) The acceptability of the background
noise levels is dependent upon the normal
sound levels in the helicopter being
represented. Background noise levels that fall
below the lines defined by the following
points, may be acceptable:
(i) 70 dB @ 50 Hz;
(ii) 55 dB @ 1000 Hz;
(iii) 30 dB @ 16 kHz.
(Note: These limits are for unweighted
1/3 octave band sound levels. Meeting these
limits for background noise does not ensure
an acceptable flight simulator. Helicopter
sounds that fall below this limit require
careful review and may require lower limits
on background noise.)
(6) Validation testing. Deficiencies in
helicopter recordings should be considered
when applying the specified tolerances to
ensure that the simulation is representative
of the helicopter. Examples of typical
deficiencies are:
(a) Variation of data between tail numbers.
(b) Frequency response of microphones.
(c) Repeatability of the measurements.
TABLE C2C.—EXAMPLE OF CONTINUING QUALIFICATION FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST TOLERANCE
Initial results
(dBSPL)
Band center frequency
50 .................................................................................................................................................
63 .................................................................................................................................................
80 .................................................................................................................................................
100 ...............................................................................................................................................
125 ...............................................................................................................................................
160 ...............................................................................................................................................
200 ...............................................................................................................................................
250 ...............................................................................................................................................
315 ...............................................................................................................................................
400 ...............................................................................................................................................
500 ...............................................................................................................................................
630 ...............................................................................................................................................
800 ...............................................................................................................................................
1000 .............................................................................................................................................
1250 .............................................................................................................................................
1600 .............................................................................................................................................
2000 .............................................................................................................................................
2500 .............................................................................................................................................
3150 .............................................................................................................................................
4000 .............................................................................................................................................
5000 .............................................................................................................................................
6300 .............................................................................................................................................
8000 .............................................................................................................................................
10000 ...........................................................................................................................................
12500 ...........................................................................................................................................
16000 ...........................................................................................................................................
Continuing
qualification
results
(dBSPL)
75.0
75.9
77.1
78.0
81.9
79.8
83.1
78.6
79.5
80.1
80.7
81.9
73.2
79.2
80.7
81.6
76.2
79.5
80.1
78.9
80.1
80.7
84.3
81.3
80.7
71.1
Average
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
8. Additional Information About Flight
Simulator Qualification for New or
Derivative Helicopters
a. Typically, a helicopter manufacturer’s
approved final data for performance,
handling qualities, systems or avionics is not
available until well after a new or derivative
helicopter has entered service. However,
flight crew training and certification often
begins several months prior to the entry of
VerDate Aug<31>2005
00:24 May 09, 2008
Jkt 214001
the first helicopter into service.
Consequently, it may be necessary to use
preliminary data provided by the helicopter
manufacturer for interim qualification of
flight simulators.
b. In these cases, the NSPM may accept
certain partially validated preliminary
helicopter and systems data, and early
release (‘‘red label’’) avionics data in order to
permit the necessary program schedule for
PO 00000
Frm 00198
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
73.8
75.6
76.5
78.3
81.3
80.1
84.9
78.9
78.3
79.5
79.8
80.4
74.1
80.1
82.8
78.6
74.4
80.7
77.1
78.6
77.1
80.4
85.5
79.8
80.1
71.1
Absolute
difference
1.2
0.3
0.6
0.3
0.6
0.3
1.8
0.3
1.2
0.9
0.9
1.5
0.9
0.9
2.1
3.0
1.8
1.2
3.0
0.3
3.0
0.3
1.2
1.5
0.6
0.0
1.1
training, certification, and service
introduction.
c. Simulator sponsors seeking qualification
based on preliminary data should consult the
NSPM to make special arrangements for
using preliminary data for flight simulator
qualification. The sponsor should also
consult the helicopter and flight simulator
manufacturers to develop a data plan and
flight simulator qualification plan.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
d. The procedure to be followed to gain
NSPM acceptance of preliminary data will
vary from case to case and between
helicopter manufacturers. Each helicopter
manufacturer’s new helicopter development
and test program is designed to suit the needs
of the particular project and may not contain
the same events or sequence of events as
another manufacturer’s program or even the
same manufacturer’s program for a different
helicopter. Therefore, there cannot be a
prescribed invariable procedure for
acceptance of preliminary data; instead there
should be a statement describing the final
sequence of events, data sources, and
validation procedures agreed by the
simulator sponsor, the helicopter
manufacturer, the flight simulator
manufacturer, and the NSPM.
Note: A description of helicopter
manufacturer-provided data needed for flight
simulator modeling and validation is to be
found in the ‘‘Royal Aeronautical Society
Data Package Requirements for Design and
Performance Evaluation of Rotary Wing
Synthetic Training Devices.’’
e. The preliminary data should be the
manufacturer’s best representation of the
helicopter, with assurance that the final data
will not deviate significantly from the
preliminary estimates. Data derived from
these predictive or preliminary techniques
should be validated by available sources
including, at least, the following:
(1) Manufacturer’s engineering report. The
report should explain the predictive method
used and illustrate past success of the
method on similar projects. For example, the
manufacturer could show the application of
the method to an earlier helicopter model or
predict the characteristics of an earlier model
and compare the results to final data for that
model.
(2) Early flight test results. This data is
often derived from helicopter certification
tests and should be used to maximum
advantage for early flight simulator
validation. Certain critical tests that would
normally be done early in the helicopter
certification program should be included to
validate essential pilot training and
certification maneuvers. These tests include
cases where a pilot is expected to cope with
a helicopter failure mode or an engine
failure. The early data available will depend
on the helicopter manufacturer’s flight test
program design and may not be the same in
each case. The flight test program of the
helicopter manufacturer should include
provisions for generation of very early flight
tests results for flight simulator validation.
f. The use of preliminary data is not
indefinite. The helicopter manufacturer’s
final data should be available within 12
months after the helicopter first entry into
service or as agreed by the NSPM, the
simulator sponsor, and the helicopter
manufacturer. When applying for interim
qualification using preliminary data, the
simulator sponsor and the NSPM should
agree on the update program. This includes
specifying that the final data update will be
installed in the flight simulator within a
period of 12 months following the final data
release, unless special conditions exist and a
different schedule is acceptable. The flight
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
simulator performance and handling
validation would then be based on data
derived from flight tests. Initial helicopter
systems data should be updated after
engineering tests. Final helicopter systems
data should also be used for flight simulator
programming and validation.
g. Flight simulator avionics should stay
essentially in step with helicopter avionics
(hardware and software) updates. The
permitted time lapse between helicopter and
flight simulator updates should be minimal.
It may depend on the magnitude of the
update and whether the QTG and pilot
training and certification are affected.
Differences in helicopter and flight simulator
avionics versions and the resulting effects on
flight simulator qualification should be
agreed between the simulator sponsor and
the NSPM. Consultation with the flight
simulator manufacturer is desirable
throughout the qualification process.
h. The following describes an example of
the design data and sources that might be
used in the development of an interim
qualification plan.
(1) The plan should consist of the
development of a QTG based upon a mix of
flight test and engineering simulation data.
For data collected from specific helicopter
flight tests or other flights the required design
model or data changes necessary to support
an acceptable Proof of Match (POM) should
be generated by the helicopter manufacturer.
(2) For proper validation of the two sets of
data, the helicopter manufacturer should
compare their simulation model responses
against the flight test data, when driven by
the same control inputs and subjected to the
same atmospheric conditions as recorded in
the flight test. The model responses should
result from a simulation where the following
systems are run in an integrated fashion and
are consistent with the design data released
to the flight simulator manufacturer:
(a) Propulsion.
(b) Aerodynamics.
(c) Mass properties.
(d) Flight controls.
(e) Stability augmentation.
(f) Brakes/landing gear.
i. A qualified test pilot should be used to
assess handling qualities and performance
evaluations for the qualification of flight
simulators of new helicopter types.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirement
9. Engineering Simulator—Validation Data
a. When a fully validated simulation (i.e.,
validated with flight test results) is modified
due to changes to the simulated helicopter
configuration, the helicopter manufacturer or
other acceptable data supplier must
coordinate with the NSPM to supply
validation data from an ‘‘audited’’
engineering simulator/simulation to
selectively supplement flight test data. The
NSPM must be provided an opportunity to
audit the use of the engineering simulation
or the engineering simulator during the
acquisition of the data that will be used as
validation data. Audited data may be used for
changes that are incremental in nature.
PO 00000
Frm 00199
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26675
Manufacturers or other data suppliers must
be able to demonstrate that the predicted
changes in helicopter performance are based
on acceptable aeronautical principles with
proven success history and valid outcomes.
This must include comparisons of predicted
and flight test validated data.
b. Helicopter manufacturers or other
acceptable data suppliers seeking to use an
engineering simulator for simulation
validation data as an alternative to flight-test
derived validation data, must contact the
NSPM and provide the following:
(1) A description of the proposed aircraft
changes, a description of the proposed
simulation model changes, and the use of an
integral configuration management process,
including an audit of the actual simulation
model modifications that includes a step-bystep description leading from the original
model(s) to the current model(s).
(2) A schedule for review by the NSPM of
the proposed plan and the subsequent
validation data to establish acceptability of
the proposal.
(3) Validation data from an audited
engineering simulator/simulation to
supplement specific segments of the flight
test data.
c. To be qualified to supply engineering
simulator validation data, for aerodynamic,
engine, flight control, or ground handling
models, a helicopter manufacturer or other
acceptable data supplier must:
(1) Be able to verify their ability to:
(a) Develop and implement high fidelity
simulation models; and
(b) Predict the handling and performance
characteristics of a helicopter with sufficient
accuracy to avoid additional flight test
activities for those handling and performance
characteristics.
(2) Have an engineering simulator that:
(a) Is a physical entity, complete with a
flight deck representative of the simulated
class of helicopter;
(b) Has controls sufficient for manual
flight;
(c) Has models that run in an integrated
manner;
(d) Had fully flight-test validated
simulation models as the original or baseline
simulation models;
(e) Has an out-of-the-flight deck visual
system;
(f) Has actual avionics boxes
interchangeable with the equivalent software
simulations to support validation of released
software;
(g) Uses the same models as released to the
training community (which are also used to
produce stand-alone proof-of-match and
checkout documents);
(h) Is used to support helicopter
development and certification; and
(i) Has been found to be a high fidelity
representation of the helicopter by the
manufacturer’s pilots (or other acceptable
data supplier), certificate holders, and the
NSPM.
(3) Use the engineering simulator to
produce a representative set of integrated
proof-of-match cases.
(4) Use a configuration control system
covering hardware and software for the
operating components of the engineering
simulator.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26676
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
(5) Demonstrate that the predicted effects
of the change(s) are within the provisions of
sub-paragraph ‘‘a’’ of this section, and
confirm that additional flight test data are not
required.
d. Additional Requirements for Validation
Data
(1) When used to provide validation data,
an engineering simulator must meet the
simulator standards currently applicable to
training simulators except for the data
package.
(2) The data package used must be:
(a) Comprised of the engineering
predictions derived from the helicopter
design, development, or certification process;
(b) Based on acceptable aeronautical
principles with proven success history and
valid outcomes for aerodynamics, engine
operations, avionics operations, flight control
applications, or ground handling;
(c) Verified with existing flight-test data;
and
(d) Applicable to the configuration of a
production helicopter, as opposed to a flighttest helicopter.
(3) Where engineering simulator data are
used as part of a QTG, an essential match
must exist between the training simulator
and the validation data.
(4) Training flight simulator(s) using these
baseline and modified simulation models
must be qualified to at least internationally
recognized standards, such as contained in
the ICAO Document 9625, the ‘‘Manual of
Criteria for the Qualification of Flight
Simulators.’’
End QPS Requirement
lllllllllllllllllllll
10. [Reserved]
11. Validation Test Tolerances
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Begin Information
a. Non-Flight-Test Tolerances. If
engineering simulator data or other nonflight-test data are used as an allowable form
of reference validation data for the objective
tests listed in Table C2A of this attachment,
the data provider must supply a welldocumented mathematical model and testing
procedure that enables a replication of the
engineering simulation results within 20% of
the corresponding flight test tolerances.
b. Background
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
(1) The tolerances listed in Table C2A of
this attachment are designed to measure the
quality of the match using flight-test data as
a reference.
(2) Good engineering judgment should be
applied to all tolerances in any test. A test
is failed when the results fall outside of the
prescribed tolerance(s).
(3) Engineering simulator data are
acceptable because the same simulation
models used to produce the reference data
are also used to test the flight training
simulator (i.e., the two sets of results should
be ‘‘essentially’’ similar).
(4) The results from the two sources may
differ for the following reasons:
(a) Hardware (avionics units and flight
controls);
(b) Iteration rates;
(c) Execution order;
(d) Integration methods;
(e) Processor architecture;
(f) Digital drift, including:
(i) Interpolation methods;
(ii) Data handling differences;
(iii) Auto-test trim tolerances.
(5) The tolerance limit between the
reference data and the flight simulator results
is generally 20% of the corresponding
‘‘flight-test’’ tolerances. However, there may
be cases where the simulator models used are
of higher fidelity, or the manner in which
they are cascaded in the integrated testing
loop have the effect of a higher fidelity, than
those supplied by the data provider. Under
these circumstances, it is possible that an
error greater than 20% may be generated. An
error greater than 20% may be acceptable if
the simulator sponsor can provide an
adequate explanation.
(6) Guidelines are needed for the
application of tolerances to engineeringsimulator-generated validation data because:
(a) Flight-test data are often not available
due to sound technical reasons;
(b) Alternative technical solutions are
being advanced; and
(c) The costs are high.
12. Validation Data Roadmap
a. Helicopter manufacturers or other data
suppliers should supply a validation data
roadmap (VDR) document as part of the data
package. A VDR document contains guidance
material from the helicopter validation data
supplier recommending the best possible
sources of data to be used as validation data
PO 00000
Frm 00200
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
in the QTG. A VDR is of special value when
requesting interim qualification, qualification
of simulators for helicopters certificated prior
to 1992, and qualification of alternate engine
or avionics fits. A sponsor seeking to have a
device qualified in accordance with the
standards contained in this QPS appendix
should submit a VDR to the NSPM as early
as possible in the planning stages. The NSPM
is the final authority to approve the data to
be used as validation material for the QTG.
The NSPM and the Joint Aviation
Authorities’ Synthetic Training Devices
Advisory Board have committed to maintain
a list of agreed VDRs.
b. The VDR should identify (in matrix
format) sources of data for all required tests.
It should also provide guidance regarding the
validity of these data for a specific engine
type, thrust rating configuration, and the
revision levels of all avionics affecting
helicopter handling qualities and
performance. The VDR should include
rationale or explanation in cases where data
or parameters are missing, engineering
simulation data are to be used, flight test
methods require explanation, or where there
is any deviation from data requirements.
Additionally, the document should refer to
other appropriate sources of validation data
(e.g., sound and vibration data documents).
c. The Sample Validation Data Roadmap
(VDR) for helicopters, shown in Table C2D,
depicts a generic roadmap matrix identifying
sources of validation data for an abbreviated
list of tests. This sample document uses fixed
wing parameters instead of helicopter values.
It is merely a sample and does not provide
actual data. A complete matrix should
address all test conditions for helicopter
application and provide actual data and data
sources.
d. Two examples of rationale pages are
presented in Appendix F of IATA Flight
Simulator Design and Performance Data
Requirements document. These illustrate the
type of helicopter and avionics configuration
information and descriptive engineering
rationale used to describe data anomalies or
provide an acceptable basis for using
alternative data for QTG validation
requirements.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
BILLING CODE 4910–13–P
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26677
BILLING CODE 4910–13–C
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00201
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.036
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26678
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
Begin Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
13. [Reserved]
14. Acceptance Guidelines for Alternative
Avionics (Flight-Related Computers and
Controllers)
a. Background
(1) For a new helicopter type, the majority
of flight validation data are collected on the
first helicopter configuration with a
‘‘baseline’’ flight-related avionics ship-set;
(see subparagraph b.(2) of this section). These
data are then used to validate all flight
simulators representing that helicopter type.
(2) Additional validation data may be
needed for flight simulators representing a
helicopter with avionics of a different
hardware design than the baseline, or a
different software revision than that of
previously validated configurations.
(3) When a flight simulator with additional
or alternate avionics configurations is to be
qualified, the QTG should contain tests
against validation data for selected cases
where avionics differences are expected to be
significant.
b. Approval Guidelines For Validating
Alternate Avionics
(1) The following guidelines apply to flight
simulators representing helicopters with a
revised avionics configuration, or more than
one avionics configuration.
(2) The baseline validation data should be
based on flight test data, except where other
data are specifically allowed (e.g.,
engineering flight simulator data).
(3) The helicopter avionics can be
segmented into two groups, systems or
components whose functional behavior
contributes to the aircraft response presented
in the QTG results, and systems that do not.
The following avionics are examples of
contributory systems for which hardware
design changes or software revisions may
lead to significant differences in the aircraft
response relative to the baseline avionics
configuration: Flight control computers and
controllers for engines, autopilot, braking
system, and nosewheel steering system, if
applicable. Related avionics such as
augmentation systems should also be
considered.
(4) The acceptability of validation data
used in the QTG for an alternative avionics
fit should be determined as follows:
(a) For changes to an avionics system or
component that do not affect QTG validation
test response, the QTG test can be based on
validation data from the previously validated
avionics configuration.
(b) For an avionics change to a contributory
system, where a specific test is not affected
by the change (e.g., the avionics change is a
Built In Test Equipment (BITE) update or a
modification in a different flight phase), the
QTG test can be based on validation data
from the previously-validated avionics
configuration. The QTG should include
authoritative justification (e.g., from the
helicopter manufacturer or system supplier)
that this avionics change does not affect the
test.
(c) For an avionics change to a contributory
system, the QTG may be based on validation
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
data from the previously-validated avionics
configuration if no new functionality is
added and the impact of the avionics change
on the helicopter response is based on
acceptable aeronautical principles with
proven success history and valid outcomes.
This should be supplemented with avionicsspecific validation data from the helicopter
manufacturer’s engineering simulation,
generated with the revised avionics
configuration. The QTG should include an
explanation of the nature of the change and
its effect on the helicopter response.
(d) For an avionics change to a
contributory system that significantly affects
some tests in the QTG, or where new
functionality is added, the QTG should be
based on validation data from the previously
validated avionics configuration and
supplemental avionics-specific flight test
data sufficient to validate the alternate
avionics revision. Additional flight test
validation data may not be needed if the
avionics changes were certified without the
need for testing with a comprehensive flight
instrumentation package. The helicopter
manufacturer should coordinate flight
simulator data requirements in advance with
the NSPM.
(5) A matrix or ‘‘roadmap’’ should be
provided with the QTG indicating the
appropriate validation data source for each
test. The roadmap should include
identification of the revision state of those
contributory avionics systems that could
affect specific test responses.
15. Transport Delay Testing
a. This paragraph describes how to
determine the introduced transport delay
through the flight simulator system so that it
does not exceed a specific time delay. The
transport delay should be measured from
control inputs through the interface, through
each of the host computer modules and back
through the interface to motion, flight
instrument, and visual systems. The
transport delay should not exceed the
maximum allowable interval.
b. Four specific examples of transport
delay are:
(1) Simulation of classic non-computer
controlled aircraft;
(2) Simulation of Computer Controlled
Aircraft using real helicopter black boxes;
(3) Simulation of Computer Controlled
Aircraft using software emulation of
helicopter boxes;
(4) Simulation using software avionics or
rehosted instruments.
c. Figure C2C illustrates the total transport
delay for a non-computer-controlled
helicopter or the classic transport delay test.
Since there are no helicopter-induced delays
for this case, the total transport delay is
equivalent to the introduced delay.
d. Figure C2D illustrates the transport
delay testing method using the real
helicopter controller system.
e. To obtain the induced transport delay for
the motion, instrument and visual signal, the
delay induced by the helicopter controller
should be subtracted from the total transport
delay. This difference represents the
introduced delay and should not exceed the
standards prescribed in Table C1A.
PO 00000
Frm 00202
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
f. Introduced transport delay is measured
from the flight deck control input to the
reaction of the instruments and motion and
visual systems (See Figure C2C).
g. The control input may also be
introduced after the helicopter controller
system input and the introduced transport
delay may be measured directly from the
control input to the reaction of the
instruments, and simulator motion and
visual systems (See Figure C2D).
h. Figure C2E illustrates the transport delay
testing method used on a flight simulator that
uses a software emulated helicopter
controller system.
i. It is not possible to measure the
introduced transport delay using the
simulated helicopter controller system
architecture for the pitch, roll and yaw axes.
Therefore, the signal should be measured
directly from the pilot controller. The flight
simulator manufacturer should measure the
total transport delay and subtract the
inherent delay of the actual helicopter
components because the real helicopter
controller system has an inherent delay
provided by the helicopter manufacturer. The
flight simulator manufacturer should ensure
that the introduced delay does not exceed the
standards prescribed in Table C1A.
j. Special measurements for instrument
signals for flight simulators using a real
helicopter instrument display system instead
of a simulated or re-hosted display. For flight
instrument systems, the total transport delay
should be measured and the inherent delay
of the actual helicopter components
subtracted to ensure that the introduced
delay does not exceed the standards
prescribed in Table C1A.
(1) Figure C2FA illustrates the transport
delay procedure without helicopter display
simulation. The introduced delay consists of
the delay between the control movement and
the instrument change on the data bus.
(2) Figure C2FB illustrates the modified
testing method required to measure
introduced delay due to software avionics or
re-hosted instruments. The total simulated
instrument transport delay is measured and
the helicopter delay should be subtracted
from this total. This difference represents the
introduced delay and should not exceed the
standards prescribed in Table C1A. The
inherent delay of the helicopter between the
data bus and the displays is indicated in
figure C2FA. The display manufacturer
should provide this delay time.
k. Recorded signals. The signals recorded
to conduct the transport delay calculations
should be explained on a schematic block
diagram. The flight simulator manufacturer
should also provide an explanation of why
each signal was selected and how they relate
to the above descriptions.
l. Interpretation of results. Flight simulator
results vary over time from test to test due
to ‘‘sampling uncertainty.’’ All flight
simulators run at a specific rate where all
modules are executed sequentially in the
host computer. The flight controls input can
occur at any time in the iteration, but these
data will not be processed before the start of
the new iteration. For example, a flight
simulator running at 60 Hz may have a
difference of as much as 16.67 msec between
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
visual system will not always be
synchronized.
m. The transport delay test should account
for both daylight and night modes of
operation of the visual system. In both cases,
the tolerances prescribed in Table C1A
PO 00000
Frm 00203
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
should be met and the motion response
should occur before the end of the first video
scan containing new information.
BILLING CODE 4910–13–P
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.037
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
results. This does not mean that the test has
failed. Instead, the difference is attributed to
variation in input processing. In some
conditions, the host simulator and the visual
system do not run at the same iteration rate,
so the output of the host computer to the
26679
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
BILLING CODE 4910–13–C
16. Continuing Qualification Evaluations—
Validation Test Data Presentation
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
a. Background
(1) The MQTG is created during the initial
evaluation of a flight simulator. This is the
master document, as amended, to which
flight simulator continuing qualification
evaluation test results are compared.
(2) The currently accepted method of
presenting continuing qualification
evaluation test results is to provide flight
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
simulator results over-plotted with reference
data. Test results are carefully reviewed to
determine if the test is within the specified
tolerances. This can be a time consuming
process, particularly when reference data
exhibits rapid variations or an apparent
anomaly requiring engineering judgment in
the application of the tolerances. In these
cases, the solution is to compare the results
to the MQTG. The continuing qualification
results are compared to the results in the
MQTG for acceptance. The flight simulator
operator and the NSPM should look for any
PO 00000
Frm 00204
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
change in the flight simulator performance
since initial qualification.
b. Continuing Qualification Evaluation Test
Results Presentation
(1) Flight simulator operators are
encouraged to over-plot continuing
qualification validation test results with
MQTG flight simulator results recorded
during the initial evaluation and as amended.
Any change in a validation test will be
readily apparent. In addition to plotting
continuing qualification validation test and
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.038
26680
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
MQTG results, operators may elect to plot
reference data.
(2) There are no suggested tolerances
between flight simulator continuing
qualification and MQTG validation test
results. Investigation of any discrepancy
between the MQTG and continuing
qualification flight simulator performance is
left to the discretion of the flight simulator
operator and the NSPM.
(3) Differences between the two sets of
results, other than variations attributable to
repeatability issues that cannot be explained
should be investigated.
(4) The flight simulator should retain the
ability to over-plot both automatic and
manual validation test results with reference
data.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
17. Alternative Data Sources, Procedures,
and Instrumentation: Level B Simulators
Only
a. Sponsors are not required to use the
alternative data sources, procedures, and
instrumentation. However, any sponsor
choosing to use alternative sources must
comply with the requirements in Table C2E.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
b. It has become standard practice for
experienced simulator manufacturers to use
such techniques as a means of establishing
data bases for new simulator configurations
while awaiting the availability of actual flight
test data. The data generated from the
aerodynamic modeling techniques is then
compared to the flight test data when it
becomes available. The results of such
comparisons have become increasingly
consistent, indicating that these techniques,
applied with appropriate experience, are
dependable and accurate for the development
of aerodynamic models for use in Level B
simulators.
c. Based on this history of successful
comparisons, the NSPM has concluded that
those who are experienced in the
development of aerodynamic models for
simulator application can successfully use
these modeling techniques to alter the
method for acquiring flight test data for Level
B simulators.
d. The information in Table C2E
(Alternative Data Sources, Procedures, and
Information) is presented to describe an
acceptable alternative to data sources for
simulator modeling and validation and an
acceptable alternative to the procedures and
instrumentation traditionally used to gather
such modeling and validation data.
(1) Alternative data sources that may be
used for part or all of a data requirement are
the Helicopter Maintenance Manual, the
Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM), Helicopter
Design Data, the Type Inspection Report
(TIR), Certification Data or acceptable
supplemental flight test data.
(2) The sponsor should coordinate with the
NSPM prior to using alternative data sources
in a flight test or data gathering effort.
e. The NSPM position on the use of these
alternative data sources, procedures, and
instrumentation is based on the use of a
rigorously defined and fully mature
simulation controls system model that
includes accurate gearing and cable stretch
characteristics (where applicable),
determined from actual aircraft
measurements. The model does not require
control surface position measurements in the
flight test objective data in these limited
applications.
f. Data may be acquired by using an inertial
measurement system and a synchronized
video of the calibrated helicopter
instruments, including the inclinometer; the
force/position measurements of flight deck
controls; and a clear visual directional
reference for a known magnetic bearing (e.g.,
a runway centerline). Ground track and wind
corrected heading may be used for sideslip
angle.
g. The sponsor is urged to contact the
NSPM for clarification of any issue regarding
helicopters with reversible control systems.
This table is not applicable to Computer
Controlled Aircraft flight simulators.
h. Use of these alternate data sources,
procedures, and instrumentation does not
relieve the sponsor from compliance with the
balance of the information contained in this
document relative to Level B FFSs.
i. The term ‘‘inertial measurement system’’
is used in table C2E includes the use of a
functional global positioning system (GPS).
j. Synchronized video for the use of
alternative data sources, procedures, and
instrumentation should have:
(1) sufficient resolution to allow
magnification of the display to make
appropriate measurement and comparisons;
and
(2) sufficient size and incremental marking
to allow similar measurement and
comparison. The detail provided by the video
should provide sufficient clarity and
accuracy to measure the necessary
parameter(s) to at least 1⁄2 of the tolerance
authorized for the specific test being
conducted and allow an integration of the
parameter(s) in question to obtain a rate of
change.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
TABLE C2E.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCES, PROCEDURES, AND INSTRUMENTATION
[The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 9 of Appendix C are not used]
QPS requirements
Information
Table of objective tests
Level By only
Alternative data sources, procedures,
and instrumentation
1.a.1.a. Performance. Engine Start and
Accelerations.
X
1.a.1.b. Performance. Steady State Idle
and Operating RPM Conditions.
X
1.a.2. Performance.
Speed Trim.
Turbine
X
1.a.3. Performance. Engine and Rotor
Speed Governing.
X
Data may be acquired using a synchronized video recording of all engine instruments, start buttons, means
for fuel introduction and means for
moving from ‘‘idle’’ to ‘‘flight.’’ A stopwatch is necessary.
Data may be acquired using a synchronized video recording of all engine instruments, and include the status of the means for moving from
‘‘idle’’ to ‘‘flight.’’.
Data may be acquired using a synchronized video recording of all engine instruments. Speed trim actuator
position may be hand recorded.
Data may be acquired by using a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments and the force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Test entry number and title
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Power
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00205
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26681
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
Notes
09MYR2
26682
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2E.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCES, PROCEDURES, AND INSTRUMENTATION—Continued
[The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 9 of Appendix C are not used]
QPS requirements
Information
Table of objective tests
Level By only
Alternative data sources, procedures,
and instrumentation
1.b.1. Performance. On Surface Taxi.
Minimum Radius Turn.
1.b.2. Performance. On Surface Taxi
Rate of Turn vs. Nosewheel Steering
Angle.
X
TIR, AFM, or Design data may be used.
X
1.b.3. Performance. Taxi ..........................
X
1.b.4. Performance. Brake .......................
X
1.c.1. Performance. Running Takeoff ......
X
1.c.2. Performance. One Engine Inoperative (OEI), continued takeoff.
X
1.f. Performance. Level Flight. Trimmed
Flight Control Positions.
X
1.g.
Performance.
Normal
Climb.
Trimmed Flight Control Positions.
X
1.h.1.
Descent
Performance
Trimmed Flight Control Positions.
and
X
1.h.2. Autorotation Performance
Trimmed Flight Control Positions.
and
X
Data may be acquired by using a constant tiller position (measured with a
protractor), or full pedal application for
steady state turn, and synchronized
video of heading indicator. If less than
full pedal is used, pedal position must
be recorded.
Data may be acquired by using a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments and the force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
Data may be acquired using a stopwatch and a means for measuring distance such as runway distance markers conforming with runway distance
marker standards.
Preliminary certification data may be
used. Data may be acquired by using
a synchronized video of the calibrated
helicopter instruments and the force/
position measurements of flight deck
controls. Collective, cyclic, and pedal
position time history must be recorded
from the start of collective movement
through to normal climb. Indicated
torque settings may be hand recorded
at the moment of lift-off and in a
steady normal climb.
Data may be acquired by using a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments and the force/position measurements of flight deck controls. Collective, cyclic, and pedal position time history must be recorded
from the start of collective movement
through to normal OEI climb. Indicated torque settings may be hand recorded at the moment of lift-off and in
a steady normal OEI climb.
Data may be acquired by using a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments and the force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
Data may be acquired by using a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments and the force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
Data may be acquired by using a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments and the force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
Data may be acquired by using a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments and the force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Test entry number and title
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Frm 00206
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Notes
A single procedure may not be
quate for all rotorcraft steering
tems. Appropriate measurement
cedures must be devised and
posed for NSPM concurrence.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
adesyspropro-
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2E.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCES, PROCEDURES, AND INSTRUMENTATION—Continued
[The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 9 of Appendix C are not used]
QPS requirements
Information
Table of objective tests
Level By only
Alternative data sources, procedures,
and instrumentation
1.j.1. Performance. Running Landing All
Engines.
X
1.j.2. Performance. Running Landing One
Engine Inoperative.
X
1.j.3. Performance. Balked Landing .........
X
2.a.1. Handling Qualities. Static Control
Checks. Cyclic Controller Position vs.
Force.
X
2.a.2. Handling Qualities. Static Control
Checks. Collective/Pedals vs. Force.
X
2.a.3. Handling Qualities. Brake Pedal
Force vs. Position.
X
2.a.4. Handling Qualities. Trim System
Rate (all applicable systems).
X
2.a.6. Handling Qualities. Control System
Freeplay.
2.c.1. Longitudinal Handling Qualities.
Control Response.
X
2.c.2. Longitudinal Handling Qualities.
Static Stability.
X
2.c.3.a. Longitudinal Handling Qualities.
Dynamic Stability, Long Term Response.
X
Data may be acquired by using a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments and the force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
Data may be acquired by using a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments and the force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
Data may be acquired by using a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments and the force/position measurements of flight deck controls. The synchronized video must
record the time of the ‘‘balk landing’’
decision.
Control positions can be obtained using
continuous control position recordings.
Force data may be acquired by using
a hand held force gauge so that the
forces can be cross-plotted against
control position in each of the control
axes.
Control positions can be obtained using
continuous control position recordings.
Force data may be acquired by using
a hand held force gauge so that the
forces can be cross-plotted against
control position in each of the control
axes.
Brake pedal positions can be obtained
using continuous position recordings.
Force data may be acquired by using
a hand held force gauge so that the
forces can be cross-plotted against
brake pedal position.
Control positions can be obtained using
continuous control position recordings
plotted against time to provide rate in
each applicable system.
Data may be acquired by direct measurement.
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system, a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments and the force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system, a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments and the force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system, a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments and the force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Test entry number and title
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
X
PO 00000
Frm 00207
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
Notes
09MYR2
26683
26684
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C2E.—ALTERNATIVE DATA SOURCES, PROCEDURES, AND INSTRUMENTATION—Continued
[The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 9 of Appendix C are not used]
QPS requirements
Information
Table of objective tests
Level By only
Alternative data sources, procedures,
and instrumentation
2.c.3.b. Longitudinal Handling Qualities.
Dynamic Stability, Short Term Response.
X
2.c.4. Longitudinal Handling Qualities.
Maneuvering stability.
X
2.d.1.a. Lateral Handling Qualities. Control Response.
X
2.d.1.b Directional Handling Qualities.
Control Response..
X
2.d.2. Handling
Static Stability.
Directional
X
2.d.3.a. Handling Qualities. Dynamic Lateral and Directional Stability Lateral-Directional Oscillations.
X
2.d.3.b. Handling Qualities. Dynamic Lateral and Directional Stability Spiral Stability.
X
2.d.3.c. Handling Qualities. Dynamic Lateral and Directional Stability. Adverse/
Proverse Yaw.
X
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system, a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments and the force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system, a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments and the force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system, a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments and the force/position measurements of flight deck controls.
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of calibrated helicopter instruments and force/position
measurements of flight deck directional controls.
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of calibrated helicopter instruments and force/position
measurements of flight deck directional controls.
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments, the force/position
measurements of flight deck controls,
and a stop watch.
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments, the force/position
measurements of flight deck controls,
and a stop watch.
Data may be acquired by using an inertial measurement system and a synchronized video of the calibrated helicopter instruments, the force/position
measurements of flight deck controls.
Test entry number and title
Qualities.
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
18. Visual Display Systems.
a. Basic principles of a FFS collimated
display:
(1) The essential feature of a collimated
display is that light rays coming from a given
point in a picture are parallel. There are two
main implications of the parallel rays:
(a) The viewer’s eyes focus at infinity and
have zero convergence, providing a cue that
the object is distant; and
(b) The angle to any given point in the
picture does not change when viewed from
a different position so the object behaves
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
geometrically as though it were located at a
significant distance from the viewer. These
cues are self-consistent, and are appropriate
for any object that has been modeled as being
at a significant distance from the viewer.
(2) In an ideal situation the rays are
perfectly parallel, but most implementations
provide only an approximation to the ideal.
Typically, an FFS display provides an image
located not closer than about 20–33 ft (6–10
m) from the viewer, with the distance varying
over the field-of-view. A schematic
representation of a collimated display is
provided in Figure C2A.
(3) Collimated displays are well suited to
many simulation applications as the area of
interest is relatively distant from the observer
PO 00000
Frm 00208
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Notes
so the angles to objects should remain
independent of viewing position. Consider
the view of the runway seen by the flight
crew lined up on an approach. In the real
world, the runway is distant and the light
rays from the runway to the eyes are parallel.
The runway appears to be straight ahead to
both crew members. This situation is well
simulated by a collimated display and is
presented in Figure C2B. Note that the
distance to the runway has been shortened
for clarity. If drawn to scale, the runway
would be farther away and the rays from the
two seats would be closer to being parallel.
(4) While the horizontal field-of-view of a
collimated display can be extended to
approximately 210°–220°, the vertical field-
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
of-view has been limited to about 40°–45°.
These limitations result from tradeoffs in
optical quality and interference between the
display components and flight deck
structures, but were sufficient to meet FFS
regulatory approval for Helicopter FFSs.
However, recent designs have been
introduced with vertical fields of view of up
to 60° for helicopter applications.
b. Basic principles of a FFS dome (or noncollimated) display:
(1) The situation in a dome display is
shown in Figure C2C. As the angles can be
correct for only one eye point at a time, the
visual system in the figure has been aligned
for the right seat eye point position. The
runway appears to be straight ahead of the
aircraft for this viewer. For the left seat
viewer, however, the runway appears to be
somewhat to the right of the aircraft. As the
aircraft is still moving towards the runway,
the perceived velocity vector will be directed
towards the runway and this will be
interpreted as the aircraft having some yaw
offset.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
(2) The situation is substantially different
for near field objects encountered in
helicopter operations close to the ground. In
those cases, objects that should be
interpreted as being close to the viewer will
be misinterpreted as being distant in a
collimated display. The errors can actually be
reduced in a dome display.
(3) The field-of-view possible with a dome
display can be larger than that of a collimated
display. Depending on the configuration, a
field-of-view of 240° by 90° is possible and
can be exceeded.
c. Additional display considerations
(1) While the situations described above
are for discrete viewing positions, the same
arguments can be extended to moving eye
points produced by the viewer’s head
movement. In the real world, the parallax
effects resulting from head movement
provide distance cues. The effect is
particularly strong for relative movement of
flight deck structure in the near field and
modeled objects in the distance. Collimated
displays will provide accurate parallax cues
PO 00000
Frm 00209
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26685
for distant objects, but increasingly
inaccurate cues for near field objects. The
situation is reversed for dome displays.
(2) Stereopsis cues resulting from the
different images presented to each eye for
objects relatively close to the viewer also
provide depth cues. Again, the collimated
and dome displays provide more or less
accurate cues depending on the modeled
distance of the objects being viewed.
d. Training implications
(1) In view of the basic principles
described above, it is clear that neither
display approach provides a completely
accurate image for all possible object
distances. The sponsor should consider the
training role of the FFS when configuring the
display system to make the optimum choice.
Factors that should be considered include
relative importance of training tasks at low
altitudes, the role of the two crew members
in the flying tasks, and the field-of-view
required for specific training tasks.
BILLING CODE 4910–13–P
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26686
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00210
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.039
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
BILLING CODE 4910–13–C
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
Attachment 3 to Appendix C to Part 60—
Simulator Subjective Evaluation
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Begin QPS Requirements
1. Requirements
a. Except for special use airport models, all
airport models required by this part must be
representations of real-world, operational
airports or representations of fictional
airports and must meet the requirements set
out in Tables C3B or C3C of this attachment,
as appropriate.
b. If fictional airports are used, the sponsor
must ensure that navigational aids and all
appropriate maps, charts, and other
navigational reference material for the
fictional airports (and surrounding areas as
necessary) are compatible, complete, and
accurate with respect to the visual
presentation and airport model of this
fictional airport. An SOC must be submitted
that addresses navigation aid installation and
performance and other criteria (including
obstruction clearance protection) for all
instrument approaches to the fictional
airports that are available in the simulator.
The SOC must reference and account for
information in the terminal instrument
procedures manual and the construction and
availability of the required maps, charts, and
other navigational material. This material
must be clearly marked ‘‘for training
purposes only.’’
c. When the simulator is being used by an
instructor or evaluator for purposes of
training, checking, or testing under this
chapter, only airport models classified as
Class I, Class II, or Class III may be used by
the instructor or evaluator. Detailed
descriptions/definitions of these
classifications are found in Appendix F of
this part.
d. When a person sponsors an FFS
maintained by a person other than a U.S.
certificate holder, the sponsor is accountable
for that FFS originally meeting, and
continuing to meet, the criteria under which
it was originally qualified and the
appropriate Part 60 criteria, including the
visual scenes and airport models that may be
used by instructors or evaluators for purposes
of training, checking, or testing under this
chapter.
e. Neither Class II nor Class III airport
visual models are required to appear on the
SOQ, and the method used for keeping
instructors and evaluators apprised of the
airport models that meet Class II or Class III
requirements on any given simulator is at the
option of the sponsor, but the method used
must be available for review by the TPAA.
f. When an airport model represents a real
world airport and a permanent change is
made to that real world airport (e.g., a new
runway, an extended taxiway, a new lighting
system, a runway closure) without a written
extension grant from the NSPM (described in
paragraph 1.g., of this section), an update to
that airport model must be made in
accordance with the following time limits:
(1) For a new airport runway, a runway
extension, a new airport taxiway, a taxiway
extension, or a runway/taxiway closure—
within 90 days of the opening for use of the
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
new airport runway, runway extension, new
airport taxiway, or taxiway extension; or
within 90 days of the closure of the runway
or taxiway.
(2) For a new or modified approach light
system—within 45 days of the activation of
the new or modified approach light system.
(3) For other facility or structural changes
on the airport (e.g., new terminal, relocation
of Air Traffic Control Tower)—within 180
days of the opening of the new or changed
facility or structure.
g. If a sponsor desires an extension to the
time limit for an update to a visual scene or
airport model or has an objection to what
must be updated in the specific airport model
requirement, the sponsor must provide a
written extension request to the NSPM
stating the reason for the update delay and
a proposed completion date or provide an
explanation for the objection, explaining why
the identified airport change will not have an
impact on flight training, testing, or checking.
A copy of this request or objection must also
be sent to the POI/TCPM. The NSPM will
send the official response to the sponsor and
a copy to the POI/TCPM; however, if there
is an objection, after consultation with the
appropriate POI/TCPM regarding the
training, testing, or checking impact, the
NSPM will send the official response to the
sponsor and a copy to the POI/TCPM.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
2. Discussion
a. The subjective tests provide a basis for
evaluating the capability of the simulator to
perform over a typical utilization period;
determining that the simulator competently
simulates each required maneuver,
procedure, or task; and verifying correct
operation of the simulator controls,
instruments, and systems. The items listed in
the following Tables are for simulator
evaluation purposes only. They may not be
used to limit or exceed the authorizations for
use of a given level of simulator as described
on the SOQ or as approved by the TPAA. All
items in the following paragraphs are subject
to an examination.
b. The tests in Table C3A, Operations
Tasks, in this attachment address pilot
functions, including maneuvers and
procedures (called flight tasks), and are
divided by flight phases. The performance of
these tasks by the NSPM includes an
operational examination of the visual system
and special effects. There are flight tasks
included to address some features of
advanced technology helicopters and
innovative training programs.
c. The tests in Table C3A, Operations
Tasks, and Table C3G, Instructor Operating
Station, in this attachment address the
overall function and control of the simulator
including the various simulated
environmental conditions; simulated
helicopter system operation (normal,
abnormal, and emergency); visual system
displays; and special effects necessary to
meet flight crew training, evaluation, or flight
experience requirements.
d. All simulated helicopter systems
functions will be assessed for normal and,
PO 00000
Frm 00211
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26687
where appropriate, alternate operations.
Normal, abnormal, and emergency operations
associated with a flight phase will be
assessed during the evaluation of flight tasks
or events within that flight phase. Simulated
helicopter systems are listed separately under
‘‘Any Flight Phase’’ to ensure appropriate
attention to systems checks. Operational
navigation systems (including inertial
navigation systems, global positioning
systems, or other long-range systems) and the
associated electronic display systems will be
evaluated if installed. The NSP pilot will
include in his report to the TPAA, the effect
of the system operation and any system
limitation.
e. Simulators demonstrating a satisfactory
circling approach will be qualified for the
circling approach maneuver and may be
approved for such use by the TPAA in the
sponsor’s FAA-approved flight training
program. To be considered satisfactory, the
circling approach will be flown at maximum
gross weight for landing, with minimum
visibility for the helicopter approach
category, and must allow proper alignment
with a landing runway at least 90° different
from the instrument approach course while
allowing the pilot to keep an identifiable
portion of the airport in sight throughout the
maneuver (reference—14 CFR 91.175(e)).
f. At the request of the TPAA, the NSP
Pilot may assess the simulator for a special
aspect of a sponsor’s training program during
the functions and subjective portion of an
evaluation. Such an assessment may include
a portion of a Line Oriented Flight Training
(LOFT) scenario or special emphasis items in
the sponsor’s training program. Unless
directly related to a requirement for the
qualification level, the results of such an
evaluation would not affect the qualification
of the simulator.
g. This appendix addresses helicopter
simulators at Levels B, C, and D because
there are no Level A Helicopter simulators.
h. The FAA intends to allow the use of
Class III airport models on a limited basis
when the sponsor provides the TPAA (or
other regulatory authority) an appropriate
analysis of the skills, knowledge, and
abilities (SKAs) necessary for competent
performance of the tasks in which this
particular media element is used. The
analysis should describe the ability of the
FFS/visual media to provide an adequate
environment in which the required SKAs are
satisfactorily performed and learned. The
analysis should also include the specific
media element, such as the visual scene or
airport model. Additional sources of
information on the conduct of task and
capability analysis may be found on the
FAA’s Advanced Qualification Program
(AQP) Web site at: https://www.faa.gov/
education_research/training/aqp/.
h. The TPAA may accept Class III airport
models without individual observation
provided the sponsor provides the TPAA
with an acceptable description of the process
for determining the acceptability of a specific
airport model, outlines the conditions under
which such an airport model may be used,
and adequately describes what restrictions
will be applied to each resulting airport or
landing area model. Examples of situations
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26688
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
that may warrant Class III model designation
by the TPAA include the following:
(a) Training, testing, or checking on very
low visibility operations, including SMGCS
operations.
(b) Instrument operations training
(including instrument takeoff, departure,
arrival, approach, and missed approach
training, testing, or checking) using—
(i) A specific model that has been
geographically ‘‘moved’’ to a different
location and aligned with an instrument
procedure for another airport.
(ii) A model that does not match changes
made at the real-world airport (or landing
area for helicopters) being modeled.
(iii) A model generated with an ‘‘off-board’’
or an ‘‘on-board’’ model development tool
(by providing proper latitude/longitude
reference; correct runway or landing area
orientation, length, width, marking, and
lighting information; and appropriate
adjacent taxiway location) to generate a
facsimile of a real world airport or landing
area.
i. Previously qualified simulators with
certain early generation Computer Generated
Image (CGI) visual systems, are limited by the
capability of the Image Generator or the
display system used. These systems are:
(1) Early CGI visual systems that are
exempt from the necessity of including
runway numbers as a part of the specific
runway marking requirements are:
(a) Link NVS and DNVS.
(b) Novoview 2500 and 6000.
(c) FlightSafety VITAL series up to, and
including, VITAL III, but not beyond.
(d) Redifusion SP1, SP1T, and SP2.
(2) Early CGI visual systems are excepted
from the necessity of including runway
numbers unless the runway is used for LOFT
training sessions. These LOFT airport models
require runway numbers, but only for the
specific runway end (one direction) used in
the LOFT session. The systems required to
display runway numbers only for LOFT
scenes are:
(a) FlightSafety VITAL IV.
(b) Redifusion SP3 and SP3T.
(c) Link-Miles Image II.
(3) The following list of previously
qualified CGI and display systems are
incapable of generating blue lights. These
systems are not required to have accurate
taxi-way edge lighting are:
(a) Redifusion SP1 and SP1T.
(b) FlightSafety Vital IV.
(c) Link-Miles Image II and Image IIT
(d) XKD displays (even though the XKD
image generator is capable of generating blue
colored lights, the display cannot
accommodate that color).
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
TABLE C3A.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Simulator
level
Operations tasks
B
C
D
Tasks in this table are subject to evaluation if appropriate for the helicopter simulated as indicated in the SOQ Configuration List or the level of
simulator qualification involved. Items not installed or not functional on the simulator and, therefore, not appearing on the SOQ Configuration
List, are not required to be listed as exceptions on the SOQ.
1. Preparation for Flight
1.a. .....................
Flight deck check: Switches, indicators, systems, and equipment .........................................................................
X
X
X
2. APU/Engine start and run-up
2.a. .....................
Normal start procedures ..........................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
2.b. .....................
Alternate start procedures .......................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
2.c. .....................
Abnormal starts and shutdowns (e.g., hot start, hung start) ..................................................................................
X
X
X
2.d. .....................
Rotor engagement ...................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
2.e. .....................
System checks ........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
3. Taxiing—Ground
Power required to taxi .............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
3.b. .....................
Brake effectiveness .................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
3.c. .....................
Ground handling ......................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
3.d. .....................
Water handling (if applicable) .................................................................................................................................
X
X
3.e. .....................
Abnormal/emergency procedures:
3.e.1. ..................
Brake system failure ................................................................................................................................................
X
X
3.e.2. ..................
Ground resonance ...................................................................................................................................................
X
X
3.e.3. ..................
Dynamic rollover ......................................................................................................................................................
X
X
3.e.4. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
3.a ......................
Deployment of emergency floats/water landing ......................................................................................................
X
X
3.e.5. ..................
Others listed on the SOQ ........................................................................................................................................
A
X
X
Takeoff to a hover ...................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
4. Taxiing—Hover
4.a. .....................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00212
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26689
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3A.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Simulator
level
Operations tasks
B
C
D
4.b. .....................
Instrument response:
4.b.1. ..................
Engine instruments ..................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4.b.2. ..................
Flight instruments ....................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4.b.3. ..................
Hovering turns .........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4.c. .....................
Hover power checks:
4.c.1. ..................
In ground effect (IGE) .............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4.c.2. ..................
Out of ground effect (OGE) .....................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4.d. .....................
Crosswind/tailwind hover .........................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4.e. .....................
Translating tendency ...............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4.f. ......................
External load operations:
4.f.1. ...................
Hookup ....................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
4.f.2. ...................
Release ...................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
4.f.3. ...................
Winch operations .....................................................................................................................................................
X
X
4.g. .....................
Abnormal/emergency procedures:
4.g.1. ..................
Engine failure ..........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4.g.2. ..................
Fuel governing system failure .................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4.g.3. ..................
Settling with power (OGE) ......................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4.g.4. ..................
Hovering autorotation ..............................................................................................................................................
X
X
4.g.5. ..................
Stability augmentation system failure .....................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4.g.6. ..................
Directional control malfunction ................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4.g.7. ..................
Loss of tail rotor effectiveness (LTE) ......................................................................................................................
X
X
4.g.8. ..................
Others listed on the SOQ ........................................................................................................................................
A
X
X
4.h. .....................
Pre-takeoff checks ...................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
5. Takeoff/Translational Flight
5.a. .....................
Forward (up to effective translational lift) ................................................................................................................
X
X
5.b. .....................
Sideward (up to limiting airspeed) ..........................................................................................................................
X
X
5.c. .....................
Rearward (up to limiting airspeed) ..........................................................................................................................
X
X
6. Takeoff and Departure Phase
Normal .....................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.a.1. ..................
From ground ............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.a.2. ..................
From hover ..............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.a.2.a. ...............
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
6.a. .....................
Cat A .......................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.a.2.b. ...............
Cat B .......................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.a.3. ..................
Running ...................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.a.4. ..................
Crosswind/tailwind ...................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00213
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26690
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3A.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Simulator
level
Operations tasks
B
C
D
6.a.5. ..................
Maximum performance ............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.a.6. ..................
Instrument ................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.a.7. ..................
Takeoff from a confined area ..................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.a.8. ..................
Takeoff from a pinnacle/platform ............................................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.a.9. ..................
Takeoff from a slope ...............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.a.10. ................
External load operations .........................................................................................................................................
X
X
6.b. .....................
Abnormal/emergency procedures: ..........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.b.1. ..................
Takeoff with engine failure after critical decision point (CDP) ................................................................................
X
X
X
6.b.1.a. ...............
Cat A .......................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
6.b.1.b. ...............
Cat B .......................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
6.c. .....................
Rejected takeoff ......................................................................................................................................................
6.c.1. ..................
Land .........................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.c.2. ..................
Water (if appropriate) ..............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.d. .....................
Instrument departure ...............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.e. .....................
Others as listed on the SOQ ...................................................................................................................................
A
X
X
7.a. .....................
Normal .....................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
7.b. .....................
Obstacle clearance ..................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
7.c. .....................
Vertical .....................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
7.d. .....................
One engine inoperative ...........................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
7.e. .....................
Others as listed on the SOQ ...................................................................................................................................
A
X
X
8.a ......................
Performance ............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.b. .....................
Flying qualities .........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.c. .....................
Turns .......................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.c.1. ..................
Timed .......................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.c.2. ..................
Normal .....................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.c.3. ..................
Steep .......................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.d. .....................
Accelerations and decelerations .............................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.e. .....................
High speed vibrations ..............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.f. ......................
External Load Operations (see entry 4.f. of this table) ...........................................................................................
X
X
8.g. .....................
Abnormal/emergency procedures ...........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.g.1. ..................
Engine fire ...............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.g.2 ...................
Engine failure ..........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.g.3. ..................
Inflight engine shutdown and restart .......................................................................................................................
X
X
X
7. Climb
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
8. Cruise
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00214
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26691
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3A.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Simulator
level
Operations tasks
B
C
D
8.g.4. ..................
Fuel governing system failures ...............................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.g.5. ..................
Directional control malfunction ................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.g.6. ..................
Hydraulic failure .......................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.g.7. ..................
Stability system failure ............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.g.8. ..................
Rotor vibrations .......................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8.g.9. ..................
Recovery from unusual attitudes ............................................................................................................................
X
X
X
9.a. .....................
Normal .....................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
9.b. .....................
Maximum rate ..........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
9.c. .....................
Autorotative .............................................................................................................................................................
9.c.1. ..................
Straight-in ................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
9.c.2. ..................
With turn ..................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
9.d. .....................
External Load ..........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
9. Descent
10. Approach
Non-precision ..........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.a.1. ................
All engines operating ...............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.a.2. ................
One or more engines inoperative ...........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.a.3. ................
Approach procedures:
X
X
X
10.a.3.a. .............
NDB .........................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.a.3.b. .............
VOR, RNAV, TACAN ..............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.a.3.c. .............
ASR .........................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.a.3.d. .............
Circling .....................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.a.3.e. .............
Helicopter only .........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.a.4. ................
Missed approach .....................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.a.4.a. .............
All engines operating ...............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.a.4.b. .............
One or more engines inoperative ...........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.b. ...................
Precision ..................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.b.1. ................
All engines operating ...............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.b.2. ................
Manually controlled—one or more engines inoperative .........................................................................................
X
X
X
10.b.3. ................
Approach procedures:
X
X
X
10.b.3.a. .............
PAR .........................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.b.3.b. .............
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
10.a. ...................
MLS .........................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.b.3.c. .............
ILS ...........................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.b.3.c. .............
(1) Manual (raw data) ..............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.b.3.c. .............
(2) Flight director only .............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00215
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26692
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3A.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Simulator
level
Operations tasks
B
C
D
10.b.3.c. .............
(3) Autopilot * only ...................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.b.3.c. .............
(4) Cat I ...................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.b.3.c. .............
(5) Cat II ..................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.b.4. ................
Missed approach:
10.b.4.a. .............
All engines operating ...............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.b.4.b. .............
One or more engines inoperative ...........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.b.4.c. .............
Stability system failure ............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10.c. ...................
Others as listed on the SOQ ...................................................................................................................................
A
X
X
11. Landings and Approaches to Landings
Visual Approaches:
11.a.1. ................
Normal .....................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.a.2. ................
Steep .......................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.a.3. ................
Shallow ....................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.a.4. ................
Crosswind ................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.a.5. ................
Category A profile ...................................................................................................................................................
X
X
11.a.6. ................
Category B profile ...................................................................................................................................................
X
X
11.a.7. ................
External Load ..........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
11.b. ...................
Abnormal/emergency procedures:
11.b.1. ................
Directional control failure .........................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.b.2. ................
Hydraulics failure .....................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.b.3. ................
Fuel governing failure ..............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.b.4. ................
Autorotation .............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.b.5. ................
Stability system failure ............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.b.6. ................
Others listed on the SOQ ........................................................................................................................................
A
X
X
11c. ....................
Landings:
11.c.1. ................
Normal:
11.c.1.a. .............
Running ...................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.c.1.b. .............
From Hover .............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.c.2. ................
Pinnacle/platform .....................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.c.3. ................
Confined area ..........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.c.4. ................
Slope .......................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
11.c.5. ................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
11.a. ...................
Crosswind ................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.c.6. ................
Tailwind ...................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.c.7. ................
Rejected Landing ....................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.c.8. ................
Abnormal/emergency procedures:
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00216
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26693
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3A.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Simulator
level
Operations tasks
B
C
D
X
X
11.c.8.a. .............
From autorotation ....................................................................................................................................................
11.c.8.b. .............
One or more engines inoperative ...........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.c.8.c. .............
Directional control failure .........................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.c.8.d. .............
Hydraulics failure .....................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.c.8.e. .............
Stability augmentation system failure .....................................................................................................................
X
X
X
11.c.9. ................
Other (listed on the SOQ) .......................................................................................................................................
A
X
X
12. Any Flight Phase
Air conditioning ........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.a.2. ................
Anti-icing/deicing .....................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.a.3. ................
Auxiliary power-plant ...............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.a.4. ................
Communications ......................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.a.5. ................
Electrical ..................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.a.6. ................
Fire detection and suppression ...............................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.a.7. ................
Stabilizer ..................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.a.8. ................
Flight controls ..........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.a.9. ................
Fuel and oil ..............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.a.10. ..............
Hydraulic ..................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.a.11. ..............
Landing gear ...........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.a.12. ..............
Oxygen ....................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.a.13. ..............
Pneumatic ................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.a.14. ..............
Powerplant ...............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.a.15. ..............
Flight control computers ..........................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.a.16. ..............
Stability and control augmentation ..........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.b. ...................
Flight management and guidance system:
12.b.1. ................
Airborne radar .........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.b.2. ................
Automatic landing aids ............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.b.3. ................
Autopilot ...................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.b.4. ................
Collision avoidance system .....................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.b.5. ................
Flight data displays .................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.b.6. ................
Flight management computers ................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.b.7. ................
Heads-up displays ...................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.b.8. ................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
12.a.1. ................
Navigation systems .................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.c. ...................
Airborne procedures:
12.c.1. ................
Holding ....................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.c.2. ................
Air hazard avoidance ..............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00217
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26694
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3A.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Simulator
level
Operations tasks
B
C
D
12.c.3. ................
Retreating blade stall recovery ...............................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.c.4. ................
Mast bumping ..........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.c.5 .................
Loss of directional control .......................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
12.c.6. ................
Loss of tail rotor effectiveness ................................................................................................................................
X
X
12.c.7. ................
Other (listed on the SOQ) .......................................................................................................................................
A
X
X
13. Engine Shutdown and Parking
13.a. ...................
Engine and systems operation ................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
13.b. ...................
Parking brake operation ..........................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
13.c. ...................
Rotor brake operation .............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
13.d. ...................
Abnormal/emergency procedures ...........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
* ‘‘Autopilot’’ means attitude retention mode of operation.
Note: An ‘‘A’’ in the table indicates that the system, task, or procedure may be examined if the appropriate aircraft system or control is simulated in the FFS and is working properly.
TABLE C3B.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator
level
Visual requirements for qualification at the stated level
class I airport or landing area models
B
C
D
This table specifies the minimum airport visual model content and functionality to qualify a simulator at the indicated level. This table applies
only to the airport scenes required for simulator qualification; i.e., two helicopter landing area models for Level B simulators; four helicopter
landing area models for Level C and Level D simulators.
Functional test content requirements
The following is the minimum airport/landing area model content requirement to satisfy visual capability tests, and provides suitable
visual cues to allow completion of all functions and subjective tests described in this attachment for simulators at Level B.
1.a. ......
A minimum of one (1) representative airport and one (1) representative helicopter landing area model. The airport and
the helicopter landing area may be contained within the same model. If but if this option is selected, the approach
path to the airport runway(s) and the approach path to the helicopter landing area must be different. The model(s)
used to meet the following requirements may be demonstrated at either a fictional or a real-world airport or helicopter
landing area, but each must be acceptable to the sponsor’s TPAA, selectable from the IOS, and listed on the SOQ.
X
1.b. ......
The fidelity of the visual scene must be sufficient for the aircrew to visually identify the airport and/or helicopter landing
area; determine the position of the simulated helicopter within the visual scene; successfully accomplish take-offs,
approaches, and landings; and maneuver around the airport on the ground, or hover taxi, as necessary.
X
1.c. ......
Runways:
1.c.1. ...
Visible runway number ...........................................................................................................................................................
X
1.c.2. ...
Runway threshold elevations and locations must be modeled to provide sufficient correlation with helicopter systems
(e.g., altimeter).
X
1.c.3. ...
Runway surface and markings ..............................................................................................................................................
X
1.c.4. ...
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1. .........
Lighting for the runway in use including runway edge and centerline ..................................................................................
X
1.c.5. ...
Lighting, visual approach aid (VASI or PAPI) and approach lighting of appropriate colors .................................................
X
1.c.6. ...
Representative taxiway lights ................................................................................................................................................
X
1.d. ......
Other helicopter landing area:
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00218
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26695
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3B.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator
level
Visual requirements for qualification at the stated level
class I airport or landing area models
B
C
D
1.d.1. ...
Standard heliport designation (‘‘H’’) marking, properly sized and oriented ...........................................................................
X
1.d.2. ...
Perimeter markings for the Touchdown and Lift-Off Area (TLOF) or the Final Approach and Takeoff Area (FATO), as
appropriate.
X
1.d.3. ...
Perimeter lighting for the TLOF or the FATO areas, as appropriate ....................................................................................
X
1.d.4. ...
Appropriate markings and lighting to allow movement from the runway or helicopter landing area to another part of the
landing facility.
X
2. .........
Functional test content requirements for Level C and Level D simulators
The following is the minimum airport/landing area model content requirement to satisfy visual capability tests, and provide suitable visual cues to allow completion of all functions and subjective tests described in this attachment for simulators at Level C and Level D.
Not all of the elements described in this section must be found in a single airport/landing area scene. However, all of the elements described in this section must be found throughout a combination of the four (4) airport/landing area models described in entry 2.a. The
representations of the hazards (as described in 2.d.) must be ‘‘hard objects’’ that interact as such if contacted by the simulated helicopter. Additionally, surfaces on which the helicopter lands must be ‘‘hard surfaces.’’ The model(s) used to meet the following requirements must be demonstrated at either a fictional or a real-world airport or helicopter landing area, and each must be acceptable to the
sponsor’s TPAA, selectable from the IOS, and listed on the SOQ.
2.a. ......
There must be at least the following airport/helicopter landing areas.
2.a.1. ...
At least one (1) representative airport ...................................................................................................................................
2.a.2. ...
At least three representative non-airport landing areas, as follows:
2.a.2.a
X
At least one (1) representative helicopter landing area situated on a substantially elevated surface with respect to the
surrounding structures or terrain (e.g., building top, offshore oil rig).
X
X
2.a.2.b.
At least one (1) helicopter landing area that meets the definition of a ‘‘confined landing area’’ ..........................................
X
X
2.a.2.c.
At least one (1) helicopter landing area on a sloped surface where the slope is at least 21⁄2° ...........................................
X
X
2.b. ......
For each of the airport/helicopter landing areas described in 2.a., the simulator must be able to provide at least the following:
X
X
2.b.1. ...
A night and twilight (dusk) environment. ...............................................................................................................................
X
X
2.b.2. ...
A daylight environment ..........................................................................................................................................................
2.c. ......
Non-airport helicopter landing areas must have the following:
2.c.1. ...
Representative buildings, structures, and lighting within appropriate distances ...................................................................
X
X
2.c.2. ...
Representative moving and static clutter (e.g., other aircraft, power carts, tugs, fuel trucks) ..............................................
X
X
2.c.3. ...
Representative depiction of terrain and obstacles as well as significant and identifiable natural and cultural features,
within 25 NM of the reference landing area.
X
X
2.c.4. ...
Standard heliport designation (‘‘H’’) marking, properly sized and oriented ...........................................................................
X
X
2.c.5. ...
Perimeter markings for the Touchdown and Lift-Off Area (TLOF) or the Final Approach and Takeoff Area (FATO), as
appropriate.
X
X
2.c.6. ...
Perimeter lighting for the TLOF or the FATO areas, as appropriate ....................................................................................
X
X
2.c.7. ...
Appropriate markings and lighting to allow movement from the area to another part of the landing facility, if appropriate
X
X
2.c.8. ...
Representative markings, lighting, and signage, including a windsock that gives appropriate wind cues ...........................
X
X
2.c.9. ...
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
X
Appropriate markings, lighting, and signage necessary for position identification, and to allow movement from the landing area to another part of the landing facility.
X
X
2.c.10.
Representative moving and static ground traffic (e.g., vehicular and aircraft), including the ability to present surface
hazards (e.g., conflicting traffic, vehicular or aircraft, on or approaching the landing area).
X
X
2.c.11.
Portrayal of landing surface contaminants, including lighting reflections when wet and partially obscured lights when
snow is present, or suitable alternative effects.
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00219
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
X
26696
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3B.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator
level
Visual requirements for qualification at the stated level
class I airport or landing area models
B
C
D
All of the following three (3) hazards must be presented in a combination of the three (3) non-airport landing areas (described in entry
2.a.2. of this table) and each of these non-airport landing areas must have at least one of the following hazards:
2.d.1. ...
Other airborne traffic ..............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
2.d.2. ...
Buildings, trees, or other vertical obstructions in the immediate landing area .....................................................................
X
X
2.d.3. ...
Suspended wires in the immediate landing area ..................................................................................................................
X
X
2.e. ......
Airport applications. Each airport must have the following:
2.e.1. ...
At least one runway designated as ‘‘in-use’’, appropriately marked and capable of being lighted fully ..............................
X
X
2.e.2. ...
Runway threshold elevations and locations must be modeled to provide sufficient correlation with helicopter systems
(e.g., HGS, GPS, altimeter). Slopes in runways, taxiways, and ramp areas, if depicted in the visual scene, may not
cause distracting or unrealistic effects, including pilot eye-point height variation.
X
X
2.e.3. ...
Appropriate approach lighting systems and airfield lighting for a VFR circuit and landing, non-precision approaches and
landings, and precision approaches and landings, as appropriate..
X
X
2.e.4. ...
Representative taxiway lights ................................................................................................................................................
3. .........
Airport or landing area model management
The following is the minimum visual scene management requirements
3.a. ......
Runway and helicopter landing area approach lighting must fade into view in accordance with the environmental conditions set in the simulator.
X
X
X
3.b. ......
The direction of strobe lights, approach lights, runway edge lights, visual landing aids, runway centerline lights, threshold lights, touchdown zone lights, and TLOF or FATO lights must be replicated.
X
X
X
4. .........
Visual feature recognition.
The following are the minimum distances at which runway features must be visible. Distances are measured from runway threshold or
a helicopter landing area to a helicopter aligned with the runway or helicopter landing area on an extended 3° glide-slope in simulated
meteorological conditions. For circling approaches, all tests apply to the runway used for the initial approach and to the runway of intended landing
4.a. ......
For runways: Runway definition, strobe lights, approach lights, and runway edge lights from 5 sm (8 km) of the runway
threshold.
X
X
X
4.b. ......
For runways: Centerline lights and taxiway definition from 3 sm (5 km) ..............................................................................
X
X
X
4.c. ......
For runways: Visual Approach Aid lights (VASI or PAPI) from 3 sm (5 km) of the threshold ..............................................
X
4.d. ......
For runways: Visual Approach Aid lights (VASI or PAPI) from 5 sm (8 km) of the threshold ..............................................
X
X
4.e. ......
For runways: Runway threshold lights and touchdown zone lights from 2 sm (3 km) .........................................................
X
X
X
4.f. .......
For runways and helicopter landing areas: Markings within range of landing lights for night/twilight scenes and the surface resolution test on daylight scenes, as required.
X
X
X
4.g. ......
For circling approaches, the runway of intended landing and associated lighting must fade into view in a non-distracting
manner.
X
X
X
4.h. ......
For helicopter landing areas: Landing direction lights and raised FATO lights from 1 sm (1.5 km) ....................................
X
X
X
4.i. .......
For helicopter landing areas: Flush mounted FATO lights, TOFL lights, and the lighted windsock from 0.5 sm (750 m) ..
X
4.j. .......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.d. ......
Hover taxiway lighting (yellow/blue/yellow cylinders) from TOFL area .................................................................................
X
5. .........
Airport or helicopter landing area model content
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00220
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
X
X
26697
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3B.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator
level
Visual requirements for qualification at the stated level
class I airport or landing area models
B
C
D
The following prescribes the minimum requirements for an airport/helicopter landing area model and identifies other aspects of the environment that must correspond with that model for simulators at Level B, Level C, and Level D. For circling approaches, all tests
apply to the runway used for the initial approach and to the runway of intended landing. If all runways or landing areas in a visual
model used to meet the requirements of this attachment are not designated as ‘‘in use,’’ then the ‘‘in use’’ runways/landing areas must
be listed on the SOQ (e.g., KORD, Rwys 9R, 14L, 22R). Models of airports or helicopter landing areas with more than one runway or
landing area must have all significant runways or landing areas not ‘‘in-use’’ visually depicted for airport runway/landing area recognition purposes. The use of white or off-white light strings that identify the runway or landing area for twilight and night scenes are acceptable for this requirement; and rectangular surface depictions are acceptable for daylight scenes. A visual system’s capabilities
must be balanced between providing visual models with an accurate representation of the airport and a realistic representation of the
surrounding environment. Each runway or helicopter landing area designated as an ‘‘in-use’’ runway or area must include the following detail that is developed using airport pictures, construction drawings and maps, or other similar data, or developed in accordance with published regulatory material; however, this does not require that such models contain details that are beyond the design
capability of the currently qualified visual system. Only one ‘‘primary’’ taxi route from parking to the runway end or helicopter takeoff/
landing area will be required for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter takeoff/landing area.
The surface and markings for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
5.a.1. ...
For airports: Runway threshold markings, runway numbers, touchdown zone markings, fixed distance markings, runway
edge markings, and runway centerline stripes.
X
X
X
5.a.2. ...
For helicopter landing areas: Markings for standard heliport identification (‘‘H’’) and TOFL, FATO, and safety areas .......
X
X
X
5.b. ......
The lighting for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
5.b.1. ...
For airports: Runway approach, threshold, edge, end, centerline (if applicable), touchdown zone (if applicable), leadoff,
and visual landing aid lights or light systems for that runway.
X
X
X
5.b.2. ...
For helicopter landing areas: landing direction, raised and flush FATO, TOFL, windsock lighting ......................................
X
X
X
5.c. ......
The taxiway surface and markings associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
5.c.1. ...
For airports: Taxiway edge, centerline (if appropriate), runway hold lines, and ILS critical area(s) .....................................
X
X
X
5.c.2. ...
For helicopter landing areas: taxiways, taxi routes, and aprons ...........................................................................................
X
X
X
5.d. ......
The taxiway lighting associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
5.d.1. ...
For airports: Runway edge, centerline (if appropriate), runway hold lines, ILS critical areas ..............................................
X
X
X
5.d.2. ...
For helicopter landing areas: taxiways, taxi routes, and aprons ...........................................................................................
X
X
X
5.d.3. ...
For airports: taxiway lighting of correct color .........................................................................................................................
5.e. ......
Airport signage associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
5.e.1. ...
For airports: Signs for runway distance remaining, intersecting runway with taxiway, and intersecting taxiway with taxiway.
X
X
X
5.e.2. ...
For helicopter landing areas: as appropriate for the model used .........................................................................................
X
X
X
5.f. .......
Required visual model correlation with other aspects of the airport or helicopter landing environment simulation:
5.f.1. ....
The airport or helicopter landing area model must be properly aligned with the navigational aids that are associated
with operations at the ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area.
X
X
X
5.f.2. ....
The simulation of runway or helicopter landing area contaminants must be correlated with the displayed runway surface
and lighting where applicable.
X
X
6. .........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
5.a. ......
Correlation with helicopter and associated equipment
The following are the minimum correlation comparisons that must be made for simulators at Level B, Level C, and Level D
6.a. ......
Visual system compatibility with aerodynamic programming ................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.b. ......
Visual cues to assess sink rate and depth perception during landings ................................................................................
X
X
X
6.c. ......
Accurate portrayal of environment relating to flight simulator attitudes ................................................................................
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00221
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
X
26698
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3B.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator
level
Visual requirements for qualification at the stated level
class I airport or landing area models
B
C
D
X
X
X
X
X
X
The visual scene must correlate with integrated helicopter systems (e.g., terrain, traffic and weather avoidance systems
and Head-up Guidance System (HGS)).
6.e. ......
Representative visual effects for each visible, own-ship, helicopter external light(s)—taxi and landing light lobes (including independent operation, if appropriate).
6.f. .......
The effect of rain removal devices ........................................................................................................................................
7. .........
Scene quality
The following are the minimum scene quality tests that must be conducted for simulators at Level B, Level C, and Level D.
7.a. ......
Surfaces and textural cues must be free from apparent and distracting quantization (aliasing) ..........................................
X
X
7.b. ......
System capable of portraying full color realistic textural cues ..............................................................................................
X
X
7.c. ......
The system light points must be free from distracting jitter, smearing or streaking .............................................................
X
X
X
7.d. ......
Demonstration of occulting through each channel of the system in an operational scene ..................................................
X
X
X
7.e. ......
Demonstration of a minimum of ten levels of occulting through each channel of the system in an operational scene ......
X
X
7.f. .......
System capable of providing focus effects that simulate rain. ..............................................................................................
X
X
7.g. ......
System capable of providing focus effects that simulate light point perspective growth ......................................................
X
X
7.h. ......
Runway light controls capable of six discrete light steps (0–5) ............................................................................................
X
X
8. .........
Environmental effects.
The following are the minimum environmental effects that must be available in simulators at Level B, Level C, and Level D.
8.a. ......
The displayed scene corresponding to the appropriate surface contaminants and include appropriate lighting reflections
for wet, partially obscured lights for snow, or alternative effects.
8.b. ......
Special weather representations which include:
8.b.1. ...
The sound, motion and visual effects of light, medium and heavy precipitation near a thunderstorm on take-off, approach, and landings at and below an altitude of 2,000 ft (600 m) above the surface and within a radius of 10 sm (16
km) from the airport or helicopter landing area.
X
8.b.2. ...
One airport or helicopter landing area with a snow scene to include terrain snow and snow-covered surfaces ................
X
8.c. ......
In-cloud effects such as variable cloud density, speed cues and ambient changes ............................................................
X
X
8.d. ......
The effect of multiple cloud layers representing few, scattered, broken and overcast conditions giving partial or complete obstruction of the ground scene.
X
X
8.e. ......
Visibility and RVR measured in terms of distance. Visibility/RVR checked at 2,000 ft (600 m) above the airport or helicopter landing area and at two heights below 2,000 ft with at least 500 ft of separation between the measurements.
The measurements must be taken within a radius of 10 sm (16 km) from the airport or helicopter landing area.
X
X
8.f. .......
Patchy fog giving the effect of variable RVR .........................................................................................................................
8.g. ......
Effects of fog on airport lighting such as halos and defocus ................................................................................................
X
X
8.h. ......
Effect of own-ship lighting in reduced visibility, such as reflected glare, including landing lights, strobes, and beacons ...
X
X
8.i. .......
Wind cues to provide the effect of blowing snow or sand across a dry runway or taxiway selectable from the instructor
station.
X
8.j. .......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
6.d. ......
‘‘White-out’’ or ‘‘Brown-out’’ effects due to rotor downwash beginning at a distance above the ground equal to the rotor
diameter.
X
9. .........
Instructor control of the following:
The following are the minimum instructor controls that must be available in Level B, Level C, and Level D simulators, as indicated.
9.a. ......
Environmental effects, e.g. cloud base, cloud effects, cloud density, visibility in statute miles/ kilometers and RVR in
feet/meters.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00222
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
26699
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3B.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator
level
Visual requirements for qualification at the stated level
class I airport or landing area models
B
C
D
9.b. ......
Airport or helicopter landing area selection ...........................................................................................................................
X
X
X
9.c. ......
Airport or helicopter landing area lighting, including variable intensity .................................................................................
X
X
X
9.d. ......
Dynamic effects including ground and flight traffic ................................................................................................................
X
X
End QPS Requirement
Begin Information
10. .......
An example of being able to ‘‘combine two airport models to achieve two ‘‘in-use’’ runways: One runway designated as the ‘‘in-use’’
runway in the first model of the airport, and the second runway designated as the ‘‘in-use’’ runway in the second model of the same
airport. For example, the clearance is for the ILS approach to Runway 27, Circle to Land on Runway 18 right. Two airport visual models might be used: the first with Runway 27 designated as the ‘‘in use’’ runway for the approach to runway 27, and the second with
Runway 18 Right designated as the ‘‘in use’’ runway. When the pilot breaks off the ILS approach to runway 27, the instructor may
change to the second airport visual model in which runway 18 Right is designated as the ‘‘in use’’ runway, and the pilot would make a
visual approach and landing. This process is acceptable to the FAA as long as the temporary interruption due to the visual model
change is not distracting to the pilot.
11. .......
Sponsors are not required to provide every detail of a runway, but the detail that is provided should be correct within reasonable limits.
End Information
TABLE C3C.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Visual scene content additional airport or landing area models beyond minimum required for qualification
Class II airport or landing area models
Simulator
level
B
C
D
This table specifies the minimum airport or helicopter landing area visual model content and functionality necessary to add visual models to a
simulator’s visual model library (i.e., beyond those necessary for qualification at the stated level) without the necessity of further involvement
of the NSPM or TPAA.
Airport or landing area model management
The following is the minimum visual scene management requirements for simulators at Levels B, C, and D.
1.a. ......
The installation and direction of the following lights must be replicated for the ‘‘in-use’’ surface:
1.a.1. ...
For ‘‘in-use’’ runways: Strobe lights, approach lights, runway edge lights, visual landing aids, runway centerline lights,
threshold lights, and touchdown zone lights.
X
X
X
1.a.2. ...
For ‘‘in-use’’ helicopter landing areas: ground level TLOF perimeter lights, elevated TLOF perimeter lights (if applicable), Optional TLOF lights (if applicable), ground FATO perimeter lights, elevated TLOF lights (if applicable), landing
direction lights.
X
X
X
2. .........
Visual feature recognition
The following are the minimum distances at which runway or landing area features must be visible for simulators at Levels B, C, and
D. Distances are measured from runway threshold or a helicopter landing area to an aircraft aligned with the runway or helicopter
landing area on a 3° glide-slope from the aircraft to the touchdown point, in simulated meteorological conditions. For circling approaches, all tests apply to the runway used for the initial approach and to the runway of intended landing.
2.a. ......
For Runways:
2.a.1. ...
Strobe lights, approach lights, and edge lights from 5 sm (8 km) of the threshold ..............................................................
X
X
X
2.a.2. ...
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1. .........
Centerline lights and taxiway definition from 3 sm (5 km) ....................................................................................................
X
X
X
2.a.3. ...
Visual Approach Aid lights (VASI or PAPI) from 3 sm (5 km) of the threshold ....................................................................
X
2.a.4. ...
Visual Approach Aid lights (VASI or PAPI) from 5 sm (8 km) of the threshold ....................................................................
X
X
2.a.5. ...
Threshold lights and touchdown zone lights from 2 sm (3 km) ............................................................................................
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00223
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
X
26700
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3C.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Visual scene content additional airport or landing area models beyond minimum required for qualification
Class II airport or landing area models
Simulator
level
B
C
D
Markings within range of landing lights for night/twilight (dusk) scenes and as required by the surface resolution test on
daylight scenes.
X
X
X
2.a.7. ...
For circling approaches, the runway of intended landing and associated lighting must fade into view in a non-distracting
manner.
X
X
X
2.b. ......
For Helicopter landing areas:
2.b.1. ...
Landing direction lights and raised FATO lights from 1 sm (1.5 km) ...................................................................................
X
X
X
2.b.2. ...
Flush mounted FATO lights, TOFL lights, and the lighted windsock from 0.5 sm (750 m) .................................................
X
X
2.b.3. ...
Hover taxiway lighting (yellow/blue/yellow cylinders) from TOFL area .................................................................................
X
X
2.b.4. ...
Markings within range of landing lights for night/twilight (dusk) scenes and as required by the surface resolution test on
daylight scenes.
X
X
3. .........
Airport or Helicopter landing area model content
The following prescribes the minimum requirements for what must be provided in an airport visual model and identifies other aspects
of the airport environment that must correspond with that model for simulators at Level B, C, and D. The detail must be developed
using airport pictures, construction drawings and maps, or other similar data, or developed in accordance with published regulatory
material; however, this does not require that airport or helicopter landing area models contain details that are beyond the designed capability of the currently qualified visual system. For circling approaches, all requirements of this section apply to the runway used for
the initial approach and to the runway of intended landing. Only one ‘‘primary’’ taxi route from parking to the runway end or helicopter
takeoff/landing area will be required for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter takeoff/landing area.
3.a. ......
The surface and markings for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
3.a.1. ...
For airports: Runway threshold markings, runway numbers, touchdown zone markings, fixed distance markings, runway
edge markings, and runway centerline stripes.
X
X
X
3.a.2. ...
For helicopter landing areas: Standard heliport marking (‘‘H’’), TOFL, FATO, and safety areas .........................................
X
X
X
3.b. ......
The lighting for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
3.b.1. ...
For airports: Runway approach, threshold, edge, end, centerline (if applicable), touchdown zone (if applicable), leadoff,
and visual landing aid lights or light systems for that runway.
X
X
X
3.b.2. ...
For helicopter landing areas: Landing direction, raised and flush FATO, TOFL, windsock lighting .....................................
X
X
X
3.c. ......
The taxiway surface and markings associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
3.c.1. ...
For airports: Taxiway edge, centerline (if appropriate), runway hold lines, and ILS critical area(s) .....................................
X
X
X
3.c.2. ...
For helicopter landing areas: Taxiways, taxi routes, and aprons ..........................................................................................
X
X
X
3.d. ......
The taxiway lighting associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
3.d.1. ...
For airports: Runway edge, centerline (if appropriate), runway hold lines, ILS critical areas ..............................................
X
X
X
3.d.2. ...
For helicopter landing areas: Taxiways, taxi routes, and aprons ..........................................................................................
X
X
X
3.d.3. ...
For airports: Taxiway lighting of correct color .......................................................................................................................
4. .........
Required visual model correlation with other aspects of the airport environment simulation
The following are the minimum visual model correlation tests that must be conducted for Level B, Level C, and Level D simulators, as
indicated.
4.a. ......
The airport model must be properly aligned with the navigational aids that are associated with operations at the ‘‘inuse’’ runway.
X
X
X
4.b. ......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.a.6. ...
Slopes in runways, taxiways, and ramp areas, if depicted in the visual scene, must not cause distracting or unrealistic
effects.
X
X
X
5. .........
Correlation with helicopter and associated equipment
The following are the minimum correlation comparisons that must be made for simulators at Level B, C, and D.
5.a. ......
Visual system compatibility with aerodynamic programming ................................................................................................
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00224
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
X
X
26701
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3C.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Visual scene content additional airport or landing area models beyond minimum required for qualification
Class II airport or landing area models
Simulator
level
B
C
D
5.b. ......
Accurate portrayal of environment relating to flight simulator attitudes ................................................................................
X
X
X
5.c. ......
Visual cues to assess sink rate and depth perception during landings ................................................................................
X
X
X
6. .........
Scene quality
The following are the minimum scene quality tests that must be conducted for simulators at Level B, C, and D.
6.a. ......
Light points free from distracting jitter, smearing or streaking ..............................................................................................
X
X
X
6.b. ......
Surfaces and textural cues free from apparent and distracting quantization (aliasing) ........................................................
X
X
6.c. ......
Correct color and realistic textural cues ................................................................................................................................
7. .........
Instructor controls of the following:
The following are the minimum instructor controls that must be available in Level B, Level C, and Level D simulators, as indicated.
7.a. ......
Environmental effects, e.g., cloud base (if used), cloud effects, cloud density, visibility in statute miles/kilometers and
RVR in feet/meters.
X
X
X
7.b. ......
7.c. ......
7.d. ......
Airport/Heliport selection ........................................................................................................................................................
Airport lighting including variable intensity .............................................................................................................................
Dynamic effects including ground and flight traffic ................................................................................................................
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
End QPS Requirements
Begin Information
8. .........
Sponsors are not required to provide every detail of a runway or helicopter landing area, but the detail that is provided
must be correct within the capabilities of the system.
End Information
TABLE C3D—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Information
Simulator level
Motion system (and special
aerodynamic model) effects
Notes
B
C
D
This table specifies motion effects that are required to indicate the threshold at which a flight crewmember must be able to recognize an event
or situation. Where applicable, flight simulator pitch, side loading and directional control characteristics must be representative of the helicopter.
Runway rumble, oleo deflection, ground speed, uneven runway, runway and taxiway centerline light
characteristics:
Procedure: After the helicopter has been pre-set to the
takeoff position and then released, taxi at various
speeds with a smooth runway and note the general
characteristics of the simulated runway rumble effects
of oleo deflections. Repeat the maneuver with a runway roughness of 50%, then with maximum roughness. Note the associated motion vibrations affected
by ground speed and runway roughness
2 ...........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1 ...........
Friction Drag from Skid-type Landing Gear:
Procedure: Perform a running takeoff or a running landing and note an increase in a fuselage vibration (as
opposed to rotor vibration) due to the friction of dragging the skid along the surface. This vibration will
lessen as the ground speed decreases
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00225
X
Fmt 4701
X
X
X
X
Sfmt 4700
If time permits, different gross weights can also be selected as this may also affect the associated vibrations depending on helicopter type. The associated
motion effects for the above tests should also include
an assessment of the effects of rolling over centerline
lights, surface discontinuities of uneven runways, and
various taxiway characteristics.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26702
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3D—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Simulator level
Motion system (and special
aerodynamic model) effects
3. ..........
Information
Notes
C
D
Rotor Out-of-Track and/or Out-of-Balance condition:
Procedure: Select the malfunction or condition from the
IOS. Start the engine(s) normally and check for an
abnormal vibration for an Out-of-Track condition and
check for an abnormal vibration for an Out-of-Balance
condition
X
X
X
Does not require becoming airborne. The abnormal vibration for Out-of-Track and Out-of-Balance conditions should be recognized in the frequency range of
the inverse of the period for each; i.e., 1/P for vertical
vibration, and 1/P for lateral vibration.
4. ..........
Bumps associated with the landing gear:
Procedure: Perform a normal take-off paying special attention to the bumps that could be perceptible due to
maximum oleo extension after lift-off
X
X
X
When the landing gear is extended or retracted, motion
bumps can be felt when the gear locks into position.
5. ..........
Buffet during extension and retraction of landing
gear:
Procedure: Operate the landing gear. Check that the
motion cues of the buffet experienced represent the
actual helicopter
X
X
X
6. ..........
Failure of Dynamic Vibration Absorber or similar
system as appropriate for the helicopter (e.g.,
droop stop or static stop):
Procedure: May be accomplished any time the rotor is
engaged. Select the appropriate failure at the IOS,
note an appropriate increase in vibration and check
that the vibration intensity and frequency increases
with an increase in RPM and an increase in collective
application
X
X
X
7. ..........
Tail Rotor Drive Failure:
Procedure: With the engine(s) running and the rotor engaged—select the malfunction and note the immediate increase of medium frequency vibration
X
X
X
8. ..........
Touchdown cues for main and nose gear:
Procedure: Conduct several normal approaches with
various rates of descent. Check that the motion cues
for the touchdown bumps for each descent rate are
representative of the actual helicopter
X
X
X
9. ..........
Tire failure dynamics:
Procedure: Simulate a single tire failure and a multiple
tire failure
X
X
10. ........
Engine malfunction and engine damage:
Procedure: The characteristics of an engine malfunction
as prescribed in the malfunction definition document
for the particular flight simulator must describe the
special motion effects felt by the pilot. Note the associated engine instruments varying according to the
nature of the malfunction and note the replication of
the effects of the airframe vibration
X
X
X
11. ........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
B
Tail boom strikes:
Procedure: Tail-strikes can be checked by over-rotation
of the helicopter at a quick stop or autorotation to the
ground
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00226
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
The tail rotor operates in the medium frequency range,
normally estimated by multiplying the tail rotor gear
box ratio by the main rotor RPM. The failure can be
recognized by an increase in the vibrations in this frequency range.
The pilot may notice some yawing with a multiple tire
failure selected on the same side. This should require
the use of the pedal to maintain control of the helicopter. Dependent on helicopter type, a single tire
failure may not be noticed by the pilot and may not
cause any special motion effect. Sound or vibration
may be associated with the actual tire losing pressure.
The motion effect should be felt as a noticeable nose
down pitching moment.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26703
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3D—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Entry
No.
Motion system (and special
aerodynamic model) effects
Simulator level
C
D
12. ........
Vortex Ring State (Settling with Power):
Procedure: Specific procedures may differ between helicopters and may be prescribed by the Helicopter
Manufacturer or other subject matter expert. However,
the following information is provided for illustrative
purposes * * * To enter the maneuver, reduce power
below hover power. Hold altitude with aft cyclic until
the airspeed approaches 20 knots. Then allow the
sink rate to increase to 300 feet per minute or more
as the attitude is adjusted to obtain an airspeed of
less than 10 knots
X
X
When the aircraft begins to shudder, the application of
additional up collective increases the vibration and
sink rate. One recovery method is to decrease collective to enter vertical autorotation and/or use cyclic inputs to gain horizontal airspeed and exit from vortex
ring state.
13. ........
Retreating Blade Stall:
Procedure: Specific procedures may differ between helicopters and may be prescribed by the Helicopter
Manufacturer or other subject matter expert. However,
the following information is provided for illustrative
purposes: To enter the maneuver, increase forward
airspeed; the effect will be recognized through the development of a low frequency vibration, pitching up of
the nose, and a roll in the direction of the retreating
blade. High weight, low rotor RPM, high density altitude, turbulence or steep, abrupt turns are all conducive to retreating blade stall at high forward airspeeds
X
X
Correct recovery from retreating blade stall requires the
collective to be lowered first, which reduces blade angles and the angle of attack. Aft cyclic can then be
used to slow the helicopter.
14. ........
Translational Lift Effects:
Procedure: From a stabilized in-ground-effect (IGE)
Hover begin a forward acceleration. When passing
through the effective translational lift range, the noticeable effect will be a possible nose pitch-up in
some helicopters, an increase in the rate of climb,
and a temporary increase in vibration level (in some
cases this vibration may be pronounced). This effect
is experienced again upon deceleration through the
appropriate speed range. During deceleration, the
pitch and rate of climb will have the reverse effect,
but there will be a similar, temporary increase in vibration level
X
X
Notes
B
X
TABLE C3E.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry
number
Sound system
B
C
D
The following checks are performed during a normal flight profile, motion system ON.
Precipitation. ....................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
2. ..........
Rain removal equipment. ................................................................................................................................................
X
X
3. ..........
Helicopter noises used by the pilot for normal helicopter operation. .............................................................................
X
X
4. ..........
Abnormal operations for which there are associated sound cues, including engine malfunctions, landing gear or tire
malfunctions, tail boom.
X
X
5. ..........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1. ..........
Sound of a crash when the flight simulator is landed in excess of limitations ...............................................................
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00227
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26704
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3F.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry
number
Special effects
B
C
D
This table specifies the minimum special effects necessary for the specified simulator level.
1. ..........
Braking Dynamics: ........................................................................................................................................................
Representations of the dynamics of brake failure (flight simulator pitch, side-loading, and directional control characteristics representative of the helicopter), including antiskid and decreased brake efficiency due to high brake
temperatures (based on helicopter related data), sufficient to enable pilot identification of the problem and implementation of appropriate procedures.
X
X
2. ..........
Effects of Airframe and Engine Icing: Required only for those helicopters authorized for operations in
known icing conditions.
Procedure: With the simulator airborne, in a clean configuration, nominal altitude and cruise airspeed, autopilot on
and auto-throttles off, engine and airfoil anti-ice/de-ice systems deactivated; activate icing conditions at a rate
that allows monitoring of simulator and systems response.
Icing recognition will include an increase in gross weight, airspeed decay, change in simulator pitch attitude,
change in engine performance indications (other than due to airspeed changes), and change in data from pitot/
static system, or rotor out-of-track/balance. Activate heating, anti-ice, or de-ice systems independently. Recognition will include proper effects of these systems, eventually returning the simulated helicopter to normal flight.
X
X
TABLE C3G.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry
number
Instructor Operating Station (IOS)
B
C
D
X
X
X
Functions in this table are subject to evaluation only if appropriate for the helicopter or the system is installed on the specific simulator.
Simulator Power Switch(es) .........................................................................................................................................
2. ..........
Helicopter conditions.
2.a. .......
Gross weight, center of gravity, fuel loading and allocation ...........................................................................................
X
X
X
2.b. .......
Helicopter systems status ...............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
2.c. .......
Ground crew functions ....................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
3. ..........
Airports/Heliports.
3.a. .......
Number and selection .....................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
3.b. .......
Runway or landing area selection ...................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
3.c. .......
Landing surface conditions (rough, smooth, icy, wet, dry, snow) ...................................................................................
X
X
X
3.d. .......
Preset positions ...............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
3.e. .......
Lighting controls ..............................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4. ..........
Environmental controls.
4.a ........
Visibility (statute miles/kilometers) ..................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4.b. .......
Runway visual range (in feet/meters) .............................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4.c. .......
Temperature ....................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4.d. .......
Climate conditions ...........................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
4.e. .......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1. ..........
Wind speed and direction ...............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
5. ..........
Helicopter system malfunctions (Insertion/deletion). ..................................................................................................
X
X
X
6. ..........
Locks, Freezes, and Repositioning.
6.a. .......
Problem (all) freeze/release ............................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00228
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26705
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE C3G.—FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS Requirements
Simulator level
Entry
number
Instructor Operating Station (IOS)
6.b. .......
B
C
D
Position (geographic) freeze/release ..............................................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.c. .......
Repositioning (locations, freezes, and releases) ............................................................................................................
X
X
X
6.d. .......
Ground speed control ......................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
7. ..........
Remote IOS. ...................................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
8. ..........
Sound Controls. On/off/adjustment ...............................................................................................................................
X
X
X
9. ..........
Motion/Control Loading System.
9.a. .......
On/off/emergency stop ....................................................................................................................................................
X
X
X
10. ........
Observer Seats/Stations. Position/Adjustment/Positive restraint system .....................................................................
X
X
X
Attachment 4 to Appendix C to Part 60—
SAMPLE DOCUMENTS
Table of Contents
Title of Sample
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Figure C4A Sample Letter, Request for
Initial, Upgrade, or Reinstatement
Evaluation.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
Figure C4B Attachment: FFS Information
Form
Figure A4C Sample Letter of Compliance
Figure C4D Sample Qualification Test
Guide Cover Page
Figure C4E Sample Statement of
Qualification—Certificate
Figure C4F Sample Statement of
Qualification—Configuration List
PO 00000
Frm 00229
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Figure C4G Sample Statement of
Qualification—List of Qualified Tasks
Figure C4H Sample Continuing
Qualification Evaluation Requirements
Page
Figure C4I Sample MQTG Index of Effective
FFS Directives
BILLING CODE 4910–13–P
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00230
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.040
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26706
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00231
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26707
ER09MY08.041
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00232
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.042
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26708
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00233
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26709
ER09MY08.043
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00234
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.044
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26710
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00235
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26711
ER09MY08.045
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00236
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.046
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26712
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00237
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26713
ER09MY08.047
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00238
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.048
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26714
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00239
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26715
ER09MY08.049
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00240
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.050
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26716
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00241
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26717
ER09MY08.051
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
BILLING CODE 4910–13–C
Attachment 5 to Appendix C to Part 60—
FSTD DIRECTIVES APPLICABLE TO
HELICOPTER FFSs
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Flight Simulation Training Device (FSTD)
Directive
FSTD Directive 1. Applicable to all FFSs,
regardless of the original qualification basis
and qualification date (original or upgrade),
having Class II or Class III airport models
available.
Agency: Federal Aviation Administration
(FAA), DOT
Action: This is a retroactive requirement to
have all Class II or Class III airport models
meet current requirements.
lllllllllllllllllllll
Summary: Notwithstanding the
authorization listed in paragraph 13b in
Appendices A and C of this part, this FSTD
Directive requires each certificate holder to
ensure that by May 30, 2009, except for the
airport model(s) used to qualify the simulator
at the designated level, each airport model
used by the certificate holder’s instructors or
evaluators for training, checking, or testing
under this chapter in an FFS, meets the
definition of a Class II or Class III airport
model as defined in 14CFR part 60. The
completion of this requirement will not
require a report, and the method used for
keeping instructors and evaluators apprised
of the airport models that meet Class II or
Class III requirements on any given simulator
is at the option of the certificate holder
whose employees are using the FFS, but the
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
method used must be available for review by
the TPAA for that certificate holder.
Dates: FSTD Directive 1 becomes effective
on May 30, 2008.
For Further Information Contact: Ed Cook,
Senior Advisor to the Division Manager, Air
Transportation Division, AFS–200, 800
Independence Ave, SW, Washington, DC,
20591: telephone: (404) 832–4701; fax: (404)
761–8906.
Specific Requirements:
1. Part 60 requires that each FSTD be:
a. Sponsored by a person holding or
applying for an FAA operating certificate
under Part 119, Part 141, or Part 142, or
holding or applying for an FAA-approved
training program under Part 63, Appendix C,
for flight engineers, and
b. Evaluated and issued an SOQ for a
specific FSTD level.
2. FFSs also require the installation of a
visual system that is capable of providing an
out-of-the-flight-deck view of airport models.
However, historically these airport models
were not routinely evaluated or required to
meet any standardized criteria. This has led
to qualified simulators containing airport
models being used to meet FAA-approved
training, testing, or checking requirements
with potentially incorrect or inappropriate
visual references.
3. To prevent this from occurring in the
future, by May 30, 2009, except for the
airport model(s) used to qualify the simulator
at the designated level, each certificate
holder must assure that each airport model
used for training, testing, or checking under
PO 00000
Frm 00242
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
this chapter in a qualified FFS meets the
definition of a Class II or Class III airport
model as defined in Appendix F of this part.
4. These references describe the
requirements for visual scene management
and the minimum distances from which
runway or landing area features must be
visible for all levels of simulator. The visual
scene or airport model must provide, for each
‘‘in-use runway’’ or ‘‘in-use landing area,’’
runway or landing area surface and markings,
runway or landing area lighting, taxiway
surface and markings, and taxiway lighting.
Additional requirements include correlation
of the visual scenes or airport models with
other aspects of the airport environment,
correlation of the aircraft and associated
equipment, scene quality assessment
features, and the extent to which the
instructor is able to exercise control of these
scenes or models.
5. For circling approaches, all requirements
of this section apply to the runway used for
the initial approach and to the runway of
intended landing.
6. The details in these scenes or models
must be developed using airport pictures,
construction drawings and maps, or other
similar data, or be developed in accordance
with published regulatory material. However,
FSTD Directive 1 does not require that
airport models contain details that are
beyond the initially designed capability of
the visual system, as currently qualified. The
recognized limitations to visual systems are
as follows:
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.052
26718
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
a. Visual systems not required to have
runway numbers as a part of the specific
runway marking requirements are:
(1) Link NVS and DNVS.
(2) Novoview 2500 and 6000.
(3) FlightSafety VITAL series up to, and
including, VITAL III, but not beyond.
(4) Redifusion SP1, SP1T, and SP2.
b. Visual systems required to display
runway numbers only for LOFT scenes are:
(1) FlightSafety VITAL IV.
(2) Redifusion SP3 and SP3T.
(3) Link-Miles Image II.
c. Visual systems not required to have
accurate taxiway edge lighting are:
(1) Redifusion SP1.
(2) FlightSafety Vital IV.
(3) Link-Miles Image II and Image IIT
(4) XKD displays (even though the XKD
image generator is capable of generating blue
colored lights, the display cannot
accommodate that color).
7. A copy of this Directive must be filed
in the MQTG in the designated FSTD
Directive Section, and its inclusion must be
annotated on the Index of Effective FSTD
Directives chart. See Attachment 4,
Appendices A through D of this part for a
sample MQTG Index of Effective FSTD
Directives chart.
16. Interim Qualification of FTDs for New
Helicopter Types or Models (§ 60.21).
17. Modifications to FTDs (§ 60.23).
18. Operations with Missing,
Malfunctioning, or Inoperative Components
(§ 60.25).
19. Automatic Loss of Qualification and
Procedures for Restoration of Qualification
(§ 60.27).
20. Other Losses of Qualification and
Procedures for Restoration of Qualification
(§ 60.29).
21. Recordkeeping and Reporting (§ 60.31).
22. Applications, Logbooks, Reports, and
Records: Fraud, Falsification, or Incorrect
Statements (§ 60.33).
23. [Reserved]
24. Levels of FTD.
25. FTD Qualification on the Basis of a
Bilateral Aviation Safety Agreement (BASA)
(§ 60.37).
Attachment 1 to Appendix D to Part 60—
General FTD Requirements.
Attachment 2 to Appendix D to Part 60—
Flight Training Device (FTD) Objective Tests.
Attachment 3 to Appendix D to Part 60—
Flight Training Device (FTD) Subjective
Evaluation.
Attachment 4 to Appendix D to Part 60—
Sample Documents.
Appendix D to Part 60—Qualification
Performance Standards for Helicopter Flight
Training Devices
lllllllllllllllllllll
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Begin Information
This appendix establishes the standards for
Helicopter Flight Training Device (FTD)
evaluation and qualification at Level 4, Level
5, Level 6, or Level 7. The NSPM is
responsible for the development, application,
and implementation of the standards
contained within this appendix. The
procedures and criteria specified in this
appendix will be used by the NSPM, or a
person or persons assigned by the NSPM
when conducting helicopter FTD
evaluations.
Table of Contents
1. Introduction.
2. Applicability (§§ 60.1, 60.2).
3. Definitions (§ 60.3).
4. Qualification Performance Standards
(§ 60.4).
5. Quality Management System (§ 60.5).
6. Sponsor Qualification Requirements
(§ 60.7).
7. Additional Responsibilities of the
Sponsor (§ 60.9).
8. FTD Use (§ 60.11).
9. FTD Objective Data Requirements
(§ 60.13).
10. Special Equipment and Personnel
Requirements for Qualification of the FTD
(§ 60.14).
11. Initial (and Upgrade) Qualification
Requirements (§ 60.15).
12. Additional Qualifications for Currently
Qualified FTDs (§ 60.16).
13. Previously Qualified FTDs (§ 60.17).
14. Inspection, Continuing Qualification
Evaluation, and Maintenance Requirements
(§ 60.19).
15. Logging FTD Discrepancies (§ 60.20).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
1. Introduction
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
a. This appendix contains background
information as well as regulatory and
informative material as described later in this
section. To assist the reader in determining
what areas are required and what areas are
permissive, the text in this appendix is
divided into two sections: ‘‘QPS
Requirements’’ and ‘‘Information.’’ The QPS
Requirements sections contain details
regarding compliance with the part 60 rule
language. These details are regulatory, but are
found only in this appendix. The Information
sections contain material that is advisory in
nature, and designed to give the user general
information about the regulation.
b. Questions regarding the contents of this
publication should be sent to the U.S.
Department of Transportation, Federal
Aviation Administration, Flight Standards
Service, National Simulator Program Staff,
AFS–205, 100 Hartsfield Centre Parkway,
Suite 400, Atlanta, Georgia 30354. Telephone
contact numbers for the NSP are: Phone,
404–832–4700; fax, 404–761–8906. The
general e-mail address for the NSP office is:
9-aso-avr-sim-team@faa.gov. The NSP
Internet Web Site address is: https://
www.faa.gov/safety/programs_initiatives/
aircraft_aviation/nsp/. On this Web Site you
will find an NSP personnel list with
telephone and e-mail contact information for
each NSP staff member, a list of qualified
flight simulation devices, ACs, a description
of the qualification process, NSP policy, and
an NSP ‘‘In-Works’’ section. Also linked from
this site are additional information sources,
handbook bulletins, frequently asked
questions, a listing and text of the Federal
PO 00000
Frm 00243
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26719
Aviation Regulations, Flight Standards
Inspector’s handbooks, and other FAA links.
c. The NSPM encourages the use of
electronic media for all communication,
including any record, report, request, test, or
statement required by this appendix. The
electronic media used must have adequate
security provisions and be acceptable to the
NSPM. The NSPM recommends inquiries on
system compatibility, and minimum system
requirements are also included on the NSP
Web site.
d. Related Reading References.
(1) 14 CFR part 60.
(2) 14 CFR part 61.
(3) 14 CFR part 63.
(4) 14 CFR part 119.
(5) 14 CFR part 121.
(6) 14 CFR part 125.
(7) 14 CFR part 135.
(8) 14 CFR part 141.
(9) 14 CFR part 142.
(10) AC 120–28, as amended, Criteria for
Approval of Category III Landing Weather
Minima.
(11) AC 120–29, as amended, Criteria for
Approving Category I and Category II
Landing Minima for part 121 operators.
(12) AC 120–35, as amended, Line
Operational Simulations: Line-Oriented
Flight Training, Special Purpose Operational
Training, Line Operational Evaluation.
(13) AC 120–41, as amended, Criteria for
Operational Approval of Airborne Wind
Shear Alerting and Flight Guidance Systems.
(14) AC 120–57, as amended, Surface
Movement Guidance and Control System
(SMGCS).
(15) AC 120–63, as amended, Helicopter
Simulator Qualification.
(16) AC 150/5300–13, as amended, Airport
Design.
(17) AC 150/5340–1, as amended,
Standards for Airport Markings.
(18) AC 150/5340–4, as amended,
Installation Details for Runway Centerline
Touchdown Zone Lighting Systems.
(19) AC 150/5390–2, as amended, Heliport
Design.
(20) AC 150/5340–19, as amended,
Taxiway Centerline Lighting System.
(21) AC 150/5340–24, as amended,
Runway and Taxiway Edge Lighting System.
(22) AC 150/5345–28, as amended,
Precision Approach Path Indicator (PAPI)
Systems.
(23) International Air Transport
Association document, ‘‘Flight Simulator
Design and Performance Data Requirements,’’
as amended.
(24) AC 29–2, as amended, Flight Test
Guide for Certification of Transport Category
Rotorcraft.
(25) AC 27–1, as amended, Flight Test
Guide for Certification of Normal Category
Rotorcraft.
(26) International Civil Aviation
Organization (ICAO) Manual of Criteria for
the Qualification of Flight Simulators, as
amended.
(27) Airplane Flight Simulator Evaluation
Handbook, Volume I, as amended and
Volume II, as amended, The Royal
Aeronautical Society, London, UK.
(28) FAA Publication FAA–S–8081 series
(Practical Test Standards for Airline
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26720
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
Transport Pilot Certificate, Type Ratings,
Commercial Pilot, and Instrument Ratings).
(29) The FAA Aeronautical Information
Manual (AIM). An electronic version of the
AIM is on the Internet at https://www.faa.gov/
atpubs.
(30) Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (ARINC)
document number 436, Guidelines For
Electronic Qualification Test Guide (as
amended).
(31) Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (ARINC)
document 610, Guidance for Design and
Integration of Aircraft Avionics Equipment in
Simulators (as amended).
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
2. Applicability (§ 60.1 and 60.2)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.1, Applicability, or to
§ 60.2, Applicability of sponsor rules to
person who are not sponsors and who are
engaged in certain unauthorized activities.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
3. Definitions (§ 60.3)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
See Appendix F of this part for a list of
definitions and abbreviations from part 1,
part 60, and the QPS appendices of part 60.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
4. Qualification Performance Standards
(§ 60.4)
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.4, Qualification
Performance Standards.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
5. Quality Management System (§ 60.5)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
Additional regulatory material and
informational material regarding Quality
Management Systems for FTDs may be found
in Appendix E of this part.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
6. Sponsor Qualification Requirements
(§ 60.7)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
a. The intent of the language in § 60.7(b) is
to have a specific FTD, identified by the
sponsor, used at least once in an FAAapproved flight training program for the
helicopter simulated during the 12-month
period described. The identification of the
specific FTD may change from one 12-month
period to the next 12-month period as long
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
as that sponsor sponsors and uses at least one
FTD at least once during the prescribed
period. There is no minimum number of
hours or minimum FTD periods required.
b. The following examples describe
acceptable operational practices:
(1) Example One.
(a) A sponsor is sponsoring a single,
specific FTD for its own use, in its own
facility or elsewhere—this single FTD forms
the basis for the sponsorship. The sponsor
uses that FTD at least once in each 12-month
period in that sponsor’s FAA-approved flight
training program for the helicopter
simulated. This 12-month period is
established according to the following
schedule:
(i) If the FTD was qualified prior to May
30, 2008, the 12-month period begins on the
date of the first continuing qualification
evaluation conducted in accordance with
§ 60.19 after May 30, 2008, and continues for
each subsequent 12-month period;
(ii) A device qualified on or after May 30,
2008, will be required to undergo an initial
or upgrade evaluation in accordance with
§ 60.15. Once the initial or upgrade
evaluation is complete, the first continuing
qualification evaluation will be conducted
within 6 months. The 12 month continuing
qualification evaluation cycle begins on that
date and continues for each subsequent 12month period.
(b) There is no minimum number of hours
of FTD use required.
(c) The identification of the specific FTD
may change from one 12-month period to the
next 12-month period as long as that sponsor
sponsors and uses at least one FTD at least
once during the prescribed period.
(2) Example Two.
(a) A sponsor sponsors an additional
number of FTDs, in its facility or elsewhere.
Each additionally sponsored FTD must be—
(i) Used by the sponsor in the sponsor’s
FAA-approved flight training program for the
helicopter simulated (as described in
§ 60.7(d)(1)); or
(ii) Used by another FAA certificate holder
in that other certificate holder’s FAAapproved flight training program for the
helicopter simulated (as described in
§ 60.7(d)(1)). This 12-month period is
established in the same manner as in
example one; or
(iii) Provided a statement each year from a
qualified pilot, (after having flown the
helicopter not the subject FTD or another
FTD, during the preceding 12-month period)
stating that the subject FTD’s performance
and handling qualities represent the
helicopter (as described in § 60.7(d)(2)). This
statement is provided at least once in each
12-month period established in the same
manner as in example one.
(b) There is no minimum number of hours
of FTD use required.
(3) Example Three.
(a) A sponsor in New York (in this
example, a Part 142 certificate holder)
establishes ‘‘satellite’’ training centers in
Chicago and Moscow.
(b) The satellite function means that the
Chicago and Moscow centers must operate
under the New York center’s certificate (in
accordance with all of the New York center’s
PO 00000
Frm 00244
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
practices, procedures, and policies; e.g.,
instructor and/or technician training/
checking requirements, record keeping, QMS
program).
(c) All of the FTDs in the Chicago and
Moscow centers could be dry-leased (i.e., the
certificate holder does not have and use
FAA-approved flight training programs for
the FTDs in the Chicago and Moscow
centers) because—
(i) Each FTD in the Chicago center and
each FTD in the Moscow center is used at
least once each 12-month period by another
FAA certificate holder in that other
certificate holder’s FAA-approved flight
training program for the helicopter (as
described in § 60.7(d)(1)); or
(ii) A statement is obtained from a
qualified pilot (having flown the helicopter,
not the subject FTD or another FTD during
the preceding 12-month period) stating that
the performance and handling qualities of
each FTD in the Chicago and Moscow centers
represents the helicopter (as described in
§ 60.7(d)(2)).
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
7. Additional Responsibilities of the Sponsor
(§ 60.9)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
The phrase ‘‘as soon as practicable’’ in
§ 60.9(a) means without unnecessarily
disrupting or delaying beyond a reasonable
time the training, evaluation, or experience
being conducted in the FTD.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
8. FTD Use (§ 60.11).
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.11, FTD Use.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
9. FTD Objective Data Requirements
(§ 60.13)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. Flight test data used to validate FTD
performance and handling qualities must
have been gathered in accordance with a
flight test program containing the following:
(1) A flight test plan consisting of:
(a) The maneuvers and procedures
required for aircraft certification and
simulation programming and validation.
(b) For each maneuver or procedure—
(i) The procedures and control input the
flight test pilot and/or engineer used.
(ii) The atmospheric and environmental
conditions.
(iii) The initial flight conditions.
(iv) The helicopter configuration, including
weight and center of gravity.
(v) The data to be gathered.
(vi) All other information necessary to
recreate the flight test conditions in the FTD.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
(2) Appropriately qualified flight test
personnel.
(3) Appropriate and sufficient data
acquisition equipment or system(s),
including appropriate data reduction and
analysis methods and techniques, acceptable
to the FAA’s Aircraft Certification Service.
b. The data, regardless of source, must be
presented:
(1) In a format that supports the FTD
validation process;
(2) In a manner that is clearly readable and
annotated correctly and completely;
(3) With resolution sufficient to determine
compliance with the tolerances set forth in
Attachment 2, Table D2A Appendix D;
(4) With any necessary guidance
information provided; and
(5) Without alteration, adjustments, or bias.
Data may be corrected to address known data
calibration errors provided that an
explanation of the methods used to correct
the errors appears in the QTG. The corrected
data may be re-scaled, digitized, or otherwise
manipulated to fit the desired presentation
c. After completion of any additional flight
test, a flight test report must be submitted in
support of the validation data. The report
must contain sufficient data and rationale to
support qualification of the FTD at the level
requested.
d. As required by § 60.13(f), the sponsor
must notify the NSPM when it becomes
aware that an addition to or a revision of the
flight related data or helicopter systems
related data is available if this data is used
to program and operate a qualified FTD. The
data referred to in this sub-section is data
used to validate the performance, handling
qualities, or other characteristics of the
aircraft, including data related to any
relevant changes occurring after the type
certification is issued. The sponsor must—
(1) Within 10 calendar days, notify the
NSPM of the existence of this data; and
(a) Within 45 calendar days, notify the
NSPM of—
(b) The schedule to incorporate this data
into the FTD; or
(c) The reason for not incorporating this
data into the FTD.
e. In those cases where the objective test
results authorize a ‘‘snapshot test’’ or a
‘‘series of snapshot tests’’ results in lieu of a
time-history result, the sponsor or other data
provider must ensure that a steady state
condition exists at the instant of time
captured by the ‘‘snapshot.’’ The steady state
condition must exist from 4 seconds prior to,
through 1 second following, the instant of
time captured by the snap shot.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
f. The FTD sponsor is encouraged to
maintain a liaison with the manufacturer of
the aircraft being simulated (or with the
holder of the aircraft type certificate for the
aircraft being simulated if the manufacturer
is no longer in business), and if appropriate,
with the person having supplied the aircraft
data package for the FTD in order to facilitate
the notification described in this paragraph.
g. It is the intent of the NSPM that for new
aircraft entering service, at a point well in
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
advance of preparation of the QTG, the
sponsor should submit to the NSPM for
approval, a descriptive document (see
Appendix C of this part, Table C2D, Sample
Validation Data Roadmap for Helicopters)
containing the plan for acquiring the
validation data, including data sources. This
document should clearly identify sources of
data for all required tests, a description of the
validity of these data for a specific engine
type and thrust rating configuration, and the
revision levels of all avionics affecting the
performance or flying qualities of the aircraft.
Additionally, this document should provide
other information such as the rationale or
explanation for cases where data or data
parameters are missing, instances where
engineering simulation data are used, or
where flight test methods require further
explanations. It should also provide a brief
narrative describing the cause and effect of
any deviation from data requirements. The
aircraft manufacturer may provide this
document.
h. There is no requirement for any flight
test data supplier to submit a flight test plan
or program prior to gathering flight test data.
However, the NSPM notes that inexperienced
data gatherers often provide data that is
irrelevant, improperly marked, or lacking
adequate justification for selection. Other
problems include inadequate information
regarding initial conditions or test
maneuvers. The NSPM has been forced to
refuse these data submissions as validation
data for an FTD evaluation. For this reason
the NSPM recommends that any data
supplier not previously experienced in this
area review the data necessary for
programming and for validating the
performance of the FTD and discuss the
flight test plan anticipated for acquiring such
data with the NSPM well in advance of
commencing the flight tests.
i. The NSPM will consider, on a case-bycase basis, whether to approve supplemental
validation data derived from flight data
recording systems such as a Quick Access
Recorder or Flight Data Recorder.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
10. Special Equipment and Personnel
Requirements for Qualification of the FTD
(§ 60.14).
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
a. In the event that the NSPM determines
that special equipment or specifically
qualified persons will be required to conduct
an evaluation, the NSPM will make every
attempt to notify the sponsor at least one (1)
week, but in no case less than 72 hours, in
advance of the evaluation. Examples of
special equipment include flight control
measurement devices, accelerometers, or
oscilloscopes. Examples of specially
qualified personnel include individuals
specifically qualified to install or use any
special equipment when its use is required.
b. Examples of a special evaluation include
an evaluation conducted after an FTD is
moved; at the request of the TPAA; or as a
result of comments received from users of the
PO 00000
Frm 00245
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26721
FTD that raise questions about the continued
qualification or use of the FTD.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
11. Initial (and Upgrade) Qualification
Requirements (§ 60.15).
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirement
a. In order to be qualified at a particular
qualification level, the FTD must:
(1) Meet the general requirements listed in
Attachment 1 of this appendix.
(2) Meet the objective testing requirements
listed in Attachment 2 of this appendix
(Level 4 FTDs do not require objective tests).
(3) Satisfactorily accomplish the subjective
tests listed in Attachment 3 of this appendix.
b. The request described in § 60.15(a) must
include all of the following:
(1) A statement that the FTD meets all of
the applicable provisions of this part and all
applicable provisions of the QPS.
(2) A confirmation that the sponsor will
forward to the NSPM the statement described
in § 60.15(b) in such time as to be received
no later than 5 business days prior to the
scheduled evaluation and may be forwarded
to the NSPM via traditional or electronic
means.
(3) Except for a Level 4 FTD, a QTG,
acceptable to the NSPM, that includes all of
the following:
(a) Objective data obtained from aircraft
testing or another approved source.
(b) Correlating objective test results
obtained from the performance of the FTD as
prescribed in the appropriate QPS.
(c) The result of FTD subjective tests
prescribed in the appropriate QPS.
(d) A description of the equipment
necessary to perform the evaluation for initial
qualification and the continuing qualification
evaluations.
c. The QTG described in paragraph a(3) of
this section must provide the documented
proof of compliance with the FTD objective
tests in Attachment 2, Table D2A of this
appendix.
d. The QTG is prepared and submitted by
the sponsor, or the sponsor’s agent on behalf
of the sponsor, to the NSPM for review and
approval, and must include, for each
objective test:
(1) Parameters, tolerances, and flight
conditions.
(2) Pertinent and complete instructions for
conducting automatic and manual tests.
(3) A means of comparing the FTD test
results to the objective data.
(4) Any other information as necessary to
assist in the evaluation of the test results.
(5) Other information appropriate to the
qualification level of the FTD.
e. The QTG described in paragraphs (a)(3)
and (b) of this section, must include the
following:
(1) A QTG cover page with sponsor and
FAA approval signature blocks (see
Attachment 4, Figure D4C, of this appendix,
for a sample QTG cover page).
(2) A continuing qualification evaluation
requirements page. This page will be used by
the NSPM to establish and record the
frequency with which continuing
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26722
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
qualification evaluations must be conducted
and any subsequent changes that may be
determined by the NSPM in accordance with
§ 60.19. See Attachment 4, Figure D4G, of
this appendix for a sample Continuing
Qualification Evaluation Requirements page.
(3) An FTD information page that provides
the information listed in this paragraph, if
applicable (see Attachment 4, Figure D4B, of
this appendix, for a sample FTD information
page). For convertible FTDs, the sponsor
must submit a separate page for each
configuration of the FTD.
(a) The sponsor’s FTD identification
number or code.
(b) The helicopter model and series being
simulated.
(c) The aerodynamic data revision number
or reference.
(d) The source of the basic aerodynamic
model and the aerodynamic coefficient data
used to modify the basic model.
(e) The engine model(s) and its data
revision number or reference.
(f) The flight control data revision number
or reference.
(g) The flight management system
identification and revision level.
(h) The FTD model and manufacturer.
(i) The date of FTD manufacture.
(j) The FTD computer identification.
(k) The visual system model and
manufacturer, including display type.
(l) The motion system type and
manufacturer, including degrees of freedom.
(4) A Table of Contents.
(5) A log of revisions and a list of effective
pages.
(6) List of all relevant data references.
(7) A glossary of terms and symbols used
(including sign conventions and units).
(8) Statements of Compliance and
Capability (SOC) with certain requirements.
(9) Recording procedures or equipment
required to accomplish the objective tests.
(10) The following information for each
objective test designated in Attachment 2 of
this appendix, as applicable to the
qualification level sought:
(a) Name of the test.
(b) Objective of the test.
(c) Initial conditions.
(d) Manual test procedures.
(e) Automatic test procedures (if
applicable).
(f) Method for evaluating FTD objective test
results.
(g) List of all relevant parameters driven or
constrained during the automatic test(s).
(h) List of all relevant parameters driven or
constrained during the manual test(s).
(i) Tolerances for relevant parameters.
(j) Source of Validation Data (document
and page number).
(k) Copy of the Validation Data (if located
in a separate binder, a cross reference for the
identification and page number for pertinent
data location must be provided).
(l) FTD Objective Test Results as obtained
by the sponsor. Each test result must reflect
the date completed and must be clearly
labeled as a product of the device being
tested.
f. A convertible FTD is addressed as a
separate FTD for each model and series
helicopter to which it will be converted and
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
for the FAA qualification level sought. The
NSPM will conduct an evaluation for each
configuration. If a sponsor seeks qualification
for two or more models of a helicopter type
using a convertible FTD, the sponsor must
provide a QTG for each helicopter model, or
a QTG for the first helicopter model and a
supplement to that QTG for each additional
helicopter model. The NSPM will conduct
evaluations for each helicopter model.
g. The form and manner of presentation of
objective test results in the QTG must
include the following:
(1) The sponsor’s FTD test results must be
recorded in a manner acceptable to the
NSPM, that allows easy comparison of the
FTD test results to the validation data (e.g.,
use of a multi-channel recorder, line printer,
cross plotting, overlays, transparencies).
(2) FTD results must be labeled using
terminology common to helicopter
parameters as opposed to computer software
identifications.
(3) Validation data documents included in
a QTG may be photographically reduced only
if such reduction will not alter the graphic
scaling or cause difficulties in scale
interpretation or resolution.
(4) Scaling on graphical presentations must
provide the resolution necessary to evaluate
the parameters shown in Attachment 2, Table
D2A of this appendix.
(5) Tests involving time histories, data
sheets (or transparencies thereof) and FTD
test results must be clearly marked with
appropriate reference points to ensure an
accurate comparison between FTD and
helicopter with respect to time. Time
histories recorded via a line printer are to be
clearly identified for cross-plotting on the
helicopter data. Over-plots may not obscure
the reference data.
h. The sponsor may elect to complete the
QTG objective and subjective tests at the
manufacturer’s facility or at the sponsor’s
training facility. If the tests are conducted at
the manufacturer’s facility, the sponsor must
repeat at least one-third of the tests at the
sponsor’s training facility in order to
substantiate FTD performance. The QTG
must be clearly annotated to indicate when
and where each test was accomplished. Tests
conducted at the manufacturer’s facility and
at the sponsor’s training facility must be
conducted after the FTD is assembled with
systems and sub-systems functional and
operating in an interactive manner. The test
results must be submitted to the NSPM.
i. The sponsor must maintain a copy of the
MQTG at the FTD location.
j. All FTDs for which the initial
qualification is conducted after May 30,
2014, must have an electronic MQTG
(eMQTG) including all objective data
obtained from helicopter testing, or another
approved source (reformatted or digitized),
together with correlating objective test results
obtained from the performance of the FTD
(reformatted or digitized) as prescribed in
this appendix. The eMQTG must also contain
the general FTD performance or
demonstration results (reformatted or
digitized) prescribed in this appendix, and a
description of the equipment necessary to
perform the initial qualification evaluation
and the continuing qualification evaluations.
PO 00000
Frm 00246
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
The eMQTG must include the original
validation data used to validate FTD
performance and handling qualities in either
the original digitized format from the data
supplier or an electronic scan of the original
time-history plots that were provided by the
data supplier. A copy of the eMQTG must be
provided to the NSPM.
k. All other FTDs (not covered in
subparagraph ‘‘j’’) must have an electronic
copy of the MQTG by and after May 30, 2014.
An electronic copy of the MQTG must be
provided to the NSPM. This may be provided
by an electronic scan presented in a Portable
Document File (PDF), or similar format
acceptable to the NSPM.
l. During the initial (or upgrade)
qualification evaluation conducted by the
NSPM, the sponsor must also provide a
person knowledgeable about the operation of
the aircraft and the operation of the FTD.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
m. Only those FTDs that are sponsored by
a certificate holder as defined in Appendix
F of this part will be evaluated by the NSPM.
However, other FTD evaluations may be
conducted on a case-by-case basis as the
Administrator deems appropriate, but only in
accordance with applicable agreements.
n. The NSPM will conduct an evaluation
for each configuration, and each FTD must be
evaluated as completely as possible. To
ensure a thorough and uniform evaluation,
each FTD is subjected to the general FTD
requirements in Attachment 1 of this
appendix, the objective tests listed in
Attachment 2 of this appendix, and the
subjective tests listed in Attachment 3 of this
appendix. The evaluations described herein
will include, but not necessarily be limited
to the following:
(1) Helicopter responses, including
longitudinal and lateral-directional control
responses (see Attachment 2 of this
appendix).
(2) Performance in authorized portions of
the simulated helicopter’s operating
envelope, to include tasks evaluated by the
NSPM in the areas of surface operations,
takeoff, climb, cruise, descent, approach and
landing, as well as abnormal and emergency
operations (see Attachment 2 of this
appendix).
(3) Control checks (see Attachment 1 and
Attachment 2 of this appendix).
(4) Flight deck configuration (see
Attachment 1 of this appendix).
(5) Pilot, flight engineer, and instructor
station functions checks (see Attachment 1
and Attachment 3 of this appendix).
(6) Helicopter systems and sub-systems (as
appropriate) as compared to the helicopter
simulated (see attachment 1 and attachment
3 of this appendix).
(7) FTD systems and sub-systems,
including force cueing (motion), visual, and
aural (sound) systems, as appropriate (see
Attachment 1 and Attachment 2 of this
appendix).
(8) Certain additional requirements,
depending upon the qualification level
sought, including equipment or
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
circumstances that may become hazardous to
the occupants. The sponsor may be subject to
Occupational Safety and Health
Administration requirements.
o. The NSPM administers the objective and
subjective tests, which include an
examination of functions. The tests include
a qualitative assessment of the FTD by an
NSP pilot. The NSP evaluation team leader
may assign other qualified personnel to assist
in accomplishing the functions examination
and/or the objective and subjective tests
performed during an evaluation when
required.
(1) Objective tests provide a basis for
measuring and evaluating FTD performance
and determining compliance with the
requirements of this part.
(2) Subjective tests provide a basis for:
(a) Evaluating the capability of the FTD to
perform over a typical utilization period;
(b) Determining that the FTD satisfactorily
simulates each required task;
(c) Verifying correct operation of the FTD
controls, instruments, and systems; and
(d) Demonstrating compliance with the
requirements of this part.
p. The tolerances for the test parameters
listed in Attachment 2 of this appendix
reflect the range of tolerances acceptable to
the NSPM for FTD validation and are not to
be confused with design tolerances specified
for FTD manufacture. In making decisions
regarding tests and test results, the NSPM
relies on the use of operational and
engineering judgment in the application of
data (including consideration of the way in
which the flight test was flown and way the
data was gathered and applied), data
presentations, and the applicable tolerances
for each test.
q. In addition to the scheduled continuing
qualification evaluation, each FTD is subject
to evaluations conducted by the NSPM at any
time without prior notification to the
sponsor. Such evaluations would be
accomplished in a normal manner (i.e.,
requiring exclusive use of the FTD for the
conduct of objective and subjective tests and
an examination of functions) if the FTD is not
being used for flight crewmember training,
testing, or checking. However, if the FTD
were being used, the evaluation would be
conducted in a non-exclusive manner. This
non-exclusive evaluation will be conducted
by the FTD evaluator accompanying the
check airman, instructor, Aircrew Program
Designee (APD), or FAA inspector aboard the
FTD along with the student(s) and observing
the operation of the FTD during the training,
testing, or checking activities.
r. Problems with objective test results are
handled as follows:
(1) If a problem with an objective test result
is detected by the NSP evaluation team
during an evaluation, the test may be
repeated or the QTG may be amended.
(2) If it is determined that the results of an
objective test do not support the qualification
level requested but do support a lower level,
the NSPM may qualify the FTD at a lower
level.
s. After an FTD is successfully evaluated,
the NSPM issues an SOQ to the sponsor. The
NSPM recommends the FTD to the TPAA,
who will approve the FTD for use in a flight
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
training program. The SOQ will be issued at
the satisfactory conclusion of the initial or
continuing qualification evaluation and will
list the tasks for which the FTD is qualified,
referencing the tasks described in Table D1B
in Attachment 1 of this appendix. However,
it is the sponsor’s responsibility to obtain
TPAA approval prior to using the FTD in an
FAA-approved flight training program.
t. Under normal circumstances, the NSPM
establishes a date for the initial or upgrade
evaluation within ten (10) working days after
determining that a complete QTG is
acceptable. Unusual circumstances may
warrant establishing an evaluation date
before this determination is made. A sponsor
may schedule an evaluation date as early as
6 months in advance. However, there may be
a delay of 45 days or more in rescheduling
and completing the evaluation if the sponsor
is unable to meet the scheduled date. See
Attachment 4, of this appendix, Figure D4A,
Sample Request for Initial, Upgrade, or
Reinstatement Evaluation.
u. The numbering system used for
objective test results in the QTG should
closely follow the numbering system set out
in Attachment 2, FTD Objective Tests, Table
D2A of this appendix.
v. Contact the NSPM or visit the NSPM
Web site for additional information regarding
the preferred qualifications of pilots used to
meet the requirements of § 60.15(d).
w. Examples of the exclusions for which
the FTD might not have been subjectively
tested by the sponsor or the NSPM and for
which qualification might not be sought or
granted, as described in § 60.15(g)(6), include
approaches to and departures from slopes
and pinnacles.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
12. Additional Qualifications for Currently
Qualified FTDs (§ 60.16)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.16, Additional
Qualifications for a Currently Qualified FTD.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
13. Previously Qualified FTDs (§ 60.17)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. In instances where a sponsor plans to
remove an FTD from active status for a
period of less than two years, the following
procedures apply:
(1) The NSPM must be notified in writing
and the notification must include an estimate
of the period that the FTD will be inactive.
(2) Continuing Qualification evaluations
will not be scheduled during the inactive
period.
(3) The NSPM will remove the FTD from
the list of qualified FTDs on a mutually
established date not later than the date on
which the first missed continuing
qualification evaluation would have been
scheduled.
(4) Before the FTD is restored to qualified
status, it must be evaluated by the NSPM.
PO 00000
Frm 00247
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26723
The evaluation content and the time required
to accomplish the evaluation is based on the
number of continuing qualification
evaluations and sponsor-conducted quarterly
inspections missed during the period of
inactivity.
(5) The sponsor must notify the NSPM of
any changes to the original scheduled time
out of service.
b. FTDs and replacement FTD systems
qualified prior to May 30, 2008, are not
required to meet the general FTD
requirements, the objective test requirements,
and the subjective test requirements of
Attachments 1, 2, and 3, respectively, of this
appendix as long as the FTD continues to
meet the test requirements contained in the
MQTG developed under the original
qualification basis.
c. After (1 year after date of publication of
the final rule in the Federal Register) each
visual scene and airport model installed in
and available for use in a qualified FTD must
meet the requirements described in
Attachment 3 of this appendix.
d. Simulators qualified prior to May 30,
2008, may be updated. If an evaluation is
deemed appropriate or necessary by the
NSPM after such an update, the evaluation
will not require an evaluation to standards
beyond those against which the simulator
was originally qualified.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
e. Other certificate holders or persons
desiring to use an FTD may contract with
FTD sponsors to use FTDs previously
qualified at a particular level for a helicopter
type and approved for use within an FAAapproved flight training program. Such FTDs
are not required to undergo an additional
qualification process, except as described in
§ 60.16.
f. Each FTD user must obtain approval
from the appropriate TPAA to use any FTD
in an FAA-approved flight training program.
g. The intent of the requirement listed in
§ 60.17(b), for each FTD to have an SOQ
within 6 years, is to have the availability of
that statement (including the configuration
list and the limitations to authorizations) to
provide a complete picture of the FTD
inventory regulated by the FAA. The
issuance of the statement will not require any
additional evaluation or require any
adjustment to the evaluation basis for the
FTD.
h. Downgrading of an FTD is a permanent
change in qualification level and will
necessitate the issuance of a revised SOQ to
reflect the revised qualification level, as
appropriate. If a temporary restriction is
placed on an FTD because of a missing,
malfunctioning, or inoperative component or
on-going repairs, the restriction is not a
permanent change in qualification level.
Instead, the restriction is temporary and is
removed when the reason for the restriction
has been resolved.
i. It is not the intent of the NSPM to
discourage the improvement of existing
simulation (e.g., the ‘‘updating’’ of a control
loading system, or the replacement of the IOS
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26724
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
with a more capable unit) by requiring the
‘‘updated’’ device to meet the qualification
standards current at the time of the update.
Depending on the extent of the update, the
NSPM may require that the updated device
be evaluated and may require that an
evaluation include all or a portion of the
elements of an initial evaluation. However,
the standards against which the device
would be evaluated are those that are found
in the MQTG for that device.
j. The NSPM will determine the evaluation
criteria for an FTD that has been removed
from active status for a prolonged period. The
criteria will be based on the number of
continuing qualification evaluations and
quarterly inspections missed during the
period of inactivity. For example, if the FTD
were out of service for a 1 year period, it
would be necessary to complete the entire
QTG, since all of the quarterly evaluations
would have been missed. The NSPM will
also consider how the FTD was stored,
whether parts were removed from the FTD
and whether the FTD was disassembled.
k. The FTD will normally be requalified
using the FAA-approved MQTG and the
criteria that was in effect prior to its removal
from qualification. However, inactive periods
of 2 years or more will require requalification under the standards in effect
and current at the time of requalification.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
14. Inspection, Continuing Qualification,
Evaluation, and Maintenance Requirements
(§ 60.19)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirement
a. The sponsor must conduct a minimum
of four evenly spaced inspections throughout
the year. The objective test sequence and
content of each inspection in this sequence
must be developed by the sponsor and must
be acceptable to the NSPM.
b. The description of the functional
preflight check must be contained in the
sponsor’s QMS.
c. Record ‘‘functional preflight’’ in the FTD
discrepancy log book or other acceptable
location, including any item found to be
missing, malfunctioning, or inoperative.
d. During the continuing qualification
evaluation conducted by the NSPM, the
sponsor must also provide a person
knowledgeable about the operation of the
aircraft and the operation of the FTD.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
e. The sponsor’s test sequence and the
content of each quarterly inspection required
in § 60.19(a)(1) should include a balance and
a mix from the objective test requirement
areas listed as follows:
(1) Performance.
(2) Handling qualities.
(3) Motion system (where appropriate).
(4) Visual system (where appropriate).
(5) Sound system (where appropriate).
(6) Other FTD systems.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
f. If the NSP evaluator plans to accomplish
specific tests during a normal continuing
qualification evaluation that requires the use
of special equipment or technicians, the
sponsor will be notified as far in advance of
the evaluation as practical; but not less than
72 hours. Examples of such tests include
latencies and control sweeps.
g. The continuing qualification evaluations
described in § 60.19(b) will normally require
4 hours of FTD time. However, flexibility is
necessary to address abnormal situations or
situations involving aircraft with additional
levels of complexity (e.g., computer
controlled aircraft). The sponsor should
anticipate that some tests may require
additional time. The continuing qualification
evaluations will consist of the following:
(1) Review of the results of the quarterly
inspections conducted by the sponsor since
the last scheduled continuing qualification
evaluation.
(2) A selection of approximately 8 to 15
objective tests from the MQTG that provide
an adequate opportunity to evaluate the
performance of the FTD. The tests chosen
will be performed either automatically or
manually and should be able to be conducted
within approximately one-third (1/3) of the
allotted FTD time.
(3) A subjective evaluation of the FTD to
perform a representative sampling of the
tasks set out in attachment 3 of this
appendix. This portion of the evaluation
should take approximately two-thirds (2/3) of
the allotted FTD time.
(4) An examination of the functions of the
FTD may include the motion system, visual
system, sound system as applicable,
instructor operating station, and the normal
functions and simulated malfunctions of the
simulated helicopter systems. This
examination is normally accomplished
simultaneously with the subjective
evaluation requirements.
h. The requirement established in
§ 60.19(b)(4) regarding the frequency of
NSPM-conducted continuing qualification
evaluations for each FTD is typically 12
months. However, the establishment and
satisfactory implementation of an approved
QMS for a sponsor will provide a basis for
adjusting the frequency of evaluations to
exceed 12-month intervals.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
15. Logging FTD Discrepancies (§ 60.20)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.20. Logging FTD
Discrepancies.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
16. Interim Qualification of FTDs for New
Helicopter Types or Models (§ 60.21)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.21, Interim
Qualification of FTDs for New Helicopter
Types or Models.
PO 00000
Frm 00248
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
17. Modifications to FTDs (§ 60.23)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. The notification described in
§ 60.23(c)(2) must include a complete
description of the planned modification, with
a description of the operational and
engineering effect the proposed modification
will have on the operation of the FTD and
the results that are expected with the
modification incorporated.
b. Prior to using the modified FTD:
(1) All the applicable objective tests
completed with the modification
incorporated, including any necessary
updates to the MQTG (e.g., accomplishment
of FSTD Directives) must be acceptable to the
NSPM; and
(2) The sponsor must provide the NSPM
with a statement signed by the MR that the
factors listed in § 60.15(b) are addressed by
the appropriate personnel as described in
that section.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
c. FSTD Directives are considered
modification of an FTD. See Attachment 4 of
this appendix, Figure D4H for a sample index
of effective FSTD Directives. See Attachment
6 of this appendix for a list of all effective
FSTD Directives applicable to Helicopter
FTDs.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
18. Operation with Missing, Malfunctioning,
or Inoperative Components (§ 60.25)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
a. The sponsor’s responsibility with respect
to § 60.25(a) is satisfied when the sponsor
fairly and accurately advises the user of the
current status of an FTD, including any
missing, malfunctioning, or inoperative
(MMI) component(s).
b. It is the responsibility of the instructor,
check airman, or representative of the
administrator conducting training, testing, or
checking to exercise reasonable and prudent
judgment to determine if any MMI
component is necessary for the satisfactory
completion of a specific maneuver,
procedure, or task.
c. If the 29th or 30th day of the 30-day
period described in § 60.25(b) is on a
Saturday, a Sunday, or a holiday, the FAA
will extend the deadline until the next
business day.
d. In accordance with the authorization
described in § 60.25(b), the sponsor may
develop a discrepancy prioritizing system to
accomplish repairs based on the level of
impact on the capability of the FTD. Repairs
having a larger impact on the FTD’s ability
to provide the required training, evaluation,
or flight experience will have a higher
priority for repair or replacement.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
End Information
23. [Reserved].
lllllllllllllllllllll
End Information
19. Automatic Loss of Qualification and
Procedures for Restoration of Qualification
(§ 60.27)
lllllllllllllllllllll
characteristic helicopter vibrations noted at
the pilot station(s).
24. Levels of FTD
lllllllllllllllllllll
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
Begin Information
If the sponsor provides a plan for how the
FTD will be maintained during its out-ofservice period (e.g., periodic exercise of
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical
systems; routine replacement of hydraulic
fluid; control of the environmental factors in
which the FTD is to be maintained) there is
a greater likelihood that the NSPM will be
able to determine the amount of testing that
is required for requalification.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
20. Other Losses of Qualification and
Procedures for Restoration of Qualification
(§ 60.29)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
If the sponsor provides a plan for how the
FTD will be maintained during its out-ofservice period (e.g., periodic exercise of
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical
systems; routine replacement of hydraulic
fluid; control of the environmental factors in
which the FTD is to be maintained) there is
a greater likelihood that the NSPM will be
able to determine the amount of testing that
is required for requalification.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
21. Record Keeping and Reporting (§ 60.31)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
a. FTD modifications can include hardware
or software changes. For FTD modifications
involving software programming changes, the
record required by § 60.31(a)(2) must consist
of the name of the aircraft system software,
aerodynamic model, or engine model change,
the date of the change, a summary of the
change, and the reason for the change.
b. If a coded form for record keeping is
used, it must provide for the preservation
and retrieval of information with appropriate
security or controls to prevent the
inappropriate alteration of such records after
the fact.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
22. Applications, Logbooks, Reports, and
Records: Fraud, Falsification, or Incorrect
Statements (§ 60.33)
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.33, Applications,
Logbooks, Reports, and Records: Fraud,
Falsification, or Incorrect Statements
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
a. The following is a general description of
each level of FTD. Detailed standards and
tests for the various levels of FTDs are fully
defined in Attachments 1 through 3 of this
appendix.
(1) Level 4. A Level 4 device is one that
may have an open helicopter-specific flight
deck area, or an enclosed helicopter-specific
flight deck and at least one operating system.
Air/ground logic is required (no aerodynamic
programming required). All displays may be
flat/LCD panel representations or actual
representations of displays in the aircraft. All
controls, switches, and knobs may be touch
sensitive activation (not capable of manual
manipulation of the flight controls) or may
physically replicate the aircraft in control
operation.
(2) Level 5. A Level 5 device is one that
may have an open helicopter-specific flight
deck area, or an enclosed helicopter-specific
flight deck and a generic aerodynamic
program with at least one operating system
and control loading representative of the
simulated helicopter. The control loading
need only represent the helicopter at an
approach speed and configuration. All
displays may be flat/LCD panel
representations or actual representations of
displays in the aircraft. Primary and
secondary flight controls (e.g., rudder,
aileron, elevator, flaps, spoilers/speed brakes,
engine controls, landing gear, nosewheel
steering, trim, brakes) must be physical
controls. All other controls, switches, and
knobs may be touch sensitive activation.
(3) Level 6. A Level 6 device is one that
has an enclosed helicopter-specific flight
deck and aerodynamic program with all
applicable helicopter systems operating and
control loading that is representative of the
simulated helicopter throughout its ground
and flight envelope and significant sound
representation. All displays may be flat/LCD
panel representations or actual
representations of displays in the aircraft, but
all controls, switches, and knobs must
physically replicate the aircraft in control
operation.
(4) Level 7. A Level 7 device is one that
has an enclosed helicopter-specific flight
deck and aerodynamic program with all
applicable helicopter systems operating and
control loading that is representative of the
simulated helicopter throughout its ground
and flight envelope and significant sound
representation. All displays may be flat/LCD
panel representations or actual
representations of displays in the aircraft, but
all controls, switches, and knobs must
physically replicate the aircraft in control
operation. It also has a visual system that
provides an out-of-the-flight deck view,
providing cross-flight deck viewing (for both
pilots simultaneously) of a field-of-view of at
least 146° horizontally and 36° vertically as
well as a vibration cueing system for
PO 00000
Frm 00249
Fmt 4701
26725
Sfmt 4700
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
25. FTD Qualification on the Basis of a
Bilateral Aviation Safety Agreement (BASA)
(§ 60.37)
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
No additional regulatory or informational
material applies to § 60.37, FTD Qualification
on the Basis of a Bilateral Aviation Safety
Agreement (BASA).
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
Attachment 1 to Appendix D to Part 60—
GENERAL FTD REQUIREMENTS
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
1. Requirements
a. Certain requirements included in this
appendix must be supported with an SOC as
defined in Appendix F, which may include
objective and subjective tests. The
requirements for SOCs are indicated in the
‘‘General FTD Requirements’’ column in
Table D1A of this appendix.
b. Table D1A describes the requirements
for the indicated level of FTD. Many devices
include operational systems or functions that
exceed the requirements outlined in this
section. In any event, all systems will be
tested and evaluated in accordance with this
appendix to ensure proper operation.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
2. Discussion
a. This attachment describes the general
requirements for qualifying Level 4 through
Level 7 FTDs. The sponsor should also
consult the objectives tests in Attachment 2
of this appendix and the examination of
functions and subjective tests listed in
Attachment 3 of this appendix to determine
the complete requirements for a specific level
FTD.
b. The material contained in this
attachment is divided into the following
categories:
(1) General Flight Deck Configuration.
(2) Programming.
(3) Equipment Operation.
(4) Equipment and Facilities for Instructor/
Evaluator Functions.
(5) Motion System.
(6) Visual System.
(7) Sound System.
c. Table D1A provides the standards for the
General FTD Requirements.
d. Table D1B provides the tasks that the
sponsor will examine to determine whether
the FTD satisfactorily meets the requirements
for flight crew training, testing, and
experience.
e. Table D1C provides the functions that an
instructor/check airman must be able to
control in the simulator.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26726
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
f. It is not required that all of the tasks that
appear on the List of Qualified Tasks (part of
the SOQ) be accomplished during the initial
or continuing qualification evaluation.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
TABLE D1A.—MINIMUM FTD REQUIREMENTS
QPS requirements
Information
FTD level
Entry
No.
General FTD requirements
Notes
4
5
6
7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1. General Flight Deck Configuration.
1.a. .......
The FTD must have a flight deck that is a replica of the
helicopter, or set of helicopters simulated with controls, equipment, observable flight deck indicators,
circuit breakers, and bulkheads properly located,
functionally accurate and replicating the helicopter or
set of helicopters. The direction of movement of controls and switches must be identical to that in the helicopter or set of helicopters. Crewmember seats must
afford the capability for the occupant to be able to
achieve the design ‘‘eye position.’’ Equipment for the
operation of the flight deck windows must be included, but the actual windows need not be operable.
Those circuit breakers that affect procedures or result
in observable flight deck indications must be properly
located and functionally accurate. Fire axes, extinguishers, landing gear pins, and spare light bulbs
must be available, and may be represented in silhouette, in the flight simulator. This equipment must
be present as near as practical to the original position
1.b. .......
The FTD must have equipment (i.e., instruments, panels, systems, circuit breakers, and controls) simulated
sufficiently for the authorized training/checking events
to be accomplished. The installed equipment, must
be located in a spatially correct configuration, and
may be in a flight deck or an open flight deck area.
Those circuit breakers that affect procedures or result
in observable flight deck indications must be properly
located and functionally accurate. Additional equipment required for the authorized training and checking events must be available in the FTD but may be
located in a suitable location as near as practical to
the spatially correct position. Actuation of this equipment must replicate the appropriate function in the
helicopter. Fire axes, landing gear pins, and any
similar purpose instruments need only be represented in silhouette
X
For FTD purposes, the flight deck consists of all that
space forward of a cross section of the flight deck at
the most extreme aft setting of the pilots’ seats including additional, required crewmember duty stations and those required bulkheads aft of the pilot
seats. Bulkheads containing only items such as landing gear pin storage compartments, fire axes and extinguishers, spare light bulbs, and aircraft documents
pouches are not considered essential and may be
omitted. If omitted, these items, or the silhouettes of
these items, may be placed on the wall of the simulator, or in any other location as near as practical to
the original position of these items.
X
2. Programming.
The FTD must provide the proper effect of aerodynamic
changes for the combinations of drag and thrust normally encountered in flight. This must include the effect of change in helicopter attitude, thrust, drag, altitude, temperature, and configuration. Levels 6 and 7
additionally require the effects of changes in gross
weight and center of gravity.Level 5 requires only generic aerodynamic programming.
An SOC is required .........................................................
2.b. .......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.a. .......
The FTD must have the computer (analog or digital)
capability (i.e., capacity, accuracy, resolution, and dynamic response) needed to meet the qualification
level sought.
An SOC is required .........................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00250
X
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26727
TABLE D1A.—MINIMUM FTD REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
FTD level
Entry
No.
General FTD requirements
2.c. ........
Relative responses of the flight deck instruments must
be measured by latency tests or transport delay
tests, and may not exceed 150 milliseconds. The instruments must respond to abrupt input at the pilot’s
position within the allotted time, but not before the
time that the helicopter or set of helicopters respond
under the same conditions
• Latency: The FTD instrument and, if applicable, the
motion system and the visual system response must
not be prior to that time when the helicopter responds and may respond up to 150 milliseconds
after that time under the same conditions.
• Transport Delay: As an alternative to the Latency requirement, a transport delay objective test may be
used to demonstrate that the FTD system does not
exceed the specified limit. The sponsor must measure all the delay encountered by a step signal migrating from the pilot’s control through all the simulation
software modules in the correct order, using a handshaking protocol, finally through the normal output
interfaces to the instrument display and, if applicable,
the motion system, and the visual system.
Notes
4
5
6
7
X
X
X
The intent is to verify that the FTD provides instrument
cues that are, within the stated time delays, like the
helicopter responses. For helicopter response, acceleration in the appropriate, corresponding rotational
axis is preferred.
3. Equipment Operation.
All relevant instrument indications involved in the simulation of the helicopter must automatically respond
to control movement or external disturbances to the
simulated helicopter or set of helicopters; e.g., turbulence or winds
A
X
X
X
3.b. .......
Navigation equipment must be installed and operate
within the tolerances applicable for the helicopter or
set of helicopters. Levels 6 and 7 must also include
communication equipment (inter-phone and air/
ground) like that in the helicopter. Level 5 only needs
that navigation equipment necessary to fly an instrument approach
A
X
X
X
3.c. ........
Installed systems must simulate the applicable helicopter system operation both on the ground and in
flight. At least one helicopter system must be represented. Systems must be operative to the extent
that applicable normal, abnormal, and emergency operating procedures included in the sponsor’s training
programs can be accomplished. Levels 6 and 7 must
simulate all applicable helicopter flight, navigation,
and systems operation. Level 5 must have functional
flight and navigational controls, displays, and instrumentation
A
X
X
X
3.d. .......
The lighting environment for panels and instruments
must be sufficient for the operation being conducted
X
X
X
X
3.e. .......
The FTD must provide control forces and control travel
that correspond to the replicated helicopter or set of
helicopters. Control forces must react in the same
manner as in the helicopter or set of helicopters
under the same flight conditions
X
X
3.f. ........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
3.a. .......
The FTD must provide control forces and control travel
of sufficient precision to manually fly an instrument
approach. The control forces must react in the same
manner as in the helicopter or set of helicopters
under the same flight conditions
Back-lighted panels and instruments may be installed
but are not required.
X
4. Instructor or Evaluator Facilities.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00251
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26728
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D1A.—MINIMUM FTD REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
FTD level
Entry
No.
General FTD requirements
4.a. .......
4.b. .......
Notes
4
5
6
7
In addition to the flight crewmember stations, suitable
seating arrangements for an instructor/check airman
and FAA Inspector must be available. These seats
must provide adequate view of crewmember’s
panel(s)
X
X
X
X
The FTD must have instructor controls that permit activation of normal, abnormal, and emergency conditions, as appropriate. Once activated, proper system
operation must result from system management by
the crew and not require input from the instructor
controls.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
These seats need not be a replica of an aircraft seat
and may be as simple as an office chair placed in an
appropriate position.
5. Motion System
5.a. .......
A motion system may be installed in an FTD. If installed, the motion system operation must not be distracting. If a motion system is installed and additional
training, testing, or checking credits are being sought,
sensory cues must also be integrated. The motion
system must respond to abrupt input at the pilot’s position within the allotted time, but not before the time
when the helicopter responds under the same conditions. The motion system must be measured by latency tests or transport delay tests and may not exceed 150 milliseconds. Instrument response must not
occur prior to motion onset
5.b. .......
The FTD must have at least a vibration cueing system
for characteristic helicopter vibrations noted at the
pilot station(s)
X
May be accomplished by a ‘‘seat shaker’’ or a bass
speaker sufficient to provide the necessary cueing.
6. Visual System
6.a. .......
6.a.1. ....
The FTD may have a visual system, if desired, although it is not required. If a visual system is installed, it must meet the following criteria:
The visual system must respond to abrupt input at the
pilot’s position.
An SOC is required .........................................................
X
X
X
The visual system must be at least a single channel,
non-collimated display.
An SOC is required .........................................................
X
X
X
6.a.3. ....
The visual system must provide at least a field-of-view
of 18° vertical/24° horizontal for the pilot flying.
An SOC is required .........................................................
X
X
X
6.a.4. ....
The visual system must provide for a maximum parallax of 10° per pilot.
An SOC is required .........................................................
X
X
X
6.a.5. ....
The visual scene content may not be distracting.
An SOC is required .........................................................
X
X
X
6.a.6. ....
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
6.a.2. ....
The minimum distance from the pilot’s eye position to
the surface of a direct view display may not be less
than the distance to any front panel instrument.
An SOC is required .........................................................
X
X
X
6.a.7. ....
The visual system must provide for a minimum resolution of 5 arc-minutes for both computed and displayed pixel size.
An SOC is required .........................................................
X
X
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00252
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26729
TABLE D1A.—MINIMUM FTD REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
FTD level
Entry
No.
General FTD requirements
6.b. .......
If a visual system is installed and additional training,
testing, or checking credits are being sought on the
basis of having a visual system, a visual system
meeting the standards set out for at least a Level A
FFS (see Appendix A of this part) will be required. A
‘‘direct-view,’’ non-collimated visual system (with the
other requirements for a Level A visual system met)
may be considered satisfactory for those installations
where the visual system design ‘‘eye point’’ is appropriately adjusted for each pilot’s position such that
the parallax error is at or less than 10° simultaneously for each pilot.
An SOC is required .........................................................
6.c. ........
The FTD must provide a continuous visual field-of-view
of at least 146° horizontally and 36° vertically for
both pilot seats, simultaneously. The minimum horizontal field-of-view coverage must be plus and minus
one-half (1⁄2) of the minimum continuous field-of-view
requirement, centered on the zero degree azimuth
line relative to the aircraft fuselage. Additional horizontal field-of-view capability may be added at the
sponsor’s discretion provided the minimum field-ofview is retained. Capability for a field-of-view in excess of these minima is not required for qualification
at Level 7. However, where specific tasks require extended fields of view beyond the 146° by 36° (e.g., to
accommodate the use of ‘‘chin windows’’ where the
accommodation is either integral with or separate
from the primary visual system display), then such
extended fields of view must be provided.
An SOC is required and must explain the geometry of
the installation.
Notes
4
5
6
X
X
7
X
X
Optimization of the vertical field-of-view may be considered with respect to the specific helicopter flight deck
cut-off angle. When considering the installation/use of
augmented fields of view, as described here, it will
be the responsibility of the sponsor to meet with the
NSPM to determine the training, testing, checking, or
experience tasks for which the augmented field-ofview capability may be critical to that approval.
7. Sound System
7.a. .......
The FTD must simulate significant flight deck sounds
resulting from pilot actions that correspond to those
heard in the helicopter
X
X
Note: An ‘‘A’’ in the table indicates that the system, task, or procedure may be examined if the appropriate helicopter system or control is simulated in the FTD and is working properly.
TABLE D1B.—MINIMUM FTD REQUIREMENTS
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Information
Subjective requirements
The FTD must be able to perform the tasks associated
with the level of qualification sought.
FTD level
Notes
4
5
6
7
A
A
X
X
1. Preflight Procedures
Preflight Inspection (Flight Deck Only) switches, indicators, systems, and equipment.
1.b. ......
APU/Engine start and run-up.
1.b.1. ...
Normal start procedures ..................................................
A
A
X
X
1.b.2. ...
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1.a. ......
Alternate start procedures ...............................................
A
A
X
X
1.b.3. ...
Abnormal starts and shutdowns (hot start, hung start) ...
A
A
X
X
1.c. .......
Taxiing—Ground ..............................................................
X
1.d. ......
Taxiing—Hover ................................................................
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00253
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26730
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D1B.—MINIMUM FTD REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Entry
No.
Subjective requirements
The FTD must be able to perform the tasks associated
with the level of qualification sought.
FTD level
4
5
6
7
1.e. ......
Pre-takeoff Checks ..........................................................
A
A
X
X
Notes
2. Takeoff and Departure Phase
2.a. ......
Normal takeoff.
2.a.1. ...
From ground ....................................................................
X
2.a.2. ...
From hover ......................................................................
X
2.a.3 ....
Running ...........................................................................
X
2.b. ......
Instrument ........................................................................
X
X
2.c. .......
Powerplant Failure During Takeoff ..................................
X
X
2.d. ......
Rejected Takeoff ..............................................................
2.e. ......
Instrument Departure .......................................................
X
X
3.a. ......
Normal .............................................................................
X
X
3.b. ......
Obstacle clearance ..........................................................
3.c. .......
Vertical .............................................................................
X
X
3.d. ......
One engine inoperative ...................................................
X
X
X
X
X
3. Climb
X
4. In-flight Maneuvers
4.a. ......
Turns (timed, normal, steep) ...........................................
X
4.b. ......
Powerplant Failure—Multiengine Helicopters ..................
X
X
4.c. .......
Powerplant Failure—Single-Engine Helicopters ..............
X
X
4.d. ......
Recovery From Unusual Attitudes ...................................
X
4.e. ......
Settling with Power ..........................................................
X
5. Instrument Procedures
Instrument Arrival .............................................................
X
X
5.b. ......
Holding .............................................................................
X
X
5.c. .......
Precision Instrument Approach
5.c.1. ....
Normal—All engines operating ........................................
X
X
5.c.2. ....
Manually controlled—One or more engines inoperative
X
X
5.d. ......
Non-precision Instrument Approach ................................
X
X
5.e. ......
Missed Approach.
5.e.1. ...
All engines operating .......................................................
X
X
5.e.2. ...
One or more engines inoperative ....................................
X
X
5.e.3. ...
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
5.a. ......
Stability augmentation system failure ..............................
X
X
X
X
X
X
6. Landings and Approaches to Landings
6.a. ......
Visual Approaches (normal, steep, shallow) ...................
6.b. ......
Landings.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00254
Fmt 4701
X
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26731
TABLE D1B.—MINIMUM FTD REQUIREMENTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Information
Subjective requirements
The FTD must be able to perform the tasks associated
with the level of qualification sought.
FTD level
Notes
4
5
6
7
6.b.1. ...
Normal/crosswind.
6.b.1.a.
Running ...........................................................................
X
6.b.1.b.
From Hover ......................................................................
X
6.b.2. ...
One or more engines inoperative ....................................
X
6.b.3. ...
Rejected Landing .............................................................
X
7. Normal and Abnormal Procedures
7.a. ......
Powerplant .......................................................................
A
A
X
X
7.b. ......
Fuel System .....................................................................
A
A
X
X
7.c. .......
Electrical System .............................................................
A
A
X
X
7.d. ......
Hydraulic System .............................................................
A
A
X
X
7.e. ......
Environmental System(s) .................................................
A
A
X
X
7.f. .......
Fire Detection and Extinguisher Systems .......................
A
A
X
X
7.g. ......
Navigation and Aviation Systems ....................................
A
A
X
X
7.h. ......
Automatic Flight Control System, Electronic Flight Instrument System, and Related Subsystems.
A
A
X
X
7.i. ........
Flight Control Systems ....................................................
A
A
X
X
7.j. ........
Anti-ice and Deice Systems ............................................
A
A
X
X
7.k. .......
Aircraft and Personal Emergency Equipment .................
A
A
X
X
7.l. ........
Special Missions tasks (e.g., Night Vision goggles, Forward Looking Infrared System, External Loads and as
listed on the SOQ.).
X
8. Emergency procedures (as applicable)
8.a. ......
Emergency Descent ........................................................
X
X
8.b. ......
Inflight Fire and Smoke Removal ....................................
X
X
8.c. .......
Emergency Evacuation ....................................................
X
X
8.d. ......
Ditching ............................................................................
X
8.e. ......
Autorotative Landing ........................................................
X
8.f. .......
Retreating blade stall recovery ........................................
X
8.g. ......
Mast bumping ..................................................................
X
8.h. ......
Loss of tail rotor effectiveness .........................................
X
X
9. Postflight Procedures
After-Landing Procedures ................................................
9.b. ......
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
9.a. ......
A
A
X
X
Parking and Securing
9.b.1. ...
Rotor brake operation ......................................................
A
A
X
X
9.b.2. ...
Abnormal/emergency procedures ....................................
A
A
X
X
Note: An ‘‘A’’ in the table indicates that the system, task, or procedure may be examined if the appropriate aircraft system or control is simulated in the FTD and is working properly.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00255
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26732
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D1C.—TABLE OF FTD SYSTEM TASKS
QPS requirements
Entry
No.
Information
Subjective requirements
In order to be qualified at the FTD qualification level indicated, the FTD
must be able to perform at least the tasks associate with that level of qualification.
FTD level
Notes
4
5
6
7
1. Instructor Operating Station (IOS)
1.a. ......
Power switch(es) ...........................................................................................
A
X
X
X
1.b. ......
Helicopter conditions .....................................................................................
A
A
X
X
e.g., GW, CG, Fuel loading, Systems, Ground. Crew.
1.c. .......
Airports/Heliports/Helicopter Landing Areas ..................................................
A
X
X
X
e.g., Selection, Surface,
Lighting controls.
1.d. ......
Environmental controls ..................................................................................
A
X
X
X
e.g., Temp and Wind.
1.e. ......
Helicopter system malfunctions (Insertion/deletion) ......................................
A
A
X
X
1.f. .......
Locks, Freezes, and Repositioning (as appropriate) ....................................
A
X
X
X
1.g. ......
Sound Controls. (On/off/adjustment) .............................................................
X
X
X
1.h. ......
Motion/Control Loading System, as appropriate. On/off/emergency stop ....
A
X
X
X
X
X
Presets,
2. Observer Seats/Stations
2.a. ......
Position/Adjustment/Positive restraint system ...............................................
A
Note: An ‘‘A’’ in the table indicates that the system, task, or procedure may be examined if the appropriate simulator system or control is in the
FTD and is working properly.
Attachment 2 to Appendix D to Part 60—
Flight Training Device (FTD) Objective Tests
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
1. Discussion
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
a. If relevant winds are present in the
objective data, the wind vector (magnitude
and direction) should be noted as part of the
data presentation, expressed in conventional
terminology, and related to the runway being
used for the test.
b. The format for numbering the objective
tests in Appendix C of this part, Attachment
2, Table C2A, and the objective tests in
Appendix D of this part, Attachment 2, Table
D2A, is identical. However, each test
required for FFSs is not necessarily required
for FTDs, and each test required for FTDs is
not necessarily required for FFSs. When a
test number (or series of numbers) is not
required, the term ‘‘Reserved’’ is used in the
table at that location. Following this
numbering format provides a degree of
commonality between the two tables and
substantially reduces the potential for
confusion when referring to objective test
numbers for either FFSs or FTDs.
c. A Level 4 FTD does not require objective
tests and is not addressed in the following
table.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
2. Test Requirements
a. The ground and flight tests required for
qualification are listed in Table D2A
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
Objective Evaluation Tests. Computer
generated FTD test results must be provided
for each test except where an alternate test
is specifically authorized by the NSPM. If a
flight condition or operating condition is
required for the test but does not apply to the
helicopter being simulated or to the
qualification level sought, it may be
disregarded (e.g., engine out climb capability
for a single-engine helicopter). Each test
result is compared against the validation data
described in § 60.13, and in Appendix B of
this part. The results must be produced on
an appropriate recording device acceptable to
the NSPM and must include FTD number,
date, time, conditions, tolerances, and
appropriate dependent variables portrayed in
comparison to the validation data. Time
histories are required unless otherwise
indicated in Table D2A. All results must be
labeled using the tolerances and units given.
b. Table D2A in this attachment sets out
the test results required, including the
parameters, tolerances, and flight conditions
for FTD validation. Tolerances are provided
for the listed tests because mathematical
modeling and acquisition and development
of reference data are often inexact. All
tolerances listed in the following tables are
applied to FTD performance. When two
tolerance values are given for a parameter,
the less restrictive may be used unless
otherwise indicated. In those cases where a
tolerance is expressed only as a percentage,
the tolerance percentage applies to the
maximum value of that parameter within its
normal operating range as measured from the
neutral or zero position unless otherwise
indicated.
c. Certain tests included in this attachment
must be supported with an SOC. In Table
PO 00000
Frm 00256
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
D2A, requirements for SOCs are indicated in
the ‘‘Test Details’’ column.
d. When operational or engineering
judgment is used in making assessments for
flight test data applications for FTD validity,
such judgment must not be limited to a single
parameter. For example, data that exhibit
rapid variations of the measured parameters
may require interpolations or a ‘‘best fit’’ data
section. All relevant parameters related to a
given maneuver or flight condition must be
provided to allow overall interpretation.
When it is difficult or impossible to match
FTD to helicopter data throughout a time
history, differences must be justified by
providing a comparison of other related
variables for the condition being assessed.
e. The FTD may not be programmed so that
the mathematical modeling is correct only at
the validation test points. Unless noted
otherwise, tests must represent helicopter
performance and handling qualities at
operating weights and centers of gravity (CG)
typical of normal operation. If a test is
supported by aircraft data at one extreme
weight or CG, another test supported by
aircraft data at mid-conditions or as close as
possible to the other extreme is necessary.
Certain tests that are relevant only at one
extreme CG or weight condition need not be
repeated at the other extreme. The results of
the tests for Level 6 are expected to be
indicative of the device’s performance and
handling qualities throughout all of the
following:
(1) The helicopter weight and CG envelope.
(2) The operational envelope.
(3) Varying atmospheric ambient and
environmental conditions—including the
extremes authorized for the respective
helicopter or set of helicopters.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
f. When comparing the parameters listed to
those of the helicopter, sufficient data must
also be provided to verify the correct flight
condition and helicopter configuration
changes. For example, to show that control
force is within the parameters for a static
stability test, data to show the correct
airspeed, power, thrust or torque, helicopter
configuration, altitude, and other appropriate
datum identification parameters must also be
given. If comparing short period dynamics,
normal acceleration may be used to establish
a match to the helicopter, but airspeed,
altitude, control input, helicopter
configuration, and other appropriate data
must also be given. If comparing landing gear
change dynamics, pitch, airspeed, and
altitude may be used to establish a match to
the helicopter, but landing gear position must
also be provided. All airspeed values must be
properly annotated (e.g., indicated versus
calibrated). In addition, the same variables
must be used for comparison (e.g., compare
inches to inches rather than inches to
centimeters).
g. The QTG provided by the sponsor must
clearly describe how the FTD will be set up
and operated for each test. Each FTD
subsystem may be tested independently, but
overall integrated testing of the FTD must be
accomplished to assure that the total FTD
system meets the prescribed standards. A
manual test procedure with explicit and
detailed steps for completing each test must
also be provided.
h. For previously qualified FTDs, the tests
and tolerances of this attachment may be
used in subsequent continuing qualification
evaluations for any given test if the sponsor
has submitted a proposed MQTG revision to
the NSPM and has received NSPM approval.
i. Tests of handling qualities must include
validation of augmentation devices. FTDs for
highly augmented helicopters will be
validated both in the unaugmented
configuration (or failure state with the
maximum permitted degradation in handling
qualities) and the augmented configuration.
Where various levels of handling qualities
result from failure states, validation of the
effect of the failure is necessary. For those
performance and static handling qualities
tests where the primary concern is control
position in the unaugmented configuration,
unaugmented data are not required if the
design of the system precludes any affect on
control position. In those instances where the
unaugmented helicopter response is
divergent and non-repeatable, it may not be
feasible to meet the specified tolerances.
Alternative requirements for testing will be
mutually agreed upon by the sponsor and the
NSPM on a case-by-case basis.
j. Some tests will not be required for
helicopters using helicopter hardware in the
FTD flight deck (e.g., ‘‘helicopter modular
controller’’). These exceptions are noted in
Section 2 ‘‘Handling Qualities’’ in Table D2A
of this attachment. However, in these cases,
the sponsor must provide a statement that the
26733
helicopter hardware meets the appropriate
manufacturer’s specifications and the
sponsor must have supporting information to
that fact available for NSPM review.
k. In cases where light-class helicopters are
being simulated, prior coordination with the
NSPM on acceptable weight ranges is
required. The terms ‘‘light,’’ ‘‘medium,’’ and
‘‘near maximum,’’ may not be appropriate for
the simulation of light-class helicopters.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
l. In those cases where the objective test
results authorize a ‘‘snapshot test’’ or a
‘‘series of snapshot test’’ results in lieu of a
time-history result, the sponsor or other data
provider must ensure that a steady state
condition exists at the instant of time
captured by the ‘‘snapshot.’’ The steady state
condition must exist from 4 seconds prior to,
through 1 second following, the instant of
time captured by the snap shot.
m. Refer to AC 120–27, Aircraft Weight and
Balance; and FAA–H–8083–1, Aircraft
Weight and Balance Handbook, for more
information.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
TABLE D2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS
QPS requirements
Information
Test
FTD level
Tolerances
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Notes
Title
5
Engine start and
acceleration
(transient).
Light Off Time—
±10% or ±1 sec.
Torque—±5%
Rotor Speed—
±3% Fuel Flow—
±10% Gas Generator Speed—±5%
Power Turbine
Speed—±5% Gas
Turbine Temp.—
±30°C.
Ground with the
Rotor Brake
Used and Not
Used.
Record each engine
start from the initiation
of the start sequence
to steady state idle
and from steady state
idle to operating RPM.
1.a.1.b. ...............
Steady State
Idle and Operating RPM
conditions.
Torque—±3% Rotor
Speed—±1.5%
Fuel Flow—±5%
Gas Generator
Speed—±2%
Power Turbine
Speed—±2% Turbine Gas Temp.—
±20°C.
Ground .............
Record both steady
state idle and operating RPM conditions.
May be a series of
snapshot tests.
X
X
X
Start Operations.
1.a.1.a. ...............
X
Engine Assessment.
1.a.1. ..................
7
Performance
1.a. .....................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1.
6
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00257
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
X
09MYR2
26734
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Test
FTD level
Tolerances
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Notes
Title
5
6
7
1.a.2. ..................
Power Turbine
Speed Trim.
±10% of total change
of power turbine
speed; or ±0.5%
change of rotor
speed.
Ground .............
Record engine response
to trim system actuation in both directions.
X
X
1.a.3. ..................
Engine and
Rotor Speed
Governing.
Torque—±5% Rotor
Speed—±1.5%.
Climb Descent
Record results using a
step input to the collective. May be conducted concurrently
with climb and descent performance
tests.
X
X
1.b. .....................
Reserved.
1.c. ......................
Takeoff.
1.c.1. ...................
All Engines .......
Airspeed—±3 kt, Altitude—±20 ft (6.1
m) Torque—±3%,
Rotor Speed—
±1.5%, Vertical
Velocity—±100
fpm (0.50 m/sec)
or 10%, Pitch Attitude—±1.5°, Bank
Attitude—±2°,
Heading—±2°,
Longitudinal Control Position—
±10%, Lateral
Control Position—
±10%, Directional
Control Position—
±10%, Collective
Control Position—
±10%.
Ground/Takeoff
and Initial
Segment of
Climb.
Record results of takeoff
flight path (running
takeoff and takeoff
from a hover). The criteria apply only to
those segments at airspeeds above effective translational lift.
Results must be recorded from the initiation of the takeoff to
at least 200 ft (61 m)
AGL.
X
1.c.2. through
1.c.3.
Reserved.
1.d. .....................
Hover.
Torque—±3%, Pitch
Attitude—±1.5°,
Bank Attitude—
±1.5°, Longitudinal
Control Position—
±5%, Lateral Control Position—±5%,
Directional Control
Position—±5%,
Collective Control
Position—±5%.
In Ground Effect
(IGE); and
Out of
Ground Effect
(OGE).
Record results for light
and heavy gross
weights. May be a series of snapshot tests.
X
Vertical Velocity—
±100 fpm (0.50 m/
sec) or ±10%, Directional Control
Position—±5%,
Collective Control
Position—±5%.
From OGE
Hover.
Record results for light
and heavy gross
weights. May be a series of snapshot tests.
X
Performance ....
1.e. .....................
Vertical Climb.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Performance ....
1.f. ......................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Level Flight.
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00258
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26735
TABLE D2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Test
FTD level
Tolerances
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Notes
Title
5
Performance
and Trimmed
Flight Control
Positions.
1.g. .....................
6
7
Torque—±3% Pitch
Attitude—±1.5°
Sideslip Angle—
±2° Longitudinal
Control Position—
±5% Lateral Control Position—±5%
Directional Control
Position—±5%
Collective Control
Position—±5%.
Cruise (Augmentation On
and Off).
Record results for two
gross weight and CG
combinations with
varying trim speeds
throughout the airspeed envelope. May
be a series of snapshot tests.
X
X
X
Vertical Velocity—
±100 fpm (61 m/
sec) or ±10% Pitch
Attitude—±1.5°
Sideslip Angle—
±2° Longitudinal
Control Position—
±5% Lateral Control Position—±5%
Directional Control
Position—±5%
Collective Control
Position—±5%.
All engines operating.
One engine inoperative.
Augmentation
System(s) On
and Off.
Record results for two
gross weight and CG
combinations. The
data presented must
be for normal climb
power conditions. May
be a series of snapshot tests.
X
X
X
Climb.
Performance
and Trimmed
Flight Control
Positions.
Descent.
1.h.1. ..................
Descent Performance and
Trimmed
Flight Control
Positions.
Torque—±3% Pitch
Attitude—±1.5°
Sideslip Angle—
±2° Longitudinal
Control Position—
±5% Lateral Control Position—±5%
Directional Control
Position—±5%
Collective Control
Position—±5%.
At or near 1,000
fpm (5 m/sec)
rate of descent (RoD)
at normal approach speed.
Augmentation
System(s) On
and Off.
Record results for two
gross weight and CG
combinations. May be
a series of snapshot
tests.
X
X
X
1.h.2. ..................
Autorotation
Performance
and Trimmed
Flight Control
Positions.
Pitch Attitude—±1.5°
Sideslip Angle—
±2° Longitudinal
Control Position—
±5% Lateral Control Position—±5%
Directional Control
Position—±5%
Collective Control
Position—±5%.
Steady descents. Augmentation
System(s) On
and Off.
Record results for two
gross weight conditions. Data must be
recorded for normal
operating RPM. (Rotor
speed tolerance applies only if collective
control position is full
down.) Data must be
recorded for speeds
from 50 kts, ±5 kts
through at least maximum glide distance
airspeed. May be a
series of snapshot
tests.
X
X
X
1.i. .......................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1.h. .....................
Autorotation.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00259
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
This test validates
performance at
speeds above
maximum endurance airspeed.
26736
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Test
FTD level
Tolerances
Entry No.
Test details
Notes
Title
5
Entry .................
1.j. .......................
All Engines .......
1.j.2. through
1.j.3.
Rotor Speed—±3%
Pitch Attitude ±2°
Roll Attitude—±3°
Yaw Attitude—±5°
Airspeed—±5 kts.
Vertical Velocity—
±200 fpm (1.00 m/
sec) or 10%.
Cruise; or Climb
Record results of a rapid
throttle reduction to
idle. If accomplished
in cruise, results must
be for the maximum
range airspeed. If accomplished in climb,
results must be for the
maximum rate of
climb airspeed at or
near maximum continuous power.
Airspeed—±3 kts, Altitude—±20 ft (6.1
m) Torque—±3%,
Rotor Speed—
±1.5%, Pitch Attitude—±1.5°, Bank
Attitude—±1.5°,
Heading—±2°,
Longitudinal Control Position—
±10%, Lateral
Control Position—
±10%, Directional
Control Position—
±10%, Collective
Control Position—
±10%.
Approach ..........
Record results of the
approach and landing
profile (running landing or approach to a
hover). The criteria
apply only to those
segments at airspeeds above effective translational lift.
Record the results
from 200 ft AGL (61
m) to the landing or to
where the hover is established prior to landing.
Reserved.
6
7
X
X
Landing.
1.j.1. ....................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Flight conditions
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00260
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
X
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26737
TABLE D2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Test
FTD level
Tolerances
Entry No.
Test details
Notes
Title
5
1.j.4. ....................
Autorotational
Landing.
2.
Control System
Mechanical
Characteristics.
2.a.1. ..................
Cyclic ...............
2.a.2. ..................
2.a.3. ..................
7
Contact the NSPM
for clarification of
any issue regarding helicopters with
reversible controls.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Landing ............
Record the results of an
autorotational deceleration and landing
from a stabilized
autorotational descent, to touch down.
Breakout—±0.25 lbs
(0.112 daN) or
25%. Force—±1.0
lb (0.224 daN) or
10%.
Ground; Static
conditions.
Trim On and
Off. Friction
Off. Augmentation On
and Off.
Record results for an
uninterrupted control
sweep to the stops.
(This test does not
apply if aircraft hardware modular controllers are used.).
X
X
X
Collective and
Pedals.
Breakout—±0.5 lb
(0.224 daN) or
25%. Force—±1.0
lb (0.224 daN) or
10%.
Ground; Static
conditions.
Trim On and
Off. Friction
Off. Augmentation On
and Off.
Record results for an
uninterrupted control
sweep to the stops.
X
X
X
Brake Pedal
Force vs. Position.
±5 lbs (2.224 daN) or
10%.
Ground; Static
conditions.
........................................
X
X
X
23:54 May 08, 2008
Torque—±3%, Rotor
Speed—±3%,
Vertical Velocity—
±100 fpm (0.50 m/
sec) or 10%, Pitch
Attitude—±2°,
Bank Attitude—
±2°, Heading—±5°,
Longitudinal Control Position—
±10%, Lateral
Control Position—
±10%, Directional
Control Position—
±10%, Collective
Control Position—
±10%.
6
Handling Qualities
2.a. .....................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Flight conditions
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00261
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
X
09MYR2
If flight test data containing all required
parameters for a
complete power-off
landing is not
available from the
aircraft manufacturer for this test,
and other qualified
flight test personnel are not
available to acquire this data, the
sponsor must coordinate with the
NSPM to determine if it would be
appropriate to accept alternative
testing means. Alternative approaches to this
data acquisition
that may be acceptable are: (1) A
simulated
autorotational flare
and reduction of
rate of descent
(ROD) at altitude;
or (2) a power-on
termination following an
autorotational approach and flare.
26738
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Test
FTD level
Tolerances
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Notes
Title
5
6
7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Trim System
Rate (all applicable systems).
Rate—±10% .............
Ground; Static
conditions.
Trim On. Friction Off.
The tolerance applies to
the recorded value of
the trim rate.
2.a.5. ..................
Control Dynamics (all axes).
±10% of time for first
zero crossing and
±10 (N+1)% of period thereafter.
±10% of amplitude
of first overshoot.
±20% of amplitude
of 2nd and subsequent overshoots
greater than 5% of
initial displacement. ±1 overshoot.
Hover/Cruise
Trim On Friction Off.
Results must be recorded for a normal
control displacement
in both directions in
each axis, using 25%
to 50% of full throw.
2.a.6. ..................
Freeplay ...........
±0.10 in. (±2.5 mm)
Ground; Static
conditions.
Record and compare results for all controls.
2.b. .....................
Low Airspeed Handling Qualities.
2.b.1. ..................
Trimmed Flight
Control Positions.
Torque ±3% Pitch
Attitude ±1.5°
Bank Attitude ±2°
Longitudinal Control Position ±5%
Lateral Control Position ±5% Directional Control Position ±5% Collective
Control Position
±5%.
Translational
Flight IGE—
Sideward,
rearward, and
forward flight.
Augmentation
On and Off.
Record results for several airspeed increments to the
translational airspeed
limits and for 45 kts.
forward airspeed. May
be a series of snapshot tests.
X
2.b.2. ..................
Critical Azimuth
Torque ±3% Pitch
Attitude ±1.5°,
Bank Attitude ±2°,
Longitudinal Control Position ±5%,
Lateral Control Position ±5%, Directional Control Position ±5%, Collective Control Position ±5%.
Stationary
Hover. Augmentation On
and Off.
Record results for three
relative wind directions (including the
most critical case) in
the critical quadrant.
May be a series of
snapshot tests.
X
2.b.3. ..................
Control Response.
2.b.3.a. ...............
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.a.4. ..................
Longitudinal ......
Pitch Rate—±10% or
±2°/sec. Pitch Attitude Change—
±10% or 1.5°.
Hover. Augmentation On
and Off.
Record results for a step
control input. The Offaxis response must
show correct trend for
unaugmented cases.
This test must be conducted in a hover, in
ground effect, without
entering translational
flight.
X
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00262
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
X
09MYR2
Control Dynamics for
irreversible control
systems may be
evaluated in a
ground/static condition. Refer to
paragraph 3 of this
attachment for additional information. ‘‘N’’ is the sequential period of
a full cycle of oscillation.
This is a ‘‘short time’’
test.
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26739
TABLE D2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Test
FTD level
Tolerances
Flight conditions
Test details
Notes
Title
2.b.3.b. ...............
Lateral ..............
Roll Rate—±10% or
±3°/sec. Roll Attitude Change—
±10% or ±3°.
Hover Augmentation On
and Off.
Record results for a step
control input. The Offaxis response must
show correct trend for
unaugmented cases.
X
This is a ‘‘short time’’
test conducted in a
hover, in ground
effect, without entering translational
flight, to provide
better visual reference.
2.b.3.c. ................
Directional ........
Yaw Rate—±10% or
±2°/sec. Heading
Change—±10% or
±2°.
Hover Augmentation On
and Off.
Record results for a step
control input. The Offaxis response must
show correct trend for
unaugmented cases.
This test must be conducted in a hover, in
ground effect, without
entering translational
flight.
X
This is a ‘‘short time’’
test.
2.b.3.d. ...............
Vertical .............
Normal Acceleration
±0.1g.
Hover Augmentation On
and Off.
Record results for a step
control input. The Offaxis response must
show correct trend for
unaugmented cases.
X
2.c. ......................
Longitudinal Handling Qualities.
2.c.1. ...................
Control Response.
Pitch Rate—±10% or
±2°/sec. Pitch Attitude Change—
±10% or ±1.5°.
Cruise Augmentation On
and Off.
Results must be recorded for two cruise
airspeeds to include
minimum power required speed. Record
data for a step control
input. The Off-axis response must show
correct trend for unaugmented cases.
X
X
X
2.c.2. ...................
Static Stability ..
Longitudinal Control
Position: ±10% of
change from trim
or ±0.25 in. (6.3
mm) or Longitudinal Control
Force: ±0.5 lb.
(0.223 daN) or
±10%.
Cruise or Climb.
Autorotation.
Augmentation
On and Off.
Record results for a
minimum of two
speeds on each side
of the trim speed. May
be a series of snapshot tests.
X
X
X
2.c.3. ...................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
Dynamic Stability.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
5
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00263
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
6
7
26740
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Test
FTD level
Tolerances
Flight conditions
Test details
Notes
Title
2.c.3.a. ................
Long Term Response.
±10% of calculated
period. ±10% of
time to 1⁄2 or double amplitude, or
±0.02 of damping
ratio. For non-periodic responses,
the time history
must be matched
within ±3° pitch;
and ±5 kts airspeed over a 20
sec period following release of
the controls.
Cruise Augmentation On
and Off.
Record results for three
full cycles (6 overshoots after input
completed) or that
sufficient to determine
time to 1⁄2 or double
amplitude, whichever
is less. For non-periodic responses, the
test may be terminated prior to 20 sec
if the test pilot determines that the results
are becoming uncontrollably divergent.
Displace the cyclic for
one second or less to
excite the test. The
result will be either
convergent or divergent and must be recorded. If this method
fails to excite the test,
displace the cyclic to
the predetermined
maximum desired
pitch attitude and return to the original position. If this method is
used, record the results.
2.c.3.b. ................
Short Term Response.
±1.5° Pitch or ±2°/
sec. Pitch Rate.
±0.1 g Normal Acceleration.
Cruise or Climb.
Augmentation
On and Off.
2.c.4. ...................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
Maneuvering
Stability.
Longitudinal Control
Position—±10% of
change from trim
or ±0.25 in. (6.3
mm) or Longitudinal Control
Forces—±0.5 lb.
(0.223 daN) or
±10%.
Cruise or Climb.
Augmentation
On and Off.
2.d. .....................
Lateral and Directional Handling Qualities.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
5
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00264
Fmt 4701
6
7
X
X
X
The response for
certain helicopters
may be
unrepeatable
throughout the
stated time. In
these cases, the
test should show
at least that a divergence is identifiable. For example: Displacing the
cyclic for a given
time normally excites this test or
until a given pitch
attitude is
achieved and then
return the cyclic to
the original position. For non-periodic responses, results should show
the same convergent or divergent
character as the
flight test data.
Record results for at
least two airspeeds.
X
X
A control doublet inserted at the natural frequency of
the aircraft normally excites this
test. However,
while input
doublets are preferred over pulse
inputs for Augmentation-Off
tests, for Augmentation-On
cases, when the
short term response exhibits
1st-order or deadbeat characteristics, longitudinal
pulse inputs may
produce a more
coherent response.
Record results for at
least two airspeeds at
30°–45° bank angle.
The force may be
shown as a cross plot
for irreversible systems. May be a series
of snapshot tests.
X
X
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26741
TABLE D2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Test
FTD level
Tolerances
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Title
Notes
5
6
7
Control Response.
2.d.1.a. ...............
Lateral ..............
Roll Rate—±10% or
±3°/sec. Roll Attitude Change—
±10% or ±3°.
Cruise Augmentation On
and Offd.
Record results for at
least two airspeeds,
including the speed at
or near the minimum
power required airspeed. Record results
for a step control
input. The Off-axis response must show
correct trend for unaugmented cases.
X
X
X
2.d.1.b. ...............
Directional ........
Yaw Rate—±10% or
±2°/sec. Yaw Attitude Change—
±10% or ±2°.
Cruise Augmentation On
and Off.
Record data for at least
two Airspeeds, including the speed at or
near the minimum
power required airspeed. Record results
for a step control
input. The Off-axis response must show
correct trend for unaugmented cases.
X
X
X
2.d.2. ..................
Directional Static Stability.
Lateral Control Position—±10% of
change from trim
or ±0.25 in. (6.3
mm) or Lateral
Control Force—
±0.5 lb. (0.223
daN) or 10%. Roll
Attitude—±1.5 Directional Control
Position—±10% of
change from trim
or ±0.25 in. (6.3
mm) or Directional
Control Force—±1
lb. (0.448 daN) or
10%. Longitudinal
Control Position—
±10% of change
from trim or ±0.25
in. (6.3 mm).
Vertical Velocity—
±100 fpm (0.50m/
sec) or 10%.
Cruise; or Climb
(may use Descent instead
of Climb if desired) Augmentation On
and Off.
Record results for at
least two sideslip angles on either side of
the trim point. The
force may be shown
as a cross plot for irreversible systems.
May be a series of
snapshot tests.
X
X
X
2.d.3. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2.d.1. ..................
Dynamic Lateral and Directional Stability.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00265
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
This is a steady
heading sideslip
test at a fixed collective position.
26742
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Test
FTD level
Tolerances
Flight conditions
Entry No.
Lateral-Directional Oscillations.
±0.5 sec. or ±10% of
period. ±10% of
time to 1⁄2 or double amplitude or
±0.02 of damping
ratio. ±20% or ±1
sec of time difference between
peaks of bank and
sideslip. For nonperiodic responses, the time
history must be
matched within
±10 knots Airspeed; ±5°/s Roll
Rate or ±5° Roll
Attitude; ±4°/s Yaw
Rate or ±4° Yaw
Angle over a 20
sec period roll
angle following release of the controls.
Cruise or Climb
Augmentation
On and Off.
2.d.3.b. ...............
Spiral Stability ..
±2° or ±10% roll
angle.
2.d.3.c. ................
Adverse/
Correct Trend, ±2°
Proverse Yaw.
transient sideslip
angle.
3.
Notes
Title
2.d.3.a. ...............
Test details
5
6
7
Record results for at
least two airspeeds.
The test must be initiated with a cyclic or a
pedal doublet input.
Record results for six
full cycles (12 overshoots after input
completed) or that
sufficient to determine
time to 1⁄2 or double
amplitude, whichever
is less. The test may
be terminated prior to
20 sec if the test pilot
determines that the
results are becoming
uncontrollably divergent.
X
X
X
Cruise or Climb.
Augmentation
On and Off.
Record the results of a
release from pedal
only or cyclic only
turns for 20 sec. Results must be recorded from turns in
both directions. Terminate check at zero roll
angle or when the test
pilot determines that
the attitude is becoming uncontrollably divergent.
X
X
X
Cruise or Climb.
Augmentation
On and Off.
Record the time history
of initial entry into cyclic only turns, using
only a moderate rate
for cyclic input. Results must be recorded for turns in
both directions.
X
X
X
Reserved
4.
Visual System
4.a. .....................
Visual System Response Time: (Choose either test 4.a.1. or 4.a.2. to satisfy test 4.a., Visual System Response Time Test. This test is also sufficient for flight deck instrument response timing.)
....
....
4.a.1. ..................
Latency.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
150 ms (or less)
after helicopter response.
4.a.2. ..................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Takeoff, climb,
and descent.
One test is required in
each axis (pitch, roll
and yaw) for each of
the three conditions
(take-off, cruise, and
approach or landing).
X
Transport Delay.
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00266
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26743
TABLE D2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Test
FTD level
Tolerances
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Test details
Notes
Title
5
6
7
150 ms (or less)
after controller
movement.
Continuous visual field-ofview.
4.b.3. ..................
Surface contrast
ratio.
Minimum continuous
field-of-view providing 146° horizontal and 36°
vertical field-ofview for each pilot
simultaneously and
any geometric
error between the
Image Generator
eye point and the
pilot eye point is 8°
or less.
N/A ...................
An SOC is required and
must explain the geometry of the installation. Horizontal fieldof-view must not be
less than a total of
146° (including not
less than 73° measured either side of the
center of the design
eye point). Additional
horizontal field-of-view
capability may be
added at the sponsor’s discretion provided the minimum
field-of-view is retained. Vertical fieldof-view: Not less than
a total of 36° measured from the pilot’s
and co-pilot’s eye
point.
X
Horizontal field-ofview is centered
on the zero degree
azimuth line relative to the aircraft
fuselage.
Not less than 5:1 .....
N/A ...................
The ratio is calculated
by dividing the brightness level of the center, bright square (providing at least 2 footlamberts or 7 cd/m2)
by the brightness level
of any adjacent dark
square.
X
Measurements may
be made using a
1° spot photometer
and a raster drawn
test pattern filling
the entire visual
scene (all channels) with a test
pattern of black
and white squares,
5 per square, with
a white square in
the center of each
channel. During
contrast ratio testing, simulator aftcab and flight deck
ambient light levels
should be zero.
Reserved.
4.c. ......................
X
Reserved.
4.b.2. ..................
A separate test is required in each axis
(pitch, roll, and yaw).
Field-of-view.
4.b.1. ..................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
4.b. .....................
N/A ...................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00267
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26744
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Test
FTD level
Tolerances
Flight conditions
Test details
Notes
Title
4.d. .....................
Highlight brightness.
Not less than three
(3) foot-lamberts
(10 cd/m2).
N/A ...................
Measure the brightness
of the center white
square while superimposing a highlight
on that white square.
The use of calligraphic capabilities to
enhance the raster
brightness is acceptable, but measuring
light points is not acceptable.
X
Measurements may
be made using a
1° spot photometer
and a raster drawn
test pattern filling
the entire visual
scene (all channels) with a test
pattern of black
and white squares,
5 per square, with
a white square in
the center of each
channel.
4.e. .....................
Surface resolution.
Not greater than two
(2) arc minutes.
N/A ...................
An SOC is required and
must include the relevant calculations.
X
When the eye is positioned on a 3°
glide slope at the
slant range distances indicated
with white runway
markings on a
black runway surface, the eye will
subtend two (2)
arc minutes: (1) A
slant range of
6,876 ft with
stripes 150 ft long
and 16 ft wide,
spaced 4 ft apart.
(2) For Configuration A; a slant
range of 5,157 feet
with stripes 150 ft
long and 12 ft
wide, spaced 3 ft
apart. (3) For Configuration B; a
slant range of
9,884 feet, with
stripes 150 ft long
and 5.75 ft wide,
spaced 5.75 ft
apart.
4.f. ......................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
Light point size
Not greater than five
(5) arc-minutes.
N/A ...................
An SOC is required and
must include the relevant calculations.
X
Light point size may
be measured using
a test pattern consisting of a centrally located single
row of light points
reduced in length
until modulation is
just discernible in
each visual channel. A row of 48
lights will form a 4°
angle or less.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
5
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00268
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
6
7
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26745
TABLE D2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Test
FTD level
Tolerances
Light point contrast ratio.
4.g.1. ..................
..........................
4.h. .....................
Notes
Reserved.
4.g.2. ..................
Test details
Title
4.g. .....................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
Flight conditions
Visual ground segment.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
5
..................................
..........................
N/A ...................
An SOC is required and
must include the relevant calculations.
7
........................................
Not less than 25:1 ...
6
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00269
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
A 1° spot photometer
may be used to
measure a square
of at least 1° filled
with light points
(where light point
modulation is just
discernible) and
compare the results to the measured adjacent
background. During contrast ratio
testing, simulator
aft-cab and flight
deck ambient light
levels should be
zero.
X
09MYR2
26746
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D2A.—FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD) OBJECTIVE TESTS—Continued
QPS requirements
Information
Test
FTD level
Tolerances
Entry No.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Test details
Notes
Title
5
The visible segment
in the simulator
must be within
20% of the segment computed to
be visible from the
helicopter flight
deck. The tolerance(s) may be
applied at either
end or at both
ends of the displayed segment.
However, lights
and ground objects
computed to be
visible from the
helicopter flight
deck at the near
end of the visible
segment must be
visible in the simulator.
5.
Flight conditions
Landing configuration,
trimmed for
appropriate
airspeed, at
100 ft (30m)
above the
touchdown
zone, on glide
slope with an
RVR value
set at 1,200 ft
(350m).
The QTG must contain
relevant calculations
and a drawing showing the data used to
establish the helicopter location and
the segment of the
ground that is visible
considering design
eyepoint, helicopter
attitude, flight deck
cut-off angle, and a
visibility of 1200 ft
(350 m) RVR. Simulator performance
must be measured
against the QTG calculations. The data
submitted must include at least the following: (1) Static helicopter dimensions as
follows: (i) Horizontal
and vertical distance
from main landing
gear (MLG) to
glideslope reception
antenna. (ii) Horizontal and vertical distance from MLG to pilot’s eyepoint. (iii)
Static flight deck cutoff angle. (2) Approach data as follows: (i) Identification
of runway. (ii) Horizontal distance from
runway threshold to
glideslope intercept
with runway. (iii)
Glideslope angle. (iv)
Helicopter pitch angle
on approach. (3) Helicopter data for manual testing: (i) Gross
weight. (ii) Helicopter
configuration. (iii) Approach airspeed. If
non-homogenous fog
is used to obscure
visibility, the vertical
variation in horizontal
visibility must be described and be included in the slant
range visibility calculation used in the computations.
Reserved
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00270
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
6
7
X
Pre-position for this
test is encouraged,
but may be
achieved via manual or autopilot
control to the desired position.
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
3. Control Dynamics
a. The characteristics of a helicopter flight
control system have a major effect on the
handling qualities. A significant
consideration in pilot acceptability of a
helicopter is the ‘‘feel’’ provided through the
flight deck controls. Considerable effort is
expended on helicopter feel system design in
order to deliver a system with which pilots
will be comfortable and consider the
helicopter desirable to fly. In order for an
FTD to be representative, it too must present
the pilot with the proper feel; that of the
respective helicopter. Compliance with this
requirement is determined by comparing a
recording of the control feel dynamics of the
FFS to actual helicopter measurements in the
hover and cruise configurations.
(1) Recordings such as free response to an
impulse or step function are classically used
to estimate the dynamic properties of
electromechanical systems. It is only possible
to estimate the dynamic properties as a result
of only being able to estimate true inputs and
responses. Therefore, it is imperative that the
best possible data be collected since close
matching of the FTD control loading system
to the helicopter systems is essential. Control
feel dynamic tests are described in the Table
of Objective Tests in this appendix. Where
accomplished, the free response is measured
after a step or pulse input is used to excite
the system.
(2) For initial and upgrade evaluations, it
is required that control dynamic
characteristics be measured at and recorded
directly from the flight deck controls. This
procedure is usually accomplished by
measuring the free response of the controls
using a step or pulse input to excite the
system. The procedure must be accomplished
in hover, climb, cruise, and autorotation. For
helicopters with irreversible control systems,
measurements may be obtained on the
ground. The procedure should be
accomplished in the hover and cruise flight
conditions and configurations. Proper pitotstatic inputs (if appropriate) must be
provided to represent airspeeds typical of
those encountered in flight.
(3) It may be shown that for some
helicopters, climb, cruise, and autorotation
have like effects. Thus, some tests for one
may suffice for some tests for another. If
either or both considerations apply,
engineering validation or helicopter
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
manufacturer rationale must be submitted as
justification for ground tests or for
eliminating a configuration. For FTDs
requiring static and dynamic tests at the
controls, special test fixtures will not be
required during initial and upgrade
evaluations if the sponsor’s QTG shows both
test fixture results and the results of an
alternative approach, such as computer plots
which were produced concurrently and show
satisfactory agreement. Repeat of the
alternative method during the initial
evaluation satisfies this test requirement.
b. Control Dynamics Evaluations. The
dynamic properties of control systems are
often stated in terms of frequency, damping,
and a number of other classical
measurements which can be found in texts
on control systems. In order to establish a
consistent means of validating test results for
FTD control loading, criteria are needed that
will clearly define the interpretation of the
measurements and the tolerances to be
applied. Criteria are needed for both the
underdamped system and the overdamped
system, including the critically damped case.
In the case of an underdamped system with
very light damping, the system may be
quantified in terms of frequency and
damping. In critically damped or
overdamped systems, the frequency and
damping is not readily measured from a
response time history. Therefore, some other
measurement must be used.
(1) Tests to verify that control feel
dynamics represent the helicopter must show
that the dynamic damping cycles (free
response of the control) match that of the
helicopter within specified tolerances. The
method of evaluating the response and the
tolerance to be applied are described below
for the underdamped and critically damped
cases.
(a) Underdamped Response. Two
measurements are required for the period, the
time to first zero crossing (in case a rate limit
is present) and the subsequent frequency of
oscillation. It is necessary to measure cycles
on an individual basis in case there are
nonuniform periods in the response. Each
period will be independently compared to
the respective period of the helicopter
control system and, consequently, will enjoy
the full tolerance specified for that period.
(b) The damping tolerance will be applied
to overshoots on an individual basis. Care
must be taken when applying the tolerance
to small overshoots since the significance of
such overshoots becomes questionable. Only
PO 00000
Frm 00271
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26747
those overshoots larger than 5 percent of the
total initial displacement will be considered
significant. The residual band, labeled T(Ad)
on Figure 1 of this attachment is ±5 percent
of the initial displacement amplitude, Ad,
from the steady state value of the oscillation.
Oscillations within the residual band are
considered insignificant. When comparing
simulator data to helicopter data, the process
would begin by overlaying or aligning the
simulator and helicopter steady state values
and then comparing amplitudes of oscillation
peaks, the time of the first zero crossing, and
individual periods of oscillation. To be
satisfactory, the simulator must show the
same number of significant overshoots to
within one when compared against the
helicopter data. The procedure for evaluating
the response is illustrated in Figure 1 of this
attachment.
(c) Critically Damped and Overdamped
Response. Due to the nature of critically
damped responses (no overshoots), the time
to reach 90 percent of the steady state
(neutral point) value must be the same as the
helicopter within ±10 percent. The simulator
response must be critically damped also.
Figure 2 of this attachment illustrates the
procedure.
(d) Special considerations. Control systems
that exhibit characteristics other than
classical overdamped or underdamped
responses should meet specified tolerances.
In addition, special consideration should be
given to ensure that significant trends are
maintained.
(2) Tolerances.
(a) The following summarizes the
tolerances, ‘‘T’’ for underdamped systems,
and ‘‘n’’ is the sequential period of a full
cycle of oscillation. See Figure D2A of this
attachment for an illustration of the
referenced measurements.
T(P0) ±10% of P0
T(P1) ±20% of P1
T(P2) ±30% of P2
T(Pn) ±10(n+1)% of Pn
T(An) ±10% of A1
T(Ad) ±5% of Ad = residual band
Significant overshoots First overshoot and ±1
subsequent overshoots
(b) The following tolerance applies to
critically damped and overdamped systems
only. See Figure D2B for an illustration of the
reference measurements:
T(P0) ±10% of P0
BILLING CODE 4910–13–P
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
BILLING CODE 4910–13–C
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00272
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.053
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26748
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
c. Alternative method for control dynamics
evaluation.
(1) An alternative means for validating
control dynamics for aircraft with
hydraulically powered flight controls and
artificial feel systems is by the measurement
of control force and rate of movement. For
each axis of pitch, roll, and yaw, the control
must be forced to its maximum extreme
position for the following distinct rates.
These tests are conducted under normal
flight and ground conditions.
(a) Static test—Slowly move the control so
that a full sweep is achieved within 95–105
seconds. A full sweep is defined as
movement of the controller from neutral to
the stop, usually aft or right stop, then to the
opposite stop, then to the neutral position.
(b) Slow dynamic test—Achieve a full
sweep within 8–12 seconds.
(c) Fast dynamic test—Achieve a full
sweep within 3–5 seconds.
Note: Dynamic sweeps may be limited to
forces not exceeding 100 lbs. (44.5 daN).
(d) Tolerances.
(i) Static test; see Table D2A, Flight
Training Device (FTD) Objective Tests,
Entries 2.a.1., 2.a.2., and 2.a.3.
(ii) Dynamic test—± 2 lbs (0.9 daN) or ±
10% on dynamic increment above static test.
End QPS Requirement
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
d. The FAA is open to alternative means
that are justified and appropriate to the
application. For example, the method
described here may not apply to all
manufacturers’ systems and certainly not to
aircraft with reversible control systems. Each
case is considered on its own merit on an ad
hoc basis. If the FAA finds that alternative
methods do not result in satisfactory
performance, more conventionally accepted
methods will have to be used.
4. For Additional Information on the
Following Topics, Please Refer to Appendix
C of This Part, Attachment 2, and the
Indicated Paragraph Within That
Attachment
• Additional Information About Flight
Simulator Qualification for New or
Derivative Helicopters, paragraph 8.
• Engineering Simulator Validation Data,
paragraph 9.
• Validation Test Tolerances, paragraph
11.
• Validation Data Road Map, paragraph 12.
• Acceptance Guidelines for Alternative
Avionics, paragraph 13.
• Transport Delay Testing, paragraph 15.
• Continuing Qualification Evaluation
Validation Data Presentation, paragraph 16.
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
Attachment 3 to Appendix D to Part 60—
FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICE (FTD)
SUBJECTIVE EVALUATION
lllllllllllllllllllll
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
Begin QPS Requirements
1. Requirements
a. Except for special use airport models, all
airport models required by this part must be
representations of real-world, operational
airports or representations of fictional
airports and must meet the requirements set
out in Tables D3B or D3C of this attachment,
as appropriate.
b. If fictional airports are used, the sponsor
must ensure that navigational aids and all
appropriate maps, charts, and other
navigational reference material for the
fictional airports (and surrounding areas as
necessary) are compatible, complete, and
accurate with respect to the visual
presentation and the airport model of this
fictional airport. An SOC must be submitted
that addresses navigation aid installation and
performance and other criteria (including
obstruction clearance protection) for all
instrument approaches to the fictional
airports that are available in the simulator.
The SOC must reference and account for
information in the terminal instrument
procedures manual and the construction and
availability of the required maps, charts, and
other navigational material. This material
must be clearly marked ‘‘for training
purposes only.’’
c. When the simulator is being used by an
instructor or evaluator for purposes of
training, checking, or testing under this
chapter, only airport models classified as
Class I, Class II, or Class III may be used by
the instructor or evaluator. Detailed
descriptions/definitions of these
classifications are found in Appendix F of
this part.
d. When a person sponsors an FTD
maintained by a person other than a U.S.
certificate holder, the sponsor is accountable
for that FTD originally meeting, and
continuing to meet, the criteria under which
it was originally qualified and the
appropriate Part 60 criteria, including the
visual scenes and airport models that may be
used by instructors or evaluators for purposes
of training, checking, or testing under this
chapter.
e. Neither Class II nor Class III airport
visual models are required to appear on the
SOQ, and the method used for keeping
instructors and evaluators apprised of the
airport models that meet Class II or Class III
requirements on any given simulator is at the
option of the sponsor, but the method used
must be available for review by the TPAA.
f. When an airport model represents a real
world airport and a permanent change is
made to that real world airport (e.g., a new
runway, an extended taxiway, a new lighting
system, a runway closure) without a written
extension grant from the NSPM (described in
paragraph 1.g., of this section), an update to
that airport model must be made in
accordance with the following time limits:
(1) For a new airport runway, a runway
extension, a new airport taxiway, a taxiway
extension, or a runway/taxiway closure—
within 90 days of the opening for use of the
new airport runway, runway extension, new
airport taxiway, or taxiway extension; or
within 90 days of the closure of the runway
or taxiway.
PO 00000
Frm 00273
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26749
(2) For a new or modified approach light
system—within 45 days of the activation of
the new or modified approach light system.
(3) For other facility or structural changes
on the airport (e.g., new terminal, relocation
of Air Traffic Control Tower)—within 180
days of the opening of the new or changed
facility or structure.
g. If a sponsor desires an extension to the
time limit for an update to a visual scene or
airport model or has an objection to what
must be updated in the specific airport model
requirement, the sponsor must provide a
written extension request to the NPSM
stating the reason for the update delay and
a proposed completion date or provide an
explanation for the objection, explaining why
the identified airport change will not have an
impact on flight training, testing, or checking.
A copy of this request or objection must also
be sent to the POI/TCPM. The NSPM will
send the official response to the sponsor and
a copy to the POI/TCPM; however, if there
is an objection, after consultation with the
appropriate POI/TCPM regarding the
training, testing, or checking impact, the
NSPM will send the official response to the
sponsor and a copy to the POI/TCPM.
h. Examples of situations that may warrant
Class_III model designation by the TPAA
include the following:
(a) Training, testing, or checking on very
low visibility operations, including SMGCS
operations.
(b) Instrument operations training
(including instrument takeoff, departure,
arrival, approach, and missed approach
training, testing, or checking) using—
(i) A specific model that has been
geographically ‘‘moved’’ to a different
location and aligned with an instrument
procedure for another airport.
(ii) A model that does not match changes
made at the real-world airport (or landing
area for helicopters) being modeled.
(iii) A model generated with an ‘‘off-board’’
or an ‘‘on-board’’ model development tool
(by providing proper latitude/longitude
reference; correct runway or landing area
orientation, length, width, marking, and
lighting information; and appropriate
adjacent taxiway location) to generate a
facsimile of a real world airport or landing
area.
These airport models may be accepted by
the TPAA without individual observation
provided the sponsor provides the TPAA
with an acceptable description of the process
for determining the acceptability of a specific
airport model, outlines the conditions under
which such an airport model may be used,
and adequately describes what restrictions
will be applied to each resulting airport or
landing area model.
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
2. Discussion
a. The subjective tests and the examination
of functions provide a basis for evaluating the
capability of the FTD to perform over a
typical utilization period; determining that
the FTD satisfactorily meets the appropriate
training/testing/checking objectives and
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26750
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
competently simulates each required
maneuver, procedure, or task; and verifying
correct operation of the FTD controls,
instruments, and systems. The items in the
list of operations tasks are for FTD evaluation
purposes only. They must not be used to
limit or exceed the authorizations for use of
a given level of FTD as found in the Practical
Test Standards or as approved by the TPAA.
All items in the following paragraphs are
subject to an examination of function.
b. The List of Operations Tasks in Table
D3A addressing pilot functions and
maneuvers is divided by flight phases. All
simulated helicopter systems functions will
be assessed for normal and, where
appropriate, alternate operations. Normal,
abnormal, and emergency operations
associated with a flight phase will be
assessed during the evaluation of maneuvers
or events within that flight phase.
c. Systems to be evaluated are listed
separately under ‘‘Any Flight Phase’’ to
ensure appropriate attention to systems
checks. Operational navigation systems
(including inertial navigation systems, global
positioning systems, or other long-range
systems) and the associated electronic
display systems will be evaluated if installed.
The NSP pilot will include in his report to
the TPAA, the effect of the system operation
and any system limitation.
d. At the request of the TPAA, the NSP
Pilot may assess the FTD for a special aspect
of a sponsor’s training program during the
functions and subjective portion of an
evaluation. Such an assessment may include
a portion of a specific operation (e.g., a Line
Oriented Flight Training (LOFT) scenario) or
special emphasis items in the sponsor’s
training program. Unless directly related to a
requirement for the qualification level, the
results of such an evaluation would not
necessarily affect the qualification of the
FTD.
e. The FAA intends to allow the use of
Class III airport models on a limited basis
when the sponsor provides the TPAA (or
other regulatory authority) an appropriate
analysis of the skills, knowledge, and
abilities (SKAs) necessary for competent
performance of the tasks in which this
particular media element is used. The
analysis should describe the ability of the
FTD/visual media to provide an adequate
environment in which the required SKAs are
satisfactorily performed and learned. The
analysis should also include the specific
media element, such as the visual scene or
airport model. Additional sources of
information on the conduct of task and
capability analysis may be found on the
FAA’s Advanced Qualification Program
(AQP) Web site at: https://www.faa.gov/
education_research/training/aqp.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
TABLE D3A.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 7 FTD
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
Tasks in this table are subject to evaluation if appropriate for the helicopter simulated as indicated in the SOQ Configuration List or a Level 7
FTD. Items not installed, not functional on the FTD, and not appearing on the SOQ Configuration List, are not required to be listed as exceptions on the SOQ.
1. Preflight Procedures
Preflight Inspection (Flight Deck Only) switches, indicators, systems, and equipment.
1.b. ................
APU/Engine start and run-up.
1.b.1. .............
Normal start procedures.
1.b.2. .............
Alternate start procedures.
1.b.3. .............
Abnormal starts and shutdowns (hot start, hung start).
1.b.4. .............
Rotor engagement.
1.b.5. .............
System checks.
1.c. ................
Taxiing—Ground.
1.c.1. .............
Power required to taxi.
1.c.2. .............
Brake effectiveness.
1.c.3. .............
Ground handling.
1.c.4. .............
Abnormal/emergency procedures, for example:
1.c.4.a. ..........
Brake system failure.
1.c.4.b. ..........
Ground resonance.
1.c.4.c. ..........
Other (listed on the SOQ).
1.d. ................
Taxiing—Hover.
1.d.1. .............
Takeoff to a hover.
1.d.2. .............
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1.a. ................
Instrument response.
1.d.2.a. ..........
Engine instruments.
1.d.2.a. ..........
Flight instruments.
1.d.3. .............
Hovering turns.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00274
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D3A.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 7 FTD
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
1.d.4. .............
Hover power checks.
1.d.4.a. ..........
In ground effect (IGE).
1.d.4.b. ..........
Out of ground effect (OGE).
1.d.5. .............
Crosswind/tailwind hover.
1.d.6. .............
Abnormal/emergency procedures:
1.d.6.a. ..........
Engine failure.
1.d.6.b. ..........
Fuel governing system failure.
1.d.6.c. ..........
Settling with power (OGE).
1.d.6.d. ..........
Stability augmentation system failure.
1.d.6.e. ..........
Directional control malfunction (including Loss of Tail Rotor Effectiveness, LTE).
1.d.6.f. ...........
Other (listed on the SOQ).
1.e. ................
Pre-takeoff Checks.
2. Takeoff and Departure Phase
2.a. ................
Normal and Crosswind Takeoff.
2.a.1. .............
From ground.
2.a.2. .............
From hover.
2.a.3. .............
Running.
2.a.4. .............
Crosswind/tailwind.
2.a.5. .............
Maximum performance.
2.b. ................
Instrument.
2.c. ................
Powerplant Failure During Takeoff.
2.c.1. .............
Takeoff with engine failure after critical decision point (CDP).
2.d. ................
Rejected Takeoff.
2.e. ................
Instrument Departure.
2.f. .................
Other (listed on the SOQ).
3. Climb
3.a. ................
Normal.
3.b. ................
Obstacle clearance.
3.c. ................
Vertical.
3.d. ................
One engine inoperative.
3.e. ................
Other (listed on the SOQ).
4. Inflight Maneuvers
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
4.a. ................
Performance.
4.b. ................
Flying qualities.
4.c. ................
Turns.
4.c.1. .............
Timed.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00275
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26751
26752
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D3A.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 7 FTD
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
4.c.2. .............
Normal.
4.c.3. .............
Steep.
4.d. ................
Accelerations and decelerations.
4.e. ................
High-speed vibrations.
4.f. .................
Abnormal/emergency procedures, for example:
4.f.1. ..............
Engine fire.
4.f.2. ..............
Engine failure.
4.f.2.a. ...........
Powerplant Failure—Multiengine Helicopters.
4.f.2.b. ...........
Powerplant Failure—Single-Engine Helicopters.
4.f.3. ..............
Inflight engine shutdown (and restart, if applicable).
4.f.4. ..............
Fuel governing system failures (e.g., FADEC malfunction).
4.f.5. ..............
Directional control malfunction.
4.f.6. ..............
Hydraulic failure.
4.f.7. ..............
Stability augmentation system failure.
4.f.8. ..............
Rotor vibrations.
4.f.9. ..............
Recovery From Unusual Attitudes.
4.f.10. ............
Settling with Power.
4.g. ................
Other (listed on the SOQ).
5. Instrument Procedures
Instrument Arrival.
5.b. ................
Holding.
5.c. ................
Precision Instrument Approach.
5.c.1. .............
Normal—All engines operating.
5.c.2. .............
Manually controlled—One or more engines inoperative.
5.c.3. .............
Approach procedures:
5.c.3.a. ..........
PAR.
5.c.3.b. ..........
GPS.
5.c.3.c. ..........
ILS.
5.c.3.c.1. .......
Manual (raw data).
5.c.3.c.2. .......
Autopilot * only.
5.c.3.c.3. .......
Flight director only.
5.c.3.c.4. .......
Autopilot * and flight director (if appropriate) coupled.
5.c.3.d. ..........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
5.a. ................
Other (listed on the SOQ).
5.d. ................
Non-precision Instrument Approach.
5.d.1. .............
Normal—All engines operating.
5.d.2. .............
One or more engines inoperative.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00276
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D3A.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 7 FTD
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
5.d.3. .............
Approach procedures:
5.d.3.a. ..........
NDB.
5.d.3.b. ..........
VOR, RNAV, TACAN, GPS.
5.d.3.c. ..........
ASR.
5.d.3.d. ..........
Circling.
5.d.3.e. ..........
Helicopter only.
5.d.3.f. ...........
Other (listed on the SOQ).
5.e. ................
Missed Approach.
5.e.1. .............
All engines operating.
5.e.2. .............
One or more engines inoperative.
5.e.3. .............
Stability augmentation system failure.
5.e.4. .............
Other (listed on the SOQ).
6. Landings and Approaches to Landings
6.a. ................
Visual Approaches.
6.a.1. .............
Normal.
6.a.2. .............
Steep.
6.a.3. .............
Shallow.
6.a.4. .............
Crosswind.
6.b. ................
Landings.
6.b.1. .............
Normal.
6.b.1.a. ..........
Running.
6.b.1.b. ..........
From Hover.
6.b.2. .............
Crosswind.
6.b.3. .............
Tailwind.
6.b.4. .............
One or more engines inoperative.
6.b.5. .............
Rejected Landing.
6.b.6. .............
Other (listed on the SOQ).
7. Normal and Abnormal Procedures (any phase of flight)
Helicopter and powerplant systems operation (as applicable).
7.a.1. .............
Anti-icing/deicing systems.
7.a.2. .............
Auxiliary powerplant.
7.a.3. .............
Communications.
7.a.4. .............
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
7.a. ................
Electrical system.
7.a.5. .............
Environmental system.
7.a.6. .............
Fire detection and suppression.
7.a.7. .............
Flight control system.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00277
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26753
26754
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D3A.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 7 FTD
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
7.a.8. .............
Fuel system.
7.a.9. .............
Engine oil system.
7.a.10. ...........
Hydraulic system.
7.a.11. ...........
Landing gear.
7.a.12. ...........
Oxygen.
7.a.13. ...........
Pneumatic.
7.a.14. ...........
Powerplant.
7.a.15. ...........
Flight control computers.
7.a.16. ...........
Fly-by-wire controls.
7.a.17. ...........
Stabilizer.
7.a.18. ...........
Stability augmentation and control augmentation system(s).
7.a.19. ...........
Other (listed on the SOQ).
7.b. ................
Flight management and guidance system (as applicable).
7.b.1. .............
Airborne radar.
7.b.2. .............
Automatic landing aids.
7.b.3. .............
Autopilot.*
7.b.4. .............
Collision avoidance system.
7.b.5. .............
Flight data displays.
7.b.6. .............
Flight management computers.
7.b.7. .............
Head-up displays.
7.b.8. .............
Navigation systems.
7.b.9. .............
Other (listed on the SOQ).
8. Emergency Procedures (as applicable)
8.a. ................
Autorotative Landing.
8.b. ................
Air hazard avoidance.
8.c. ................
Ditching.
8.d. ................
Emergency evacuation.
8.e. ................
Inflight fire and smoke removal.
8.f. .................
Retreating blade stall recovery.
8.g. ................
Mast bumping.
8.h. ................
Loss of tail rotor effectiveness.
8.i. .................
Other (listed on the SOQ).
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
9. Postflight Procedures
9.a. ................
After-Landing Procedures.
9.b. ................
Parking and Securing.
9.b.1. .............
Engine and systems operation.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00278
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D3A.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 7 FTD
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
9.b.2. .............
Parking brake operation.
9.b.3. .............
Rotor brake operation.
9.b.4. .............
Abnormal/emergency procedures.
10. Instructor Operating Station (IOS), as appropriate
Power Switch(es).
10.b. ..............
Helicopter conditions.
10.b.1. ...........
Gross weight, center of gravity, fuel loading and allocation, etc.
10.b.2. ...........
Helicopter systems status.
10.b.3. ...........
Ground crew functions (e.g., ext. power).
10.c. ..............
Airports.
10.c.1. ...........
Selection.
10.c.2. ...........
Runway selection.
10.c.3. ...........
Preset positions (e.g., ramp, over final approach fix).
10.d. ..............
Environmental controls.
10.d.1. ...........
Temperature.
10.d.2. ...........
Climate conditions (e.g., ice, rain).
10.d.3. ...........
Wind speed and direction.
10.e. ..............
Helicopter system malfunctions.
10.e.1. ...........
Insertion/deletion.
10.e.2. ...........
Problem clear.
10.f. ...............
Locks, Freezes, and Repositioning.
10.f.1. ............
Problem (all) freeze/release.
10.f.2. ............
Position (geographic) freeze/release.
10.f.3. ............
Repositioning (locations, freezes, and releases).
10.f.4. ............
Ground speed control.
10.g. ..............
Sound Controls.
10.g.1. ...........
On/off/adjustment.
10.h. ..............
Control Loading System (as applicable).
10.h.1. ...........
On/off/emergency stop.
10.i. ...............
Observer Stations.
10.i.1. ............
Position.
10.i.2. ............
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
10.a. ..............
Adjustments.
* ‘‘Autopilot’’ means attitude retention mode of operation.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00279
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26755
26756
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D3B.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS AIRPORT OR LANDING AREA CONTENT REQUIREMENTS FOR
QUALIFICATION AT LEVEL 7 FTD
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
This table specifies the minimum airport visual model content and functionality to qualify an FTD at the indicated level. This table applies only to
the airport/helicopter landing area scenes required for FTD qualification.
Functional test content requirements for Level 7 FTDs. The following is the minimum airport/landing area model content requirement to satisfy visual capability tests, and provides suitable visual cues to allow completion of all functions and subjective tests described in this attachment for Level 7 FTDs.
1.a. ................
A minimum of one (1) representative airport and one (1) representative helicopter landing area model. The airport and the helicopter landing area may be contained within the same visual model. If this option is selected, the approach path to the airport
runway(s) and the approach path to the helicopter landing area must be different. The model(s) used to meet the following requirements may be demonstrated at either a fictional or a real-world airport or helicopter landing area, but each must be acceptable to the sponsor’s TPAA, selectable from the IOS, and listed on the SOQ.
1.b. ................
Fidelity of the Visual Scene. The fidelity of the visual scene must be sufficient for the aircrew to visually identify the airport and/
or helicopter landing area; determine the position of the simulated helicopter within the visual scene; successfully accomplish
take-offs, approaches, and landings; and maneuver around the airport and/or helicopter landing area on the ground, or hover
taxi, as necessary.
1.b.1. .............
For each of the airport/helicopter landing areas described in 1.a., the FTD visual system must be able to provide at least the following:
1.b.1.a. ..........
A night and twilight (dusk) environment.
1.b.1.b. ..........
A daylight environment.
1.c. ................
Runways:
1.c.1. .............
Visible runway number.
1.c.2. .............
Runway threshold elevations and locations must be modeled to provide sufficient correlation with helicopter systems (e.g., altimeter).
1.c.3. .............
Runway surface and markings.
1.c.4. .............
Lighting for the runway in use including runway edge and centerline.
1.c.5. .............
Lighting, visual approach aid (VASI or PAPI) and approach lighting of appropriate colors.
1.c.6 ..............
Taxiway lights.
1.d. ................
Helicopter landing area.
1.d.1. .............
Standard heliport designation (‘‘H’’) marking, properly sized and oriented.
1.d.2. .............
Perimeter markings for the Touchdown and Lift-Off Area (TLOF) or the Final Approach and Takeoff Area (FATO), as appropriate.
1.d.3. .............
Perimeter lighting for the TLOF or the FATO areas, as appropriate.
1.d.4. .............
Appropriate markings and lighting to allow movement from the runway or helicopter landing area to another part of the landing
facility.
2. ...................
Visual scene management.
The following is the minimum visual scene management requirements for a Level 7 FTD.
2.a. ................
Runway and helicopter landing area approach lighting must fade into view appropriately in accordance with the environmental
conditions set in the FTD.
2.b. ................
The direction of strobe lights, approach lights, runway edge lights, visual landing aids, runway centerline lights, threshold lights,
touchdown zone lights, and TLOF or FATO lights must be replicated.
3. ...................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1. ...................
Visual feature recognition.
The following are the minimum distances at which runway features must be visible. Distances are measured from runway
threshold or a helicopter landing area to a helicopter aligned with the runway or helicopter landing area on an extended 3°
glide-slope in simulated meteorological conditions. For circling approaches, all tests apply to the runway used for the initial
approach and to the runway of intended landing.
3.a. ................
For runways: Runway definition, strobe lights, approach lights, and edge lights from 5 sm (8 km) of the threshold.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00280
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26757
TABLE D3B.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS AIRPORT OR LANDING AREA CONTENT REQUIREMENTS FOR
QUALIFICATION AT LEVEL 7 FTD—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
For runways: Centerline lights and taxiway definition from 3 sm (5 km).
3.c. ................
For runways: Visual Approach Aid lights (VASI or PAPI) from 5 sm (8 km) of the threshold.
3.d. ................
For runways: Runway threshold lights and touchdown zone from 2 sm (3 km).
3.e. ................
For runways and helicopter landing areas: Markings within range of landing lights for night/twilight scenes and the surface resolution test on daylight scenes, as required.
3.f. .................
For circling approaches: The runway of intended landing and associated lighting must fade into view in a non-distracting manner.
3.g. ................
For helicopter landing areas: Landing direction lights and raised FATO lights from 1 sm (1.5 km).
3.h. ................
For helicopter landing areas: Flush mounted FATO lights, TLOF lights, and the lighted windsock from 0.5 sm (750 m).
4. ...................
Airport or Helicopter Landing Area Model Content.
The following prescribes the minimum requirements for an airport/helicopter landing area visual model and identifies other aspects of the environment that must correspond with that model for a Level 7 FTD. For circling approaches, all tests apply to
the runway used for the initial approach and to the runway of intended landing. If all runways or landing areas in a visual
model used to meet the requirements of this attachment are not designated as ‘‘in use,’’ then the ‘‘in use’’ runways/landing
areas must be listed on the SOQ (e.g., KORD, Rwys 9R, 14L, 22R). Models of airports or helicopter landing areas with more
than one runway or landing area must have all significant runways or landing areas not ‘‘in-use’’ visually depicted for airport/
runway/landing area recognition purposes. The use of white or off white light strings that identify the runway or landing area
for twilight and night scenes are acceptable for this requirement; and rectangular surface depictions are acceptable for daylight scenes. A visual system’s capabilities must be balanced between providing visual models with an accurate representation of the airport and a realistic representation of the surrounding environment. Each runway or helicopter landing area designated as an ‘‘in-use’’ runway or area must include the following detail that is developed using airport pictures, construction
drawings and maps, or other similar data, or developed in accordance with published regulatory material; however, this does
not require that such models contain details that are beyond the design capability of the currently qualified visual system.
Only one ‘‘primary’’ taxi route from parking to the runway end or helicopter takeoff/landing area will be required for each ‘‘inuse’’ runway or helicopter takeoff/landing area.
4.a. ................
The surface and markings for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
4.a.1. .............
For airports: Runway threshold markings, runway numbers, touchdown zone markings, fixed distance markings, runway edge
markings, and runway centerline stripes.
4.a.2. .............
For helicopter landing areas: Markings for standard heliport identification (‘‘H’’) and TLOF, FATO, and safety areas.
4.b. ................
The lighting for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
4.b.1. .............
For airports: Runway approach, threshold, edge, end, centerline (if applicable), touchdown zone (if applicable), leadoff, and visual landing aid lights or light systems for that runway.
4.b.2. .............
For helicopter landing areas: Landing direction, raised and flush FATO, TLOF, windsock lighting.
4.c. ................
The taxiway surface and markings associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
4.c.1. .............
For airports: Taxiway edge, centerline (if appropriate), runway hold lines, and ILS critical area(s).
4.c.2. .............
For helicopter landing areas: Taxiways, taxi routes, and aprons.
4.d. ................
The taxiway lighting associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
4.d.1. .............
For airports: Taxiway edge, centerline (if appropriate), runway hold lines, ILS critical areas.
4.d.2. .............
For helicopter landing areas: Taxiways, taxi routes, and aprons.
4.d.3. .............
For airports: Taxiway lighting of correct color.
4.e. ................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
3.b. ................
Airport signage associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
4.e.1. .............
For airports: Signs for runway distance remaining, intersecting runway with taxiway, and intersecting taxiway with taxiway.
4.e.2. .............
For helicopter landing areas: As appropriate for the model used.
4.f. .................
Required visual model correlation with other aspects of the airport or helicopter landing environment simulation:
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00281
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26758
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D3B.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS AIRPORT OR LANDING AREA CONTENT REQUIREMENTS FOR
QUALIFICATION AT LEVEL 7 FTD—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
4.f.1. ..............
The airport or helicopter landing area model must be properly aligned with the navigational aids that are associated with operations at the ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area.
4.f.2. ..............
The simulation of runway or helicopter landing area contaminants must be correlated with the displayed runway surface and
lighting, if applicable.
5. ...................
Correlation with helicopter and associated equipment.
The following are the minimum correlation comparisons that must be made for a Level 7 FTD.
5.a. ................
Visual system compatibility with aerodynamic programming.
5.b. ................
Visual cues to assess sink rate and depth perception during landings.
5.c. ................
Accurate portrayal of environment relating to FTD attitudes.
5.d. ................
The visual scene must correlate with integrated helicopter systems, where installed (e.g., terrain, traffic and weather avoidance
systems and Head-up Guidance System (HGS)).
5.e. ................
Representative visual effects for each visible, own-ship, helicopter external light(s)—taxi and landing light lobes (including independent operation, if appropriate).
5.f. .................
The effect of rain removal devices.
6. ...................
Scene quality.
The following are the minimum scene quality tests that must be conducted for a Level 7 FTD.
6.a. ................
System light points must be free from distracting jitter, smearing and streaking.
6.b. ................
Demonstration of occulting through each channel of the system in an operational scene.
6.c. ................
Six discrete light step controls (0–5).
7. ...................
Special weather representations, which include visibility and RVR, measured in terms of distance.
Visibility/RVR checked at 2,000 ft (600 m) above the airport or helicopter landing area and at two heights below 2,000 ft with at
least 500 ft of separation between the measurements. The measurements must be taken within a radius of 10 sm (16 km)
from the airport or helicopter landing area.
7.a. ................
Effects of fog on airport lighting such as halos and defocus.
7.b. ................
Effect of own-ship lighting in reduced visibility, such as reflected glare, including landing lights, strobes, and beacons.
8. ...................
Instructor control of the following:
The following are the minimum instructor controls that must be available in a Level 7 FTD.
8.a. ................
Environmental effects: E.g., cloud base, cloud effects, cloud density, visibility in statute miles/kilometers and RVR in feet/meters.
8.b. ................
Airport or helicopter landing area selection.
8.c. ................
Airport or helicopter landing area lighting, including variable intensity.
8.d. ................
Dynamic effects including ground and flight traffic.
End QPS Requirement
Begin Information
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
9. ...................
An example of being able to combine two airport models to achieve two ‘‘in-use’’ runways: One runway designated as the ‘‘inuse’’ runway in the first model of the airport, and the second runway designated as the ‘‘in-use’’ runway in the second model
of the same airport. For example, the clearance is for the ILS approach to Runway 27, Circle to Land on Runway 18 right.
Two airport visual models might be used: The first with Runway 27 designated as the ‘‘in use’’ runway for the approach to
runway 27, and the second with Runway 18 Right designated as the ‘‘in use’’ runway. When the pilot breaks off the ILS approach to runway 27, the instructor may change to the second airport visual model in which runway 18 Right is designated as
the ‘‘in use’’ runway, and the pilot would make a visual approach and landing. This process is acceptable to the FAA as long
as the temporary interruption due to the visual model change is not distracting to the pilot.
10. .................
Sponsors are not required to provide every detail of a runway, but the detail that is provided should be correct within reasonable
limits.
End Information
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00282
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26759
TABLE D3C.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 7 FTD VISUAL REQUIREMENTS ADDITIONAL VISUAL
MODELS BEYOND MINIMUM REQUIRED FOR QUALIFICATION CLASS II AIRPORT OR HELICOPTER LANDING AREA MODELS
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
This table specifies the minimum airport or helicopter landing area visual model content and functionality necessary to add visual models to an
FTD’s visual model library (i.e., beyond those necessary for qualification at the stated level) without the necessity of further involvement of the
NSPM or TPAA.
Visual scene management.
The following is the minimum visual scene management requirements.
1.a. ................
The installation and direction of the following lights must be replicated for the ‘‘in-use’’ surface:
1.a.1. .............
For ‘‘in-use’’ runways: Strobe lights, approach lights, runway edge lights, visual landing aids, runway centerline lights, threshold
lights, and touchdown zone lights.
1.a.2. .............
For ‘‘in-use’’ helicopter landing areas: Ground level TLOF perimeter lights, elevated TLOF perimeter lights (if applicable), Optional TLOF lights (if applicable), ground FATO perimeter lights, elevated TLOF lights (if applicable), landing direction lights.
2. ...................
Visual feature recognition.
The following are the minimum distances at which runway or landing area features must be visible. Distances are measured
from runway threshold or a helicopter landing area to an aircraft aligned with the runway or helicopter landing area on a 3°
glide-slope from the aircraft to the touchdown point, in simulated meteorological conditions. For circling approaches, all tests
apply to the runway used for the initial approach and to the runway of intended landing.
2.a. ................
For Runways.
2.a.1. .............
Strobe lights, approach lights, and edge lights from 5 sm (8 km) of the threshold.
2.a.2. .............
Centerline lights and taxiway definition from 3 sm (5 km).
2.a.3. .............
Visual Approach Aid lights (VASI or PAPI) from 5 sm (8 km) of the threshold.
2.a.4. .............
Threshold lights and touchdown zone lights from 2 sm (3 km).
2.a.5. .............
Markings within range of landing lights for night/twilight (dusk) scenes and as required by the surface resolution test on daylight
scenes.
2.a.6. .............
For circling approaches, the runway of intended landing and associated lighting must fade into view in a non-distracting manner.
2.b. ................
For Helicopter landing areas.
2.b.1. .............
Landing direction lights and raised FATO lights from 2 sm (3 km).
2.b.2. .............
Flush mounted FATO lights, TOFL lights, and the lighted windsock from 1 sm (1500 m).
2.b.3. .............
Hover taxiway lighting (yellow/blue/yellow cylinders) from TOFL area.
2.b.4. .............
Markings within range of landing lights for night/twilight (dusk) scenes and as required by the surface resolution test on daylight
scenes.
3. ...................
Airport or Helicopter Landing Area Model Content.
The following prescribes the minimum requirements for what must be provided in an airport visual model and identifies other aspects of the airport environment that must correspond with that model. The detail must be developed using airport pictures,
construction drawings and maps, or other similar data, or developed in accordance with published regulatory material; however, this does not require that airport or helicopter landing area models contain details that are beyond the designed capability of the currently qualified visual system. For circling approaches, all requirements of this section apply to the runway
used for the initial approach and to the runway of intended landing. Only one ‘‘primary’’ taxi route from parking to the runway
end or helicopter takeoff/landing area will be required for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter takeoff/landing area.
3.a. ................
The surface and markings for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
3.a.1. .............
For airports: Runway threshold markings, runway numbers, touchdown zone markings, fixed distance markings, runway edge
markings, and runway centerline stripes.
3.a.2. .............
For helicopter landing areas: Standard heliport marking (‘‘H’’), TOFL, FATO, and safety areas.
3.b. ................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
1. ...................
The lighting for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
3.b.1. .............
For airports: Runway approach, threshold, edge, end, centerline (if applicable), touchdown zone (if applicable), leadoff, and visual landing aid lights or light systems for that runway.
3.b.2. .............
For helicopter landing areas: Landing direction, raised and flush FATO, TOFL, windsock lighting.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00283
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26760
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D3C.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 7 FTD VISUAL REQUIREMENTS ADDITIONAL VISUAL
MODELS BEYOND MINIMUM REQUIRED FOR QUALIFICATION CLASS II AIRPORT OR HELICOPTER LANDING AREA MODELS—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
3.c. ................
The taxiway surface and markings associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
3.c.1. .............
For airports: Taxiway edge, centerline (if appropriate), runway hold lines, and ILS critical area(s).
3.c.2. .............
For helicopter landing areas: Taxiways, taxi routes, and aprons.
3.d. ................
The taxiway lighting associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway or helicopter landing area must include the following:
3.d.1. .............
For airports: Runway edge, centerline (if appropriate), runway hold lines, ILS critical areas.
3.d.2. .............
For helicopter landing areas: Taxiways, taxi routes, and aprons.
4. ...................
Required visual model correlation with other aspects of the airport environment simulation.
The following are the minimum visual model correlation tests that must be conducted for Level 7 FTD.
4.a. ................
The airport model must be properly aligned with the navigational aids that are associated with operations at the ‘‘in-use’’ runway.
4.b. ................
Slopes in runways, taxiways, and ramp areas, if depicted in the visual scene, must not cause distracting or unrealistic effects.
5. ...................
Correlation with helicopter and associated equipment.
The following are the minimum correlation comparisons that must be made.
5.a. ................
Visual system compatibility with aerodynamic programming.
5.b. ................
Accurate portrayal of environment relating to flight simulator attitudes.
5.c. ................
Visual cues to assess sink rate and depth perception during landings.
6. ...................
Scene quality.
The following are the minimum scene quality tests that must be conducted.
6.a. ................
Light points free from distracting jitter, smearing or streaking.
6.b. ................
Surfaces and textural cues free from apparent and distracting quantization (aliasing).
7. ...................
Instructor controls of the following.
The following are the minimum instructor controls that must be available.
7.a. ................
Environmental effects, e.g., cloud base (if used), cloud effects, cloud density, visibility in statute miles/kilometers and RVR in
feet/meters.
7.b. ................
Airport/Heliport selection.
7.c. ................
Airport/Heliport lighting including variable intensity.
7.d. ................
Dynamic effects including ground and flight traffic.
End QPS Requirements
Begin Information
8. ...................
Sponsors are not required to provide every detail of a runway or helicopter landing area, but the detail that is provided must be
correct within the capabilities of the system.
End Information
TABLE D3D.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 6 FTD
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
Tasks in this table are subject to evaluation if appropriate for the helicopter simulated as indicated in the SOQ Configuration List or for a Level 6
FTD. Items not installed or not functional on the FTD and not appearing on the SOQ Configuration List, are not required to be listed as exceptions on the SOQ.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00284
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D3D.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 6 FTD—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
1. Preflight Procedures
1.a. ................
Preflight Inspection (Flight Deck Only) switches, indicators, systems, and equipment.
1.b. ................
APU/Engine start and run-up.
1.b.1. .............
Normal start procedures.
1.b.2. .............
Alternate start procedures.
1.b.3. .............
Abnormal starts and shutdowns.
1.b.4. .............
Rotor engagement.
1.b.5 ..............
System checks.
2. Takeoff and Departure Phase
2.a. ................
Instrument.
2.b. ................
Takeoff with engine failure after critical decision point (CDP).
3. Climb
3.a. ................
Normal.
3.b. ................
One engine inoperative.
4. Inflight Maneuvers
4.a. ................
Performance.
4.b. ................
Flying qualities.
4.c. ................
Turns.
4.c.1. .............
Timed.
4.c.2. .............
Normal.
4.c.3. .............
Steep.
4.d. ................
Accelerations and decelerations.
4.e. ................
Abnormal/emergency procedures:
4.e.1. .............
Engine fire.
4.e.2. .............
Engine failure.
4.e.3. .............
In-flight engine shutdown (and restart, if applicable).
4.e.4. .............
Fuel governing system failures (e.g., FADEC malfunction).
4.e.5. .............
Directional control malfunction (restricted to the extent that the maneuver may not terminate in a landing).
4.e.6. .............
Hydraulic failure.
4.e.7. .............
Stability augmentation system failure.
5. Instrument Procedures
Holding.
5.b. ................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
5.a. ................
Precision Instrument Approach.
5.b.1. .............
All engines operating.
5.b.2. .............
One or more engines inoperative.
5.b.3. .............
Approach procedures:
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00285
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26761
26762
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D3D.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 6 FTD—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
5.b.4. .............
PAR.
5.b.5. .............
ILS.
5.b.6. .............
Manual (raw data).
5.b.7. .............
Flight director only.
5.b.8. .............
Autopilot* and flight director (if appropriate) coupled.
5.c. ................
Non-precision Instrument Approach.
5.c. ................
Normal—All engines operating.
5.c. ................
One or more engines inoperative.
5.c. ................
Approach procedures:
5.c.1. .............
NDB.
5.c.2. .............
VOR, RNAV, TACAN, GPS.
5.c.3. .............
ASR.
5.c.4. .............
Helicopter only.
5.d. ................
Missed Approach.
5.d.1. .............
All engines operating.
5.d.2. .............
One or more engines inoperative.
5.d.3. .............
Stability augmentation system failure.
6. Normal and Abnormal Procedures (any phase of flight)
Helicopter and powerplant systems operation (as applicable).
6.a.1. .............
Anti-icing/deicing systems.
6.a.2. .............
Auxiliary power-plant.
6.a.3. .............
Communications.
6.a.4. .............
Electrical system.
6.a.5. .............
Environmental system.
6.a.6. .............
Fire detection and suppression.
6.a.7. .............
Flight control system.
6.a.8. .............
Fuel system.
6.a.9. .............
Engine oil system.
6.a.10. ...........
Hydraulic system.
6.a.11 ............
Landing gear.
6.a.12. ...........
Oxygen.
6.a.13. ...........
Pneumatic.
6.a.14. ...........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
6.a. ................
Powerplant.
6.a.15. ...........
Flight control computers.
6.a.16. ...........
Stability augmentation and control augmentation system(s).
6.b. ................
Flight management and guidance system (as applicable).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00286
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D3D.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 6 FTD—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
6.b.1. .............
Airborne radar.
6.b.2. .............
Automatic landing aids.
6.b.3. .............
Autopilot.*
6.b.4. .............
Collision avoidance system.
6.b.5. .............
Flight data displays.
6.b.6. .............
Flight management computers.
6.b.7. .............
Navigation systems.
7. Postflight Procedures
7.a. ................
Parking and Securing.
7.b. ................
Engine and systems operation.
7.c. ................
Parking brake operation.
7.d. ................
Rotor brake operation.
7.e. ................
Abnormal/emergency procedures.
8. Instructor Operating Station (IOS), as appropriate
Power Switch(es).
8.b.1. .............
Helicopter conditions.
8.b.2. .............
Gross weight, center of gravity, fuel loading and allocation, etc.
8.b.3. .............
Helicopter systems status.
8.b.4. .............
Ground crew functions (e.g., ext. power).
8.c. ................
Airports and landing areas.
8.c.1. .............
Number and selection.
8.c.2. .............
Runway or landing area selection.
8.c.3. .............
Preset positions (e.g., ramp, over FAF).
8.c.4. .............
Lighting controls.
8.d. ................
Environmental controls.
8.d.1 ..............
Temperature.
8.d.2. .............
Climate conditions (e.g., ice, rain).
8.d.3. .............
Wind speed and direction.
8.e. ................
Helicopter system malfunctions.
8.e.1. .............
Insertion/deletion.
8.e.2. .............
Problem clear.
8.f. .................
Locks, Freezes, and Repositioning.
8.f.1. ..............
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
8.a. ................
Problem (all) freeze/release.
8.f.2. ..............
Position (geographic) freeze/release.
8.f.3. ..............
Repositioning (locations, freezes, and releases).
8.f.4. ..............
Ground speed control.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00287
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26763
26764
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE D3D.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 6 FTD—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
8.g. ................
Sound Controls. On/off/adjustment.
8.h. ................
Control Loading System (as applicable) On/off/emergency stop.
8.i. .................
Observer Stations.
8.i.1. ..............
Position.
8.i.2. ..............
Adjustments.
* ‘‘Autopilot’’ means attitude retention mode of operation.
TABLE D3E.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 5 FTD
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
Tasks in this table are subject to evaluation if appropriate for the helicopter simulated as indicated in the SOQ Configuration List or for a Level 5
FTD. Items not installed or not functional on the FTD and not appearing on the SOQ Configuration List, are not required to be listed as exceptions on the SOQ.
1. Preflight Procedures
1.a. ................
Preflight Inspection (Flight Deck Only) switches, indicators, systems, and equipment.
1.b. ................
APU/Engine start and run-up.
1.b.1. .............
Normal start procedures.
1.b.2. .............
Alternate start procedures.
1.b.3. .............
Abnormal starts and shutdowns.
2. Climb
2.a. ................
Normal.
3. Inflight Maneuvers
3.a. ................
Performance.
3.b. ................
Turns, Normal.
4. Instrument Procedures
4.a. ................
Coupled instrument approach maneuvers (as applicable for the systems installed).
5. Normal and Abnormal Procedures (any phase of flight)
5.a. ................
Normal system operation (installed systems).
5.b. ................
Abnormal/Emergency system operation (installed systems).
6. Postflight Procedures
Parking and Securing.
6.b. ................
Engine and systems operation.
6.c. ................
Parking brake operation.
6.d. ................
Rotor brake operation.
6.e. ................
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
6.a. ................
Abnormal/emergency procedures.
7. Instructor Operating Station (IOS), as appropriate
7.a. ................
Power Switch(es).
7.b. ................
Preset positions (ground; air)
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00288
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
26765
TABLE D3E.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 5 FTD—Continued
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
7.c. ................
Helicopter system malfunctions.
7.c.1. .............
Insertion/deletion.
7.c.2. .............
Problem clear.
7.d. ................
Control Loading System (as applicable) On/off/emergency stop.
7.e. ................
Observer Stations.
7.e.1. .............
Position.
7.e.2. .............
Adjustments.
TABLE D3F.—TABLE OF FUNCTIONS AND SUBJECTIVE TESTS LEVEL 4 FTD
QPS requirements
Entry No.
Operations tasks
Tasks in this table are subject to evaluation if appropriate for the helicopter simulated as indicated in the SOQ Configuration List or for a Level 4
FTD. Items not installed or not functional on the FTD and not appearing on the SOQ Configuration List, are not required to be listed as exceptions on the SOQ.
1. Preflight Procedures
1.a. ................
Preflight Inspection (Flight Deck Only) switches, indicators, systems, and equipment.
1.b. ................
APU/Engine start and run-up.
1.b.1. .............
Normal start procedures.
1.b.2. .............
Alternate start procedures.
1.b.3. .............
Abnormal starts and shutdowns.
2. Normal and Abnormal Procedures (any phase of flight)
2.a. ................
Normal system operation (installed systems).
2.b. ................
Abnormal/Emergency system operation (installed systems).
3. Postflight Procedures
3.a. ................
Parking and Securing.
3.b. ................
Engine and systems operation.
3.c. ................
Parking brake operation.
4. Instructor Operating Station (IOS), as appropriate
Power Switch(es).
4.b. ................
Preset positions (ground; air)
4.c. ................
Helicopter system malfunctions.
4.c.1. .............
Insertion/deletion.
4.c.2. .............
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
4.a. ................
Problem clear.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00289
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26766
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
Attachment 4 to Appendix D to Part 60—
Sample Documents
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Table of Contents
Figure D4A Sample Letter, Request for
Initial, Upgrade, or Reinstatement
Evaluation
Figure D4B Attachment: FTD Information
Form
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
Figure A4C Sample Letter of Compliance
Figure D4D Sample Qualification Test
Guide Cover Page
Figure D4E Sample Statement of
Qualification—Certificate
Figure D4F Sample Statement of
Qualification—Configuration List
Figure D4G Sample Statement of
Qualification—List of Qualified Tasks
PO 00000
Frm 00290
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Figure D4H Sample Continuing
Qualification Evaluation Requirements
Page
Figure D4I Sample MQTG Index of Effective
FTD Directives
BILLING CODE 4910–13–P
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00291
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26767
ER09MY08.054
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00292
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.055
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26768
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00293
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26769
ER09MY08.056
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00294
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.057
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26770
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00295
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26771
ER09MY08.058
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00296
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.059
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26772
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00297
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26773
ER09MY08.060
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00298
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.061
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26774
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00299
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26775
ER09MY08.062
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00300
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.063
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26776
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00301
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26777
ER09MY08.064
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00302
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.065
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26778
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
Begin QPS Requirements
a. Not later than May 30, 2010, each
current sponsor of an FSTD must submit to
the NSPM a proposed Quality Management
System (QMS) program as described in this
appendix. The NSPM will notify the sponsor
of the acceptability of the program, including
any required adjustments. Within 6 months
of the notification of acceptability, the
sponsor must implement the program,
conduct internal audits, make required
program adjustments as a result of any
internal audit, and schedule the NSPM initial
audit.
b. First-time FSTD sponsors must submit to
the NSPM the proposed QMS program no
later than 120 days before the initial FSTD
evaluation. The NSPM will notify the
sponsor of the acceptability of the program,
including any required adjustments. Within
6 months of the notification of acceptability,
the sponsor must implement the program,
conduct internal audits, make required
program adjustments as a result of any
internal audit, and schedule the NSPM initial
audit.
c. The Director of Operations for a Part 119
certificate holder, the Chief Instructor for a
Part 141 certificate holder, or the equivalent
for a Part 142 or Flight Engineer School
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
sponsor must designate a Management
Representative (MR) who has the authority to
establish and modify the sponsor’s policies,
practices, and procedures regarding the QMS
program for the recurring qualification and
the daily use of each FSTD.
d. The minimum content required for an
acceptable QMS is found in Table E1. The
policies, processes, or procedures described
in this table must be maintained in a Quality
Manual and will serve as the basis for the
following:
(1) The sponsor-conducted initial and
recurring periodic assessments;
(2) The NSPM-conducted initial and
recurring periodic assessments; and
(3) The continuing surveillance and
analysis by the NSPM of the sponsor’s
performance and effectiveness in providing a
satisfactory FSTD for use on a regular basis.
e. The sponsor must conduct assessments
of its QMS program in segments. The
segments will be established by the NSPM at
the initial assessment, and the interval for the
segment assessments will be every 6 months.
The intervals for the segment assessments
may be extended beyond 6 months as the
QMS program matures, but will not be
extended beyond 12 months. The entire QMS
program must be assessed every 24 months.
f. The periodic assessments conducted by
the NSPM will be conducted at intervals not
less than once every 24 months, and include
a comprehensive review of the QMS
program. These reviews will be conducted
more frequently if warranted.
PO 00000
Frm 00303
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
End QPS Requirements
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
g. An example of a segment assessment—
At the initial QMS assessment, the NSPM
will divide the QMS program into segments
(e.g., 6 separate segments). There must be an
assessment of a certain number of segments
every 6 months (i.e., segments 1 and 2 at the
end of the first 6 month period; segments 3
and 4 at the end of the second 6 month
period (or one year); and segments 5 and 6
at the end of the third 6 month period (or 18
months). As the program matures, the
interval between assessments may be
extended to 12 months (e.g., segments 1, 2,
and 3 at the end of the first year; and
segments 4, 5, and 6 at the end of the second
year). In both cases, the entire QMS program
is assessed at least every 24 months.
h. The following materials are presented to
assist sponsors in preparing for an NSPM
evaluation of the QMS program. The sample
documents include:
(1) The NSPM desk assessment tool for
initial evaluation of the required elements of
a QMS program.
(2) The NSPM on-site assessment tool for
initial and continuing evaluation of the
required elements of a QMS program.
(3) An Element Assessment Table that
describes the circumstances that exist to
warrant a finding of ‘‘non-compliance,’’ or
‘‘non-conformity’’; ‘‘partial compliance,’’ or
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
ER09MY08.066
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Appendix E to Part 60—Qualification
Performance Standards for Quality
Management Systems for Flight Simulation
Training Devices
lllllllllllllllllllll
26779
26780
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
‘‘partial conformity’’; and ‘‘acceptable
compliance,’’ or ‘‘acceptable conformity.’’
(4) A sample Continuation Sheet for
additional comments that may be added by
the sponsor or the NSPM during a QMS
evaluation.
(5) A sample Sponsor Checklist to assist
the sponsor in verifying the elements that
comprise the required QMS program.
(6) A table showing the essential functions,
processes, and procedures that relate to the
required QMS components and a crossreference to each represented task.
i. Additional Information.
(1) In addition to specifically designated
QMS evaluations, the NSPM will evaluate
the sponsor’s QMS program as part of
regularly scheduled FSTD continuing
qualification evaluations and no-notice FSTD
evaluations, focusing in part on the
effectiveness and viability of the QMS
program and its contribution to the overall
capability of the FSTD to meet the
requirements of this part.
(2) The sponsor or MR may delegate duties
associated with maintaining the qualification
of the FSTD (e.g., corrective and preventive
maintenance, scheduling and conducting
tests or inspections, functional preflight
checks) but retain the responsibility and
authority for the day-to-day qualification of
the FSTD. One person may serve as the
sponsor or MR for more than one FSTD, but
one FSTD may not have more than one
sponsor or MR.
(3) A QMS program may be applicable to
more than one certificate holder (e.g., part
119 and part 142 or two part 119 certificate
holders) and an MR may work for more than
one certificate holder (e.g., part 119 and part
142 or two part 119 certificate holders) as
long as the sponsor’s QMS program
requirements and the MR requirements are
met for each certificate holder.
(4) Standard Measurements for Flight
Simulator Quality: A quality system based on
FSTD performance will improve and
maintain training quality. See https://www.
faa.gov/safety/programs_initiatives/aircraft_
aviation/nsp/sqms/ for more information on
measuring FSTD performance.
j. The FAA does not mandate a specific
QMS program format, but an acceptable QMS
program should contain the following:.
(1) A Quality Policy. This is a formal
written Quality Policy Statement that is a
commitment by the sponsor outlining what
the Quality System will achieve.
(2) A MR who has overall authority for
monitoring the on-going qualification of
assigned FSTDs to ensure that all FSTD
qualification issues are resolved as required
by this part. The MR should ensure that the
QMS program is properly implemented and
maintained, and should:
(a) Brief the sponsor’s management on the
qualification processes;
(b) Serve as the primary contact point for
all matters between the sponsor and the
NSPM regarding the qualification of the
assigned FSTDs; and
(c) Oversee the day-to-day quality control.
(3) The system and processes outlined in
the QMS should enable the sponsor to
monitor compliance with all applicable
regulations and ensure correct maintenance
and performance of the FSTD in accordance
with part 60.
(4) A QMS program and a statement
acknowledging completion of a periodic
review by the MR should include the
following:
(a) A maintenance facility that provides
suitable FSTD hardware and software tests
and maintenance capability.
(b) A recording system in the form of a
technical log in which defects, deferred
defects, and development projects are listed,
assigned and reviewed within a specified
time period.
(c) Routine maintenance of the FSTD and
performance of the QTG tests with adequate
staffing to cover FSTD operating periods.
(d) A planned internal assessment
schedule and a periodic review should be
used to verify that corrective action was
complete and effective. The assessor should
have adequate knowledge of FSTDs and
should be acceptable to the NSPM.
(5) The MR should receive Quality System
training and brief other personnel on the
procedures.
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
TABLE E1.—FSTD QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Information
(reference)
QPS requirement
E1.1. .............
A QMS manual that prescribes the policies, processes, or procedures outlined in this table .......................
§ 60.5(a).
E1.2. .............
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will identify deficiencies in the QMS ...............
§ 60.5(b).
E1.3. .............
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will document how the QMS program will be
changed to address deficiencies.
§ 60.5(b).
E1.4. .............
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will address proposed program changes (for
programs that do not meet the minimum requirements as notified by the NSPM) to the NSPM and receive approval prior to their implementation.
§ 60.5(c).
E1.5. .............
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will document that at least one FSTD is used
within the sponsor’s FAA-approved flight training program for the aircraft or set of aircraft at least once
within the 12-month period following the initial or upgrade evaluation conducted by the NSPM and at
least once within each subsequent 12-month period thereafter.
§ 60.7(b)(5).
E1.6. .............
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will document that at least one FSTD is used
within the sponsor’s FAA-approved flight training program for the aircraft or set of aircraft at least once
within the 12-month period following the first continuing qualification evaluation conducted by the NSP
and at least once within each subsequent 12-month period thereafter.
§ 60.7(b)(6).
E1.7. .............
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will obtain an annual written statement from
a qualified pilot (who has flown the subject aircraft or set of aircraft during the preceding 12-month period) that the performance and handling qualities of the subject FSTD represents the subject aircraft or
set of aircraft (within the normal operating envelope). Required only if the subject FSTD is not used in
the sponsor’s FAA-approved flight training program for the aircraft or set of aircraft at least once within
the preceding 12-month period.
§ 60.5(b)(7) and
§ 60.7(d)(2).
E1.8. .............
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how independent feedback (from persons recently completing
training, evaluation, or obtaining flight experience; instructors and check airmen using the FSTD for
training, evaluation, or flight experience sessions; and FSTD technicians and maintenance personnel)
will be received and addressed by the sponsor regarding the FSTD and its operation.
§ 60.9(b)(1).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00304
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26781
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE E1.—FSTD QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM—Continued
Information
(reference)
QPS requirement
E1.9. .............
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how and where the FSTD SOQ will be posted, or accessed by
an appropriate terminal or display, in or adjacent to the FSTD.
§ 60.9(b)(2).
E1.10. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor’s management representative (MR) is selected and identified by name to the NSPM.
§ 60.9(c) and Appendix E, paragraph
(d).
E1.11. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying the MR authority and responsibility for the following:
§ 60.9(c)(2), (3), and
(4).
E1.11.a. ........
Monitoring the on-going qualification of assigned FSTDs to ensure all matters regarding FSTD qualification are completed as required by this part.
E1.11.b. ........
Ensuring that the QMS is properly maintained by overseeing the QMS policies, practices, or procedures
and modifying as necessary.
E1.11.c. ........
Regularly briefing sponsor’s management on the status of the on-going FSTD qualification program and
the effectiveness and efficiency of the QMS.
E1.11.d. ........
Serving as the primary contact point for all matters between the sponsor and the NSPM regarding the
qualification of assigned FSTDs.
E1.11.e. ........
Delegating the MR assigned duties to an individual at each of the sponsor’s locations, as appropriate.
E1.12. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will:
E1.12.a. ........
Ensure that the data made available to the NSPM (the validation data package) includes the aircraft
manufacturer’s flight test data (or other data approved by the NSPM) and all relevant data developed
after the type certificate was issued (e.g., data developed in response to an airworthiness directive) if
the data results from a change in performance, handling qualities, functions, or other characteristics of
the aircraft that must be considered for flight crewmember training, evaluation, or experience requirements.
E1.12.b. ........
Notify the NSPM within 10 working days of becoming aware that an addition to or a revision of the flight
related data or airplane systems related data is available if this data is used to program or operate a
qualified FSTD.
E1.12.c. ........
Maintain a liaison with the manufacturer of the aircraft being simulated (or with the holder of the aircraft
type certificate for the aircraft being simulated if the manufacturer is no longer in business), and if appropriate, with the person who supplied the aircraft data package for the FFS for the purposes of receiving notification of data package changes.
E1.13. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will make available all special equipment and
qualified personnel needed to conduct tests during initial, continuing qualification, or special evaluations.
§ 60.14.
E1.14. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will submit to the NSPM a request to evaluate the FSTD for initial qualification at a specific level and simultaneously request the TPAA forward a
concurring letter to the NSPM; including how the MR will use qualified personnel to confirm the following:
§ 60.15(a)–(d);
§ 60.15(b);
§ 60.15(b)(i);
§ 60.15(b)(ii);
§ 60.15(b)(iii).
E1.14.a. ........
That the performance and handling qualities of the FSTD represent those of the aircraft or set of aircraft
within the normal operating envelope.
E1.14.b. ........
The FSTD systems and sub-systems (including the simulated aircraft systems) functionally represent
those in the aircraft or set of aircraft.
E1.14.c. ........
The flight deck represents the configuration of the specific type or aircraft make, model, and series aircraft being simulated, as appropriate.
E1.15. ...........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the subjective and objective tests are completed at the
sponsor’s training facility for an initial evaluation.
§ 60.15(e).
E1.16. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will update the QTG with the results of the
FAA-witnessed tests and demonstrations together with the results of the objective tests and demonstrations after the NSPM completes the evaluation for initial qualification.
§ 60.15(h).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00305
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
§ 60.13; QPS Appendices A, B, C, and
D.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26782
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE E1.—FSTD QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM—Continued
Information
(reference)
QPS requirement
E1.17. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will make the MQTG available to the NSPM
upon request.
§ 60.15(i).
E1.18. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will apply to the NSPM for additional qualification(s) to the SOQ.
§ 60.16(a);
§ 60.16(a)(1)(i);
and
§ 60.16(a)(1)(ii).
E1.19. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor completes all required Attachment 2 objective tests each year in a minimum of four evenly spaced inspections as specified in the appropriate
QPS.
§ 60.19(a)(1) QPS
Appendices A, B,
C, or D.
E1.20. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor completes and records a functional preflight
check of the FSTD within the preceding 24 hours of FSTD use, including a description of the functional
preflight.
§ 60.19(a)(2) QPS
Appendices A, B,
C, or D.
E1.21. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor schedules continuing qualification evaluations
with the NSPM.
§ 60.19(b)(2).
E1.22. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor ensures that the FSTD has received a continuing qualification evaluation at the interval described in the MQTG.
§ 60.19(b)(5)–(6).
E1.23. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure describing how discrepancies are recorded in the FSTD discrepancy log,
including:
§ 60.19(c);
§ 60.19(c)(2)(i);
§ 60.19(c)(2)(ii).
E1.23.a. ........
A description of how the discrepancies are entered and maintained in the log until corrected.
E1.23.b. ........
A description of the corrective action taken for each discrepancy, the identity of the individual taking the
action, and the date that action is taken.
E1.24. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the discrepancy log is kept in a form and manner acceptable to the Administrator and kept in or adjacent to the FSTD. (An electronic log that may be accessed
by an appropriate terminal or display in or adjacent to the FSTD is satisfactory.).
§ 60.19(c)(2)(iii).
E1.25. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure that requires each instructor, check airman, or representative of the Administrator conducting training, evaluation, or flight experience, and each person conducting the preflight inspection, who discovers a discrepancy, including any missing, malfunctioning, or inoperative
components in the FSTD, to write or cause to be written a description of that discrepancy into the discrepancy log at the end of the FSTD preflight or FSTD use session.
§ 60.20.
E1.26. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will apply for initial qualification based on the
final aircraft data package approved by the aircraft manufacturer if operating an FSTD based on an interim qualification.
§ 60.21(c).
E1.27. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor determines whether an FSTD change qualifies as a modification as defined in § 60.23.
§ 60.23(a)(1)–(2).
E1.28. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will ensure the FSTD is modified in accordance with any FSTD Directive regardless of the original qualification basis.
§ 60.23(b).
E1.29. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will notify the NSPM and TPAA of their intent
to use a modified FSTD and to ensure that the modified FSTD will not be used prior to:
§ 60.23(c)(1)(i), (ii),
and (iv).
E1.29.a. ........
Twenty-one days since the sponsor notified the NSPM and the TPAA of the proposed modification and
the sponsor has not received any response from either the NSPM or the TPAA; or
E1.29.b. ........
Twenty-one days since the sponsor notified the NSPM and the TPAA of the proposed modification and
one has approved the proposed modification and the other has not responded; or
E1.29.c. ........
The FSTD successfully completing any evaluation the NSPM may require in accordance with the standards for an evaluation for initial qualification or any part thereof before the modified FSTD is placed in
service.
E1.30. ...........
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Entry No.
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how, after an FSTD modification is approved by the NSPM,
the sponsor will:
E1.30.a. ........
Post an addendum to the SOQ until as the NSPM issues a permanent, updated SOQ.
E1.30.b. ........
Update the MQTG with current objective test results and appropriate objective data for each affected objective test or other MQTG section affected by the modification.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00306
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
§ 60.23(d)–(e).
26783
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE E1.—FSTD QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM—Continued
Information
(reference)
Entry No.
QPS requirement
E1.30.c. ........
File in the MQTG the requirement from the NSPM to make the modification and the record of the modification completion.
E1.31. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will track the length of time a component has
been missing, malfunctioning, or inoperative (MMI), including:
E1.31.a. ........
How the sponsor will post a list of MMI components in or adjacent to the FSTD.
E1.31.b. ........
How the sponsor will notify the NSPM if the MMI has not been repaired or replaced within 30 days.*
E1.32. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will notify the NSPM and how the sponsor
will seek requalification of the FSTD if the FSTD is moved and reinstalled in a different location.
§ 60.27(a)(3).
E1.33. ...........
A policy, process, or procedure specifying how the sponsor will maintain control of the following: (The
sponsor must specify how these records are maintained in plain language form or in coded form; but if
the coded form is used, the sponsor must specify how the preservation and retrieval of information will
be conducted.).
§ 60.31.
E1.33.a. ........
The MQTG and each amendment.
E1.33.b. ........
A record of all FSTD modifications required by this part since the issuance of the original SOQ.
E1.33.c. ........
Results of the qualification evaluations (initial and each upgrade) since the issuance of the original SOQ.
E1.33.d. ........
Results of the objective tests conducted in accordance with this part for a period of 2 years.
E1.33.e. ........
Results of the previous three continuing qualification evaluations, or the continuing qualification evaluations from the previous 2 years, whichever covers a longer period.
E1.33.f. .........
Comments obtained in accordance with § 60.9(b);
E1.33.g. ........
A record of all discrepancies entered in the discrepancy log over the previous 2 years, including the following:
E1.33.g.1. .....
A list of the components or equipment that were or are missing, malfunctioning, or inoperative.
E1.33.g.2. .....
The action taken to correct the discrepancy.
E1.33.g.3. .....
The date the corrective action was taken.
E1.33.g.4. .....
The identity of the person determining that the discrepancy has been corrected.
§ 60.25(b)–(c), and
QPS Appendices
A, B, C, or D.
* Note: If the sponsor has an approved discrepancy prioritization system, this item is satisfied by describing how discrepancies are prioritized,
what actions are taken, and how the sponsor will notify the NSPM if the MMI has not been repaired or replaced within the specified timeframe.
Appendix F to Part 60—Definitions and
Abbreviations for Flight Simulation Training
Devices
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin Information
1. Some of the definitions presented below
are repeated from the definitions found in 14
CFR part 1, as indicated parenthetically
End Information
lllllllllllllllllllll
Begin QPS Requirements
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
2. Definitions
1st Segment—the portion of the takeoff
profile from liftoff to gear retraction.
2nd Segment—the portion of the takeoff
profile from after gear retraction to initial
flap/slat retraction.
3rd Segment—the portion of the takeoff
profile after flap/slat retraction is complete.
Aircraft Data Package—a combination of
the various types of data used to design,
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
program, manufacture, modify, and test the
FSTD.
Airspeed—calibrated airspeed unless
otherwise specified and expressed in terms of
nautical miles per hour (knots).
Airport Model—
Class I. Whether modeling real world or
fictional airports (or landing areas for
helicopters), these airport models (or landing
areas for helicopters) are those that meet the
requirements of Table A3B or C3B, found in
attachment 2 of Appendix A or C, as
appropriate, are evaluated by the NSPM, and
are listed on the SOQ.
Class II. Whether modeling real world or
fictional airports (or landing areas for
helicopters), these airport models (or landing
areas for helicopters) are those models that
are in excess of those used for simulator
qualification at a specified level. The FSTD
sponsor is responsible for determining that
these models meet the requirements set out
in Table A3C or C3C, found in attachment 2
of Appendix A or C, as appropriate.
PO 00000
Frm 00307
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Class III. This is a special class of airport
model (or landing area for helicopters), used
for specific purposes, and includes models
that may be incomplete or inaccurate when
viewed without restriction, but when
appropriate limits are applied (e.g., ‘‘valid for
use only in visibility conditions less than 1⁄2
statue mile or RVR2400 feet,’’ ‘‘valid for use
only for approaches to Runway 22L and
22R’’), those features that may be incomplete
or inaccurate may not be able to be
recognized as such by the crewmember being
trained, tested, or checked. Class III airport
models used for training, testing, or checking
activities under this Chapter requires the
certificate holder to submit to the TPAA an
appropriate analysis of the skills, knowledge,
and abilities necessary for competent
performance of the task(s) in which this
particular model is to be used, and requires
TPAA acceptance of each Class III model.
Altitude—pressure altitude (meters or feet)
unless specified otherwise.
Angle of Attack—the angle between the
airplane longitudinal axis and the relative
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
26784
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
wind vector projected onto the airplane plane
of symmetry.
Automatic Testing—FSTD testing where all
stimuli are under computer control.
Bank—the airplane attitude with respect to
or around the longitudinal axis, or roll angle
(degrees).
Breakout—the force required at the pilot’s
primary controls to achieve initial movement
of the control position.
Certificate Holder—a person issued a
certificate under parts 119, 141, or 142 of this
chapter or a person holding an approved
course of training for flight engineers in
accordance with part 63 of this chapter.
Closed Loop Testing—a test method where
the input stimuli are generated by controllers
that drive the FSTD to follow a pre-defined
target response.
Computer Controlled Aircraft—an aircraft
where all pilot inputs to the control surfaces
are transferred and augmented by computers.
Confined Area (helicopter operations)—an
area where the flight of the helicopter is
limited in some direction by terrain or the
presence of natural or man-made
obstructions (e.g., a clearing in the woods, a
city street, or a road bordered by trees or
power lines are regarded as confined areas).
Control Sweep—movement of the
appropriate pilot controller from neutral to
an extreme limit in one direction (Forward,
Aft, Right, or Left), a continuous movement
back through neutral to the opposite extreme
position, and then a return to the neutral
position.
Convertible FSTD—an FSTD in which
hardware and software can be changed so
that the FSTD becomes a replica of a different
model, usually of the same type aircraft. The
same FSTD platform, flight deck shell,
motion system, visual system, computers,
and peripheral equipment can be used in
more than one simulation.
Critical Engine Parameter—the parameter
that is the most accurate measure of
propulsive force.
Deadband—the amount of movement of
the input for a system for which there is no
reaction in the output or state of the system
observed.
Distance—the length of space between two
points, expressed in terms of nautical miles
unless otherwise specified.
Discrepancy—as used in this part, an
aspect of the FSTD that is not correct with
respect to the aircraft being simulated. This
includes missing, malfunctioning, or
inoperative components that are required to
be present and operate correctly for training,
evaluation, and experience functions to be
creditable. It also includes errors in the
documentation used to support the FSTD
(e.g., MQTG errors, information missing from
the MQTG, or required statements from
appropriately qualified personnel).
Downgrade—a permanent change in the
qualification level of an FSTD to a lower
level.
Driven—a test method where the input
stimulus or variable is positioned by
automatic means, usually a computer input.
Electronic Copy of the MQTG—an
electronic copy of the MQTG provided by an
electronic scan presented in a format,
acceptable to the NSPM.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
Electronic Master Qualification Test
Guide—an electronic version of the MQTG
(eMQTG), where all objective data obtained
from airplane testing, or another approved
source, together with correlating objective
test results obtained from the performance of
the FSTD and a description of the equipment
necessary to perform the evaluation for the
initial and the continuing qualification
evaluations is stored, archived, or presented
in either reformatted or digitized electronic
format.
Engine—as used in this part, the appliance
or structure that supplies propulsive force for
movement of the aircraft: i.e., The turbine
engine for turbine powered aircraft; the
turbine engine and propeller assembly for
turbo-propeller powered aircraft; and the
reciprocating engine and propeller assembly
for reciprocating engine powered aircraft. For
purposes of this part, engine failure is the
failure of either the engine or propeller
assembly to provide thrust higher than idle
power thrust due to a failure of either the
engine or the propeller assembly.
Evaluation—with respect to an individual,
the checking, testing, or review associated
with flight crewmember qualification,
training, and certification under parts 61, 63,
121, or 135 of this chapter. With respect to
an FSTD, the qualification activities for the
device (e.g., the objective and subjective
tests, the inspections, or the continuing
qualification evaluations) associated with the
requirements of this part.
Fictional Airport—a visual model of an
airport that is a collection of ‘‘non-real
world’’ terrain, instrument approach
procedures, navigation aids, maps, and visual
modeling detail sufficient to enable
completion of an Airline Transport Pilot
Certificate or Type Rating.
Flight Experience—recency of flight
experience for landing credit purposes.
Flight Simulation Training Device
(FSTD)—a full flight simulator (FFS) or a
flight training device (FTD). (Part 1)
Flight Test Data—(a subset of objective
data) aircraft data collected by the aircraft
manufacturer or other acceptable data
supplier during an aircraft flight test
program.
Flight Training Device (FTD)—a replica of
aircraft instruments, equipment, panels, and
controls in an open flight deck area or an
enclosed aircraft flight deck replica. It
includes the equipment and computer
programs necessary to represent aircraft (or
set of aircraft) operations in ground and flight
conditions having the full range of
capabilities of the systems installed in the
device as described in part 60 of this chapter
and the qualification performance standard
(QPS) for a specific FTD qualification level.
(Part 1)
Free Response—the response of the FSTD
after completion of a control input or
disturbance.
Frozen—a test condition where one or
more variables are held constant with time.
FSTD Approval—the extent to which an
FSTD may be used by a certificate holder as
authorized by the FAA.
FSTD Directive—a document issued by the
FAA to an FSTD sponsor requiring a
modification to the FSTD due to a safety-of-
PO 00000
Frm 00308
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
flight issue and amending the qualification
basis for the FSTD.
FSTD Latency—the additional time for the
FSTD to respond to input that is beyond the
response time of the aircraft.
FSTD Performance—the overall
performance of the FSTD, including aircraft
performance (e.g., thrust/drag relationships,
climb, range) and flight and ground handling.
Full Flight Simulator (FFS)—a replica of a
specific type, make, model, or series aircraft.
It includes the equipment and computer
programs necessary to represent aircraft
operations in ground and flight conditions, a
visual system providing an out-of-the-flight
deck view, a system that provides cues at
least equivalent to those of a three-degree-offreedom motion system, and has the full
range of capabilities of the systems installed
in the device as described in part 60 of this
chapter and the QPS for a specific FFS
qualification level. (Part 1)
Gate Clutter—the static and moving ground
traffic (e.g., other airplanes; tugs; power or
baggage carts; fueling, catering, or cargo
trucks; pedestrians) presented to pose a
potential conflict with the simulated aircraft
during ground operations around the point
where the simulated airplane is to be parked
between flights
Generic Airport Model—a Class III visual
model that combines correct navigation aids
for a real world airport with a visual model
that does not depict that same airport.
Grandfathering—as used in this part, the
practice of assigning a qualification basis for
an FSTD based on the period of time during
which a published set of standards governed
the requirements for the initial and
continuing qualification of FSTDs. Each
FSTD manufactured during this specified
period of time is ‘‘grandfathered’’ or held to
the standards that were in effect during that
time period. The grandfathered standards
remain applicable to each FSTD
manufactured during the stated time period
regardless of any subsequent modification to
those standards and regardless of the
sponsor, as long as the FSTD remains
qualified or is maintained in a non-qualified
status in accordance with the specific
requirements and time periods prescribed in
this part.
Gross Weight—For objective test purposes:
Basic Operating Weight (BOW)—the empty
weight of the aircraft plus the weight of the
following: Normal oil quantity; lavatory
servicing fluid; potable water; required
crewmembers and their baggage; and
emergency equipment.
Light Gross Weight—a weight chosen by
the sponsor or data provider that is not more
than 120% of the BOW of the aircraft being
simulated or the minimum practical
operating weight of the test aircraft.
Medium Gross Weight—a weight chosen by
the sponsor or data provider that is within
10% of the average of the numerical values
of the BOW and the maximum certificated
gross weight.
Near Maximum Gross Weight—a weight
chosen by the sponsor or data provider that
is not less than the BOW of the aircraft being
simulated plus 80% of the difference
between the maximum certificated gross
weight (either takeoff weight or landing
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
weight, as appropriate for the test) and the
BOW.
Ground Effect—the change in aerodynamic
characteristics due to of the change in the
airflow past the aircraft caused by the
proximity of the earth’s surface to the
airplane.
Hands Off—a test maneuver conducted
without pilot control inputs.
Hands On—a test maneuver conducted
with pilot control inputs as required.
Heave—FSTD movement with respect to or
along the vertical axis.
Height—the height above ground level (or
AGL) expressed in meters or feet.
‘‘In Use’’ Runway—as used in this part, the
runway that is currently selected, able to be
used for takeoffs and landings, and has the
surface lighting and markings required by
this part. Also known as the ‘‘active’’
runway.
Integrated Testing—testing of the FSTD so
that all aircraft system models are active and
contribute appropriately to the results. With
integrated testing, none of the models used
are substituted with models or other
algorithms intended for testing only.
Irreversible Control System—a control
system where movement of the control
surface will not backdrive the pilot’s control
on the flight deck.
Locked—a test condition where one or
more variables are held constant with time.
Manual Testing—FSTD testing conducted
without computer inputs except for initial
setup, and all modules of the simulation are
active.
Master Qualification Test Guide (MQTG)—
the FAA-approved Qualification Test Guide
with the addition of the FAA-witnessed test
results, applicable to each individual FSTD.
Medium—the normal operational weight
for a given flight segment.
National Simulator Program Manager
(NSPM)—the FAA manager responsible for
the overall administration and direction of
the National Simulator Program (NSP), or a
person approved by that FAA manager.
Near Limiting Performance—the
performance level the operating engine must
be required to achieve to have sufficient
power to land a helicopter after experiencing
a single engine failure during takeoff of a
multiengine helicopter. The operating engine
must be required to operate within at least 5
percent of the maximum RPM or temperature
limits of the gas turbine or power turbine, or
operate within at least 5 percent of the
maximum drive train torque limits. Near
limiting performance is based on the existing
combination of density altitude, temperature,
and helicopter gross weight.
Nominal—the normal operating
configuration, atmospheric conditions, and
flight parameters for the specified flight
segment.
Non-Normal Control—a term used in
reference to Computer Controlled Aircraft. It
is the state where one or more of the
intended control, augmentation, or protection
functions are not fully working. Note:
Specific terms such as ALTERNATE,
DIRECT, SECONDARY, or BACKUP may be
used to define an actual level of degradation.
Normal Control—a term used in reference
to Computer Controlled Aircraft. It is the
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
state where the intended control,
augmentation, and protection functions are
fully working.
Objective Data—quantitative data,
acceptable to the NSPM, used to evaluate the
FSTD.
Objective Test—a quantitative
measurement and evaluation of FSTD
performance.
Pitch—the airplane attitude with respect
to, or around, the lateral axis expressed in
degrees.
Power Lever Angle (PLA)—the angle of the
pilot’s primary engine control lever(s) on the
flight deck. This may also be referred to as
THROTTLE or POWER LEVER.
Predicted Data—estimations or
extrapolations of existing flight test data or
data from other simulation models using
engineering analyses, engineering
simulations, design data, or wind tunnel
data.
Protection Functions—systems functions
designed to protect an airplane from
exceeding its flight maneuver limitations.
Pulse Input—a step input to a control
followed by an immediate return to the
initial position.
Qualification Level—the categorization of
an FSTD established by the NSPM based on
the FSTDs demonstrated technical and
operational capabilities as prescribed in this
part.
Qualification Performance Standard
(QPS)—the collection of procedures and
criteria used when conducting objective and
subjective tests, to establish FSTD
qualification levels. The QPS are published
in the appendices to this part, as follows:
Appendix A, for Airplane Simulators;
Appendix B, for Airplane Flight Training
Devices; Appendix C, for Helicopter
Simulators; Appendix D, for Helicopter
Flight Training Devices; Appendix E, for
Quality Management Systems for Flight
Simulation Training Devices; and Appendix
F, for Definitions and Abbreviations for
Flight Simulation Training Devices.
Qualification Test Guide (QTG)—the
primary reference document used for
evaluating an aircraft FSTD. It contains test
results, statements of compliance and
capability, the configuration of the aircraft
simulated, and other information for the
evaluator to assess the FSTD against the
applicable regulatory criteria.
Quality Management System (QMS)—a
flight simulation quality-systems that can be
used for external quality-assurance purposes.
It is designed to identify the processes
needed, determine the sequence and
interaction of the processes, determine
criteria and methods required to ensure the
effective operation and control of the
processes, ensure the availability of
information necessary to support the
operation and monitoring of the processes,
measure, monitor, and analyze the processes,
and implement the actions necessary to
achieve planned results.
Real-World Airport—as used in this part in
reference to airport visual models, a
computer generated visual depiction of an
existing airport.
Representative—when used as an adjective
in this part, typical, demonstrative, or
PO 00000
Frm 00309
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
26785
characteristic of, the feature being described.
For example, ‘‘representative sampling of
tests’’ means a sub-set of the complete set of
all tests such that the sample includes one or
more of the tests in each of the major
categories, the results of which provide the
evaluator with an overall understanding of
the performance and handling characteristics
of the FSTD.
Reversible Control System—a control
system in which movement of the control
surface will backdrive the pilot’s control on
the flight deck.
Roll—the airplane attitude with respect to,
or around, the longitudinal axis expressed in
degrees.
Set of Aircraft—aircraft that share similar
handling and operating characteristics,
similar operating envelopes, and have the
same number and type of engines or
powerplants.
Sideslip Angle—the angle between the
relative wind vector and the airplane plane
of symmetry. (Note: this definition replaces
the current definition of ‘‘sideslip.’’)
Simulation Quality Management System
(SQMS)—the elements of a quality
management system for FSTD continuing
qualification.
Snapshot—a presentation of one or more
variables at a given instant of time.
Special Evaluation—an evaluation of the
FSTD for purposes other than initial,
upgrade, or continuing qualification.
Circumstances that may require a special
evaluation include movement of the FSTD to
a different location, or an update to FSTD
software or hardware that might affect
performance or flying qualities.
Sponsor—a certificate holder who seeks or
maintains FSTD qualification and is
responsible for the prescribed actions as
prescribed in this part and the QPS for the
appropriate FSTD and qualification level.
Statement of Compliance and Capability
(SOC)—a declaration that a specific
requirement has been met and explaining
how the requirement was met (e.g., gear
modeling approach, coefficient of friction
sources). The SOC must also describe the
capability of the FSTD to meet the
requirement, including references to sources
of information for showing compliance,
rationale to explain how the referenced
material is used, mathematical equations and
parameter values used, and conclusions
reached.
Step Input—an abrupt control input held at
a constant value.
Subjective Test—a qualitative assessment
of the performance and operation of the
FSTD.
Surge—FSTD movement with respect to or
along the longitudinal axis.
Sway—FSTD movement with respect to or
along the lateral axis.
Tf—Total time of the flare maneuver.
Ti—Total time from initial throttle
movement until a 10% response of a critical
engine parameter.
Tt—Total time from initial throttle
movement to an increase of 90% of go
around power or a decrease of 90% from
maximum take-off power.
Time History—a presentation of the change
of a variable with respect to time.
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
26786
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and Regulations
sroberts on PROD1PC70 with RULES
Training Program Approval Authority
(TPAA)—a person authorized by the
Administrator to approve the aircraft flight
training program in which the FSTD will be
used.
Training Restriction—a temporary
condition where an FSTD with missing,
malfunctioning, or inoperative (MMI)
components may continue to be used at the
qualification level indicated on its SOQ, but
restricted from completing the tasks for
which the correct function of the MMI
component is required.
Transport Delay or ‘‘Throughput’’—the
total FSTD system processing time required
for an input signal from a pilot primary flight
control until motion system, visual system,
or instrument response. It is the overall time
delay incurred from signal input to output
response. It does not include the
characteristic delay of the airplane simulated.
Update—an improvement to or
modernization of the quality or the accuracy
of the FSTD without affecting the
qualification level of the FSTD.
Upgrade—the improvement or
enhancement of an FSTD for the purpose of
achieving a higher qualification level.
Validation Data—objective data used to
determine if the FSTD performance is within
the tolerances prescribed in the QPS.
Validation Test—an objective test where
FSTD parameters are compared to the
relevant validation data to ensure that the
FSTD performance is within the tolerances
prescribed in the QPS.
Visual Data Base—a display that may
include one or more airport models.
Visual System Response Time—the
interval from a control input to the
completion of the visual display scan of the
first video field containing the resulting
different information.
Yaw—the airplane attitude with respect to,
or around, the vertical axis expressed in
degrees.
3. Abbreviations
AFM Airplane Flight Manual.
AGL Above Ground Level (meters or feet).
AOA Angle of Attack (degrees).
APD Aircrew Program Designee.
CCA Computer Controlled Aircraft.
cd/m2 candela/meter2, 3.4263 candela/m2 =
1 ft-Lambert.
CFR Code of Federal Regulations.
cm(s) centimeter, centimeters.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
23:54 May 08, 2008
Jkt 214001
daN decaNewtons, one (1) decaNewton =
2.27 pounds.
deg(s) degree, degrees.
DOF Degrees-of-freedom.
eMQTG Electronic Master Qualification
Test Guide.
EPR Engine Pressure Ratio.
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
(U.S.).
FATO Final Approach and Take Off area
fpm feet per minute.
ft foot/feet, 1 foot = 0.304801 meters.
ft-Lambert foot-Lambert, 1 ft-Lambert =
3.4263 candela/m2.
g Acceleration due to Gravity (meters or
feet/sec2); 1g = 9.81 m/sec2 or 32.2 feet/
sec2.
G/S Glideslope.
IATA International Airline Transport
Association.
ICAO International Civil Aviation
Organization.
IGE In ground effect.
ILS Instrument Landing System.
IOS Instructor Operating Station.
IQTG International Qualification Test
Guide.
km Kilometers; 1 km = 0.62137 Statute
Miles.
kPa KiloPascal (Kilo Newton/Meters2). 1
psi = 6.89476 kPa.
kts Knots calibrated airspeed unless
otherwise specified, 1 knot = 0.5148 m/sec
or 1.689 ft/sec.
lb(s) pound(s), one (1) pound = 0.44
decaNewton.
LDP Landing decision point.
MQTG Master Qualification Test Guide
M,m Meters, 1 Meter = 3.28083 feet.
Min(s) Minute, minutes.
MLG Main Landing Gear.
Mpa MegaPascals (1 psi = 6894.76 pascals).
ms millisecond(s).
N NORMAL CONTROL Used in reference
to Computer Controlled Aircraft.
nm Nautical Mile(s) 1 Nautical Mile = 6,080
feet.
NN NON-NORMAL CONTROL Used in
reference to Computer Controlled Aircraft.
N1 Low Pressure Rotor revolutions per
minute, expressed in percent of maximum.
N2 High Pressure Rotor revolutions per
minute, expressed in percent of maximum.
N3 High Pressure Rotor revolutions per
minute, expressed in percent of maximum.
NSPM National Simulator Program
Manager.
PO 00000
Frm 00310
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
NWA Nosewheel Angle (degrees).
OGE Out of ground effect.
PAPI Precision Approach Path Indicator
System.
Pf Impact or Feel Pressure, often expressed
as ‘‘q.’’
PLA Power Lever Angle.
PLF Power for Level Flight.
psi pounds per square inch.
QPS Qualification Performance Standard.
QTG Qualification Test Guide.
RAE Royal Aerospace Establishment.
R/C Rate of Climb (meters/sec or feet/min).
R/D Rate of Descent (meters/sec or feet/
min).
REIL Runway End Identifier Lights.
RVR Runway Visual Range (meters or feet).
s second(s).
sec(s) second, seconds.
sm Statute Mile(s) 1 Statute Mile = 5,280
feet.
SMGCS Surface Movement Guidance and
Control System.
SOC Statement of Compliance and
Capability.
SOQ Statement of Qualification.
TIR Type Inspection Report.
TLOF Touchdown and Loft Off area.
T/O Takeoff.
VASI Visual Approach Slope Indicator
System.
VGS Visual Ground Segment.
V1 Decision speed.
V2 Takeoff safety speed.
Vmc Minimum Control Speed.
Vmca Minimum Control Speed in the air.
Vmcg Minimum Control Speed on the
ground.
Vmcl Minimum Control Speed—Landing.
Vmu The speed at which the last main
landing gear leaves the ground.
VR Rotate Speed.
VS Stall Speed or minimum speed in the
stall.
WAT Weight, Altitude, Temperature.
End QPS Requirements
Issued in Washington, DC, on April 17,
2008.
John M. Allen,
Acting Director Flight Standards Service.
[FR Doc. 08–1183 Filed 4–30–08; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 4910–13–P
E:\FR\FM\09MYR2.SGM
09MYR2
Agencies
[Federal Register Volume 73, Number 91 (Friday, May 9, 2008)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 26478-26786]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Printing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 08-1183]
[[Page 26477]]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Part II
Department of Transportation
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Federal Aviation Administration
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
14 CFR Part 60
Flight Simulation Training Device Initial and Continuing Qualification
and Use; Final Rule
Federal Register / Vol. 73, No. 91 / Friday, May 9, 2008 / Rules and
Regulations
[[Page 26478]]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
Federal Aviation Administration
14 CFR Part 60
[Docket No. FAA-2002-12461; Amendment No. 60-3]
RIN 2120-AJ12
Flight Simulation Training Device Initial and Continuing
Qualification and Use
AGENCY: Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), DOT.
ACTION: Final rule.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: This action amends the Qualification Performance Standards
(QPS) for flight simulation training devices (FSTD) to provide greater
harmonization with international standards for simulation. In addition,
the rule adds a new level of simulation for helicopter flight training
devices (FTD) and establishes FSTD Directive 1, which requires all
existing FSTD airport models that are beyond the number of airport
models required for qualification to meet specified requirements. The
intended effect of this rule is to ensure that the flight training and
testing environment is accurate and realistic. Except for the
requirements of FSTD Directive 1, these technical requirements do not
apply to simulators qualified before May 30, 2008. This rule results in
minimal to no cost increases for manufacturers and sponsors.
DATES: These amendments become effective May 30, 2008.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: For technical questions concerning
this final rule, contact Edward Cook, Air Transportation Division (AFS-
200), Flight Standards Service, Federal Aviation Administration, 100
Hartsfield Centre Parkway, Suite 400, Atlanta, GA 30354; telephone:
404-832-4700; e-mail: Edward.D.Cook@faa.gov. For legal questions
concerning this final rule, contact Anne Bechdolt, Office of Chief
Counsel (AGC-200), Federal Aviation Administration, 800 Independence
Avenue, SW., Washington, DC 20591; telephone 202-267-7230; e-mail:
Anne.Bechdolt@faa.gov.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Authority for This Rulemaking
This rulemaking is promulgated under the authority described in 49
U.S.C. 44701. Under that section, the FAA is charged with regulating
air commerce in a way that best promotes safety of civil aircraft.
Table of Contents
I. Background
A. Summary of the NPRM
B. Summary of the Final Rule
C. Summary of Comments
II. Discussion of the Final Rule and Comments
A. Administrative
B. Simulator Qualification and Evaluation
C. FSTD Testing: Objective and Subjective
1. General
2. Visual Systems
3. Motion or Vibration Requirements
4. Sound Requirements
D. Helicopters
E. Quality Management System (QMS)
F. Miscellaneous
III. Regulatory Evaluation, Regulatory Flexibility Determination,
International Trade Impact Assessment, and Unfunded Mandates
Assessment
IV. The Amendment
I. Background
On October 30, 2006, the FAA published Title 14, Code of Federal
Regulations, Part 60, with an effective date of October 30, 2007 (71 FR
63392). The intent of the rule was to promote standardization and
accountability for FSTD maintenance, qualification, and evaluation. The
regulation codified the standards contained in advisory circulars (ACs)
and implemented the Qualification Performance Standards (QPS)
appendices format. The QPS appendices allow regulatory requirements and
corresponding information to be presented in one location. The QPS
appendices format promotes ease of use and greater insight about the
FAA's intent behind the regulation and the required and approved
methods of compliance. On October 22, 2007 (72 FR 59598), the FAA
delayed the effective date of part 60 to coincide with the effective
date of this final rule, which revises the appendices of part 60 that
were originally published on October 30, 2006.
A. Summary of the Notice of Proposed Rulemaking (NPRM)
On October 22, 2007, the FAA published an NPRM (72 FR 59600) to
revise the QPS appendices. The primary purpose of the NPRM was to
ensure that the flight training and testing environment is accurate and
realistic and to provide greater harmonization with the international
standards documents for simulation issued by the Joint Aviation
Authority (JAA) (JAR-STD 1A, Aeroplanes, and JAR-STD 1H, Helicopters),
and the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) (Doc 9625-AN/
938, as amended, Manual of Criteria for the Qualification of Flight
Simulators). The proposed requirements were expected to reduce expenses
and workload for simulator sponsors by eliminating conflicts between
the U.S. standards and the standards of other civil aviation
authorities. The proposed amendments incorporated technological
advances in simulation and standardized the initial and continuing
qualification requirements for FSTDs to harmonize with the
international standards documents. The comment period for the NPRM
closed December 21, 2007.
B. Summary of the Final Rule
This final rule:
Provides a listing of the tasks for which a simulator may
be qualified.
Requires, during aircraft certification testing, the
collection of objective test data for specific FSTD functions,
including: Idle and emergency descents and pitch trim rates for use in
airplane simulators; engine inoperative rejected takeoffs for use in
helicopter simulators; and takeoffs, hover, vertical climbs, and normal
landings for use in helicopter FTDs.
Provides in the QPS appendices additional information for
sponsors on the testing requirements for FSTDs, including the use of
alternative data sources when complete flight test data are not
available or less technically complex levels of simulation are being
developed.
Clarifies and standardizes existing requirements for
motion, visual, and sound systems, including subjective buffeting
motions, visual scene content, and sound replication.
Requires, by FSTD Directive 1, all existing FSTD airport
models used for training, testing, or checking under this chapter that
are beyond the number of airport models required for qualification to
meet the requirements described in Table A3C (Appendix A, Attachment 3)
or Table C3C (Appendix C, Attachment 3), as appropriate.
Except for FSTD Directive 1, manufacturers and sponsors are not
required to incorporate any of the changes listed above for existing
FSTDs. The appendices and attachments to part 60 affected by this final
rule only apply to FSTDs that come into service after part 60 is
effective (May 30, 2008). This final rule results in minimal to no cost
increases for manufacturers and sponsors.
C. Summary of Comments
The FAA received 18 comments on the proposed rule. Commenters
include airlines (Northwest, American, United, and FedEx), industry
organizations (Air Transport Association (ATA) and Helicopter
Association International (HAI)), training organizations (Alteon),
manufacturers (Boeing, Thales, CAE, and Rockwell Collins), and
individuals.
[[Page 26479]]
All of the commenters generally supported the proposal, but the
majority of commenters had specific suggestions to revise the proposed
rule. Most of these suggested revisions were technical edits. None of
the comments resulted in any substantive changes to the proposed
requirements, and we have incorporated the suggestions where
appropriate. We have also made minor editorial revisions where
appropriate.
The FAA received comments on the following general topics:
Administrative.
Simulator Qualification and Evaluation.
FSTD Testing: Objective and Subjective.
General.
Visual Systems.
Motion or Vibration Requirements.
Sound Requirements.
Helicopters.
Quality Management System (QMS).
Miscellaneous.
II. Discussion of the Final Rule and Comments
A. Administrative
The ATA recommended that the FAA make the effective date of the
final rule at least 90 days following the publication date.
Part 60 has been available to the public for review for over 1
year. The revisions to the appendices of Part 60 reflect international
standards that have been in existence for more than 4 years. Further,
when the FAA delayed the effective date to Part 60, we also delayed the
compliance dates of certain sections of the rule to provide adequate
time for transition. Because of the notice provided and delayed
compliance dates of certain sections, the FAA has determined that
delaying the effective date by 90 days is not necessary.
Several of the comments were beyond the scope of the proposal. For
example, CAE and others suggested including objective tests for Heads-
Up Displays (HUD) and Enhanced Visual Systems (EVS). Further, several
commenters suggested adopting standards currently being developed by
the International Working Group (IWG) of the Royal Aeronautical Society
(RAeS).
The FAA has not addressed in detail the comments that are beyond
the scope of the NPRM. In addition, the FAA has determined it would be
premature for the FAA to incorporate into this final rule the standards
currently under review by the IWG. Once the RAeS has adopted the IWG's
recommendations, the FAA will review them for incorporation in the QPS
appendices.
Several commenters noted differences between the proposed standards
and the current international standards and suggested adopting the
international standards. As stated, one of the purposes of this rule is
to harmonize with the current international standards documents for
simulation issued by the JAA and ICAO. These recommendations are within
the scope of the proposal and have been incorporated into this final
rule as appropriate.
Some commenters to the proposed rule noted typographical and
formatting errors in the proposal. The Office of the Federal Register
issued a correction document addressing some of the these errors on
March 5, 2008 (73 FR 11995). The FAA has addressed the remaining errors
in this document.
B. Simulator Qualification and Evaluation
CAE and others noted that the listing of tasks for which an FSTD
may be qualified do not correspond to the tasks set forth in the FAA
Air Carrier Operations Inspector's Handbook and are not the same as
those tasks in the tables that outline the Functions and Subjective
tests for which each FSTD may be evaluated. Commenters also suggested
that the objective and subjective tests used to evaluate the FSTD be
aligned with the tasks for which the FSTD may be qualified.
The FAA recognizes that the FSTD qualification tasks do not mirror
the tasks set forth in the FAA Air Carrier Operations Inspector's
Handbook, the ``Functions and Subjective tests'' tables in Attachment 3
of Appendices A-D, and the ``Tasks vs. Simulator Level'' tables in
Attachment 1 of Appendices A-D. However, there are differences between
the tasks used to evaluate the handling, performance, and other
characteristics of the FSTD and those tasks for which an FSTD may be
qualified for pilot training, testing, or checking activities. Thus,
the list of tasks set forth in the ``Functions and Subjective tests''
tables and ``Tasks vs. Simulator Level'' tables are not necessarily the
same, nor should they be the same.
CAE, ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others asked whether the Level B
simulator authorizations in Table A1B should be listed as an ``X''
instead of an ``R'' for most of the landing tasks.
As the legend in Table A1B indicates, the ``R'' denotes
authorization for Recurrent activities while the ``X'' denotes
authorization for Initial, Transition, Upgrade, and Recurrent
activities. The landing tasks for Level B simulators are restricted to
Recurrent activities and the ``R'' in the table at those points is the
correct reference. However, the FAA acknowledges that the
authorizations for Taxiing and for Normal and Crosswind Takeoffs for
the Level B simulator were inadvertently left blank, and the FAA has
placed an ``R'' in those positions in this table, indicating an
authorization for Recurrent activities in this level of simulation.
American, the ATA, and others stated that the differences between
``update'' and ``upgrade,'' as used in Appendix A, Paragraph 13,
Previously Qualified FFS, subparagraph ``h,'' were not clear. They
recommended clarifying the differences and moving the subparagraph from
the information section to the QPS Requirements section.
The information in subparagraph ``h'' allows for Full Flight
Simulators (FFS) to be updated without requiring an evaluation under
the new standards. Because this language is permissive in nature, we
have moved it to the QPS Requirements section as requested. To clarify
the meaning of these terms, we have added a definition of ``update''
that reflects current practice to Appendix F.
CAE and others suggested revising the note in Table A1B, entry 3.f,
Recovery from Unusual Attitudes, by replacing the statement ``supported
by applicable simulation validation data'' with ``supported by the
simulation models.''
The suggested revised language would allow an individual to go
beyond the flight-test-validated flight-envelope in a flight simulator.
This is not an acceptable practice because of the lack of information
about aircraft performance and handling beyond those limits. Therefore,
the FAA has not adopted the recommendation.
The ATA, Northwest, and others suggested clarifying that the 24-
hour ``look back'' period for the functional preflight check (Table E1,
entry E1.20) is from the beginning of the scheduled training period.
Additionally, commenters questioned whether the FSTD use-period, if
started within 24 hours of a functional preflight check, could continue
beyond that 24-hour ``look-back'' period and whether the functional
preflight check is required for Level 4 ``touch screen'' FTDs. Further,
commenters questioned whether Level 4 FTDs remain under the
responsibility of the Training Program Approval Authority (TPAA).
The proposed requirement for conducting a functional preflight
check within 24 hours prior to using the FSTD is to ensure that
technical personnel with the requisite preflight training have
determined the readiness level of the FSTD. An FSTD use-period does not
begin unless a functional preflight check
[[Page 26480]]
has been completed in the previous 24 hours. If a training session
begins near the end of the 24 hours after the functional preflight
check was completed, the training session may continue beyond that 24
hours. However, any subsequent training session may not begin until
another functional preflight check is conducted.
The National Simulator Program Manager (NSPM) is the FAA manager
responsible for the evaluation and qualification of all FSTDs qualified
under part 60, including Level 4 FTDs. The NSPM will continue to
exercise this responsibility through inspectors and engineers assigned
to the National Simulator Program (NSP) staff and others to whom the
NSPM may delegate that responsibility and authority. This
responsibility and authority is not intended to undermine or compromise
the duties and responsibilities of the assigned TPAA with regard to the
approved use of the FSTD.
CAE and others questioned when it would be necessary to complete an
additional initial qualification evaluation after a modification to the
FSTD. They also asked what principles would be used in determining
whether an evaluation for additional authorization(s) is necessary and
if an evaluation is necessary, when it must take place.
Whether a modification necessitates an additional initial
qualification evaluation, necessitates part of an initial qualification
evaluation, or does not necessitate an additional evaluation, depends
on (1) the extent of the modification; (2) whether the modification
impacts, or is impacted by, other systems or equipment in the FSTD; and
(3) whether, as a result of the modification, the FSTD operation is
consistent with the airplane system it is simulating. After review of
these factors, the FAA will determine on a case-by-case basis whether
an evaluation for additional authorizations is required and when it
will take place.
The ATA, Northwest, and others suggested that the windshear
provisions in Table A1A for each Level C and Level D FFS not be
required for evaluation and qualification purposes because not all
aircraft are required to have windshear equipment and not all pilots
are required to train on recovery from inadvertent windshear
encounters. Further, the commenters also suggested clarifying the
aircraft conditions under which the windshear demonstrations must be
conducted.
Only operations conducted in accordance with 14 CFR part 121 that
use aircraft listed in Sec. 121.358 require windshear training for
crewmembers. Accordingly, the FAA has modified Table A1A to address
only these operations. We have also clarified the aircraft conditions
under which the windshear demonstrations must be conducted.
C. FSTD Testing: Objective and Subjective
1. General
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others recommended requiring Level A
and Level B simulators to meet the standards in Table A2A, entry 1.b.7,
Dynamic Engine Failure After Takeoff.
The standards for testing of dynamic engine failures after takeoff
were first established by ICAO and were limited to advanced simulators,
now referred to as Level C and Level D. One purpose of this final rule
is to harmonize FAA standards with current international standards.
Because current international standards do not set forth standards for
testing dynamic engine failure after takeoff for level A and B
simulators, the FAA has not adopted the recommendation.
The ATA, Northwest, Boeing, CAE, and others suggested the FAA
review all the references in Appendix A, Attachment 2, Table A2A, Table
of Objective Tests, that include references to Computer Controlled
Aircraft (CCA) to ensure that the control state testing requirements
(i.e., normal control state or non-normal control state) are correctly
addressed.
The FAA recognizes that there were errors made in the proposal
regarding CCA testing requirements. The FAA has reviewed the CCA
testing requirements to address the correct control state and made
appropriate revisions.
CAE, Rockwell Collins, ATA, and others submitted several comments
on Appendix A, Attachment 1, Table A1A, General Simulator Requirements.
CAE suggested that (1) the manual and automatic testing, described in
entry 2.f, and simulator control feel dynamics, as described in entry
3.e, apply to Level A and Level B simulators in addition to Level C and
Level D simulators; (2) the NSPM should further clarify the number of
malfunctions that are required or provide a list of the necessary
malfunctions that should be present; and (3) the instructor controls,
as described in entry 4.c, either list all the expected environmental
conditions over which the instructor should have control or remove the
reference to ``wind speed and direction.'' The ATA and others requested
that the statements about additional field-of-view capability for Level
A and Level B simulators in entry 6.b of Table A1A be moved to the
Information/Notes column.
Automatic testing and control feel dynamics was first required in
1980 with the publication of the FAA's Advanced Simulation Plan and was
limited to advanced simulators, now referred to as Level C and Level D.
The FAA is not expanding the requirements for automatic testing and
control feel dynamics testing to Level A and Level B simulators because
that would result in differing technical requirements for these
simulator levels while authorizing the same training, testing, and
checking tasks. The additional field-of-view reference in entry 6.b was
designed to allow the option of including a larger field-of-view than
the provision requires, with the understanding that the minimum fields
of view would have to be retained. This reference is more informative
than regulatory and the FAA has moved the statements to the
Information/Notes column.
The ATA and others suggested defining the term ``least augmented
state'' as used in Appendix A, Attachment 2, paragraph 2.j, and
requested confirmation that the ``least augmented state'' is one that
the pilot may select using normal switches found in the airplane flight
deck.
The FAA has determined that a general definition of the term
``least augmented state'' is not appropriate because these states are
dependent on the aircraft type involved. Additionally, the least
augmented state is not necessarily achieved by the use of switches
found in the flight deck. Therefore, the FAA will evaluate FSTDs in
accordance with the least augmented state data supplied by the aircraft
manufacturer or other data supplier.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others suggested that the primary
controls of the simulated aircraft should be tested objectively to
verify correct forces and responses whether simulated aircraft parts or
actual aircraft parts are used. Further, they recommended that the FAA
require a Statement of Compliance and Capability (SOC) that describes
how and where the control forces are generated in the aircraft, and
lists all hardware required to generate these control forces.
The FAA does not require testing of flight controls in these
circumstances because these aircraft controls must be maintained as if
they were installed in an aircraft to provide crewmembers the same
control feedback as felt in the actual aircraft. The sponsor is
required to provide a statement that the aircraft hardware meets the
appropriate manufacturer's specifications for the controls and the
sponsor must have
[[Page 26481]]
information supporting that statement available for NSPM review.
Accordingly, the FAA has not adopted the recommendation.
Boeing suggested, with regard to Table A2A, entry 1.c.2, that the
test for ``One Engine Inoperative'' should be named ``One Engine
Inoperative, Second Segment Climb.''
The test is required for airplanes certificated under both parts 23
and 25. The term ``Second Segment Climb'' applies only to airplanes
certificated under part 25. Therefore, the FAA has not adopted the
suggested change.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, CAE, and others recommended that the
tests in entries 1.e.1 and 1.e.2, Stopping Time and Distance, of Table
A2A, not apply to Level A and Level B simulators because these
simulator levels are not authorized to perform this landing task.
The FAA did not adopt this change because both Level A and Level B
simulators are authorized to perform Rejected Takeoff Maneuvers. In
addition, Level B simulators are authorized to perform landings in
recurrent training and checking. Therefore, these tests are necessary
to determine the stopping capabilities of the FSTD.
The ATA, Boeing, CAE, and others expressed concern over how to read
the test requirements for Engine Acceleration and Engine Deceleration
(Table A2A, entries 1.f.1 and 1.f.2). The commenters recommended
various ways of publishing the established tolerances. CAE also
recommended defining the terms ``Ti'' and ``Tt.''
The published tolerances for these tests are consistent with
international standards documents. As proposed, Ti and
Tt were defined in the Tables as well as in the
Abbreviations list in Appendix F. For clarification, we have moved
these terms to the definitions section of Appendix F and added cross
references in the tables to Appendix F.
The ATA, Northwest, and others noted that the Short Period Dynamics
test in Table A2A, entry 2.c.10 erroneously did not to apply to Level A
simulators. They also noted that entry 2.d.7, Dutch Roll (yaw damper
off), erroneously applied to all levels of simulators when it should
apply only to Levels B, C, and D.
The FAA acknowledges that applicability to Level A simulators for
the Short Period test was inadvertently omitted and the Dutch Roll test
was inadvertently included, although the correct standards appear in
FAA standards documents and international standards documents. The FAA
has corrected these errors in this final rule.
CAE suggested the FAA clarify Table A2A, entry 2.d.8, Steady State
Sideslip, by stating that this test ``may be a series of snapshot test
results using at least two rudder positions, one of which should be
near maximum allowable rudder.''
The FAA agrees and has clarified the requirement where appropriate.
CAE and others suggested that the definition of the term ``snapshot''
be modified from ``a presentation of one or more variables at a given
instant of time'' to ``a presentation of one or more variables at a
given instant of time or from a time-average of a steady flight
condition.''
The FAA has determined that the suggested modification would create
confusion because of the subjective nature of the phrase ``steady
flight condition'' and has not adopted the suggestion.
The ATA and others suggested a change to Table A2A, entry 2.e.6,
All Engines Operating, Autopilot, Go-Around, to require a manual test
and, if applicable, an autopilot test.
The FAA currently requires a manual test when performing a one
engine inoperative go-around. The all engines operating, autopilot, go-
around test applies only when the airplane is authorized to use the
autopilot function during a go-around. Because both tests are currently
required, the FAA has not adopted the suggested changes.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others suggested that the tests
described in entries 2.e.8 and 2.e.9 of Table A2A, should be conducted
differently (i.e., with the nosewheel steering disconnected or
castering), unless the FAA's intent was to evaluate overall aircraft
response, in which case no change is necessary.
The intent of these tests is to evaluate the aircraft response.
Therefore, no change is necessary.
CAE and Boeing recommended substituting the term ``mass
properties'' with the term ``fuel slosh'' in Appendices A and C,
paragraph 8.h(2)(c) because mass properties are rarely, if ever, run in
an integrated manner as described.
The FAA does not agree that mass properties are not run in an
integrated manner. The FAA has chosen the term mass properties because
it is consistent with international standards. Therefore, the FAA has
not adopted the suggested change.
CAE and Boeing recommended deleting paragraph 9.b(3) in Appendices
A and C because a data provider should not have to demonstrate that
data gathered from an engineering simulation (in lieu of a flight test
source) has necessary qualities to qualify an FSTD.
The FAA did not intend that an engineering simulation be qualified,
or be capable of being qualified, as an FSTD. The data obtained from
the engineering simulation would be appropriate as a replacement for
flight test data when the data obtained from the engineering simulation
is programmed into an FSTD. Therefore, we have clarified the
information in paragraph 9.b(3) to state that in these cases, the data
provider should submit validation data from an audited engineering
simulator/simulation to supplement specific segments of the flight test
data.
CAE and Boeing requested that paragraph 11.a(1) not apply to Table
A2A, entries 1.f.1 and 1.f.2, objective tests for engine acceleration
and deceleration. Rather, they suggested applying 100% of flight test
tolerances to these objective tests. CAE also suggested when flight
test data for an alternate engine fit is unavailable, the objective
testing of engine acceleration and engine deceleration (Table A2A,
tests 1.f.1 and 1.f.2) should be exempt from the 20% tolerance for the
application of engineering simulator/simulation because the actual
tolerance would be less than the simulation iteration rate.
Applying 100% of flight test tolerances to the objective tests
results in these entries is not an acceptable routine procedure. Full
flight test tolerances are appropriate when comparing FSTD results to
airplane data, and 20% of those airplane tolerances are appropriate
when comparing FSTD results to flight engineering simulation data
because it is easier to match ``computer to computer'' data than to
match ``computer to airplane'' data. Any circumstance that does not fit
within these parameters would likely be acceptable under the ``best
fit'' data selection set forth in Appendix A, Attachment 2, paragraph
2.d. Therefore, the FAA has not adopted these changes.
The ATA and others stated that the Rudder Response test in Table
B2A, entry 2.b.6.b is confusing because it would not test the rudder
power in the yaw axis. They suggested modifying the tolerance column to
read `` 2[deg]/sec or 10% yaw rate, OR Roll
rate 2[deg]/sec, bank angle 3[deg].''
This test was originally required as a rudder test using roll rate
and bank angle for the parameters. However, the FAA agrees that this
test may be accomplished using either yaw rate or roll rate and bank
angle. Therefore, the FAA has added a note in the Information/Notes
column that this test
[[Page 26482]]
may be accomplished as a yaw response test.
The ATA, Northwest, CAE, and others suggested eliminating the
2 degree tolerance on bank angle above stick shaker or
initial buffet speeds in Table A2A, entry 2.c.8, Stall Characteristics,
to be consistent with international standards.
The FAA acknowledges that the 2 degree tolerance on
bank angle above stick shaker or initial buffet speeds is not included
in the international standards. However, requiring zero tolerance in
these instances would be very stringent without appreciable difference
in FSTD performance or handling characteristics. Accordingly, the FAA
has not eliminated the tolerance.
Boeing, United, and others recommended clarifying paragraph 11.b(5)
Validation Test Tolerances, and adding a new paragraph 11.b(6) allowing
errors greater than 20% if the simulator sponsor provides an adequate
explanation.
The FAA generally agrees with the suggestion and has modified
paragraph 11.b(5) to reflect this information. The FAA has determined
that adding a new paragraph 11.b(6) is not necessary.
One commenter, citing paragraph 17.a, ``Alternative Data Sources,
Procedures, and Instrumentation: Level A and Level B Simulators Only,''
questioned whether the alternative data collection sources, procedures,
and instrumentation listed in Table A2E were the only sources for data
collection that the FAA would allow.
Appendix A, paragraph 11, Initial (and Upgrade) Qualification
Requirements, requires objective data to be acquired through
traditional aircraft flight testing. It also allows for the use of
``another approved'' source. The FAA has included Table A2E to provide
alternative sources, procedures, or instrumentation acceptable to the
FAA that may be used to acquire the necessary objective data for Level
A or Level B simulators. At this time, the alternative data collection
sources, procedures, and instrumentation listed in Table A2E are the
only alternatives acceptable without prior approval by the NSPM.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others questioned the necessity of
having sounds of precipitation and rain removal devices for Level C
simulators but not requiring the corresponding visual effect.
The FAA recognizes the error in the proposed language and has made
the necessary changes. Level C simulators are required to be
subjectively tested for the sound, motion and visual effects of light,
medium and heavy precipitation near a thunderstorm and the effect of
rain removal devices.
The ATA and others requested that aircraft certified with auto-ice
detection coupled with auto-anti-ice or auto-de-ice capabilities be
exempt from the effects of airframe and engine icing tests listed in
Table A3F, Special Effects.
Because it is possible for flight crews to experience the effects
of airframe or engine icing if the auto-ice detection systems are
inoperative, the flight crews must be trained to recognize and respond
to icing situations. Therefore, the FAA has not adopted the
recommendation.
2. Visual Systems
The ATA, Northwest, Rockwell Collins, United, and several others
recognized that the definition of an FSTD Directive is ``a document
issued by the FAA to an FSTD sponsor requiring a modification to the
FSTD due to a safety-of-flight issue and amending the qualification
basis for the FSTD.'' These commenters asserted that the FAA has not
provided any safety analysis to support the issuance of FSTD Directive
1. Further, these commenters asked how the FAA determines what
constitutes a safety issue that would warrant the issuance of an FSTD
Directive. Some commenters asserted that updating airport modeling is a
complicated problem because of the difficulty in removing airport
models from the instructor operating station (IOS) in some FSTDs,
particularly in those FSTDs not owned or controlled by the sponsor. In
addition, some commenters noted the cost of updating an existing
airport model and suggested that the FAA continue to allow custom
airport models meeting individual training requirements to be used
without modification. Further, the commenters requested the FAA extend
the timeframe for updating airport models to match any modification to
the actual airport.
As proposed, FSTD Directive 1 requires each certificate holder to
ensure that each airport model used for training, testing or checking,
except those airport models used to qualify the simulator at the
designated level, meets the requirements of a Class II or Class III
airport model. The FAA acknowledges that FSTD Directives may be issued
only for safety-of-flight purposes. These determinations will be made
on a case-by-case basis. The FAA has determined that updating airport
modeling is a safety-of-flight concern because pilots have landed
airplanes on wrong runways, landed on taxiways, landed at the wrong
airport, unknowingly taxied across active runways, and taken off from
the wrong runway. Many FSTD users have expressed concern regarding the
accuracy of these models with respect to real world airports. Training,
testing, or checking in an FSTD with incomplete or inaccurate airport
models representing real world airports can contribute to incomplete
planning or poor decision making by pilots if they subsequently operate
into or out of that real world airport. While these potentially
disastrous occurrences happen infrequently, inaccurate airport modeling
is a safety-of-flight issue that warrants the issuance of this FSTD
Directive.
The proposed FSTD Directive is designed to address qualified FSTDs
that contain airport models that were not evaluated. The FSTD Directive
ensures that each model used in an FSTD for training, testing, or
checking activities meets the acceptable minimum standards. Although
the FAA is responsible for ensuring that these standards are met, the
FSTD sponsor is responsible for maintaining the FSTD, and each
certificate holder using the FSTD is responsible for ensuring that all
of the FSTD components are in compliance with these standards and
report any deficiencies.
Upon review of the comments, however, we have clarified the
language of the FSTD Directive. The FSTD Directive still requires each
certificate holder to ensure that, by May 30, 2009, except for the
airport model(s) used to qualify the FSTD at the designated level, each
airport model used by the certificate holder's instructors or
evaluators for training, testing, or checking under 14 CFR chapter I in
an FFS, meets the definition of a Class II, or Class III airport model
as defined in part 60, Appendix F. We originally proposed to require
removal of all airport models that did not meet the standards of a
Class II or Class III model. In light of comments regarding the expense
of such removal and issues regarding the sponsorship and leasing of
FSTDs, FSTD Directive 1 now requires only the airport models used for
training, testing or checking to meet the appropriate requirements; it
does not require removal of other airport models. Additionally, we have
revised the definition of a generic airport model in Appendix F to
clearly describe a Class III airport model that combines correct
navigation aids for a real world airport with an airport model that
does not depict that real world airport. Use of such an airport model
may require some limitations on that use. The clarified language in the
FSTD Directive and the
[[Page 26483]]
revised definitions may mitigate the actual cost of updating airport
models. In addition, the FAA recognizes that it takes time to design,
construct, and implement changes to computer programming. The FAA has
decided to modify the time requirements in paragraph 1(f) of Attachment
3, Appendix A, and clarify the process for requesting an extension for
the update in paragraph 1(g) of Attachment 3, Appendix A.
Further, the ATA and others suggested adding a statement in the
Information/Notes column of Table B1A regarding visual systems that
FSTD Directive 1 does not apply to Level A standards for an FTD visual
system.
If a visual system installed in any level of FTD is not being used
to acquire additional training credits, FSTD Directive 1 does not
apply. However, if the visual system is being used to acquire training
credits, the visual system must meet the requirements of at least a
Level A FFS visual system. In these circumstances, FSTD Directive 1
could affect the airport models used in that system. Therefore, the FAA
has not added the suggested statement.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others noted that the terms visual
scenes, visual models, and airport models, appear to be used
interchangeably in the NPRM.
The FAA has adopted the term ``airport model'' instead of the terms
``visual scene''or ``visual model''throughout this final rule. We also
have deleted the definition of ``visual model'' from Appendix F and
changed the definition of ``visual database'' to ``a display that may
include one or more airport models'' for consistency. Since there are
three classes of airport models, we clarified the differences between
Class I, Class II, and Class III in the definition of airport model.
ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others questioned the need for 16 moving
models as well as the training tasks that would be able to be met by
having these moving models. The commenters also requested clarification
regarding what constitutes gate clutter.
The primary goal of the NPRM was to harmonize with international
standards. The intent of the 16 moving objects requirement, which is an
international standard, is to enhance the ``realism''of the displayed
visual scene. The FAA has added a definition of gate clutter in
Appendix F, as described in entry 2.f in Table A3B.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others stated that the Class II
airport model requirements are excessive, especially for areas other
than the ``in-use'' runway itself and noted that there are no model
content requirements for ``generic airport models.''
The Class II airport model requirements mirror the long-standing
guidance in AC 120-40B, Airplane Simulator Qualification, Appendix 3,
and are consistent with international standards. The FAA has determined
that providing specific model content requirements for ``generic
airport models'' would restrict unnecessarily the capability and
flexibility that currently exists. Accordingly, the FAA has not made
any changes to the Class II airport model requirements or created any
specific requirements for ``generic airport models.''
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, CAE, and others questioned whether
``ambient lighting'' in Daylight Visual Scenes is required.
Ambient lighting is not required in daylight visual scenes because
of its distorting effects on the visual scene and inside the flight
deck. The FAA has removed the requirement for ambient flight deck
lighting where appropriate.
The ATA and others requested that the FAA clarify the Surface
Movement Guidance and Control System (SMGCS) as referenced in Table
A3B, entry 2.j.
Entry 2.j requires that a low visibility taxi route must be
demonstrated for qualification of a Level D simulator. A low visibility
taxi route could be satisfied, according to the Table A3B, by a
depiction of one of the following means: an SMGCS taxi route, a follow-
me truck, or low visibility daylight taxi lights. For further
information on SMGCS, see AC 120-57A (December 19, 1996).
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others questioned the language in
the preamble of the NPRM describing the visual system proposal as
requiring a ``field of view and system capacity requirements'' * * *
increased by 20 percent over the present requirement.'' The commenters
asserted that the proposed surfaces and light point requirements are
``considerably in excess of a 20% increase.''
The 20% increase, as described in the NPRM preamble, should have
applied only to the field-of-view requirements. However, the actual
requirements stated in the proposed rule language for field-of-view and
system capacity for generating surface and light points are consistent
with current international standards. Further, the metrics simulator
manufacturers are currently using to construct their equipment
correspond to the proposed system capacity for generating surface and
light points. Therefore, no changes to the rule language are necessary.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others objected to the larger field-
of-view requirements for FSTDs previously built but not evaluated by
the FAA for qualification, and for FSTDs previously evaluated and
qualified, but returning to service after a 2-year inactive interval.
The concern is that these FSTDs would be required to meet the new
field-of-view requirements.
The first time an FSTD is evaluated by the FAA for qualification,
the FSTD is evaluated in accordance with the set of standards current
at that time. An FSTD placed into an inactive status for 2 or more
years will not necessarily be evaluated under any new criteria in
effect at the time of re-entry into service. The NSPM, however,
considers a full range of factors before deciding whether to require an
FSTD coming out of an inactive period to be evaluated in accordance
with its original qualification basis or in accordance with the set of
standards current at that time.
CAE and others recommended modifying in Table A1A, entry 6.p, to
require the visual system be free from apparent and distracting
quantization, instead of only apparent quantization.
Eliminating the slightest traces of quantization cannot be
technically accomplished. However, because distracting quantization can
be minimized to such a level that it does not affect the performance of
the visual system, the FAA has made this change.
CAE, ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others questioned why realistic
color and directionality of all airport lighting is not a requirement
for Level A, Level B, and Level C simulators in addition to Level D
simulators.
As proposed, the airport lighting requirements for Level A and B
simulators are consistent with international standards. Therefore, the
FAA has not made the requested change.
The ATA, Northwest, and others suggested including a test in Table
A2A, entry 4.b.3, for Level C simulators to evaluate visual systems
with 150[deg] horizontal and 30[deg] vertical field-of-view or a
monitor-based system.
The primary goal of the NPRM was to harmonize with international
standards. The current international standard, as reflected in the
NPRM, for Level C simulators is 180[deg] horizontal by 40[deg] vertical
field-of-view. Therefore, the FAA has not adopted the change.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others stated that the test in Table
A2A, entry 4.f, Surface Resolution, does not reflect current practice
for runway markings. Commenters recommended that this test mirror the
current practice
[[Page 26484]]
and international standards that runway stripes and spaces be 5.75 feet
wide.
The FAA has modified this language where appropriate to reflect
current practice and international standards.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, CAE, and others questioned why the
tolerances allowed in entry 4.i, Visual Ground Segment (VGS), of Table
A2A are different from the current international standards. They also
suggested that the Qualification Test Guide (QTG) contain calculations
to compare the altitude used against the altitude specified when
performing this test and questioned whether the test must be performed
manually. They also requested deleting or correcting the conversion of
feet to meters.
The international standards prescribe the application of the VGS
tolerance to the far end of the VGS with no tolerance provided at the
near end of the VGS. To ensure harmonization, the FAA has made the
appropriate changes to the application of this VGS tolerance. The
requirements for the QTG contain provisions regarding the calculation
of altitude references. The FAA has stated that the altitude
calculations are computed with the aircraft at 100 ft (30 m) above the
runway touchdown zone and centered on the Instrument Landing System
(ILS) electronic glide slope. The typical reference for modern turbojet
aircraft operations for height above touchdown is the height of the
main landing gear above that touchdown zone reference plane, with the
aircraft at a specified weight and landing configuration. To clarify
these calculations, the FAA has modified the Flight Conditions column
for entry 4.i of Table A2A to reflect this information. The distances
expressed in metric units are not direct conversions to U.S. customary
units, nor were they intended to be. Rather, these are the appropriate
standards depending on which system is being used. Therefore, the FAA
has not removed the metric references.
The ATA and others requested clarification regarding the term ``in-
use runway'' in Tables A3B and A3C. The commenters stated that using
the general term ``in-use runway'' would require modeling all taxiways
rather than the primary one used, which may overload the visual system
and negatively impact training.
Each ``in-use'' runway is a single, one-direction runway, used for
takeoffs and landings, that has the required surface lighting and
markings. New visual systems are capable of generating substantially
more detail than required by this final rule. However, because of the
concern raised regarding associated taxiways, the FAA has modified the
language in Appendices A, C, and D regarding airport model content to
require the use of only the primary taxi route from parking to the end
of the runway instead of requiring the modeling of all potential taxi
routes.
One commenter requested the FAA provide a definition of the term
``dynamic response programming,'' to clarify the requirements in Table
A1A, entry 6.h. CAE and others questioned the use of the terms
``correlate with integrated airplane systems, where fitted,'' and
``dynamic response programming,'' as they are used in Tables A3B and
A1A. Commenters also noted that Table A3B, entry 6.d erroneously
applied the requirements for ``correlate with integrated airplane
systems'' to all levels of simulators rather than just Levels C and D.
The term ``dynamic response'' is used in its typical engineering
context. As used in Tables A1A (entry 6.h) and C1A (entry 6.i)
``dynamic response programming'' requires the visual system display to
respond with the continuous movement of the simulated aircraft. We have
clarified the language in Tables A3b (entry 6.d), C3b (entry 6.d) and
D3B (entry 5.d) by removing the phrase ``where fitted.'' The
requirement that the visual scene correlate with the integrated
aircraft systems is to ensure that all installed integrated aircraft
systems correctly respond to what appears in the visual scene. This
visual correspondence requirement applies to only Level C and D
simulators and the FAA has corrected this error in Tables A3B and C3B.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others suggested there should be no
difference between entries 6.e and 8.g in Table A3B.
These two entries are designed to test separate conditions. Entry
6.e tests the external lights to ensure correlation with the airplane
and associated equipment while entry 8.g tests the environmental
effects of the external lights in the visual system. Because of the
separate, distinct purposes of these entries, they should not be the
same, and the FAA has not adopted the recommendation.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others objected to the inclusion of
several visual, sound, or motion systems features (e.g., the effect of
rain removal devices; sound of light, medium, and heavy precipitation;
and nosewheel scuffing) in the airport model presentations because they
are not airport model functions.
These features are a function of the visual, sound, or motion
systems. These features must be available and operate correctly in
conjunction with the airport models presented during training, testing,
or checking activities. These features are meaningful only when they
are presented as part of the airport model. Therefore, the FAA has not
removed these features from the airport model requirements.
The ATA, Northwest, Rockwell Collins, and others expressed concern
that the discussion of entry 10 in Table A3B regarding the combination
of two airport models to achieve two ``in-use'' runways at one airport,
may impede control of the radio aids and terrain elevation and create
distracting effects in the visual scene display.
The discussion in entry 10 of Table A3B is an authorization, not a
requirement. If an FSTD has limitations such that this combination
would impede control or create distracting effects, this particular
authorization is not applicable. The FAA has added clarifying language
in entry 10 to address this concern.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others stated the requirement that
``slopes in runways, taxiways, and ramp areas must not cause
distracting or unrealistic effects'' in entry 4.b in Table A3C implies
that Level A and Level B simulators are required to have sloping
terrain modeling, making the Class II airport models more stringent
than Class I airport models.
Level A and B simulators are not required to have sloping terrain
modeling. This provision, however, sets forth the requirements for such
modeling if a sponsor elects to incorporate sloping terrain modeling in
the FSTD. The FAA has clarified this requirement by adding the
qualifier ``if depicted in the visual scene,'' in the appropriate
tables in Appendices A, C, and D.
CAE and others requested the FAA establish a list of individuals or
corporations who work as visual modelers and can provide detailed
information about airports without creating national security concerns.
Anyone with a legitimate need for the acquisition of detailed
airport information for accurate modeling of any U.S. airport for
simulation modeling purposes should contact the NSPM for assistance.
3. Motion or Vibration Requirements
Rockwell Collins, CAE, the ATA, and others stated that Motion
Cueing Performance Signature tests can provide an objective means of
determining loss in motion system performance. The commenters were
concerned that if these tests were conducted only during the Initial
Qualification Evaluation, sponsors would not have objective
[[Page 26485]]
information available to determine the continuing status of the motion
system.
The proposal required the results of these tests to be included in
the MQTG. Because sponsors are required to run the complete quarterly
MQTG inspections, these tests are not intended to be one-time-only
tests. The sponsor and NSPM regularly review these tests. The FAA
agrees that the statement ``this test is not required as part of
continuing qualification evaluations'' is misleading and has deleted
this statement where appropriate.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others questioned whether Level B
simulators must be subjectively tested for nosewheel scuffing motion
effects when this level of simulator was not authorized for the taxi
task.
Level B simulators are authorized for Rejected Takeoff Maneuvers.
At higher speeds, the movement of the nosewheel steering mechanism can
be more sensitive and may cause the nosewheel to be turned beyond
smooth tracking angles, resulting in nosewheel scuffing during Rejected
Takeoff Maneuvers. Therefore, the FAA has determined that subjective
testing for nosewheel scuffing motion effects is necessary and did not
make any change.
4. Sound Requirements
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others suggested that in Table A2A,
entry 5, Sound Requirements, the tests listed should have a defined
frequency spectrum within which the tests should be conducted similar
to that set forth in international standards.
Because the text in the proposal describes these processes and
similar statements appear in international standards, the FAA has added
language similar to the international standards to the sound test
requirements of entry 5, Table A2A.
The ATA, Rockwell Collins, and others suggested requiring all
levels of FTDs to be able to represent all the flight deck aural
warning sounds and sounds from pilot actions instead of limiting this
standard to level 6 FTDs, as it currently appears in entry 7.a of Table
B1A.
A Level 6 FTD is the only level of FTD that is required to have all
aircraft systems installed and operational. This requirement has been
in effect for over 16 years and is consistent with current
international standards. The suggested requirement is also outside the
scope of this rulemaking. Accordingly, the FAA has not adopted the
change.
CAE and others suggested entry 7.c, Accurate Simulation of Sounds,
in Table A1A, address abnormal operations in addition to the sound of
normal operations and the sound of a crash.
The current international standards contain a requirement for
sounds addressing abnormal operations, which include the sound of a
crash, and normal operations. To harmonize with international standards
the FAA has made the change.
D. Helicopters
CAE and others noted that an SOC is not necessary for entries 1.a,
1.b, and 2.a in Table C1A. Thales also suggested that the language in
entry 2.a be modified to reflect helicopter operations.
The FAA has removed the SOC requirement in entries 1.a and 1.b
because it is not necessary. The SOC for entry 2.a is necessary because
it describes a flight dynamics model that must account for combinations
of drag and thrust normally encountered in flight. However, the FAA has
modified the language in entry 2.a to better reflect helicopter
operations.
Thales and others stated that the motion onset requirements in
Table C1A, entry 2.e, are new requirements for helicopter simulation.
The FAA included the requirements in this entry in the October 30,
2006, final rule (71 FR 63426), and again in the NPRM for this rule.
These requirements codify existing practice (e.g., AC 120-63,
Helicopter Simulator Qualification).
CAE and others suggested that the Information/Notes column in Table
C1A, entry 2.f, include ``roll'' as well as ``pitch,'' ``side
loading,'' and ``directional control characteristics,'' when simulating
brake and tire failure dynamics.
The FAA has clarified the Information/Notes column by adding the
phrase ``in the appropriate axes,'' which includes roll, pitch, yaw,
heave, sway (side loading), and surge.
Thales, CAE, and others suggested that the requirements in Table
C1A, entry 2.g.1, regarding ground effect should apply to Level B
simulators as it appears in table C1A, entry 2.c.1.
The FAA has separated these two requirements because helicopter
simulator Levels B, C, and D may be required to perform running
takeoffs and running landings, as described in entry 2.c.1. However,
only Level C and D simulators are required to perform takeoffs or
landings to or from a hover, as noted in entry 2.g, thus requiring
separate table entries. Accordingly, the FAA has not adopted the
recommendation.
CAE and others requested clarification regarding the kinds of
aircraft system variables and environmental conditions as listed in
Table C1A, entry 4, that must be used in simulation. Commenters
suggested removing the reference to ``wind speed,'' including other
environmental controls, and including ``water spray'' when hovering
over water.
There is no specific list of system variables that must be
available in a helicopter simulator. The requirement is that the
instructor or evaluator be able to control all the system variables and
insert all abnormal or emergency conditions into the simulated
helicopter systems as described in the sponsor's FAA-approved training
program, or as described in the relevant FSTD operating manual. The FAA
has reviewed the entries for environmental controls and has included
additional examples of environmental conditions that may be available
in the FSTD. We also have included ``water vapor'' as an example of
what may be expected to be re-circulated when hovering above the
surface, as suggested by the commenters.
CAE, Thales, and others suggested including vortex ring and high-
speed rotor vibrations for motion effects programming requirements in
Table C1A, entry 5.e. Commenters also suggested requiring Level B and C
simulators to demonstrate air turbulence models.
As proposed, entry 5.e included requirements for buffet due to
settling with power and rotor vibrations. As the commenters noted,
these terms are better expressed as buffet due to vortex ring, and
high-speed rotor vibrations. The FAA has clarified the requirements as
requested. The FAA also has clarified the statement in the Information/
Notes column regarding the use of air turbulence models. Further
changes regarding air turbulence modeling are beyond the scope of the
NPRM.
Thales and others recommended adjusting surface resolution from the
currently proposed three (3) arc-minutes to two (2) arc-minutes in
Table C1A, entry 6.i.(4). Additionally, Thales recommended the FAA add
``helipad'' or ``heliport'' lighting effects specific to helicopter
operations for subjective testing.
As noted by the commenter, the two (2) arc-minutes requirement is
the current international standard. Therefore, the FAA has made the
recommended change. However, there are specific requirements for both
airport and helicopter landing area models for training, testing, and
checking purposes in attachment 3, and the FAA has not included the
``helipad'' or ``heliport'' lighting effects in Table C1A.
[[Page 26486]]
CAE, Thales, and others suggested that the tolerance of 3 knots, in Table C2A, entry 1.c, Takeoff, and entry 1.j,
Landing, be applied to either airspeed or ground speed, because data
collected at airspeeds below 30-40 knots are often unreliable. Thales
suggested that for entries 1.c.2 and 1.c.3, the specific type of
takeoff (Category A, Performance, Confined area, etc,) be recorded so
proper comparisons can be made.
The FAA recognizes the difficulties in applying tolerances to
airspeeds when the airspeed value itself may not be accurate and has
added a general authorization for Takeoff tests and Landing tests.
Also, the FAA has added a note in the Information/Notes column to
address the differing types of takeoff profiles used for each of these
tests.
CAE and others stated that in helicopter simulation, flight test
data containing all the required parameters for a complete power-off
landing is not always available. CAE recommended modifying the language
in Tables C2A and D2A, entry 1.j.4, Autorotational Landing, to state
that in those cases where data are not available, and other qualified
flight test personnel are not available to acquire this data, the
sponsor must coordinate with the NSPM to determine if it is appropriate
to accept alternative testing means.
The FAA agrees that, in certain circumstances, the sponsor must
coordinate with the NSPM to determine if it is appropriate to accept an
alternative testing means. The FAA has made the appropriate changes.
CAE and others stated that Table C2A, entry 1.h.2, Autorotation
Performance, requires data be recorded for speeds from 50 knots, 5 knots, through at least maximum glide distance airspeed.
However, the maximum allowable autorotation airspeed is often slower
than the maximum glide distance airspeed, which would prevent accurate
data for autorotation entry.
The FAA has modified the test details to include maximum allowable
autorotation airspeed.
CAE and others suggested reducing the tolerance for control
displacement to 0.10 inches in Table C2A, entry 2.a.6,
Control System Freeplay. The commenters also suggested harmonizing the
tolerance requirements for FTDs in Table D2A, entry 2.a.6.
The FAA agrees and has made the appropriate changes, which reflect
current international standards.
CAE and others suggested that the proposed 10%
tolerances on pitch and airspeed for non-periodic responses, in Table
C2A, entry 2.c.3.a, Dynamic Stability, Long Term Response, be relaxed
because the proposal is too restrictive. They noted non-periodic
Augmentation-On responses generally exhibit less than 5 degrees peak
pitch attitude change from trim. Further, commenters recommended adding
a statement to the Information/Notes column to clarify the relationship
between non-periodic responses and flight-test data. The rationale for
these recommendations is to avoid requirements that are unduly
restrictive with divergent results, while ensuring that the non-
periodic responses are accurately reproduced.
The FAA agrees with the commenter's suggestions and rationale and
has made the appropriate changes in Table C2A for FFSs and in Table D2A
for FTDs.
CAE and others suggested relating the proposed tolerances in Table
C2A, entry 2.d.3.a, Dynamic Lateral and Directional Stability, Lateral-
Directional Oscillations test. The commenters stated that the non-
periodic responses may be divergent, weakly convergent, or deadbeat.
The commenters stated that the proposed tolerances may be too
restrictive for deadbeat responses. Additionally, the commenters stated
that oscillatory responses that satisfy the period and damping ratio
tolerances would not necessarily meet the proposed time history
tolerances because of the non-periodic nature of the response. The
rationale for these recommendations is to avoid requirements that are
unduly restrictive with divergent results while ensuring that the non-
periodic responses are reproduced with sufficient accuracy.
The FAA agrees with the commenters' suggestions and rationale and
has made the appropriate changes in Table C2A for FFSs and in Table D2A
for FTDs.
Thales, CAE, and others were concerned that there are no tolerances
specified for the tests listed in Table C2A, entry 3.a, Frequency
Response, 3.b, Leg Balance, and 3.c, Turn Around Check.
Because of the way the tests are used, the FAA has determined it is
appropriate that these specific tests do not have a specified tolerance
other than the performance as established by the FSTD manufacturer in
coordination with the sponsor. These tests are conducted during the
initial evaluation and made part of the MQTG. While the sponsor is not
required to run these tests again during continuing qualification
evaluations, the test results are available if a question arises about
the performance of the motion system hardware or the integrity of the
motion set-up at any time subsequent to the initial qualification
evaluation. The test results recorded duri